Professional Documents
Culture Documents
v'^
I
i '
K
4^
^^Jr^:^^ ^/r
^<l>' .
^^^r^'^i^^
7r
l-.
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
University of Toronto
http://www.archive.org/details/handbooktogramOOgree
HANDBOOK
TO THE
THE GRAMMAR
OF
BY
In attempting to reply, we note that the Greek of Scripture is, for most
purposes, a language complete in itself. Its forms and rules are definite,
its usages in general precise. Its peculiarities, though best approached from
the classic side, may be reached by a shorter way, and be almost as well
comprehended.
Many circumstances, again, facilitate the special study of the New
Testament tongue. The language of orators and philosophers had descended
to men of simpler mind and less artificial speech. Comparing the Sacred
Volume with Greek literature generally, we find a smaller vocabulary, fewer
grammatical forms, less intricate etymological rules, with scantier lists of
VI PREFACE.
exceptions, and a far less elaborate syntax ; wliile tlie student has tlie
advantage of being confined for the time to one limited, but intensely
interesting, field.
Greek for English students, that is, for those who have not studied the
classical languages. It may also be of service to those who have made
some progress in classical studies, but who wish to concentrate their chief
English and German, from which valuable aid has been derived, would
be unnecessary. Winer's comprehensive work (translated into English, with
large and valuable additions, by the Rev. Dr. Moulton, of Cambridge) has
of course been consulted throughout. Scarcely less useful have been the
researches and discussions of the late Dr. Donaldson. The New Testament
Grammars of the Rev. W. Webster, and of the Rev. T. S. Green, have
afforded some very valuable hints. On Greek Testament Lexicography,
it will suffice to name the Clavis Xovi Testcnnenti by Dr. C. L. W. Grimm,
now translated into English, with additions, by Dr. J. H. Thayer ; also
Cremer's New Testament Lexicon, translated by the Rev. W. Urwick, M.A.
The first Edition of the work was carefully revised in MS. by the Rev.
Dr. Jacob,late Head Master of Christ's Hospital, author of the Bromsyruve
Greek Grammar, and other classical works and, in the proof sheets, by the
;
The following work so far differs from other manuals of the Greek
language, both in its method and in the persons for whom it is
.G5
Vlll INTRODUCTION.
points of importance by tliick type, that the eye may aid the
mind.
In the former editions the Greek Testament quotations were
made in general from the Eeceived Text ; the various readings
SAMUEL G. GREEN.
. ——
PART I.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECT. PAGE
THE ALPHABET. Names, forms, and numeral values of the
I.
2.
letters ...
Notes on the Alphabet ...... 1
2
3. The Vowels : (a) their pronunciation, long and short 2
(6) The diphthongs (regularly long) 2
" breathings " of initial vowels
(c) The
{d) The
(e) The
"breathings" of initial p
lengthening of vowels in inflection
.... . 3
3
3
( /)
The contraction of vowels. Table.
Exercise
{g) Diaeresis
(Ji)
........
1. Vowel
Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding
Contractions
it
. 4
4
The Consonants
Crasis
EKercise
Consonants that may be final
2. On
....
Consecutive syllables not to begin with an aspirate
SECT. PAGE
6. THE ACCENTS 7
(a)
(6)
Use of the accents
The different accents ....
....
7
7
(c) Rules of accentuation
{d, e) Enclitics and Proclitics .... 8
8
2.
3.
Acts
Rom.
ii.
iv.
1-13
1-16
Matt. V. 1-16, in
......
Roman characters
10
11
12
PART II.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER L— INTRODUCTION.
9.
10.
The " Parts
THE ROOT
of Speech "
and
..,.».
STEM.... 14
11
•
12, 13.
General significance of the Cases
The Definite Article and
....
Indefinite
.
Pronoun .
15
15
15
Types of Substantive and Adjective Declension 16
14. Characteristics of all Declensions of Nouns 16
(a) Neuter Nominatives and Accusatives alike 16
Their plural termination always a. 16
{b) The Dative Singular in t (" iota subscript") 16
(c) The Genitive Plural in wv 16
(d) Masculine like the Neuter in Genitive and Dative 16
15. Rules for determining the Gender of Nouns 17
(a) Masculine : names of males, rivers, winds 17
(6) Feminine
nouns ........•••
: names of females, trees, countries, islands, and abstract
17
'
ETYMOLOGY. XV
SECT. PAGE
15. (c) Keuter : diminutives, indeclinables, and the verbal noun (infinitive) 17
(Note on common and epiccene words)
DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE
16.
Three leading
Illustrations
tj'pes
:
.......
....
ttvKt}, dvOputiros, ttols
(parLsyllabic)
(imparisyllabic)
...
.
Nouns
20.
21.
Exercise 3. of the First
Irregular forms of the First Declen.sion
The Second Declension (O)
.... Declension
22.
23-
Masculine (X(i7os) and Feminine {bdo^) Paradigms, and Remarks
.....
.....
29. Paradigms of Third Declension
1. 'Apa\p, K-qpv^, tx^f^J, TToXts .....
....
2.
3.
4.
TTOt/iTjJ',
.......
\i(j}v,
.........
/SacriXct^s, /3oCs
yevos
at'Swj, iraT-qp, dvrip
5. Referred to § 27 .
30.
Exercise 5.
Rules for the Nominative
Nouns
......
......
of the Third Declension
1.
2.
5added to the stem
The stem lengthened ......
....
3.
4.
Digammated stems
Neuter stems in es- (os)
5. Stem unchanged
......
(eu-, av-, ov-)
.......
31. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension
Substantives of Variable Declension
(a) Interchanges between the second and third
Exercise
Hebrew indeclinables
6.
......
Promiscuous List of Nouns .
XVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
37.
Skconi) Fokm
General Remarks
Paradigms of
......
....
o^vs, ttSj, iKLov
,
,
36
36
36
38. Participles of this class (declension of eo-rcus) . , 37
39. Adjectives of double form : (leyas, iroXvs 38
40.
41.
Thiki)
......
Fokm
General Remarks
Paradigms of dXT/^Tjs, a(Jo<ppwv
39
39
39
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
42. ......
First Method
Comparison of Triaros, dXrjdrjs, ao(p6s, v^os
40
40
40
43. Second Method 41
Comparison of raxos, alaxpos, KaXos, p-cyas . 41
44. Declension of comparatives in -iwv {fiei^uu) 41
45. Irregular and alternative comparisons . 42
dyados, kukos, /iLKpds, ttoXus 42
46. Defective Comparatives and Superlatives 42
47. Emthattc Methods of Comparison . 42
Exercise 7. Adjectives for Practice 43
NUMERALS
48. The Cakdixal Numbeiis
(a) Signs of numeration
....
....
44
44
44
{b) Disused letters as numeral signs . 44
(c) Composite numerical expressions = 44
49.
50.
Declension of the cardinal numbers
eh, 8vo, rpeh, ricffapes
The Ordinal Lumbers
....
....
44
44
45
Table of Cardinals and Ordinals, and Remark
51.
52. Distkibitive Numbeks .... 45
47
translation ......
Exercise 8. Numbers Numerical symbols, and : phrases for
47
SKCT. PAQE
5",. 2. Reflexive 49
First person, ifxain-ov ; second, ffeavroC ,
50
Third, eain-oO (avrov) . '
. 50
56. 3. Adjective-personal (possessive) , 50
(a) 6/^65, rifiirepos, ffds, v/i^epos 50
{b, c) Genitive of the })ersonal pronouns as possessives 50
57. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 51
Framed upon the model of the Article . 51
(a, b, c, d) 65e, outos, iKeTvos, 6 avros . 51
(e) TOLOvTos, Tcxrovros, roaovroi. tvXlkoOtos 52
58. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 52
(a, b) 6s, 77,
6'
;
{c, d) oaris, bairep, oaye 52
(e) Relatives of quality, e]uantitv. number, degree 53
59. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 53
(a) The simple Interrogative, tIs ; ri ;
53
{b) Correlatives of quality, quantity, number, degi'ee 53
(c) Direct interrogatives in indirect construction 53
(d) Interrogatives properlv indirect . 53
60. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS . 54
(a, b) The ordinary Indefinite, tls, and negative compound 54
(c) The old Indefinite, 6 Selua 54
61. DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS 54
(a) &\\os, {b) erepos, {c) aW-rjXcjv, [dj haaTOS 54
62. Table of Correlative Pronouns . 54
SECT. PACE
65. Seven actual Tenses (in common use, six) 57
" Principal " and " Historical " Tenses 57
66.
67.
Arrangement of Tenses. Tenses of Xuw
NUMBERS
The Two CoxjuaATioxs
and PERSONS .... 57
57
58
Remark on the Greek and English typical forms 58
68. —
The Verbal Stem How ascertained affixes and : suffixes 58
69. Augment and Reduplication" 58
{a) Augment in the historical tenses, indicative 58
1. The syllabic augment —
with initial consonants. 58
2. The temporal augment —
with initial vowels 58
{h) Reduplication in the perfect tenses throughout . 58
An initial consonant repeated, ^^ith e . 59
An initial vowel lengthened (like temporal augment) 59
(c)Augment and reduplication in compound verbs 59
70. Inflectional Tekminations 59
{a) Denoting voice, mood, number, and person
tense, 59
71-
(6)
Normal forms
Tense-characteristics (consonant)
.......
Personal endings originally fragments of pronouns
....
. 59
59
60
Active Future and First Aorist, <r 60
,, Perfect and Pluperfect, k . . . . . 60
Passive Future and First Aorist, 6 . 60
72. Modal Vowels 60
—
73-
Subjunctive lengthened indicative vowels
—
Optative diphthongal forms
Verbal Adjectives
..... . 60
60
61
74- Paradigm of the First Conjugation
KKXTevu}. Principal parts ......
......
: pure uncontracted 61
61
75.
Conjugation throughout
All other forms variations of this type .... 62
70
76.
Exercise 9. On
.....
pure, uncontracted
.......
Verbs of the pure uncontracted class
Possible stem-endings
Verbs 70
70
71
Pure, mute, and liquid verbs .
•
. 71
78. Pure Verbs.
{a)
{h)
Special Rules
The stem-vowels
Contraction with a,
......
e, or
71
71
71
(c) Contraction confined to Present and Imj^erfect Tenses 71
{d) Peculiarities of contraction. Comjiare § 3, / 71
7Q-
80. Note on remaining Tenses .....
Paradigms of rt/idw, 0tX^a>, 8r]\6o}, Present and Imperfect 72
75
81.
82.
Exercise 10. On pure, contracted
Mute Verbs. Special Rules
Stem unaffected by a following vowel
......
....
Verbs 75
75
76
.
ETYMOLOGY. XIX
SECT. PAGE
^3- a) Tense -characteristics (§ 71) and terminations beginning with I
SECT. PAGE
Notes on the Tenses. [TJiese Sections, to the of § 99, dealing
close
8.
7. Inchoative forms in
Reduplicated stems
<jk-
....or uji: 93
94
II. The Imperfect
Peculiarities
Double
p-.
of Augment ....
Double augment. Attic augment in 17
94
94
94
95- The Second Aorist, Active and Middle . 94
Contains tlie simple verbal stem .
94
(Reduplicated Second Aorist. Change of short stem-v owel) 94
The Vowel Aorist, as of Second Conjugation 94
96. The Future, Active and Middle 95
(a) Lengthening or otherwise of pure stems . 95
{h) The Attic Future of Verbs in t5- (ifw) 95
(c) The digammated future of verbs in e/- (^w) 96
{d) Future in middle form, with active meaning 96
97. The First Aorist, Active and ]\Iiddle . 96
{a) Connection of Aorist vnth Future stem 96
{h)
(1) In pure and mute
Peculiarities of
Note on Accentuation
(2) in liquid verbs
Augment
;
....
....
96
97
97
98. The Aorists and Futures Passive 98
(a) Modified like the Perfect Passive 98
{h) Vowel stem-endings, lengthened, shortened, or with 98
(c) Transposition of vowel and liquid in short roots 98
{d) Change of a weak vowel into a . . . 98
(c) First and Second Tenses seldom in the same verb 98
100.
(e)
....
The Future Perfect passive (or mid.)
ETYMOLOGY. XXI
SECT. PAGE
lOO.
lOI.
Active and Passive, as determined by the Aorist
IMPERSONAL VERBS
Their use . . . .
....
.
. 100
101
101
List and usual forms of the chief Impersonals 101
102. DEFECTIVE VERBS 101
Originally caused by redundancy 101
103. Principal Defective Verbs and their Paradigms 102
alpeo), epxoytiai, iadiu), opdu), rp^x^i ^^P^^ dirov 102
Exercise 13. On the Defective Verbs . 104
104. THE SECOND CONJUGATION, or Verbs in -iii 104
The chief peculiarity of these Verbs 104
105.
Future, First Aorist, and Perfect like Verbs in -w
Modifications of the Verbal Stem .... 104
105
(a)
{h)
Vowel of
Reduplication prefixed
a pure stem lengthened
..... . 105
105
(c) The syllable
Two
—
formed
classes thus
-I'l;- [-vvv-) affixed
.... 105
105
106. First Class Paradigms in two divisioris
First Division regular forms— .... 105
105
107.
108.
Paradigms of laTrj/jiL, ridri/xi,
Remarks on the Paradigms
1. First Aorist Active, with
....
didio/xt. .
4.
List of
Active Aorist of
The verb
Verbs in
(TTrjKd}
this division
.....
'iarrjixL
.
. 114
114
114
no.
A-stems a. Active h. Deponent
:
—
Second Division Stems i(T- (dfil), l-{dfu),
;
.... e-{iT]fu).
114
115
115
Conjugation of et>t (eli/at), to be . 116
III. ,, elfJLi {tevai), to go . 117
112. ,, 177/ii in its compound dcpirnxL 118
—
Second Class Verbs
Remarks ....... in -w/jli or -vpvimi . 120
120
114.
116.
Paradigms of and ^uvvvim
Remarks on Paradigms
deiKuv/xi
ii.
The Beatitudes
Parts of John i.
Short Sentences.
.....
....
127
127
128
iii. Selected Sentences 129
xxu Analytical taBlE o'B contents.
;
.
one, two, or
131
131
all 131
U
119.
120.
121.
Prepositions
Prepositions
Prepositions
governing
governing
governing
the
the
the
Genitive only, duTl, dwo,
Dative only, tV, avv
vVccusative only, dvd,
.... ei's .
(f^),
.
tt/jj
.
131
132
132
122. Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative, bid, Kard,
fierd, irepi, virep, vird . . . . . . . . . .132
123.
124.
i-rri, irapd, 7rp6s ...........
Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative,
CHAPTER YIL—ADYERBS.
126. Adverbs in their Original Form, from Substantives 135
{a) As an Accusative Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun 135
(6) As a Dative ,, ,, . 135
(c) As a Genitive
{d) As a
,, ,,
127.
128.
(c) Old Case-endings in
Adverbs from Adjectives
Comparison of Adverbs
....
-6ev, -6t,
......
(in -us)
and -de . 135
135
136
129. Pronominal Adverbs. Table, with Correlatives 136
130. Numeral Adverbs (in -ts, -/cts, or -a/cts) 137
131. Adverbs from Yerbs
Ancient verbal forms, devpo, Bevre
Derivatives from Yerbs in -i^u)
....
.....
137
137
138
132. Adverbs from Prepositions (or in -w) 138
133. Prepositive Adverbs ("improper Prepositions"). List 138
134. Negative Adverbs, ov and fx-^ 139
SECT. PAGE
136. 6. Conjunctions of Cause . , 141
7. ,, Inference . 141
8. ,, Intention or Result , 141
^7- {a) Emphasis, ye, 8r], -Trep, -rot
Particles of , 141
(6) Particles of Interrogation, d, ij, dpa , 141
13S. Interjections . 141
{a) Natural instinctive sounds . , 141
(b) The Interjection tde, idov, behold ! . , 142
139. 1.
2.
ROOTS,
Classes of ^Vords
Avitli
.....
primary, secondary, tertiary, etc., formations 143
143
140.
3. Modification of Stem-endings
Classes of Substantives .... 144
144
(«) First
1.
Declension
Masculine, in
.
....
-r-qs
. . . . 144
144
(6)
2. Feminine, in
Second Declension
1. MavSculine, in
.....
-ia,
....
-/xos
-cxyvvi] . 144
144
144
2. Neuter, in -rpov, -lov [-ap.ov, -Iolu:') . ]44
2
3.
Masculine,
Feminine,
Neuter,
-evs,
-o-is,
-jxa, -os
-Trjp,
-tt/s ....
.
-Tt:p
. . .
145
145
145
141-
142.
Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Nouns
Classes of Adjectia'es ..... 145
146
1. First
{a) In
Form
In
-ic;, (-la), -lov .... 146
146
(6)
(c) In
-iKos,
-Ivo^,
-77,
-7],
-ov
-Of ...
. . .
.
147
147
(d)
(So -eos,
. .
.
. .
147
147
147
if) Verbals in -ros and -reos 147
2. Second and Third. Forms 147
143-
{a) In -77s, -es
{b) In -p-oiv, -/jLov
SECT PAGE
144. {b) V^erbs from verbal stems — " Inceptives," " Frequentatives " (or
145. General
emphatic), "Causatives,"
Remark on Derivation ........
etc. 149
149
Combination of Prepositions)
........
Inseparable Particles not found with Verbs
. 152
152
148.
{d,
Synthetic Compounds
The former element a Noun
...
or
.
Verb
.
.
. .
. 152
152
Connective vowels -0-, -i- 152
Com pound Verbs usually from Compound Nouns 152
149.
The
Illustrations ....
chief significance in the latter element
151.
Question as to St. Matthew's Gospel
The introduction of Greek
Various influences contributing to this
.... .
.
.
155
155
155
Greek the usual language of our Lord
The
Difference of
Dialect of Galilee
New Testament
.... AVi-iters
.
in style
.
.
156
156
156
152. Infusion of Latin . 156
Influences contributory to this . 156
Classes of words derived from Latin . 156
/53. Aramaic (Hebrew) Words and Phrases . 156
{a) Assimilated words . 157
{b) Indeclinable words . 157
1. Proper Names . 157
2. Common Nouns . 157
SECrr.
154' Latin
(a)
Words
Names of Coinb c .
, .... PAGE
158
158
(b) Judicial terms . . . .159
(c) Military terms 159
(d) Political terms .159
(e) Articles of Dress . . . . . . . . . .159
(/) General terms 159
159.
(a) Pure Greek— "The Seven
PART III.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.— CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
J 60. A knowledge of the general laws &f Grammar necessary .184 . . .
]6i. —
The Sentence as consisting of Propositions 16-4
162. —
The PiiOPOSJTiON Subject and Predicate 184
163. The Subject— a Substantive or its eq^uivalent '384
h 2
XXVI ANALYTICAL TABLE 0? CONTENTS.
SECT. paqe!
—a Substantive,
164.
165.
166.
The Predicate
The Copula a — ....
Adjective, or equivalent
.......
tense of the verb " to be "
Omission of the Copula
1G4
lb4
165
167.
168.
The Verbal Predicate
Tlie Substantive verb as Predicate .....
.....
165
165
169.
170.
Omission of the Pronominal Subject
Its insertion for emphasis. Examples....
Omitted in third person plural, " generalised assertion " .
166
166
166
"
171. Omitted in third person singular, " impersonals 166
172. The Nominative the case of the Subject . . , . . 167
THE FIRST CONCORD 167
y^^. Exceptions, (1) Neuter plural Nominative with singular Verb 167
374. Variations in this idiom, a, b, c, d . 167
775. (2) " Rational Concord." Collective singular Subject with plural
Verb, a, b 168
J 76. Comljined Nominatives, a, b 169
177. Agreement of substantival Predicate with the Subject 170
Law of Apposition 170
17S. Agreement of adjective Predicate with the Subject . 170
THE SECOND CONCORD 170
179. "Rational Concord,"
Adjective ........(1) Collective singular Subject with plural
170
180.
181.
182.
(2)
Mule for Cojndative Verbs
Complements of the simple Sentence
.......
Masculine or Feminine Subject with Neuter Adjective
.....
171
171
171
183.
184.
Extension of the Subject
,,
Substantival Predicate ....
....
171
172
185.
186.
,,
,,
Adjective-Predicate
Verbal Predicate ..... 172
172
187.
188.
i'89.
Accessory Clauses
Co-ordinate
Subordinate
.........
. . . . . .
172
172
172
190. Methods of introducing subordinate Clauses 172
—illustrated
191.
192.
Difficulties in the resolution of Sentences
Hale for ilie resolution of CofapouThd Sentences .... 173
173
SECT.
199.
200.
The Article with Adjectives
With Participles
....
.... ,
.
PAGE
176
17«
Often enuivaleut to a Relative and Verb . 17^
201. With the Infinitive, in all the Cases . 177
Note on the verbal in -ing (Lat., genind) . 177
202. With Phrases or Sentences . 171
203. With Pronouns. (See § 220) .
205.
206.
Significance of the Article
The Article strictly definite
The Article marks the Subject
....
....
: its insertion or omission .
.
178
178
178
207. Definition of the Predicate by the Article . 179
208. (The Article may be omitted before words already defined) . 179
209.
210. For iiulividiud emphasis ....
Use of the Article icith Monadic Substantives
....
. .
.
179
180
211.
212.
In collective expressions
To iruike renewed mention
(This sometimes implicit)
.... .
.
.
180
18i
181
213.
214.
from the original .....
Passages where the Article, omitted iu the A.Y
181
183
215. The Article as an Unemphatic Possessive . 185
216. The Article with Proper Names . 18D
217. With the
(a) Gcds,
(ft) Kvpios,
Divine
God
Lord
.....
Names
.....
. 188
186
187
(c) vibs
{d) 'Irjaovs,
(e)
Qeov, Son of
XptcTTos,
Jesus .....
God
Anointed, Christ
187
188
188
(/) Hvevna Holy Spirit
(dyiov), 189
218. Monadic Xoiuis (as Proper Names) without the Article 190
219. Prepositional Phrases without the Article 190
220. The Article with Demonstrative Pronouns . 191
221. Omitted with ^Kacros, tocoutos . 192
222. The Article with avros, the sanu 192
223.
224.
With Possessive Pronouns
With ttSs, irdvTet, all ....
.....
192
192
225.
226.
227.
With 3Xos, lohole
With 5XXos, 'erepos, other
With iro\v, much ; -rroWoi, many
.... 194
194
194
228. With the Nominative for Vocative 195
229. The Article separated from its Substantive by qualify ingw ords 196
{a) A Preposition with its Case . 196
{h) An Adverb 195
230. Repeated after its Substantive for emphasis . 196
{b) Sometimes where no Article precedes 197
XXVUl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT
231.
232.
The
The
Article with Participles
Article in Enumerations ....
....
197
198
233-
(a)
(b)
Combined Enumeration
Separate Enumeration
The Omission of the Article marks Indefinitenesa
.... .... .
•
.
.
•
•
.
b
198
198
199
234. The Article with vojxos, laiv illustrations — • • • • 200
I.
Modifications, 1-7
Genitive of origin
....
....
207
207
208
After Substantives, to denote the source or author 208
249. After Verbs of sense or mental affection 208
(a) Of sense, as hearing, taste, touch 208
(b) Of affection, sls desire, caring for, despising 209
(c) Oi remembrance 2i\\(\. forgetting 210
250. After Verbs of accusation, condemnation, etc. 210
251. After Verbs and Adjectives of plcnftf, want, fulness, etc. 210
252. II. Genitive of separation or ablation >";io
......
210
211
211
After Adjectives in tlio Comparative Degree 211
,
SYNTAX. XXIX
SECT. PAGE
254. III. Genitive of Possession . 212
"
After Substantives " the Possessive Case 212
255. The Genitive Personal Pronouns so used 212
1—
256.
257.
"Words of kindred,
Attributive Possessive Genitive
etc.,
....
omitted before Possessive,
.....
,
,
212
213
258.
259.
260.
Special Possessive phrases
The Genitive of Apposition
Position of the Genitive
.... .
.
213
214
215
\a) Generally aftei^ the governing Substantive . . 215
{!)) Instances where the Genitive ^/'cc^f^cs . . 215
261.
262.
IV. Genitive of Partition
After Partitive Adjectives
Pronouns
......
........
.
.
215
216
216
263.
Numerals
Superlatives
After Verbs of ^^^''^^Hng
.......
.
......
. . . . . , . .
.
216
216
216
264. After Verbs of taking hold of, attaining, etc. . 216
265.
266.
Aher Adverbs of time
Partitive Phrases of Time
......
Different usage of Active
.... or Place
and Middle .
.
217
217
217
267. Partitive Genitive after Verb to be . . 217
268. V. Genitive of Object . 218
May be expressed by various Prepositions : Illustrations . 218
269. Phrases that may be Possessive or Objective . 218
270. VI. Genitive of Relation . 219
271.
272.
In
MtQT
respect of, as
Adjectives, gewQVdAly
shown by the context
.
.
.
219
220
220
273. Genitive of pi'ice, penalty, etc . 221
274. Genitives of different relations with the same Substantive . 221
275. VII. The Genitive Absolute . 221
Originally eausal . 222
276.
The Dative
Primarily ^igwiiymg juxtaposition
Modifications, 1 —4 . ,
.....
.....
.
.
222
222
222
277. I. Dative of Association . 223
(«) After Verbs of intercourse, comjmnionslnp, etc. . . 223
{b) After Verbs and Adjectives of likeness, fitness, etc. . 223
(f) After the Substantive Verb : to express property . 223
\evh sometimes omitted . . 223
278. II. Dative of Transmission . 223
(a) After Verbs of grm7igf( Indirect Object) . 223
(6) ,,
information, command, etc. . 224
(c) ,, succour, assistance, etc. . 224
\d) ,
mental affection, obedience, faith . 224
Distinction from Genitive . . - . . 224
XXX ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. PAQE
279. in. Dative of Reference . . . . 225
May be expressed in English hy for (or against) . 225
280. IV. Dative of Accessory Circumstance . 226
(a) Expressing the modes of an action . . 226
{b) Sometimes repeating the notion of the Verb (Hebraism) . 226
(c)
(d)
Da.tive of cause ov motive
,, instrument ..... .
.
226
227
(e)
(/)
Dative after
Dative of agent (rare)
,
,
x/x^o/xat, to
sphere, that in
.....use
.
227
227
228
(gr)
,, ti7ne . 228
(1) A space of time : for — (2) A point of time at, . 228
281. The Accusative
Primarily signifying motion towards
Hence used as the Object of Transitive Verbs
.... .
.
.
229
229
229
{a) Verbs intransitive in English, transitive in Greek . 229
{h) The same Verbs sometimes transitive and intransitive, . 230
(c) Especially those denoting faculty . 230
{d) The direct Object omitted after certain Verbs . 230
"
282
283
The intevTial Object of Verbs, or
Accusative of Definition
Dative of Accessory more common
...... " cognate Accusative
.
.
.
230
231
231
284, The Double Accusative, "nearer" and "remoter Object' . 231
285, The Accusative as Subject of Infinitive Verbs . 232
To be rendered as Nominative with that . . 232
Generally dilferent from the Subject of the principal Verb . 233
286
Accusative with the substantivised Infinitive
Accusative of
(a) Space
Time
: Distance
and Space ....
.....
.
.
. 233
233
233
{b) Time: (1) a Point; (2)Duration . 233
287 The Accusative in Elliptical, or unusual constructions . 234
288 THE CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS . 234
Two elements to be considered, the Preposition and the Case . 234
Variety of combinations hence resulting . . 234
289. Interchangeable Prepositions : not identical . 235
290. Note on the correspondence of words
Table of Prepositions
Prepositions with the Genitive only
...... in different languages
.
.
.
235
236
236
291. against : opposition as an equivalent
avri, over . 23e
(1) from;
,
......
Hence, instead of for ; adverbial phrase, avO'
.
236
236
.
236
237
SECT
294. trpo, in front of ......
Hence, before in (1) time (2) place ; (3) degree ;
. ,
,
PAGE
238
238
Prepositions with the Dative only 239
295. ir, m , 239
Hence, (1) in, of place ; (2) among ; (3) "the eV of investiture ;" (4)
296. avv,
(7) temporal use (8) " constructio prsegnans "
in conjunction with (co-operation)
;
.......
.......
. . . . 239
241
Hence, with, together vnth (beside)
Prepositions with the Accusative only ..... 241
242
297.
298.
avd,
eis,
up to, up by .
300. Kara,
/S.
a.
down
Accusative
Genitive
............
:
:
(1)
on account of
Accusative 248 . . .
/3. Accusative: (1) throughout; (2) over against; (3) at tlic time of;
301. /Ltcrd,
a.
..........
(4) distributive use
in association tcith
Genitive: (1) with,
(5) according to ; (6) adverbial phrases
;
among ;
248
250
302. Trepi,
p.
around
a. Genitive
............
Accusative: after {beyond)
: about, con/xjiiing
250
250
250
.
251
251
a. Genitive : (1) on behalf of; (2) for the sake of; (3) in reference
/S.
to
Accusative ........
............
: beyond, above
251
253
304. inr6, under
a.
jS.
Genitive : ........
by, of the
upon
Accusative: (1) under; (2)
Agent
close
253
253
253
a. Genitive
............
Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative
SECT. PAGE
305- {iiri) p. Dative : (1) 07i, of basis; (2) over, of superintendence ; (3) upon,
fig. ; (4) m addition
" constructio prseguans
to ; (5)
"
255
7. Accusative: (1) ujyon, motion implied; (2) over; (3) to (for,
............
; ; (6) during,
256
258
a. Genitive from, of persons only
: 258
j3. Dative : near j (2) in the esteem or 2)ower of
(1) icith, . 258
7.
consequence ..........
Accusative: (1) hy, near; (2) contrary to; (3) above;
.... .......
(4)
259
307. 7rp6s, toicards
a.
/?.
Genitive
Dative :
.......
..........
:
oiear
conducive to .
259
259
260
7. Accusative : (1) to ; (2) ivith; (3) mental direction ; (4) estimate ;
,,
ip and the simple Dative
313. ,,
Note on 2 Cor. iv, 17
Trepi with did and virep ..... 264
265
314- Repetition or otherwise of Prepositions governing several Avords
Note on Verbs compounded with Prepositions .... 265
266
SECT. PAGE
3^3' Comparative without expressed Object . . 272
(1)Where the context supplies it . . . , 272
(2)Where the Comparative is a familiar phrase . 272
(3) Where the Object may be supplied mentally . 272
324-
325-
The Superlative
General significance......
......
Emphatic Superlatives
,
.
273
273
274
326.
327-
Use of wpuTos ........
Followe'l by irduTuv, preceded by
......
Hebraistic Superlatives
ws, otl . .
.
274
274
274
(1) By Preposition (?v after simple Adjective . . 274
(2) By Adjective repeated in the Genitive . 274
Other so-called Hebiaisms to be rejected . . 275
The Numerals . 275
328. Special uses of the Cardinal eh, one . . 275
(1) As an Indefinite Pronoun (Indefinite Article; . 275
(2) For tlie Correlatives, one ... other . 275
329-
(3) Its
(4) Ordinal /7*5Hnstead of
Adverbial Particles with Numerals
it ....
proper Negative combined with the Predicat
....
.
.
275
276
276
330- Omission of Names of Quantity after Numerals . 276
331- The Ordinals in Enumerations . 276
332.
The Personal Pronouns
Subject to the rules for Substantives
.... 277
277
Omission of Pronominal Subject 277
333. Possessive Genitive of Pronouns instead of the Adjective 277
Possessive Adjective Pronoun instead of the Genitive 277
334. Redundant or repeated Personal Pronoun 278
335. Use of avTos, self, in apposition 278
As a Nominative, always emphatic . 278
[The reflexive eavroO for the Second Person 279
,, iavrCbv for First and Second] 279
—
"Rational Concord," with avrbs Gender Number — 279
The Possessive Pronouns
336. Their various uses exemjilified ....
In apposition Mith a Genitive Substantive
. 280
280
280
337. Unemphatic Possessive Pronouns by the Article 280
Emphatic Possessive Pronouns by Ibios, own . 280
The Demonstrative Pronouns. 281
338. Use of otiros, this (near), and iKeivos^ that. 281
339. Use of 65€, this (here) 281
XX XIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENT^.
SECT. tAGE
340. Exceptions to the ordinary use of odros,
iKelfos, the Emphatic Denionsirafive .....
c/ceti/os. .
.
281
282
341.
342.
Emphatic (or
.......
redundant) Demonstrative Constructions
Special uses of tovto, Tavra
The Relative Pronoun
. .
.
282
282
283
THE THIRD CONCORD
3\3-
344-
Agreement of the Relative.
A clause as Neuter Antecedent...... .
.
283
283
345-
346. Attraction .........
— —
" Rational Concord" with the Relative
.
28;?
281
2S4
(b) Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent . 284
347-
348.
Demonstrative Antecedent omitted
avToscomplementary to the Relative
.....
Inverse Attraction (transposed Antecedent)
(a Hebraism) .
.
.
285
285
286
349- The Compoimd Relative, Scrns, strictly
But also exjdicative, and logical
Used often with Proper Names
....
....
Indefinite .
.
286
287
287
The Interrogative and Pronouns
350- Various uses of the Interrogative, ....
Indefinite
7-''s ;
.
.
287
287
(1)
(2) Elliptically, as tVa rt ; ....
Simply, with or witliout a Substantive
.......
16"% .?
.
.
287
287
(3)
(4)
Adverbially, liow !
In alternative questions
The Interrogative in indirect questions
......
...
.
.
288
288
288
351. .
352-
Uses of the Indefinite, ris
(1) Simply, with or without a Substantive
.....
Transition from the Interrogative to the IndeliniLo .
-
.
.
288
289
289
(2) Emphatically, somebody ! . . 289
(3) As "a kind of" , 289
(4)
(5)
" Some " approximately with numbers
In alternative expressions
(6) [Negatives of ris, i.e., ovdeis,
..... /jirjdels] .
. 290
290
290
355. TiiE
Special use of e'xw
Middle Voice : its
......
Variations in meaning according to form
three senses .
{'Icttiixi) 292
292
292
1. Middle")
i^c/eajiw (the "Accusative . 292
But Pronouns generally employed with Active 292
SYNTAX. XXXV
SECT. PAGE
355. 2. Ap2)r02mative (the ^'DatiYe 'Middle"). 293
The direct Object of tlie Active retained . 293
3. Causative (nearly resembling the Passive) . 293
This meaning sometimes becomes reciprocal 294
356. The Passive Voice 294
Its Sulijcct. The primary or secondary Object of the Active 294
357.
358.
Agent .....
(In the latter case, the primary Object remains in the
after Passive Verbs
Frc(|ueiit diliiculty of distinguishing Passive and Middle
Ac
,
295
295
295
THE MOODS AND TENSES
359. ......
Significance of the
—
Moods
The Indicative Declarative and Interrogative
296
296
296
360. The Tenses. The six employed (the three others essential to complete-
ness) *' Historical " and " principal " Tenses . , 296
361. The Present Tense .
..... . ,
,
297
297
{a)
{h)
A
An
state as now
habitual or usual act .....
existing, a process , 297
297
(c)
{d)
(e)
An inchoative act ......
To be distinguished from the Aorist
.
299
300
300
(/) The "resolved Imperfect" 301
363. The Future Tense
General meaning, -wdth Illustrations
{a) Indefinite futurity
....
......
301
301
301
{h) Command, especially in prohibitions . 301
(c) General truths or maxims, "Ethical Future" 302
(c?) Future -snth ov fir] (see § 377) 302
(c) The "resolved Future," or Future Imperfect
(/) The Future Auxiliary, /iAXw
Use of 6^\w, to will, emphatic with Examples
....
;
302
302
302
The Aorist Tenses
364.
General meaning, with Illustrations
{a) The absolutely past, "Preterite"
.... 303
303
303
(&)
(c)
The Aorist. as Pluperfect
The " Epistolary Aorist "
.....
Distinction between Aorist, Imperfect, and Perfect 303
304
304
{d) Sometimes equivalent to our Present Indicative . 305
(e) Marking the completeness of an act . 305
XXXVl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT.
365. TiiE Perfect Tense
General meaning, and
....
Illustrations
.
.
PAGE
305
305
(«.) A completed action, or one whose consequences remain . 305
366.
(b)
.
305
306
306
367.
368. Interrogative Forms ....
The *' Perfect Present," and corresponding Pluperfect .
.
306
307
With or without interrogative words
Elliptic questions .... . .
.
307
308
369.
370.
Peculiar forms of affirmative reply
Negative questions
(ft) With 01) ;
(b) with
.... fi-q ; (c)
.
with /xrjTL
.
.
308
308
308
.
310
310
310
SECT. PAQT?
382. (c) Indirect interrogation 315
383-
Use of the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the Optative
(d) Object and Objective Sentence after some Verbs
Conditional Sentences
.... . . 316
317
317
The " Protasis " and " Apodosis "
Four forms of the Conditional Sentence
a. The supposition of a /rtc^ (ct, Indicative)
......
....
317
317
317
/3.
7. Entire uncertainty
5. A condition unfulfilled
{el, ......
The supposition of a jjos^ij 27 lYy (ed J', Subjunctive)
Optative)
{el, Indicative past ...
.
ctj'.
.
Indicative
. 318
318
384.
past)
Intentional Clauses expressive of pm'pose or design
: ....
......
319
320
(rt)
The Intentional Particles {tva, 6tu}s, ixtj)
With the Subjunctive, .....
to express intention
320
320
(Distinction between Intentional
Does tVa ever mean so that
Passages relating to Scriptui'e prophecy
.?........
.....
and Object Sentences) . . . 320
321
321
The negative intentional particle 322
{b) "With the Indicative Future (infrequent), conveying emphasis,
force 323
An ajyparent Indicative Present in Intentional Sentences . . 323
385. The Infinitive 324
(a) Properly a Verbal Substantive . . . . . . .324
386.
(&)
(c)
Negative Adverbs with the Infinitive
The Infinitive governs the same cases as the Verb
Tenses of the Infinitive
.... 324
324
324
387.
388.
Present, Aorist, Future, Perfect
Subject of the Infinitive {eom\)aive ^ 286).
The Infinitive as Subject (substantivised)
..... 324
325
325
389. The Infinitive as Object 325
{a) After Verbs denoting faculty, act, assertion, etc. . . 325
{b) To denote intention or result 326
(1) After a Verb 326
(2) After a Substantive 326
390. The
(3) After an Adjective
Infinitivfc in oblique cases (as Lat., gerund) .... 326
326
(a) Genitive,
(1)
(2)
with toO
After Substantives
After Verbs
.......
........
326
326
327
(3) To express design . 327
(6)
(c)
Dative, with
.....
"With Prepositions {tov,
t^j, to express cause
t(^, to)
. . . .327
. 327
391-
392.
Infinitive of result,
Illustrations
Infinitive as Imperative
with
:
......
did,
..,...,..,
els, ev,
^'.Xl PAGE
The Participles
Properly verbal Adjectives
Negatives with the Participles
......
.....
. ,
,
329
329
330
Subject of a Participle (Genitive Absolute) , 330
}94- Peedicative uses of Participles , 330
1. After tJie Substantive Verb: " the resolved Tenses 330
2.
3.
Complementai^ to the verbal Predicate
Adjuncts to the verbal Predicate .... . ,
,
331
332
(«)
{b)
Modal
Temporal .......
(1) Contemporaneous (Present Participle)
,
,
332
332
332
(2) Preceding (Aorist Participle) 332
(3) Succeeding (Future Participle) . , 333
(c) Relations of cause, condition, etc. 333
{d) Intensive (Hebraistic) 333
395-
A Predicative Participle
Attkibutive use
may
of Participles
Epithetic (like Adjectives)
.....
be modified by ws
.....
333
334
334
396. "With the Article : like the Relative and a Finite Verb 334
The Temporal reference sometimes lost 335
397-
Usual force of the Present Tense
Particijiles in broken constructions
Anacolouthon (compare § 412)
..... 335
385
336
398.
399-
Their general use
Adverbial phrases
(a) A
......
Substantive with or without Preposition
337
337
337
{b)
(c)
{d)
An
A
Adjective
Partici})le
The combination
..... of two Verbs .
337
337
338
400. Adverbs as Prepositions (see § 133) . 338
Combinations of Adverbs . 338
401. The Negative Adverbs, ou and /x?? 338
Combinations of Negatives 339
Comparison sometimes expressed as denial 339
SECT. PACK
403. Special iises of /cat . . 340
(a) For rhetorical emphasis . 340
(b) In the enumeration of- particulars (with re) . 340
(c) Marking points of transition . 341
"
(rf)
(c)
Explanatory
As also, even
:
"
.....
/cai
.
341
341
342
404. Conjunctions of Antithesis especially aXKa, Se : . 342
1. dWd, hut, marks opposition, interru ption , transition . 342
(1) To throw emphasis on its clauses . 343
(2) In the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence, yet . 343
(3) After a negative, dW ij, except . 343
2. 5c, hut, uueinphatic adversative . . 344
Often may be rendered, and, then, noiv, etc. . 344
Koi ... 5^, yea ... moreover . 344
Antithesis with /to' ... M , . 344
/x4v occasionally without 5^ (three cases) . 345
405. The Disjunctives : especially ij, ehe . . 345
-^
ij
...
Kal,
ij,
^ "interrogative"
iJTOi ...r}, etre
or even ......
.....
... elrz . .
.
345
345
346
406. The Inferential Conjunction.^ : especially apa. . 346
Their distinction. Slighter meanings . 346
Other Inferential Particles . 346
407. The Causal Conjunctions : especially 'yAp . . 347
(a) Relative Conjunctions, as on, because . 347
(b) The Demonstrative Causal yap, for . . 347
Introduces a direct reason . 347
Or the reason of some fact implied. . 347
(c) Sometimes refers to a suggested thought . 347
{d) The combination kuI yap, its two senses . 348
408. Asyndeton
(a) Of the
: or the omission of Conjunctions
Copulative ....
....
.
.
348
348
{h)
(f)
id)
Of /cat,
Of the
Of the
Epexegetic
Antithetic
Causal Particle
.... .
.
348
349
349
350
xl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
skct. page
410. Special Forms of Ellipsis 351
1. Aposiopesis 351
411.
2. Zeugma
Apparent Redundancy
Inartificial collocation of Clauses ...... 351
351
352
{a) For special emphasis frequently in three ways
; ; . . . 352
{b) Object and Object-sentence (see §382) 352
412. Anacolouthon
(Not to be hastHy assumed) .......
.....
352
352
(a)
{b)
Transition from indirect to direct speech
....
Transition from a Participle to a Finite Verb
352
353
(c)
{d)
Nominative Participles standing alone
A sudden change of structure
{e) The non-completion of a Compound Sentence
.......
....
(see § 397) . . . 353
353
353
413. Attention to Sound and Rhythm
{a) Paronomasia ..........
Simple alliteration
, » 354
354
354
PAET I.
ORTHO GR APHY.
1. The Greek Alpliabet contains twenty-four letters, arranged
and named as follows :
Alpha A a a 1
Beta B ^or^ b 2
Gamma r <y sometimes r g (hard) 3
Delta A h d 4
Epsllon .. E e e (short) 5
Zeta z Ko^i z 7
Eta H V e ao"3) 8
Theta e ^or^ th 9
Iota I i i 10
Kappa K K k 20
Lambda A \ I 30
Mu M /A m 40
Nu N V n 50
Xi H 1 X 60
Omicron O (short) 70
Pi n TT sometimes xn p 80
Eho P p ox
q
T 100
Sigma X (T final 9 S 200
Tau T T sometimes } t 300
Upsilon T- V u 400
Phi <E> <#> jph 500
Chi X y Ch (guttural) 600
Psi ^ -./r ps 700
Omega fl ft) Gong) 800
2 notes on the alphabet — the vowels. [§ 2, a.
two letters, alijJia, beta. The forms of the Greek letters, which, it will
be seen, greatly resemble those of our own language (the Koman letter),
The Vowels.
b. The diphthongs are at, au, «, ev, ot, ov, pronounc3d as in English
also a, r), <j> (or, with capitals, Ai, Ht, Ot), where the i occurs with a
long vowel, and is not pronounced, being, therefore, written underneath
the vowel (excepting in the case of capitals), and called iota subscript.
It will be important to note this in the declension of nouns and the
conjugation of verbs.
r}v is pronounced like ev, eu; and vi like wi.
C. Every vowel, when standing as the first letter of a word, has what
— ,
breathing, and shows that the vowel is simply to have its own sound
^ M a or 1] Ck
T ov to
Tl
Cl Tl
01 b> ov
0) ov a> ov (0 b) oil 01 01 b) ov
The left perpendicular line in this table gives the former vowel in each com-
bination, the upper horizontal line the latter, and the result of the contraction
will easily be found. Thus, eo gives ov ; ae, long a ; and so of the rest. It
must be noted that where the letter o- occurs in inflection between two short
vowels, it is generally dropped, and conti'action takes place according to the
table.
It wiU be observed by inspection of the table that an o sound always
preponderates in contraction with the other vowels ; that an a sound, when
first, prevails over an e sound following it, and vioe versa. Some special and
exceptional methods of contraction will be found noticed in Etymology.
SrjXo€T€i (fiiXerjS, TCfiaoLj 87]Xor]T€, voos, voov, ycveos, aiSoa, opea, ^ao'tXcc^,
h. Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it. —The hiatus {i.e. yawning)
caused by the meeting of vowels at the end of one word and the
beginning of the next is often prevented by one or other of the following
ways :
word begins with a vowel, or at the end of a sentence. These words will be
marked in declension and conjugation by a bracketed (v) thus, alu}<n{v), ;
iTri<rTevff€(v). In a similar manner, ovtco, fi^pi, and &xpi-j a^s a rule add s when
followed by a vowel. In the last two words, however, the New Testament text
is not by any means uniform and on all three the best MSS. greatly differ.
;
The negative ov becomes ovk when the next word begins with a vowel, ^ and
the preposition iK becomes ^^.
Trapd, fierd, and the conjunction 6.W6. ; with (occasionally) the particle M and
its negative compound ovM ; also (before S)v) the preposition olvtL When the
initial vowel is aspirated, tt, t, become <|>, (see § 4, h). Thus, airb airwv
becomes air axnuiv, and airb iavrwu, &(f iavrcSv so for fxera aWriXiap, /xer
;
d\\7)\ci}v, but for fierd tj/juSv, fxed' ijfxoSp and for avrl dv, avd' Siv.
;
This elision was, in classical Greek poets, used much more frequently in words
ending in a, e, t, o.
or the union of the two words the vowels forming a long vowel, or diphthong.
;
Tliis takes place but rarely, and only when the former word is very short and
closely connected with the latter. The breathing of the vowel in the second
word is retained, to mark the fusion, and is then called a Ooronis. Thus, foi
* Compare § 4, d, 6.
— ;
§ 4, d.] mE CONSONANTS. 5
TO. airrd, the same things, rairrd is sometimes written ; for koI iyd), and 7, Kayib ;
for TO ivavTLoVf the contrary, rovvavTiov j and once for rh 5i'ona, the name,
ToCvofia (Matt, xxvii. 57).
The Consonants.
4. ci. As in the orthography of other languages, the four consonants,
\, fx, V, p, are termed liquids; the nine consonants, /?, y, 8, tt, k, t,
Labials . . .
IT
P ^-sounds.
Gutturals . . K X A:-sounds.
Dentals . . . T 8 e ^sounds.
becomes |.
must be changed, if not already so, into a sharp, flat, or aspirate, according to
the nature of the dental.
3. A dental followed by <r disappears.
4 Before the letter |jl p. a guttural becomes -y
a labial becomes a dental
; ;
becomes o-.
5. The letter v becomes fx before labials ; y before gutturals ; before a liquid
The combination o-f v with a dental and the sibilant, as vra, liecomes simply
(T, with compensation by the lengthening of the preceding vowel e becoming ;
TvcpdevTci ,, TV(f)6€L<TL ;
TVTTTOVTCn „ TVTTTOVffl.
aspirate. Sometimes this change will take place when the mute occurs at the
end of one word, and the vowel at the beginning of the next. Thus, d^' wu for
CLTT Cjv 0^; opau) for ouk bpaoj.
7. When
two consecutive syllables of the same word begin with an aspirate,
the former often loses its aspiration. Thus, Opixo^ is changed into rpixos ; and
exw into ex^- But affixes generally lose their aspiration in preference to the
stem, whether they are placed first or last as, ti-6€-tl for di-de-di., where the
;
XeyOrjvai, cTre/XTr^T/v.
1. AssimiJniion. —The labials ir, p, <[> before ix, and v before the other
The Accents.
a. Every Greek word, except the proclitics and enclitics, which
6.
willbe noticed under their respective parts of speech, has an accent
expressed on one of its last three syllables. The accents are employed
in writing,but mostly disregarded in pronunciation. Their use was
to mark a certain stress (or " rising " or " falling " inflection) on the
syllables where they are placed. It is said that they were invented by
Greek grammarians, as a guide to foreigners in pronouncing the language.
Some linguists of our own day have endeavoured to reinstate them as
helps in this respect, but without much success.
breathing, and the circumflex over it as, og, ovto<s. The acute on the
;
last syllablebecomes grave, unless the word ends a sentence except tls, ;
when the acute is on the last syllable, as IXttl^ Paroxjrtone, when the ;
The circumflex cannot be farther back than the penultima, nor the
acute than the antepenultima.
If the last syllable of the word contains a long vowel, the acute
accent must be on the last or last but one, the circumflex only on the
last. Should, therefore, the final syllable of a proparoxytone be length-
ened by declension, the accent is thrown forward, i.e. the word becomes
paroxytone thus, av^pwTro?, dvOpoyirwv.
; But if the final syllable of a
properispomenon is lengthened, the accent is changed to the acute, i.e.
the word becomes paroxytone ; thus, Xt^eprti/os, Xi/SepTLvwv.
It should be observed that the circumflex accent is always the result
'
of contraction, i.e. of an acute and grave ( ' ) —
not of a grave and acute
(
^
'
) —
as will be shown under Etymology.
d. word immedi-
Enclitics are words which merge their accent into the
ately preceding, which word is aff'ected as follows A proparoxytone or :
—
properispomenon takes an acute accent on the last syllable also thus, ;
avOpdiTTos Tt5, oi/cos Tt?. Au oxytouc that would otherwise (see above)
take the grave accent retains the acute; thus, fiaOrjTi^s rts. Paroxy«
tones and perispomena show no alteration.
especially as the accent of very many words can only be known by acquaintance
with the words themselves, and if neglected at fii'st, will be extremely difficult
to acquire afterwards.
Latin rules. For the most part, the Greek letters are represented by the
equivalents given (§ 1). The following exceptions must, however, be
noted :
Punctuation.
8. Four marks of punctuation are used for the division of sentences
the comma, the colon, the period, and the note of interrogation.
The comma ( ,
) and the period ( .
) are like our own.
READING LESSONS.
I. Acts ii. 1-13.
^ According to what rule is the accent on the final syllable made grave f
^ Why does this accent remain acute /
— ;
7 *
yiaKdpiOL oiv dcjiedrjaav at dvo/jLiaL Kal mv eireKaXix^Orfaav
8 '
at afiaprlaL, fiaKdpco<; dvrjp (ou) ov fjur) Xoyiarjrai, K.vpto<%
9 *
dfiapTiavJ /jLaKapccrfjLo<; ovv ovro^ eTrl Tr)v irepLTOiirjv
rj Kal eTrl rrjv aKpo^variav ; Xeyo/xev yap, '^EiXoyiadr} roS
10 *
^A^padfjL T] iridTL^i eh BcKaLoa-vvrfv.^ ttw? ovv eXoyladr)
The Greek Testament wiU furnish many other exercises, which should
h2 repeated until the learner can read the language with perfect facility.
A little care and time now devoted to this point, even before the uieaning
of a single word is understood, will very greatly contribute to future
progress.
14 [§ 9.
PAET II.
ETYMOLOGY.
Chapter I. INTEODUCTIOK
9. Etymology treats of the classification, the derivation, and tlie
inflection of words.
h. More important than any others are the Noun and the Vei^h.
These, as the necessary elements of a sentence, will be treated of, in
first
their various inflections. With the ISToun are closely connected the Artidey
the Adjective, and the Pronoun. The Verb also has its noun, the Infinitive,
and its adjective, the Participle Of these two the latter only is inflected.
The Root of a word is its yet simpler element in the same or another
language. With this, practical grammar has comparatively little to do ;
but to know the stem is of the utmost importance in the analysis of any
word. Throughout the Etymology the stem wiU be marked by thick
letters, with a hyphen indicating the (general) incompleteness of the
There are five cases : the Nominative^ or case of the Subject ; the
Genitive, or Possessive ; the Dative, or Conjunctive ; the Accusative,
or Objective ; the Vocative, employed in direct address.
Strictly speaking, the Nominative and Vocative are not cases: the
word implying dependence. Of the three true cases, often called
ohliqiLS,^ the Genitive originally signifies motion frorriy then, more
generally, separation ; the Dative, rest in, hence conjunction with ; the
Accusative, motion towards, hence denoting simply the object of the
transitive verb. This general description of the three cases, for the
further illustration of which see Syntax, Avill explain most of their uses.
indefinite pronoun tl<s, any.^ This is also subjoined, chiefly for the
reason that the two words together furnish a model, nearly complete, of
the declension of all suBSTANTrvES and adjectives.
* Ohliquey or slanting, from the habit among old grammarians of expressing the
forms of the noun by a diagram, the nominative being an upright stem, from which
the cases branched at different angles.
* Or the numeral els, one.
16 FORMS OF THE NOUN. [§12.
14. A
comparison of the two forms now given will show four
particulars, applicable to all nouns, adjectives, and pronouns and, ;
Neuters have but one form in each number for the nominative
a.
and accusative. Perhaps this might have arisen from things without
life being regarded as objects only. Neuters plural, ULmiinative and
accusative, always end in a (short), except when contracted, as reixy} for
T€txca (Heb. xi. 30).
common in early ages. The English, indeed, is the only great language
in which masculine and feminine, with almost undeviating strictness,
denote male and female. The French idiom, in the opposite extreme,
entirely rejects the neuter.
16. There are three leading types of inflection, under one or other
of which all declinable nouns may be classified. These are called the
Three Declensions, and, as has been stated, the model of each may be
traced in the Article and the Indefinite Pronoun.
The First Declension corresponds with the feminine of the article, rj.
The Second Declefnsion corresponds with the masculine or neuter of the
article, 6, xq. The Third Declension corresponds with the form of the
indefinite pronoun, rts, rt.
* The generic names of animals are sometimes common, i.e. of either masc. or
fem. gender, according to circumstances (so also irah, child) ; more frequently
rpicoene, i.e. of one gender, used indilferently for both sexes. Thus, in Greek, 'H'olJ
is always masc, /ac always fem., even in Luke xiii. 32.
18 LEADING FORMS OF THE DECLElfSIONS. [§16.
First Declension.
TTvXr}, a gate. Stem, TTvXa-
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
K. TrvXt], a gate (suhj.) irvXac, gates (s^^^/)
G. 7rv\r]<;, of a gate TTvXwVy of gates
D. irvXrjy to a gate 7ryXat9, to gates
A. 7rvX7]v, a gate (ohj.) TTvXa^, gates (o&y.)
V. TTvXrj, gate ! irvXac, gates 1
Second Declension.
Accentuation. —The reason why the place of the accent varies in the genitive
and dative is explained, § 6, c.
Third Declension.
7rat9, a c7w/c?, &oy, servant. Stem, TratS-
( Accent of this word irregular.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. rrah, a child {subj.) TratSe?, children {subj.)
G. TracBo^;, of a child iralBcov, of children
D. TratBl, to a child iralo-L, to children
A. TratSa, a child (06;*.) iralBa^, children (06/'.)
D. y)P'€pa ^/jL€paL<i
REMARKS.
a. The stem-ending a becomes and accusative
tj in the nominative
singular whenever pi^eceded hy a consonant ; except by the Hquid p, the
double consonants, or <r, sometimes v preceded by a diphthong or long
vowel. In these cases, the a remains, long after p, short in the other
cases. Preceded by a vowel, the a remains, generally long. Thus we
have the nominatives ei/roArJ, o-vi/aywyT/, xl/v^ri ; but Ovpa, S6^a, yXCxraa,
/?ao"tAtcrcrtt, Xeati/a, cTKid, fSaaiXetd, dXyjOeia.
b. In the genitive and dative singular, the stem-ending a, when not pre-
ceded by a vowel or p, becomes t]. After a vowel or p, it remams. Thus,
N. ho^a ; G. S6^r]<; ; D. S6$rj ; but rj/Jicpa, r;/x€pa9, rjfxepa, and (TKia, (TKias, o-klo..
d. Accentuation.
—"Whatever syllable is accented in the nominative retains
the accent throughout, so long as the laws in § 6, c, permit. The only apparent
exception is in the genitive plural, Avhich in this declension is always pcrispo-
menon. This, however, is accounted for by its being a contraction of -dcDV.
Oxytone words become perispomenon in the genitive and dative of both numbers.
For purposes of accentuation, the termination ai in the plural nominative i'^
considered short.
REMARKS.
a. All masculine nouns of the first declension form the nominative
from the stem by adding s, lengthening a into r\ after all consonants
except the liquid p, and retaining a after vowels and p. The vowel of
the nominative is retained in the dat. and ace. sing.
b. The genitive singular of all masculine nouns of this declension ends
in ov, originally ao. The vocative gives the simple stem. Other cases
conform entirely to the feminine type.
e. Accentuation. —The remarks under the feminine paradigms are applicable to
masculine also.
1. Masculine.
KpLTrj^, judge Te\dovr)<;, tax-gatherer, " pub-
"
o^etXerrj^;, debtor lican
irpo(\}rjTr]<;, prophet V7rr)peTr]S, attendant, servant
2. Feminine.
PaaCkela, kingdom head
K€(f)aX7j,
htKaioavvrj, righteousness Xv^via, lampstand
evToXrjy commandment oLKia, house
i^tiiTjy life werpa, rock
6vpa, gate ylrv-^rj, soul, natural life
The learner should commit these words to memory, with their meanings, and
should then write them down in different numbers and cases, with and without the
correspondmg articles, until all the forms are mastered. So with the other Exercises.
IIEMARKS.
a. As before noticed, this paradigm corresponds with that of the
first declension, o- being substituted for a-. The differences are, that
in the nominative singular the stem-vowel is not lengthened, and that
the vocative singular changes this vowel into €. In the accusative
plural, the termination -ovs is for -ovs (§ 4, c?, 5), as in the first declen-
sion -ds is for -avs; in each case, s being added to tlie accusative
singular,
REMARKS.
The only difiference between this paradigm and that of the mas-
culine and feminine is that already stated, § 14, a. The accusative
of all neuters is the same form with the nominative and vocative ; and
in the plural these cases end in o.
'AttoXXco?, Apollos.
N. 'ATToWft)?
G. 'AttoWo)
D. 'AttoXXcG
A. 'AttoXXwi/, or 'AttoXXco (irreg.)
V. 'AttoWo)
N. 'l7;crou9 A. ^1t](70vv
G. ^Irja-ov V. 'I7;(70i/
D. *l7;cro0
1. Masculine.
aSeXi^o?, brother XvKo<;, wolf
e^Opo^:, enemy vojxof;, law
avOpcdiro^, man 6(j)6a\fji6<;, eye
7]\lo<;, sun TTOTa/jiofiy river
2. Feminine.
afifiofi, sand 8oa:o9, beam
3. Neuter.
Saypov, gift Kpivov, lily
epjov, work irpoparov, sheep
/jueTpov, measure TeKPOv, child
M. or F. N.
We thus find that the termiuations of the third declension are, in the
SINGULAR
Table of Terminations.
SING ULAR. PL URA L.
N. s, or none es, a
6. OS uv
D. I ct
A. a, V as, a
V. as Nom. «s, a
the Declensions, § 16. The feminine noun x^P^? (xapir-), favour, makes
ace. '^^€^'^) ^*<^j iQTD.. (kXciS-) has ace. sing. xActSa ace. plur. by
x^P^^ '>
;
syncope and contraction, kAcis (Rev. i. 18) ; but also xActSas (Matt,
xvi. 19).
h. Vowel Stems.
REMARKS.
Stems in -t, and some in -v, change to -c before the case-endings (§ 37,
note).
Accentuation. —For
accentual purposes, the genitive termination, -eojs or
'€0}v in these nouns, is considered as one syllable, and does not, therefore,
REMARKS.
The syncopation takes place in the g. and d. sing, and d. phir.
To this class belong uyrrjp, mother ; Ovydrrfp, daughter ; yaa-Tiqp, belly.
Lar-qp, star, has a.a-rpa(TL{v) in the dative plural, but is not syncopated
in any other case.
Accentuation. —These
words are paroxytone in the cases that retain e, and
througliout the plural (excepting avrip, which is irregular). The syncopated
cases of the singular are oxytone, and the vocative throws back its accent as far
as possible.
G. l3o6^
D. l3oi ^OV(Tl{v)
A. ^ovv
V. /8oi} /3oe9
REMAEKS.
Noims in -€vs form the accusative singular in -ea (the a long) ; those
ill -avs and -ovs take v.
Accentuation. — Nouns in -eus are all oxytone in the noniiaative singular, and
perispomenon in the vocative.
Masculine.
ypa/jLfiaT€V(;, -6&)9, scribe |
oSoi;9, o3oi'to9, tooth
'X^iTcovy -0)1/09, vest, inner gar- <
Neuter.
eOvo^, -ou?, nation opo9, -0V9, mountain
OeXrj/jia, -aro^, will TTvp, TTvpo'i, fire
ovojjLa, -aTo<;, name (^w9, (fxDTOf;, light
Examples.
"Apaif/, Arabian, from dpap., gen. dpajSo^;
AWloiJ/, Ethiopian, „ alGioir-, gen. aW lottos
Examples.
(f)\6^, flame, from <}>\o7., gen. cfiXoyos
Krjpv^, lierald, KT]pVK-, gen. KrjpVKO^
vv^, night, VVKT-, gen. VVKTOS
6pi$, hair. gen. rptxos
epiX-, (§ 4, d, 7)
Examples.
Trats, child, from 7rai8-, gen. TratSos
opvLs, bird, „ 6pvi9-, gen. 6pvL0o<i
Xapt9, favour, „ XapiT-, gen. XOipLTO<^
Examples.
TToAts, city, frem iroXi-, gen. 7roAc(o9, for TroXto?
ixOv^, fi-^h, „ IxGv., gen. tx^vo9
Examples.
TTOLfirjv, shepherd^ from iroi|ji€v-, g^n. 7roLfxevo<s
omitting e, inserts the letter 8 between v and p. (See § 5, 5.) The dative
plural of these nouns also adds a after p. (See the Paradigms.)
Third Ride. — Steins in while adding s in the nominative
ev, av, ov,
singular, according to the first rule, drop the v in the genitive singular
and other cases, thus forming an apparent exception to the rule that the
genitive gives the stem by taking away the termination os. The irre-
gularity only apparent, as the v of the stem
is is in reality the old
consonant v (written in Greek F, and called, from its shape, digamma),
which originally belonged to the genitive, like the other consonant
stem-endings. Thus, /3ovs, ox, po/-, gen. /So/'o<s, now written /3o6<;. Some
of the cases of these nouns are also contracted, as the paradigm will
show. Stems in ev take a special form of the genitive singular, called
the " Attic Genitive," ending in €«s.
Accentuation. —
Monosyllabic neuters are oxytone in all their dissyllabic forms,
except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Masculine and feminine
monosyllables accent the penultimate in the accusative singular and nominative
and accusative plural ; in other cases follow the rule of neuters.
32 irregulak and variable nouns. [§ 31.
Some neuter stems in -ar- form the nominative by changing the t into s,
instead of dropping it. Thus, Kcpar-, liorn, nom. sing. Kepa?, nom. plur.
Kepara, gen. Kepdroiv; Kpcar, Jlesh, nom. sing. Kpeas, nom. plur. Kpca, by
syncope from Kpiara ; Tcpar-, prodigy, nom. sing, repas, nom. plur.
Tc/aara, dat. Tepacniv).
The accusative plural form, a.pva<s, lambs, is once found (Luke x. 3),
and may be referred to the stem iipcv-, nom. sing, ap-qv, the e dropped in
inflection by syncope.
In one passage, the name of the Greek deity Zeus is found (nom. Zcvs)
gen. Atos, ace. Ata (Acts xiv. 12, 13).
second declension and of the third (neuter stem -€s like ycvos). Thus,
ttXovtos, wealth, is properly masculine of the second, but is found in good
MSS. neuter of the third, vovs, mind (see § 24), second declension,
occasionally takes a genitive and dative as of the third declension ; vock,
voi (Eom. vii. 25 ; 1 Cor. i. 10, xiv. 15). So, ttXoos (Acts xxvii. 9) for
ttXov.
ad(3fta(n (as if from crappar-, o-dp/Sa). But the Septuagijit has also
G. Mwo-€0J9
D. MoKrci, or Mtocr^
A. MoKTca, or MtuoSJv
V. Ma>o^ (LXX.)
fJLCKpO-, -a-y
' little.
REMARKS.
a. The femmine singular of these adjectives, as will be seen in the
above paradigms, is formed in strict analogy with the usage of the first
35. Adjectives in eo- and oo- belong to this class. The explanations
given with contracted substantives (§ 24), and the scheme in § 3 /, will
sufficiently show the reason of each contraction.
-ovv (eov).
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
M. f. N. M. F. N.
N. Xpvo-ov*; Xpv(^V Xpvo'ovv Xpyo-oL Xpvo-al Xpvaa
G. ')(pvaov Xpyo-r}"^ Xpvo'ov Xpvacjv Xpvaojv Xpvacjv
D. ^(pvaS Xpvo-y Xpyo'(p ')(pvcrol<; Xpv(7al^ XpvaoL<:
A. ')(pV(TOVV Xpvo-'fjv Xpyo'ovv Xpvcrov^ Xpvo-a,<; Xpv<rd
V. 'Xpy(yee xpyo-v Xpva-ovv XpvaoX Xpvcral Xpvo'oi
36 ADJECTIVES — SECOND FORM. [§ 35, a.
REMARKS.
a. apyvp€o<s, silver (adjective), occurs in N.T. in two forms : ace. plur.
dpyvpovs, neut. nom. and ace. plur. dpyvpa.
according to rule, requires -a. The adjective ore/acos, ca, coV, fiimy is
circumflexed throughout. Thus we have not only dTrXous from airXdos, simple
(regular, see § 6, c), but XP^^^^^ from xP^^^^^t ^iid af/yvpous from df/yvpeos,
anomalous.
the methods of the third declension. Thus, 6|v- gives nom. masc. 6|v?,
sha7'p (§ 29, first rule, 4) iravT- becomes irds, all (§§ 29, first rule, 3 ;
;
4, d, 5) ; and Ikovt- gives ckwi/, willing (§§ 29, second rule ; 4, d, 8).
into €t; and ccs, ca?, in the plural, into ets. But co?, genitive singular,
and ea in the neuter plural, are uncontracted. A very few substantives
also change v into € the only instance in the New Testament being
;
TTT/x^v (John xxi. 8 ; Rev. xxi. 17) for Trrjx^oiv, from 7rrj)(ySj cubit
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
•
M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. Tra? iraaa irav iravre^ Trdaat Trdvra
G. iravTO^ 7rda-7j<; Trai/TO? irdvTwv Traawv Trdvreov
D. IT ami Trda-rj iravTi 7rd(rL{v) irdaaL^; 7rdcn(v)
A. Trdvra iracrav irdv '7rdvTa<; Trdaa^ Trdvra
V. Tra? iraaa irav 7rdvT6<; Trdo-ac irdvra
Participles in -as are similarly declined (stem, avr-) as AvVa?,
having loosed. The participial stem-ending €vt- makes, nom. -€is, -et<ra,
-ivj gen. ^vTos, cCotis, 4vtos, etc. ; as ySovXcv^et?, having been counselled.
SINGULAR. PLURAL,
M, F. N. M. F. N.
N. e(7T&)9 ecrrcoaa earof; Icrrwre? earcoaac karcoTa
G. k<TTOiTO<^ €(7Tcoa7]<; earcoTO^; eO-TCOTCOV €(TT(Oa(OV ecrrcoTcov
D. e(TT(x)TL earcoarj eo-rcort k(7T(t)(TL{y) eo"Ta>(7at9 €crTa)(ri(v)
A. earcbra earTcoaav eo"T09 ecTTOiTa^ €<Trci)cra<i earcora
Sing. M. F. N.
Sing. M. F. N.
aXTjOeS", tni^e.
SINGULAR.
M. and F. N.
N. aKri6r}<; 6X7)6 e^
G. (aXTjdeo^;) a\r]dov<; a\7)6ov<^
D. (a\7]6ei) aXrjdel aX7)6el
A. {6X7)6 ea) okTjdrj a\7)6h
V. aXT]de<: aXT]6i<!
PLURAL.
M. and F. N.
acocbpoP'^ sober-minded.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. and F. N. M. and F. N.
COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES.
42 There are two regular methods of forming the Greek
comparative and superlative.
The and most usual is by adding to the stem of the posi-
first
tive the further stem-ending rcpo- for the comparative, xaro- for the
superlative. These forms are then declined exactly like the first
form of adjectives (§ 34).
Adjectives of the first class which have a short syllable before the
stem-ending o- change this vowel into «.
Examples.
Ttt^s, SJijift^ ra^Lwv,^ Td)(L(TTo<;
44. These follow the third form of adjectives (see a-uxfjpoiv, § 41),
SINGULAR.
M. and F. N.
N. fxel^cov fiel^ov
G. fiet^ovof; fiel^ovo^
D. fiei^ovc fiel^ovL
A. fiei^ova or fiel^co fxet^ov
V. /jLel^ov fiel^ov
PLURAL.
M. and F. N.
N. fjL€l^ov€<; or fiei^ov^i fjL€L^ova or fiel^o)
G. fiet^ovcov fl6i^6v(OV
D. fJL€l^O(n(v) fl6L^0(n(v)
A. fi€l^ova<i or fjL€i^ov<; fl6L^0Va or /JL€L^(0
^ See John xx. 4 (jaxeioi'). In classic Greek, daTTuiv is the form generally
used. »
42 ADJECTIVES —COMPARISON. [§ 45.
„ KpcLcroroiVf „ Kpa.TiaTO'i
„ X€Lpoiv, „ x^'P'o^os
jtuKpos, ZzY^/e „ fUKporepos (regular)
„ eXacrcwv, „ cAa^to'TOS
Emphasis in Comparison.
Compare " most unkindest cut of all " in Shakspeare (Julius Caesar, iii. 2).
greater (iii. John, 4), fX€L^0T€pav ovk e^o) " -^ have no greater (more
x'^P°-^^
greater) joy ;" and from cA-axtorros, least (Eph. iii. 8), tw IKaxLo-roripia
irdvTwv Twi/ dytcjv, well rendered in E. V., " less than the least of all
saints."
First Form.
Second Form.
Third Form.
In practising with these forms, they should be combined with the nouns of the
previous Exercises. The adjectives should also be put into the different forms of the
comparative and superlative. Almost countless combinations will thus result, by
which the learner, either Avith or without the aid of an instructor, may become
versed in these parts of speech.
44 NUMERALS. [§ 48, a.
NUMERALS.
The Cardinal Numbers.
48. {o) -For the signs of the respective numbers, the letters of the
Alphabet are used, according to the list in § 1. When a letter is
(6) It will be seen that the places of some numbers are vacant, owing
to letters having dropped, in very ancient times, out of the Greek
Alphabet : the Digamma (f ) having come between « and t, ; while the
space between tt and p was occupied by Koppa (9), a guttural with a
hard ^-sound, the original of the Latin and English letter q. As the
alphabet ends with o>', 800, another discarded letter, Sampi C/T)) was
used for Three signs have therefore been added, as follows
900.^
r (the sign of a double consonant, sty used instead of f ), 6 ; ^\ 90
^', 900.
49. The cardinal numbers, eh, one ; hvo, two ; rpeh, three
recrcrape?, four, are declined as follows. The rest are indeclinable
up to two hundred, which, with the other hundreds, follows the
plural of the first form of adjectives in -oi, -ai, -a.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
f 1
^ Hebrew students will recollect that these are the places of Vav, QopJi, and
Skill respectively.
§51.] NUMERALS. 45
Bvo, two,
N. G.^ and A. Svo |
D. BvaL{v)
M. and F. N. M. and F. N.
N. TpeU Tpia D. rpiaiiy) TpLcri{v)
G. TplCOV rpicov A. Tp€i><; Tpia
T6(T(7ap
M. and F. N. M. and F. N.
(See Syntax.)
^ III classic Greek the gen. is Svciiv or dvdv (dual forms). So also the dative,
sometimes.
46 NUMERALS. [§5
CARDINAL. 1
ORDINAL.
1
6, 1
€KTo^, sixth
7, CTrra e^Bofiof;, seventh
8. OKTCO 07S009, eighth
9, evvea €vvaTo<i, ninth
10, heKa BeKaro<;, tenth
11, evBcKa evBeKaro^ etc.
2.] NUMERALS. 47
CARDINAL.^ ORDINAL.
600, e^dKoa-tOL e^aKoa-LOdTO^
700, eirTCLKocnoi eirTaKocTLOcrTO^
Eemark. —In
compound numbers, the largest is placed first, ^ and
the smaller follow in order, with or without the conjunction Kal, and.
The smaller numbers are in many copies treated as enclitics, and attached
to the larger as one word.
6p6voi ciKocrt Tco-o-apcs, " twenty-four thrones " (Rev. iv. 4) ; r€ar(rapa.Kovra
Koi ti €T€(rtv, ''for forty-six years" (John ii. 20); hCtv oySoi^Kovra
" of eighty-four years " (Luke ii. 37) ; Sexa kol oktw Iny,
T€o-crapo>v,
" eighteen years " (Luke xiii. 16) ; ra wevrJKovra cwca, " the ninety-nine"
Distributive Numbers.
52. The distribution or repetition of a number is variously expressed.
In Mark vi. 7, the simple cardinal is repeated : 8vo Svo, "two and two ;"
2. [Vocdbulai-y. — w/sa, -as, hour; rjfjiipa, -as, day; crd/SpaTovy -ov (lit.
^ The rule in classic Greek is to place the smaller number first with Koi, or the
larger without Kcd.
48 NUMERALS. [§ 52.
1. kv €T€L TrevTCKatScKaro).
. 1^ ojpa iy 0€KaTr).
1. Thirty years.
2. Eleven months.
3. In the fourth month, on the sixth day. (See 7, above.)
^ In what two ways might f^rst aud week respectively be expressed ? (See 5, 6,
above.)
) —
Personal Pronouns.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. ,
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
> T you
N.
'
€70), 1 rjfieU, we (TV, thou v^iel<^,
54. For the third personal pronoun, he, she, it, the New Testa-
ment employs the three genders of the adjective-pronoun avro^;,
self (avTO-, -a-).
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. auT09 avT^ avTo avroL avTal avrd
G. avTov avTrj<; avTov avTCJV avTO)v avTOJV
» «
D. avT(o avrrj avTco avToU avraU avTol^
A. avTov avrrfv avTO avTov^ avTd<i avrd
always emphatic.
Reflexive Pronouns.
55. These are formed by the combination of the personal pronouns
with the oblique cases of auros. In the singular, the two are written as
one word.
50 PRONOUNS —REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE. [§55.
SINGULAR.
G. i/iavTov, -'^9, of myself aeavTov, -t}?, of thyself
D. ifiavTO), -rj, to myself creavTm, -rj, to thyself
The plurals of these forms are written separately. Thus, ruidv avrwv,
of ourselves ; v/mv avrols, to yourselves, etc.
Third person (from* the old stem, e-, him), of himself, herself, itself
etc.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. ..
^^^'^^ F. N.
used for the and second persons likewise. Thus, iv cavrot?, " in
first
X.'wTCt.,
'ourselves " (Rom. viii. 23) ; ryy iqA^<x)y crioTyptav, " your own salvation "
(Phil. ii. 12).
^ez^,^^ <^vt„r»—
56. (a) These are declined precisely like adjectives of the first form,
and are as follows :
Demonstrative Pronouns.
57. The chief original demonstrative was the article, already given
(§ 12), and all other demonstrative pronouns are formed upon its model.
(a) oSc is simply the article declined with the enclitic 8c.
SINGULAB. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
(d) 6 avros in all its cases is only avros (§ 54), with the definite artiole
prefixed. The neuter plural, nominative and accusative, is sometimes
written ravra, being distinguished by the coronis over the v (§ 3, ft, 3), as
well as by the accent, from ravra, these, neuter plural of ovros.
^ The preposition employed in this passage further marks this meaning. See
Revised Version: "this hope set on Him."
52 PRONOUNS —DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE. [§ 57, t.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
•r/ if
N. 09 1 ot at a
*
G. od ov 0)2/ ft) J*
*
D. 5 CO
4,
0I9 al? 069
rf Tf
A. ov riv ou? a9 a
(&) The similarity between this pronoun and the article will be seen at
once. In the nominative singular feminine, and the nominative plural
mascidine and feminine, the only difference is that the article is proclitic.
The stem of the relative is 6-, while that of the article is to-.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. V.
tt
N. ocrTi9 r}TL<; 0,Tt o'iTive<; a'iLTLve<i CLTLVa
G. ovrLvo<; TjCTTLVO^ OVTLVO^ OyVTLVOJV MVTIVCOV WVTCVCOV
D. WTLVL fjTLVL (pTLVL ol(TrL(TL alarcat, ola-Tio-i
(d) Sometimes the relative is declined with the particle irep (marking
emphatic identity), and means the very one icho. Other indeclinable
suffixes are often used, e.g., ocryc (Rom. viii. 32), oo-Sttitotc. (See Syntax,
on the Particles.) For the relative adverb ov, consult § 129.
Also the relative of degree, iqXikos, of ivhat a size, used only in two
passages (Col. ii 1 ; James iii. 5).
Interrogative Pronouns.
Indefinite Pronouns.
60. («) The ordinary indefinite pronoun ns, any, a certain one, has
been given, § 13. The genitive and dative singular are occasionally roVf
Tw, enclitic.
(b) Compounds of this are oih-is, n^ns, no one. For the distinction
between them, see § 134, b, and compare under ets, § 49.
(c) The old indefinite pronoun Sciva, such a one^ used with the article,
Distributive Pronouns.
61. These are mostly declined like adjectives, and are as follows :
For the force of the article with these pronouns, see Syntax.
(c) oXXtjXwv, of each other, only used in the genitive, dative, and accusa-
tive plural.
{d) ^KatTTos, iKdoTTj, ^KatTTov, each, uscd only in the singular; with a
doubtful exception, in Phil. ii. 4.
Dependent
Demonstra- Interroga-
Relative. Interroga- Indefinite.
tive. tive.
tive.
63. There are four principal things which verbs are employed
to predicate concerning a given subject:
1. Its state. 'A.^t
2. Its actionupon an object.
3. Its actionupon itself.
4. The action of the object upon it.
The Moods.
64. The Greek verb has four modes, or moods -A the Indicative,
Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive.
1. The Indicative asserts absolutely, as IXvo-a t6v SeV/xtov, / loosened
the prisoner.
i.e., " the act of loosening him." The Infinitive, it is plain, partakes of
the nature of a substantive, and is often called the verbal noun ; being,
moreover, employed as an uninflected singular neuter, with the article in
all its cases. (See Syntax, §§ 201, 388, 390.)
7.To the Moods must be added the Participles, which are verbal
adjectives, and agree with substantives expressed or understood, as
6 BicTfxLos \vO€L<s, the p'isoner, heing loosened; 6 XcAou/tevos, hs who has heen
washed.
As the Infinitive " partakes " the nature of the substantive, and the
Participle that of the adjective, they are sometimes both called partici-
pials. It is, however, more common to distinguish them by the phrase
*'the infinitive verb," the remaining moods being known as "the finite
verb."
Both the Infinitive and the Participles are used in different tenses, for
The Tenses.
65. a. Time \^ present, past, smd future. In each an action may
be predicated as indefinite (i.e., having regard to the act itself rather
1. Present, / loosen.
Avcj,
Conjugations.
67. There are two principal forms of conjugation. In the most
ancient, the first person singular, present indicative active of the verb
has the termination jii ; in the later, the termination w. The latter
being the easier, the more symmetrical, and embracing the far larger
number of verbs, is usually given first, and is called the First Conju-
gation. The other is termed the Second Conjugation, or, more generally,
" the verb in -|xi."
REMARK.
The first person singular, present indicative active, is the form of the verb
given in almost all Vocabularies and Lexicons, and is generally explained by the
English infinitive. Thus, Xvu, to loosen ; more properly, / am loosening.
Additions to the stem are made either at its beginning or its end. An
addition at the beginning termed augment or reduplication
is an ;
into W-. This is termed the temporal augment. Verbs beginning with
the (" changeable ") diphthongs ai, av, oi, are augmented by changing the
former vowel. Thus, ai- becomes t|-, av- is changed to t]v-, and oi-
becomes oj-. Sometimes, also, cv- is augmented into y]v-. The other
diphthongs and the long vowels are (" unchangeable," i.e.) incapable of
augment.
b. The reduplication, i.e.^ the repetition of the initial consonant of
— ;
the stem with «, belongs to those tenses which mark a completed action
(the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect), and is continued through
all the moods. It takes place, in general, only when a verb begins with
a single consonant or a mute and a liquid. Thus \4-XvKa, perf. from Xvw
Pc-^ovXcvKtt, from ^ovXevu) ; -ye-ypa^a, from ypdcfxi).
Inflectional Terminations.
70. a. As a verb is distinguished by voice, mood, tense, number, and
person, five different elements will evidently concur in fixing the termi-
nation in any given case. Thus, if the phrase, we were being loosened,
is to be translated into Greek, it will be necessary to fix "the personal
ending" of the first person plural passive, the "tense-characteristic" of
the imperfect, and the " modal vowel " of the indicative.
h. The Personal endings are no doubt the fragments of ancient
personal pronouns, afiixed to the verb;^ but the original forms are in a
great measure disused or lost. The attentive student will observe the
recurrence of -s in the second person singular, and of -jiev, -re, in the first
and second persons plural, throughout the active. It will be seen, also,
that in the active principal tenses the third person plural ends in -o-i (-<riv
before an initial vowel in the next word), and in the historical tenses in
-V. In the passive and middle, the normal forms are, for the principal
tenses — Sing., -y-ai, -<rai, -rai ; Plur., -|i.c9a, -<r0€, -vrat ; historical tenses
Sing., -ji-nv, -0-0, -TO ; Plur., -fieOa, -<r0€, -vTo. Study of the Paradigms which
follow will suggest other points of comparison.
a. The Future and (First) Aorist Active have -o--. So, from the
verbal stem iritrrru- we have the Future stem irKrrevo-. When the verbal
stem ends with a short vowel, it is generally lengthened in the Future :
thus, from \v- is formed Xv<r- from Tipa-, ti|xt]o- (see § 3, e) ; and from
;
S-qXo-, 8t]Xwo-,
The Perfect and. Pluperfect Active take -k-. Thus, irKrrcv- (with
&.
the reduplication, § 69, ^), makes irciriorTcvK-. Here also a final stem-vowe]
is usually lengthened ; as from TijAa-, t€tijitik-, and from 8t]Xo-, ScSiiXwk-v
c. The Future and (First) Aorist Passive take -9-, lengthening the
vowel where lengthened in the Perfect Active. Thus, from the verbal
stems already given, irio-TeuG-, Xv9-, nix-qG-, 8tiX«0-.
forms (see § 70, &) are affixed to the verbal stem without any connecting
letter.
The successive paradigms will show how the tense-characteristics are modified
by the consonants of the verbal stem.
>
It will be seen under Syntax, § 378, that the Optative mood really is the
historical Subjunctive.Hence the Present and Perfect Optative are the Imperfect
and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The ordinary names have, however, been retained to
prevent unnecessary ditficulty to tlie learner.
8 74] VERBS IN a> : 7naT€vco. 61
though easy to conjugate, has the disadvantage of having the stem long
in some forms, and short in others, although unaltered to the eye.
a. Principal parts.
Present Indicative Active, incrrevco
Future „ „ Tna-revaco
Perfect „ „ ireirio-TevKa
Perfect Indicative, Mid. and Pass., ireTrlaTevfiaL
(First) Aorist Indicative Passive, eTna-TevOr^v
To know these five parts thoroughly, with the addition, in many verbs,
of the Second Aorist (§§ 86-88), is to know the verb.
62 THE VERB IN -w : ACTIVE VOICE. L§74.
Active Voice.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. / am helieving.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTLCTTCVia 7rtCrT€V0|X€V
TTtO'TeuClS 7rtO"T€U€T€
TTttrret'ci 7rto"Tevov<ri(v)
CTTtCTTCVeS CTTtO'TCVCTC
€7rt(rT€V6(v) C7r«rT€V0V
Trttrreuo'cis 7rL(TT€V(TtTi
7rtcrT€uo'ov<rt( V )
€7rio"T€va'as €7rto"T€v(raTC
€7riO'T€V(r€(v) eTrttrTCixrav
TTCTTlO'TCVKaS TrCTTtOTeVKaTC
7rc7rto"TevK€(v) 7r€7rto'T€VKdc-i(v)
€7re7rt(rT€VK€is €7rt7rt(TT€t'K€lTf
€7r€7rt(rT€WK€l ^7rc7rt(rT€u/c€(i)aav
1 Sec § 86.
' Augment generally omitted in N. T. in j lupf. act. and pass.
§74] THE VEKB IN -« : ACTIVE VOICE. 63
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
irtoTCuo'dTa) irtcrreuo'dTwo'av
SINGULAR. . PL URAL.
7r€7riCrT€VK€ 7r€7rtO"TevK€T€
ir€7rCOT€VK€T« 7r€7rL(TT€VK(r(Ji<raV
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7ricrTev«|iev
irt(rT€UT|s 7rt<JTeVT]T6
7rto'T€vw<ri(v)
irtOTCUO'TJ 7rto'T€vcr«<ri(v)
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rc7rtO"TevK« TreTTiCTTev/cwjicv
;re7r«rr€VK'n •T€7rtO'T€VKft)(rt(vj
04 THE VERB IN «*: ACTIVE VOICE. t§74
OPTATIVE MOOD.
{Or, SUBJUNCTIVE OF HISTORICAL TENSES.)
Present (or Imperfect). / might believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTtO'TCVOlJl.l Trifrrcvotucv
7rt(rr€vots
Tnarevoi 7rt(rT€V0l€V
TTttTTCVO'OlS TTtOTevCOlTC
TrioTiva'oi Tn(TT€VCrOl€V
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rt(rT€V(rai(ii 7naT€V(Tai\L€v
TTtOTTevcrais TTtO'TCVCaiTC
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7r€7rt(rTCuKoi|j.t 7r€7rt(rT€UKOC}l€V
7r€7rt(rT€VKois TTCTTtarCUKOtTC
7rC7riO"T€VKOl 7r€7rtOTCVKOl€V
INFINITIVE.
Present, Trtcn-cveiv, to believe (be believing). '
PARTICIPLES.
Present nom., Tricrrcvwv, Trto-rcv'ovo-a, m-to-rcvov, believing; stems,
Tri<rT€vovT- (m. and n.), vrioTivova-a- (f.).
^ The form in -eiav (^Eolic) is found only once in N. T. (Acts xvii. 27).
;
INDICATIVE MOOD.
7rtOTCV€<r0€
irtOTCV€Tai TTtCTTCrOVTai
iTTioTcvero CTTtOTCVOVTO
TrCTTlCTTCVO-Ot 7r€7r6CrT€VO-0«
TrCTTlOTCVTai, TrcTTicrTCvvTai
l7rc7rtcrT€v<ro e7re7rto"Tev<r0€
6ir€7riOT€VTO €7r€7rtaT€WTO
* The collocation am being is doubtlessly inelegant ; but the true force of the timae
could be given in no other way. The Greek language has no present indefinite.
' Contracted from -ccrot. The contraction into -« is very rare.
' Contracted from -e(ro.
66 THE VERB IN -« : MIDDLE AXD PASSIVE. [§74
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
^
2nd pers. iricrTevov 7rtOT€V6(r0€
SINGULAR.
TrCTTiVTeixro 7r€7rtoT€v<rQ«
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
•TrtO-TCVTJ 7rtorTCTrr]<r0€
7rtcrT€VT]Tau irtaTCvwvTai
ir€7riOTCV}l€VOS tj
7rc7rt(rT€v|i^voi w<ri(v)
OPTATIVE MOOD.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rto-T€T;oCjii]v 7ri(rT€Vof|i.€0O
TTttTTCVOtO 7riOT€vot<r0«
TTltTTCVOlTO TTKTTCVOIVTO
irc7rto-TCvp.€VOi cl'-qo-av
TTCTTtOTCVJt^VOS eiTJ
IXFIXITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
TTto-Tcvo-xi 7rt<TTCvcr€<r06
7rtOT€va€Tai Trto-TevcrovTai
€7rto'T€vcra)^ CTrttTTCucao-Oe
c7rto'T€V(raTo €7rtO'T€VO'aVTO
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Confide (at once).
SINGULAR. PLURAL,
2nd pers. TrtcrTeixrai irto-Tcvo-ao^c
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
TTLarevaxi '7n(rT€Vcrr]<rQi
TTio-TCvo-riTot TTtOTCVcrwvTat
OPTATIVE MOOD.
(Or, SUBJUNCTIVE OF HISTORICAL TENSES.)
Future. / shoidd confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
7rtO'T€VO-Ol|JLT]V TTtO'TCVO-oCp.tOa
irtCTTevcroio irtoT€vcroi(r06
jricrrcvtroiTo 7rt(rT€vcroivTO
7rc(rT€vo"aio 7riorT€V(rai(r06
TrtoTTcvcraiTO TTlCTTCVCraiVTO
INFINITIVE.
Future, Trto-Tcvo-ea-eai, to he about to confide,
PARTICIPLES.
Future, rrtorcvtroiicvos, Tnanvcro^ivT], 7rtcrT€va"<J}i€vov, obout to confide.
Aorist, 7r(,o'T€vo-dfi€vos, 7rt(7T€vcra|ji€vii, 7r6o-T€vcrd(jL€vov, having confided.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
(First) Future Tense. / shall he entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TTurTcvOrjao^f, 'jn(TT€v9r}(T6\it9a,
ina'TfvOya'xi VKTTcvOrjcrta^f
VLorevOrjarirat. TTLortvOi^a-ovraK
§H] THE VEEB IN -« : PASSH^E. 69
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
«7rtcrT€V^T]V iin(rT€.v6y\^(v
€7rtOrT€v'^TJS €7riCrT€V^TlT€
kTnaT€vdr\ eTrtorcv'^Tjo-av
IMrERATIVE MOOD.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
7rtcrTruC7«[i.€v
7rtCrT€f^f]T6
TrtO"T€V^«0-l(v)
OPTATIVE MOOD.
7n(rT€v6T^(TOiO TTLcrTevO-qaoifrQf.
TncTevO-qcroiro
SINGULAR. I PLURAL.
7rt(rT€V^€lT}|l€V
7ricrT€v^€tT]s
7rt<7TCV^6l€V
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
VERBAL ADJECTIVE.
7rto-T€VTos, -T^, -Tov, capobU of eutrusting, or 0/ SeirZ;^ entrusted;
7rto-T€VT€os, -Wa, -T*ov, ^Aa^ oi^^/z-^ ^0 6e entrusted,
vr](TT€vovTe<s, 7rpoe<jir]Tev(rafji,€V.
a.7roX€Xi;(r^at, oLTreXvovTO,
To the class of pure uncontracted verbs belong most with the stem-
ending V or I, but no others. It is, therefore, necessary to see how the
verbal terminations are to be adapted to other kinds of stem ; and to do
this thoroughly in the case of all regular verbs, little else is needed than
the remembrance and application of the elementary laws of euphony, as
stated in § 4.
most be noted by the learner that, when the terminations of the voices,
It
moods, and tenses are once known, and a very few simple general rules of con-
jugation impressed on the memory, the acquisition of all the multifarious
•*
classes" and ** species" of verbs in -« is a matter of euphony and nothing
else.
b. From the rules and tables given under § and the partial illus- 3, /,
trations of them given in the nouns and adjectives, it has been seen that
when o, c, or o precedes a vowel, long or short, it is generally contracted
with it into one syllable. Hence, verbal stems ending in these vowels
form a second class of pure verbs — viz., the contracted.
c. As, however, it appears from the paradigm that the last letter of
the stem precedes a vowel only in the Present and Imperfect tenses, it
follows that the contraction willbe confined to these parts of the verb,
and that there will be no deviation in other parts from the general form
of TTICTTCVO).
with -ow the stem-vowel a- makes «-, while e and o- disappear before the
diphthong. In the Infinitive, also, the combination -o€iv becomes -ow.
72 CONTRACTED VEEBS IN -o». [§ 79.
Active.
Indicative —Present.
-tt TLfxC) ^tXoj 8i;Xo)
Imperfect.
Imperative — Present.
-US TLfiaS 03
o (fyiX'fj'S SrjXoLS
'S SrjXol
-Tl
Ti/xa <l>LXrj
-«<ri(v) TLfXW(rL(v) 13
^tA(o(n(v) hr]Xui(rL[v)
§79.] CONTRACTED VERBS IN -w : MIDDLE AND PASSIVK 73
Optative —Present.
-Ol(tl TLfJiWfXL or -lorjv (fnXoLfJLL or 'OLTJV BrjXoLixL or -Oi-qv^
-OlS Tt/xws or •
wr]^ (fnXoLS or -onys SrfXoLS or -otrys
-01 Tt/xo) or -<
k (faXot or -017/ BtjXoL or 'OLTJ
Infinitive —Present
-CIV TLfJLaV <}>l\€IV St/Xouv
Participle —Present.
-(i)V TLfltOV <f>LXC>V St/Xwv
f. -ouo-a TLfiwcra <l>LXov<ra 8r;Xovcra
n. -ov TLfLOiV <f>LX0VV SiyXovv
-Tl,
-" TLjXa. ^tA.^ or -ct SiyXot
-CTttl TLfxarat <^tA.€tTat SrjXovrai
'0|ie9a TLflWfXcOa ^tXou/X€^a hrjXovfitOa
-€<re6 TLfxaa-Oe ^tXctc^e Br)Xovcr6e
-ovrai TiyiuiVTOx <f3LX0VVTaL BrjXovvTaL
Indicative —Imperfect
€- . . -<Jp,t]V ^TLfXWfirjV i<f>(,Xovfnjv iSrjXovfxrjV
Imperative —Present.
-ov Tt/XW ^tXov SrjXov
Subjunctive —Present.
-(i)[iai TLfJbWfiaL cfuXCj/xaL Sr]Xu)fiaL
Optative —Present.
-o{|iiiv TLixiofirjy ^LXoLjxrjv SrjXoLiMrjv
Infinitive —Present.
-6(r0ai Tt/xao-^at fjaXeLaOaL SrjXovcrOai
Participle.
81, The large class of mute verbs comes next in order i.e., verbs
whose stem-ending (or "characteristic") is either a labial, tt, p, <|) ; a
guttural, K,
Y, X i
or a dental, t, 8, 0. It will be convenient to retain
^ Deponent, i.e., middle /or/n with active meaning : an active form not being used.
See § 100.
76 MUTE VERBS —THEIR CONJUGATION. "[§ 82.
1. Thus, with -o- (Fut. act.. First Aorist act. and mid., Perf. mid.
and pass., second person sing., and imper.)
IT-, p-, <}>-, become ^j'*
K- and Y- „ x«
T-, 8-, 0-, „ (T.
4. Before -|i (mid. and pass. Perf., first person sing, and plur., and
Perf. participle)
IT-, p-, <!>-, become |i.
K- and X- »» Y»
T-, <r.
8-, 0-, „
;
the remaining affecting the mute according to rule. Thus, from rplp-,
Ti-Tpi/S-a-Oe (mid. and pass. Perf. ind., second person plur.) becomes first
the substantive verb, put in its stead, as in the Perf. subj. and opt.
Thus, Tpip- would regularly give the combination (third person plur.,
Perf. mid. and pass.) Te-TptyS-vrat, which cannot be dealt with by any of
'
7. There only remains the -k- of the Perfect active. Before this letter
the dentals t-, 8-, 0-, are dropped. Thus, Tri-iraO-Ka becomes TreVctKa.
84. a. To facilitate comparison, all the tenses are given. It has not,
however, been thought necessary to go through all the numbers and
persons, excepting in the Perf. mid. and pass.
h. It will be seen that the sharp labial, the flat guttural, and the aspi-
rate dental have been selected. No difficulty will be found in applying
the laws of inflection to mutes of the kindred classes.
c. The verb aytu, beginning with a vowel, takes the temporal augment
instead of the reduplication in the Perfect tenses. See § 69, h.
^ In the older Greek writers, the v is sometimes replaced by the aspirate a. Thus
the word would become rerpiipaTai ; but this usage is not confined to mute verbs or
to the Perfect tense.
78 MUTE VERBS —ACTIVE. [§84.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Present, -« TpL^iD, I rub ayo), / lead TTCiOiDy I persuade
Imperf. i- . . -ov trpiPov ^yov (.TriiOov
IMPERATIVE.
Present, -€ Tpipc aye TTCt^C
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
Present, -oi(ii Tpi/SoL/XL ayoL/u TreiOoL/xL
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, -«(iai Tpt'ySaJAtat aywfiaL wcii^cojLiai
OPTATIVE.
IXFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Middle only,
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Future, -0TJo-o|iai TpL(f)6-qcrofJiaL axOi^a-OfJiaL TTUu-OrjcroiKn
1st Aor. €- . . -0T1V iTTiLO-Qriv
IMPERATIVE.
1st. Aor . -0tlTl rpicfiOTjTL axOrjTi TT^iaO-qri
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
Future, -9r]<roC\Lr]v rpi<ji07](roLfX7]v dxOrjcroLfjirjv iraa-O-qa-otpLtjv
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Future, -0TJ(rojJL£VOS TpL(f)6r}(r6fJLevos axOrja-ofXivo^ 7r€L(r9r](T6fJi€voi
VERBALS.
-Tos and -TC'OS TptTTTOS aKTOS TTCKTTOS
a. In the examples given, the stem appears full and unaltered in the
Present tense, rpi^ui is from the stem rpip-, ayw from 0,7-, and Trct^w from
irciO-. There are, however, many verbs in which the stem is modified
in the formation of the Present. It is therefore requisite to note two
main points first, the stem of the Verb, from which aU the tenses are
:
derived and secondly, the stem of the Present^ as found in Lexicons and
;
Vocabularies.
termination. Thus : —
stem tvtt-, strike^ Present tutttw stem pXap-, hurt^ ;
Present pXairro) (for pXa/S-T-u), § 4, d,2)\ stem pi<j)-, throw Present ptWw ^
have Present racrcroi or tutto) : (ii.) into -S-, e.g., stem Kpa^-, cry out,
Present Kpdt,(D.
thus, from the stem <})pa8-, tell, comes the Present <^pa^w.
It will be seen that, as the Present termination -fw may be derived either
from a guttural or a dental stem, a knowledge of the verb will be required
before deciding to which of the two to refer it.^
^ The original modification of guttural and dental stems was probably by the
insertion of a sliort vowel (i or c) after the characteristic. So, ray-, rayiu:, Tda-aw ;
<J)pa8-, 0pa5^w, (fypd^a:. The softening occasioned by the vowel may be compared
with the effect of i upon i in the termination -iioju
§ 87.] MODIFIED VERBAL STEMS —SECOND AORIST. 83
c. Every class of mute verbs (as well as others, on which see hereafter)
may receive modification by the insertion of a vowel in a short stem-
syllable, so as to form a diphthong. Thus, <j>vy-, flee, gives ^eiryw, and
XiTT-, leave, XctTrcD. Only, in this case, the Future and Perfect are formed
from the stem of the Present, as AetVo), Aet'i/^w, XiXeicfta.
Second Aokist.
In the moods after the Indicative, the Second Aorist drops the
augment and follows the Present in termination, but accentuates the
final syllable of the Infinitive (perispomenon) and Participle (oxytone).
84 THE SECOND AOEIST. [§ 87, a.
b. The Second Aorist Middle follows exactly the same analogy. The
Imperative, however, is perispomenon, the Infinitive paroxytone.
c. Second Aorist Passive. — Here the mood and tense-endings are like
those of the passive Pii-st Aorist, the difference being that the unmodi-
fied root is used instead of the aspirated form with -0-. First Aorist,
€Tv(fi6T]v Second Aorist, irvTrrjv. In the Imperative second person, -0i
;
Second Futuee.
Second Perfect.
89. The Second Perfect belongs Active voice only, and is
to the
distinguished from the ordinary Perfect of mute verbs by having the
unmodified stem without the aspirate. Thus tvttto) (tvit-), First Perl, :
T€TV(f>a ; Second Perl, rervTra. The tense is of rare occurrence, and its
2. The same verb very seldom takes both First and Second Aorist
in the Active or Middle.
3. The Passive may have both First and Second Aorist and Future.
4r. When both First and Second Perfect active are found, the former
is often transitive, the latter intransitive. TreVpaxa, / have done;
ircTrpaya, / have fared (compare English, " How do you do ?").
—
Remark. For the vowel-modifications of the second tenses, see the
sections on Tense-formation, §S 93 99. —
Exercise 11.— On Mute Verbs.
[Vocahularyy from the "Sermon on the Mount." — (1) Labial Stems :
Liquid Verbs.
c. The First Aorist active and middle follows the Future in the
omission of the o-, but lengthens the vowel of the preceding syllable.
Thus :—
tfiaiVd) «j>av-, fut. <f>av(o 1st Aor. €<f>rjva
d. In the Perfect active, as v- and y.- cannot come before -k, various
drop the v (Ke/<ptKa, etc.). Other verbs, as <^atvw, adopt a Second Perfect,
lengthening the vowel as in the Aorist (7re<f>7]va). Others, again, form
if from fjL€V€(j).
In the Perfect passive, v- is changed into o-- or into |i- before -jiat;
e.
thus, from <}>av-, 7rec/!)acr/xat instead of 7r€<jiav-ixai, and from ^iipav-, i^-qpaiMfxaL
instead of i^-qpav-ixaL. The three verbs which drop v- before -Ka in the
Perfect active, lose it also in the Perfect and First Aorist passive. Thus,
KiKpLfxai, iKpcO-qv. Those verbs which assume a root in e- for the Perfect
active, construct the passive Perfect and First Aorist after the same
analogy.
92. Paradigms.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
INFIXITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, ayyeXKofievo^ KpLvofievof; alp6fi6vo<:
Perfect, riyy€\fiivo<: KeKpLfiivo^ ypp,ivo<:
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
VERBALS.
dyyeXT6<i KpLT6<^ dpT6<i
dyyeXTio<; Kpirio*; dpTeo^
*^* It is not to be supposed that all the above forms are actually
in use. They are given as TrapaSety/xaTa, examples, of words that may
occur.
93. The foregoing paradigms have fully given the typical forma
of the First Conjugation, i.e., and of
of the great majority of verbs,
most of the tenses in all verbs. must Manv minute variations
now be noticed, with apparent irregularities, which for the most
part can themselves be reduced to rule, or explained by some early
usaijje of the lanouacje.
Accentuation. — It may be repeated at the outset from § 73, that verbal forms
mostly retract tJie accent, i.e., throw it back as far as possible. Exceptions are
noted below under the different Tenses. When the accent falls on the penulti-
mate, e.g., in dissyllables, a long vowel is circumflexed, in certain forma, as has
been already shown.
94. I. The Present Indicative Active, first person (the form usually
given in Lexicons, Vocabularies, and Concordances i) contains the verbal
stem, often modified.
§ 94.J ON TENSE-FORMATION. 03
In the last-mentioned verb it will be seen that fi is also inserted in the stem-syllable.
This (made /* before a labial, § 4, d, 5). So iiavddvb), to learn,, from ^a^-,
is for -v-
and other verbs. The stem appears in the Second Aorist, rmaprov, ^\a/3ov, (fuidov.
Thus, ^x^ *iid <^X^-i to have, ^w, e^w, or crxv<^(^> ^(^XV^o-', Second Aor., ?<txov.
6e\- and deXe- (also ideX-), to will, ^e\a>, deX-qa-o}, ideXrjaa.
fiev- and fieve-, to remain, /n^vu), /xefievrjKa.
Occasionally the e-stem appears in the Pres. Thus, doK- and Sokc-, to appear, So/cw
(5o/c^w), 56|w, ido^a.
Some of the verbs under 5, «, have a similar alternative stem. Thus, from d/JLaprdput
we find dfiaprqcroj, T)/xdprT]Ka.
7. The inchoative form (so called because some verbs of this class
denote the beginning of an action), in ck- or wtk-.
Pure stems add -<rK-, generally lengthening a short stem-vowel. So, Ova-, trans-
posed from 6av-, to die, dvfjffKCj, ?^a»'Oj', Perf. ridv-qKa,
Consonant stems add -ktk-, and
have an alternative stem in c-.
often, as in 6,
Thus, irdax^y to suffer {irad-, with
cyp-, tupc-, to find, evpiaKU), evprjau, evprjKa, eiipov.
alternative stem, vevd-), has Second Aor. iiradov, Second Perf. Triirovda. diddaKcj, to
teach, originally from 5a-, assumes a mute guttural stem: Fut, diSd^u; First Aor.
pass., iSiddx^v-
Verbs of this class are very various in form, as exhibited in the Lexicon or
Vocabulary.
94 ON TENSE-FOEMATION. [§ 94.
the last instance; Fut., ypiocrofiai; Perf., eypuKa; Second Aor., ^pojp (like second
conjugation).
c. fiifxPT^aKOfiat, to remember (deponent), from fipa-, fiprjcrofiai, ifjLPrjcrdrjp, fie/jLPrjfiai.
by reduplication irnreT-. The weak vowel -e- is then dropped, leaving ttlttt: Second
Aor., ^ireaop, the <r- being softened from t- Fut., Tre<rovfuii ; Perf., TreTrrw/ca. (Compare
;
§ 96, d.)
II. The Imperfect Texse always follows the stem of the Present,
the Augment being prefixed.
For the Augment, consult § 69. After the Augment, an initial -p- is
doubled, as from pvo/xai ; Impf., ippvo/x-qv First Aor., ippvcrOrjv. A few ;
95. This the simplest of the Tenses (see § 87), and in general con-
is
tains the exact verbal stem. Hence it is mainly found in verbs whose
Present-stem is modified. So Imperf., hvinov', Second Aor., h-mrov.
In one verb, ayco, to where the Present-stem is unmodified, the
lead,
2\^ole, — Some short stem-syllables with e- change this into a- in the Second Aorist,
as from a-ireipw, to sow {airep-), eawapop.
The Vowel Aorist. —A few pure stems (like the second conjugation,
or " verbs in -pt") affix the tense-endings to the stem, with lengthened
vowel, rejecting the usual modal vowel.
Thus, yLvw(TK(i> ("yvo-, see § 94, 8, b), eyviav.
96. For the relation between the Future stem and the simple stem
of the verb, consult § 85, &, c.
V- are made long. Thus, rt/xdw, tlix-^o-id ; ^tAew, (jaX-qcro); St/Xow, SrjXwaoi;
Xv(o, Xv(r(i).
^aXdo), to loosen, ,,
;j(a\a(r(o.
(ii.) The following verbs do not lengthen their stem-endings for the
Future 1 :
Verbs in ila (stem i8-) usually drop the -a-- Future characteristic,
b.
))
iX-jnoi.
KaOapt^w, to purify, »»
KaOaptw and Ka^apcVo).
ySttTTTt^w, ^0 baptize, M /?a7rTto-(o only.
aaXiTL^oi, to sound a trumpet, J n o-oXttiVo) only.^
But the verbs of this class which drop -a- in the Future, resume it in the First
Aorist ; so far differing from the liquid verbs.
c. Three verbs in -i<a, originally -€/«, show the digamma (see § 29, iii.)
in inflection as v :
In this class the First Aorist characteristic conforms to that of the Future. So
iTTveuera. From efcxew is formed First Aor. i^ex^a, uncontracted.
(See d.)
(1) In the pure and mute verbs, the o- of the Future is retained.
(2) In the liquid verbs, the Aorist lengthens a short vowel before the
stem-ending. Thus, cnrcp-, to soio; Fut., a-rrepQ); First Aor., ecTretpa; and
from ayvcX-, -^yyetAa,
Verbs in aivw, from the stem -av-, generally have d in the Future, a in the First
Aorist. So, Xfu/caiVw, ^o whiten; Fut., Xei'A:d;'u;; First Aor., eXei/Kdva. arjfmlvu}, to
signify; First Aor. inf., <n)ixd.vai (Acts xxv. 27). Similarly, i-n-Kpavai (Luke i. 79),
from iiri, (paivu,^ to show, appear. But Kepda'.vw, to gain, Fut. Kepbdvu), makes
iKepdrjca, as from an alternative pure root, Kepda-,
force, or has usurped the place of the simple verb, the augment may
precede the whole verb. Thus, from irpo<f>r)T evoi, lirpocfi^Tevcra, instead of
Trpocc^rjrcvcra. The prefix €v,icell, is sometimes augmented into -qv-,
sometimes left unaltered. But a verbal stem after ev, beginning with
a, €, o, is itself augmented. So, from evayycAt^o/xai, to preach the Gospel^
we have evrjyycXLo-d/xrjv, not rjvayycXLcrdfJirjv.
Optative third person sing, has an acute accent on the same syllable, the at being
here regarded as long, as Tna-Tevaai. The same form again is found in the middle
Imperative the at, as usual, being treated as short, and the accent thrown back,
;
as wiffTevffai. Only in monosyllabic stems, where the accent must be on the penul-
tima, a long vowel is circumflexed, as XOo-ai. To present the three cases at one
—
view: Act. Opt., 1st Aor., third pers. sing., iriffTeijaai Xi)<rat <f>v\d^ai.
Active, 1st Aorist, infinitive, iriffTevffai \vffai <pv\d^ai.
Middle, 1st Aorist, imperative, irloTevaai \vaai. 0i5Xa|ai.
98. d' The First Aorist, Future and Perfect (with the Pluperfect)
Passive, have generally the same modification of the verbal root.
Thus, from Ti|xa-, eTLfxrjOrjVj Teri/AT^/xai ; from Xv-, iXvOrjv, XWrjcroixai,
XiXvfxai and from irctO-, CTrctV^r^v, TTCLo-OrjoroixaL, TreTreic/xai.
; To know
one of these Tenses is, therefore, a help to the knowledge of the rest.
But o-to^oj, to save, makes icrioOrjv and a-ecroyo-fjLaL.
b. The chief variation in the stem-syllable of these tenses from the
ordinary model is in the case of pure verbs. Usually, these lengthen
the vowel stem-ending. In several verbs, however, the short vowel
remains, as in IhiO-qv, IXvOrjv, and others. In many, again, the letter o- is
inserted after the stem, as in IrfXia-O-qv (Perf., TereAecr/xat), ixaXda-Orjv
(2 Cor. xi. 33), and from pvofxai, to deliver, ipva-Orjv (2 Tim. iv. 17).
Thus, also, from aKovti), to hea?', yKovaOrjv, aKovadi^a-ofxaL, rJKOvcr/xaL,
This rule generally applies to the Perfects Active and Passive, and to
the Aorists and Futures Passive (sometimes also to the Second Aorist
Active : see § 95, note). Thus, from dTroo-reAAo), to send forth ((ttcX-),
e. The First Aorist and Future Passive are chiefly found in pure stems
For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary. irX-qacu}, irXrjy-, to
strike,makes second Aor. iifkiiyriv but in compounds rj becomes a, as e^eirXdyrjaav
;
(Luke ii. 48) 0i5w, to.grow, has the Second Aor. participle <f>viv (Luke viii. 6, 8).
;
§ 99, c] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 99
(compare § 99, a, 3) we find rivolxOW} avei^x^V^t v^'^VX^V^ 5 3-^^ Second Aor, iivoiytjv,
1. A
verb beginning with two consonants, other than a mute fol-
lowed by a liquid, or with a double consonant, takes c Thus, o-T€<^avo(i),
to crown, icTTefjxxvuiKa, i(TT€(f>dv(ofJiaL ; ^T/paiVto, to Wither, iit^pafifxaL. So
when V follows -y-, as from 7V0-, eyiw/ca.
The verb dvot-yw (see §§ 97, 98) may have a double reduplication in
the perf. pass., -^ucioyfjiivr} (Rev. iv. 1).
This tense is often intransitive ; as from weidu}, to persuade, First Perf. triireiKa,
I have persuaded; but Second Perf. ireToida, I have confidence, Ifully believe. To
the class of Second Perfects belong the forms &t/ca, / am like (/t/c-) ; oT5a, / know
{ri5-). (See § 103.)
to write, ykypa<^a.
In the middle and passive, the Infinitive accents the penult., circumflex on
diphthongs and long vowels, pe^ovXevadai, TeTi^rjcxdai, rervcpdai. The participle
accents the penultima as Xe\v/x4vos, XeXv/x^vrj, XeXi/^ef ov.
;
Deponent Verbs.
100. Deponent verbs have no active voice, but may be either
middle or passive in form. This is decided by the Aorist.
Some verbs have both Aorists, middle and passive, with the same
meaning : as dTroKptVo/xat, to answer ; First Aor., aTnKpLvdixyjv and
aTreKpiOrfv, I ansvjered.
Deponent transitives often have each tense with its proper force.
to heal; tao-a/xryj/, / healed; IdOrjv, I was healed.
to reckon; iXoyio-djxrjv, I reckoned; iXoytcrOrjv, I ivas
— .
The verb ytyvo/xat, or yivofxai, to become (^ev-, see 94, 8, a), has the
Impersonal Verbs.
101. Impersonal verbs are used only in the Third Person
singular, and are generally rendered into English with the pro-
noun it.
The chief impersonal verbs are Set, it is necessary^ one ought; XPV^ ^'^
The following forms of these verbs almost all occur in the New Testament. The
participle, it will be observed, is neuter. Some of the verbs are also found per-
sonally :
Subj. 5e77,
103. The following are the principal verbs which thus derive
their forms from different roots:
1. atpeo), to take (in comp., KaOatpiu), to take down; Trpoatpioyy to take
heforehandy etc.); Mid., alpov/xaL, to choose; Principal Tenses, at/DTJo-w,
4. opdoi, to see; Impf., eojpwv; Perf., iwpdKa. Tenses from stem 6ir-,
oTTT- : Put., 6xf/ojxaL, 6i{/€L, 6{j/€TaL', Pirst Aor. subj., oxf/oifxat (once, Luke
xiii. 28); Pirst Aor. pass., w<f)6r)v, ocfiOrjvaLj Pirst Put. pass., 6(f>6y(ToixaL.
Tenses from fiS-: Second Aor., elSov, tSw, ISclv, iSayv (tSov, an old Im-
perfect middle used as an interjection, behold!)', Second Perf., I knoio
( = have seen) oTSa, oTSa?, ot8e(v), ot8a/>tei/, otSare, ot'Sao-t(r) (in Imp., Icrdi,
icrre; Subj., etSw; Inf., ctSeVat; Part., ciSws; Plup. ind., / knew, -^hav))
Put., ct^TJo-w, shall know (Heb. viii. 11).
(LXX.).
6. (f>€p(D, to bear; Put. from stem ot-, ota-io. Tenses from cvcyK- or
€V6K-: Pirst Aor. act., ^veyKa', Second Aor., i^veyKov, iveyKeiv Pirst ',
<fir]fxi, second conjugation); stem, eV-; Pirst Aor., ctTra. Tenses from
€p-: Put., ip€0}, ipu); Perf., ilpyjKa] Perf. pass., itprj/xaL. Tenses from pe:
First Aor. pass., ippiOrjv or IpprjO-qv; Part., prjOeLs.
§ 103.] SUMMAKY OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 103
a a
2: 5=" o
^ 2 -, ^ O • 5i
I-
.9.
-A- -e- »2 X ^ .^
ss
2k
O ;^ <^ •
3 • O • • • • •
o
•tw
X' 3. ^ ^w d
p. OQ
.^ CO
h *w t-
O
>
•iH
W d
<c ;:^
3 o
GO
a
:t
o^ * *
\ rik
1
h
«
•» 3 3
o
;^
o « w
b
;^
::k^ v^ ^ ^d •
• • •
•
?> ^5?-
^3 1- S CO CO W CO -d & o -6-
^i- CO "J i-H
> *3
^O vyy *o "3 "W "VW w O w «o i»o w a "O
aJ '^ CQ
o •1-1 QQ
© 03
o
t—t
•
s
w -d
-2 J ?:
: : : :
'd •
.t- .fe
3
^
;^
• •
d
: p •
b
o
g
•
X.
^5> <3i
X. X.
<0 c d
. to 1-
« : 3 • • (C • • •
b
• d 9 5=",^
v3 • vfe.
o i^ '
o ^P- ^o b
"3^
"«» ^w
i<. .s- .s- ^2- :^ ':< VS-
« ti ^i=; m; m d d *?i O W vt4; "fa d
Pi "^
t^
,U>
2 O O t;
5^ ^ ^o t: o q a> <^
o
<D
o
<1 <1
ffj t+H I
*^ C cc ^ •— 2 ^ ~-' ^ ^ ^ < '->
D
Ui O)
^^ -Tii
c3
ru
;3
PhI—lpHi-lP-lP^C<J<MPHf2HhH(M<M Ph Ph pSH <^> CM
iiji DEFECTIVE VERBS. K 103.
These forms are not all actually found in the New Testament, though
most of them are. Other forms occur in Greek authors, and, if required,
may easily be formed by the usual analogies.
Forms. — oxpovrai, tSwctv, oTSe, oiSarc, ctTrwo-t, ippiOrj, CiTrrj, epctg, ipova-t,
cfidyiofiev.
^ These terminations are, in the Active, for the Present (as a principal tense),
singular, -fii, -<n, -tl ;
plural, -ixiv, -re, -vci. for the Imperfect and Second Aorist
(as historical), singular, -v, -s, -v (generally dropped) ; phu-al, -fiev, -re, -cav. The
ancient Imperative ending -6l also appears. In several cases the terminations are
slightly modified, as the paradigms will show. The analogy to the Aorists Passive of
the First Conjugation will be observed throughout, in form and accentuation.
§ 106.] VERBS IN -jxi. 105
The root (rra-, place, accordingly makes lorrrj/xi, and I-, se7id, irjfxL. Some-
times the stem is reduplicated within itself (the Attic reduplication,
see also § 109, a), as, from 6va-, profit, ovLvy/xt. In other cases, a nasal
-V- is inserted, modified before labials into -|i- ; thus, irpa-, burn, gives
irijXTrprjixL.
c. Several verbs add the syllable -w- to the stem before the personal
endings in the Present and Imperfect tenses. Pure stems take -vw-.
Thus, 861K-, sJioio, gives huKvvjxi ; and oTpo-, strew or spread (with
lengthened vowel, as above), o-rpcovvu/xt.
The first exhibits the simple lengthened stem, generally with redupli-
cation preceding.
The second inserts -w- or -vw- between the stem and the personal
endings.
106. These also faU into two divisions. The former exhibits the
normal forms ; the latter contains a few verbs, with short monosyllabic
stems, somewhat irregular in their conjugation, and, from their importanc(i,
requiring separate treatment. To the latter class belongs the substantive
verb: et/xi', / am; eTvau, to be.
106 VERBS IN -jti— FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
The tenses conjugated like those of verbs in -w will be given at the end of the
paradigms. The accent throughout is generally thrown back as far as possible.
Exceptions will be noted.
i
La-T7}fii, to place. TL6r)fiL, to put. BiBcofii, to give.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
earrj
€(7T7J/JLeV eOefiev eSofiev
earrjre eOere e8oT6
eo-TTjaav eOeaav eSocrav
^ 2 Cor. iii. 13, Acts iii. 2, have irldti, iriOovv, as from forms of the First Conju-
gation contracted.
^ Matt. xxvi. 26, etc. As from a form of the First Conjugation contracted.
§ 107.] VERBS IN -(Ai — FIRST CLASS —PARADIGMS. 107
IMPERATIVE.
Present, 'laTT} for XaraOi TiOeL (for TiBeri) BiSov (for Bl^oO
la-TCLTa) TiOeTO) BcBoTco
Xcnare riOere Sl8oT€
lardrcoo-av Ttdercoaav BiBoTcoa-av
2nd Aorist, (tttjOl or ard ^
Oh (for Oeri) So9 (for B66i)
crTrjTco Oerco Bora)
(TTrjre 6 ere B6t€
(TTTJTCOCraV dercocrav BoTwaav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
* Only in compound verbs, as dpoLara (Acts xii. 7 ; Eph. v. 14), and similar words.
108 VERBS IX -jjii —FIRST CLASS — PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
1
Stem, (TTa- 6e~ 80-
OPTATIVE—-continued.
INFINITIVE.
I
Present, lardvaL TiOevat BtBovai
2nd Aorist, arrjvai delvac BovvaL
1
PARTI CirLES.
Present, lard';, -aaa, -dv TiOel^, -elora, -ev BiBov<;, -ovcra, -6v
2nd Aorist, cnd^, -d(Ta, -dv 6 eh, -elaa, -ev Bov^y -ovaa, -6v
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, larcjfiat Ti6a)/jLaL BcScofiac
OPTATIVE.
Present, l(7TaL/jLrjv TcOeLflTJV 8tBoL/jLl]V
INFINITIVE.
Present, BlBoaOau
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Bi,Bo/jL€vo<;
Middle only.
IN DICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Ofi Boy
BrjTai Ba)Tai,
OcofjieOa Bco/xeda
erjaOe Sa)a6e
Ocovrac Bcovrac
OPTATIVE.
Oelo Solo
Oelro SoIto
OelfjieOa BolfieOa
•
OelaOe Sola 6 e
OelvTO SolvTO
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
6aT7JK€{v)
earrjKafiev
or earafjLev'^ 1
1 This syncopated or shortened form is very usual. So in Perf. Inf. and Part.
—
INDICATIVE continued.
Perfect, ecTrJKare
or ecrraTe
€(TTl]Ka(7L(v)
or €cnaa-i{v)
Pluperfect, 6LcrTi]K€Lv OT {e)Te6eUeLv (e)S€S(OK€tV
e<nriKeLV
IMPERATIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjarov
Perfect, BiBcoKe
SUBJUXCTIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjO-Oi BcDO-Q)^
OPTATIVE.
Future, cnrjcroLfiL Otjo-ol/jLL BcocroifiL
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Future, (TTTjo-wv 6r)aoiv B(t)(TO)V
or e(TTco<;, -cocra,
1
^ See John xvii. 2; Rev. viii. 3, xiii. 16, in which passages the form Swo-tj occurs.
\y. H., however, read duxrei, fut. indie.
' See § 38, Some grammarians contend for the neuter form ia-Tws.
12 VERBS IN -HI— FIPtST CLASS —PARADIGMS. [§ 107.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
Perfect, i(7TaiJL6V0<; eXr^v redet/jbivo^ eirjv SeBofievof; eiTjv
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Perfect, earafjuevo^ reOeifJievo'i BeBofiivo^:
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
1st Aorist, (TTrjo-ai
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1st Aorist, a-T')]ao)/jLai
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
GTaro^ BoTo<;
<TTaTeo<; Borio^
Note. — It will be observed that several Aorist forms are omitted, the alternative
tense being in use. For example in the Active Indicative of ridrjfii and didco/u, the
:
First Aorist is employed for the singular, the Second for the plural, while in the
Middle throughout laTTjfii has the First, ridrjfjn and diSufxi the Second. The Active
First Aorist of iar-qfn is trajisitive, the Second Aorist intransitive, as will be shown
hereafter.
114 VERBS IN -|ii—FIRST CLASS —REMARKS. [§ 108.
108. 1. The First Aorist Active of riO-qixi and StSwfit, and, as will
be seen hereafter, of uy/xt also, takes -k- instead of -<r- for tense-charac-
teristic. This peculiarity is confined to these three verbs and their ;
2. The Perfect tenses of to-TTy/xt, from the stem (rra-, take the hard
^ To this remark there is one exception if the reading ddjff'^ (on which see note,
$. Ill) be genuine.
;
(stem €7rt', preposition, and -o-ra-, but without aspiration), only in Present
in New Testament; Indicative, -/xot, -crat, -rat, -/xe^a, -cr^c, -vrat; Participle,
€7ri(rTa/>tcvos.
2. Kelfiai, to lie down (stem kci-), properly also a Perfect, "I have
laid myself" or "have been laid down;" Infinitive, Kcto-^at; Participle,
110. The three stems, eV-, 1-, and e, being marked by special
peculiarities, must be placed alone. The first of the three is by
far the most important, as the stem of the substantive verb, esse,
to be. With the personal termination, -fit, the stem (ia-fMi)
becomes elfxi, I am; and with the Infinitive ending, -vat, elvai,,
to be.
116 VEKBS l^ -(ti— FIRST CLASS —SPECIAL FOKMS. [§ 110.
Stem, ea-
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present, am.
ia-fiiv
rjaOa 7JT€
'9
rjarav
€(TOfJLaL eaofieda
if
ear) eo-ecrde
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Be tJiou.
it
XaOi e(TT6
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
(0 a)fiev
v^ ^re
Ci)(Tc(v)
V
OPTATIVE MOOD.
€17]V eLTjfiev
etrjf; elrjTe
ecv eirjaav
—
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
—
Note on Accentuation. In the Present Indicative, with the exception of the
second person singular, this verb is an enclitic, excepting (1) where it follows a
paroxytone, when it retains its accent as above and (2) in the third person,;
Part. —
» /
Pres. loov lovcra lov
* Some MSS. read in John vii. 34, 36, for elixl, I am, etfii, I {will) go. This Pre-
sent tense has in classic Greek a Future significance, equivalent to the English idiom,
/ am going.
118 VERBS IN -}ii —FIRST CLASS. [§ 112.
112. The stem is I-, which, reduplicated, gives LrjfXL, Prefixed is the
preposition aTro, from, away from; the o being lost before i, by elision,
and the w changed by the aspirate into <}>.
The tenses which follow the analogy of the First Conjugation arc included, so
far as necessary, in the following paradigm, and will readily be traced.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
2 Aor., d(j)M,
-fi^, -fj
-cojiev, -Tjre, -SxTiiy)
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., d(f)L€(7o or d(l>Lov dcpteadco, k.t.\.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., d<f)i(ofiac, -ifj, -irjrai, k.t.X, -ccofMeOa, -iTjcrde, -Icovrai
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
Pres., d(l)[€(rdai
PARTICIPLE.
Pres., d<j)L€fievo^
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
2AoT.yd<f)ov, d<f)e(r6co acpeade, dcpecrdcoaav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
2AoT.,d(f)(OfjLai, -fjy
-rjraL, /c.r.X.
OPTATIVE.
Put., d(f>7j(rol'fi7)v 2 Aor., dtpotfirjv, -oio, -olto
INFINITIVE.
Put, d^i]a€<T6ai 2 Aor., dcpiaOai,
PARTICIPLES.
Put., d(l>7ja'6fi€V0f! 2 Aor., d<f>€/jL€VO<;
* This is the more common form, and is taken from the Doric dialect.
120 ^^RBS IN' -|ii— FIRST CLASS. [§112
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., d(f)€dr]TC
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., a^e^w
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Fut., dcfieOrjcrofievo^ 1 Aor., d<f>e6el^
VERBALS.
a<j)6T0f: d(f)€T60f^
from 8€iK-, show, we sometimes find the forms SeLKvvo), -€ts, -«, SeiKvveiv,
SuKvvoiv ; while the only Present Subjunctive recognised is SeLianxa, -779,
3. All the tenses but the Present and Imperfect are formed from
the stem (without -w-). These are placed separately for comparison.
* With one exception, in classic Greek, ff^hpvfu, to qiiench; Second Aor., ^<r^r}v.
§ 114.} VERBS IN -|ii —SECOND CLASS. 121
Active.
INDICATIVE.
helKvvaiiv) k.t.X.
BeUvvfjiev
BeUvvre ^(OVVVT€
BeLKvvai^v)
Impf., eBelfcvvv or feSeiKvvov i^covvvv or fi^covvvov
eheiKVUf; iSeLKwe^;, i^(ovvv<i i^oovvves, k.t.X.
iSeiKvv K.T.X, e^covvv
iBeiKvvfiev i^covvvfJLev
€0€LKVVT€ i^a)vvvT6
iSeiKvvcrav
IMPERATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., iheLKvvto
OPTATIVE.
Pres., fBeLKpvoifii
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
OPTATIVE.
Pres., fBeLKVvolfiTjv f^covvvoifirjv
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Bet^ov
SUBJUNCTIVE.
it, f
1 Aor., Bel^co ^axrco Perf., 8eSe/;;^a) egcdKco
OPTATIVE.
Put., Bel^Olflt ^(OCTOL/ill 1 Aor., Bel^atfii ^(oaatfit,
Perf., BeBel^x^oc/jLL
§ 114.] VERBS IN -|xi —SECOND CLASS. 123
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Perf., BeBei^o BeBel'^do),
K.T.X.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perf., B€B6t,yfievo<; a> €^(oafJLevo<; a>
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
Perf., BeBe'l')(6ai
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Bel^ai ^coaai
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., Bel^cofiac ^(oo-cofiat
OPTATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., Bet'^d'tjaofMac ^coadijcro/jLac 1 Aor., iBei')(p7}v i^axj-drjv
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., Sel'^OrjTi,
, ^(oadrjTL
SUBJUNCTIVE,
1 Aor., Sec^Oco
, ^coadct)
OPTATIVE.
Fut., B6L')(6r)(T0L^7}V ^(O(TBr)G0lfl7}V
1 Aor.,
INFINITIVE.
VERBALS.
BecKTo^ Set/creo? t(0(TT6<; t(OC
b. Verbs of this class seldom occur in the New Testament, with the
exception of SiUw/jLL and aTroXXv/xt. (See below.)
116. 1. /xtyvv/xt, to mix (stem, [t-iy-), only found in the New Testament
in forms like the First Conjugation. First Aorist, c/xt^a; Perfect Passive,
fi,€fXLyfxaL.
with the V assimilated, oXXv/xt), only found in the New Testament with
! — —
stem a-TToXc- Active Puture, dTroXeVo), once aTroXoi]^ First Aorist, aTrwAeo-a;
:
3. ofxvvfjii, to szvear (stem, 6\i- or ojio-). The forms used in the JS'ew
2. E-Stems. — Ivw/xt, to clothe (stem, fk-), only found with the prefixed
preposition, d/x^t, about. Present Active Indicative, third person
singular, d/x<^i€Vvvo-t(v) (Matt. vi. 30), and Perfect Passive Participle,
with augment prefixed to the preposition, yix(f>L€(7/x€vov (Matt. xi. 8 ;
Farewell
If the above verbs, with their significations, are now committed to memory,
some trouble may be saved at subsequent stages.
[The following examples of verbs in -|it occur in the " Sermon on the
Mount," and are here presented for analysis. In addition to explanations
already given (see Exercise 13, on the Defective Verbs), it must be
noted that the prefix aTro- (from, away from) with the verb StSco/xt has
the sense of return: a7ro8i8(u/xt, to give hack; and kin- with the same
verb may be rendered over; ovti signifies against.]
Forms. — ia-nv, co-tc, ccrrat, lctOl, el, co-to), icrea-Oe, y, oVra, ovtc?, ri^eao-tv,
7rpo(T$€ii/aL, 7rpo(TTeOrj(T€TaL, avTLCTTTJvai, 809, Soto), SiSov, aTToSws, 7rapa8(3, So)T€,
and, when necessary, the number and person, of every one be written
down if possible, without reference to any paradigm. Prefixes
;
not belonging to tlie root are printed in thick type. The Vocabu-
lary or Lexicon must be consulted for the meaning of the words.
CHAPTER I.
3. €v;(api(rT€tv, irXeovd^ei.
o<^€tXo/x€v, 4. Kav^aaOai (how
vTrtpav^dviL,
12. ivBoiaaOy.
CHAPTER II.
read by W. H. ; see § 97, rzo^e), 14. cKoAeo-ev. 15. o-rrjKere (see § 108, 4),
CHAPTER m.
r. 2).
Kttt, and (§ 136, 1).
Verses 1-5.
Xwpt? avTOv iyev€TO ovSc Iv o yeyovev. iv avrw t,(j)rj rjv, kol rj t,oir] rjv
TO (^ojg tCjv av6pu}7r(x)Vf kol to <f>(i)S €v ttj o-kotlo. (^atVci, kol rj (TKoria avro
ov KOTeXajSev,
Verse 14.
Kat 6 Xo'yo? aapi eycVero, kol €(TK-qvo)(r€V iv rj/xiv (kol iOeacrdfieOa ttjv
aXrjOi.ia'i.
EvpL(TK€L ^L\i7nro<; Tov 'SaOavaTjX, Kal Xiyet avTw} ''^Ov'^ €ypaif/e MwvcttJs
iv TW VOfJiCO KOL OL TTpOC^T^Tttt^ €Vpi^KafJL€V, 'Ir](T0VV^ vloV TOV 'I(jO(T^0 TOV^
dirb Na^apeV. Kat cTttcv avT<}^ Na^ara^X, 'Ek Na^aper Swarat Tt dya^oif
18. IIto"Tos* 6 Xoyos Kttt Trdcrrj'i d7ro8o)(yj<i^ agios, ort Xpto"Tos 'It^o^oC";
1 For the sense of the Aorist Imperative, and its distinction from the Present,
§ 373 may be consulted.
2 See § 3, h,
^ From every form of evil, 1 Thess. v. 22,
^ Understand e(XTi. Compare on the Beatitudes, prefixed note.
^ Genitive, by a^ios, worthy of (§ 272).
^ Infinitive, expressing ^wr^osc, as in English. (See § 389, ?>, 1.)
—
TVTiither ?
ava (up in), used in tlie phrases ava fxiaov, in the midst of ; di^a fX€po<i,
C4S (motion to the interior), into, to, unto, with a view to.
Kara, down. Gen. (down from : so, literally, 1 Cor. xi. 4), against.
vTTo, under." Gen., by (of the agent or efficient cause). Ace, under,
in the ]iower of, close u;pon (as Acts v. 21, close upon morning, i.e., "very
early").
cTTt (superposition). Gen., upon (as springing from), over, in the pre
sence of, in the time of. Dat., upon (as resting on), in addition to, on
account of. Ace, up to (used of place, number, aim), overr (of time,
place, extent).
John xix. 25. Ace. (to, or along the side of), beside, compared witli^ z.e.,
irpos (in the direction of). Gen., in favour of, only in Acts xxvii. 34.
Dat., at, close by. Ace, towards, in reference to.
the initial capitals denote the cases governed. Cases found with certain preposi-
tions in classic Greek, but not in the New Testament, are l)racketed.
( A. €19, „ „ to, „
( (d.) a. dvd, up; opposite of Kara.
( G. A. Kara, down ; opposite of dra.
/ G. D. A. Ittl, superposition, up>on.
I
G. D. A. Trapa, juxtaposition, beside.
but the applications of the two words, though perhaps equally various,
are very far from being identical
:
mthout a cause.
c. The Genitive occurs in avrov, there, as well as in other forms which
will be noticed inunediately.
d. In some instances, a preposition tvith its case written as one word
is used adverbially, as Trapaxprjfj.a, immediately, lit., " along with the
business;" e^at^vr;?, suddenly, lit., "from a steep descent;" KaOe$7]<s, in
order, lit., "according to a special course."
e. The older form of the language
employed the terminations -0€v, -9i,
and -8€ as Dat., Ace), and when they
case-endings of nouns (Gen.,
became obsolete in ordinary declension, they were retained as adverbial
terminations to denote whence, where, and whither. Thus ovpavoOev, :
from heaven; TraiSioOev, from childhood (Mark ix. 21) Tripvcrt (the -cri ;
standing for the older -0i), last year (2 Cor. viii. 10; ix. 2). These ter-
minations are also found in adverbs derived from prepositions and other
adverbs, on which see § 132.
Adverbs in -ws.
127. The most common form of adverbs is, however, that in -cj§.
For example :
Participles may also use this adverbial form, as oVtws (from wv, stem
ovT'), really.
Comparison of Adverbs.
most. So, acro-ov, nearer (Acts xxvii. 13), attributed to the adverb (in
classic Greek) ayx^ near; superlative, a-yyicrja..
^ It is possibly an old dative plural : -a;j = -ots. The accentuation generally follows
that of the genitive plural of the adjective ; as oiKaioju, diKaicos, dXrjOQy, d\T}6(oi.
* But W. H. read rdxciou. Cf. § 43, note.
— ;
ADVERBS. 137
§ 131.]
Dependeut Indefinite.
Demonstrative. Relative. Interi-osative.
Interrogative.
Time ... rbre, then 5t€, when TTOTe; when? biroTe, when TTore, some-
vvv, vvvi, now TjviKu, when time
Placo ... avTov, here o5, where Kov', U'hcre? oTTov, where TTov, some-
(35e, here where
e/ce?, iKeiae,
there, thitlier
ivddde, hither
hrevdev, hence, 66 €v, whence TTodev, whence?
thence
Manner oi!tw(s), thtis, so ws, as TT'is; how? oTTWs, how 7rw(s), some-
irdrepov, wliethcr how
ov, TTov; OTTOV bclug uscd. Compare in English the tendency to say
" Where are you going 1" for " Whither are you going V
Numeral Adverbs.
130. Numeral adverbs end in -is, -kis, or -aKis, as St?, twice; rpi^ thrice;
cTTTaKt?, seven times; ifSho/jLTjKovTdKi^, seventy times (Matt, xviii. 22);
TToXAaKts, viany times, aira^, once for all, is exceptionally formed
ocraKLs, 08 often as (1 Cor. xi. 25, 26), is from the relative.
131. Ancient verbal forni.s, used as adverbs, are Sevpo, hither, with its
plural, hevTt.These are generally employed as imperatives, " Come thou
13S ADVERBS. [§131-
(or ye) hither /^^ The imperative aye is also employed as a kind of
adverb, Go to ! (James iv. 13 ; v. 1).
avevj without.
vXrjvy excejyt.
TrXrjaiov, near ; TrapaTrXrjcrLOV, vei'y near.
Negative Adverbs.
3. Disjunction. —The disjunctive particles are rj, 07'; -7... -7, either... or
fxiv often stands in the precedmg sentence, and may be rendered indeed^
or on the one hand (8e, on the other), or, more frequently, may be left
untranslated, marking simply that two clauses stand in real or formal
tlie
antithesis. Etymologically, /xiv is (probably) 'the first thing;" 8e, " the
second thing:" the antithesis is, therefore, often very slight, a distinction
rather than opposition.
8. Result. —The " final " conjunctions are tva, in order that ; u)s and
OTTCDS, so that; /x-^, that not, lest.
137. ^. The chief emphatic particles are ye, at least, indeed (enclitic)
and hrj, certai7dy, noio. To these may be added the enclitics Trep, very,
verily, and toi, certainly, found in combination with other words, as
cTretSryTrcp (Luke i. 1), since verily ; /xeVrot, hotceoer.
Eor the interrogative adverbs, see § 129; and for the structure of interro-
gative sentences, consult the Syntax.
Interjections.
139. 1. Roots. — Words of all kinds are derived from some Koot.
For the distinction between root and stem^ see § 10. The root is that
part which remains after taking away from a whole family of kmdred
words all the parts which are different in each. Thus AK- is the root
of aK-fx-q, OLK-po<i, aK-av9a.
The root expresses the leading idea, or general meaning, which runs
through all the kindred words, though differently modified in each ;
thus,
Thus :—
Primary. Secondary. Tertiary.
2. Classes of Words. —
Without attempting here any extended state-
ment of the methods and laws of derivation, it will be useful to specify
some of the leading terminations which occur in the formation of Greek
words. Each of these terminations has a particular force and meaning
of its own, whatever be the root or stem to which it is joined thus, :
3. Modification of Stem-endings. —
The final vowel or consonant of the
root or stem will be affected by the termination according to the general
usages of the language, as illustrated especially in the inflections of the
verbs. Thus, 7roLr]-T^<;, from iroic- (compare § 96, a, etc.), and KaXvTr-Tw,
KaXvjx-jxa (see § 4, cZ, 4), from Ka\v(j>- or KaXvp-.
Classes of Substantives.
—
Second Declension. 1. Masculine Nouns. The termination -jids
b. —
(oxytone) appended to verbal stems denotes action as from ^vw (Ov-), ;
little bed, from kKlvtj^ a couch; dcrcrdpLov, a farthing, from Latin, as.
The masculine and feminine terminations -io-kos, -iVkt] are also occa-
sionally used as diminutives. Thus, vcavias (stem a-), a youth; v€avL(TKo<s,
c. —
Third Declension. 1. Masculine Nouns. i. The suffix -evs (oxy- —
tone), stem if-, denotes an agent as ypa/^/xarcv?, a scribe, from YpainxaT-,
:
ypa/z/xa, a letter. (For the declension of these substantives, see § 30, iii.)
ii. The terminations -ririp (oxytone) and -rwp (paroxytone, stem rop-)
also signify an agent : as ^coo-r-^p, luminary, from c^ois, light; prp-u^p, aii
2. Feminine Nouns. — i. The ending -<rts (gen. -o-ews, stem o-t-), from
verbal stems, expresses action. Thus, SiKaio- (SiKacow, to justify) gives
ii. The termination -rqs (gen. -rr]Tos, stem •n]r-) denotes quality, and is
gives irpdyfxa, a thing done, an action; and the obsolete pew, pe-, forms
p-^/xa, a thing spoken, a word.
ii. The ending -os (from stem es-, see § 30, iv.) denotes, from verbal
stems, result; from adjective stems, quality. Thus, from Second
/IS-,
Aor. cTSov, I saw (see § 103, 4), we have eT^os, an appearance; and from
Pa0v-, in Pa.6v<s, deep, p6Bo<s, depth.
141. The following scheme exhibits at one view the principal termi-
nations of derivative nouns. The nominative and genitive endings
146 WORD-FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 141.
are given as in Lexicons and Vocabularies ; but the stem and declension
will easily be traced.
Classes of Adjectives.
a. From substantive roots, the ending -tos (-^a^), -tov, is possessive, i.e.,
has the sense belonging to. Thus, from ovpavo-, ovpavo^, heaven,
of, or
is derived ovpdvLO';, heavenly; from njia-, Tt/xrj, honour, rt/xto?, honourable,
Note. —The same substantive stem may have a derivative of each of the two
last-mentioned forms. Thus, from aapK- {<rap^-), flesh, are formed aapKivos,
made of flesh, "fleshy;" and aapKiKds, of the nature of fl^sh, "fleshly." The
former is only found in the received text of the New Testament in 2 Cor. iii. 3 ;
but on the authority of j\ISS., many critics substitute it for the latter in Rom.
vii. 14; 1 Cor. iii. 1 Heb. vii. 16 (so W. H.).
;
8oKt/xo9, receivable, current (of coin); so, approved, from 8€x-, Sexofxai, to
receive; ^rfcnixos, useful, from xp^^-j XP°^°/^^^ ^^ '^^^- Some proper names
are of this class, as 'Ovijo-t/xos (lit. profitable, see Philem. vers. 10, 11).
/. The verbals in -tos and -t^os have already been noticed (§ 73, p. 61).
(cf. § 140, c. 3, ii.), the stem of which, it will be remembered, is also in €s-
Classes of Verbs.
verbs") may signify the being, doing, or causing that which the noun
imports. Verbs in -dw, -i<a, -cvw, generally denote simply state or action
verbs in -ow, -aivw, -vvw, causation. Thus, SovXevw, I am a slave; SovXoa), i
I make a slave of another, I enslave. The distinction is not always
observed ; for instance, irXrjOvvo) may be either / multiply, transitive, or
could not have had out of composition. The words are therefore
placed in close union, and really make one word; as (j)iX6o-o(po<;,
from ^tXo9 and ao^la.
Parathetic Compounds.
€K- (e|- before a vowel, 67- before a guttural), oul of, forth, utterly.
association, compression.
vir€p-, above, excess.
viro-, under, concealment, repression.
Again, from cKXeyo/xat, to clioose out, come iKXiKTo^i, chosen^ elect; and
iKXoyrj, election. Some such nouns and adjectives, however, are found
without any corresponding compound verb.
The Adverbs and Inseparable Particles (Tables b, c) (except a-
negative) are generally used with substantives and adjectives, not with
verbs.
Two Prepositions may be combined in the fonnation of a word, the
characteristic formative force of each being retained. Thus, KaOia-Tiqixi,
Synthetic Compounds.
When the former word is a verb, the connecting vowel is usually -i-,
Compound verbs of this class usually take their form from a compound
noun ; the verb thus appearing in a shape which it cannot have out of
composition : as, cvxapto-rctu, to give thanlcs, from cv^dpLo-ro^, not from ev
and xapto-rew ;
^iXort/xeo/xat, to be ambitious, from ^tXoVi/xos, not from
tf}LXos and T6/xeo/xat.
^ Literally, to be called to one's side: i.e., for purposes of consolation, or, it niiglit
be, of exhortation or advocacy. Hence the word UapdK\r)Tos has the threefold
meaning of Comforter, Exhorter, Advocate. (Sec John xiv. 16, 26; 1 John ii. 1.)
— —
olKo-S€(r7r6Tr]<;, hottseholder.
KttK-ovpyos, evildoer (xaKog tpyov).
alixaT-€K)(y(rLa, hloodshedding (at/xa, c/c^^ro-ts from Ik and ;;(€(f)a)).
149. The root Kpi-, verbal stem Kpiv-, primary meaning to separate,
may be taken as illustrating the variations and combinations of a Greek
word.
First we have simple derivatives, formed as in Chapter IX. :— -
Many other compounds of this root exist, but these are all which the
New Testament contains.
§151.] LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. 155
Introduction of Greek.
translate the Old Testament Scriptures into Greek and as this great
;
^ See on the whole subject, Dr. Roberts' " Discussions on the Gospels."
156 Li^NGUAGES OF PALESTINB. [§ 151.
work was executed by Alexandrian Jews, its language not only shows
the influence of the Hebrew original, but contains special forms and
peculiarities of expression indigenous to Egypt. This translation, or
"the Septuagint,"^ naturally became the basis of all subsequent Jewish
Greek literature, and in particular of the IS'ew Testament, which, how-
ever, to the Egyptian superadds Palestinian influences. It was in the
Greek of the Septuagint thus modified that, in all probability, our Lord
and His apostles generally spoke. The dialect of Galilee (Matt. xxvi. 73)
was not a corrupt Hebrew, but a provincial Greek.
The New Testament writers, it should be noted, differ considerably
from one another in style. The Book of Revelation, for instance, is very
unlike the waitings of the Apostle Paul. All, again, vary greatly from
classical models, both in vocabulary and syntax, exchanging the elaborate
harmonies of Attic Greek for simpler constructions and homelier speech.
Infusion of Latin.
of the dominant people, these are marvellously few. The Romans could
impose their laws, their polity, their military power, upon vanquished
nations, but not their speech. Certainly, there are some Latin words in
the New Testament ; but these are almost wholly nouns denoting mili-
tary rank or civil authority, coins, or articles of dress : a valuable historic
testimony, were there none beside, how ''
the sceptre had departed from
Judah, and a lawgiver from between his feet."
1 That is " the Seventy" (often (juoted as LXX.), from the traditional number of
translators.
— ——
9, 11, 13). Its derivation is uncertain; but there is no reason for sup-
posing that it was anywhere the name of a false deity.
appa/Swv, -wvos, a pledge, or earnest (2 Cor. i. 22, v. 5).
On crdpiSaTov, sabbath, see § 32, b.
phorically, for the place of future punishment (see 2 Kings xxiii. 10;
Isa. XXX. 33; Jer. vii. 31).
XV. 22; John xix. 17), called in Greek Kpaviov (Luke xxiii. 33), where
our word Calvary is taken from the Vulgate.
'P€/x(^aV, probably the planet Saturn (Acts vii. 43, from Amos v. 26,
LXX.).
Koppav, gift (Mark vii. 11), Koppavaq (decl. INIatt. xxvii. 6), treasicry.
fxdwa, lit. "what is thisf manna (Exod. xvi. 15; Jolm vi. 31, 49,
58; Ileb. ix. 4: Rev. ii. 17).
158 HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [§153, h.
fi(j)pi, fool I (Matt. V. 22) may be a Greek vocative (/xwpos), but is more
probably an Aramaic word of similar sound, denoting utter mental and
moral worthlessness.
7raor;(a, Passover.
pajS/Si, my master/ lit. "my great one!" (Matt, xxiii. 7, etc.) So,
pa/SfSovL (Mark x. 51), and pappowi (John xx. 16).^
paKtt, a term of contempt, from a Hebrew root signifying emptiness^ or
vanity (Matt. v. 22).
cra/3aw^, hosts, i.e., the hosts of heaven (Rom. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4).
(TLK€pa, strong drink (Luke i. 15).
X^pov/Sifji, cherubim, Hebrew plural of cherub (Heb. ix. 5).
c. Aramaic Phrases.
dXXyjXoma, praise ye Jehovah ! (Rev. xix. 1, 3, 4, 6.)
I.ATIN WORDF^.
—
154. a. Names of Coins. KoSpdvrr]^, "quadrans," farthing (Matt.
V. 26 Mark xii. 42), the fourth part of the
;
^vdpiov, " denarius," rendered penny (as in Matt, xviii. 28, etc.), silver
c. Military. — Kcvrvpioiv, " centiirio," centurion (Mark xv. 39, 4-4, 45).
AcycW, "legio," legion (Matt, xxvi 53 ; Mark v. 9, 15; Luke viii. 30).
25-40).
KpdppaTo^f "grabbatus," mattress or small couch (Mark ii. 4, etc.).
/MttKeXXov, " macellum," shambles, meat-market (1 Cor. x. 25).
ii(TTr)<s, " sextus, sextarius," a small 77ieasure (about a pint and a half
English), pitcher (Mark vii. 4).
Hebrew Names.
156. rt. The original indeclinable Hebrew forms may end in almost
any letter ; as, e.g.^ 'A^tovSj 'A^/aaa/x, 'lo-paT^A, 'EAtcra^er, 'lecfiOai, Nwc,
*Ho-au, 'Icpt;(a). Such forms are generally oxytone. So, 'EfxjxavovijX, God
WITH us.
^ Once, "[epoadXvfxa appears as a feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3 ; so, perhaps, iii. 5).
''
The Hebrew form occurs only in the accounts of Saul's conversion (Acts ix.,
xxii., xxvi.); except xiii. 21, where the reference is to the Old Testament king.
^ Twice, however, the apostle bears the Old Tebtanient name (Acts xv. 11;
2 Pet. i. 1).
g 157, c] PKOPER NAMES. 161
in -iah, or -Jah, a form of the name of the Supreme Being, Jehovah, are
rendered into Greek by -Las : as 'HAta?, Elijah ; 'Hcrata?, Isaiah. These,
however, take a genitive in -ov. (Mecrcrtas, Anointed^ is of a different
derivation.)
Double Names.
157. CL- ^Vlien two names are applied to the same person, one is
sometimes the Hebrew (or Aramaic) appellation, the other its translation
into Greek. Thus, Tahitha (Hebrew) and Dorcas (Greek) both signify
" gazelle ;" Thomas (Hebrew) and Didijinus (Greek) both stand for
" twin." So also Cephas (Hebrew) is translated by Peter, " stone."
iii. 18), is not a local name, but probably the Greek form of the Hebrew
word for zealot^ rendered (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 1 3) Z7;A.wt7Js.
M
162 PROPER NAMES — GREEK. [§ 157, d.
Greek Names.
(Titus iii. 12); Nymphodorus into Nymphas (Col. iv. 15); Zenodorus
into Zenas (Titus iii. 13); Olympiodorus into Olympas (Rom. xvi. 15);
Hermodorus into Hei^mas (Rom. xvi. 14). The termination -doi^s is
from hCipovy gift ; and the former parts of these compounds are from the
Greek mythology.
Other contractions are Parmenas^ for Parmenides (Acts vi. 5) Denias, ;
Latin Names.
159. a. The Latin names occur chiefly where we might expect them,
in letters written to or from Rome. The chief are Cornelius^ Aquila,
Priscilla or Prisca, Caius (i.e., Gains), Urban,^ Rufus, Jidia, Tertius,
Quartus, Fortunatus, Marcus or Marl; Clement (KXTJ/xr/s, -ivroq), Pudens,
Claudia, and perhaps Linus (2 Tim. iv. 21). Some have thought that
the last-mentioned was a Briton, Lin, of the household of Caractacus.
^ Rom. xvi. 9. This name is written in A.V. "Urbane," but it must be pro-
nounced as a dissyllable. The R.Y. has "Urbauus."
§ 159, d.~\ PKOPER NAMES — LATIX. 163
have thought that the apostle's family, on receiving the rights of Roman
citizenship, had been adopted into this house others, with even less
;
PAET III.
SYNTAX.
Chapter I CONSTEUCTION OF THE SIMPLE
SENTENCE.
Subject — Copula—Predica te.
These are called Copulative Verbs, as they agree with et/t' in their construction,
although in reality embodying part of the predicate. See § 181.
167. The Copula and Predicate are most generally blended in a verb,
which is then caUed the Predicate. Thus, eya> •ypd4>«, / write, is very
nearly equivalent to eyco elp-i 7pd(})«v, / am writing.
Mark vi, 50 John vi. ; 20, xviii. 5, 6, 8), may mean one of three things : iyd)
being (] ) subject or (2) predicate, or (3) the verb being predicate. (Cf. Isa. xli.
4, LXX.)
^ For the accent see § 110, note.
166 SUBJECT AND PHEUICATR. [§ 169.
Thus, Xeyo) vfuv (Matt. v. 18, 20; viii. 10, 11, etc.), I say unto yoti, is
Acts iv. 20 ; 1 Cor. xv. 30, etc.) The emphatic eyw (John xvi. 33 ; 1 Cor. ii.
1, 3) is very noticeable. So in many other passages.
1 Cor. XV. ,52 o-aXir^o-ci, lit., he shall sound the trumpet, a classical
:
it rains (in First Aorist, James v. 17). The Greeks originally understood
and sometimes expressed Zcv?, or 0eos, with all such words. " He rains,
thunders," etc. ; hence passing into the impersonal usage. Again <}>Ti<ri,
\iyii, he or it says; once, cVpiiKc, he or it hath said (Heb. iv. 4) ; once, elirc,
Once, 4)T)ori seems to be used jn the general sense, as plural, they say
(2 Cor. X. 10) ; but many MSS. (W. H., marg.) there read ^aa-L
172. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and the Subject and
Predicate must correspond in number and person ; whence the gramma-
tical rule called the
Acts i. 18 : cIcxvOt] Trarra to, <nrXdYxva avrov, all his howels gushed out.
2 Pet. ii. 20 : yiyovv/ rd 'ifryjxTo. ^'^ipova, the last tilings have become
worse.
and tremble.
b. The usage, however, is by no means fixed. Thus, things without
life are occasionally associated with a plural verb.
John xix. 31 : tva KaT6a7«<riv ra <rKeXr], that the legs might be broken.
1 John iii. 10 : cjiavepd ccttiv to, rcKva, k.t.X,, the children of God and
those of the devil are manifest.
The uncertainty of the usage in this matter has been a fruitful source of
various readings. It is often difficult, if not impossible, to decide whether the
.singular or the plural formed the original text.
Luke xix. 37 : *ip|avTo aTrav ro irXf]0os, k.t.X., all the multitude of the
disciples began to praise God, rejoicing (plur. masc).
Rev. xviii. 4 : cleXGeTc, 6 Xa<5s /xov, Come forth^ my people !
Acts XV. 12 : e<riYno"6v 8€ Trav to irXiiOos /cat <]kovov, tlie ivliole number
became silent , and icefre listening.
Acts iii. 1 : IIcTpos l\ koX 'Iwdv-^s ave'paivov, Peter and John icere going up.
John X. 30 : c-yw koX 6 irar?|p Iv eVjjtcv, / and my Father are one.
1 Cor. ix. 6 : e-yw /cat Bapvdpas ovk Ixok-^v, k.t.A.., have not I and Barnabas
authority] etc.
1 Cor. XV. 50 : o-dp^ Kat atjxa ...ov SvvavTai,^ flesh and blood cannot inherit
the kingdom of God.
Acts xvi. 31 : (r«0Tj<rTj <rv Kat 6 oikos (tov, thou shalt be saved and thy
house.
1 Tim. vi. 4 : e^ wv YCvcrai <|)0ovos, ^pis, pXa(r<|)Ti|xiai, k.t.A.., from which
comes envy, strife, railings, etc.
John ii. 12: KarepTi . . . avrbs Kat ot fia0T]Tal avTov, He went down to
Capernaum, Himself and His discij^les.
Here the one Subject is throAvn into prominence ; and the construction is the
common one when the principal Subject is placed nearest the verb. Compare
Matt. xii. 3; Luke xxii. 14; John ii. 2, iv. 53, viii. 52, xviii. 15, xx. 3; Acts
xxvi. 30 ; Philemon 23, 24, where the approved reading is do-Trdferai.
^ W. H. read duvarai,.
17 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 177.
In simple sentences the case is, of course, the nominative. The agree-
ment in gender and number may be illustrated by the following :
John vii. 49: 6 6xX-os ovto? . . . eirdparoC ciVtv, this multitude are
accursed.
—
1 Cor. vi. 11 : ravrd nves ^t€, lit., some of you we)'e this (these things).
182. Hitherto the rules and examples given have been designed to
show the main elements alone of the simple sentence. Other words,
however, are very generally added to the Subject, to the Predicate, or to
both, for the purpose of further explanation. These words are called
the complements of the simple sentence, and are variously said to com>-
plete, to extend, or to enlarge the Subject or the Predicate, as the case
may be.
For the dependence of nouns one upon another, and for prepositional
phrases^ see Chapter III.
righteous (man) from faith shall live. Are we to understand the prepo-
sitional phrase Ik TrtVreajs as the complement of the Subject o SiKato?, or
of the Predicate ^TJa-eTat? In other words, are we to translate "The
righteous man from faith (he that is righteous, or justified by faith) shall
live?" or, "The righteous man shall live from faith?"
Again, iv. 1 are we to attach the prepositional phrase, Kara cap/ca,
:
shall we say that Abraham our father hath found as pertaining to the
flesh r'
The true connection of accessory clauses is also occasionally doubtful.
For instance, in Acts iii. 21, it may be fairly discussed whether the
relative clause, ivhich God hath spoken by the mouth of all His holy
prophets, belongs to the word time^, or to all things.
Such questions of interpretation are not proposed for consideration here ; their
settlement must often depend not only on the laws of construction, but on the
signification of individual words. Reference is made to them only to shoAv the
necessity, to a right interpretation of a passage, of distinctly analysing the parts
of every compound sentence, and of assigning to each its right position. In our
own language this is comparatively easy, as the order of the sentence in general
indicates the mutual relation of its parts ; in Greek, through the number and
variety of the inflections, the order is of little importance to the structure of
the sentence, though of much to its emphasis.
193. The Article, 6, t|, to, the (see § 12), is usually employed, as
in other languages, with nouns substantive. The Second Concord
appHes to this relation the article agrees with its noun in gender,
;
195. A remnant of the old demonstrative use is, that the Article
often stands without a noun expressed, like our this, that; the sense of
the phrase showing who or what is to be understood.
For example, the phrase 6 jjl^v . . . 6 hi signifies this . . . that, or the one . .
the other.
Acts xiv. 4 : ot y.\v rja-av (Tvv rots *IovSat'ois, oi 84 avv tols d7rocrToA.ots,
See also Matt. xxii. 5 ; Mark xii. 5 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; Gal. iv. 22 ; Eph.
iv. 11 ; Phil. i. 16, 17 ; Heb. vii. 20, 21.
^ The student may be reminded that the English article the, the German dcr, the
French le, are also ori;'iuai demonstratives. iSo in other lanffi;a<'es.
—
So in innumerable passages.
Mark i. 36 : ^t/xojv /cat oi jict avTov, Simon and those with him.
Luke ii. 39 : Td KaTd tov vo|iov, the (things) according to the law.
Eph. i. 10 : Td €v Tois ovpavois ... Td c-iri ttjs Yfjs, the (things) in the
heavens ...the (things) on the earth.
Acts xiii. 13 : ot irepl IlavXov, those about Paid, including himself (by
a classic idiom), i.e., Paul and his associates.
Any of the prepositions may follow the Article ; for their several
significance, see Chapter II. § 288, etc.
6 TrXT](rlov, tlie (man who is) near, one^s neighhour; rd 4v«, the (things)
above; rd Kdrw, the (things) beneath; ot ?|«, ^/i06'e (people) loithout; rd
oirCo-w, ^/le (things) behind; rd ?|XTrpoo-0€v, ^/le (things) before, etc.
Compare the ordinary English phrases, the good, the great, the ivise, with the
abstracts, the true, the right, the heautiftd. In Greek, however, the usage is
from these and other instances that the most convenient way
It will appear
of translating the Article with the participle will often "be by changing
the phrase into a relative and finite verb. Thus, in the last two examples,
we idiomatically and accurately render, those who Jmve been sod, and those who
arc being saved . . those who are perishing.
For further details on this frequent and important construction, see Chap.
YI. § 396.
§ 203.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 177
201. The iDfinitive Mood iii all its tenses is treated as an indeclin-
able neuter substantive, and is often thus qualified by the Article,
the phrase expressing the abstract notion of the verb. (See ChajD. YL
§§ 388—390.)
Matt. XX. 23: to KaGio-au €k Se^twv, the sittiiKj (lit., "the to-sit ") on
my right hand.
Phil. i. 21 : TO li]v Xpicrros ... to a-n-oGavetv k€/dSo9, Living (is) Christ ...
Luke ix. 46 : to tCs dv d'r] |i€tt«v, the (dispute) loho shoidd he greater'.
Luke xxii. 4 : to irois avTov irapaSw, the (scheme) how he might hetray
him.
Rom. viii. 26 : to ti irpoo-€v|«(jL€0a, the (manner) how we should pray.
See likewise Luke xix. 48 ; Acts xxii. 30 ; 1 Thess. iv. 1, and a few other
passages.
IT
178 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 204.
Matt. vi. 22 : 6 Xvxvos tov o-to/xaros Icmv 6 6<j>0aXfios, the lamp of the
body is the eye.
206. Hence arises the general rule, that in the simple sentence the
Subject takes the article, the Predicate omits it.
The subject is definitely before the mind, the predicate generally denotes the
class to which the subject is referred, or from which it is excluded, but the
notion of the class is itself indeterminate.
John iii. 6 : rh ye^(€vvr\^ivov Ik. Tr]<s o-ap/co? <rdp| i(TTLv, that which is hom
of the flesh is flesh.
John xvii. 17:6 X070S 6 <rbs dXriGcid Icttlv, thy word is tndh.
John i. 1 : 0€bs tJv 6 Xoyos, the Word ivas God.
1 John iv. 8 : 6 0cbs a-ydirTj ia-TLVy God is love.
From an examination of these examples, it will appear that the use of the
Article with the Subject, and its omission with the Predicate, is no grammatical
expedient, but arises from their respective definiteness. Had the article been
employed with the Predicate would have read
in the above case, the sentences
thus T/ie reapers are the angels, the whole host iJint which is horn of the
: ;
flesh is the flesh, i.e., is the part of human nature so denominated; Thy Word
is the Truth, and nothing else can be so described the Word icas the entire God- ;
head, and God and Love are identical, so that in fact Love is God the blessed ;
§ 209.] yiGXIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 179
are the meek, and none others ; is Hie Laio Sin? (see on the Article with abstracts,
§ 214,) i.e., are Sin and Law the same thing? The meaning of every proposition
would thus have been materially altered.
John i. 4 : T| tw-f) r^v to c}>«s rOiv av6po)7r(Dv, the life ivas the light of men^
the only light.
2 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 Be Kvpios to irvevjid Icttlv^ the Lord is the spirit^ to
which the passage relates.
Personal and other pronouns are very frequently the Subject when the Pre-
dicate is thus defined. (Matt. v. 13, xvi. 16, xxvi. 26, 28; Acts xxi. 38, etc.)
(1) Monadic Nouns. Objects — of which there is but one of the kind,
or only one of which is present to thought, are usually defined by the
Article.
Thus, 6 ovpavos, heaven; i\ 71], earth; i\ ddXao-o-a, the sea; 6 fieyas pao-i-
Exceptions to this usage, and their reason, will be noted further on.
^ This form of sentence answers to the affirmative proposition (in Sir W. Plamilton's
Logic), in which the Predicate is " distributed."
180 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 210.
T| ^pTifxos, the desert, i.e., that of Judaea, Matt. xi. 7 ; or that of Sinai
John iii. 14, vi. 31 ; Acts vii. 30 ; and perhaps Matt. iv. l.i
Matt. xii. 35 : o dyaQos fivOpwiros, the good man, denoting good men
generally.
Matt. xii. 29 : tov 'wrxvpoO, of the strong man, any one who possesses
that attribute.
Matt, xviii. 17 : 6 IOvikos koI 6 t€Xwvt]s, the heathen man and the
publican.
2 Cor. xii. 12 : o-ry/xeta tov diroo-ToXov, signs of the ap)Ostle, i.e., of aiiy
rightful claimant of that character.
^ Strong reasons have been assigned for the belief that ** the wilderness" of our
Lord's temptation was the same as that through which the Israelites journeyed to
Canaan. See Mark i. 13, and compare our Lord's quotations with their original
reference. Note also the parallels between our Lord's history and those of Moses
and Elijah. Webster ami Wilkinson on Matt. iv. 1 may be usefully consulted on
these points.
§ 213.] SIGXIFICAXCE OF THE ARTICLE. 181
Matt. ii. 1 : there came wise men, jjid-yoi. Yer, 7, Herod having called
the wise men, tovs jidYovs.
Matt. xiii. 25 : the enemy came and sowed tares, titavm. Ver. 26, then
appeared the tares, tA tt^dvia.
In like manner compare Luke ix. 16 with ver. 13 ; John iv. 43 with ver. 40 ;
XX. 1 with xix. 41 Acts xi. 13 with x. 3, 22 James ii. 3 with ver. 2
; 2 Thess. ; ;
ii. 11, the falsehood, referring to ver. 9, (lit.) wonders of (in support of) a
falsehood.
Acts XX. 13 : cVt to ttXoiov, 07i board the ship, implied in ver. 6, "we
sailed away."
Heb. V. 4 : ti?|v Tip-riv, the honour, referring to the first verse, " that he
may ofier gifts and sacrifices."
1 Pet. ii. 7 : t| r\.\u% k.t.X., the preciousness is for you who believe, i.e.,
Matt. i. 23 (Isa. vii. 14) : rj irape^vos, the virgin, i.e., the personage so
denominated.
Matt. V. 1 : TO 6pos, tlie mountain ; the high ground overlooking the
spot. (See also Lnke vi. 12.)
Matt. V. 15 : tov fidSiov, r-f^v XvxvCav, tlie modius, the lamp-stand, recog-
nised articles of furniture in every house.
Matt. XV. 26 : tois KwapCots, to the little dogs, i.e., belonging to the
household. (So Mark vii. 27.)
Matt. xvii. 24 : to. 8i8paxH.a, the half-shekels, the well-known customary
payment.
Matt. xxi. 12 : rds ircpio-Tcpas, the doves, the accustomed offerings of the
poor.
Matt, xxiii. 24 : tov Kwvwrra, t^v KajiiiXov, the gnat, the camel, of some
popular fable or proverb.
Luke xii. 54 : t^v v€<j)eXT]v,^ the cloud, " rising out of the west," of that
peculiar character which foretells much rain. (1 Kings xviii. 44, 45.)
Acts xvii. 1 : f| Krvvo.y<ayi\ Toiv louSatoji',^ the synagogue of the Jeivs, i.e.,
Acts XX. 9 : eVt tt]s 0vpi8os, at the window, or open lattice of the apart-
ment.
cavalry who had sole charge of the Apostle when the infantry (xxiii. 32)
had returned to Jerusalem.
J
§ 214.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 183
1 Cor. xiv. 16 : TO *A|jltjv, the Amen, the appointed and usual response
in Christian M'orship.
1 Cor. XV. 8 : wo-Trepet t<3 €KTp«|j.aTL, as to the one " horn out of clue
time," the one Apostle specially bearing that character. (R.V. 07ie
horn, etc.)
James i. 11 : avv t<3 Kav<r«vt, with the hurning u'ind from the east, fatal
to vegetation. (Compare Matt. xx. 12 ; Jonah iv. 8 ; Luke xii. 55.)
Rev. ii. 10 : tov crT^>avov TTis t^^s, the croicn of the life, the 23romised
crown of the life immortal.
Rev. vii. 14 : ck tVJs 0Xir|/€ws Tfjs jxrydXiis, out of the great trihulation
(lit., the tribulation, the great one), the reference being to a special
trial.
214. Before abstract nouns the Article denotes that the conception
is an object of thought. It is often difficult to trace
individualised, as
184 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 214
Acts xxviii. 4 : ov i\ Sikt] ^r^v ovk etao-ei/, whom Justice permitted not
to live.
1 Cor. xi. 14: ovh\ t) <j>v(ris avry] SiSdcrKa ; doth not Nature itself
teach ?
So when the abstract term is used for the whole mass of individuals.
Rom. xi. 7 : i] Se €k\oyt|, the election, i.e., the mass of the elect.
1 Cor. XV. 21 : 8l dvOpwirov 6 GdvaTos, hij man (came) death, the uni- I
versal fact, apart from the consideration of special instances.
Matt. V. 6 : 7ravo)VT€<s kol 8ti//^oL>i/r€? t-^v SiKaioo-uvqv, hungering and
thirsting after righteousness, as in itself a good to be obtained.
c. But where the abstract word expresses merely a quality of some i
further object of thought, the article is omitted.
1 Cor. xiii. 1 : lav ... iy.ya.i7y\v fjirj e^Wj Lf •• I have not love, as a feature
in my character.
In determining the reason of the omission or the insertion of the Article before
abstract nouns in any given case, it should be considered whether there is any
^ In fact, the subtlety of this distinction has given rise to a large number of
various readings.
^ ;
grammatical rule requiring it, apart from the meauing of the term. (See
especially § 212.)
unless the wound had been previously mentioned, when the case would come
under § 212. The Article may, therefore, in such sentences as the following
be rendered by the possessive pronoun.
Acts xxvi. 24 : 6 ^-JJo-ros fxeydXy ttj <j>ft)vfj cf>r]a-Lv, Festus says with his
voice upraised, or " with a loud voice," as A.V. So chap. xiv. 10.
1 Peter iv. 8 : Ti\v cts eavrovs d-ydiriiv iKTivrj €;)^ovt€s, having your
love to one anotJier fervent.
Heb. vii. 24 : dwapdl^aTov l^et rfjv t6p«o-vvT]v, R.V. He hath his priest-
hood unchangeable.
The Article, in eflfect, must often be rendered as an unemphatic possessive
the Greeks saying the, where we say his, her, its, their.
216. With proper names, the Article may or may not be employed.
The only rule, probably, that can be safely laid down on the subject is
that a name does not take the Article on its first mention, unless in the
case of personages well known or specially distinguished. For the rest,
the habit or taste of the writer seems to have decided his usage.
may, however, be noted that indeclinable names in the oblique
It
cases most frequently employ the Article. Thus we find tov, t«, tov,
'lo-paTjX.So also in the genealogies.
When a name is followed by some title or descriptive word, the
Article is generally inserted. So, Mapta t) Ma78aXT]VTj, Mary the Mag-
dalene ; 'lo^jSas o *I<rKapiwTT]s, Judas the Iscariot ; '^oj(T6ivrj<; 6 dScXcjxjs
^ Thus, in the Acts, the name of Paid almost always has the Article that of ;
Pc^^"?' much more seldom, but still frequently. Both in the Gospels and the Acts
the names of the other a2)ostles usually omit the article.
186 ARTICLE AVITH PROPER NAMES. [§ 216.
a. We with 6 ©eos. It
find 0€os, God, almost interchangeably is
Ver. 7 : We
speak the loisdom of God, ©eov (without the Article), i.e.,
the wisdom of an Infinite and Perfect being, as contrasted with the
world's wisdom, ivhich God, 6 0€6s (the God revealed in the Gospel),
foreordained.
Chap. iii. 6-9 : 6 0€bs rjviavev, (our) God caused the seed to grow . . . for
we are God^s fellow-icorkers, ye are God's husbandry, God's building. In
these three clauses the word is used without the Article, as though the
Apostle reasoned, "It is a God for whom^ we are labouring, a God who
;"
ismoulding you, training you for Himself resuming, then, in verse
10 with the Article, ^^
accoi'ding to the grace of God, toO 0€ov, which is
given me."
Thus, again, 2 Cor. v. 18-21: "All things are of God, (tov 0€oO, our
God) . . . who hath given to us the ministry of reconciliation, that God,
(0€ds — all we can understand by that Xame) was in Christ . . . AVe are
ambassadors, then, as though this God, (tov 0€ov,) were beseeching ... Be
ye reconciled to this God, (tw 0€<3) . . . Him who knew not sin, He made
sin on our behalf, that we might become (StKatoo-wry 0€ou,) God^s right-
eousness, {i.e., partakers of a Divine righteousness,) in Him."
c. The title vlbs 06ov, a or the Son of God (more emphatically, 0eov
vios, God's Son), is found both with and without the Article. The
usual form is 6 vlbs tov 0€ov, the Son of the (revealed) God (comp. under
06ds). Ytbs TOV 06oO occurs, as in the Tempter's interrogatory (Matt.
iv. 3),where the supremacy of the revealed Deity is recognised, but the
exclusive relationship of our Lord to the Father is at least left an open
question while vlbs 0€ov expresses a view altogether less definite of our
;
Lord's dignity. Thus, in i\iQ\Y first confession, the disciples said, " Truly
thou art Son of God,^^ 0€ov vlos. But afterwards Peter acknowledges,
"Thou art the Son of the living God," 6 vlbs tov 0€ov, k.t.X. (Matt.
xvi. 16). The centurion amid the miracles of Calvary expresses a certain
measure of faith " Truly this man is Son of God," 0€ov vlos, without
:
xxiii. 47). But we read of Saul, the convert, how he preached at once
in the synagogues of Damascus that " this man is the Son of God,'' 6 vlbs
TOV 0€ov (Acts xi. 20).2
The name 'Itio-oOs, Jesus, when used alone, in the Gospels and
d.
Acts, almost always has the Article. The reason undoubtedly is that
the word is strictly an appellative, being but the Greek form of the
Hebrew for " Saviour." To the disciples, therefore, and the Evangelists,
the significance of the word was ever present the Savioiir. When :
others employed the name, or it was used in converse with them, the
Article might be omitted. See John vi. 24 (where for the moment the
point of view taken is that of the spectators). So viii. 59 (and, in
critical edd., xi. 51, xviii. 8);^ Acts v. 30, xiii. 23, 33, and a few other
passages. When the name stands in apposition with others, as Kvpios
or XpwTTos, the Article is generally omitted. In the Epistles this
combination is most usual. The Apostle Paul, for instance, only has
6 Itio-ovs alone four times, and 'It)o-ovs nine ; his preference being for the
appellative Xpto-Tos, while his fervour adopts many variously-combined
titles for the Lord his Saviour.^
6. The employment of the Article with Xpiorrds, " the Anointed One,"
Christ, shows a remarkable difference between the Gospels and the
Epistles. Strictly speaking, the name is a verbal appellative, the Greek
equivalent of the Hebrew word Messiah^ "Anointed." Hence in our
Lord's time it was customary and natural to speak of the Christ. This,
accordingly, is the almost invariable form of speech in the Gospels and
the Acts. Thus, Matt. ii. 4, we should read, " where the Clirist is
born ;" Matt. xi. 2, *'the works of the Christ" i.e., such works as attested
his possession of that character ; Matt. xxii. 42, " what think ye of the
Christ?" John xii. 34, ^' the Christ abideth for ever;" Acts xvii. 3,
" that it behoved the Christ to suffer."
1 So W. H.
^ Mr. Rose, in his edition of " Middleton on the Greek Article," gives a list of the
appellations used by St. Paul, with the number of times they respectively occur.
They are —in the rec. text (but in some the readings vary)
6 'It/ctoCs 4 times. 6 Kvpios 'It^ctoCs .. ... 10 times.
'It^ctoOs 9 5> 'Irjaovs 6 K6pios .. 1 „
6 X/)t(rr6s 95 >5
6K. 'I. Xpiards .. 5 ,,
'KpicTbs 122 JJ
Kijpios 'I. X. ... 17 „
^\7]aom b 'X^picfTos 1 ))
6 X. 'I. 6 Kvpios.. 1 „
6 Xpiarbs 'Irjcrovs (read- Xpia-Tos 'I. K. ... 1 „
ings doubtful) 4 JJ
'I. X. 6 K. rjfxuiu..
of Paul the usage appears entirely reversed, the omission of the Article
being the rule (in the forms Xpio-rds alone, 'Iii<rovs Xpio-ro's, and Xpio-rbs
and its retention the exception. The descriptive title, " the
'Itjo-ovs),
Anointed," has not been wholly lost, but the personal name of Christ
has laid a yet deeper hold on the mind and heart of the Church. Some-
times, again, the Apostle employs one form in close repeated recurrence,
as in Col. iii. 1-4 " If ye be risen with the Christy seek the things that
:
are above, where the Christ sitteth ... your life is hid with the Christ ...
when the Christ shall be manifested." Without the Article, we have
the name thus recurrent in Phil. i. 18-23 after speaking of those :
who preach the Glirist out of envy and strife, the Apostle adds, as with a
more personal love, "nevertheless C/msMs preached"... uttering then
his earnest hope " that Christ shall be magnified for me to live is . . .
It is not asserted that the thoughtful reader will always 'tliscern the reason of
the employment or the omission of the Article in connection with these sacred
names. Often, however, unquestionably, most interesting and valuable sug-
gestions will arise ; and the whole subject is worth the most painstaking
investigation.^
/. The name of the Hotij Spirit, nvcvjia ei-yiov, requires the Article
when He is spoken of in Himself; but when the reference is to His
operation, gifts, or manifestation in men, the Article is almost invariably
omitted. In other words, " the Spirit" regarded objectively takes the
Article, regarded subjectively is frequently anarthrous.
Apparent exceptions to this rule are but instances of more general grammatical
when the term, although definite, follows a preposition or
laws, as, for instance,
precedes a genitive.
^ See a striking essay on "The Greek Testament" in the Quarterly Review iox
January, 1863.
190 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 217,/.
xi. 16 ; Eom. viii. 9, ix. 1, xv. 13, 16 ; 1 Cor. ii. 4, 13, vii. 40 ; 2 Cor.
iii. 3 ; Eph. v. 18, vi. 18 ; Col. i. 8 ; 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2; 2 Pet.
i. 21 ; Jude 19 ; Rev. i. 10, etc.
An instance of the force of the Article maybe seen in John xiv. 17, 26,
XV. 26, xvi. 13, in all of which passages we read to nv€v|xa. But when
the Spirit imparted^ the Article disappears (xx. 22), XdjSeTi
is IlvevjJitt
Examples. — dir' d-ypov, from the country (Mark xv. 21 Luke xxiii. 26) ;
els d^pov, into the country (Mark xvi. 12); Iv d^pft), in the countiy (Luke
XV. 25).
ev dpxfi)
^'^ l^^*^ beginning (John i. 1, 2; Acts xi. 15); dir* dpxrjs, from
the begijining (Matt. xix. 4, 8; 2; Jolin Luke i. viii. 44; 1 John i. 1,
dirb dvaToXwv, /?^om the East (Matt. ii. 1, xxiv. 27); dirj) hva-^S^v, from
the West (Luke xii. 54; Rev. xxi. 13; both phrases combined. Matt,
viii. 11 ; Luke xiii. 29); ^ws Svo-nwv, unto the West (Matt. xxiv. 27).
Other instances of this idiom niight be added. The student, hovrever, must
be cautioned against supposing that the preposition is itself a reason for the
omission of the Article before a term intended to be taken as definite.^
l<€Lvo^, that, directly agreeing with them, take the Article, wliich
always immediately precedes the noun the pronoun being placed ;
Matt. xix. 14: twv toiovtwv, k.t.A., of such (as these children) is the
kingdom of heaven.
2 Cor. ii. 6 : iKavov t<3 toioxIto), sufficient to such a man (as the offender
of whom I write).
Matt. ix. 6 : l^ovo-iav Toiavrr]v, s^ich (kind of) power.
John ix. 16 : roiavra <n](i,€ia, such (kind of) miracles.
It is observable, however, that the two forms of expression, being separated
by so slight a shade of difference, may often be used indifferently. The Article
is generally omitted in the Gospels, generally inserted in the Epistles, except
that to the Hebrews.
^ See, for instance, Alford on Matt. i. 18, ck irvei''fiaros ayiov. The Article is
omitted, not on account of the preposition, but according to the distinction illustrated
in §217,/.
The demonstrative Sde only once occurs in the adjective construction, and follows
*
the same rule: James iv. 13, els rrjvde ttjv irdXiv, into this city.
^ The learner should be cautioned against rendering, " Is this Jesus not the son of
Joseph?" which would have required 6 'It^ctous. The comma at /esa^s in the R.V.
conveys the proper stress.
192 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 221
But Rom. viii. 26 : avTo to irveviia, the very Spirit, the Spirit Himself.
The New Testament MSS. often vary between the contracted plural Tavra and
raura (plur. neut. of oSros). See Luke vi. 23, 26, xvii. 30 ; 1 Thess. ii. 14.
the object which it qualifies. Thus, irdo-a iroXis is every city; irdo-a y\
iroXis, or r\ irdo-a iroXts,^ the whole of the city. r\ irdXis irdo-a would have a
meaning slightly different the city, all of it, " the city in every part."
So with abstracts.
Luke iv. 1 3 : crwreXeo-a? irdvTa ireipao-jxdv, (the devil) having ended every
temptation, i.e., every form of temptation.
^ A construction only twice found: Acts xx. 18, rby irdvTa xP<i^ov; and 1 Tim.
i. 16, tV Trdaau (W. H. d-rraaav) fiaKpodvfiiay.
§ 224, b.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 193
Eph. iii. 15 : ira<ra iraTpid, k.t.X., every family in heaven and on earth.
Some critics have questioned this translation on the authority of chap. ii. 21,
where they read Trao-a oiKo^tofirj, and render the u'hole building. This, however,
is quite contrary to usage. The R. V. correctly renders eaxih several building.
those just mentioned, ver. 15) is divinely inspired,'^ etc., or every divinely
inspired writing is also profitable^ etc.
The phrase in chap. ii. 31 is different: '"'before the face of all the peoples," i.e.,
1 Cor. xiii. 2 : lav e^t*^ irdo-av t^v mo-Ttv, k.t.X., if I have all the faith
requisite for such a task.
Col. i. 23: €v irdcTT] T^ KTia-ix.^ in all creation, R.V. ; not "to every
creature," as A.Y. Compare ver. 15, irdo-iis KT^<r€«s, where the rendering
is accurate, of evei'y creature.
With proper names, as of countries, cities, etc., the Article after ttSs
may be omitted by § 216 ; the signification being still the ivhole. (Matt,
ii. 3 ; Acts ii. 36.)
b. The plural, irdvrcs, almost always has the Article when the sub-
stantive is expressed almost always omits it when the substantive
;
is implied. The few exceptions to the former are chiefly w^hen the noun
is &v9p«iroi, men.^ The exceptions to the latter are w^here the idea is
collective. Thus, irdvra is all things, severally ; rd irdvra, all things, as
constituting a whole.
^ Middleton R. V. marg. ; ,
2 Ellicott; R.V.
=*
W. H. and Rev. Text omit the Article.
^ See also Acts xvii, 21, xix. 17; 1 Cor. x. 1 ; Heb. i. 6; 1 Pet, ij. i.
O
194 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 224, b.
Col. i. 16 : Toi irdyra €f atro), k.t.A., all things were created in Him
(Christ). See also 1 Tim. vi. 13; Heb. ii. 8, etc.
The usual positiou of the plural, Travres, is before the Article and substantive.
Twice (Acts xix. 7, xxvii. 37), with a special meaning, it stands between them
01 iravTes dvdpes, the men in all; at iraaai i/'i'xctt, the souls (persons) in all.
Occasionally, employed after the Article and substantive, it takes a strong
emphasis: as John xvii. 10, ra i/xa wavra ad iari, mi)ie are all thine.
similar to that of 7ra?. Generally the Article stands between it and its
noun, as o\os 6 Koo-fjios, the lohole loorld (Rom. i. 8). Occasionally the
noun and Article precede^ with an added emphasis on SXos, as 6 Koo-p-os
{JXos, the worlds (y^a,) the -whole (of it) (Matt. xvi. 26).^ A few times it is
found without the Article, and its force is expressed by the English
indefinite, as John vii. 23, SXov dvOpwirov, a whole man I have restored to
health. The other instances are Acts xi. 26, xxi. 31 (before a proper
name), xxviii. 30; Titus i. 11.
Matt. vi. 24 : rov 'inpoy dyaTn^aeL, the other (master) he tvill love.
227. The
Article with the neuter iroXv (*' the much") is equivalent
to " the abundance " (see 1 Pet. i. 3). More common, however, is its
use with the plural, iroXXof, xoXXaC, iroXXd, many, to wliich it gives the
1 The observant reader may trace the emphasis in the other passages where this
order is found Matt. xxvi. 59
: Mark i. 33, ; viii. 36 ; Luke ix. 2.5, xi. 36 ; John
iv. 53 ; Acts xix. 29, xxi. 30 Rom. xvi. 23 ; ; 1 Cor. xiv. 23 ; 1 John v. 19 ; Rev.
iii. 10, xii. 9, xvi. 14.
^ In classical Greek, 6 fiXXos means the rest of.
3 Probably also Matt. xi. 16 (W. H. ; Rev. Text).
— —
significaiice of the mani/, the generality, the whole mass of the particular
objects of thought. The only instances are the following :
Matt. xxir. 12 :
17 ayaTT-r] t«v iroXXoiv, the love of the many shall wax
cold.
Luke vii. 47: at d/zapxiat . . . al iroXXai, her sins — the many, i.e., the
whole of them — are forgiven.
Acts xxvi. 24 : TO, iroXXa ypd/jL/jLaTa, the many letter's ; the mass, the
quantity of thy learning.
Eom. xii. 5 : 01 iroXKoi, the many of us — the whole mass — are one body
in Christ. (So 1 Cor. x. 17.)
Rom. V. 15-19 : This most important passage, containing this idiom, has
been thus ti'anslated by the Revisers :
[We have noted by italics the Articles which the A.Y. omits.]
15 But not as the trespass, so also is the free gift. For if by the trespass of
theone the many died, much more did the grace of God, and the gift by the
grace of the one man, Jesus Christ, abound unto the many.
16 And
not as through one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment came
of one unto condemnation, but the free gift came of many trespasses unto
justification.
17 For if, by the trespass of the one, death reigned through the one ; much
more abundance of {the^) grace and of the gift of {the^)
shall they that receive the
righteousness reign in life through the one, even Jesus Christ.
18 So then as through one trespass [the judgment came] unto all men to
condemnation even so through one act of righteousness [the free gift came]
;
19 For as through the one man's disobedience the many were made sinners,
even so through the obedience of the one shall the many be made righteous.
John xix. 3 :
x^^P^ ° pao-iXcvs, hail, King !
John XX. 28 : 6 Kvpids /xov koX 6 ©cos /xov, my Lord and my God !
Heb. i. 8 : 6 Opovo^ aov 6 ©eds, Thy throne, God ! (See also ver. 9,
and X. 7.)
2 Tim. iv. 10 : dyaTrrjo-ag tov vvv aicova, having loved the present (lit.,
now) wo7'ld.
flesh. The phrase depends upon KariKpipe. Had it been tt}v h rri aapKl, in the
fl^sh would have qualified sin.
heavens.
Luke XX. 35 : t^s dvacTacrcws tt]s ck v€Kp«v, of tlie resurrection from
the dead.
1 Tim. V. 3 :
XVP°-'^ '"'^H-^'-
"^^-^ ^vt«s x^P*S) honour widows, those who are
wtdoics indeed.
Rom. ix. 30 : hiKaiocrvv-qv 8c r^v « irfo-Ttws, (he obtained) righteousness,
yea, that (which is) hy faith.
James i. 25 : cts vojxov rekaov tov ttjs tXcvOcpias, (whoso looketh) into a
perfect laiv, that of liberty.
In passages like these, the former |lause contains the general description the ;
latter limits it to a particular case. See also Gal. ii. 20, iii. 21 1 Pet. i. 10, ;
" prophets, those who prophesied;" Jude 6, "Angels, (even) those, namely, that
kept not their first estate.
2 Pet. i. 10 : t^v kXyjctiv kol iKXoyrjv, (your) calling and election, each
mutually implying the other.
Matt. xvii. 1 : rhv Herpov kol 'laKoi^ov kol 'lindwrjv, Peter and James
and John, one inseparable group.
Titus ii. 13: Ti\v /xaKapiav iXiriSa kol i7n(f>dv€Lav Trjs So'^s tov /xeyaXov
@€ov KOL (T(x}Trjpo<s ^/xwv 'Irjo-Qv XpLCTTov, the hUssed hope and manifestation
of the glonj of our great God and Saviour Jesus Christ.
Here are two cases of enumeration, each with a single article: (1) the "mani-
festation" is but another expression for the "hope;" and (2) the latter phrase
may imply, on the above-stated principle, either that God (the Father) and
Jesus Christ the Saviour are so inseparably conjoined that the glory of each is
the same (R.V., marg.)j or else, as the R.V. has it, and as Ellicott renders it
in the translation above, that God in this passage is, like Saviour, an epithet
of Christ. Comp. Eph. v. 5 2 Thess. i. 12 ; ; 2 Pet. i. 1. See also the phrase,
''the God and Father of our Lord Jcsils Christ,'' Eph. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rom.
XV. 6; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi. 31 (1 Cor. xv. 24): not God, even the Fatlier, etc.
James iii. 11 : to jXvkv kol to inKpov, the sweet and the bitter, from
their very nature separate.
2 Thess. i. 8 : tois ^rj etSoo-t (s)c6v, koI tois /x^ vTraKovovcrt, k.t.X., to those
toho knoto not God, and to those u'ho obey not the Gospel of our Lord
Jesits Christ; two distinct classes, incurring different degrees of punish-
ment.
Heb. xi. 20 evXoyrja-cv 'IcraaK tov 'laKoifS kol rhv 'Hcrav, Isaac blessed
:
Jacob and Esau. Both received a blessing, but not together, and not
the same.
The same enumeration may be found in different places with and "snthout the
separating article. This arises from a difference in the wTiter's point of view in
each particular case. So in 1 Thess. i. 7, the Apostle ^^Tites ttj MaveSovt^ koL
TT] 'Axaia but in ver. 8, ry 'MaKedopig. Kal "Axai'g.
; In the former verse he seems
to contemplate the different directions in which the influence of Thessalonian
Christianity spread ; in the latter, the uniforvi spread of that influence.
Such distinctions may be slight, but they are real, and must be noted for an
accurate understanding of the "Word of God.
Rom. ii, 14 : orav yap ^0vt], k.t.A.., For tvhen GentiUs do the things
contained in the law ; not the Gentiles, as though the case were ordinary,
law as the type of law in general, and sometimes to law in the abstract,
including every form of Divine command or moral obligation. In the
following passages the R.V. generally has the laic in the text, and law in
the margin.
Rom. ii. 25 : iav vojiov Trpao-o-Ty?, if thou keepest law, i.e., if thou dost
obey, in general ; so the verse continues, but if thou be a breaker of
laio, etc.
Rom. V. 20 :
" there came in by the way a law.''
James iv. 11 " He that speaketh evil of his brother, and judgeth his brother,
:
speaketh evil of law, and judgeth law ; but if thou judgest law, thou art not a
doer of law, but a judge."
These passages, taken in connection with the numerous instances in which the
Law is specifically spoken of, Mill illustrate the importance of a constant atten-
Instances have been given already, § 211. The omission of the Article in
passages like Rom. i. 16, ii. 9, 10, 'Invdaico re KaVEWrjui., to both Jew and Greek,
is owing to the antithetic form. (See § 233.
237. Some words, like <r«|jLa, body, KapSia, heart, when predicated
of several individuals, are occasionally employed in the singular. The
plural, however, is more common. Thus we read, rh o-oina vfxdv and
TO, o-wfiara v/xwr, yoUT body or bodies; r\ KapSia or al KapSiai avruiv, their
heart or hearts.
The word wpoa-wirov, face, is always singular in such phrases as they fell upon
their face, except in the Revelation, vii. 11, xi. 16.
238. Many abstract nouns are used in the plural, for repeated
exemplifications of the quality denoted.
2 Pet. iii. 11: iv dytats dvao-Tpo4>ais kol tva-€^dais, lit., m hoIy conducts
and godlinesses.
239. The plural is occasionally used, like the English rhetorical tve,
constituent parts, or (h) from the writer having formed the conception
generally, without limitation.
Analogous words are avaroXaC, east; Svo-^aC, icest;'^ tA 8€|id, the right;
TO, dpio-T£pd or €v(ovv}jLa, the left, where some such word as ^jarf6" may be
supplied. These words are also found in the singular.
Some miscellaneous terms to be explained in a similar way are
Heb. ix. 12, etc.: ets rd dyia, into the Sancticary, "the Holies," sometimes,
as in ver. 3, dyia ayiuv, Holies of holies,^ suggesting that every spot and every
object there was consecrated.
Names of festivals are sometimes plural
iyKaivta, feast of dedication (John
:
or by ets rous aiCJva^ (Luke i. 33; Rom. i. 25, ix. 5; Heb. xiii. 8, etc.); while
the emphatic /o?" ever and ever is expressed by ets rous alCovas tCjv alibvcjv, to the
ages of ages (Heb. xiii. 21 1 Pet. iv. 11; and Rev. ^^a^siwi). (See Vocabulary.)
;
^ Or perhaps the plural in these words may denote repetition. The sun rises or
sets there " again and again."
2 Of the plural in this sense there is no other instance in the Scriptures, and only
one in the classics. The phiral of blood is often found in the LXX. (from the Hebrew),
where violent bloodshedding is denoted.
In this expression (not in the other), some would read dyla (fem.), as referring to
"*
plural: "the parts of the firmament." There is also "the third heaven."
Matthew almost always has the plural ; Luke, almost always the singular Mark, ;
most usually the singular ; John, the singular always, except in Rev. xii. 12.
The other 2)arts of the New Testament vary between the two almost equally.
Other plurals of this kind will be sufficiently explained in the Vocabulary.
where persons are said generally to do what was really done by one of
their number. Thus, Matt. xxvi. 8, " his disciples said. To what pur-
pose," etc. while in John xii. 4 we read, " one of his disciples, Judas"
;
Compare Mark vii. 17 with Matt. xv. 15; Matt. xiv. 17 and Mark vi. 38
with John vi. 8, 9 ; Matt. xxiv. 1 with Mark xiii. 1 Matt, xxvii. 37 ;
with John xix. 19; Matt, xxvii. 48 and Mark xv. 36 with John xix. 29.
So in Luke xxii. QQ, Xcyovt^s, when in all probability only one is meant.
See also the same idiom in John xi. 8; Luke xx. 21, 39, xxiv. 5 (tlirov);
Matt. XV. 1, X^YovTcs ; xv. 12, Xc'-youo-iv.^
Jericho (Matt. xx. 30-34 Mark x. 46-52 Luke xviii. 35-43) may possibly be
; ;
harmonised in a similar way, although some expositors have thought that two
different transactions of the kind then took place. ^
^ Stuart's "
Xew Testament Syntax."
- Lee on Inspiration, p. 393 Burgon's " Inspiration and Interpretation," p. 67.
•
See, however, " Bible Handbook," part ii., § 148 Trench on the Miracles, ;
p. 429.
§ 242.] NOMTXATIYE AND VOCATIVE CASES. 205
CASE.
The Nominative and Vocative.
Matt. xii. 36 : irdv pTJjia apyhv . . . aTroSwcrovcrt Trepl avTOv Aoyov, every
idle word . . . they shall give account of it.
Acts vii. 40 : 6 Mw<ri]s oStos ... ovk oiha^ev, k.t.X., this Moses ... toe
Rev. ii. 26 : 6 vikwv koI 6 rrjpwv ... Stoao) aurw i^ovciav, he that over-
cometh, and that keepeth ...to him I will give authority. So iii. 12, 21.
Matt. XV. 32: Sri, ijdT] rj/xepai rpeTs, TrpoapLevovai fj.oi, because they continue icith
Me now three days. So Mark viii. 2.^
Luke ix. 28 : iyivero . . . Cicd ijnepai oKTib, it came to pass, about eight days after
the sayings.
^ In both passages the ordinary text has ijfi^pai, the usual case in such construc-
tion. (See § 286.) But aU critical editions give the Nominative
206 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASES. [§ 242.
Snch cases may possibly be resolved into ellipsis, as, in the former instance, of
the substantive verb some such word as 5id(rr77/xa, interval, the
; in the latter, of
true Subject of tyevero and in apposition with ijfxepai..
;
Matt. iii. 17: tSov, <|>«vtj ck twv ovpavtoi/, helioJd (there was heard) a
voice out of the heavens.
Heb. ii. 13 : Ihov iy<a koI to, iraiS^a, K.r.X., behold, (here am) I, and the
children which Thou gavest Me.
h. The word ovo|ia, introducing the name of a person or place, is
generally found in the Dative, oi/o/xart, bfj name, (See § 280.) Occa-
sionally, however, it occurs in the Nominative, with the name as predi-
cate, and the copula omitted. So John i. 6, eyeVero avOpojiroq ... 6vo\ia
244. The use of the Nominative for the Vocative has been
already noted, § 228, where see examples.
The usage is in fact elliptical, the true Vocative being in the personal
pronoun, crv or {i/xcis, omitted : Thou . . . who art I or, Ye ... loho are I
Matt. vii. 23 : airoxoipeiTe ... oi cpYatofievoi tyjv avojxiav, depart, (ye who
are) the workers of iniquity !
Mark xiv. 36 tt/3/5a 6 irar^p, Abba, (Thou who art) the Fathei'
:
ToKalirwpos 670? &v6pcjiros, v:rctch€d man tliat I am ! and xi. 33, w ^6.60%
irXovTov, the depth of the riches !
The Genitr^e.
246. The Genitive Case (see § 11) primarily signifies motion from,
answering to our question, Whence ? From this general meaning
arise many modifications, including the several notions expressed
in English by the prepositions of ox from.
1. Origin. 4. Partition.
2. Separation. 5. Object.
3. Possession. 6. Relation.
7. The Genitive Absolute.
The Genitive with Prepositions will be treated of hereafter. (See § 291, sqq.)
^ These significations are again reduced, by Dr. Donaldson and others, to three :
The name of the case, yeviKri, designates it as expressive of the genus to which any-
thing whether as belonging to
is referred, it or classed under it (Max ^iiiller); or,
according to others, the source from which it is generated, or supposed to spring.
208 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN, [§ 248.
I. Origin.
Rom. XV. 4 : 8ta rrys Tra/oaKXrjo-ccos twv Ypa<|)wv, through the comfort of
the Scriptures.
Col. i. 23 : ttTTo T^? eXTTtSog tov cvayycX^ov, from the hope of the Gospel.
Col. ii. 12: 8ia r^? ttio-tcw? rfis cvcp-ytCas tov ®€ov, through the faith of
the mighty working of God, i.e., mightily wrought by Him.
John X. 3 : to, Trpo^ara rr\<i <|)wvf]s avrov clkovcl, the sheep hear his voice.
Luke XV. 25 : ^kovctc <ru|jL<|>u)vias ^at x°P"v, he heard music and dancing.
It Avill be seen that this verb is construed with a Genitive either of the
person or the thing. Generally, however, the thing is in the Accusative, as tlic
immediate object (especially \byov, \6yovs, Matt. vii. 24, xiii. 20, etc. ). When
both are expressed together, the thing is in the Accusative, and the person in
the Genitive (Acts i. 4); sometimes with a preposition (2 Cor.xii. 6 Acts x. 22). ;
: )
The Genitive of the thing probably inclines to the partitive sense. Compare
Acts ix. 7, where of Saul's companions it is said, aKovopres ttjs (pcovrjs, hearing the
voice, with chap. xxii. 9, ttjv (pwvriv ovk -rjKovaav, they heard not the voice. They
heard of the voice, i.e., its souml, but not ivhat it said.
Luke xiv. 24: ovSets ... yevo-crai fjLov tov Seiin'ov, no 07ie shall taste of
my supper.
Acts xvii. 27 John i. 1). "A (mount) that might be touched" (Heb. xii. 18),
; 1
where this word is used, does not contradict v. 20, as it simply refers to the
nature of the mountain, paljxiblc or ''material." (See R.V. marg.
1 Tim. iii. 5 : ttcos €KK\T]<rias ©eov iTnfjieXi^creTaL, hoio shall he take care
of the church of God ?
Heb. xii. 5 : ^xr] oXtywpct TraiSeias Kvptov, do not slight the cliastisement
of the Lord.
^ Mr. Jelf (Kiihner's Greek Grammar) explains the difference simply as a vaiiation
in themode of expression the Accusative calling attention rather to the action,
;
the Genitive to the material, as in English, "He eats some meat" (Gen.); "He
eats meat" (Ace). " 'The gift,' " he
Bengel's view of this passage is more subtle.
says, "can be only partially received in this life; while 'the word' essentially
belongs to us now." But see Alford's note, comparing the Accusative with that
in John ii. 9.
210 THE GENITIVE OF OlilGIN. [§ 249, C.
Hob. xii. 5 : iKXeXrjo-Oe Tfjs irapaKXTio-ews, j/e have entirely forgotten the
exlLortation.
Many grammarians prefer to class the Genitive after all these verbs
under the head of " Partition." (See § 261, sqq.)
The Genitive of the person is used after KarT/yopew, to accuse, lit., " to
Matt. xii. 10 : Iva. KaT-qyoprfcrmcnv avrov, that they might accuse him.
John xxi. 11 : TO Slktvov ... jx^cttov lx0v«v, the net ...fall of Jishes.
John ii. 7 : ye/xtcrare tcls vSptas iiSaros, fill the water-j^ots with water.
Rom. iii. 23: Travre^ . . .va-TepovvraL tt]s 86|t]s tov ®€oZ\ all ...come short
of the glory of God.
James i. 5 : ci rt? vfxiov /Venrerat o-o0ta?, if any of you lacketh icisdom.
This GLMiitive is referred by some to the head of " Separation ;" by others to
" Partition."
1 Tim. i. 6 : <Sv rtve? acrTox'qcravTe';, from which some liaviwj (jonc wide
in aim.^
253. Under this head may be placed the important rule, that the
object of comparison is expressed by the Genitive, whether after
See on the Comparative, § 320. This Genitive, also, is one of Separation the ;
two things compared being mentally set apart from each other. So in Latin,
the Ablative case is employed.
AVlien tlie word than is expressed in Greek (by the conjunction 17), the thing.s
compared are put in ai3i3osition.
1 Cor. XV. 41 : aa-njp yap do-repos Sia<f>ip€L, for star differeth from star.
John xiii. 16 : ovk €(ttl bovXos fxcL^oiv tov Kvpiov avrov, a servant is not
greater than his master.
John xxi. 15 : dyaTra? fx€ ttXclov tovtwv ; lovest thou me more than
these ?
Mark iv. 31 ; ixiKponpov ov irdvrwv t«v o-ireppidTCDv, being less than all
the seeds, although itself a seed. So Matt. xiii. 32.
1 Ellicott.
' The Hebrew language yet more clearly identifies comparison and separation, by
its use of the preposition /Vyy// with the simple adjective. Thus, "greater than he"
would be expressed by the phrase, "great from him;" the Hebrews "conceiving
pre-eminence as a taking out, a designating from the multitude" (Gesenius). So in
Homer, ck wclvtuv, inorc fhau all. In modern Greek the preposition airo is ubed after
the comparative.
212 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [§ 253.
1 Cor. xiii. 13: /xct^wv he tovtcov y dyaTn;, loue is f/reater than these;
love, nevertheless, being one of the three.
A coini)arative and superlative are combined in Eph. iii. 8, so that the fol-
lowing Genitive may be referred to this rule or to the partitive construction :
€1x61 Tip iXaxi-CTOT^pii} irdvTwv ayiiav, to me, who am less than the least of all saints.
III. Possession.
may mean " the kingdom set up by heavenly powers," or "the 'kingdom governed
by these powers." So, again, the notion of "belonging to" attaches to the
Genitive where that of " originated by" has disappeared.^
1. vios. Matt. iv. 21 : 'laKwySov t6v tov ZeySeSatov, James the {son) of
Zebedee.
John vi. 71: tov 'lovhav ^t/xwi/os, {the) Judas {son) of Simon.
John xxi. 15, 16, 17 : '^lixcdv 'Iwva, Simon {son) of Jonas.
1 Compare Mliller's " Lectures on the Science of Language," vol. i., p. 105.
—
5. -yvW). Matt. i. 6 : e/c Trj<i rov Ovpcov, from the (wife) of Uriah. So
John xix. 25.
of the ruler of the sijnayogue. This is clear, as the ruler Avas himself
with Jesus. So, perhaps, John xviii. 28.
Acts ii. 27, 31 : ct? aZov} "thou wilt not abandon my soul" to (the
habitations) of Hades — a classical phrase ; or, " to (the power) of the
unseen world." In Ps. xvi. 10 some copies of the LXX. read aSov,
others a^Y}v.
In Luke ii. 49, h
roh rov irarpos fiov has been variously read, in my Father's
business (A.V.), or in my Father s house (R.V.) (plural, as in John xix. 27, ra
tdia). The former gives the wider significance " among my Father's matters" :
In such cases the person or thing is spoken of as belonging to the virtue, vice,
or other abstraction. The phrase may often be idiomatically rendered by turning
the Genitive into an adjective. Thus, Luke xvi. 8, rov oIkovoixov rijs ddiKias, the
steward of injustice, may be read the unjust steward. But such renderings lose
the force of the original.
James ii. 4 : KpiraX 8iaXo"yi(r|iwv Tro\y\p(aVi J2idges of evil thoughts^ " evil-
thinking judges."
^ W. H. read aS-qv.
214 THE rOSSESSIVK GENITIVE. [§ 258.
2 Cor. iv. 6 t^s yviba-eui ttjs do^Tjs rod Qeov, of the knowledge of the glory of
:
God, i.e., the glory Avhich belongs to God, and which He reveals in Christ; not,
certainly, '*
the glorious God."
Eph. i. 6 : els ^iraivov So^rjs riji x^P^"^^^ airrov, to the praise of the glory of His
grace, i.e., the glory which characterises Divine grace; not "glorious praise" or
** glorious grace."
Col. i. 11 : Kara to Kparos ttjs 86^r]s, according to the might of His glory (R.\.);
"not 'His glorious power' (A.V,, Beza, etc.), hut 'the power which is the
peculiar characteristic of His glory' ; the Genitive belonging to the category of
the Possessive Genitive" (EUicott).
i. 3: tw p-Zj/xan rrjs dvydfxeojs ain-ov, by the word of His power ; belonging
Heb.
to as its true utterance, " not," says Alford, " to be weakened into the com-
it,
"
paratively unmeaning 'by His powerful word.'
See also Rom. vii. 24 ; Col. i. 13 ; Rev. iii. 10.
2 Pet. ii, 6 : ir^Xeis 21o8o|x«v Kal Fojiidppas, {the) cities of Sortom anrf
Gomorrah.
John ii. 21 : Trept tov vaov tov otwimitos avrov, concerning the temple of
his body.
Rom. iv. 11: <rTi}i€iov cXa^c ircpirofjLijs,^ he received the sign of circum-
cision . So Acts iv. 22.
2 Cor. V. 1 : Tj oUCa tov o-ki^vovs, the house of our tabernacle,
See also Eph. vi. 14-16 ; Heb. vi. 1 ; and many other passages.
The difficult phrase, Eph. iv. 9, cts to. Karurrepa /x^pi} ttjs yrjs, has by many
interpreters been regarded as an instance of the Genitive of Apposition ;
" to
the lower earth," "to earth beneath," contrasted with such phrases as "the
height of heaven" (Isa. xiv. 14). See Bishop Ellicott's note, in which the
opposite view (the descent into Hades) is maintained.
^ W. H. marg. irepLTOfx-qv.
- "The Hrstfruits (of our inheritance) consisting of the Holy Spirit" (Dr. Vaughau
on Rom. viii. 23. So Winer.).
J — — — — —
noun. This arrangement is very rarely followed in the New Testament 1 Pet. :
iii. 20, 7] Tov Qeov fxaKpodv/jua, tlie longsuffering of God; Heb. xii. 2, rbv r^s
iriareus apxfiyov, the author of the faith. Occasionally the Article of the
governing noun is rejjcated before the Genitive ; also a classic idiom : 1 Cor.
i. 18, 6 X670S 6 TOV ffravpoO, the doctrine of the Cross. For another arrangement,
see § 196.
In Heb. vi. 2, §airTL(Tp.(2v bibaxv^^ it has been questioned which word is the
governing one, doctrine of baptisms, ov baptisms of doctrine. Winer favours the
latter (Grammar, § xxx. 3, note 4).
lY. Partition.
Matt. XV. 24 : Ttt Trpo^ara to. aTroXwAoTa oikov 'IcrpaTyA, the lost sheep of
the house of Israel.
262. This Genitive most commonly fonnd after (1) partitive adjec-
is
tives, (2) the indefinite and interrogative pronouns, (3) the numerals, and
(4) adjectiATs in the superlative degree.
1. Partitive Adjectives :
Matt. iii. 7 : ttoXXov? t«v 4>api(raL(»)v kol 2a88ovKai«v, many of the Pha-
risees and Sadducees.
Luke xix. 8 : ra rjixLo-r] t«v virapxovTcov, the half (halves) of my goods.
2. Pronouns
Matt. ix. 3 : Ttve? t«v YpafifAar^wv, some of the Scribes.
Kev. viii. 7 : to Tpirov rr\s yf\9, the third of the land. So vers. 8-18.
Mark xi. 2 : ot-Set? dvOpwirwv, lit., no one of men.
But the preposition eV is more frequently used after numeral adjectives.
4. Superlatives :
Heb. ii. 14 : to. TratSt'a KeKOLv^vrjKev alijiaTos kol (rapKos, tJie children are
partakers of flesh and blood. This verb is found also with a Dative
Rom. XV. 27 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 13 ; 2 John 11.
Luke viii. 54 : KpaTrja-a^ tt]s x^'-P^s avrrjs, having taken hold of her
hand.
The strictly partitive sense is well illustrated by this verb. When the ivhole
is grasped, Kpariw takes an Accusative, as in Matt. xiv. 3, etc.
—
So Matt. ii. 14: wktos, by night; Luke xviii. 7: rijicpas koI vvktos,
day and night; Gal. vi. 17: tov Xonrov, /o?^ the rest (future); Luke
V. 19 iroCos (oSov) elcrcveyKoja-Lv avrov, by ichat {icay) they might bring
:
him in.
Prepositions are, however, more generally employed to define these relations.
Heb. X. 39 : i^/xets Se ovk iafxkv viroo^oXfjs . . . dWa ttiotcws, but toe are
not of a desertion (literally), but of faith.
Kom. ix. 9 : lirayycXias yap 6 Xoyos ovro?, for this loord was one of
promise.
The Genitive in this connection may, however, have other significations, as,
e.g., that of Possession
1 Cor. iii. 21 : Trdura v/jlup ia-riv, all things are ymirs.
V. Ohjed.
The fundamental meaning of the Genitive is here also very apparent, tlie
object of a sentiment heing, in another view of it, the source or occasion of its
existence. Thus, ^x^'''^ iriaTiv Qeov (]\[avk xi. 22), have faith in {or toivards)
(rod, really means, "have such faith as his character excites." Compare
Col. ii. 12
John ii. 17: 6 X,r^o<i tov oI'kov (tov, the zeal concerning thy house. Com-
pare Titus ii. 14.
John xvii. 2 : c^ovo-Cav irdo-rjs o-apKos, power over all flesh. For similar
constructions of c^ovo-ia, see Matt. x. 1 ; Mark vi. 7 ; 1 Cor. ix. 12.
Col. ii. 18: 0pT]o-K€£a twv dyycXwv, worship paid to anrjels. (See Ellicott,
in loc.)
Rom. viii. 35 : what shall separate us from the love of Christ ? So ver. 39.
2 Thess. iii. 5 : the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God.
In Rom. v. 5, "the love of God hath been shed abroad in our hearts," Dr.
Vaughan WTites of the subjective and objective interpretations, that tlie two
ideas may be included. See 1 Jolin iv. 16, v. 3 :
" the two are but ojiposite
aspects of the same love the sense of God's love
; is not the cause only, but the
essence of ours. 1 John iv. 19."
2 Cor. V. 11 : eiboTes tov <f>b^ov tov Kvpiov, TcTWwing the fear of th^ Lord (R.A".),
generally taken as subjective, as A.V., "the terror of the Lord," belonging to
Him as Judge but everywhere else the phrase is objective fear, i.e., reverence
; —
towards Him. So Alford renders here, conscimis of the fear of the Lord but ;
doubtfully. For other passages, see Acts ix. 31 Rom. iii, 18 2 Cor. vii. 1 ; ; ;
Kph. V. 21.
YI. Relation.
^ In the language of the Apostle Paul, my Gospel is evidently the Gospel entrusted
to and ^n-eadifd by me (Roi.u, ii. 16 ; xvi. 2.5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 8).
220 THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. [§ 270.
Rom. vii. 2 : aTro rev vofjiov rov avSpos, from the law of her husband, i.e.,
Eph. iv. 16 : Sta Trao-T^? acfj^s ttjs lirixopTiYias, through every joint (which
is) for the purpose of the supply. See Ellicott, in loc, who compares
the phrase with ra (TK€vrj Trj<: Acirovpyta?, Heb. ix. 21, the vessels of the
ministering.
Phil. iv. 9 : 6 0eo9 rf^s €ip'/ivT]s, the God who bestows peace ; or perhaps
a Genitive of quality.
Matt. iii. 8 : Kapirbv d|iov ttJs [icravoCas, fruit ivorthy of your repentance.
Matt. X. 10 : fi^ios 6 ipydTr]<; Tf]s Tpo<|)f]s avrov, the toorkman is woiihy
of his maintenance.
^ Sec Winer, who quotes Old Testament parallels, Lev. vii. 1, xiv. 2, xv. 32;
Numh vi. 13, 21.
§ 275.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 221
Rev. vi. 6 :
x^*-^*^^
(tltov 8Tjvapiov koI rpets x^'^^'-'^c? KpiO<x)v Si^vaptov, a
measure of ivheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny.
relations.
Acts V. 32: ijixeh eafiev avrov fxdprvpei tCov p-qixdriav ro&ruu, we are his (jiossess.)
witnesses of (remote obj.), or in respect to, tJiesc things.^
2 Cor. V. 1 : 17 iiriyeLos i]fj,Qv ot/ci'a tov oK-qvovs, our (possess. ) earthly house of
the taherTuicle (appos.).
Phil. ii. 30 : to vjxwv mriprjixa tt}? Xeirovpyia^, your lack in respect of the
service.
2 Pet. iii. 2 : ttjs t<2v diroffroXuv vfju3u evroXris tov Kvpiou, the commandment of
the Lord (orig.), through (remote obj.) your apostles (R.V.). The Text. Rec. has
r]fi(2v, but even then the reading of A, V. is inadmissible.
The two Genitives in John vi. 1, t) daXaaaa ttjs VdXiXaias, r^s TtjSepictSos, are
virtually in apposition, the sea of Galilee (as the Jews call it), of Tiberias (as
the Gentiles), one name denoting the countiy, the other the city. So we might
say, "the Lake of the Four Cantons, of Lucerne."
The dependence of successive Genitives on each other is frequent, as many
foregoing examples will show.
^ But W. H. and Rev. Text omit airroO, VN-ith (iu) ain($ in marg.
222 THE CrEXITIVE ABSOLUTE. [§ 275.
It will be observed that the Genitive in this construction must refer to some
other than the Subject of the principal sentence.
Etpiivalent idioms are in English the nominative absolute, in Latin the
ablative absolute.
Matt. ii. 1 : tov 'Itjo-ov y€vvt]0€'vtos, Jesus liaving been horn, i.e., when
Jesus was born.
^latt. ii. 13 : avax«p'n<rdvT«v h\ avrwv, and they having returned, i.e.,
The Dative.
276. In its primary local sense (see ^ 11), the Dative implies
juxtaposition.^ Hence the various modifications of its meaning,
which may be classed as follows :
1. Association. 3. Reference.
2. Transmission. 4. Accessory.
I. Association.
Matt. XX. 12 : icrous avrov? Tjjitv eTrotT/ca?, tltou madest them equal
with itfi.
Matt, xviii. 12 : eav yivrp-aC tivi avOpwirw cKarov TrpofSara, if a man have
(if there be to any man) a hundred sheep.
Acts viii. 21 : ovk ecrn <roi fnpls ovbk KX.rjpo<s iv tw Xoyw tovt(o, thou
hast 7iot (there is not to thee) paH noi' lot in this matter.
11. Transmissicni.
After the active verb, the thing (Accusative) is the direct^ the person
(Dative) the indirect object. (See § 186.)
Matt. vii. 6 : /x-^ Score TO aytov tois kvo-i, give not that ivhich is hob/ to
the dogs.
Matt. vii. 7 : atretre, koc hoOrja-eraL v|iiv, ask, and it shall he giveii unto
you.
Heb. ii, 5 : ov yap dyyeXois vTrera^e rrjv otKOv/xevrjv rrjv /JiikXovcrav, for
not unto angels did he subject the tvorld to come.
The Dative
h. also indicates the receiver of information, tidings,
command.
So in the common \iya vi|iiv, / say unto you.
The Genitive in a similar connection expresses the source of the feeHng. (See
§249.)
But the construction with prepositions is generally preferred, as giving addi-
and emphasis.
tional precision
Matt. vi. 25 : {xrj /aept/xvare ttj xj/vx^, care not for your life. So T^uke
xii. 22. But with Trcpt, Matt. vi. 28, Luke xii. 26 with vTrep, 1 Cor.
;
Matt. ii. 2 : rjXOofxev Trpoa-Kwrja-ai avrw, ive are come to worship him;
always with Dative in Matt., Mark, and Paul (except Matt. iv. 10, from
LXX.), in other books with Dative or Accusative.
Matt. xxi. 25 : ovk eTrtcrrevcraTc avT<3 ; believed ye him not ? also with
iv and im (Dative), im and els (Accusative).
III. Reference.
Matt. iii. 16 : aveioxOricrav avr^ ot ovpavoi, the heavens were opened for
him.
Matt. xvii. 4 : ttol-qctu) wSe rpcts CKiyvas, col fxtav kol Mwvo-et fxtav kol
'HX£<j /xiav, let me make here three tabernacles, one for thee, and one for
Moses, and one for Elijah.
2 Cor. V. 1 3 : €lt€ yap iiea-rrjixev, 0c(p, ctre (roxfypovov/JLev, vjiiv, for whether
we were beside ourselves, (it was) for God, whether we are sober, (it is) for
you.
James iii. 18: KapTro? . . , a-Trciperat rots iroiovcriv elprjvrjv, the fruit of
righteousness is sown for them that make peace.
Heb. iv. 9 : apa dTroXeiTreTat (Taf^^aTia-fio'; tw Xaw tov ©eov, there re-
^ The following word «'/c^, witho^it a caiise, should probably be omitted. (W. H.,
Rev. Text.)
' Latin, DatiiMS commodi vel incommodu
226 THE DATIVE OF EEFERENCE. [§ 279.
what have we in common ^ Mark v. 7 (Matt. viii. 29) ; John ii. 4, etc,
KvpLw, he began exhorting all to cleave to the Lord ivith the purpose of the
heart.
For other examples, see Matt. x%. 4 ; Luke xxii. 15 ; John iii. 29 ; Acts iv. 17,
Gal. vi. 12 : Iva /xrj t« a-ravpa tov XptcrTov SnoKiovTai, that they may not
be persecuted for the cross of Christ.
"be not as strangers") at the conflagration (which has broken out) among
you,
§ 280, e.] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 227
2 Pet. i. 3 : tov KaXco-avTO? 7]/Ma<; IZCa 8(J|xi "^^^ 0'P*''~n> ^f ^^'^'^ ^'^'^ called
us by his own glory and virtue (R.Y.). The reading is that of Lachmann,
Tischendorf, Rev. Text, andW. H. marg., but the Received Text gives the
same meaning. "To glory and virtue" (A.V.) is manifestly incorrect.
(See Alford's note.)
See further 1 Cor. xv. 10; Eph. i. 13; Titus iii. 7; 1 Pet. i. 18; and many
other passages.
So Acts xxvii. 3, 17; 1 Cor. ix. 12, 15; 2 Cor. i. 17 ; 1 Tim. i. 8, v. 23. In
1 Cor. vii. 31, the best MSS. (W. H.) read the Accusative, tov Koa/xdv.
2 Cor. xii. 20 : Kayw evpeOC) vjiiv, and I should be found by you. Com-
pare 2 Pet. iii. 14, and Rom. x. 20, from Isa. Ixv. 1, LXX.
* In Eph. iii. 19, cts conveys a different notion again, ^^that ye may be filled up to
all the fulness of God,"
228 THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. [§ 280, e.
The passive Aorist of opdoj, to see {&(p6r)v, see § 103, 4), is generally construed,
with the Dative, as 1 Tim. iii. 16, CocjidT] dyyiXoLs, he toas seen by angels. Here,
however, the notion is rather that of appearing to (Luke xxiv. 34), so that the
Dative is regular. And in some of the other instances a somewhat similar
explanation may be given, as in the last: *'he was made known to them."
In Matt. V. 21, ippWrj rots dpxaiois, the E.V. rightly renders, it toas said
to them of old time, not " by them," as A.V.
1 Cor. xiv. 20 : fiiq TratSid yivccrde rats <}>p£o-tv dAAa ttJ KaKCa vrjTna^eTe,
be not children in understanding, but be infants in malice (Dative of
mode).
Eph. ii. 3 : -^/xc^a reKva ^va-ii, 6pyrj<Sy we were in nature children of
wrath.
This use of the Dative evidently springs from its original local import. The
"local Dative" is not found in the New Testament, excepting (1) in the phrase
by the loay, or ways, 6d(^, oSols, where the way is regarded as the instrument :
James ii. 25 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; and (2) connected with the figiirative use of
iropetJOfMai, irepLiraTiu}, to walk, as Acts ix. 31, xiv. 16 ; 2 Cor. xii. 18, etc.
Acts xiii. 20 ws : 'ino-i TcrpaKoo-Cois kol ttcvH] kovtu, for about four hundred
and fifty years.
See also Luke viii. 29; John ii. 20 Acts viii. 11 Rom. xvi. 25.
; ;
The Accusative is more frequently used. (See § 286 also the Genitive under
;
Std, § 299.)
Mark vi. 21 : 'HpwST/g rots Y«v6(r£ois avrov Scittvov iiroC-qa-e, Herod on Jiis
The preposition iv is frequently inserted for the same purpose. (See § 295, 7.)
But when only the time within which, not the point of time, is specified, the
Genitive is used. (See § 266.)
The Accusative.
Thus, English :
" whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my words."
Greek : os lav iTrato-xwOrj |Ji€ koI tovs ejiovs Xo-yovs (Mark viii. 38). See
also Rom. i. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 8.
in time {d) the immediate object of a transitive verb; (e) the more remote object of
;
any verb, whether it has another Accusative or not (/) the Accusative of cognate ;
sentence; {h) the subject of the objective sentence, when this is expressed in the
infinitive mood." Greek Ch-ammar, p. 497.
230 ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. [§ 281, b.
(f>oft€Lcr$€ Se jxaWov tov 8wd|i€vov, k.t.X., be not afraid of those ivho kill
the body . . . but the rather fear him who is able, etc.
Matt. vii. 3 : tC 8e ^AeVets to Kdp<j)os ; but why seest thou the splinter ?
signifies "Zoo^ to the dogs, look to the evil-workers, look to the concision;"
caution being implied.^
With diro, to beivare of, lit., to give heed (so as to turn) from. Matt,
vii. 1 5 : irpo<r€'x€T€ dirb t^v xl/€vSo7rpo<f)T]Tii)v, beware of the false prophets.
Other verbs similarly used are eTrix<^ (add rbv vovv), to observe, Luke xiv. 7
Acts iii. 5 ; dtarpi^o} (add rbv xp^vov), to sojourn^ Acts xv. 35 ; iTriTidrifit (add
rds x^^P^^)) ^0 attack, Acts xviii. 10.
1 Ellicott.
—
For a similar use of the Dative, see § 280, 6 ; and of the Participle,
§ 394, 3, d.
Matt. ii. 10 : exdpyjcrav xapdv jirydXiiv, lit., ihcy rejoiced a great joy, i.e.,
Luke ii. 8 : (f>v\a.(r(rovT€<; 4>vXaKds t^5 vvktos, lit., icatcliing the icatches
attained.
284. Many transitive verbs may have two objects, and be,
therefore, followed by two Accusatives ;
generally of a person (" the
^ This passage is rather an instance of a cognate external object, the abstract noun
representing a multitude (Numb. xxxi. 12, LXX., "they brought the captivity").
So Ostervald's translation, **il a mene captive une grande multitude de captives ;"
and De "Wette's, "er fiihrte Gefangene."
2 This Accusative is often said to be governed by kutol, in respect of, understood.
"It is only a variety of the cognate Accusative. It defines more exactly the act or
state described by a verb or adjective by referring it to a particular object, or part
affected. It is the Accusative of an equivalent notion the part wherein the act or —
state consists." Dr. Jacob.
232 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 284.
external object") and a thing (" the internal object"). So verbs of asking",
teaching, clothing and unclothing, anointing, with many others.
This Accusative of the " internal object" is analogous to the cognate accus.
(See §282.)
Matt. vii. 9 : 8v atTT^o-ct 6 vtos avrov dprov, ivliom Ms son shall ask for
a loaf. (Occasionally the person with the prepp. Trapa, aTrd.)
John yiv. 26 cKctvos vp-ds StSa^ei iravTa, he
: will teach you all things.
(Once with Dative of person, Rev. ii. 14.)
Mark xv. 17 : Ivhi^va-Kovcnv avrbv 'irop<})xipav, theij clothe him in purple.
(The preposition ev sometimes found, as Matt. xi. 8.)
Heb. i. 9 :
<ixP^(T€ ore . . . 'A.atov dyaAAtacrco)?, he anointed thee with the
oil of gladness^ Ps. xlv. 8, LXX. (But the Dative of material is some-
times used, Acts X. 38, and with a\€C<|>« always.)
The Passive retains the Accusative of "the internal object."
Luke xvi. 19: evedidvaKeTo iropcp^pav /cat ^ijaaov, he was clothed with jpurple
and fine linen.
Acts xxviii. 20 : tt]v a\vcri.v ra^Tr]v irepiK€i/Mai, I am hound with this chain.
(See Heb. V. 2.)
2 Thess. ii. 15: Kparelre rds Trapadoaeis 8ls edLdaxOv'^, holdfast the instriictions
which ye ivere taught.
fSovko/xat TTpocTivxiarQai tovs dvSpas, " I wish for a prayhig on the part of
men," / wish men to pray.
Koi &v8pa yvvalKa /jltj d<J>t€vai,, / enjoin that a wife should not he separated
from her husband, and that a man should -not put away his wife.
Luke i. 74 rov Sov vat rjfuv
: pvo-Gevras, . . . Xarpevciv avrco, to grant unto US
that ice being delivered (ii|xas implied in pvcrOevras) should serve him.
But Phil. iii. 13: cyw cp-avrbv ov Xoyt^o/xat KaT6i\T](|>€vai, / do uot reckofh
that I myself have attained. So Kom. ii. 19; Luke xx. 20.
When the Infinitive is substantivised (see § 201) by the Article, the relations
expressed by the Genitive after nouns are denoted by the Accusative.
Inf. gen., Acts xxiii. 15 : irpb tov eyyiiJaL avrbv ^ before his approach.
Inf. dat.. Matt. xiii. 4: h ti^ a-rreipeiv avrbv, in his solving. So xxvii. 12,
Inf. ace. , Matt. xxvi. 32 : /aerd to iyepdrjval fie, after I am raised.
W. H. read Trepi, which is the more usual construction. But see John
iv. 52 ; Kev. iii. 3.
Matt. iv. 15: 65bv dd\aa-<xijs, the way of the sea, stands apparently without
government. The regimen is to be sought in its Old Testament connection,
Isa. ix. 1, from which it is a citation. ^
^ "We often make similar quotations almost unconsciously: e.g., " Christ and Him *
crucified' is the theme of the faithful minister." Him in that sentence appears
plainly ungrammatical until we turn to the connection, 1 Cor. ii. 2.
^ Webster.
' Ellicott. The difficulty here is that the preceding sentence is not objective. It
would seem better to take the Accusative as more directly dependent on Soi/s.
— —
Kara,dowmoards; with the Gen., doion from; with the Ace, down upon.
Others are found with all three cases.
Every preposition probably denoted at first a relation of place. (See
the scheme in § 124.) Hence by an easy transition their reference to
time^ and their use for purely mental relations. It will be seen in the
following sections that most prepositions have this threefold use.
The ways in which the English and the Greek, for example, have mapped out
the vast territory do not mutually correspond. Perhaps, therefore, no one word
of the former claims a province that has its precise counterpart in the latter. Or,
to adopt another illustration, the words of two languages do not run in equal
parallel lines, thus :
G.
E.
Were it so, translation would be easy work. Rather may they be represented
thus:
G.
E.
where in each language there are words that overlap those of the other, some-
times containing more meaning, sometimes less*; and a single word in one often
including the significance or part of the significance of two or three in the other.
236 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 290.
Table of Pkepositions.
One Case. Two Cases. Three Cases.
avTi,,OVER AGAINST \ 8ld, THROUGH ^ eirC, UPON \Gen.
dird, FROM (exterior) I Kara, down irapd, BESIDE pat.
'Dat.
FROM (interior) "®^' with
€K, j
(iCTo, (esso- irpos, TOWARDS ) Acc.
Gen.
wpo, in FRONT OF ) ciation)
Acc.
ircpi, AROUND
IN ^
vircp, OVER
<rvv, WITH (co-ope- r Dat.
Oird, UNDER
ration)
ava, UP TO
Acc.
INTO
Matt. xvii. 27 : 80s avrots dvrl e/Aou koX (Tovy give to them for thee and
me.
Matt. XX. 28 : Xvrpov dvrl iroXXwv, a ransom for many.
I
Heb. xii. 2 : dvri Tfjs 7rpoK€LjX€vr]<s avrw x^P^-Sj if^ return for the joy set
before him.
This preposition is employed with the neuter relative phiral in the adverbial
phrase, avd^ &V (in return for which things) = because. (Luke i. 20, xii. 3,
xix. 44; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Thess. ii. 10.)
Matt. i. 21 : o-wo-ct ... airb t«v ajiaprioiv avTwv, lie shall save ...from
their sins.
Matt. vi. 13 : pvaai ^/xas dirb tov iroviipov, deliver us from evil, or, the
Matt. xiv. 26 : dirb tov <j>opov tKpa^av, they cried out far fear.
a word like some (as the real object of the verb) being understood.
John xxi. 10 : iveyKare dirb t«v o^^apioiv, bring of the fishes.
Acts ii. 17 : eK;(€(u dirb tov irv6v|iaTos /mov, I will pour out of my Spirit.
from afar; dirb dvcoOev, from above; dirb tov vvv, from now, etc. In all
^ The verb c/o-a/cojJw has a similarly extended meaning in Ps. cxviii. 5, LXX. But
see Alford in loc, who cites Luke xix. 3, xxiv. 41 ; John xxi. 6; Acts xii. 14, xx. 9,
xxii. 11, as passages where airb lueans on account of.
238 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, €K, [§ 293, 2.
7. Used of time, from, the future being infolded in, and spriuging out
of the present.
John vi. 66 : Ik tovtov, from this time.
Acts xii. 6 : <f>v\aK€^ vph rfis 6vpas, guards before the door. So ch.
xiv. 13 j James v. 9.
Matt. xi. 10 : irpJ) irpoo-wirov cov, before thy face from ^ LXX. So Mark
i. 2 ; Luke i. 76, etc.
1 Cor. iv. 5 : firj irph Kaipov Tt KpLV€T€, judge nothing before the time.
2 Cor. xii. 2 : irpb Itwv ScKaTco-o-dpwv, fourteen years ago (lit., before
fourteen years, i.e., counted backward from the present time). See also
John xii. 1.
Only in the phrase irpb ir6cvr<av, befm'e, or above all things. Luke
xxi. 12 Col. i. 17;James ; v. 12 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8.
Matt. ii. 6 : €v rots r\'^i^6<r\.v 'lovSa, among the princes of Judah; LXX.,
Micah V. 2.
Acts ii. 29 : la-rlv iv i^Llv a^pi t^s rjixipas ravri;?, it (the sepulchre) is
among u^ unto this day.
1 Cor. V. 8 : fxi] Iv t,v^y\ iraXaia . . . aXX iv dtv[JLois, not in the old leaven
. . hut in the unleavened.
1 Tim. i. 18 : tva a-Tparevrj Iv avrals, that thou may est fight in them
(prophesyings), i.e., armed with them.
Heb. ix. 25 : 6 dp^^tcpevs cla-epx^Tai ... iv ai^iiaTi. dXAoTptiu), the high priest
enters ... in the blood of others. Compare ch. x. 19 with xiii. 12.
So, perhaps, Eph. vi. 2 : ivroXr] irpdiTt] kv eirayytXCq,, the first command-
ment in, or ivith promise.
See also Heb. xi. 37, and Rev. frequently, as ii. 16, vi. 8, xiii. 10, xiv. 15.
In Matt, V, 13, Mark ix, 50, iv rivi; may be rendered wherewith?
The frequent phrase, iv Xpia-T(3 (so iv Kvpicfj, etc.), means, not simply attached
to Christ as a follower, but in Christ, in the most intimate abiding fellowship.^
So "Christ in you, me," Rom. viii, 10; Gal. i. 16; ii. 20, etc. A similar
phrase is used of the revelation of God himself, "in us," 1 John iii. 24, iv. 13.
2 Cor. V. 19 : 0e6s 9}v iv Xpicrri^, k.t.X., God was in Christ reconciling, etc.
Eph. iv. 32: o 0e6s iv Xpicrrip ixapiaaro vfuv, God in Christ forgave you.
i
^ A
usage infrequent in classic Greek, and in the N. T. due to the influence of the
Hebrew preposition 3, in, with, by, etc., for which the LXX. constantly uses iv.
^ "Nicht bios durch Chr. ben£.ficio Christi, sondern in Chr., in geistig kraftiger
Matt. V. 34, 35 : cv t<3 ovpavw ... Iv -ng YQ) ^1/ heaven ...by earth. So
elsewhere in asseverations.
In Matt. iv. 4 some MSS. read Iv iravrl pTJiian, hy every icord (W. H.,
€irt). Compare 1 Thess. iv. 15.
7. Of time, in.
R
242 PKEPOsiTioNs. [§ 296.
Luke viii. 45 : Uerpos koI ol o-vv avrw, Pete)' and those with him.
dvd, els.
1. dvd }ji€Vov, through the midst ofy Matt, xiii, 25 ; Mark vii. 31 ; in
the rtiidst of] Rev. vii. 17 ; hetween^ 1 Cor. vi. 5.
4. In Rev. xxi. 21, dvd cts '^Kaorros, the preposition must be rendered
as an adverb, each one separately.
298. €ls, TO THE INTERIOR (oppositc to eV, and correlative with eV).2
Matt. ii. 11 : eA^oVres «ls r^v oUCav, having come into the house.
Matt. V. 1 : avi^-q €15 rh 6pos, he icent up into the mountain.
Matt. vi. 13 : ^xr) €tcrev€yKr]s rifjia<: els triipao-iJKJv, lead us not into tempt-
ation.
Accusative and Ablative respectively ; and ds (really tVj), in fact, is only another
form of iv, as c^ of ex.
§ 298.] PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, et9. 243
Acts xxii. 21 : cU ?0vi] e^aTroo-TeXw ere, / will send thee forth into the
community of Gentiles.
2. UntOj to, where the context or the nature of the case limits the
movement to the exterior.
John xi. 38 : epxirai els to |xvt]|x€iov, Jie cometh to the tomb. So xx.
1, 3, 4 (ver. 5, "he went not in").
Luke vi. 20 : cVa/Da? tovs 6(fi0aXfjLovs els tovs (laG-qras, having raised his
eyes to his disrij^les.
Rev. X. 5 ; ^pc ttjv x^tpa aurov els tov ovpavov, he lifted his hand toicards
the heaven.
Rom. xii. 16 : to avro els dXXTjXovs <^povovvT€<s, being of the same mind
one toicards another.
Luke xii. 10 ttSs os cpet Xoyov els t6v
: ulbv tov avOpwirov, every one who
shall say a tcord against the Son of man.
Acts ii. 25 : Aa/?t8 yap Xeyct els avTov, for David says in reference to
him.
Matt. viii. 4, x. 18, etc.: els jxapTvpiov avTots, /b;* a testimojiy to them.
Matt. xxvi. 2 : TrapaSt'SoTat els to (rTavpw0f)vai, he is surrendered to be
criicijied.
1 Cor. xi. 24 tovto : TrotctTC els t^v ejii^v dvdjivrjo-iv, this do for the
remembrance of me.
2 Cor. ii. 12 : iX6o)v cts t^v TpwaSa, els to evayycXiov, having come into
Troasfor (the preacliing of) the gospel.
Rom. vi. 3, 4 : ocrot efiaTTTLadrjfxev els Xpio-rbv 'IiycoCv, els tov OdvaTOV
244 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, ek. [§ 298.
avTov ipaTTTta-Orjixevy as many of lis as were baptised into Christ Je^us^ were
haptised into his death.
Compare Matt, xxviii. 19, "into the name," etc. Acts xix. 3 1 Cor. i. ; ; 13,
X. 2, xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. So Acts ii. 38, eis rrjv &(f)€<nv afxaprnSv, into
27. th6
Matt. xix. 5 : taovrai . . . €ls o-apKa |iCav, they shall become one flesh. So
Mark x. 8 ; 1 Cor. vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 31 ; from LXX., Gen. ii. 24.
Compare Luke iii. 5 (from Isa. xl. 4), xiii. 19; John xvi. 20; Acts vii. 21,
Acts xix. 27 : to ... Upov els ovSev Xoyto-^^vat, the temple to be esteemed
as nothirig.
Rom. ii. 26 : ov^l rj aKpo^vrrTia avrov els irepiTop.'fiv Aoyta"^r;(7€Tat ; shall
not his uncircumcision be accounted as circumcision 1
7. When referring to time, et? may mark either (a) the interval up to
a certain point, during; or (b) the point itself, regarded as the object of
some aim or purpose, up to, for.
a. Luke i. 50 : els veveds vevewv, or els Yeveas Kal Yeveds (W. H.), unto,
Matt. xxi. 19 : els rhv alwva, for ever, lit., "unto or during the age,"
John vi. 51, 58, "for ever." els tovs alaivas, lit., "unto the ages," "for
ever," Rom. i. 25 ; 2 Cor. xi. 31. els tovs alwvas t»v alwvwv, unto the
ages of the ages, " for ever and ever," Gal. i. 5 ; 1 Tim. i. 17. 2 Pet.
iii. 18, €19 rjfjiipav alwvo?, " to the day of eternity" (§ 259).
b. Matt. vi. 34 : fxrj ovv fxcpLfjLVQa-rjTe €is tt^jv a<lpiov, be not therefore
anxious for (lit., "project not your anxieties into") tlie morrow.
prepared for (or unto) the hour and day, and month and year, i.e., for
the precise time appointed.
Acts xiii. 42: cis to /xera^v ad^^aTov presents a little difficulty, as "on the
next Sabbath" (A.V. andR.V.) seems rendering the preposition with undue
licence. We must interpret either "for the next Sabbath" the Gospel being —
regarded as a treasure reserved for that time (and perhaps, by construct io
prcegnans [see 81, %ip to and on) —or during the intervening week (A.V. marg. ).
Mark xiii. 16 : 6 els rbv dypov &v,^ "he who is into the field," i.e., who
has grme into the field and is in it. Matt. xxiv. 18 has iv.
Acts viii. 40 : ^tAiTTTros 6vp^0T] els "A^wrov, Philip ivas found (to have
been led) to Azotus.
Acts xxi. 13 : airoOavetv els 'lepovcraki^ix, "to die into Jerusalem," i.e.,
* W. H. and Rev. Text omit &v, —a reading which more vividly illustrates this
construction.
2 W. H. q-S-qv (see § 2.56, 7, note).
^ In classic Greek, irepi and vTr6 may take a Dative ; also fxerd in poets.
246 hd, AVITH THE GENITIVE. [§ 299.
John iv. 4 : eSct Se avTov Sup^^eadat 8id tt)s 2a|iap€ias, and he must needs
go through Samaria.
John xiv. 6 : ovSet? €p;(€Tat Trpos rov Trarepa €i /u,^ St* Ijiov, no one cometh
to the Father hut through me —the Way.
1 Cor. iii. 15 : o-uidrja-eraL ... ws 8ia tov irvpos, he shall be saved as (one
who has passed) througli the fire.
1 Cor. xiii. 12 : pX^Trofxev yap apri 8t* eo-oirrpov, for we see noio through
a miiTor (the image appearing to be on the opposite side).
Matt. i. 22 : p-rjOlv vtro Kvptov 8ia toO 'irpo<|)TJTov, spohen by the Lord
thi'ough the pvphet. Here mark the distinction between vtto and 8ta,
2 Thess. ii. 2 : p^rfe 8ia irvcvjJtaTOS, ixrjTC 8ia Xoyou, fxrjTe 8i' eiric^oXTjs, u)9
8t* Tifiwv, neither by spirit, nor by loord, nor by letter as from us (through
us as the mediate authors).
^ Winer.
:
Heb. ii. 15 : 8id iravrbs tov tTJv, all through their life.
The phrase 8id (t^?) wktos denotes hy night, i.e., during its lapse, no
particular hour or hours being specified, Acts v. 19, xvi. 9, xvii. 10,
(&) Malt. xxvi. 61 ; Mark xiv. 58 : 8id rpiwv ruitpwv, three days after-
tvards.
Gal. ii. 1 : 8id 8€KaT€<r(rdp«v Itwv, fourteen years after. (Cf. 2 Cor.
xii. 2.)
0?i account of: as in the frequent phrase 8id tovto, "on this account."
Eph. ii. 4 : 8id ti^v ttoXKtjv a.yatn\v avrov, on account of his great love.
John vi. 57 : cya> ^w 8id tov iraTcpa, / live because of the Fathei', i.e.,
The distinction between the Genitive and the Accusative should be marked in
such passages as Rom. xii. 3, xv. 15. "I say to you," writes the Apostle in the
former, 5ta tt}s x°-P^'^<>^> through the grace given to me, i.e., "the favour
bestowed is the power by which I WTite;" but in the latter, dia ttjv x<^^> on
account of the grace given me, "that I may worthily vindicate its bestowal."
^ Winer.
248 Kara, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 299, fi.
wavra, for ivliom are all things and through whom arc all things, i.e., for his
honour and by his agency. Compare also 1 Cor. xi. 9 and 12: 5id tt]v ywaiKa,
for the sake of the woman; 5id ttjs yvvaLK6s, by the woman, i.e., in birth.
Matt. viii. 32 : wpfxrjcre Kara, tov Kpr]\i.vov, rushed down the steep. Mark
V. 13 ; Luke viii. 33.
1 Cor. xi. 4 : Kara Ke<})aXTis cx'^'^' having (something, i.e.^ a veil, de-
pending) from the head.
See also Mark xiv. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 14 ; 2 Cor. viii, 2.
Acts xiv. 2 : eTrryyctpai/ Kara twv d8€X<|)a)v, they raised up ... against the
brethren.
Matt. xxvi. 63 : i^opKL^u) crc Kard tov 0€ov, / adjure thee hy God.
So Heb. vi. 1 Cor. xv. 15 is probably to be referred to the same rule
13-16.
"We have by God," though the rendering against might be admissible.
testified
" 0/God," (A.V. and R.V.) is plainly incorrect.
Luke iv. 14 : Ka0* (JXtjs rr\% ircptxwpov, through all the region round
about.
Acts viii. 1 : Kard rds x"P*5 T7J<s 'lovSaia?, throughout the regions of
Judwa.
Acts xxvi. 3 : tCjv Kard 'Iov8aCovs WCjv, of the customs among the Jews.
§ 300.] Kara, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 249
Luke ii. 31 : Kara irpoo-wirov iravroiv twv Xawv, before the face of all the
peoples.
Luke viii. 1 : StwScvc Kara iroXiv, he VMS journeying from city to city.
So Kar ^TOi, year by year, Luke ii. 41 kut oTkov, at different houses, Acts ii. 46,
;
Matt. xxvi. 55, etc. (and the phrase Kad' els, or Kadeis, one by one, for eis Kad' eva,
Mark xiv. 19 ; John viii. 9 ; Rom. xii. 5).
5. From the meaning " over against" arises that of according to, in
reference to some standard of comparison, stated or implied.
Matt. ix. 29 : Kara t^v itCo-tiv v/xcov yevrjOrJTia^ according to your faith
be it unto you.
Luke ii. 39 : ra Kara tov vofiov Kvpcov, the things according to the laio
of Jehovah.
^ Winer here prefers the rendering before, as (2) above, but, as it seems, without
sufficient reason.
250 fierd, irepL [§ 301,
Matt. xii. 3, etc. : ol (1€t avrov, those loith him, his companions.
John iv. 27 : nerd -yuvaiKos cXaXct, Jie was talki7ig with a ivoman.
See also Matt. xii. 41, 42, etc.
1 Tim. iv. 14 : |1€t lirieio-ews twi/ x«t/><^v, loith (not hy) the laying on of
the hands.
Acts viii. 12 : cvayycXt^o/xcVu) trepl rfis pao-iXeCas rov 0€ov (they believed
Philip), preacMiig concerning the Mngdom of God.
Matt. vi. 28 : irepl iv8v|JiaTos ri /xepLixvaTe ; lolty are ye anxious about
raiment ?
things tlmt ivere spoken (this verb more generally has liri, " to wonder
at").
Rom. viii. 3 : 6 0eo9 t6v iavrov vlov Trc/xi/^a? . . . ir€pl dp-apTCas, God
having sent his oivn Son... for sin. Compare Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, 26;
1 John ii. 2, iv. 10 ; also, perhaps, Gal. i. 4.^ (See under virip^ § 303,
a, 2.)
1. Around, of place.
Matt. viii. 18 : iSwv ... o;(Xovs uepl avrov, seeing multitudes around him.
Used of dress, etc.. Matt. iii. 4 : irepl ti?|v 6<r^vv avrov, aboid his loins.
2. About, of time.
Kara). Of persons.
Matt. V. 44 : 7rpoo-cvx«<^^c vir^P twv 8iwkovt«v vfxas, pray for^ tJiose who
are pei'secutinr/ you.
Mark ix. 40 : os yap ovkta-ri Ka& yj/jlwv \m\p f||x«v i<TTLv, he who is not
against 21s is for us. Compare Rom. viii. 31.
2 Cor. V. 14, 15 : inr^p irdvrwv aTreOaveVy he died for all. So Rom.
V. 6, 7, 8 ; Gal. ii. 20, iii. 13 ; Eph. v. 25 ; Heb. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 21, etc.
Philemon 13: iva vir^p o-ov /xot SLaKovrj, that he might minister to me
for thee.
As a service is often rendered on heJmlf of another by being offered in his
stead, the notion of'virip may become interchangeable with that of avri, as in the
last passage. The distinction is, that virip of itself leaves undetermined the way
in which the service is performed, simply affirming the fact avri, on the other
;
John xi. 4 : vir^p tt)s So^tis tov @€ov, for the glory of God, i.e., to
promote it.
Rom. XV. 8 : v-n-^p dXT]8€Cas @€ov, for the truth of God, i.e., to confirm
his promises.
2 Cor. xii. 19: virtp Tfjs vixwv oiKoZo\i.f[s, for your edification, i.e., to
minister to it.
Phil. ii. 13 : virip rr\s €v8oKCas, for (his) good pleasure, i.e., to accom-
plish it.
1 Cor. XV. 3 : dniOavcv <m\p twv duapTiwv rj/xiov, he died for our sins,
i.e., to take them away. Compare Heb. v. 1, Gal. i. 4, etc. ; and see
under Trcpt, § 302, a.
^
More emphatic than irtplin the same connection.
§ 304.] virep, viro. 253
Here, too, may be referred the use of vwip with adverbs, as 2 Cor. xi. 5, xii. 11,
virkp \iav or virepklav, beyond measure; also the "improper preposition" virepdpu
(from dvd), up over, governing the Genitive (Eph. i. 21, iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5).
Matt. iv. 1 : avrj^Or] virb tov irv€v|iaTOS TreLpacrOrjvai viro tov 8iap6\ov, he
was led up) by the Spirit to be tempited by the devil.
^latt. V. 15 : TiOcacTLv avrov virb Tbv fjL68tov, they put it under the
modius.
Rom. vi. 14 : ov yap ia-re vnrb vd|iov d\)C virb X'^-P''*'* f^'^ V^ <^^6 f^ot under
law, hut under grace.
In this sense, joined with the adverb Kartu (from Kara), viro forms the
"improper preposition" {utokoLtw, down unde)', followed always by a
Genitive, as Mark vi. 11, etc.
254 VTTO, WITH ACCUSATIVE — eVt, WITH GlilNrnVE. [§ 304, yS.
2. Close upon ("under," as, e.g.^ under a wall, hill, etc.), like the Latin
suh, applied in the Xew Testament to time only, and in one passage
Acts V. 21 : virb Tov <{p0pov, close upon the daivn, "very early in the
a. With the Genitive, " upon, and proceeding from," as, e.g.^ a pillar
upon the ground.
1. On, upon, locally.
Acts xii. 21 : Ka^tVas lirl tov p^p.aTos, sitting upon the throne (lit.,
Acts vi. 3 : ovs KaTaa-Trja-ofxcv «irl Tfjs XP«^*S ravrrjs, whom we Will set
John vi. 2 : to, (j^/Acta a IttoUl kirX twv d<r6evo\ivT«v, the miracles which
he teas loorldiig uj)on the afflicted.
Here, too, maybe referred the phrase, eV dXrjdelat, vi truth (Mark xii. 14;
Luke iv. 25, etc.), i.e., "on a basis of truth."
1 Cor. vi. 1 : KpivcfrOai itr\ r&v aS^Kcav koI ov\l cirl t«v aY^wv, to be
So Acts xxiii. 30, xxiv. 19, xxv. 9, 26, xxvi. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13.
§ 305.] eiriy WITH THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 255
where the preposition, from the LXX., denotes basis ; as in (3), above.
1 Pet. i. 20 : hr €<rxdT«v Twv xpovwv, ill the last times; Heb. i. 2 ; 2 Pet.
iii. 3; Jude 18 (W. H.).
In Mark xii. 26; iirl tov ^drov, at the Bush, means, "at the Old Testament
"
section entitled 'The Bush.'
Matt. xxvi. 12 : ^oXovo-a ... to fxvpov tovto €irl tov <r«p,aTds /xov, having
poured . . . this oiidment on my body,
Mark xiv. 35 : ^xiirrcv e'lrl Tfjs y^s> he fell upon the ground.
Matt. iv. 4 : ovk err' dpTw /xoVo) ^TJo-cTat, shall not live on breads alojie.
Luke V. 5 : eirl tw pr\\x.ari crov ;^aA,acra) to Siktvov, at thy toord I will let
down the net.
^ But AV. H. read \iBov (cf. y, 1). In Luke xxi. 6 the Dat. is undisputed, and
the student will note that in the one case the verb is attive (implying motion), in
the other passive.
256 eVt, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 305, /S.
Acts xi. 19 : r^s OXi\}/€(D'; t^s y€yofji€vr]<s cVl ST€<j>dv&), ^Tie aflicHon that
arose about Stephen.
Mark ix. 37, etc. : lirX tw ovojiarC /xov, m my name. (Compare Matt,
xxviii. 19 -with Acts ii. 38.)
Eom. viii. 20 : cir* cXirtSt, in hope, i.e., "resting on the basis of a hope
that," etc.
1 Tliess. iv. 7 : ov yap iKoXea-tv rjfjia^ 6 ©cos eirt 6,Ka0af <rt(j,, for God called
US not on the ground of impurity, or perhaps as (5). (R.V., for unclean-
ness.) ^
So the phrase e0' c^, "on the condition being realised that," wherefore^
because(Rom. v. 12, etc.).
2 Cor. vii. 13 : eirl tt| irapaKXrio-et rjfxwv, (W. H.) ill addition to our
comfort.
Matt. v. 15 : TiOeaoTLv cirl t^v XvxvLav, they put (it) upon the lampstand.
Matt. vii. 24 : loKoSojxrja-ev cirl t-^iv ir^rpav, he built upon the rock.
Matt. xiv. 29 : TrepuTrdTrja-ev cVi rd iiSara, he walked upon the loaters.
Matt. xxiv. 2 : Xt^os eVt XtGov. See the Dative in the same connection,
ft 1, note. The notion there is of rest, simply here, i)erliaps, of down-
;
ward pressure.
So after the verb eXTrifw, to hope; irl, with the Dat., 1 Tim. iv. 10; with the
Ace, V. 5. In the one case, the hope is said to rest upon, as a fact; in the
other, to be placed upon, as an a(;t. So after irddoj, 2 Cor. i. 9, compared with
ii. J^. Tlio dittereuce is so sliglji, that the expressions are easily interchangeable.
.
Gonstruciio iwcegnans. —In Matt. xix. 28; 2 Cor. iii. 15, and some
other passages.
Luke i. 33 : paa-cXeva-eL cirt rhv oIkov 'la/cwyS, he shall reign over the house
of Jacob.
Heb. ii. 7 : KaricrT-qu-a^ avrbv eirl rd '4pya, k.t.A.., thou didst set hint over
the icorks of thy hands.
The three cases with this meaning seem "interchangeable," i.e., the notions
which they respectively express are so nearly allied that any of them may be
employed without materially altering the sense. The Dative, however, and not
the Accusative, is used when the preposition folloAvs a verb of existence the ;
Accusative, and not the Dative, when the verb is transitive. The Examples (a,
2) show that the Genitive may be with either.
Luke vi. 35 ; auro? XPl^"^^^ Icttlv eirl Tous dxapio-Tovs koI irovtipovs, he is
kiiid to the unthanlfid and wicked
2 Cor. ii. 3 : TreTrot^ws eirl iravras vfids, having confidence with regard to
you all.
Mark ix. 12 : yeypaTrrat eirl tov viov tov avOpioTrov, it is written with
regard to the Son of man.
Matt. XV. 32 G-TrXayxyi^opiaL em tov ^x^o^j I have compassion on the
:
multitude. This verb and preposition arc also found with the Dative
(see ft 3); i.e., the compassion may be conceived as moving towards, or
as resting on, the multitude, Luke vii. 13. The verb has also Trept (Gen.),
concei^ned about the multitude, Matt. ix. 36.
Matt. XXV. 40, etc. : €<|>' So-ov, inasmuch as. So of time, as long as,
Matt. ix. 15, Rom. vii. 1.
With numeral adverbs, Acts x. 16, xi. 10. So in the compound adverb,
iipdira^, once for all, at once (Rom. vi. 10; 1 Cor. xv. 6; Heb. vii. 27, ix. 12,
X. 10).
So in the phrase, eTrt to avrb, at the same place, or time, "together" (Luke
xvii.35 ; Acts ii. 1 ; 1 Cor. vii. 5, etc. ).
John xvi. 27 : irapd toS irarpos iirjXOov, I came forth from the Father.
Compare John i. 14.
Matt. xxi. 42 : irapa Kvpiov eyeVcro avrrj, this was from Jehovah — "his
doing," from LXX., Ps. cxviii. 23.
Mark iii. 21 : ot irap' avroO, those from him, i.e., from his home or
family, his friends.
Matt. xiii. 4 : cTrccre irapd rf|v 68dv, it fell along the way, or path.
Acts iv. 35 : ^tlOovv irapd tovs irdSas twv ctTrocrToXojv, they laid them at
the apostle^i^ feet.
Acts X. 6 :
<J
eo-Ttv oiKia irapd 0d\a<r(rav, wliose house is by the seaside,
Rom. xiv. 5 : Kpiva 17/xepav irap' T|p.€pav, esteems day above day, i.e., one
above another.
Heb. ix. 23 : KpeLTToo-t OvcrLaLs irapd ravras, with better sacrifices than
these. So i. 4, iii. 3, xi. 4, xii. 24 ; Luke iii. 13.
Acts xxvii. 34 : tovto yap irpos rfjs ii|i€T€pos orwrr]pias vwdp^a^ for this is
John xviii. 16 : irpos tt| Ovpq. I^w, close to the door outside.
eJohn XX. 12 : eVa irpos rfj Ke4)aXT) kol eVa irpos Tots iroo-Cv, one at the head
and the other at the feet.
Matt, xxiii. 34: aTroa-TeWo) irpos v|i.ds 7r/30(/»;ra?, I send unto you prophets.
Luke i. 1 9 : Xakriaai irpos <r€, to speak unto thee.
3 John 14.
Matt. xiii. 56 : ovxt iracrai irpos T|p.ds etcrt ; are they not all loith us ?
John i. 1 : 6 Aoyos tjv irpos ^ tov ©cbv, the Word was with God.
3. Of mental direction, toicards, ayainst.
Rom. viii. 18: ovk a^ta . . . Trpbs t^v (AcXXovcrav 8o|av a.TroKaXv(f>6rivai^
revealed.
5. Also (ii.) that of intention, in order to, especially with the Infin-
itive
1 Cor. X. 1 1 : iypdcfir] Se irpbs vovGccriav rjfxwVy and they were loritten for
our admonition.
Matt. vi. 1 : irpbs rb 0€a0Tivai avrot?, in order to he gazed at hy them.
2. With (XTTo. Gal. i. 1 : na{iA.05 airoaroXo^ ovk ctir* dv0pwTr«v oi'Se 8i*
nor through (the intervention of) amj man; the latter particular being
added to show how absolutely independent his designation had been
even of human instrumentaliti/. The ordination to the ministry, in
general, is dirb 0€ov, but 8i' dvepci-rrwv.
3. With iv. 2 Cor. iii. 11: ct yap to KaTapyovjxevov 8id 8o|t]s, ttoAAw
/AttXAov TO jjLivov €v 8o|t), for if that which is being done away (was) by
means of (through the intervention of) glory (i.e., a glorious display),
mucJi more that ivhich abideth (is) in glory.
cision, he believed but 5i' aKpo^vcrrias being ruled by irKTrevovTuv, sets forth the
;
4. In Romans xi. 36 the respective meaning of ex, 8ta, ets (the starting-
point, the course, the goal), are finely marked : €^ avrov Kal 8i' avrov kol
els avrov ra iravTa, all things are from him as their author, through him
as their controller, to him as their end.
See also Jolin xi. 1. In these passages it is immaterial Avliether the phrase
^^ out of B. thing" or ^^from a thing" be employed; but in the follo^^•ing there is
an evident distinction :
John vii. 42 in tov : (rv^pfMaroi Aaj3i'5 Kai dfro BrjOXe^/jL, out of the seed of David
and from Bethlehem.
2 Cor. ill. 5 : ovx 6'Tt d<p' iain-cSv iKauoi ea/xev Xoyiaaadai ti ws i^ airnav, not that
we are sufficient of ourselves to think anything as from ourselves.
measure ye mete. Again, Luke iii. 16: iiSan /JaTrrt^o), / baptise with
water ; so Acts i. 5, xi. 16; but ev iihan, in water, Matt. iii. 11 ; John
i. 26, 33. The expressions are evidently equivalent, however the act be
understood.
The opposites eV and e/c may in some cases be used in the same connection.
Thus, Matthew (xxii. 37) gives "the great commandment" as, Thou shalt love
the Lord thy God in {ev) all thy heart, etc. Mark (xii. 30), out of (e^) all thy
;
heart ; the love being regarded in one case as abiding in the heart, in the other
as manifested by it. The LXX. (Deut. vi. 5) has i^,
1. With TTpos. Rom. iii. 25: els 2v8€i|iv . . . ver. 26: irpos ttiv ^vSci^iv
T-^s StKaLoavvrjs avrov, 171 order to the manifestation... tending to the mani^
festatyjn of his righteousness. The former expression refers to a com-
pleted manifestation, the latter to one still in progress.
Philemon, ver. 5 : " thy love and thy faith," irpos- tov Kvpiov 'Itio-oCv
Kol ds irdvTas rovs ayCovs, towards the Lord Jems and unto all the
sainf.^.
2. AVitli eVt. These instances are very frequent, and need no special
remark.
Matt. xxiv. 16 : (f>€vyeTO)crav eirl^ to. opi], let them flee up to the 7)ioun-
tains. Mark xiii. 14 : </)€vyera)o-ai/ ds to, <{pt], let them flee into the
mountains.
Rom. iii. 22: hLKaioorvvrj 0cov... els Travras /cat eirl iravras- rov<i ttlct-
revovra^, the righteousness of God unto all and upon all wIlo believe, i.e.,
" so communicated to as to abide up)on."
Matt. V. 21, 22: tvo^o<i rfj Kpio-ct . . . €i^o;(0? els ti'*|v •y^cvvav tov irvpo^,
liable to the judf/ment ... liable to (up to the point of) the Gehenna of
flre.
eXaiq., thou wast grafted into a good olive tree . . . they shall be grafted on
their oivn olive.
vireppoXriv els vireppoXTjv, A.V., "far more exceeding," R.Y., "more and
5. The many instances in which eU seems to be used for iv, and vice
versa, may be explained by constructio prcegnans. (See § 295, 8.) The
two prepositions are found in the same connection Matt. iv. : 18, com-
pared with Mark i. 16 ; Mark xi. 8, with Matt. xxi. 8 ; Mark xiii. 16,
with Matt. xxiv. 18.
avrCiv 2p7ov Ifik Xi^a^ere ; for u'hirTi work of these do ye stone me ? The
answer is, ver. 33 : irepl koXov ^p-yov ov XiBai^o^iv ae oAAa ircpl pXaar(j>T]|ilas,
for a good icork ice stone thee not, hut for hiasphemy.
For other instances, see Mark vi. 4 (ev) ; Luke xxiv. 27 (ciTro) ; 1 Thess. i. 5
{iv) ; John xx. 2 [irpbs), etc.
John iv. 23 : cv Trvev/xart kol aXyjOeia, in sjnrit and tmth, one state of
mind, 'viewed under a twofold aspect. In manner we interpret
like
iii. 5, ii vSarog kol Trveu/xaros, of one spiritual baptism, not of two things
(as the outward and the inward). So Matt. iii. 11.
For other instances, see Luke xxi. 26 (diro); Phil. i. 15 (Sia); and very
frequently with proper names when closely connected, as Phil. i. 2, Acts
vi. 9, etc.
266 IJ^TERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 314.
Where the nouns after the preposition are connected by the dis-
junctive (vr, the preposition is always repeated; as also where they
stand in antithesis. Acts iv. 7 : cv ttolo. Svvd/xeL rj ev ttoio) ovo/xart
€7roLT](raT€ tovto v/jl€l<s; in icliat power or in what name did ye this?
John vii. 22 : ovx on ck tov Mtovcrea)? la-rivy dX\' €k twi/ TraTcpcDV, not
that it is from Moses, but from the fathers. But where the antithesis
isformed by two adjectives agreeing with the same noun, the preposition
need not be repeated. 1 Pet. i. 23 ovk Ik o-7ropas <ji0aprrrj<;, aXKh. onfiOdprov,
:
For the general meaning of the Prepositions in composition, see § 147. In most
cases the preposition has a simple and evident force. The verb contains the general
notion, the preposition indicates originally some space relation (§§ 124, 288) the ;
compound verb expresses the general verbal notion limited to that definite space
relation.
Thus, ^pxofxai, to come ; e'KripxofJuii, to come in, enter. /SatVw, to go ; Trapa^aiuu, to
or (2) the Preposition may retain its distinct prepositional force, when the verb
(a) is followed by the same preposition (6) is followed by a preposition of kindred
;
meaning ;
(c) is not followed by a preposition, but governs the case appropriate.
Examples : 1. axoSidu/xi, to give away from one's self, bestow, pay back ; followed
like the simple didcofii by ace. of thing, dat. of person.
2. (a) iiripdWu) (ras x^'pas) iiri riva, to lay (hands) upon. Matt. xxvi. 50.
(b) iKjSdWo} diro rivos, to cast out from, ]\Iark xvi. 9 ; Acts xiii. 50 (gene-
rally with e/c).
Ta^a Tis KOL ToXfjia aTroOaveiv for scarcely for a righteous (man) will one
•
die, for on behalf of the good (man) one pei'chance even dares to die.
1 Cor. ii. 13 : irveuiiaTiKois irvcviiaTiKot arvyKpCvovTcs, putting together
spirituals tcith spirituals, i.e., "attaching spiritual words to spiritual
things " (Alford) ; or, "interpreting spiritual things by spiritual;" or,
" explaining spiritual things to spiritual men" (Stanley, R.V. marg.) ; or,
" adapting spiritual language to spiritual matters " (Beza).
The last example shows how an occasional ambiguity will arise. In general,
however, the application of the adjective will be perfectly plain.
yrj, land, as t| oIkovjicvt], the inhabited, "the world" (Rom. x. 18, etc.).
v8tup, watei', as iroTTipiov ij'vxpou, " a cup of cold " (Matt. x. 42 ; com-
pare James iii. 11.)
268 ADJECTIVES —CONCORD. [§ 316.
Acts xix. 35 is peculiar: tov Aiottctovs, of that which fell from Zeus:
not "an image," — probably a great meteoric stone.
For the neuter article, especially, as substantivising the Adjective, ?.e.,
the context.
Ill Matt. xix. 17 the best editors (W. H.) concur in the remarkable reading,
Tt fie epojTas irepl rod dyadov ; ivhy askcst thou me concerning that ivhich is
good? (R.V.) instead of why callest thou mc good? In Mark x. 18, and Luke
xviii. 19, the received reading stands without any variation.
Acts iii. 11 : crvveSpafxe Tras 6 Xabs . . . ^K0a[ipoi, all the iwople ran to-
Rev. xi. 15 : eyeVovTo <})wval /xeyaXai . . . Xc'yovtcs,- there iL'ere great voices,
saying.
In Matt. xxi. 42, irapa Kvpiov iyevero avr-q Kal ^art OavfiaaT'fi, this (thing) was
from the Lord, and is ivonderfid, the feminine gender is to be explained by the
^ The R.V. in every instance takes the adjective as masc, rendering tM evil one
(Matt. V. 39, hivi tliat is evil) with evil in marg. For a discussion of the phrase in
Matt. vi. 13, see pamphlet by Canon Cook On the Revised Version of the Lord's
Prayer.
'^
W. H., Rev. Text (Received Text, X^yovaaC).
§ 319.] ADJECTIVES —CONCORD. 269
Hebrew idiom. That language, having no neuter, employs the feminine for
James i. 17 : irao-a Sdcrts ojyaOiq koI irdv S<jiiprjjxa reXetov, every good and
evefi'y -perfect yift. So Mark xiii. 1 ; Acts iv. 7 (difierent genders,
repeated).
Matt. ix. 35 : OepaTreviDV irao-av voarov kol irdo-av fxaXaKcav, healing every
(kind of) disease and every (kind of) infirmity (same gender, repeated).
Matt. iv. 24 : iroiKCXais vocrois koX ^ao-ctvot?, loith divers diseases and
torments (same gender, not repeated).
When two adjectives stand as epithets to one substantive, a conjunction
generally stands between them. Thus, for "many other," the Greeks say,
"many and other." This rule, however, is not invariable in the New Testament.
John XX. 30 : iroWa fxev ovv Ka\ dWa arj/xeia, many otlier signs Oierefore.
Acts XXV. 7 : TToXXa koX /3apea aiTijofiara, inan,y heavy charges.
See also Luke iii. 18 ; and on the contrary. Acts xv. 35 (substantive omitted).
wpuTos i. 15).
fjiov, But Dr. Zumpt has recently shown the gi'eat probability
John
of Quirinus having been governor of Syria at this early date, as well as a.d. 6,
on the deposition of Archelaus. (See Smith's " Dictionary of the Bible," Art.
" Cyrenius.") R.V. renders "this was the first enrolment made when Quirinus was
governor of Syria."
270 ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. [§ 320.
John V. 36 : cyw 8c c^w rrjv fiaprvptav [lelt^ toi) 'Iwdvvov, the witness 1
1 Cor. i. 25 : to fJLOipOV TOV ©COV 0-O(f>(OT6pOV TWV dvOpwiTWV eCTTt, K.T.X., the
foolishness of God is wiser than men, etc.
mony)," "than men's (wisdom)," etc. This the construction will not admit.
*
The form of expression is one of the utmost generality God's foolishness is : '
' '
wiser," not only than men's wisdom, but " than men " themselves, with all that
they are or can do. So of the other passages,^
Luke ix. 13: ovk €l(rlv rj/juv irXetov ^ aproL 7r€VT€ koX t;(^ves 8vo, ive have
no more than five loaves and two fishes.
^ Winer, § xxxv. 5,
f
§ 321.] ADJECTR'EvS —COMPARISON. 271
It may be hardly necessary to remind the learner that GeoG is in the Genitive,
not because it is the object of comparison, but because coupled by ^ with vfiwv,
Gen. after aKoveiv, by § 249, a.
So ;Matt. xviii. 13 ; John xii. 43 (ij-rrep), etc. fiaXKov ij may connect two
adjectives, as 2 Tim. iii. 4, where a Greek classical idiom, of which there is no
instance in the New Testament, would have admitted two comparatives.
Matt. X. 15: dvcKTorcpov lo'Tttt yrj SoSd/xcov . . . i^ tt) WXct cK€£vt|, it shall
be more tolerable for the land of Sodom (Dative, by § 279) than for that
city.
After irXcfwv, TrActov, more^ and IXdTTwv, eXarTov, less^ the particle may
be omitted before numerals.
Acts xxiv. 11 : ov irXcCovs ilcrL fxot iwUpai 8d>S€Ka, k.t.X., lit., there are to
me no more days (than) twelve. So iv. 22, xxiii. 13.
Matt. xxvi. 53 : irXeCw SwScKa Xryidivas, more than twelve legions.
In some of these passages the Received Text has ^.
Mark ix. 42 : koXov Icttlv avrio jidXXov, k.t.X., it is better for him.
Acts XX. 35 : (uiKdpidv iarrt (idXXov 8i8oVat i^ Xafi/Sdveiv, it is more blessed
to give than to receive.
Matt, xviii. 8, 9 : KaXov croi Icrnv ilcTiXOiiv ... '^ ... pX-qOrivai, it is better
for thee to enter ... than ... to he cast', Ut., " it is good ... rather than."
So Mark ix. 43-47. Compare also Luke xviii. 14 (rec, but W. H. read
Trap* iKilvov ; 306, y, 3).
§
Hence also a comparative notion may be expressed by ^ after a noun
or verb.
Luke XV. 7 : x^^Lpo, ... k-rrl hi ... ^ irrl evcvT/Kovra cwca, there shall be joy
. . . over one . . . (rather) than over ninety-nine.
Luke xvii. 2 Xuo-ltcXci avrw : . . . •i^ Tva crKarSaAtcrry, it is profitable for
him ... (rather) than that he should offend.
272 ADJECTIVES —COMPAKISON. [§ 321.
1 Cor. xiv. 1 9 : GeXw TreWe \6yovs tw vol /xov XaXrjaai ...^ /xvptov^ Xoyovs
iv yXcotro-T/, / would (rather) speak Jive words with my understanding . .
Matt, xviii. 1 : rtg apa ixcL^wv iorrlv iv rfj /Jao-tXcia twv ovpavoiv ; who
then (of us) is greater (than the rest) in the kingdom of heaven ?
So Markix. 34 ; Luke ix. 46, xxii. 24. In Matt. xi. 11, 6 /juKporepos may be
rendered, he that is less than all others, i.e., " lie that is least," as A.V. (R.V.,
he that is but little), or he that is less than John (in fame and outward honour),
i.e., Christ himself; the sentiment being that of John i. 15.-
John xiii. 27 : that thou doest^ do more quickly, rdxiov, i.e., than thou
seemest disposed to do.
Acts xvii. 21 : hear sortie neicer thing, n
to tell or to Kaivorcpov, than
the last things that they had heard, " the later news."
Acts xvii. 22: ye men of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are
more addicted to loorship, 8€io-i8ai|iov€(rTepovs, i.e., than heathen nations
^
See Winer, § 35, 4.
- This latter is the interpretation of many of the Fathers, but is disallowed by
most modern critics. (Sec Alford's note.)
§ 324.] ADJECTIVES —COMPARISON. 273
Acts XXV. 10 : to the Jeics I have done no wrong, as also thou knoicest
better, koXXiov, than thou choosest to confess. Alford compares our
current phrase, to know better. So 2 Tim. i. 18, better even than I do.
Acts xxvii. 13 : they steered closer by Crete, do-<rov TrapeXeyovro tijv
have more sure the prophetic ward, we hold that word with a surer
i.e.,
either greater than other angels, ^ as the archangel, Jude 9, or (with more
probability) greater than these presumptuous, self-willed men.^
Fromthe above explanations it Avill be seen that the Comparative in such cases
isnot to be explained as "put for the Superlative," or as expressing the notions
of " too " or " very," but retains its true and proper force.
Tlie Superlative.
^ "Too superstitious," therefore, misses the true meaning both of the word and
the grammatical form; R.Y. has scnncivJuit superstiticms (marg. religious).
2 Huther. 3 Winer, Alford, R.Y., etc.
* R.Y. {his precious and exceeding great promises) well renders the force of the
article, but unnecessarily transposes the adjectives.
T
274 ADJECTIVES —THE SUPERLATIVE. [§ 324.
326. The Superlative 7rpioTo<;, firsts may be used where but two
things are compared.
Acts i. 1 : Toi/ jxkv irpwTov koyov liroL-qcra^yjv^ the first (former) treatise I
made. So John xix. 32 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 30 ;^ Heb. x. 9.
So the expression irpwrds /aou, before me^ John i. 15, 30 ; irpwros {in<3v,
before you, xv. 18. The Genitive is analogous to the Genitive after the
Comparative. On Luke ii. 2 see note, § 319.
simple adjective, as Prov. xxx. 30, a lion, strong among beasts, i.e., the
strongest of beasts ;2 (ii.) by the repetition of an adjective or noun in the
utterly enslaved.^
The New Testament has instances of both these idioms :
— (i.) Luke
i. 42 : 6vXoYTi|i4ni oru \v yvva.\iji, blessed art thou among v)omen, i.e., most
blessed, (ii.) Heb. ix. 3 : d-yia d^Uv, the holy of holies. Compare 1 Tim.
vi. 15 ; Rev. xix. 16.
Neither of these constructions is confined to the Hebrew, althougli their
occurrence in the New Testament may fairly be assigned to Hebrew influence.
1 But perhaps here the mental comparison might be, net simply with tlie second
speaker, but with the rest of the assembly.
2 Compare the use of a Hebrew preposition to give the force of the comparative
(§ 253).
3 There is yet a third method, i.e., the emphatic use of the adjective with the I
article, as Gen. ix. 24, his son, the young, i.e., his youngest. But perhaps there is
Other so-called Hebraisms must be rejected.^ Thus, Acts vii. 20, darelos r^j
QecS, must not be rendered, as in A.Y., R.Y., "exceeding fair," but beautiful
heforc God, in His eyes. Much less must the Divine name be taken as giving a
simple superlative force in such passages as Luke i. 15; 2 Cor. i. 12 Col. iL 19 ; ;
NUMERALS.
328. The Cardinal ds, besides its ordinary use, is employed in
the following ways :
Matt. xxvi. 69 : irpoo-rjXOev avT<2 ^£a TraLSia-Krjy there came to him a maid-
servant. 4
John vi. 9 : lo-rt TraiSapLov tv wSc, there is a lad here. (W. H. omit ev.)
So Matt, xviii. 24, xix. 16 Mark x. 17, xii. 42 Rev. viii. 13, etc. Often
; ;
with a Genitive following, as Matt. xvi. 14 Mark v. 22. Sometimes with e/c, ;
as Matt. xxii. 35, xxvii. 48. Occasionally, eh ns combined, as Luke xxii, 50.
ii. For the correlatives, one . . . the othe)\ cts is sometimes employed in
both clauses.
Matt. XX. 21 ; Mark x. 37 : cts Ik Sc^twv koX ets e^ rucuvv/xwv crov, one on
thy Hght hand, and the other on thy left.
Matt. xxiv. 40, xxvii. 38 ; John xx. 12 ; Gal. iv. 22. But 5\Xoj, ^repos, are
more frequently used in the second clause, as Matt. vi. 24 ; Rev. xvii. 1 0.
iii. For not one (ovSci'?, /A'/ySct'?), the New Testament writers, following
the Hebrew idiom, sometimes say one . . . not, combining the negative
But the adjective Tra?, every, is still more frequently employed in such
expressions. Thus, " everything is not ..." means " nothing is."
Luke i. 37 : ovk aSwarrja-eL trapa tw ©cu^ irdv prj/j-a, everything shall not
he impossible loith God, i.e., nothing shall be impossible.
not all. So Matt. vii. 21, ov ttSs 6 Xeyu}^ ... eiaeXeOarerai, not every one ... shall
colter.Had the reading been irds 6 \eyuv . . . ovk elaeXeucreTai, it would have
meant "no one ... shall enter." See ]\Iatt. xix. 11; 1 Cor. xv. 39 ; Rom. x. 16:
ov xavres vir-qKovaav, not all obeyed. iravres ovx virrjKovaau would have been
**
they all disobeyed."
iv. Instead of the ordinal 7rpu)To<?, the cardinal ct? is used in the design-
ation of the first day of the week (another Hebraism).
Matt, xxviii. 1 : ctg jiCav o-ajBpaTwv, lit., toioards the day one of the
week.
So Mark xvi. 2 (but ver. 9, TrpojTri) ; Luke xxiv. 1 ; John xx. 1, 19 ; Acts
XX. 7 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 2. In Titus iii. 10 ; Rev. vi. 1, 3, ix. 12, we find one and the
second as correlatives.
329. The particles ws, wo-cC, irov, about, etc., are used with numerals
adverhiallyj i.e., without affecting the case. Matt. xiv. 21 ; Mark v. 13 ;
Rom. iv. 19, etc. So with cirdvo), above, which in other connections is
followed by a Genitive.
330. The names of measures and coins may be omitted after numeral
designations. Acts xix. 19 : dp-yvpiov [ivpidSas irtvTc (five myiiads), fifty
thousands of silver, i.e., Spa)(jj.wv = denarii. Elsewhere the plural dp^vpia
(pieces of silver) is used, as Matt. xxvi. 16, etc.
331. The Greeks used the phrase " himself third," for " he and
two others," avrbs rpCros. So avTos T^rapros, he and three othei's, etc.
Sometimes avVo? was omitted. This idiom occurs once in the New
Testament. 2 Pet. ii. 5 : ^y^oov Nwc . . . c^vAa^cv, he preserved Noahy
and seven others.
Chapter V. PEOXOUXS. •
fXBdToi T| pao-iXeia <rov, k.t.X., Our Fathei' ichich art in heaven, Itallowed
be thy name, etc.
The only possessive for the third person in the New Testament is the
Genitive of avros.
Conversely, an objective genitive may be expressed by the possessive
adjective pronoun.
Luke xxii. 19 ; 1 Cor. xi. 25 : tovto Trotctrc ets r^v i\L^v dvdfivi]o-iv, this
do for my remembrance, i.e., "for remembrance of me." So Rom. xi. 31,
throiigh mercy shown to you; xv. 4 ; 1 Cor. xv. 31, ^^ my glorying in,
John XV. 9 : /xetj/arc iv tt) 0,7011171 rf] 6|ifi> ctbidG in my love, has some-
times been taken in a similar sense ;but it seems better to take the
pronoun there as a true possessive. (Compare § 269.)
In one striking passage, Eph. iii. 18, there seems the omission of a
genitive pronoun, '' ichat is the breadth?" etc., i.e., "of the love of
Christ."!
Matt. Vlll. 1 : KaTaf3dvTL Sk avra oltto tov 6pov<s yKoXovOrjaav avrw 6)(Xol
TToAAoi, and ivhen he had come down from the moimtain, great multitudes
followed him.
Where the object of a verb is expressed in tbe nominative absolutely, for the
sake of emphasis, its place in the sentence is supplied by a pronoun. (See § 242.)
Rev. iii. 12 : 6 vt/cwv voirjao} avrbv <tt6\ov, he tliat overcometh, I will nmke him
a ^nllar.
1 See Ellicott.
' W. H., however, in both passages cited read a Gen. Abs., Kard^avTos S^ airrov^
(KTcdevTo^ 5k avTOv.
^ See Winer.
. .
John xviii. 34 :
a<f)' eavrovi (tv tovto Xcycts; say est thou this of thyself ?
test yourselves.
(2) In respect of gender and number, avros often follows the rule
of rational concord (synesis). (See § 317, and for a similar usage with
the relative pronoun, compare § 345.)
a. Gender.
Matt, xxviii. 19 : fxaOrp-eva-aTe Tvavra tol ?0vt], fSaTTTL^ovTiS avrovs, disciple
all the nations, baptising them.
Col. ii. 15: aTreKSuo'a/xevos ras dp\ds ^at ras i|ov(rias ... Opiajx^cvcra^
avTovs, having stripped away from himself the principalities and the
powers . . . having triumphed over them.
Mark v. 41 : Kparr/cra? tt}? xupof; tov TraiSiov, A.ey€t avT^, having talieil
K.T.X., I icrote somewhat to the church, but Diotrephes who loves pre-
eminence over them.
So in reference to o)(\o^, ttXtjOo^, etc.
John viii. 44 : \f/€v(rTrj<s ccrrt koI 6 Trarrfp avTov, he is a liar and the
father of it, i.e., of lying.
So Matt. iv. 23 ; Acts viii. 5; 2 Cor. v. 19, 'Ho them" i.e., the inhabitants
of the world. Rom. ii. 26, the concrete implied in the abstract, aKpo^varia.
Eph. V. 12, "by those who walk in the darkness," or (Ellicott) •*
the children of
disobedience," ver. 6.
Possessive Pronouns.
Phil. iii. 9 : fxij t^inv k\L^v StKaioo-vvT/v rr)v Ik vojxov, not having a right-
eousness of my own, ichich is from law.
John xvii. 10 to. ejAa : iravTa era ccrTt, kol to. tra. i|id, 7ni7ie are all thine,
and thine are (all) mine.
The possessive adjective pronoun appears to have a greater emphasis than
the genitive of the personal. Thus 1 John ii. 2, he is (lie propitiation for our
sins, rjfjiuu, a general declaration ; but in the next clause this is thrown into
strong antithesis not for ours onhj, bid, etc. ; and here, accordingly, the ad-
jective pronoun is employed, ov irepi tQv ij/jLeTipuiu di fiovov.
1 Cor. xvi. 21 :
-nJ €|i^ x*'P^ IlavXov, hy my hand (that is) of me Paul.
Col iv. 18; 2 Thess. iii. 17.
John i. 41 : €vpi(TKtL ovrov irpiiirov tov aScX^ov tov ICSiov 2t/xcova, this
Demonstrative Pronouns.
338. The demonstratives ovto<;, avr?/, tovto, this (the nearer, connected
with the second person), and ckcIvo?, €K€LV7jy cxctvo, that (the more remote,
connected with the third person), with the correlatives (see § 62), obey
the laws of adjectival concord.
For the use of the demonstratives with the article, see § 220. ovtos
generally precedes its substantive, tKeTyos follows ; but to this rule there are
many exceptions.
Luke xviii. 14 : KarifSrj olros ScStKaiw/xcvo? cts tov oTkov avrov Trap'
iK€Lvov, this man (the latter) icejit down Jtcstifi£d to his house rather than
that (the former).
339. The demonstrative oSc, this ("this, here," connected with the
first person), is found only Luke x. 39 ; James iv. 13 ; and in the phrase
ToSc X^Y**-! i^^u^ (these things) saith^ Acts xxi. 11, and the beginnings of
the letters to the seven churches. Rev. ii., iii.
o5e marks a closer relation than oh-o^. In Greek narrative generally, IXe^e
TttOra is, he said this that precedes ; iXe^e rdde, Tie said this that follows.
There are a few other passages in which the Received Text has ode, but where
the best editors (so W. H.) adopt other readings, as Acts xv. 23 2 Cor. xii. 19 ;
* Winer notes the following passages as without emphasis (but query?): Matt.
xxii. 5, xxv. 14 Titus ii. 9 John i. 41 Eph. v. 22 ; Titus ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii 1, 5.
; ; j
282 PRONOUNS —DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 340.
John vii. 45 : kol cittoi/ avrots ckcivoi, and they (the chief priests and
Pharisees just mentioned) said to theniy the officers spoken of before.
knoio the grace of the Lord Jesus Christy that for your sahes he beca'oic poor,
rich as he was, that ye, through His (e/cetVou) poverty might he enriched. So
Titus iii. 7. Compare Acts iii. 13.
2 Tim. ii, 26 is difficult : e^coyprjfx^voi utt' airrou, els to eKcivov 9e\rjiJ.a. The two
pronouns can hardly refer to the same subject (compare iii. 9) ; and it seems best
to connect the clause beginning with etj with dvavrjxpoxnv, taking t^coyfyrj/xivoi vir
avTov as parenthetical. " aud that they tnay return to soberness out of
Ellicott :
the snare of the devil {though holden captive by him) to do His tvill," i.e., God's.
For other explanations, see Alford, Ellicott, etc. R.V. refers the avrov back to
"the Lord's servant " (ver. 24), and the tKdvov to God.
Matt. xiii. 20-23 : 6 Se ... o-Trapet'? ... ofirds €o-rtv, that tvhich teas sown
... this is he, etc.
So X. 22, xiii. 38, xv. 11, xxvi. 23 ; John vi. 46 ; John i. 18, 33 [cKelvos),
V. 11, x. 1, etc.
1 Cor, vi, 4, TovTovs ; Rom. vii. 10 : compare Acts i. 22 ; 1 Cor. v. 5 ; 2 Cor.
xii. 2.
that, etc.
John XV. 17 : ravra ivriXXofxai v/xtv, I'va aYairaTC dXX-^Xor^s, this I com-
mand you, that ye love one another. (But see R.V. and § 384, a, 1.)
3 John 4 : fxeiloTcpav tovtwv ovk c^w yapav (W. H., ;(apiv), a more
surpassing joy than this I have not. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 11: koX Tavrd
Ttv€s 5t€, and this were some of you^ or " such in some degree were you."
(See §§ 180, 352, iii.)
In Heb. xi, 12, the phrase koL ravra, k.t.\., must be rendered, and that, too,
of Mm who was as good tis dead. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 8, Received Text.
similarly resumptive.
On Eph. ii. 8, rrj y&p xciptTt icrre ceaua-fxivoi 5ia TrtVrews '
Kai tovto ovk e^ vfiwv,
K.T.X., see § 403, d.
For the ellipsis of the Demonstrative before the Relative, see § 347.
Rom. ii. 6 : tov ®€ov, 8s aTroSwo-et, K.T.X., of Gody who will recompense,
etc.
See also Gal. ii. 10 Col. i. 29 ; Heb. v. 11, ; etc. ; and with plural relative,
Acts xxiv. 18 {h ah), xxvi. 12 ; Col. ii. 22.
a. Gender.
Acts XV. 17 : Travra to, ^Ovt] €<|>' oOs, ac.t.X., all the Gentiles, upon wliom,
etc. So xxvi. 17; Gal. iv. 19; 2 John 1.
b. Number.
Phil. ii. 15 : ^evcds CKoXtas /cat 8L€<TTpaiijX€vr]<;y iv ois ^atVccr^c, k.t.X., o/
a crooked and perverted generation^ among icliom ye appear, etc.
A plural may
be implied in a singular phrase ; hence sometimes a plural
relative wth Acts xv. 36 Kara irbXiv iroiaav, iv ah,
a singular antecedent. :
the Proitorium.
Gal. iii. 16 : t<S xnrip^a.rl crov, 6s i(TTL Xpio-rds, to thy seed, ichich is
Christ.
Eph. vi. 17: t^v fxa^aipav rov Trvev/xaTO?, o ecrrt prjfxa 0eov, the stvord
of the Spirit, which is the word of God.
Col. i. 27 : Tov |jiv<rTr]pCov tovtov ... iJs^ icrn Xpitrrbs iv vfxlv, k.t.X., of
this mystery . . . ichich is Christ in you, etc. This text explains the
meaning of 1 Tim. iii. 1 6, provided this reading be adopted ; con-
fessedly greatis the mystery of godliness, Ss^ c<|>avcp(o0Ti kv o-apKl, k.t.X.,
Luke iii. 19 : Trept iravrwv »v iiroLrjcre Trovrjpwv, for all the evil things
ivhich he did.
John iv. 14 : e/c rov ilSaros o5 eyw Scocro) airrw, of the water which I Will
give to him.
Luke ii. 20 : liri irdo-iv ols ^Kovo-av, for all things ichich they heard.
Acts ii. 22 : Swdfico-t /cat r^pao-i /cat <rr]|j.€iois, ots eTroLrjcre, k.t.X., by mighty
deeds and wonders, and signs ichich (God) wrought, etc.
In other words, the noun to which the Relative belongs is understood in the
antecedent clause, and expressed in the relative, instead of being (as usual)
expressed in the former and understood in the latter.
the fanu of doctrine into ichich ye icere delivered, for vtttjk ... t<Z rvino
... CIS ov.
See also Luke xii. 48 ; Acts xxi. 16, xxvi. 7 ; 1 Cor, x. 16, etc. ; and the
repeated quotation from Ps. cxviii. 22 : Xidov 6v dvedodfjiaaav ... odros iyevrfdr],
K.T.X., Matt. xxi. 42; Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (in this last
passage W. H. have XiOos).
Matt. X. 27 : 8 Xcyw vpuv €v rfj (tkotlo. ... Kat 8 cts to o*s d/covcrc, what
I say to you in the darkness . . . and what ye hear (into, § 298, 8) in the ear.
Luke vii. 47 : a Sk oXtyov d^c'erat, oXtyov dyaTra, but (he) to idiom little
John iv. 18 : 8v ex^'? ov'*^ ^ort o-ou avrip, (he) whom thou now host is not
thy husband.
Heb. V. 8 : e/xaOev a(f> wv e-rraOe ty]v vnaKorjv, he learned obedience from
those things ichich he stiffered.
This is a Hebrew idiom ; the relative in that language being indeclinable, and
requiring to be complemented by a pronoun.
Acts XV. 17 : l<^ ofts liriKeKX-qTaL to ovo/xd jxov lir ovtovs, upon whom
my name has been called; Amos ix. 12, LXX.
So also Mark i. 7 ; Luke iii. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 24 (not W. H.), etc.
Matt. vii. 15 : "beware of the false prophets, who come to you," i.e.^
such as come.
Matt. vii. 24, 26 "a wise man who built his house upon the rock, a
:
foolish man who built his house upon the sand;" in each case the kind
of man who did what is described.
* The instances of 8, n, neuter, are very few ; and there is much variation of
reading, 8ti, conj., being often preferred (as, e.g., in 2 Cor. iii. 14).
— —
Matt. XXV. 1 :
" ten virgins iclio having taken their lamps went forth to
meet the bridegroom," i.e.^ who acted in accordance with their function.
Rom. vi. 2 :
" we who died to sin, how shall we longer live therein!" z.e.,
Accusative. Matt. v. 46, 47 : rfva fxia-Oov ^x^'''^ > ••• tC irepLcra-ov TrotctTc;
Matt. ix. 1 1 : 8id ti ^ /xera ruiv tcXcovcov kol afxaprwXwv iaOUc ; ichere-
fore eateth he with the publicans and sinners ? So Matt. xiv. 31 ; Mark
xiv. 4 ; John xiii. 28.
ii. Elliptically, with im, that (" that what may happen ?•" or where-
foi-e ?)—
Matt. ix. 4: Xva tC ivOvfieLcrOe -rrovrjpd ; wherefore are ye imagining
malignant things ?
In quotations from the Old Testament, some editors (not W. H.) have \va.r[
;
Luke ii. 49 : ti oti c^t/tcitc /itc ; hoxo (is it) that ye loere seeking me ?
easier ?
Matt. xxi. 31 : t£s iK twv Svo ciroir/o'C to 6iK-qp.a rov Trarpog; which of ^
So xxiii. 17, 19, xxvii. 17, 21 ; 1 Cor. iv. 21 ; Phil. i. 22 (see § 382, c).
351. The simple interrogative, rts, ti, is also used in indirect ques-
tions, and after verbs of knowing, thinking, etc., in objective sentences.
See § 382, d. The classic Greek idiom requires dans, 6,ti, though not without
frequent exceptions.
Thus the only difference between the forms of the two is in accent
and the position in the sentence.
— —
The indefinite, rts, rt, may be used (i.) simply, with or without a
Substantive expressed
Luke i. 5 : kyeviTo . . . tepevs tis, there teas ... a certain priest. So, very
often, AvOpwiros ns, a certain man.
Luke xxii. 35 : /xtJ tivos vo-Tcp^o-arc ; did ye lack anything 1
So V. 15, etc. "With airb, Luke xvi. 30 ; with iK, Heb. iii. 13.
Acts V. 36 : Xiymv eTvat Tiva eairroi^, saying that lie was somebody.
Compare viii. 9.
Gal. vi. 3 : ct yap 8oKet rts civat Tt p.y]h\v wv, (^pcvaTrara eavrov, for if
any one thinks he is anything, being nothing, he deceives himself.
See also 1 Cor. iii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 6 aud (of things) 1 Cor. x. 19 ; Gal. vi. 15.
Compare Heb. x. 27.
See also (in the opinion of some interpreters ; not R.V.) 1 Cor. vi. 11, such
in some degree were you.^ But see § 342.
i
Wahl.
U
290 PRONOUNS —THE INDEFINITE TL<;. [§ 352, iv.
(v.) In alternative expressions we find both rtvcs ... rtves and rts ...
€T€po<; —
Phil. i. 1 5 : nv^s fxev /cat Sta c}>06vov . . . rivh Sk /cat Sc evSoKtav, some
indeed even from envy ... hut others also from goodioill.
1 Cor. iii. 4 : orav yap Xiyrj ns ..^ ^repos Se, for lohen one saith ... and
another.
(vi.) The negatives of rt? are ovBcCs, firiSci's, no one. For their con-
struction, and for the Hebraistic negative, ov Tras, see § 328, iii.
The compounds, oxjtls, firiTis, are not found in the New Testament. The latter,
in John iv. 33 (Rec.) should be /xr) ris (W. H.). For the interrogative /MrjTi,
see § 370.
;
Active verb may in its middle voice retain the transitive meaning with
certain modifications, or may become intransitive or reflexive. The
passive sense is conveyed by the Passive form.
Intransitive, or " neuter " verbs, in like manner, may be Active or
Middle in form.
"W. H., however, read €|jLa9i]T€v0T] (though with e/xa^rjrcvo-e marg.) ; and
elsewhere the verb is transitive, chap. xiii. 52, xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21.
Act. 1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.) : iravo-aTw ttjv yXwcrcrav diro KaKov. let him
refrain his tongue from evil.
Mid. 1 Cor. xiii. 8: ctre yXwcrcrat, Travo-oyrai, whether {^xave, be) tongues
tht'y f<]iall cease.
Soe also Matt, xxvii. 5 ; Mark vii. 4 , Luke xiii. 29 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1. In tliis
* Dr. Donaldson, § 432. (1) may be called the Accusative middle ; (2) the Dative
middle. (See 2.
§ 855.] THE YEEB —ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 293
cavTots iroi^o-aTc might have been fully expressed by the one word,
iroii^o-ao-Oc.
Act. John xvi. 24 : oXnln koX X-qij/ea-Oc, ask^ and ye shall receive.
j\Iid. Matt. XX. 22 : ovk otSare tl alrcio-Oc, ye hnoio not what ye ask (for
yourselves).
Act. Acts xxii. 20 : <|)vXd(ro-wv to. IfidTLa, watching the clothes (of
Stephen's murderers).
Mid. 2 Tim. iv. 15 : ov kol a-v <|>\»Xd(r<rov, of whom do thou also heicare,
i.e., watch him with a view to thy own safety.
Act. and Mid. 2 Pet. i. 10 : o-TrovSaorarc /Jc^atav v^dv ttjv kXtjo-lv kol
€K\oyrjv 'iroi€i<r9ai *
ravra yap irotovvrcs, k.t.X., give diligence to make your
calling and election sure for yourselves ; for doing these things, etc.
For other instances of the IMidcUe of ttoi^cj, see Luke v. 33, xiii. 22 ; Acts
i. 1, XX. 24, XXV. 17, xxvii. 18 ; Rom. i. 9, xiii. 14, xv. 26 ; Epli. iv, 16 ; Phil.
i. 4 ; Heb. i. 3, and a few other passages.
XX. 28 ; Gal. iv. 10 ; Eph. v. 16 ; Phil, i, 22 ; 2 Thess, iii. 14, and many other
passages. In 1 Tim, iii. 13 the dative pronoun is added to the Middle verb.
"to have it done," " to provide for its being done." Here the Middle
partakes more nearly of the nature of the Passive.^
See also Matt. v. 40 and 1 Cor. vi. 1 : Kplvecdai, to contend at law; Rom. iii. 4:
KoX viK-qa-rjs ev Tt^ Kpiveadai <re, and that thou mayest overcome when thou comcst
into trial, i.e., with the chikh'en of men ; the image being that of two parties to
a suit —not, when thou judgest, as A.V., Ps. K. 4, nor ivlieii thou art judged, as
in the NewTestament quotation.'^
For the special meanings of different verbs the Vocabulary must be consulted.
The threefold division now given covers most of the relations of the Middle with
the Active.
Dative. Rom. iii. 2 : i'in<rrtvQr]<rav ra \6yia Tov @€ov, they were entrusted
with the oracles of God.
So 1 Cor. ix. 17 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Thess. ii. 4, etc.
See also Mark xvi. 5 ; Acts xviii. 25, etc., for verbs of the former class.
For verbs of the latter class, note Rom. iii. 2, quoted above, with the con-
nected passages.
357. After Passive verbs, the agent is marked by viro with the
Genitive ; occasionally by other prepositions, as ciTro, Ik, irapa, Trpos )
358. As many forms Middle and Passive are alike, it is some-of the
times decide which
difficult to intended. In considering this question, is
regard must chiefly be had to the usage of the particular verbs, and to
the general construction of the sentence.
The following is a selection of instances :
Matt. xi. 5 : Trrwxot evayycXitovrai, poor men preach the gospel, or have
the gospel preached to tliem. The verb may be middle or passive,^ but
the sense of the passage seems decisively for the latter.
Rom. iii. 9 : t'l ovv ; •irpo€xoH.€0a ; ivltat then? are we superior? (mid.),
or, are we surpassed ? (pass.). The context requires the former meaning.
Some, however (see Dr. Yauglian), prefer the passive, but render are
we prefeiTed ? a sense without authority elsewhere. For other sug-
gested renderings, see Alford's note. The R.V. has are loe in wm'se case
than they ? with marg. do we excuse ourselves ?
* For the middle, see Luke i. 19, ii. 10, iii. 18, iv. 18, 43, and many other passages;
for the passive (\nth a personal subject), Heb. iv. 2, 6. The passive is also found,
Luke xvi. 16; Gal. i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 25, iv. 6, the subject being that which was
preached.
296 THE VERB —MOODS AND TENSES. [§ 358.
1 Cor. i. 2 : cvv Tract rots eiriKaXovp,evoL9 to ovofia tov Kvpt'ov, 7cith all
iclio call upon the name of the Lord, or tvho are called bf/ the name. The
usage of the word clearly pronounces for the former. Compare Acts
vii. 59, ix. 14, 21 ; Rom. x. 13 (Acts ii. 21), compared with ver. 14 ;
1 Pet. i. 17, etc. Acts xv. 17 (from LXX., Amos ix. 12) is quite
different.
2 Cor. ii. 10 : koL yap eyw b Kex.dpi(r|iai, ct tl Kcxapia-jiai, 8t* v/Act?. Some
render the verb here as pass., I have been forgiven; but ;)(api^o/xat nowhere
else means " to be forgiven," and the ordinary rendering gives a sense
The Indicative.
-360. As the force of the Tenses will be best seen in the first instance
by their use in the Indicative, an account of them is here introduced.
See the Table of Tenses, § 65. Let it be remembered that Tense
expresses both time and state. Time is present, past, and future ;
The future imperfect, the present indefinite, and the future perfect,
are expressed in other ways.
The three past tenses are termed " historical tenses," the others
"principal tenses."
Matt. iii. 10 : 17 a^ivq Trpos T7]v pt^av rdv SevSpcov Kcirai, the axe is lyinff
at the root of the trees.
John iii. 36 : 6 Trta-Tevwv cts rov vlov ixi\. t^iarjv alwvLOVy he that heHevetli
on the Son hath life eternal.
Matt. XXV. 8 : at Xa/xTraSe? yjixdv o-p€vvvvTai, mir lamps are going out
(R.Y.); not "are gone out," as A.Y.
Gal. i. 6 : Oavfxd^ui ort ovtu) Ta;(€(u? (i€TaTi0€(rO€, I marvel that ye are so
soon changing.
h. It is also used to denote an habitual or usual act.
Matt. vii. 8 : ttSs 6 atrwv Xajipdvei, koX o t^-qrCiv €vpio-K6i, every one icho
asJiS receives, and he tcho seeks Ji7ids.
John i. 29 : t^ iiravptov pXeirci tov ^Irjcrovv ... kol Xfyti, 0)1 the next day
he seeth Jesus, and saith.
Sometimes the Historic Present is ueed with Aorists in the same
narration.
!Mark v. 14, 15: ?<|)V'yov koL airriyyctXav . . . /cat ^X0ov . . . Kat ^pxovrai . . , Kai
0€wpov(rt ... Kat €<|>opTiOi]<rav, and
they fed, related ... and came ... and they
come ... and he!told ... and they feared.
Variations may here be noted in the comparison of different evangehsts in the
same narrative. Thus, ^latt. xxi. 23, xxii. 23, we read, irpoa-TjXdoi', they came to
him ; Mark xi. 27, xii. 18, ^pxovrai, therj comc.^ Compare also Matt. xxiv. 40 ;
^ As a rule, the narrations of Mark are more vivid than those of the other
evansjehsts.
298 THE TENSES —PRESENT. [§ 361, i.
Matt. xxvi. 2 : ^cra Svo rjfxepa'i to Traor^a Yivcrai, kol 6 vto9 tov avOpwTrov
irapo.StSoTai, after two days is the passover, and the Son of man is betrayed'.
Luke xix. 8 : ra rj/xLcna fiov twv virap-^ovrtav Kvpie tois Trrto^^ot? 8C86)p.i,
the half of my goo(h. Lord, I give to the poor; not "I am in the habit
of giving" now; but "I will give," immediately.
xiii. 11.) So Matt. xvii. 11 'HXt'as kpx^rai, Elijah is coming; and especially
:
John xiv. 3 irdXiv ^pxofJ.ai Kai 7rapa\7ji/'0/iat vfids, I ani coming again, and ivill
:
receive you. 1 Cor. xvi. 5 : Ma/ce5oj/taj/ 5iepxofJ.aL must be rendered, / (am about
to) pass through Macedonia, not "I am passing through," which would be
contrary to The participle of this verb, 6 €px6/j,€vos, tJie coming one, is a
fact.
frequent the ]\lessiah (see § 210), and in the Revelation denotes the
title of
eternal self-existence of Deity, who wast, and art, and art to corne, lit., "who
comest."
On the other hand, the verb, ^/cw, in the present, has a perfect signification:
/ am come. Luke xv. 27 : 6 ddeX^os aov iJKei., thy brother is come ; John ii. 4 ;
Heb. X. 9 (not simply " Lo, I come," but Lo, I am come) ; 1 John v. 20.
Acts iii. 2 : ov IrL^ow KaO' rjfxipav, ichom they used to lay day by day.
Mark xv. 6 : Kara h\ kopTrfv onreXv^v avTo7<s Iva SicTfXLOVj a7id at each
passover he used to release to them one prisoner.
See also 1 Cor. xiii. 11
§ 362, c] THE TENSES —IMPERFECT. 299
Matt. ii. 4 : Herod was inquiring of the priests and scribes, not once
for all, but repeatedly and when they had
; replied, he asceiiained
(Aorist, one act) of the Magi what they had seen.
Acts xvi. 4 : as they icei'e going through the cities they were delivering
the decrees to the churches.
Matt. iv. 11 : ayycAot irpoo-i^XOov kol Sitjkovovv avnZ, angels came and
icere rainistering to him.
Matt. xiii. 8 : other seed fell (^ireo-cv) upon the good ground, and was
yielding (cSiSov) fruit.
Matt. XXV. 5 : they all fell asleep (cvvo-ralav), and icere slumher^ijig
(€Kd0€v8ov).
Mark vii. 35 : Ids ears icere opened (8n]votx0'no-av),- and the bond of his
tongue teas loosed (cXvOi]), and he teas speaking (eXdXct) plainly.
Luke viii. 23 : a whirlwind came down (KaWpi]), and they were filling
(«rvv€ir\T]povvTo) and were in danger (eKiv8vv€vov).
1 Cor. iii. 6 : / planted, Apollos (catered, God was giving the increase.
The transitory acts of human teachers are expressed by Aorists, the con-
tinual bestowal of Divine grace by the Imperfect. So, 1 Pet. ii. 23, 24,
we have three Imperfects to denote continual and repeated acts ; but an
Aorist to denote an act (" he bare our sins") once for all.
See further, Matt. xxi. 8-11; Mark xi. 18 ; John vii. 14, xi. 13, xx. 3-5 ;
* It may be noted, however, that the absence of any tine Imperfect in English, and
the necessity of employing a somewhat cumbrous circumlocution, often makes it
dilticult to render the Greek tense without loss of elegance, and has led to the loose
eiiiploynient of the English preterite,
* W. H. read fjvoiyijffay.
300 THE TENSES — IMPERFECT. [§ 362, f.
Matt. iii. ,14 : SickwXvcv avrov, he teas hindering him, i.e., was doing so
until checked by our Lord's words.
Luke i. 59 : koX eKoXow avTo . . . Za;(aptai/, and they began to call him
Zacharias.
Luke V. 6 : Sit^p^-ywro Se to Blktvov avTiov, and their nH was hreahing,
began to give way.
Luke xxiv. 27 : SnipfiTjvcvcv,^ began to interpret, entered upon the
explanation, rather than " expounded " all, as A.Y.
Heb. xi. 17 : tov fxovoyevrj irpo<rc(|>cp€v, he was offering wp his only
begotten, when the angel's voice arrested him.
Some critics take this as a simple imperfect, referring to the apostle's un-
converted state. "There was a time when even I myself (as you do now) begged
to be anathema from Christ;" this l)eing a parenthesis, and the words "on
behalf of my brethren" being attached to verse 2. The exposition deserves
In Matt, xxvii. 4, 24, Acts xviii. 15, the second person future has the force
of a threat :
^^
you shall see to Vtat.'' But compare next paragraph.
So Matt. V. 48, xxii. 37, 39 (and parallels, as Rom. xiii. 9 ; Gal. v. 14) ;
Especially in prohibitions (from the Old Testament, but not only so).
Gal. vi. 5 : l/cao-Tos yap ro tStov ^opriov /Sao-rao-ct, for each man shall
hear his own load.
Mark xiv. 31 : / icill never deny thee ! Luke x. 19 : nothing shall ever
harm you.
e. A
Future imperfect (*' resolved future ") is formed by the
Future of the verb €ijj.c with the Present participle.
Luke i. 20 : io-r\ o-iwircSv, thou shalt he silent.
So Matt. X. 22, xxiv. 9 ; Mark xiii. 25 ; Luke v. 10, xvii. 35 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 9.
(See §394,1.)
The Future Perfect has been sufficiently explained, § 101, i.
The former, which is scarcely over represented in the A.V., gives emphasis
to the notion that the thing is to happen, and hence is often used of '
fixed and appointed purpose.^ Tli£ reader may study the following
passages in which /xeXXto occurs, noting especially the R.V.
Matt. ii. 13, xvii. 12, 22, xx. 22, xxiv. 6 ; Mark xiii. 4; Luke vii. 2
[was at the point of death), ix. 31,44, x. 1 ; John vi. 6, xiv. 22, xviii. 32 ;
Acts V. 35 {lohat ye are ahout to do), xvii. 31 ; Rom. viii. 13 (you are sure
to die) ; 1 Thess. iii. 4 ; Heb. xi. 8 (tvhich he was to receive), and many
other passages, to jacXXov, part, neut., is " the future." Once the verb is
used in the sense of delay, rt fxcXXas ; why tarriest thou ? Acts xxii. 1 6.
wan u'ills to come aftei' me ...for whosoever wills to save his life will
(future) lose it ... but whosoever shall lose his life for my saJfe will find it
(simple futurity). So exactly Mark viii. 34, 35 ; Luke ix. 23, 24 ; John
V. 6, 40, vii. 17 if any man wills to do his will, he shall know of the
:
doctrine; viii. 44 the lusts of your father ye choose to do; Acts xvii. 18
:
:
tchat does this babbler icant to say ? Eom. xiii. 3 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 35 : if
they tvish to, or, as in other passages, if they icoidd learn anything
1 Tim. V. 11 : they leant to marry ; James ii. 20 : wiliest thou to know ?
The First and Second Aorists have precisely the same meaning, except in the
few cases specified, §§ 100, 108, 3.
undei'tookj it seemed good also to me (" have undertaken," "it has seemed
good").
Luke ii. 48 : T€Kvov, tl e-n-oiTicras rjfXLV ovtws ; child, ichy didst fhou thus
deal u'ith u^ ? (" hast thou dealt").
1 T. S. Green.
304 THE TENSES —AOKISTS. [§ 364, a,
1 John iv. 8 : he lolio loves not, never got a knowledge of (iyvui) God;
experimentally, —not having at any time known what love is.^
See also Luke xiv. 18, 19 ; John viii. 29, xvii. 4 ; Rom. iii. 23, all shincd,
aiid so are coming short, etc. ; 1 Cor. vi. 11.
Phil. iii. 8 : / suffered the loss of all things, i.e., at the crisis of his
life, ver. 12. James i. 11 (a vivid, descriptive delineation). So ver. 24
(a Perfect interposed).
2 Pet. i. 14
knoivhig that the putting off of miy tabernacle cometh
:
swiftly, even as our Lord Jesus Christ signified unto me (R.V.). By the
^^hath showed me" (of A.V.) we lose altogether the special allusion to an
historic moment in the Apostle's life, to John xxi 18, 19, which would
at once have come out had iZr^fatri /xot been rendered, ^showed me.""^
h. In narration, an Aorist that starts from a time already past
may be translated by the Pluperfect
Matt. XX viii. 2 : o-etcr/xos c-yevtro /xcya?, there had heen a great earth-
quake.
Luke ii. 39 : ws crcXco-av TrdvTa, when they had accomplished all things.
See also Matt. xiv. 3 ; John vi. 22, xL 30, xviii. 24 (?), etc.
Gal. vi. 11, referring either to the whole or to part, according to the
interpretation adopted.
But ^paxf/a has, in other cases, its ordinary Aorist force, referring to a former
letter, "/ wrote," 2 Cor. ii. 3, 4, 9, vii. 12 ; probably 3 John 9 ; and perhaps
1 Cor. V. 9.
The word ^-rrcixxj/a also exemplifies the Epistolary Aorist, ^^ I have sent,"
^ Other passages in which fyj/wj/ has been regarded as standing for the Present may
be ex})lained in a similar way.
- Arch])ishoi) Trench on the Authorised Version of the New Testament, p. 146.
^ See EUicott on Gal. vi. 11.
§ 365, ^.J THE TENSES —PERFECT. 305
Rom. viii. 30: IkAXco-^ . . . eSiKalwo-c . . . e8<J|a(r€, 7ie calls ... justifies ..,
glorifies; "he did, and does."^
1 Cor. vii. 28 : thou didst not . . . she did not commit a sin.
xviii. 23, xxii. 2), " a9 if the mould had already received its shape,
"^
though the cast was yet to issue.
YeypcwfKi, ivhat 1 have icritten, I have written. It denotes also a past act
whose consequences remain, as -YeypairTai, " it has been written, and
abides ;" it is ivi'itten.^
Mark iii. 26 : et 6 iSaraj/a? dve'cm] i(f> cavrov, /cat ]i.i[Lip\.<rrai,^ for if Satan
rose up against himself and has become divided.
Acts xxi. 28 : he hrought (clo-^va-yev) Greeks into the temple^ and has
profaned (k^koIvwkc) this holy place ; the single act, the abiding result.
1 Cor. XV. 4 : koX 6tl €Td<|)T], koL on e-y^^epTai, a7id that he was buried,
and that he is risen again. So The simple all through this chapter.
historical fact is announced by the aorist, "fiyepBi], Matt, xxviii. 6, 7
Mark xvi. 6; Luke xxiv. 6, 34 (John xxi. 14); Eom. vi. 4, etc. For
the perf. part., see 2 Tim. ii. 8, compared with the aor. part., 2 Cor. v. 15.
Col. i. 16 : on iv avTw kKri<r9r\ to. Trdvra ... to, Travra St' avrov kol cts avrov
^KTiorrat, because in him were all things created ... all things have been
created by him and for him.
Col. iii. 3 : dircGdvcTc yap, Kat 7] ^oir] v/xwv KiKpynrrai . . . for ye died^ and
your life remains hidden.
Kev. V. 7 : ^XBc Kat 6\;Xti4>€, he came, and he hath taken the book (which
he still retains, as Lord of human destiny).
rock.
So KTOLO/xai, to gain ; K^Krrj/xai, to possess, which (h)os not, however, occur in the
New Testament. See Luke xviii. 12: irdvTa oca KTw/xai, not of all that I possess,
but of all that I gain — the income, not the capital. So xxi. 19, " ?/c shall win
your souls " (R.V.).
Interrogative Forms.
368. The several tenses of the Indicative are employed interroga-
tively, each with proper force.
The interrogative may be indicated
its
by the appropriate pronouns or particles, or simply by the
order of
the words, or the general sense of the passage.
"
Shall God who justifieth ? "Who is he that condemneth ? Is it Christ who died ?
etc. (So R.V. marg. See Alford's note on the passage.)
some siicli phrase as say, or tell us, being understood. In this case the
sentence is really dependent. (See § 383.)
Matt. xii. 10: €l c^co-ti toIs a-dp/Saa-L 6epa7r€V€Lv ; is it lawful to heal
upon the sahhath ? (tell us if — ).
1 Cor. ix. 1 : ovk ei/xt Ik^vOcpos ; ovk eljxl aTrdcrToXos ; k.t.X., am I not
free ? am I not an apostle ? etc.
Acts xiii. 10 : ov Travarrj Stacrrpe^cDj/ ; Wilt thoit not ceose from pervert-
ing ? the affirmative answer being intimated as that which ought to be
given. So Mark xiv. 60 : dost thou not answer anything ?
Once ovKovv is found. John xviii. 37 : thou art not then a king, art
thou ?
h. Y-'h
expects a negative answer.
Matt. vii. 9 : |jl^ XiOov eViSojo-ct avTio ; will he give him a stone ?
Rom. ix. 14: ii-rj dSiKia Traph. tu) 0e(p ; is thei'e unrighteousness with
God ?
c. fji^Ti suggests an emphatic negative.
j\latt. vii. 16 : JJh^ti (rvWiyovaLv utto aKai'OCjy (rTa(f>vXa<; rj d-nro Tpt/3oAa>»'
Matt. XX vi. 22, 25 : {xtjti eyw etyut, Kvpte ; (from the disciples), iitjti eyw
€t/ti, pa;^/?t'; (from Judas), it is not /, is it, Lord?— is it, Rabbi ?
^
would sometimes appear as though dawning conviction would fortify re-
It
sistance by a strong negative. So ]\ratt. xii. 23 may be understood /i^n ovtos :
See also 1 Cor. vii. 15, xiv. 38. ''Rev. xxii. 11 is a challenge {Aufforderung):
* the fate of all is as good as already determined.' "
^ Winer, xliii. 1.
- Bengel. " Sleep, if you feel at liberty to do so ; " not in irony, not (as some) a
question.
310 'iHE IMPERATIVE MOOD. [§ 373, a.
h. The Aorist.
Matt. vi. 6 : el'o-cXOc ets to ra/xtetoi/ aov KaX . . irp6a-fv^aij enter into thy
chamber . . . and pray.
Matt. vi. 9-11 : in the Lord's Pra^yer, a^iao-GiiTa) ... y€VTj0TJTw ... 80s ...
John xi. 44 : Xvo-arc auroi/, Kat &<J)€T€ avTov VTrdycLV, loose him^ and let
him go.
c. The Perfect.
The contrasted force of the Present and Aorist is shown where both
are used in the same passage.
John V. 8 : dpov rov KpapaxTov aov kcu 'ir€piirdT€t, take up thy bed and
walk.
Rom. vi. 13 : ix-qh\ Trapto-TdvcTc to. fxiXy v^xuiv oirXa dStActa? rrj d/xapria,
aXXh. Trapa<rTi]o-aT€ kavTov<s tw 0€(3, yield not your members (as tlie habit of
your lives), as instruments of unrighteousness, unto sin, but yield, yoiir-
selves (a single act, once for all) unto God.
For the employment of the Future Indicative in commands and prohibitions,
see § 363, h.
For the similar use of the Subjunctive, especially in prohibitions, see § 375.
The Infinitive may also be employed. (See § 392.)
In many instances the force of the Aorist and that of the Present
seem nearly identical. The former is the more vigorous expression.
Kom. XV. 11 : alvctrt, Trdvra to. tOvr], rov l^vpiov, koi ^iraiveo-dTuxrav avrov
7rdvT€? ot Xaoi, praise the Lord, all the nations ; and let all the peoples
burst into a song of praise to him.
Thus, Loy/xevy let us go, is really a final clause (Iva understood) dependent
on some implied verb or phrase. In such cases as the following, how-
ever, this distinctionmay be disregarded, and the sentences taken as to
all intents and purposes independent.
John xix. 24 : |x^ <rxio-w|x,€V avrov, aWa Xax^H-^^j ^^^ '^^^ '^^^ ^'^^^^ ^^) ^^^
Rom. V. 1 : dp-qv-qv ix(a\i.iv TTpos Tov ©cov,^ let us have peace with God;
and ver. 2, 3 : KavxwjieOa, let us glory.
^ W. H,, R.V. The MS. evidence for this reading is very strong ; indeed, in any
ordinary case would be overwhelming. On internal grounds, however, Tischendorf
and others prefer the rec. text, ive have peace. case, even the testimony of In such a
MSS. must be taken with great caution as seems to have been a practice with
; it
some ancient transcribers to make Scripture, as they thought, more emphatic by
turning a declaration or a promise into an exhortation. It could easily be done, as
nothing more was needed than to change the o of the indicative into the w of the
subjunctive. So John iv. 42, "let us believe " Rom. v. 10, *'l€t us be saved ;" ;
Rom. vi. 8, "let us believe ;" 1 Cor. xiv. 15, " let me pray " 1 Cor. xv. 49, "let ;
us bear the image of the heavenly" (so W. H.); Heb. vi. 3, "this let us do;"
James iv. 13, " let us go, "etc.; and many similar passages. (See Alford's note on
Rom. V. 1.)
" This is the regular classical idiom.
'Sl'2 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [§ 375.
This usage also depends upon the ellipsis of some phrase like "see," "take
heed," etc., with Xva. In a few instances, a positive command is expressed by
IVa with the subjunctive (Mark v. 23 2 Cor. viii. 7 Eph. v. 33). For the ; ;
complete phrase, see 1 Cor. xvi. 10 and with ellipsis of IVa, Matt. viii. 4. ;
But the third person of the Aor. Imp. may be used with jirj (]\Iatt. vi. 3 ;
beration or doubt thus, t'l iroiwiicv (John vi. 28) ichat are we to do ?
:
;
but ri iroiovjicv (Jolm xi. 47) ivhat are we doing? " what are we about '?"
;
Mark xii. 14 : 8«}j.€v tj fxrj 8wp.€v ; are ive to give^ or not to give ?
Matt. xxvi. 54 : ttcos ovv irXTipwOwo-iv at ypacfiai, Jioic then slioidd the
scriptures he fidfilled ?
am I to pyraise you ?
The second of these verbs might be the fut. indie, the connection only showing
it to be aor. subj. As the two tenses are alike in the first pers. sing., it is often
doubtful which is meant. So in the pres. of contracted verbs, rt ttoiw ;
This idiom arises from a combination of two phrases ix-q, with the subjunctive :
elliptical, "fear lest'' (see § 384) preceded by ov, wdth the word (understood) ;
on which fi-q depends. "There is not any fear or possibility lest I should."
Matt. V. 18 : twra ci' 17 fita Kcpata ov \i^ irapeXO-n, one iota (the smallest
letter of the alphabet), or one tittle (the fragment of a letter^) shall hy no
means pass.
Matt. V. 20 : ov fx^ €l<r6X0TiT<, ye shall in no icise enter.
See also Matt. xxiv. 2 ; ]Mark ix. il ; Luke vi. 37 (twice), xviii, 17, xxii. 67,
68 ; John \'i. 37, viii. 51, x. 28, xiii. 8 ; Acts xxviii. 26 (tAnee, from the LXX.;
so elsewhere); 1 Cor. viii. 13 ; 1 Thess. iv. 15 {ahull by no means irrcccdc), v. 3;
Heb. viii. 11, 12 (LXX.) ; 2 Pet. i. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 21-23 ;with uiauy other
passages. The study of these emphatic negatives of Scripture is fraught with
interest.
In the following passages only (in the best MSS. and edd. ), the future is found
(see § 363, d) Matt. xvi. 22, xxvi. 35 Mark xiv. 31 Luke x. 19 (\\ H. niarg.
: ; ; .
implied, as desire, iirax]. The Optative is in fact only another form of the Sub-
jective mood, "the Sulijunctive of the historical tenses." But this characteristic
is almost lost in the Xew Testament, where the Optative is comparatively rare.
Rom. XV. 5 : 6 8e 0eos ... 8«t] v/xtv, now may God grant unto you!
Philemon 20 : vat, dSeXt^e, eyw crov ovatix-qv Iv Kvpiio, yea, brother, let
So Acts viii. 20; 1 Thess. iii. 11, 12; 2 Thess. iii. 5, etc.
Mark xi. 14 : ixtikcti ...Ik <toO jjtT|8€is Kapirbv cjwxyoi, let no one ever eat
fruit of thee.
2 Tim. iv. 16 :
n^ avTots Xo-ywrOctT], may it not be laid to their charge !
The formula fi-?! -ycvoiTo, may it not come to pa^s ! rendered in A.V.
(and R.V., except Gal. vi. 14) " God forbid !" illustrates the same usage.
Luke XX. 16 ; Rom. vi. 2, 15, vii. 13, etc.
^ The future indie, with oi5 /A/7 has no perceptible diiference of meaning from that
of the aor. subj. {Madvig, § 124, a, 3). Probably the future realises to the mind
with greater vividness the possibility which is denied.
314 I'HE OPTATIVE MOOD. [§ 378, a.
Matt. vi. 2 : (Jrav (ore av) iroiTJs iX.€r]fj,o(rvvyv, when fhou doest alms.
For oT€ Avith Indicative, see ^latt. vii. 28.
Object-Sentences.
^ That is, when it folloAVs one of the " verha sentiendi et declarandi."
§ 382, c] DEPENDENT CLAUSES —OBJECTIVE. 315
Mark V 29 : cyvw ... 8ti larai, she perceived that she is healed. So John
xi. 13, XX. 14.
When the verb in the principal clause is in past time, the subordinate verb
may still be in present time {Iiulicativc), or else may change to the Optative.
The particle on, however, is often used to introduce the quoted words,
and is in tliis case not to be translated, as it answers exactly to our
inverted commas ('' ").
Matt. vii. 23 : ofxoXoyqa-ai avrois, Srt ovScTrore lyi'ajv vfxa's, I will avow
unto them, "I never knew you."
Luke viii. 49 : Ipxeral rts Trapa tov ap\L(Tway(liyov Xcycov, 8x1 rWvrjKiv rj
dvyar-qp <tov, fxrjKirL orKvXXe tov StBacTKaXov, then cometh one from the house
of the ruler of the synagogue, saying unto him, ^*'Thy daughter is dead,
trouble the Master 7io more."
speech is given, not the words. Here, also, the Indicative is gene-
rally employed.
Mark iii. 21 : c\cyov yap 8ti ct«o"'"l, for they said that he teas beside
Imnsdf. It is, however, possible that the verb liere is a direct quotation
(Aorist, see § 364, d), they said, "ZTe is beside himself."
In such clauses, either (1) the verb same as in the cor- is precisely the
responding direct interrogation, when (a) the Indicative shows that the :
p. Matt. vi. 2d : firj yotept/xvare ... tI <j>a7i]T€ ^ tL ttititc, be uot anxious ...
what you are to eat and what you are to drink. Compare Luke xii. 22.
Luke xix. 48 : ovx rjvpta-Kov to rC irotiria-wartv, they found not tchat they
should do. Compare Mark xv. 24.
In Kom. viii. 26, the reading varies between irpoo-cvlwjjLeOa (rec, W. H.,
Lachmann) and 'Trpo(r€v|o|A€9a (Tischendorf ).
Acts xvii. 1 1 : dvaKptVoi/rcs ras ypa^as €l ^xoi ravra ovrw?, searching the
scriptures if these things icere so.
Acts xvii. 27: t.-qr^lv rov ©eoi/,'^ A dpa 76 x(/T]Xa<})T](r€tav avrov koI ciJpouv,
to seek God, if by any chance they 'might feel after him and find hi)ii.
tuhat he had done. He must have done something, this was clear ; but
who he was seemed altogether uncertain.
(jLaraioi (LXX.), Jehovah knoiceth the reasonings of the wise^ that they are
vain.
See also Mark xi. 32, xii. 34 ; John iv. 35, v. 42, vii. 27 ; Acts iii. 10, xv. 36
2 Cor. xii. 3, 4, xiii. 5; 1 Thess. ii. 1, etc. Compare 1 Cor. xv. 12.
A similar construction is occasionally found with
'
' intentional " clauses, as
Col. iv. 17 ; Gal. iv. 11.
Conditional Sentences.
y. ,, „ of uncertainty.
S. ,, „ of something unfulfilled.
Hence arise four distinct forms
Matt. iv. 3 : d vlo<s d rov ©eov, etirc, k.t.X., if thou art the Son of God,
command, etc., i.e., assuming that thou art.
1 Cor. XV. 16 : el yap veKpol ovk lydpovrai, ouSe Xpio-ros iyr\yiprai, for if
the dead arise not, neither has Christ arisen.
See also many other passages, e.g., Matt. xix. 17; John vii. 4 (present, con-
dition; imperative, consequence); Rom. viii. 25; 1 Cor. vi. 2 (pres. pres.); John
V. 47 (pres, fut.); 2 Pet. ii. 20 (pres. perf.); Matt. xii. 26 (pres. aor.); Matt,
xxvi. 33 (fut. fut.); Acts xvi. 15 (perf. imperf.); 2 Cor. v. 16 (perf. pres.);
John xi. 12 ; Rom. vi. 5 (perf. fut.) ; 2 Cor. ii. 5 (perf. perf.), vii. 14 (perf. aor.)
Rom. xi. 17, 18 (aor. imperf.); 1 John iv. 11 (aor. pres.); John xv. 20 (aor. fut.);
Rom. V. 15 (aor. aor.). (1 Cor. viii. 13 has pres. ind. and aor. subj. with oi firj;
John iii. 3, 5 : edv jiij tis ^cvvrjOp avayOev, ov Svvarai iSctv rrjv /Jao-tXeiav
Tov ©€oi>, excepting one shall have been horn again, (or from ahove)y he
and if any one strive in a contest, he is not crotvned except he shall have
striven according to rule.
* See 1 Cor. xiv. 5 ; Phil. iii. 12 (Luke ix. 13), and a few various reading, as
Rev. xi. 5.
)
Acts xxiv. 19, xxvii. 39 : €l Svvaivro, if (by any possibility) they could.
1. The Imperfect (in the apodosis) with av points to preseiit time, "If
this were so now (which it is not), this other thing would be.^'
yvvrj, this man, if he were a prophet, icould knoic who and ivhat the
woman is.
Heb. iv. 8 €l yap avrov? ^Vqcrov*; KaTcVavercv, ovk &v Trcpt oAAt^? eXdXci,
:
for if Joshua had given them rest, he would not speak of another day.
So (with Impf. in the protasis) John viii. 42, ix. 41 Acts ; xviii. 14 ; 1 Cor.
xi. 31 Heb. xi. 15 (with Aor. in the protasis) Gal. iii. 21,
; ; etc. Sometimes
&v is omitted. See John ix. 33, xv. 22, etc.
The Aorist with av points to the past, " If this had been so then
2.
(which it was not), this other thing would have been." Sometimes the
Pluperfect is used, more emphatically, in the same sense.
So with the Impf. in protasis : Luke xii. 39 ; John xviii. 30 ; Acts xviii. 14.
1 Cor. ii. 8 : cl yap ^yvoxrav, ovk dv Tov ILvpiov rrj^ So^rj^ eo-ravpoxrav, for
had they known, they ivoidd not have crucified the Lord of glory.
So with the Aor. in protasis : Matt. xi. 21 ; Mark xiii. 20 ; Rom. ix. 29.
(Matt. xii. 7 has plup.
John xi. 21 : Kvpcc, el fjs wSe, ovk &v 6 aZ^Xi^o'i fJLOv ereOvi^Kci,^ Lord, if
thou hadst been hei'e, my brother ivoidd not have been dead. Mary (ver. 32)
uses the Aorist.
John xiv. 7: d cyv^KtiTc /x€, /cat tov Trarcpa /jlov dv iiSciTC (W. H.), i/ ye
had known me^ ye icould have knoiun my Father' also.
Intentional Clauses.
384. Intentional (final) clauses are those which express a purpose or
design, following the particles iva, to the end that (with emphasis on
result); 6ir«s, in order that (emphasis on method); [xtj, {that) 7iot, or lest.
Matt. ii. 8 : dTrayyeiAare fXOL, Strws Kayo) iXOiov irpoo-KWijcra), bring nie
back word, that I also may come and worship.
Matt. vi. 16: a^anfovert ... Sirws <}>avw<n,, they disfigure ... that they
may appear.
So in a great number of passages.
2 Thess. i. 11, 12, tva marks the primary, and Sttoj? the secondary result. In
1 Cor. xiv. 13, it is not meant that the disciple is to pray for the power to
interpret, but that his gift of prayer is to be so exercised as to involve the power
of interpretation. Again, 2 Cor. xiii. 7, the matter of the prayer is expressed
by an infinitive clause the intention by two clauses with tva.
;
The Evangelist John often (with, occasionally, others of tlie New Testament
writers) employs tva as explanatory (^M?7Jor<, rather th&n purpose). Thus, xvii. 3 :
'
' this is kfe eternal, that they should know thee," etc. So xv. 8 ; 1 John iii. 1,
^ The distinction of classic Greek, that after a past tense a final clause generally
has the Optative, does not hold in N.T,
—
etc. (often epexegetic of oStos) ; but in other passages the usual meaning of the
particle may
be taken, as 1 John iii. 1.
Compare Matt. x. 25 Luke xvii. 2 ; ; even Phil. ii. 2. {" Fill up my joy by
being of the same mind." T. S. Green.)
ecbatic) sense, the latter its final (or tehc^). Most, however, now agree
that (with the exception above noted) the final significance is generally
discernible. 1 Thess. v. 4 has been cited as " losing the notion
;
of finality in the eventual sense " ye are not in darkness^ that
the day should overtake you as a thief. But it would seem appropriate
enough to represent it as the intention of darkness that those surrounded
with it should be suddenly surprised. Again, in John xii. 23, xvi. 2, 32,
"
Meyer justly remarks, that which shall happen in the wpa is regarded
as the object of its coming." On Gal. v, 17, Bishop Lightfoot says,
" Ua here seems to denote simply the result, whereas in classical writers
it always expresses the purpose." But surely this is unnecessary.
Bishop Ellicott renders, to the end that ye may not [R.Y., that ye may
not\ not so that ye cannot, A.Y. but with the usual and proper telic ;
force of iva. " The object and end of the to dvTiKcto-^at (the antagonism)
on the part of each principle is to prevent a man doing what the other
principle would lead him to do."
For other passages in which the final sense has been questioned, but where
"Winer and most modern critics maintain it, see Luke ix. 45 (purposely hidden,
as a part of the Divine plan) ; John iv. 36, vii. 23, ix. 2, xi. 15 ; Rom. ix. 11,
xi. 31 ; 2 Cor. i.Eph. ii, 9, iii. 10.
9, v. 4 ; In these, and in many similar
texts, sound criticism seems to require the meaning, not so that it was, but in
order that it might be.^
^ tVa eK^ariKov (from e/c/SatVoj, to issue from) ; tVa ts\lk6v (from reXos, endJ).
- Undoubtedly in the later forms of the language the ecbatic sense became esta-
blished. Thus, in modern Greek the Infinitive itself has become superseded by a
form of the verb with the particle vd for 'iva.
Y
322 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 384 (2).
I'va . . . fii]). Is the passage to be read, in order that seeing they may not
see, etc., or, so that seeing they see not, or even, because seeing they
see not ? We believe that the former interpretation is the only one
admissible. The blindness is represented as judicial —a punishment
inflicted by God on disobedience and hardness of heart.
Again, in the phrase, I'va (otto)?) irXiipt&OT], that it (the Old Testament
prophecy) might he fulfilled (Matt. i. 22, ii. 15, 23, iv. 14, viii. 17, xii. 17,
xiii. 35, xxi. 4, xxvi. 56 ; Mark xiv. 49 John xiii. 18, xv. 25, xvii. 12,
;
acceptation they fell into the line of the "increasing purpose" which
runs through the ages, and so revealed their highest significance in
Messiah's day. The true key to the passage is not to be found in a
perverted use of the particle^ but in an accurate comprehension of the
verrh}
blotted out, that so there may come seasons of refreshing, etc. (R.V.).
The meaning v;hen (A.V.) cannot be sustained. Whatever be the
special reference of Katpol avaif/vico)^;, they are set forth as the purposed
result of the people's repentance, and denote in some way the blessings
of Messiah's kingdom.
^ See Olshausen on Matt, i, 22. Grotius, and those who have followed his cri-
ticisms, attach to the verb some such meaning as consummated.
—
Matt, xviii. 10 : opare \Li\ KaTa4>povi]<rt]T€ €vo? Tu)V jxLKpu)v TovTUiv, see that
ye do not desjiise one of these little ones.
2 Cor. xii. 20, 21 : <^o(^ovp.ai yap, |iTJ ttws eXOoiV oi'x olovs 6e\o) ciJpw
v/xa?, K.T.X., for I fear that lohen I come 1 shall not firid you S2cch as I
desire, etc.
Rev. xxii. 14: fiaKapLOt ol 7rXvvovT€<s TO.? o-ToAa.5 avTwv, Xva ia-rai rj l^ovcrta
avTwv, K.T.X., blessed are they icho wash their rohes,^ that theirs may he the
access, etc. In 1 Pet. iii. 1, Rev. xiv. 13, W. H. have Ind. Fut., the
Received Text has Subj. Aor.
|ii^ (TTore) is found with the Indicative Future, Heb. iii. 12 : ^Xcttctc,
ddeA^ot', (1^ TroT€ 'itrrai tv tlvl v/jlCjv Kaphia Trovrjpa aTrKXTta?, take heed,
brethren, lest there should (shall) be in any one of you an evil heart of
unbelief So Col. ii. 8.
The Indicative present or perfect after ix-f} shows the elhpsis, not of IVa, but of
6tl ; i.e., the sentence is not intentional, but objective. Luke xi. 35 : "lest the
light is darkness." Gal. iv. 11 '*
lest I have laboured." :
There are three passages in which the Indicative present seems to be used in
intentional clauses:
1 Cor. iv. 6 : 'iva jxtj ets vir^p evbs <pv(Tiov(T6e Kara toO iripov, that ye he not puffed
up one for another against yet another.
Col. iv. 17 : tpa avrrjv Tr\r]po?s, that thou fulfil it (the ministry).
Gal. iv. 17 : 'iva aiVoL-s ^rjXovTe, in order that ye may zealously affect thern.
It will, however, be noted that all these verbs are of the contracted conjuga-
tion in -ow and it is easier to suppose them examples of an irregularly formed
;
^ Note here the various reading, accepted by the best critics (W. H., R.V.).
324 the infinitive. [§ 385.
The Infinitive.
Since ov denies as matter of fact, ix-f] as matter of thought, and since the
Infinitive usually depends on some verb or clause implying thought, "will,
design, the latter will generally be the appropriate particle.
So viii. 28, and many other passages. Where ou is found, it may generally be
connected with the principal verb. (See John xxi. 25.
Matt. vii. 11 : otSare Sdjiara d-yaOoL 8i8dvat rots t^kvois v/xwv, ye know how
to give good gifts unto your children.
Luke XX. 35 : ol h\ Kara^tcu^evre? tov aiwvos cKctvov tv^civ, koI ttjs dvao"-
Td<r€ws T^9 €/c vcKpcov, they who are deemed worthy to obtain that life and
the resurrection from the dead.
Matt. xiv. 22 : yvdyKacre rov<: /Aa^r/ra? €|ipT)vai ... kol Trpoaytiv avrov, he
made the disciples embark (a single act), cmd go before him (continuous).
Acts XX vii. 10 : fiiXXeiv 'ia-io-Qai rov ttXow, that the voyage is going to be.
The Present lufiuitive might more properly be called the Imperfect Infinitive,
refening, like the Perfect, to state rather than to time. The time is fixed by tht
principal verb.
But the Subject of the Infinitive, when the same with that of the
preceding verb, is generally omitted, words agreeing with it being
in the nominative.
Rom. XV. 24 : eATrt'^w SiaTropruojicvos Oedcraa-Oat v/xag, / hojje to see you
(in) passing through.
2 Cor. X. 2 : Seo/xac 8e to firj irapwv Oapprjaai, Imt I piuij that I may not
(when) 'preseid he bold.
388. The Infinitive, with or without the Article, may form the
Subject of a sentence.
Rom. vii. 18: to yap OeXciv TrapaKUTai fxoL^ to 8e KaT€pYa^€o-0ai to koXov
ov, for to will is present icith me, hut to accomplish the good is not.
Gal. vi. 14: kjxoi 8e pJq yeVotTo Kavxao^ai, hut far he it from me to glory!
Eph. V. 12 : ala-xjiov Icttl kol Xiynv, evm to meidion ... is disgraceful.
carne to pass that he was approaching Damascus, lit., "his approach to Damascus
occurred." So Mark ii. 23 Luke vi. 1, 6 Acts iv. 5, xvi. 16, etc. Acts xxii.
; ;
Matt, xviii. 8 : koXov col Icttlv eto-eX^etv cts r-qv ^wrjv kvKKov rj \<i)k6v, it
isgood for thee to enter iido life maimed or halt, the pronoun o-€ being
understood from crot before ddiXOfiv.
In this connection also the Infinitive may have its own Subject, and may take
er omit the Article.
Matt. vi. 24 : ovScts Svvarai Svarl KvpioLs SovXevciv, no man is able to serve
two masters.
Rom. i. 22 : <}xxcrK0VT€s clvai o-o(f>ol i/xaypdvOrjcrav, professing to be icise,
Here tlie object Infinitive is defined by the article ; laa 9- is the predicate of
the Intinitive in apposition with the subject (t'ca is adverbial) ; and apirayfiov is
in predicative apposition with the Infinitive itself.
1 Cor. vii. 39 ; ^toi|ios, Luke xxii. 33, etc. Once with dtSiKos, Heb. vi. 10,
a. Genitive.
*'
1 Verba sentiendi vel declarandi," etc.
— —
Acts XX. 3 : €y€V€To 7v«|iT]s Tov {nroorTp€'4>€iv, Jie was of the intention of
returning.
Acts xxvii. 20 : iXtris Tracra tov o-wteo-Gai rj/xas, all hoj^e of our being
saved.
Acts xiv. 9; 2 Cor. viii. 11 ; Phil. iii. 21, etc. So with words signifying time
(time /or), Luke i. 57, ii. 6, 21^ xxi. 22 ; 1 Pet. iv. 17; Rev. xiv. 15.
1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.). So after adjectives, Luke xxiv. 25; Acts xxiii. 15.
Especially, with verbs signifying hindrance, Luke iv. 12; Rom. xv. 22.
So Matt. iii. 13, xxi. 32, xxiv. 45; Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xiii. 47 (LXX.);
Heb. X. 7 (LXX.), etc.
Acts vii. 19 : ovto^ ... iKaKiaaev tovs Trarepa? tov iroi€tv Ta /3pi(f>yj eK^era
avTwv, this man ... ill-treated our fathers, so that they caused their babes
to be exposed.
b. Dative.
2 Cor. ii. 13: ovk ccrxrjKa avecnv . . . t<3 \i^ cvpciv yu,€ Tltov tov d8eA<jf)ov
In 1 Thess. iii. 3, t<2 (Rec.) should be to (W. H.). The above instance is the
only one.
Heb. ii. 15 : 8id Travros tov tTJv, through all their lifetime.
Matt, xiii. 5 : 8ia to ^^ 'iyjiiv /3d6o<; ... 8td to |i^ (i\tiv pt^ai/, on account of
it:-! havinrj no depth ...on account of its having no root.
So, with ace. subject. Matt. xxiv. 12; Mark v. 4 ; Luke ii. 4, xi. 8, etc.
So Mark xiv. 55 ; Luke v. 17, with subject, etc. Both ets and Trpos express
purpose, but Trpos the more emphatically.
Matt. vi. 8 : irpb tov {»/xa? oXrr\fra.\. avTov, before ye ask him.
So Matt. xiii. 30, xxvi. 12 ; Mark xiii. 22, etc. Once, m reference to, Luke
xviii. 1.
Once avTi is found, James iv. 15, instead of your saying ; and ^veKa,
2 Cor. vii. 12, for the sake of your zeal being made manifest. ^«s, " until,"
there arose a great storm^ so that the vessel was being covered.
Matt. xiii. ?)^ : M<rT€ iXQiiv to, Trereti/a, so that thf birds came.
§ 393.] PARTICIPLES. 329
shaken.
John iii. 16 : ovna^i yap yyaTrrjaev 6 ©eo? tov Kocfxov wo-tc tov vlov tov
jxovoyevrj ^8«k€v, k.t.X., God so loved the world that he gave his only-
begotten Son^ etc.
The proper distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative in this connection
is, that the former expresses the result as the natural and logical consequence
of what has been previously enunciated ; the latter states it simply as a fact
which occurs or has occurred.^
392. In Phil. iii. 16 we find the Infinitive employed for the Impera-
tive ; ets o €(j)Od(jafi€v, rw avT(Z o-Toixetv, ichereto ive have attained^ in the
same direction walk ye.^
The use of xtjiipnv in salutation is similar, " greeting," Acts xv. 23,
xxiii. 26; James i. 1 (2 John 10, 11, suggests an ellipsis here). This
habitual phrase reappears as a more decided Imperative, Rom. xii. 15,
with an antithetic verb : xaLp€iv /xcra ^atpovrwv, KXaUiv /aero, KAatovTcoi/,
Participles.
Like they have the modifications of Voice and Tense and may have an
verbs, ;
1 W. H. read uj.
" See Bishop Ellicott on Gal. ii. 13.
'^
Ellicott. The rest of the verse (Rec.) is omitted by the best critics.
* The Infinitive is the Verbal Substantive, the Participle the Verbal Adjective.
330 PAKTICIPLES. [§ 393.
lowing rules give the use of Participles referring to the Subject or Object
of another verb.
o6 ^v redpafifievos, where he had been brought up. John iii. 28 : direaTaX/xevos ei/j.!.,
I luive been sent. With the present Participle, the substantive verb gives a
continuous sense, forming what are called the *' resolved tenses." (See §§ 362, c,
363, e.)
The resolved tense must be distinguished from the use of the Participle as
secondary predicate. For example, 2 Cor. v. 19 is not to be read, God was
reconciling the toorld in Christ, but God was in Christ reconciling, etc.
Luke xxiv. 32 : ov)(l rj Kaphta yfxwv Kaio|i^vT] ^jv iv rjfuv ; was not our
heart burning within us?
Sometimes this construction appears very nearly equivalent to the simple verb,
as Mark xiii. 2.5 (compare Matt. xxiv. 29). So Acts ii. 2 ; James i. 17, iii. 15.
In other cases there is a greater stress upon the notion of state or duration :—
Pres., Acts xxv. 10 ; Rev. i. 18 ; Matt. x. 26 Luke vi. 43 ; 2 Cor. ix. 12 ; ;
Gal. iv. 24 (not "which things are an allegory," but are allegorised, i.e.,
used, not &, see § 349) ; Col. ii. 23 ; 1 Cor. xv. 19; 2 Cor. ii. 17. Impf.,
Matt. vii. 29, xix. 22 ; Mark i. 39 ; Luke i. 22, xv. 1, xxiii. 8 ; Acts xxi. 3 ;
Gal. i. 22, 23. Fut., Matt. x. 22 ; Luke i. 20, v. 10, xxi. 24.
§ 394, 2.] PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 331
In Luke iii. 23, avrbs 9ju 6 'Itjctovs dpxo/xevos waei erCjv rpidKOvra, we must
understand, Jesus himself, icJien he began (to teach), was about thirty years of
age (R.V.) (for gen., see § 266), not "began to be about thirty" (A.V.).
If the verb is neuter or passive, the Participle agrees with the Subject ; if
Such verbs in the Xew Testament are — (1) neuter : iravofiai, rcXew (8ta-
Xetirw, €7KaK€w), all variously signifying desistence from a thing ; <}>atvo|iai,
Acts V. 42, vi. 13, xiii. 10, xx. 31, xxi. 32 ; Eph. i. 16 ;
Col. i. 9 ; Heb. x. 2.
Matt. vi. 18 : fxr) <j)avfis rots av6pu)7roL<; vT]<rT6vwv, that thou appear not to
Matt. xi. 1 : ore ereXeo-ev . . . Siardo-o-wv, when he made a7i end of com-
mandi7ig.
Luke vii. 45 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Matt. i. 18 (pass.).
So 3 John 4 : d/coi5w to. i/Mo. riKva iv tt} akqddq. irepnraTovvTa is, I hear of my
children, that they walk in the trutli.
OTL ir€piwaTov<nv would have meant, the tidings brought to me are these,
that, etc.
eXrjXvOevai (W. H. marg.) would signify, that Jesus Christ has come. (Comp.
2 John 7.)
So with neuter verbs Sttws (pavQat. rois dv6pu}iroi.i vriarevovTes, tJmt they may
:
appear unto men fasting, i.e., the fasting was real. vrjcrTeveip would have im-
plied that the fasting was only apparent. On the contrary, eiraiTelv aiax^vofj-ai
(Luke xvi. 3) means, / am ashamed to beg ; iiraiTQv would have meant, I am
ashamed of begging.'^
Matt, xxviii. 19 ; Acts iii. 8, xiii. 45 ; 1 Tim. i. 13. For the Aor. Part,
marking the commencement of the action, see Acts i. 24 ; Rom. iv, 20.
consequent fact.
(i.) Pres. Acts v. 4: ov^t |Aevov aoi efxeve ; while it remained did it
Matt. vi. 7 ; Acts xxi. 28 ;1 Tim. i. 3, ivhen I was on my way ;- Heb. xi. 21
(ii.) Aor. Acts ix. 39 : iivao-Tds Se IleTpos a-vvrjXOcv aurot?, a7id Peter
having arisen ivent with them, i.e., " arose and went with them."
- There is here a strong argument for an apostolic journey after Paul's Roman
imprisonment, as no part of the history in the Acts corresponds with this mission
of Timothv.
§ 394, C?.] PKEDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 333
This use of the Aor. Part, is one of the most common idioms in the New
Testament, and may be continually represented in translation "by two verbs — th«
action of the one (the Participle) immediately preceding that of the other. Or
we may render by some such preposition as after, iqyon, with the verbal noun ;
or by a temporal clause with u-keic.
Acts iii. 3 : o? I8«v ... i?|pwTa, who saw ... and asked; or, on seeing ...
(iii.) Flit. Acts viii. 27: 09 iXr)\vO€L irpoo-KWTio-wv. ct? *Icporo-aX7^/x, ivho
This idiom (the Fut. Paxt. to express a purpose) is rare in the New Testa-
ment. (See Acts xxiv. 11.)
Conditional. Rom. ii. 27: KaX Kptvct r^ Ik <f>va-€(i)S aKpo^va-Tia tov vo/jlov
Heb. vi. 14 : ivkoyStv ivkoyi\<rui crc, koI irXiiOvvwv irXTiOvvui o^e, blessing I
will bless thee, and midtipl ying I will multiply thee, (LXX. ; Gen.
xxii. 17.)
2 Pet. i. 12.
Itmay thus stand in apposition with a noun in any relation to the sentence,
or may be used alone, the substantive being understood.
Matt. i. 16 : 'Ir/crovs 6 Xrydp.€vos Xptorro?, Jesus who is called Christ.
Mark vi. 2 : t] crocf>ia t) 8o0€to-a roirro), the wisdom which is given unto
this man.
Luke xxi. 37 : to 6po<; rh koXovucvov 'EAatwf, to the mount that is called
''
of Olives.''
1 Thess. ii. 15: twv koI tov K.vptov diroKTcivavrwv . . . kol 7)/xa.<s 4KSi(o|dvT<i>v
KOL 0€{3 \ii\ dpco-KiJvTwv, (of tlic Jcws) u'ho loth slew the Lord ... and drove
us outj arul do not please God.
By a comparison of examples, the distinction between the use of the Participle
with and without the Article will be clearly seen. 6 SiSdcKcov is lie who teaches ;
6 didd^as, he ivlio taught ; whereas diSdcrKujv alone would mean ivhile lie was
teaching, and didd^ai, when he had taught.
may well be a special reference to the time then present. So John xiii. 11 he :
knew TOV irapa8i86vTa avrbv, the r/uiJi then betray ijig him, i.e., who was then at
work for that purpose.
The Present may occasionally be explained according to § 361, d.
IMatt, xxvi. 28: rovro €.<jtl to alfxd /xov ...to Trepl ttoWCjv iK\vvv6]i€V0Vf
this IS my hlood which is being shed {i.e., to be shed) for many. So
8i8o|i€vov, heiny given, Luke xxii. 19; kXwjicvov, 1 Cor. xi. 24.
I <|>opovfi€vai, <rvvoiKo5vT6s,
ivhom also ice laid hold of, instead of "we laid hold of him." 2 Cor. v. 6, 8 :
being confident —yea, we are confident and lucll pleased ; the sentence, but for the
'
parenthesis of ver. 7, being evidently intended as ' we, being confident, are well
pleased." 2 Cor. vii. 5, where OXl^o/xcpol is really in apposition with the r;^e?s
implied in r/ aap^ ijiiiQiv. Heb. viii. 10, where /cat interrupts the structure of the
sentence. Eph. iv. 1-3 ; Col. iii. 16, etc.
§399, C] ADVERBS. 337
"with one consent," ananimously, Luke xiv. 18. els to iravTeXe's, "in any
wise," Luke xiii. 11 ;
" to the uttermost," Heb. vii. 25 ; uttei'ly. Iv dXTiGeiai
"in truth," ^?'wZ?/, Matt. xxii. 16, etc. kv 8iKaio<rvvTj, righteously, Acts
xvii. 31. ev €KT€V€Ca, instantly, "in earnestness," Acts xxvi. 7. k-n dXT]0€tas,
rather, he digged and went deep (R.V.), the second verb being an advance upon
the first. So Rom. x. 20 Isaiah is very bold, and saith, not " very boldly
:
saith " Col. ii. 5: rejoicing (over you) and seeing, not "seeing with joy"
;
(comp. Ellicott's note) James iv. 2 ye murder and envy, not "envy murder-
; :
ously," or " murder enviously " (see Alford). So in many other passages.
The use of the Article with the latter Adverb, however, renders it simply
equivalent to a Substantive.
usual negative with the other parts of the verb. Deviations from this
rule are to be explained by the primary sense of the two adverbs. Thus,
John iii. 18:6 TrtcTcvoov cts avrbv ov KptVcrat, he that helieveth on him is
not condemned (the statement of a fact) 6 8c ja^ ttio-tcvcdv, but he that ;
The same distinction applies to the compounds of oO and firi, as oUde, fi^^Se,
Luke xxiii. 53 : ov ovk rjv ovScls oiWr« K€LfX€vo<s, where no one at all had
yet ever lain. John xix. 4L
For special forms of strengthened negation, see §§ 363, d, 377. For the use
of negatives in interrogations, see § 370.
rather than sacrifice," so conveying the general meaning. Matt. ix. 13,
excluded from view, that its antithesis may make its full impression. Compare
Matt. X. 20 ; Mark ix. 37 ; Luke x. 20 (omit fj.a.\\ov) ; John vii. 16,2 ^ii. 44 ;
Only the context in such cases will show whether the negative is absolute or
comparative. In some instances, where an exposition similar to the above has
been adopted, the meaning of particular words has been mistaken. Thus, in
John vi. 27, ifyyd^eade fxr]T7]u ^puxriv ttjv diroWv/x^vrjv, k.t.X., "labour not for the
meat that perisheth," etc., the verb ifyya^eade does not mean "labour" generally,
but hisy yourselves, referring to the present excitement of the people. 1 Tim.
V. 23 firjKen vSpoTroret is not "drink no longer water," but be no longer a
:
water-drinker, the verb not being precisely equal to Cdup mve, but pointing to
the regular habit.'
^ The usage is thus directly opposed to the English and Latin, where " two
negatives make an affirmative."
2 Winer holds, as it would appear without sufficient reason, that this passage and
Matt. ix. 13 above intend absolute contradiction.
^ Ellicott; R.V.
340 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 402.
Matt. iii. 14 : Kal av epxy Trpo? /xe; and comest tliou unto me ?
Matt. vi. 26 : Kal 6 Trar^p v/xwt', k.t.X., and {yet) your heavenly Father
feedeth them !
John i. 10 : Kal 6 koct/xos avrov ovk cyi/w, and (yet) the world knew him
not.
See Bruder's Concordance, p. 453, for an interesting collection of instances.
The logical connection of the clauses being strongly apparent in their signifi-
cation, it is sufficient to place the simple copulative between them, the reader's
mind supplying the additional links.
Matt. xxii. 10 : crw^ayov ... Trovijpov^ tc Kal ayaOov^, they collected ...
Acts i. 1 : div rjp^aro 'It/ctovs TroLetv t€ Kal StSacrKciv, ichick Jesus began
both to do and to teach.
7rpu)T0}v ovK oAtyat, both a great multitude of the devout Greeks^ and of the
chief women not a few.
John iv. 11 : o^t€ avrXyj/Jia €;j(€ts Kal to <f>piap icrrl /SaOv, thou both hast
The difference^ between Kai and re is that /cai unites tilings strictly co-ordinate
re annexes, often with implied relation or distinction. Hence it may sometimes
be read as implying "and this as well as the other," with asceiisive force,
although generally it adds a less important particular.
ran be saved? John ix. 36 (W. H.) and icho is he. Lord, that I should :
believe ? Kai dramatically connects the question with what has just been
said.
Matt. viii. 8. (See Mark iii. 13-26, viii. 10-18, and many other passages.)
Eph. ii. 8 :
rfj yap ^dpiTt la-re. (T€cro)(TfJi€VOL 8ta TriVTCtos '
Kal tovto ovk
€^ vjxwv, ®eov TO Swpov for by grace have ye been saved through faith ;
•
and this not of yourselves, it {i.e., your being saved, is) the gift of God.
" You must not suppose, because your salvation was conditioned by your
Matt. V. 39 : a-Tpiij/ov avrw Kal rrjv aWyjv, turn to li im also the other
cheek.
It is evident that the emphasis in such passages arises from the tacit con-
nection and comparison with other objects of thought. The conjunction, there-
fore, is virtually still copulative.
Johnvi. 57KaOws aTrea-reiXe /xe 6 ^u)v iraTrip, k.t.A., as the living Father
:
sent me^ etc. There are two following clauses with Kai, either of which
might supply the second member of comparison "so / live ... aw6^," or :
Gal. i. 9 : «s irpoapriKafxev Kal apri ttoXiv Aeyoj, as ice have said before^
Hence the use of koI to introduce the apodosis after hypothetical and temporal
clauses. Luke ii. 21 then also his iianie was : called Jesus ; 2 Cor. ii. 2 : for
if I grieve you, then ivho is he that gladdens me ? often with ibo(>, then behold ! as
Matt, xxviii. 9 ; Acts i. 10, etc.
Acts xxi. 13 : cyw yap ov (lovov h^Orjvai aXXd Kal aTroOaveiv . . . €TOL/Ji(j)<s
Rom. xiii. 5 : ov jiovov 8ta rrjv opyrju aXXd Kal 8ta ttjv (rvv€L8r)(TLV, not
only on account of the wrath, hut also on account of conscience.
vp.Q)v €ts )(apav y€vrjcr€Tat, ye shall grieve, bid your grief shall be turned
into joy.
— — ^
§ 404, i.
(3)] CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 343
but to fulfil.
Often in such connections the conjunction carries with it the force of i\^ay,
they shall cast you out of the synagogues yea, the hour cometh, etc. —
So with a negative
Luke xxiii. 15 : ovh\v €vpov Iv tw dv^pwTru) ... dXX* ouSe 'HpwSrys, I found
no blame in the man ...no, nor yet Herod.
1 Cor. ix. 2 : ct aAAot? ovk elpl (ZTro'crToXos, dXXd "ye vfxlv ilfxi, if I am
not an apostle to others, yet at least I am so to you. So Rom. vi. 5, etc.
In 2 Cor. i. 13 we find the combination S.Wa ... dXX' ^, other things ... than.
For this idiom after a virtual negative, see 1 Cor. iii. 5 (Received Text), who
thenis Paul and who is Apollos hut ministers ? (dXX* ^ bi.dKovoL). But W. H.
and Rev. Text omit oKK ^.
344 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. [§ 404, ii.
Matt. xxi. 3 : but he will straightway/ send them, i.e., not cavil or hesitate,
but—.
Acts xxiv. 17 : hid I pass on to another part of my history.
Rom. iv. 3 : hut AbraJiam helievcd God, so far was he from being justified by
works (James ii. 23).
Kal ... $€, together imply yea . . . moreover, assuming what has been
said, and passing on to something more.^
Matt. X. 18, xvi. 18 (and 7iot only so, hut I say unto thee); John vi. 51,
viii. 16, 17, XV. 27 ; Acts iii. 24, xxii. 29 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; 1 John i. 3.
Matt. xvi. 3, XX. 23, xxii. 8, xxiii. 27, 28, xxvi. 41, etc.
The Disjunctives.
Matt. V. 17 : /jltj vo/xicrrp'e otl rjXOov KaraXvcraL tov vofxov ^ rovs Trpo-
<^7}Tas, think not that I came to destroy the laic or the prophets.
Luke XX. 2 : ev Trota i^ovCLa ravra Trotet?, ^ tl<s ioTLV 6 Sous crot ttjv
1 Cor. xi. 27 : o? av IcrOirj tov apTov <\ Trivrf to TroTrjpLOv tov Kvpt'ov,
whoever shall eat the bread or drink the cup of the Lord (whichever he
does, not by any means implying that he is not to do both). The
previous verse has Kat, which is also a var. read. here. (W. H., ^.)
The combination '^ Ka£, or even, occurs Luke xviii. 11 ; Rom. ii. 15;
2 Cor. i. 13.
^46 INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 405.
See Rom. vi. 3, vii. 1, etc. In 1 Cor. xiv. 36 the former ^ is not coiTelative
with the latter, but refers to the previous train of thought Or, was it that the
:
Inferential Conjunctions.
Matt. iii. 8 : TroirjcraTe. o€v Kapirov aiiov rrjs fJL€TavoLas, yield, therefoi'e,
Gal. ii. 21 : ct yap 8(.a vo/Jiov BiKatoo-vvr), dpa Xptcrro? Saypeav (XTre^avcr,
Both these particles, however, are often found with slighter meaning,
as in our use of the words Then, Well then, in the continuance of narra-
tive or speech, dpayc (Matt. vii. 20, xvii. 26 ; Acts xi. 18 ; xvii. 27) is
inference, and the apa intimating the harmony between premises and
conclusion.
iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. 1 roLvw (surely now), therefm^e^ Luke xx. 25 ; 1 Cor.
;
^ See Viger's "Greek Idioms," and Hartung, Partikellehre, sub vac. ij.
The relative causal particles are on, because; Stdrt, because (not in the Gospels or
Rev.). Similarly used is eTret (properly temporal, ivhen), since, with its emphatic
compounds eireib-fj, siTice now ; eirelirep^ (once, Rom. iii. 30), since indeed ; and
iir€i8r)'7r€p (only Luke i. \), forasniucli as. (See § 137, a.)
For the relative phrases, with prepositions, used as conjunctions e.g.^ i<f> if,
dvd' &v —
see under the Prepositions, §§ 305, 291.
stone was roUed away, for it was very great" (an explanation, not of the
fact that it was rolled away, but of the necessity for this being done).
Compare Ps. xxv. 11 "For thy name's sake, Lord, pardon mine
:
The student must beware of translating yap by such words as but, although,
yet peradvcnture, etc.^Rom. v. 7 reads, for scarcely on behalf of a righteous
Tnan will mie die ; for on behalf of the good inan one even dares to die. The ' *
second /or," says Alford, "is exceptive, and answers to I do not press this '
without exception,' understood." The good man and the righteous are not
contrasted as different classes of persons, but the "good" (as the article also
shows) are classed under the " righteous."
Matt, xxvii. 23 : rt ydp KaKov eTroLrjcre; lohy, lohat evil hath he done?
John vii. 41 ; Acts viii. 31, xix. 35 {he calm! for what man is there "^
etc.)
John ix. 30 : eV rovri^ ^dp to Oav/jiaa-rov IcTTiv, icliy, herein is the iconder!
In 1 Thess. ii. 20 the Apostle thus answers his own question : yes^ ye
are oar glory and our joy.
In the combination Kal ydp, the true connective is generally Kal,
d.
which resumes in thought the topic of the previous clause ; while yap
appends the explanation or the reason (Lat. etenim).
Matt. viii. 9 : Kal ^dp eyw av6poi7r6<; et/xt, k.t.A.., a7id (this I say) for I
am a man under authority, etc.
So Matt. xxvi. 73 ; Mark x. 45 ; Luke vi. 32, 34 ; John iv. 23 {and [that,'\
because tlie Father, etc.) ; Acts xix. 40 {aiid [this advice 1 2)rcss,'] seeing that, etc.);
1 Cor. V. 7, xii. 13, 14 ; 2 Cor. v. 4, xiii. 4 ; 1 Thess. iv. 10 ; 2 Thess. iii. 10 ;
Heb. V. 12, X. 34, etc. In these cases, koI yap must generally be rendered
simply /or (or/o?*, indeed), except when it is desired by paraphrase to bring out
its fall meaning.
But sometimes -ydp is the connective, and Kai belongs to the second
clause, with the sense of also, even {yap, of course, being placed after it
Rom. xi. 1 : Kal -ydp eyw ^la-parjXtTr]^ ilfXL, for I also am an Israelite.
Rom. XV. 3 : Kal ^dp 6 Xpt(TT6<s ovx cavro) Tjpearev, for even Christ pleased
not himself.
So perhaps Heb. xii. 29 Kal ^dp : 6 ©eos r^ixiiiv irvp KaTavaXtaKov, for
even our God is a consumin<j fire.
Asyndeton.
Kavxacrdat Set, to, t^5 do-^cvet'a? Kavxyo'Ofxai, (for) ?/ / ??zws^ needs glory
I ivill glory of the things that concern my iceakness. So, perhaps, Kev.
xxii. 10, where the Rec. Text supplies 6ti. (But "W. H. and Rev. Text
read 6 Katpos yoLp.)
350 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 409, a.
The opposite constructions are emphatic, as — (1) When the Predicate stands
first: see the Beatitudes, Matt. v. 3-11; also Matt. vii. 13-15; John i. 1,
iv. 19, 24, vi. 60 ; Rom. viii. 18, unworthy are the sufferings ; 2 Tim. ii. 11.
(2) The Object before the verb Luke xvi. 11, the true riches who will entrust to
r
youf John ix. 31 Rom. xiv. 1, etc. (3) An oblique case before the governing
;
noun Rom. xi. 13, of Gentiles an apostle ; Rom. xii. 19 (Heb. x. 30) 1 Cor.
: ;
iii. 9 Heb. vi. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 21, etc. (4) An Adjective before its noun Matt.
; :
vii. 13, through the strait gate (the emphasis being on the narrowness) 1 Tim. ;
vi. 12, 14, where good {KoXds) is repeatedly and strikingly emphatic; James iii. 5.
The usual arrangement of Adverbs, Prepositions, and the Particles generally,
has already been sufficiently illustrated.
Heb. vii. 4 : to whom Abraham gave tithe of the spoils ... the patriarch,
i.e., though he bore that sacred char^icter.
—
1 Pet. ii. 7 : for you^ then^ is the p'eciousness ...icIlo believe^ ^.e., on the
condition that you are believers.
The displacement of a word or phrase, as in the above instances, for the sake
of greater effect, is sometimes termed Hyperbaton, from virep^abut.
Luke xiii. 9 : Kdv /jl€v iroLrja-rj Kapirov ... et Se /t>^ye, k.t.X.^ and if it hear
fruit ... hut if not, etc.
1 Cor. iii. 2 : yaXa v/xas liroTura, ov /Spcojua, I gave you milk to drink,
not meat.
See also Luke i. 64 ; Acts iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 (where the antithetic verb
must be understood).
Instead, therefore, of assuming pleonasm, the careful student will note the
emphatic meaning. Frequent cases are the following: (1) Simple repetitwii of —
a phrase. Rom.
15 "ye received not the sinrit of bondage, Lut ye received
viii. :
the spirit of adoption;" Col. i. 28: "warning every man, and teaching crcz-y
man in all wisdom, that we may present every man perfect in Christ Jesus ;
Heb. ii. 16 "he taJceth not hold of angels, but he taketh hold of the seed of
:
especially frequent in 1 John (see chap. i. 5, 6, 8, 10, ii. 4, etc.). (3) The
mention of CLccompanying circumstaTices, as Matt. v. 2 "he opened his mouth, :
and said" (comp. Acts viii. 35) John xxi. 13 "Jesus cometh, and taketh the
; :
bread, and giveth to them;" where "every separate act of the wonderful
occurrence is designedly specified, and, as it were, placed before the eye."i The
verbs, co7ne, arise, take, stretch forUi (the hand), are frequently found in such
connection.
In this case also the double expression conveys an emphasis the attention ;
being first called to the Object, and then to that which is said about it. For
examples of this idiom, see § 382, d. Other instances are John xi. 31 ; Acts
iv. 13, ix. 20, xvi. 3 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 15 ; Gal. vi. 1.
lows :
^ Winen
— ) — — —
Eph. i. 20 €Yctpas avrov : Koi IkcLOktcv, having raised him . . . . . . and he set
Compare § 397.
avV(3 €7nS(i)(T€L ; (W. H.) ; lit., fi'om which of you, the father, shall his son
ask a fish ... will he give him a seiyent ?
Rom. V. 12 ashy one man sin entered into the world. The antithesis,
:
To this head may be referred the frequent occurrence of fih without the
corresponding 5c'. (See § 404.
A A
354 RHYTHM AND PARALLELISM. [§ 4X3, a.
Matt. xvi. 18 : o-u cT neVpos, kol cttI ravrrj rfj ircTpa, k.t.X.
Rom. xii. 3 : /u,^ vTr€p<|>pov€iv Trap o Set (f>pov€tv, dXAa (j>pov€kv cts to <r«<j>po-
vetv.
See Jebb's "Sacred Literature," and especially the versions of the Epistle to the
^
Romans by the Rev. J. H, Hinton, a.m., and by the Rev. Dr. Forbes.
^ For another arrangement see W. H., in loc.
§ 413, C (1)] POETIC QUOTATIONS —EHYTHM. 355
For similar rhythmic constructions, see John xiv. 27 Rom. xi. 33 1 Cor. : ;
occurs.
Other more elaborate harmonies of the kind might easily be traced. The
whole subject connects itself svith the study of the influence of the Old Testa-
—
ment upon the New an important field of inquiry, as yet only very partially
explored.
c. (1) Three quotations of Greek j^oetry \i3LYe heen found in the ]N'ew
Testament, all by the Apostle Paul.
an Athenian comic poet, about B.C. 320. (The measure is iambic tri-
meter.)
(2) There are also apparently unconscious* verses, such as will some-
times occur in prose style.
Hexameters
Heb. xii. 13 : koX rpoxio.^ 6pOa<; iroLT^a-are^ rots Trofrtv vfiwv.
Iambic measure
Acts xxiii. 5 : ap^ovra toG Xaov aov ovk cpct? KaKw?.
possible that the others may be citations also from some unknown poetic
source.
•*
W, H. marg., with Trotetrc in text.
;
grammatical meaning of the text the way to its explanation will then
:
be open.
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER I.
origin, 248) ; article omitted, 233, because only some in Thessalonica belonged to the
church, in God our Father, further extension of iKKkqalq. ; for iv, see 295, 4;
by apposition, 177; i)/Ji(ov, unemphatic possessive, 333. and the Lord
Trarpi, dat.
Jesus Christ, Kvpicp under the same regimen with 06(^, 'W'ithout the article,
intimating that the union is one and the same with both. See 232, and compare
217, a, b (3) e, note.
Ver. 2. Grace unto you, and peace (the Eastern and Western modes of
salutation), subj. of omitted verb, etrj ; comp. 166, 378, a. from God the
358 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
Father, extension of subj. ; for d-rro, see 292, 2 (John, in a similar connection,
uses Tapd, 2 Ep. ver. 3 eic ; ismore usual), and the Lord Jesus Christ,
prep, not repeated, 314, to show that the source is one.
Ver. 3. We are bound, 6(p. plur. , as referring to the three in ver. i (some, less
probably, understand the Apostle as speaking of himself, see 239); to thank God,
€VX', inf. in its ordinary use,«385 ; tense as 386 for dat. Qeip, see 278, d. always, ;
adv. qualifying ei^x. concerning you, brethren, voc. for irepi, see 302, a.
subj. of inf., 285, 387; ev, 295, 4. among the churches of God, for iv, see
295, 2; for the art. with 9, 217, a. for your endurance and faith, vtrep,
303? ^> 3- I'or the one article with the two nouns, see 232, a the endurance and ;
faith combine to form one character, in all persecutions, the your and
afflictions, the article repeated, 232, b. which ye endure, ah, dat. by
attraction (for ibv, as the verb governs a gen. in the New Testament, 2 Cor. xi. i
2 Tim. iv. 3), 346, b; dvixj only middle in the New Testament, act., "to hold up;"
so mid., " to hold oneself up against," 355, i.
Ver. 5. (Which is) a token, nom. (pred. to an implied relative clause, 6 iffriv) ;
the token being the endurance and faith of the Thessalonians. of the righteous
judgment of God, genitives of origin or source, 248 ; article again employed.
in order that ye may be counted worthy, for inf., see 390, c; tense, 386;
vfids, 285. The clause expresses the intent of God's righteous judgment; and hence
its result, in proving the fitness of the faithful for God's kingdom, of the king-
dom of God, /3a(r. gen. after compound of A^io^, 272.
Ver. 6. For the sake of which ye also suffer, for virip, see 303, 2. The
Kal combines into one the thought of the suffering and the being counted worthy.
2 THESSALOXIAXS I. 7-10. 359
if truly it is righteous (as it is, implied by -TTtp), copula omitted; bkK. neut.,
because referring to inf. "with. God, for irapa (dat. ), see 306, /3, 2. tO repay
to those who afflict you, affliction, in the verb, airb marks the debt, olvtI
the return ; for the aorist, see 386. (This verb is used both in a good and a bad
sense in the New Testament: to "repay" or to "retaliate," Rom. xii. 19.) For the
art. and participle, see 395 dat. secondary object, and ace. primary object after the
;
verb, 278.
Ver. 7. And to you, the afflicted, ^Xt/S. is passive (not middle). rest
with us, MfTtt, as 301, a, i ; rnxuv, referring to the three, ch. i. I. at (tV, 295, 7)
the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven, the time when the
recompense shall take place, referred to avrair., ver. 6; airo, 292, i; ovpavov,
singular, 240, a, note, and without article, 218. with the angels of his
power, compare 258. The angels are the ministers of his power. The art. is
unnecessary before £177., as the following gen. defines it, 208.
Ver. 8. In a fire of flame, e** of investiture, dependent upon k. 'Itjct., 295, 3;
<p\oy6s, gen. of quality or attribute, 257. allotting vengeance, 5i86vtos refers
to 'It^o-ou. (The verb in this connection is unusual.) to those who knOW not
God, dat., 278; art. and part., 395; fxrj, the subjective negative, see 393. and tO
those who obey not, for the repeated article, see 232, b. the gospel, dat.,
278, d. of OUT Lord Jesus, see 270, note.
Ver. 9. Who, the compound relative, denoting character and suggesting the
reason, 349. shall pay (the) penalty, eternal destruction, ace. in
apposition ^\•ith slktjv, 177. (away) from the presence of the Lord, art.
omitted before irpoaibirov, 219. The meaning of dird is doubtful. It may either
refer to the source of the punishment, 292, 3, "inflicted by the presence of the Lord,"
or to the fact of separation, 292, i, this being itself the doom. Probably the latter
meaning is to be adopted, and from the glory of his might, the preposi-
tion repeated, to indicate a distinct conception ; tVxi^oj is the gen. of origin, 248.
The glory is that of God's manifested might, and exclusion from this beatific vision
shall be destruction.
Ver. 10. When he shall have come, ^rav ^\-ith subj., 380 ; fut. perf. force
of subj. aor., 383, § [brav as edv). tO be glorified, inf. of design, 390, 3, note ;
for tense, 386. in (or among, 295, 2) his saints, to be and admired in
(or among) all who believe, aor. part, "already believers," compare 364, e ;
probably ev here is to be taken, not as among simply, but as showing the sphere
(295, 4) in which the glory will be displayed, and from which the admiration will
360 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER II.
will have become a fact of the past. i]ix(2v is gen. of origin. For eirl, dependent on
fxapTvpLOv, see 305, 7, 4. in that day, clause dependent on h5o^. koX dav/j,.,
thrown somewhat out of order, compare 409, c. For iv, see 295, 7 ; hdvig, the
emphatic demonstrative, 340, note.
Ver. II. Whereto we
also pray, ets denoting direction, 298,4; 6', rel. pron.
ace. neut.,antecedent in the entire previous sentence, 344 /cai, with reference to the ;
general sentiment of the preceding, we not only indulge the hope, but also express
'
'
it in prayer." always concerning you, 2^3, 2. that (384, note) our God
may count you worthy of the calling, gen., as 272, and for art., see 210.
The meaning of d^iwarj is doubtful : make woi^thy would appear best to suit the
context, but this sense of the verb in the New Testament is unexampled, and
fulfil every good pleasure (see 224, «; 214, c) of goodness, i.e., every
voluntary purpose that can spring from (gen. orig.) goodness (R.V., every desire of
goodness) not God's goodness, for which dyadosavvr} is never used, but goodness as
;
2 avTOv, €t9 TO fjLT} Ttt'^^icof; araXevOrjvai vfia^i airo rov voo<; fxrjBe
reference to, 303, a, 3 (not by, as if in adjuration. See Alf.). the coming
of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our (gen. obj., 268) gathering to-
gether unto him, for iiri, see 305, 7, 3 (Mark v. 21), not tip to, although the
reference is to the final gathering.
Ver. 2. That ye be not (lit., in order to your not heiTUf) soon shaken,
for ei5, see 298, 4. The purpose of the entreaty was to prevent their being shaken.
For TO, substantivising the inf., see 390; for /i-jj, 385, h ; for u/xas, 285, and note.
from your mind (or conviction), air 6, as 292, i ; the article as an unemphatic
possessive, 215. nor yet be troubled, for iirjbi, disjunctive (not fj.-qre, as rec),
see 405 ; dpoeicrdai, pres. inf., denoting an enduring state, the aor., <ja\evd., referring to
a single effect, 386. neither by spirit nor by word nor by letter, as
by us ; the repeated fx-fyre here breaks up the negation into three parts, and connects
them. For 5td, see 299, a, 2. {Spirit no doubt refers to a pretended prophecy ; word,
to a pretended saying on inspired authority letter, therefore, according to the parallel,
;
should mean a pretended epistle. That the reference is not to the First Epistle, the
wj seems further to indicate.) as that (2 Cor. v. 19 shows that the ws does not in
itself imply deceit, but only that the thing was so represented — " to the effect that").
the day of the Lord is already come imminent, immediately), not (or, is
simply is at hand, for the verb always refers to the present the part. eVearti? ;
expressly signifying the present in distinction from the future (Rom. viii. 38 ;
Obs., the single article shows that the two participles refer to the same subject.
But avTiKeifiepoi cannot take iiri following ; an object must, therefore, be under-
stood Christ. Onthe tense, see 396. above (305, 7, 2, R.V. against) every
one called God, obsei-ve iravra, masc. or an object of worship, 6e6^
9,nd ai^acfxa, accus., iu apposition with iravTo. after copulative verb. 30 that
362 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
he sits, for CoffTe, see 391 Kadiaai, intrans. aor., "he took his seat" in tho
temple of God, — literally, into— i.e., "entered into and sits in," construciio
;
12 diravTes.
Ver. g. Whose coming is, ov, correspondent -witli 6v, ver. 8, relative to
Hvofios. according to the working of Satan, tvefyy. anarth- Kara, as 300, 5 ;
rous, "such working, in general, as Satan would perform." For the gen., Sar., see
20, a. in (of investiture or accompaniment, 295, 3) all power and signs and
wonders, Tdar) in sense belongs to all three nouns, 318, and denotes " every kind
of," 224, a. of falsehood, prob. gen. of origin, 248 (these things being severally
born of falsehood), or perhaps gen. of quality, as A.V., R.Y., hjiiig wonders.
Ver. 10. And
in all {evei-y kind of, as ver. 9) deceit,, parallel to the former
prepositional clause with ev, the two together explanatory of /car. ivepy. Sax. of
iniquity, gen. of quality, for the perishing, dat. incommodi, 279. For
the force of the participle, see 200, note, and 396. because, for dvd' wv, see
291, note, they received not, aorist, viewing their lifetime as past, the
love of the truth, gen. obj., 268. in order that they might be
saved, const, as vers. 2, 6.
Ver. II. And on this account, 299, /3, i.e., because they received not, etc.
the sphere (295, 4) in which the salvation \& realised. Trveu/A. is gen. of the author,
248 ; for omitted article, see 217,/. and belief of truth (or, the truth), wlffret,
364 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
without the art., like ay laa-fic^, under the common regimen of ev, 314 see also 208. ;
Truth is abstract, 214, and is used in the utmost generality not so much the ;
specific truth of the Gospel, but the Gospel considered as truth ; the disposition
given being that of harmony with truth in itself, whatever it might be.
Ver. 14. Unto which, (state of salvation), the neuter relative referring to the
whole object of thought ; he called you, aor., as before, of specific
compare 344.
time, by means of, 299, our gospel, i.e., the Gospel as preached by
«, 2.
us, see 270, note, for the attainment of the glory, els, connected with and
explanatory of els a-car. ; do^., gen. obj., 268. (The glory of Christ is regarded as in
a sense the heritage of Christians ; compare John xvii. 24.) of OUr Lord Jesus
Christ, possess, gen., 254.
Ver. 15. Accordingly therefore, for the inferential conjunction, see 406.
brethren, stand fast (derivative of 'icT-qKa, see 108, 4), and hold fast the
instructions, ace. obj. of Kpar., compare 264. which ye were taught, ay,
secondary object, with pass. eSiSdx-, see 284, note, and 356. whether by WOrd,
299, a, 2. or by our (248) epistle. For etre, see 405.
Ver. 16. But our Lord himself, 5^, as usual, adversative, 404 ain-ds, very ;
emphatic, 335. Jesus Christ, and God our Father who loved us,
referring to the last antecedent, God the Father (aor., as referring to a single and
complete act), and gave eternal consolation and good hope, abstract,
anarthrous better rendered without indef. art. in grace, connected with SoiJs,
;
295, 6 and 4.
Ver. 17. Comfort, for opt., see 378 : sing., indicative of the close union between
the Father and the Son ; so the following, your hearts, plur., see 237. and
establish you, supply u/xas from vixCjv, or, as R.V., make KapSias the object of
both verbs, establish them, in every gOOd WOrk and word, iv denotes again
the element ; that in which the confirmation is given.
2 THESSALONIANS III. 1-5. oiJO
CHAPTER III.
Chap. III. ver. i. For the rest (as to what remains to be said), neut. adj.,
ace. of time (comp. 286, b, 2 ; see also 266, and Ellicott on Gal. vi. 17). pray,
brethren, for us, for wepi, see on i. 1 1 ; also for tVa. that the word of
the Lord may have free course (run) and be glorified, passive,
not (as some) middle, even as also {it adds in thought is) with you, /cat
the Thessalonian Church to the other places where the word achieved success. For
wpos, see 307, 7, 2.
Ver. 2. And that we may be delivered, aor. subj., showing that a specific
deliverance is desired, 374, note; the pres, subj., ver. i, suggesting contimwus
success, 374, note, from the perverse and wicked men, the article
denoting a class, as the hypocrites, Matt. vi. 2, probably specifying the Jewish
party in Corinth, whence this Ep. was written, for the faith, the Christian
faith, see 213 (not faith in general, which in this connection would hardly have
been definite), does not belong to all, lit., "(is) not of all," i.e., is not
*
*
their possession, see 267, note.
Ver. 3.But is denied by so many) faithful is the Lord,
(although the faith
a paronomasia with the preceding clause, 413, a. will establish yOU, who
ref. to ar-npi^ai, ii. 17. and guard (you) from evil, or less appropriately (yet
see Ellicott), the Evil Otie (R.Y.). Comp. the quotations in 316. The neuter sense
is sustained by the close connection through <XTr]pi^. with ^pyui in ii. 17. For diro,
see 292, I.
Ver. 4. But we trust, the adversative 5^ bringing the future just expressed
into antithesis with the present (so Ellicott). in the Lord, 295, 4 (not simply
"in the Lord, who will bring this about by his goodness," but being in him, as the
element of our life and hope, we trust) ;see 99, c, note, also 367.
for -jreiroida, in
reference to you, for iiri, that what we command (you)
see 305, 7, 4.
now, as the verb, is pres. ye both are doing, and will do, for Kal... Katy
see 403. The whole clause from 6'ti depends on ireiroid. as an object-sentence, 381.
Ver. But, again slightly adversative, "though this is
5. the case, yet as a further
blessing." the Lord, i.e., Jesus Christ himself, 217, b, (As Christ is separately
mentioned at the close of the verse, some refer k. here to the Holy Spirit, quoting
2 Cor. iii. 18 ; but the argument is very doubtful.) direct your hearts, opt.,
366 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
as in ii. 17; u^wf slightly emphatic from position, into the love of God, for
els, see 298, GeoO objective, 269.
I ; and into the patience of Christ, prep,
repeated, as of a separate object of thought, 314. Xp. is probably gen. of possession,
254, such patience as Christ exhibited " or it may be gen. of author,
'
' ; the patience
'
'
that Christ imparts." The objective sense given in A.V., ^'patient luaiting for,'' is
not supported by the meaning of virofiovri.
Ver. 6. Now, Si, transitional (404, ii). to the preceptive part, we command
you, brethren, for irapay., see ver. 4. in the name of the Lord Jesus
Christ, iv ovbix., dependent upon irap., 295, 5. that ye withdraw your-
selves, object, inf., with ace. subject, 285 a-riW., only mid. in the New Testa-;
shrink from, with ace. , as in 2 Cor. viii. 20, or with clto, as here, from every
brother walking disorderly, and not, subjective neg. according to,
300, /3, 5. the instruction (see ii. 15) which ye (var. read they) received,
9iv, obj. of TrapeXa/S., 343. from US, for irapa, see 306, a.
Ver. 7. For yourselves know, emphatic pron. subj. ; yap suggests an
implied thought : "I need not enter into details, for." how ye ought to
imitate us (for the impersonal verbs, see loi), "a brachylogy " (Ellicott),
implying irepLiraTetv, "how ye ought to walk — in fact, to imitate us."
from preced.,
because we were
not disorderly, on gives the reason for /xt/ieto-^at, "we
propose our conduct for imitation, because." among you, 295, 2.
Ver. 8. Nor, slightly ascensive, "nay, and we did not," 404. did we eat
bread, 306, a, 350 (to eat bread is a quasi-proverbial phrase for "to make a
living"), for nought, Scjpedv, an old ace. as adv., 126, a; compare its use in
Matt. X.8, "without an equivalent;" so in other passages, from any one,
306, a.but in (accompaniment, 295, 3) toil and travail (we did so) labour-
ing night and day, gen., 266. Both these clauses depend on itpayoixev, implied.
in order not to be burdensome, for 7rp6s with inf., see 390, c. to any
of you, ace, compare 281, a vfiCov, partitive gen., 262.
for ;
Ver. 9. Not
that, a frequent elliptical formula, correcting a possible misappre-
hension, " do not suppose me to say that" (see Ellicott on Phil. iii. 12). have we
not a right (to maintenance), but (we do so) in order that we may pre-
sent ourselves, SCjjxev, aor. of one definite determination for eauroiJs, see 335, ;
2 THESSALONIANS HI. 10-15. 367
7cXXw and its regimen, see ver. 4, 6. that, introducing objective sentence explana-
tory of TOVTO, but tllro^vn into a quotation form, 382, a ; hence icrd. imper. " if
any one wills not to work," for el, see s^s^ '^ \ for ^eXet, 363, /. " neither
lethim eat," neg., 371.
For, introducing the reason of the command, we hear of SOm©
Ver. II.
that walk, predicative participle, 394. among you, eV as ver. 7. dis-
orderly, doing no work, but being busybodies, participles in
apposition with TreptTr. ; for the paronomasia, see 413, a. The verb irepLepy.
does not again occur in the N.T., although the subst. wepiepyos is found, i Tim.
V. 13.
Ver. 12. But to such as these, pron. definite, 220. we command and
exhort, thedat. obj. belongs grammatically to 7rapa77. as in ver. 4, etc. irapaKaX. , ;
takes the ace. in the Lord Jesus Christ that, working with quiet-
ness, for /jLerd, they eat, subj. by iVa ; tense, 374. Obs. vapayy.
see 301, a, 2.
with the inf., ver. 6 with object
; and obj. -clause, oti, ver. 10, here with the inten-
tional particle. The command is given in order that the result may follow, their
own bread, emphatically, not that of others.
Ver.But ye, emphatic, by way
13. of contrast to those just mentioned.
brethren, be not weary, subj., with imper. force, 375. in well-doing,
pres. part., adjunct to pred., 394, 3, b, "whilst well-doing" being implied; or
causal, as c.
But if any
Ver. 14. one obeys not, 383, a. our word, 278, d. through,
conveyed by, 299, a, 2. the epistle, i.e., this epistle, note this man, for
(tt;/!., middle, see 355, 2, "mark for yourselves." not to keep company
with him, dat. of association, 277, a, double object, 411, b. The pres. imper. in
both cases enjoins the conduct as habitual, that he be ashamed, the purpose,
again, not simply the result.
Ver. 15. And, not adversative, but simply conjunctive another particular of ;
apposition connecting ex^P- with tovtov, understood from preced. but admonish
(him) as a brother.
Ver. 1 6. But (the antithesis being between the persons addressed by the Apostle
and those just specified, "as for you," "to return to you") the Lord of (the)
peace, gen. of quality, himself, emphatic pron. give (the) peace to you,
8(^7), opt. in the usual sense and the ordinary const, of the verb. The article before
eip. both times emphatic, recognising peace as the peculiar and well-understood
is
and is also incorrect. It arose probably from a careless and mistaken interpretation
of I Thess. iii. i. R. V. omits.
369
ations whicli are legitimate and even necessary. The word suffer, for
instance, covers so great an extent of meaning, that we are hardly
surprised to find it employed in the A.V. for ten distinct Greek words,
besides various combinations of the same roots. To 'provol^e, again, occurs
twelve times in the A.V. for eight Greek words the R.V.
diff'erent ;
twice for rao-o-o), which is rendered by five different words ; thrice for
StaTaa-cro), a verb with five renderings ; thrice for KaOto-rrjfj.L (not in E..V.),
which we find translated in six ways once for Karaa-Kevdlu) (not in R.V.),
;
a verb with four English equivalents once for KptVw, which is rendered
;
in fifteen ways and once for x^tporoi/ea), a word occurring twice, and in
;
WORDS ILLUSTRATED.
NO. NO.
dyados, dyadoj(TVV1]
dyairdu},
dyios, dyvos
dydwr
.
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.21
.19
. 23
daKpi'Oj
derjcris
....
daifjuou, dacf-Loviov
....
•
•
53
20
38
dyvorj/xa . .
39 del. . 12
dyopd^u . . 43 SeiXos, SetXi'a .
33
gdr}$ . 52 deiai8aifji.wi>, deiaidai/xovia 44
&8iK0i, ddiKia
dWios
aiviw, dtpos
.
. . .
.
•
22
58
47
beairtTrjs
dijfxos
diddrjfxa
....
.... .
•
59
73
67
alreo}, alTiqixa . . . 9, 38 dcaKovos, StaKouia, dLanoveu) 36, 60
aiJjv, aiwuLOS
dXeicpo) .
.
.
.
.
58
18
24
8i.aXeyo/xaL
didvoia
diarayi^
....
....
.
. 49
15
55
.
.
.70
.
39
51
diKULOs,
dlKTVOU
56yiia
....
diKaioavvT], ^LKa'.cjfia
....
21, 49
.
• 70
49
dvaKaivow, dpa veou)
dv-qp .
.
.
.
.
.26
. 63
doK€w, 56|a
SovXos .... 6, 4 7
. 60
dvdpWTTOS
dvo/xia .
. . . .
.
63
39 dQfxa ....
5vua/j.ai, bi'vap-LS 45,
.
57
61
dvoxv
dvTiXirrpou
diroKuTpojcns
.
•
31
43
43
'E/Spaios
idvos, edvt}
.... •
•
50
73
dwTo/xai.
dperr)
dpxoLOS
.
.
.
7
21, 47
. 25
eiKdov
eifii
....
elSov, d5os, etSwXoj'
....
.
5,
.
56
56
I
avXri
dipiTjfit, &<p€(ns .
72
42
elwov, eiros
eXeos .... .
•
8
41
68
evdvfia ....
"EXXt;*', 'FtXXTjvKTTifjs •
.
50
66
pdpos
^eXTLOV
(iios
.
.
.
21
54
i^oi'crla
evToX-f) ....
.
exaiueo}, eiraiuos
, . . •
.
57
49
47
^Xeiru), pXe/x/Jic . 5 CTrtcra/xat 4
poaKU
PouXo/xai, (SovX V .... 16
3
62
iinaTdTrjs
ipXOfxai ....
....
•
.
59
10
/3pe0os
^(a/Mos
. .
37
epQ
ipurdu) .... .
9,
8
38
yeevva
yivo/xai
.
.
. 52
I
ia-drjs
erepos ....
. .
evayyeXiov , evayyeXii^w
. .
.
. .
•
66
76
15
yiVUXTKW .
4 euXa/ST/s,evXd^eta, evXa^eofj-ai .
33, 44
ydfios 68 evXoyTjrCs . . . . . 28
372 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
evae^Tis,
evxofJiaL ....
€i)o"e'j3eia
.
•
.
NO.
44
38
Xidos
Xuyos
....
....
XvTpOV, XvTp6(j), Xl'TpUCLS .
.... 54
^ojri . . . . •
Xi/Xi'os, Xi'x»''a
TjKli}
r)TTT}u.a .... .
•
10
39
fiaKdpios . . . .
dedofxaL
^€\^^)
....
ddvaros, davarou)
....
.
•
54
5
3
fjLaKpo6v/j.ia
....
fxdvTLS, ixavrevoixai
/xdraios
.
....
depdwojv, deparrevit) .
.
.
34
60 fieXXw ....
fxcXei, fj-cXerdu}
dewpeio
diyydvu ....
....
•
.
5
7
/X€pL/Xvdi>}, /x€pi/.i.va
fiera/xeXofxai .
.
dvrjTOi
....
dprjCFKOs, 6pr)a-K€ia •
54
44 /xopcprj ....
ixeravoeu}, fxerduoia .
dv/ULOS
^i;pa ....
dvaia, dvaiacTTripiov .
.
•
32
71
37
J'a6s ....
veKpbs, veKpoio .
iepevs
tepos, iepoj'
.... .
23, 35
37
VeOS, V€JTT}S
UrjTTLOS
vilTTiO
....
....
l/JLaTLOV ....
iXdcr/coyUai, LXacr^tjs .
•
.66
43 j^oCs, v6r)/xa
....
'lovSatoj, 'lapar]XlT7]s
iox^ij}, tVxt^s . .
50
57
6yK0S
oovpfiSs ....
....
Kadapoi .... , 23
otSa
oiKOS, otVt'a, oiKenjs .
K'aiJ/6s,
Kaipos ....
Kaiu6TT]s . 26
64
OLKOvixivrj
olKTLpflOS
KaKos, KaKia
KaXos ....
....
.
.
22
21
oXokXtjpos, cXoTcXrjS
....
opdoo, bpafxa, 6\poixai, 6\j/is
Kapbla
KaTayyeWii}
.... .
•
•
55
15
opyr)
OCFLOS ....
....
Karrjx^i^
/cei'os .... .
.
14
29
6(p€iX(jJ
ocpuXrifia
....
KXaioj ....
KTjpvaacj, K-qpvyixa
....
.
•
.
15
20
'oxXos
....
KXeiTTTJS
KOCpLVOS
KOafMOS
....
. . . ,
.
.
.
s^
.
74
69
7rat5ei;a;
TTttts,
iraXaibs ....
iraioLOV .
KTiatS
Kvpios
....
Kpdros, Kpeiaaiou
....
21, 57
•
.
49
59
irapd^aais,
irapavoixla
iro^paKorj,
Trapal3oXrj, irapoifjiia .
irapdi: TU/JLU,
XaX^u) ....
.... 8, 15
TTapddoaLS
irdpecris ....
....
Xa/xirds
Xaos
Xarpeuu)
....
....
.
.
.
.
65
73
36
Trarpid
irapopyiafMos
TT^urjs .... .
\r)<7Tr]s ....
XeiTovpyiKds .
.
36
74
7rXr]/j./ji.€X€ia
irXTjpou), irXrjpujxa .
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 373
NO.
ij/MVOS ......
......
NO.
48
TTveufxa .
31
TTOVTjpos, irovTjpla 22
irpdaao) . 2
^ivofxai ....
..... 6
irpocreiixo/xai, irpoaevxi)
irpodKvviii)
TTpoatpopd
irpoiprjTr)^, irpo(pT)Tei(a
38
36
37
ipavXos
(peyyos
<^/it
.....
.....
22
65
8
15
(fx-Xecj, (pLXavdpuiria, 0tXa5eX0ia 19
TTTiVXOS
irvvddvofiai
. 30
71
9
(poprrlov
(pp^ves
.....
06j3os, (po^eofiaL
.....
33
68
55
^a/3/3i^ •
/jew, pr)^l(l
• •
59
8
(pvXrj
^s,
.....
(ppoveoj, (ppovTi^u
....
(fxacTrip
II
61
65
cayqvrj . 70
crdp^, aapKiKos XapaKTTjp,
55 xo-pa-y/J-a 56
Sarav, Harapas
ae^o/xai, ae^d^ojxai .
53
36
45
Xo-pis
XtTci;'
XP^
..... . 41
66
12
(XKld
(TTrovdri
(Xirvpis
.
56
II
69
Xpi'w,
Xpovos
....
XPV<^t65, xP>?o"'"ot?7?
.....
Xpiaros
. . . • 21
18
64
aT€(pavos, arefM/jLa 67
<rxwa
TCKVOV
.
56
62
xpaXfio^
\j/rjXa(pdo}
.....
.... 48
7
reXo^, reXew. TfXetos, reX 1//1/X77, V^uxtAfos = 54, 55
3, 27
T^pas 45
43 aj5?5 48
374 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS«
I.
2. To Do, to Make.
iroveo) seems to denote more sustained effort than irpdco-o), whence the frequent use
of the former for u-cll-doing, the latter for ill-doing. For other senses of irpaaao}, see
Eph. vi. 21 ; Luke iii. 13 (this last compared with Trote'w in Luke xii. 33, xix. 18).
3. To Will, to Desire.
PovXopiai denotes the will rather on " to choose ;" Oe'Xw, will
its intellectual side,
absolute I Rom. ix. 18) authority, the former of determinations where the wisdom and
justice are apparent (Luke x. 22, xxii. 42). Thus, PovX'q is counsel ; 6€XT](jLa, will ;
P3v\T]|ia, plan (only in Acts xxvii. 43 Rom. ix. 19). ^o^Xofiai is also used in
;
Heb. i. 14. So in the phrase to. fieWovra, the things to comi (Col, ii. 17),
4. To Know.
ot8a is properly a perfect, " I have seen," and implies the knovdedge which conies
from without, objective knowledge -yivwo-Kw, "I learn," in any way, expresses the
;
iii., iv.) ; eTrio-Taiiai (an old dialectic form of the middle of icplaT-qixi), "to set (the
mind) upon," may either mean simply to be aware of, as in Acts x. 28; xviii. 25,
or to understand (Mark xiv. 68). The distinction between ot5a and tiriaTafiat
may be noted in Jude 10 that between yivib(XKco and iiriffTa/xaL in Acts xix. 15.
;
5. To See.
pXeiro) denotes the act of seeing, and is referred to the organ ; opdw {6\f/oiJ.ai, eWov)
is referred to the thing seen, whether in itself (objectively) or in regard to its im-
pression on the mind (subjectively). The former verb, therefore, may be used
without an expressed object (as Matt. xiii. 13). Both verbs are applied to mental
vision, the former implying greater vividness (Heb. ii. 8, 9). With /xt}, they have
the sense beware ; generally, however, /SX^ttw is used, occasionally with dtro. In
—
accordance with the distinction above mentioned, 5pa|ia is a vision; ^\i\i\ia, the
exercise of the faculty of sight; to. ^Xeiro/xeva^ the things seen (2 Cor. iv. 18), i.e., on
which the faculty of immediate discernment is exercised to 6par6v, the visible (Col. ;
i. 16), i.e., in itself considered. Tittmann distinguishes opdu and its derivatives
from eldov, in that the former is objective, and the latter subjective,
being a bxpo/xac
middle term. Compare opa/xa, etSoj, 6^is. It is doubtful, however, if this distinction
can be maintained in the use of the verbs. 6edo)iai (referred to the subject) and
Qewpita (referred to the object) are to look at purposely, or attentively to gaze upon
(Matt. vi. I, xi. 7 John xii. 45 Acts vii. 56).
; ;
6. To Appear.
" expresses the subjective mental estimate or opinion about a matter which
Zok4<o
men it, which may be right (Acts xv. 28
form, their 8<J|a concerning i Cor. iv.
9, ;
vii. 40), but which may be wrong, involving, as it always does, the possibility
of error (Matt. vi. 7 Mark vi. 49 John xvi. 2 Acts xxvii. 13) " <|)aivo|iai
; ; ; ;
expresses how a matter phenomenally shows and presents itself, with no necessary
*
'
assumption of any beholder at all." Trench. This "phenomenon " may represent
a reality (Matt. ii. 7 ; Phil. ii. 15, "appear," not " shine ") or a mere show (Matt,
xxiii. 27, 28).
7. To Touch.
&irTO(Jiai (middle of otttw, to kindle) is the usual word ; 9i-y7dvft) denotes a lighter
touch (compare the two in Col. ii. 21, where, as Archbishop Trench observes, the
order of our translation should be reversed [so R.V.J and see Heb. xi. 28) x)/T]Xa<|>do) ; ;
is to feel (" to feel after," Acts xvii. 27), to handle. Pres. part, palpable, material
(Heb. xii. 18).
8. To Speak, Say.
XoXcb) is simply to speak, to employ the organ of utterance ; Xc'-yw is referred to
the sentiment of what is spoken (compare ^Xeirco and opdoj above) <|>iip.C, pew, ep«, ;
etirov to the words ; pi](ia is a word, in itself considered ; Xd-yos, a spoken 2vord, with
reference generally to that which is in the speaker's mind ; ?iros is only found (Heb.
vii. 9) in the phrase ws ^ttos Both Xeyw and etirou are used for
direlv, so to sjieak.
command; as in the formula (Sermon on the Mount) ^70; 5e Xeyui vixiv. See also
Matt. iv. 3.
9. To Ask.
aiT€w is to ask for something, to beg, pray ; Ipwrdw, to question, to ask in general,
specifically " In that day ye shall ask me no questions ...whatsoever ye shall ask of
:
10. To Come.
Ipxofiai denotes the act, " I am coming " ¥^K<l), the result, " ; I am come." John
viii. 42 : "I came from God, and I am here." See also Heb. x. 9.
376 NE^V TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
11. To Care.
<|>pov6a), 4)povTCt«, implies solicitude (Phil. iv. lo ; Titus iii, 8); [isXcraw (and
impers. jie'Xci), solicitude expressed in forethought, or the emplo3mient of means to the
desired result; jiepijivdw, anxious or distracting care. So the substantive \iipi\Lva.
See especially i Peter v. 7. <nrovZr\ (" haste ") is earnestness, dilif/cncc, generally.
12. Ought.
duty or necessity as existing in the thing itself, often used
8€i (impers.) denotes the
for the ought arising from prophecy (Luke xxiv, 26, 46) 6(j>€CX(u refers to the obli- ;
gation as actually imjjosed (John xiii. 14) XP'H (only once in the New Testament,
;
James iii. 10) is connected with xp<^ofiai, and originally differs from dei as the rule of
utility differs from that of abstract right {dec would express Butler's philosophy of
morals ; x/377, Paley's).
riXos expresses the end of a course or scries so rtkioi, to rectch the end ; rcXcioo),
:
15. To Preach.
KT]pv(r(rw is to p>voclaim, as a herald ; K^p\ry)j.a, the proclamation made evayv^Xiov ;
and cvayycXCt" add the further notion of glad tidings ; KaTayY^XXw refers simply to
che delivery of the message. Found with evayyeXl^u), Acts xv. 35, 36 with Krjpvaa-u}, ;
Phil. i. 15, 16. XaXt'w, sometimes rendered preach, means simply to talk (see 8),
and 8taX€'70}iai (Acts xx. 7, 9) implies conference ; '7rpo<j)T]T€va), to forth-tell, and
7rpo4>TlTTis, are used for preachers under the New Testament (Eph. iv. 11 i Cor. ;
\iv. i), as for the prophets of the Old, both being set to declare the Divine will
\j.6.vTL'i, a soothsayer, is of heathen use, and not found in the New Testament,
fjiavTejoiJi'n occurring only Acts xvi. 16. (See Trench.)
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 377
TToi'xaCvo) is in general to exercise the care of a iroi^i-qv, to tetid the flock (Acts
XX. 28), hence to rule, govern (Matt. ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27) ; Poo-km refers to the special
function of providing food, to pasture (Luke xv. 15). Both are included in our
Lord's charge to St. Peter (John xxi. 15-17).
18. To Anoint.
Xpiw denotes official anointing, as of a king or priest, hence Xpi(7r6s : aX€(<{>(i),
anointing for festal purposes (Luke vii. 46), for health (James v. 14), or for embalm-
ment (Mark xvi. i).
d-yaTni, its cognate substantive, "is a word born within the bosom of revealed reli-
gion. It occurs in the LXX., but there is no example of its use in any heathen
writer whatever ; the utmost they attained to here was (piXavdpuTria and <pi\ade\<pia,
and the indeed, never in any sense but as the love between brethren in blood."
last,
— Trench. Wherever "charity" occurs in the A.V., the original is dydirv, but it
is more generally and better translated "love" (R.V.). <j>iX€a) expresses the loye of
the feelings, instinctive, warm affection ("amo"). The force of tlie two verbs is
very beautifully illustrated in John xxi. 15-17.
20. To Weep.
KXafw is the verb generally employed; SaKptiw, "to shed tears," is found Imt
once, John xi. 35 : "Jesus wept." In Matt, ii. 18, Opijvos W. H.(reading doubtful ;
and R.V. omit), K\avd/j.6s, odvpfjLos, form a climax, "(lamentation,) weeping, and
mourning."
II.
21. Good.
d^aO^s is good ; SCKaios, right. In the former, the notion of beneficence prevails,
in the latter that of justice. So with d-yaGwo-vvi], SiKatoo-uvt]. Still, the two are
not opposed. In Rom. vii. 12 both are predicated of the Divine law. In Rom. v. 7
the ayadb^ is one of the 5t/catoi (as i)roved by the article and by yap) in Matt, vi, i, ;
378 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
XV. 33), and xP1^'»'oti1S> goodness, gentleness, benignity, are connected with xpcioytiat,
XP'h- The New Testament comparative of dyadb^ is usually KpcCa-o-cDv, Kpeirruv, really
akin to Kparoi, force, and betokening the time when strength and goodness were
too closely identified. (Compare dper-q, "virtue," really courage, found only in the
New Testament, Phil. iv. 8 i Pet. ii. 9, where see 47 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.) PeXriov,
; ;
malignity ; <)>avXos is worthless, "good for nothing " like the old Eng. " naughty,''
from "naught."
23. Holy.
80-ios is holy, intrinsically; referred once to the Divine purposes (Acts xiii. 34,
from Isa. Iv. 3), generally to interior purity predicated both of God and of men ;
("pious") &710S, a^vos, are both derived from a root denoting separation, the
;
former, when applied to men, expressing consecration to God (see I Pet. ii. 5, 9),
the latter, purity, chastity ; Upds, very infrequently (except in its neuter substan-
tival form, iepbv, on which see 35), is " dedicated to God," and is only used in the
New Testament of things ; Kadapds, literally clean, free from impure admixture.
24. True.
dXtjOirjs is "true" morally, and is applied to persons or to declarations dXi]Oivds ;
is "genuine," "real." The former epithet, for instance, applied to God, denotes
his attribute of faithfulness (John iii. 33) ; the latter expresses the reality of his
Godhead, as distinguished from false deities (John xvii. 3). The use of dXrjdivos in
the Revelation is an exception to this rule (see xix. 9, 11). The substantive dXi^dcCa
includes the idea of both adjectives, though generally correspondent with the former.
25. Old.
TraXaids "old," as having existed long; dpxatos, "old,"«^ having existed
is
formerly: dpxalos fxadr}Trjs (Acts xxi. 16), one of the original disciples. Compare
2 Pet. ii. 5 liev. xii. 9, xx. 2.
;
iraXaids sometimes connotes the idea of decrepitude,
decay (opposed to Katj/6s, see 26), Matt. ix. 16 ; i Cor. v. 7, 8 ; and for the verb,
26. New.
vios is new in reference to time, having recently come into existence (young)
Kttivos, new (fresh) in reference to qimlity, different in kind. (See Trench on the
words.) So p^a diadriKij (Heb. xii. 24) is "a covenant recently given ;
" Kaiv-rj oiad-qKr}
27. Perfect.
TcXctos, " means that Avhich has attained the
full-gi-own, " applied to character,
moral tc'Xos —manhood " however it may be true that having reached
in Christ ;
this, other and higher ends will open out before him, to have Christ formed in him
more and more." Trench. The attainment of their highest end is expressed by the
perfect rereXetoj/xat (Phil. iii. 12). oXoKX-qpos is complete in parts, no Christian
grace lacking oXotc'Xtis denotes matm'ity in each separate element of character
;
(I Thess. V. 23).
28. Blessed.
Two different adjectives are translated blessed : fiaKapios, liap2nj, as in the Beati-
tudes, and notably i Tim. i. ii, vi. 15 ; and cvXoyqTos, verbal adjective of the verb
to bless (Mark xiv. 61 Rom. ; i. 25).
30. Poor.
ire'vTis (only in 2 Cor. ix. 9) may refer to the poverty of scanty livelihood ; irTwx.os
implies that of utter destitution. See Matt. v. 3, xi. 5.
31. Patience.
viroixov^ {vTro/xevu}) denotes not only the passive, but the active \drtue of endurance,
and may often be rendered persistence, continuance (Luke viii. 15 Heb. xii. i ; ;
32. Anger.
Ovfjids is the impulse and passion ; dpYirj, the habit and settled pm-pose of ^VTath.
Both (as in Rom. ii. 8) are applied to the anger of God against sinners the latter, ;
however, being the usual word. Both are ranked among the sins of men (as Eph.
iv. 31). Still, there may possibly be a righteous human anger (Eph. iv. 26 compare ;
Mark iii. 5), while the exasperation and bitterness of anger, Trapofyyia/iws, is utterly
forbidden.
380 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
33. Fear.
<f><$Pos, ({>oPeo)iai, are words in themselves indifferent, the fear being sinful, or
reverent and holy, according to the particular reference
but SdXos, 8€i\ia, are ;
always bad and base, "cowardly, cowardice;" €vXdp£ia, €vXap€0)iai, denote appre-
hension generally (see Acts xxiii. lo), but chiefly pious fear (Heb. xii. 28, and
perhaps v. 7).
III.
34. Deity.
0€iort]S (Rom. i. 20), Deity, in an abstract sense (Gottlichheit) ; ©eorris (Col.
ii. 9), Deity, personally (Gottheit). See Tittmann.
35. Temple.
Upov, the whole sacred enclosure (Matt. xxvi. 55 ; John ii. 14) vaos, the shrine ;
itself, the Holy place, and Holy of Holies (Matt, xxvii. 51 ; John ii. 19; Acts vii.
48 ; I Cor. iii. 16).
38. To Worship.
irpocrKweo) is the generic Avord (primarily expressive of theoc^ "to faAvn," from
k6i>}v) of homage paid to God, to Christ, and (in the Revelation) to the "dragon"
and the "beast;" (r€po|xai (or£pdto|Jiai), of the religious feeling, "to cherish, or to pay
devotion;" XaTptvw, of Divine worship, Phil. iii. 3 (idolatrous in Acts vii. 42);
XeiTovpYcco, of solemn, stated observance. So XeiTovpyia, as Luke i. 23 XeiTovpyiKd^, ;
Heb. i. 14 Xetrovpyos, Heb. viii. 2. But these last words may also apply to the
;
are priests alike (i Pet. ii. 5) ; '7rpo(r<|)opd is any offering to God, priestly or otherwise*
In Eph. V. 2 some refer Trpo<r<popdv to Christ's consecrated life, dv<nav to his atoning
death.
38. Prayer, to Pray.
ivyj\ is a prayer (James v. 15) or a vow (Acts xviii. 18) ; ci^x^K-^^^' ^^ P^'^-Yj
or toj
wish strongly (Rom. ix. 3) ; irpoo-evxoiiai, Trpocrevx'nj are restricted to }>rayei' to God,[
the latter denoting sometimes a i)lace of prayer, a building below the rank of
synagogue, "proseucha" (Acts xvi. 13) 8£'T]<ris is in general the expression of lucd,^
;
any urgent request, "supplication." For atT^w, epwrdu}, see 9 al'TT^fia is any par- ;
ticular request ; in phir., the individual ])etitions in the irpoaevxH- See Phil. iv. 6,j
— ;
Avill be d-yvoTina (Heb. diminishing of that which should have been rendered
ix. 7) :
7rapavop.ia a discord and tnen it is TrX-r^iiixcXeia and in other ways almost out of
: ; :
number." Note also 64)€iXT]}ia, in the Lord's Prayer (Matt. vi. 12), debt to Divine
justice. Luke has d/uaprt'a (xi. 4).
42. Forgiveness.
d(|>e(ris, d(j>Li]|ii, denote the "remission" of sins, forgiveness, to its full extent,
as promised in the Gospel found only Rom. iii. 25, literally, passiiuj-hy,
; irdpco-is,
" prpetermission," refers rather to the simple withholding of punishment deserved, a
parallel being found in Acts xvii. 30 {inrepiduv).
43. Redemption.
"d-yopd^w, buy, as in a market-place, for a certain price (ti^t?) Xvrpdw, effect ;
deliverance by the payment of ransom and exertion of power Xilrpov is the price ;
paid for releasing any one from captivity, punishment, or death {Xvco, loose), the
buying back by paying the price of what had been sold, or the redeeming what had
been devoted by substituting something in its place. So dvTiXvrpov, with the
further idea "in room of," denoting exchange, the price paid for procuring the
liberation of another by ransom or forfeit Xtirpcoo-is, diroXijTp&xris, the process of ;
deliverance iXa(r|ids, l^tXa<r|i6s, are the same as Xijrpov, with the leading idea of
;
propitiation." Webster. See the use of iXdo-Kojiai in the publican's prayer, Luke
xviii. 13; iXa<rTT|piov, properly an adjective, "propitiatory" of the mercy-seat, in
LXX. and Heb. ix. 5 ; of Christ's sacrifice, Rom. iii. 25 ; ir€pi'iroie'o{iai, ircpiiroCTio-ts,
denote acquirements for one's self, purchase, generally (Acts xx. 28 ; i Fet. ii.
9
Eph. i. 14).
382 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
44. Piety, Religion.
€V(r€pT]S, €v(r€p€ia, denote worsliip or piety righthj directed, in human relations as
well as Divine Scoo-cPtjs, Geoo-c'Ptta, worship directed towards God; cvXapTjS, cvXdpcia,
;
denote the devoutness springing from godly fear; 0pfjo-Kos, OpTjo-KcCa (James i. 26, 27
Acts xxvi. 5 ; Col. ii. 18, only), refer to external worship, religious service ;
(Acts xvii. 22), and 8ei(ri8ai|iovia (Acts xxv. 19), may have a favourable
8ei(ri8aC|ia)v
or unfavourable meaning, " religious" or " superstitious," literally, " devoted to the
fear of deities."
46. Parable.
irapaPoXr), a detailed comparison, "parable," as usually understood; ircLpoi(i.Ca
(literally, a wayside discourse), " a proverb, " John xvi. 25, 29 ; "a comparison,"
2 Pet. ii. 22 John x. 6.
;
1 Pet. iv. 11), denotes the recognition of character, " the glory." In i Pet. ii. 9 the
word is d/oerds, virtues ; jic-yaXviva), to magnify, is a yet more exalted word (Luke i. 46).
(not often used, probably from its associations with heathenism) is an ode ot praise to
God : "A psalm might be a de 2'>'rofundis ; a hymn must always be more or less of a
'magnificat.'' — Trench. a>8TJ is a song that might be either psalm or hymn, or a yet
more general expression of Christian feeling (Eph. v. 19 ; Col. iii. 16).
49. Ordinance.
This word is adopted as the rendering of 86-Y|ia, a thing decreed ( Eph. ii. 15; Col.
ii. 14 ; see also Col. ii. 20) ; 8iKai(o|j.a, that which it is right to observe (Heb.
ix. I, 10) ; 8iaTa-YTJ, appointment (Rom. xiii. 2) ; irapd8oo-is (i Cor. xi. 2 ; R.V.,
tradition), instruction or injunction given, elsewhere translated tradition (as 2 Thess.
ii. 15) ; and ktio-is, creation, creature (i Pet. ii. 13). As distinguished from
8iKanlj/xaTa, the tvroXaC are moral precepts (Luke i. 6).
Greek-speaking Jew. The latter word is rendered "Grecian" in the A. V., " Grecian
Jew" in the R.V., in distinction from "EXXrjv, "Greek," or Gentile (Acts vi. i,
ix. 29 ; in Acts xi, 20 the reading should probably he"E\\r]vas [R. V.], though W. H.
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 383
51. Anathema.
dvd6-qp.a, a thing devoted in honour of God (Luke xxi. 5) ; avadi\i.a (originally the
same word), a thing devoted to destruction, "accursed." So the verb avaQi\ia.riX,<i>.
See Acts xxiii. 14. The other occurrences of dvdde/xa are Rom. ix. 3 ; i Cor. xii. 3,
xvi. 22 ; Gal. i. 8, 9.
and destruction (Matt. xi. 23) once only rendered "gi-ave," i Cor. xv. 55 (where the
;
R.V. reads ddvare with W. H.); "the gates of Hades" are the powers of destruction
(Matt. xvi. 18) 7€€vva (Heb. = "Valley of Hinnom " [R.V. always hell^ Avith Gehenna
;
in marg., except Jas. iii. 6]) is the abode of the lost (Matt. v. 22, 29, 30, x. 28,
xviii. 9, xxiii. 15, 33 Mark ix. 43, 45 ; Luke xii. 5 ; James iii. 6, only). See
;
IV.
twTJ is life in its principle^ life intrinsic ; P^os, life in its manifestations, life
extrinsic. Hence the former is used especially for life sj)iritual and immortal ; the
latter may denote the duration or manner of life, livelihood. »Jn;X'^ ^^ ^^^^ principle
of animal life," the soul." (See the next article.) Odvaros is death, opposed to ^(a-q ;
V€Kp6s, dead; Ovtitos, mortal. The verbs Oavaroo) (Rom. viii. 13), vcKpoa> (Col.
iii. 5), are both translated mortify ; the former, perhaps, referring rather to the statCy
"death to sin," the latter to the deed, "slay them."
384 NEW TESTAMENT SYl^ONYMS.
<|/vxT], soul or life, is common to man with the irrational animals (Rev. viii. 9),
hence 5c//'( Matt. xvi. 25, 26), perso7i [Rev. xviii, 13), often the soul as the sqat of
passion or desire, the point of contact between man's bodily and spiritual nature ;
\J/x>Xik6s, "natural" (i Cor. ii. 14, xv. 44, 46 ; James iii. 15 ; Jude 19, only) ; a-(!»\ia.
and rpvxv are jointly elements of what is often called o-dp|, the lower, fleshly nature.
So o-apKiKJS> and the grosser o-dpKivos, as i Cor. iii. i, 3 (see § 142 c, note). But
awfjLa is sometimes used ior jJcr son, Rom. xii. i, " your bodies," i.e., the instruments
or organs of your entire nature. Trv€v[xa, spirit, man's highest nature, the point of
contact between the human and the Divine ; irv^viJiaTiKos, spiritual, as i Cor.
ii. 13, 15 ; <|)p^v€S (only in i Cor. xiv. 20), the understanding ; vovs, the mind,
percipient and intelligent, the reason ; KapSia, the heart, is used not only for the
seat of the emotions, but for that of the intellectual faculties, at KapSiai, /cat to,
vo-jfiara (Phil. iv. 7), "thought at its source and in its manifestations;" Sidvout,
the understanding, as exercised, for good or evil, Eph. ii. 3 ; Matt. xxii. 37.
the form, externally regarded, " the figure, fashion" (see Phil. ii. 6, 7, 8) eiKwv ;
denotes the exact representation, " image ;" (TK^a, the shadowy resemblance (Heb.
X. i) \apo.KTi\p, the hnprcss, as enstamped (Heb. i. 3).
;
Compare xdpct7M«>" stamp,
engraving."
57. Power.
8vva(i.is, used also of miracles (see 45), inherent power, might ; c^ovo-ia, power
employed, authority ; Icrxvis, strength, as an endowment (so lax^^i to be strong,
prevail, more emphatic than bvvaixaC) ; Kpdros, strength as exerted, "force."
58. World.
Koor^ios, the scheme of material things, the world, often in opposition to the
kingdom of heaven aitov has ; reference primarily to duration (probably derived not
from ad ibv, but from at)fii, to breathe; hence life, duration), adj., alwvios, belonging
to the alivv : dtSios is from dei, and means sim2)ly everlasting (only found Rom. i. 20;
Jude 6) ; aiQves (Heb. i. 2), "the
A.V. and R.V., "the worlds," in
ages," or, as
respect to their successive ages olKOvjit'vTj, the earth as inhabited, the world of men.
:
For Koa/xos and oiKovfjiivr}, interchangeable, compare Matt. iv. 8 with Luke iv. 5.
69. Master.
Kvpios expresses lordship in general ownership (correlative with SouXos);
; Sco-rroTt]?,
rendering of the Hebrew pa^pf, found in its original form in iMatt., i\Iark, John.
'
60. Servant.
SovXos, slave, is the lowest word in the scale of servitude {dovXoco, to enslave^
a common ancestor (only in Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25 Eph. iii. 15 in A.V. a
; ;
different rendering each time, R.Y. consistently /am^/^/) ; oIkos, oiKia, both mean
household, the former referring to the inmates, the latter to the building and that
which it contains (8a>|ia always in the New Testament of the building, with 4x1,
**
house-top.")
62. Child, Infant.
T€Kvov, child by natural descent (from tiktu) ; irais, a boy or girl, a child in legal
relation, also a servant (Luke xv, 26 ; Matt. xii. 18 ; Acts iv. 27, 30) ; iralSiov, a
young child ; Pp€'<j>os, a babe; v-^irtos (from vrj, negative, and elwov), infans, a child
in power and character.
63. Man.
dvOpwiros, a man, member of the human family (homo) ; dvT)p, a man in sex and
age (vir).
64. Time.
Xpjvos, time as duration ; Kaipos, a definite time, with reference to some act or
' '
crisis, opportunity.
'
66. Clothes.
ifiaTiov, raiment, generally, also an outer garment, opposed to xitwv, an inner
vest (Matt, v, 40) ; ifrQr\s, apparel, usually applied to what is ornate or splendid ;
67. Crown.
crT€<j)avos, "a garland," a conqueror's or a festal crown ((rTe)j.(i.a, a sacrificial
garland, Acts xiv. 13) ; 8i.d8i]p.a, "a fillet," a royal crown (Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i,
68. Burden.
Pdpos denotes the pressure of a weight, which may be relieved or transferred (Gal.
vi. 2) ^opriov is specific, the " load " which each must bear for himself (ver. 5) ;
;
Yofios, the lading of a ship (Acts xxi. 3) ; ^^kos, the weight that encumbers (Heb^
xii. I).
C C
386 NEW TESTAMENT S^'^^OI^ I'MS.
69. Basket.
K6(f>ivos, a travelling basket (Matt. xiv. 20) : o-irvpis, a large hamper used for
storage (Matt. xv. t,"] ; Acts ix. 25). The two miracles of feeding are distinguished
in all the accounts by the diflferent word used for basket in each (see Matt,
xvi. 9, 10),
70. Net.
S^KTvov, a net, in general ; dfi.<}>ipXTi<rTpov, a fishing-net flung from the hand
(Matt. iv. 18 ; Mark i. 16) ; o-a^iivTi (Matt. xiii. 47), a large draw-net, "seine."
73. People.
Four words are so translated : Xaos, people, collectively, with a general reference
to the Jews as the people of God ; ^9vos, nation (plur. , ^dvr], Gentiles) ; Stj^ios, people,
as a municipality ; 6xXos, "irregular crowd, mob."
74. Thief.
KX^irrqs, "thief," one by fraud (liSbt. far) \r\<rrr\ij " robber." one who
who steals ;
steals by violence (Lat. latro). The crucified malefactor and Barabbas probably
belonged to the hordes of banditti which then ravaged the land.
75. Stone.
ircVpa, a rock (Ilerpos, the same word, only with masc. termination to make it a.
proper name), Lat. saxam ; XC6os, a stone, detached or hewn, Lat. lapis.
76. Other.
dXXos denotes numerical, ^repos generic distinction, " diflferent." See Gal. i. 6, 7,
" another (e'repof) gospel which is not another (ctXXo)." There may be various
to
kinds of so-called gospels, but there is really no other than that which the apostle
preached.
VOCABULAEY.
In the following Vocabulary, the Declension of Siibstantwef^ is marked
by the subjoined Genitive termination ; theu* Gender, by the Article.
To Verbs, the Future endings, and, where, necessary, other forms, have
The Hyphen has been freely used, to indicate the formation, not only
all the passages are quoted where the word is to be found, and this
389
VOCABULARY.
A, a, dX(|>a, alpha; a, the first letter. aYaOds, 77, bv {Kpdacujv, KpaTCffTOs), good,
Numerally, a'=i a,=: looo. For ; intrinsically or beneficially used oi ;
^
(W. H.).* God's messengers to men, angel. So
OYaOo-Troieo), €>, (i) to do good to, ace. of fallen spirits. "Angel
of a church"
of pers., Luke vi. 33 (2) to act ivcll. ;
(Rev. i. 20, ii., iii.), either messenger,
aYaBo-iroita, as, rj, iccll-doing, in sense or elder, or a symbolic representation
(2) of preceding, i Pet. iv. 19.* of the spirit, the genius of each church.
d'yaOo-iroids, ov, 6 (orig. adj.), well-doer, dy/os, ous, To^ vessel^ Matt. xiii. 48
I Pet. ii. 14.* (W. H.).*
390 VOCABULARY. \A.yt — a"Y«v
aye, adv. (see 070;), come now, go to, dYvwo-ia, as, 7), ignorance, spec, wilful
James iv. 13, v. i.* ignorance, i Cor. xv. 34 i Pet. ;
ayiaXoi, <tu) (see dyLos), to set apart from forum, or place of public assemblies,
common use. Hence, to hallow, or trials, etc., Acts xvi. 19.*
regard with religious reverence to ; d-Yopd^co, 0-07, to purclmse, buy, with gen.
consecrate to religious service, whe- of price, Mark vi. '^y, or tx. Matt,
ther persons or things to cleanse ; xxvii. once iv. Rev.
7, v. 9 ; fig. to
for such consecration ; so to purify, redeem, ransom.
sanctify, oi ayia^ofievoi, those who are d^opaios, ov, adj., belonging to the forum;
being sanctified ; oi riyLaafiivoi, those hence {ryxipai.) court days, Acts xix.
7vho are sanctified. 38 {avdpu)7roL) idlers,
; of the rabble
d'yiao-^jLoSi ov, 6, sanctificatioii, holiness. (R.V.), xvii. 5.*
^yios, a, ou, set apart frovi common use, d-ypa, as, 77 (hunting), fishing, draught,
spec, to the service of God licnce, ; Luke v. 4, 9.*
hallowed, worthy of veneration, holy, d-Ypdiip-aros, ov, adj., unlearned, i.e. in
consecrated, whether persons, places, Rabbinical lore, Acts i v. 13.*
or things, oi ay loi,
'^
the Saints ;" to d-yp-avXew, cD, to remain in the fields,
ayiov, the Temple; to. dyia, the Sanc- Luke ii. 8.*
tuary; ayia aylwv, the Holy of Holies ; d^pcvb), (Tu) (to take in hunting), fig. to
irvevfia dyiov, the Holy Spirit. ensnare, Mark xii. 13.*
d-yioTps, rriTos, i], holiness, Heb. xii. 10 ;
d'Ypi-cXaios, ov, b, wild olive, oleaster,
2 Cor. i. 12 (W. H.).* Rom. xi. 17, 24.*
iCfyiuxrvvT], t/s, ij, holiness, Rom. i. 4 d-ypios, ia, lov, ivild, of honey, Matt. iii.
*
2 Cor. vii.Thess. iii. 1 3.
I ; i 4 ; Mark i. 6 ; of waves, Jude 13.*
jx-yKaXr], t;?, 17, the (curve of the) arm, 'A-yptinras, a, 6, Agrippa, i.e., Herod
only plur. Luke ii. 28.* , Agrippa ir. Sec 'Hp<{;377s.
d-yKto-Tpov, 01', TO, fishhook. Matt, xvii.27.* d^pds, ov, 6, field, spec, tlie country
d^Kvpa, as, i), an anchor. plur., country districts, luimlets.
.d-'yva(t>os, 01', adj. (not fulled or dressed), d"YpvTrv€&), w (uTTi'os), "to be sleepless ;"
?ic2(;,of cloth, Matt. ix. 16 Mark ii. 21.* ; hence, met., to watch, to be vigilant,
ofyvcia, ay, fj,2nirity, i.e., chastity, i Tim. ]\Iark xiii. 33 : Luke xxi. 36 ; Eph.
iv. 12, V. 2.* vi. 18 Heb. xiii. 17.*
;
d-yvC^o), (Tw, to cleanse, purify ; lit. as dYpvirvia, as, 77, watching, i.e., assiduous
John xi. 55 ; fig. as James iv. 8. care, 2 Cor. vi. 5, xi. 27.*
dYVio-^ds, ov, 6, ceremonial purification. &yo>, Iw, 2 a., -rjyayov, trans., to lead,
Acts xxi. 26.* bring; with (ace), ^'ws, ei's, of
Trpos
d-'yvoe'd), Q, qau} (cf yiypuxxKU}), (i) not to destination ; with iiri (ace), of pur-
know, ignorant {ayvodv, ignorant;
to be pose, as Acts viii. 32 to bring before, ;
dyi/oovfj.evos, unknown personally. Gal. for trial.Acts xxv. 17. Also to spend,
i. 22 ignored, disesteemed, 2 Cor. vi.
; as of time to keep, as a particular day,
;
perhaps Acts xiii. 27 i Cor. xiv. 38. ; 21 (impers.). Fig., to lead the inclina-
dYvd-qpa, aTos, to, a sin of ignorance, tion, induce. 5lid., to go, depart;
error, Heb. ix. 7.* intrans. imper., ^7^, come! subj..
&.yvoKa., aj, 17, ignorance, Acts iii. 17, dyw/xev, let us go! the former being
xvii. 30; Kph. Pet. i. 14.* iv. 18; i used as an adverb.
aYyds, 77, bv, pure, chaste; adv., -ws, Phil. cLytay-f], ijs, 77 (d')a>), manner of life, 2 Tim.
d-yvdriis, T7;ror, 7), imrity. 2 Coi'. vi. 6, ayuiv, Cbvos, contest, conflict : fig., of the
xi. 3 (W. ][.).* Christian life, as Heb. xii. i..
—
d-ywvia, as, -q, contest; emphatically, nature are deceitful, transitorv. Syn.
agony, Luke xxii. 44.* 22.
d^uvttofiai, to strive, as in the public d-8iKos, ov,wicked generally,
unjust,
games to contend with an adversary
; ;
opposed to as Matt. v. 45, or
diKaios,
fig., of Chiistian effort and endurance, to evae^Tjs, as 2 Pet. ii. 9 adv., -ws, ;
d8eX<|>r|, Tjs, 77, a sister, (i) lit., (2) fig. of d-8oXos, ov, without fraud, genuine,
Christian friendship. 1 Pet. ii. 2.*
d8€X<|>os, ov, 6, a brother, (i) lit. (see 'A8pa|xvTTT]vos, 17, ov, of Adramyttium,
§ 256), (2) of more general relations, an ^olian seaport. Acts xx^'ii. 2.*
«. felloto-IsraeUtc, Matt. v. 47 ft ;
'A8pias, a, 6, the Adriatic, embracing
fellow-Christian, Matt, xxiii. 8 « ; the Ionian sea. Acts xxvii. 27.*
fclloio-man, ^latt. v. 22-24 ; also ex- d8p6TT]s, TTjros, 77, largeness, abundance,
pressing the relation between Christ 2 Cor. viii. 20.*
and believers, Matt. xxv. 40. The d-8vvaT€a>, Q, to he impossible, with dat.
"brethren of Christ" (Matt. xiii. 55 ;
of pers., Matt.
or Trapd xvii. 20 ;
are thought by some to have been His d-8vvaTOs, ov, adj,, (i) of persons, act,.
cousins or other near relatives. potvei'less ; (2) of things, pass., im-
d8€X<|>0TT)Si T7]Tos, 77, the brotherhood, i.e., possible, Rom. viii. 3.
the Christian community, i Pet. ii. 17, a8«, 9<rw (contr. from deido)), to sing,
V. 9.* with cognate ace, (fidriv, a song. Rev.
&-8t}\os, ov, not manifest, uncertain., V. 9, xiv. 3, XV. 3 with dat. to sitig ; ,
Luke xi. 44; i Cor. xiv. 8* adv., -ws, ; (praise) Eph. v. 19; Col, iii. 16.*
^0,
uncertainly, i Cor. ix. 26.* OLiCf adv., ahcays ; of continuous time,
d-8Ti\6TT]s, TrjTos, uncertainty, i Tim, unceasingly ; of successive intervals,
vi. 17.* from time to time, on every occasion.
d8i]|iove(D, cD, to he sorely troubled. d€Tos, ov, 6, an eagle, gen. bird of prey,
q,8T]s, 01', and hd- in Idelv), the
6 (d priv. as Matt. xxiv. 28(R.y. n\A\g., vultures).
invisible icorld, HaAes ; fig. of deep d-^v|xos, ov, unleavened, only in plur., se.
degradation, Matt. xi. 23. Syn. 54, Xdyava, cakes, or dproi, loaves; met.,
and TTvXr). the 2)ascJial feast ; fig., incorrupt, sin-
d-8id-KpiTos, 01', either act., not distin- cere, I Cor. V. 7, 8.
guishing, impartial (A.Y,), or pass., *A^«p, 6 (Heb.), Azor, Ma,tt. i. 13, 14;
not distinguishable, unamhiguous, vith- not mentioned in O.T.*
out variance (R.V.), James iii. 17.* "A^wTos, 01', 77, Azotus or Ashdod, Acts
d-8id-Xei'TrTos, ov, 2cithout intermission, viii. 40.*
unceasing; adv., -ws, unceasingly. dTJp, depos, 77, the air, atmosphere ; in
d-8i,a-<|>6op(!a, a?, r,, uncorruptness, purity, Eph. ii. 2, the power of the air (efou-
Tit. ii. 7 (not W. H.).* o-i'a Tov depos) refers to supramundane
d8iK€a), Q}, rfcruj (ddiKos), intrans., to act poweis, not earthly and not heavenly.
unjustly, commit a crime; trans., to d-6avao-ia, as, t) (see ^^dj'oros), immor-
lorong, injure; lientx' to hurt, with- tality, I Cor. XV. 53,54; ITim. vi. 16.*
out any notion of wrong, Luke x. 19, d-Oep.iTos, ov {Se/jLis, laic), unlawful,
and Rev. often pass., to be luronged.
;
criminal, Acts x. 28 ; i Pet. iv, 3.*
d8(KT](j.a, aros, to, a wrong. d-9€os, 01', without (rod, Eph. ii. 12.*
d8iKCa, as, 7), icrong (towards man or d-dco-jjios, 01', adj. (OecTfios, statute), law-
Goil), injustice, iniquity, unrighteous- less, 2 Pet. ii. 7, iii. 17.*
ness, wickedness. In Luke xvi. 9, d-OeWo), w, 770-w (^e- as in TidTjfjn), to sei
"the mammon of unrighteousness" at nought, i.e., persons, to despise,
(d5t/ctas) denotes riches, wliicli in their slight ; or things^ to nullify, contemn.
392 VOCABULARY. [d-6^Trjo-is — al4»v{8ios
tion^ Heb. vii. 18, ix. 26.* party, party spirit, " heresy."
*A0f]vai, Cjv, at, Athens. alpcT^^o), (TO), to choose. Matt. xii. 18.*
'AGi^vaios, a, ov, AtJicnian, Acts xvii. 21. aipcTiKos, ov, 6, one who acts from party
ddX^o), cD (a^Xov, prize), to contend in the spirit, a factious person, " heretic,"
public games, 2 Tim. ii. 5.* Tit. iii. 10.*
d9X7)o-ts, ecus, -q, contest, as in tlie public aipeo) (irreg., § 103, i), to take, only in
games; only fig. Heb. x. 32.* mid. in N.T., to choose, prrefer.
dOpoi^o),, gather together, Luke xxiv. 33 al'pw (§ 92), (i) to take up, lift, carry,
(W. H.).* used of carrying the cross, lit., Matt,
d-9ujjL€a), a), to lose heart, despond, Col. xxvii. 32 fig. Matt. xvi. 24 so of
; , ;
with airb, of the crime, ver. 24. * gate a. \au\x, to remove by death; imp.,
ai^fios, 77, 01/ (al^, gfoa^), o/" or belonging afpe, d,pov, Away
with! i.e., to execu-
to a goat, Heb. xi. 37.* tion ;
take away sin, of the
(3) to
al-yiaXos, ov, 6, the shore, beach ; in Gos- redeeming work of Christ, John i. 29 ;
ship ; (6) in Acts ii. 20, etc., the re- mid., to ask for ones self, beg. Syn.
ference is to the colour of blood. 9, 38.
aijiaT-€K-xv(ria, as, ri, shedding of blood, al'TT]|xa, aros, t6, petition, request.
Heb. ix. 22.* alrCa, as, 77, cause, (i) as the reason or
ai(j.oppoe(o, have a flux or issue of
cD, to ground of anything ; (2) inMatt. xix.
blood. Matt. ix. 20.* 10, the state of the case; (3) forensically,
*
Alve'as, a, 6, ^neas. Acts ix. 33, 34. an accusation, a fault.
al!v€o-is, ^(jos, 7), praise, Heb. xiii. 15.* a'lTtafia, aros, to, accusation, charge.
alv€(», Co, ^auiand 770-0), to praise, only of Acts XXV. 7. (W. H. read
alTiwfia.)*
God. Syn. 47. allrios, ta, lov, causative of, used as subst.,
atvi"yfia, aros, t6,obscure intimation, an in masc, tlic cause, author, only Heb.
enigma, riddle, Cor. xiii. 12.* i V. 9 ;in neut., a caitsc, reason, espec.
atvos, 01;, 6, jiraise, only of God. 0/ punishment ; a fault, like am'a.
Alv<iv, -q (Heb.), ^non, John iii. 23.* aiTiw|xa. See alria/j-a.*
aXp€o-i5, ews, 77 (a'pej/uat), choice, its act al<|)vC8ios, ov, uneipedcd, sudden.
; ;
aX\\i-a\(i>aria., as, 17, captivity, Rev. xiii. dKavGivos, ov, made of thorns, Mark xv.
10 ;met., a captivity, i.e., a multitude 17 John xix. 5.*
;
to Christ, Eph. ii. 20; i Pet. ii. 6.* dX-qOVjs, e's (d, \ad- in Xavddvw), uncon-
oiKpo-OiVkOv, iov, TO, frstfruits, i.e., the cealed, true, valid, s^crc, sincere, iiprigM^
hest of the pioduce, applied (plur.) just. Syn. 24 for comparison ^nth
to spoils taken in l)attle, Heb. vii. 4.* following. -cDs, adv., truly ; in truUt,,
d-Kvpoo), cD, to deprire of power, set aside John i. 9 ; with the typical, as John
(a law). Matt. xv. 6 ; Mark vii. 13 ;
vi. 32 ; Heb. viii. 2, ix. 24. Syn.
Gal. iii. 17. 24.
d-Ka>\vT<DS,adv., freely, without hin- dXrjOo), rjao}, to grind with a handmill.
drance. Acts xxviii. 31.* dXUvs, eojs, 6, a fisherman.
dKwv, ovaa, ov (d, eKfav), unwilling, dXk€Vb>, evau), to fish, John xxi. 3.*
1 Cor. ix. 17.* dXC^o), iaoj, to salt.
dXdpao-Tpov, ov, to, aJabaster, a vessel dXi<ryr]}j,a, aros, to, 2>ollution, Acts xv.
for perfume, Matt. xxvi. 7 Mark ;
20.*"
dXXopiai (<lep. ), a\ov/xai, i]\dixr]v , to leap d|xdpTi]^a, aros, to, a sin, error, offence.
up, leap. Acts lo to babble
iii. 8, xiv. ; dfJiapr^a, as, t), (l) sin, as a quality of
up, as water, John iv, 14.* . actions or a principle of human nature ;
dXXos, 1), 0, other, different, another ; oi (2) a sin, sing., as Acts vii. 60 ; plur.
aWoi, the otJiers, tlie rest. Syn. 76. (more freq.), spec, in the phrase
-ws, adv., otlicrwisc, i Tim. v. 25.* cKpievai rds a/jLaprlas, to forgive sins.
aXXoTpio-cirio-Koiros, ov, 6, one who looks In Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, irepi dfiaprias is
at or busies hiinself in the things of sin-offering.
another, a busi/bod//, i Pet. iv. 15. d-fidpTvpos, ov, icithout witness. Acts
(W. H., dWoTpieiriaKOTTOS.)* xiv. 17.*
dXXoTpioSi ia, lov, belonging to another, dfJLapTwXds, ov, {1) sinful, espec. habitu-
fcrreign, strange, alien ; not of one's oicn ally and notoriously (2) often used ;
name are mentioned, ^lark ii. 14 ; d-peTa-)icXT]Tos, ov, adj., not to be re-
Mark xv. 4 (the latter being called gretted or repented of; hence un-
KXwTrds, John xix. 25 ; another form cheingeablc, Rom. xi. 29 ; 2 Cor. vii.
of the orig. Hebrew name).* 10.*
&Xo>v, wvos, 6, 7], a thresh ing-fioar ; met., d-pera-vd-riTos, ov, adj., unrepentant,
the corn of the threshing -floor. impenitent, Rom. ii. 5.*
dX<&irr]5, (Kos, ij, afox; applied to Herod, d-pcrpos, ov, beyond measure, immoderate,
Luke xiii. 32. 2 Cor. X. 13, 15.*
dXuo-ks, ews, 17, « taking or catching, dpT|v, Amen, a Hebrew adjective, true,
2 Pet. ii. 12.* faithful, used (i) as an adverb, at the
&\ux, adv., at the same time, with or beginning of a sentence, verily, truly,
together with {d&t.) d/ia irpcSC, with the ; indeed ; (2) at the end of ascriptions
dawn, ^latt. xx. i. of praise, etc., optatively, as 7eVotTo, .so
d-}ia9T|s, «, unlearned, rude, 2 Pet. he it; (3) substantively, 2 Cor. i. 20,
iii. 16.* as a name of Christ, the Amen, the
d-)JLapdvTkvos, 01'. adj. (jiapaivofxai), un- faithful witness, Rev. iii. 14.
fading, I Pet. V. 4.* d-pT)T(i>p, opos, 6, 7} (firirrip), icithout
d>(JMipavTos, 01', adj., unfading, i Pet. mother, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb.
.
^-
V
dp-aprdvu, Tri<ru>, to miss a mark, to err,
vii. 3.*
d-pCavTOSf 01' {inalvw), undefiled, sincere,
to sin; with cogn. ace, afiapriav, to pure.
sin a sin, i John v. 16 ; with eis, to 'ApivaSdp, 6 (Heb.), Jminadab, Afatt.
*
sin against. Syn. 39. i. 4 ; Luke iii, 33.
396 VOCABULARY. [&)ji|jLos — ava0€fJLaTt^w M
d|x|JLOs, ov, T), sand, as of the sliore. in "W. H.), Matt, xxvii. 46, Markxv. 8,
djJLvds, ov, 6, a lamb ; fig. , of Christ, Luke ix. 38.*
John i. 29, 36 ; Acts viii. 32 ; i Pet. dva-PoXr), rjs, 77, putting off, delay, Acts
i. 19.* xxv. 17.*
a\Loi.^r], -^s, 7] (dyttet'/Sw), requital, i Tim. dvd^aiov, 01', to, ui^jjcr room, W. H. in
V. 4.* Mark xiv. 15 ; Luke xxii. 12, for Rec.
dixireXos, 01', 17, a vhie, (l) lit. ; (2) fig., avwyeov.*
as John xv. i. dv-ayycXXw, to tell, to declare openly, to
dinreX-ovp-yoSi ov, 6, rj, a vine-dresser, show forth, confess, foretell.
*
Luke xiii. 7.* dva-"Y€vvdcD, w, to beget again, i Pet. 1. 3, 23.
djjLTTcXwv, a vineyard.
Cjvo'i, 6, dva-"yiv«<rK(»), to know again, to know well.
'AjiirXCas, iov, 6, Amplias, Rom. xvi. 8.
*
N.T., to read.
d|xvv6>, tD, only in mid., N.T., to defend, dva-yKa^o), dcrw, to force, to compel by-
assist. Acts vii. 24.* force or persuasion.
d)JL(l>idt(D, clothe, Luke xii. 28 (W. H.).* dva-yKaios, aia, atov, necessary, fit, ser-
d)i<)>t.pdXX(i), cast around, Mark i, 16 viceable ; also close or near, as friends.
^
(W. H.).* Acts X. 24.
d(jL(j>^pXT](rTpov, ov, TO, a fishing net. dva-yKao-Tois, adv., necessarily or by con-
djt<}>i-€'vwfi,i, eo-w, to put on, as a garment straint, I Pet. V. 2.*
to clothe, adorn. dva-yKt], 77J, 7], (
I ) tiecessity, constraint
'Ajwj>t'7roXis, ews, Amphipolis, a city in rj, followed by inf. (with €<jtl understood),
the S. of Macedonia, Acts xvii, i.* there is need to ; (2) distress.
d}i4>-o8ov, OV, n., a place ivhere tivo ivays dva-"yv4Dpit<«>, to make known, aor. pass.,
*
meet, a street, Mark xi. 4. Acts vii. 13.*
d(j.(|>dTcpoi, ai, a, both. dvd-TVftxrts, ews, rj, reading, whether
d-|x(6|XT]Tos, ov, ivithout blame or fault, private or public*
Phil. ii. 15 (W. H., dfiefxirroL) ; 2 Pet. dv-d-yw, to bring, lead, or take up ; to
iii. 14.* offer up, as sacrifices ; pass., to put to
&\i(i)[i.ov, OV, t6, a spice plant. Rev. xviii. 13. sea, to set sail.
without spot ; fig., blameless.
&-[ia)p.os, ov, dva-8e£Kvv|j.i, toshow, as by uplifting, to
'Afiwv, 6 (Heb.), Amon, JMatt. i. 10.* shoiv plainly, Acts i. 24 ; to appoint,
'AjjLws, 6 (Heb.), Amos, Luke iii. 25.* Luke X. I.*
dv, a particle, expressing j^ossibility, dvd-Sei^is, eojs, 17, a showing or public
uncertainty, or conditioncdity See . a2^pearance, Luke i. 80.*
§§ 378, b, 380, 383, 5. dva-8ex,op.ai, dep., to receive with a wel-
dvd, prep. lit. iipon ; in composition,
, , come, .guests, Acts xxviii. 7 ;
promises,
U2), again. See §§ 297 and 147, a. Heb. xi. 17.*
dva-Pa0|ids, oO, 6 (^aivco), means of ascent, dva-8i8cD|ii, to give up, deliver, as by
*
steps, stairs. Acts xxi. 35, 40.* messengers, Acts xxiii. 33.
ava-^aCvd), ^rjaofxai., 2 a. dve^rjv, (1) to dva-^dti), w, to live again, revive (AV. H.
ascend, espec. to Jerusalem, on board only in Rom. vii. 9, and doubtfully
ship (John xxi. 3), to heaven ; (2) to Luke XV. 24).
spring up, as plants, etc., used of a avai-Xi]Ti<», Q, to seek with diligence.
rumour. Acts xxi. 31 ; of thoughts dva-twvvvfjLi, to gird or bind up, as a
coming into mind, Luke xxiv. 38. loose dress is girded about the loins ;
dva-pdXX<i>, mid., to postpoiic, defer, Acts mid. fig., I Pet. i. 13.*
xxiv. 22.* dva-twirupco), Q {irvp), to re-kindle or
dva-Pipdtcj, to draw up, as a net to shore. 7-ousc up ; fig., 2 Tim. i. 6.*
Matt. xiii. 48.* dva-0dXX«, to thrive or flourish again,
dva-pXcirco, {i) to look up, as Mark viii. 24 Pliil. iv. 10.*
(2) to look again, to recover sight, as dvd-Ocfia, arcs, rb, a person or thing
Matt. xi. 5. accursed, an execration or curse. Later
dvd-pX€\|/ts, €cos, rj, recovery of sight, form for dvadij/jia (which see).
Luke iv. 18.* a.vaQi\i.ariX,<a, law, to bind bya curse, to
dva-Pod«), w, to exclaim, cry aloud (not declare on pain of being an anafhnna.
, ) ;
dvaip^o-is, ews, -q, a taking aivay, i.e., by from her moorings, deimrture, 2 Tim.
a violent death, Acts viii. i.* iv. 6.*
dv-aCp€(D, Q (see § 103, i), to take away, dva-Xvo), to depart, Phil. i. 23 ; to
to abolish, to take off, to kill; mid., return, Luke 36.* xii.
to take up, Acts vii. 21. dv-a|i,dpTr]Tos, ov, without blame, fault-
dv-aCrios, ov, guiltless. Matt. xii. 5, 7.* less, John viii. 7 (W. H. omit).*
dva-(rTpo4>"<i, tjs, 77, bdaivionr, 'manner (ff empty doctrines, Eph. iv. 14,
lifr. dv-e'v8€KTOs, ov (ej/S^xoM***)) iidj., impos-
dva-Td<r(ro|iai, to dnrw up a nanativc sible, Luke xvii. i.*
(R.y.), Luke i. I.* dv-€^-€p€vvT^TOS (W. H., -pai'/-), ov, adj.,
dva-T€X\«, spring up or rise, as the
to inseruf<(blr, Rom. 33.*
xi.
sun, a star, a cloud of the Messiah, ; dvc^i-KaKOS, ov, jtatient of injury, 2 Tim.
Heb. vii. 14 trans., to cause to rise.
; ii. 24.*
dvd-xvo-is» fws, 17, a pouring out ; hence av-i\<a, mid., to bear wiOi, forbear, have
excess, i Pet. iv. 4.* pdlirnce u'ifh, endure ; gen. of pcrs. or
dva-\<t>p€(i>, (i, to depart, wilhdrnu\ tbing.
dvd-fj/v|ks> ews, i}, rcfreskmcnt. Acts dvc\(fi($S) ov, 6, a nephew. Col. iv. 10.*
iii. 20.* dvT)6ov, ov^ t6, anise, dill, Matt, xxiii. 23.*
^: '
dv^KCi, impels., it is Jit or jn'oper ; part., d-vo^ia, as, t), transgression of law, lav}-
TO dfTjKOv, TO. avrfKOvra, the beco/iii/Hf. lessness.
dv-'f|^€pos, ov, atlj., not gentle, Jierce, d-vofios, 01', not subject
(i) without lav:,
2 Tim. iii. 3.* X\> the law, 21 I met. ofCor. ix. :
(^Lat., vie); hence (2) a husbnnd; "malefactor. 6 &vo/j.os, the bnrless mie,
(3) ^ person generally i)lur. voc, ; 2 Tliess. ii. 8. Adv., -ws, vithoiU
&v8p€i, Sirs ! often in apposition Avitli law, Rom, ii. 12.
adjeetivesand nouns, a,sdvTjp d/xapruiXos dv-op6o<i>, d), to make upright or straight
dvrip 'irpo(pr]Tr)s. Syn, 63. iigaiii, to relndld, make strong, Luke
dv6-i<m]fjLi, to oppose, vitli stand., resist, xiii. 13 Acts xv. 16; Heb. xii. 12.*
:
thanks to, dat., Luke ii. 38.* dvoxT|, ^s, -q, forbearance, patience, Rom.
&v6os, oi's, TO, a flower. ii. 4, iii. 25.*
dvOpaKid, as, t), a. heap of live coals, dvT-a"y«vitojjLai, to resist, strive against^
.Tohn xviii. 18, xxi. 9.* Heb. xii. 4.*
dvdpa|, a/vos, 6, a coal, Rom. xii. 20.* dvT-dXXa"Y|xa, aros, to, an equivalent,
dvOpwir-dpccTKOS} ov, desirous of pleasing price, ^latr. xvi. 26 ; Mark viii. 37.*
'nun, Ei>h. vi. 6, Col. iii. 22.* dvT-ava-irXiipoti), u), to make good by sup-
dv6pwirivoS| Iv-q, LVOV, human, belonging plying dfliciency, Col. i. 24.*
to J7U1/t. dvT-airo-SiSwfii, to recompense, requite.
dvOpwiro-KTovos, ov, 6, i], a iMmicide, a din'-a'ir6-8o|xa. aros, to, a recomjience,
mv.rdj'n'r, John viii. 44 ; i John iii. r>qu it'll, Luke xiv. 12 : Rom. xi. 9.*
15.* dvT-airo-Soo-ts, ews, ij. a reward, recmn,-
dv6p(i)iros, 01', one of tin
m., a man, pence. Cul. iii. 24.*
human race. Like
joined in ap- dvT)p, dvT-aTTo-Kpivo^ai, to reply against, con-
position Avith substantives, as Matt, tradict. Luke xiv. 6 ; Rom. ix. 20.*
xviii. 23, xxi. 33. Syn. 63. dvT-€iirov loused as 2 aor. of dvTiKiyu}, see
dv6-viraT€v«, to be j/roronsul, Aets xviii. (piyju), to ccrntradict, to gainsay, Luke
12 (not AV. H.).* xxi. 15 Acts iv. 14.*
;
dvTi-X-qxj/ts (W. H., -X-qfixp-), ew5, help; prepp. awo, ck, from the top, as Mark
hence, concrete, a helper, i Cor. xii. XV. 38 John xix. 23 (2) of time,
;
;
^
28.* frcnn the frst, only Luke i. 3 ; Acts
dvTu-Xo'yCa, ay, r], contradiction, cmiten- xxvi. 5. In John iii. 4, 7, again (see
tion, reproach. Gal. iv. 9) ; or, perhaps here also,
avTi-XoiSopeo), to revile or reproach again, from above.
1 Pet. ii. 23.* dvcDTcpiKos, T), ov, uppcr, higher. Acts
dvT£-XvTpov,ov, TO, a ransom-price, 1 Tim. xix. I.*
ii. 16.* dvwT€pos, a, ov (compar. of &vio only ;
I 21.*
Pet. iii. 20 Luke v. 35.*
;
*AvTi-xpi<rTos, ov, m., opposer of Christ, dir-aiT6to), to ask back, require, reclaim,
Antichrist, 1 John ii. 18, 22, iv. 3 ; 2 Luke vi. 30, xii, 20.*
*
John vii. dTT-aX-yeft), to be past feeling, Eph. iv. 19.*
dvrXe'a), a), to draiv from a vessel, John dir-aXXd<ro-«, mid., to remove oneself
8, 9, iv. 7, 15.*
ii. from, to depart ; pass. , to be set free
AvrX-pfia, aros, to, a bucket, John iv. II.* (with diro).
dvT-o4>8aX[jL€'<«), cD, tolook in the face ; so dir-aXXoTpioo), to estrange, alienate (gen.),
to meet the ivind, Acts xxvii. 15.* Eph. ii. 12, iv. 18 Col. i. 21.* ;
dvoj, heaven or heavenly things, as John d-irapd-PccTos, adj., not passing from, one
viii. 23. to anofh^er,not transient, unchangccible,
dvu-ycov, ov, t6, an upper chamber. See Heb. 24.* vii.
dvdyaiov.* d-Trapa-o-Kevatrros, ov, adj., unprepared^
dv<»6cv,adv. i&vio), (i) of place, from 2 Cor. ix. 4.*
above, as John iii. 31, xix. 11 ; with dTT-apv^lJiai, ovfxai, to deny, disown.
) ;
father, i.e., in the genealogies, Heb. mid., to abstain from (gen., or dTro).
vii. 3.* dirwrrcw, Q, to disbelieve (dat.) ; to be un-
dir-avryao-^a, aros, to, reflected, splendour, faithful.
effulgence, Heb. i. 3.* oirwrTCa, as, i), unbelief, distrust^ a state
dir-€i8ov(W. H.,a0et6oj'),2aor. of d^opdw, of unbelief, i Tim. i. 13; renuTunation
which see. offaith, apostasy, Heb. iii. 12, 19.
d-ireiOcia, as, i], irilful unbelief, obstiiuicy, d-irioTTOs, ov, not believing, incredulous
disobedience. hence an unbeliever o\ infidel, faithless,
CLtriiQioi, refuse belief, be disobedient.
u), to perfidious ; pass., incredible, only Acts
d-Trci9T|s, es, unbelieving, disobedient. xxvi. 8.
dirciXio), w, rjffo}, to threaten, forbid by d-irXdoS} ovs, rj, ovv, simple, sound. Matt,
threatening, rebuke. Acts iv. 17 i ; vi. 22 Luke xi. 34.* Adv., -ws,
;
d-irc£pa<rTOS, ov, adj., inca.pable of beirig to turn out, result, Luke xxi. 13 ;
tempted, James
13.* i. Phil. i. 19.*
&-ir€4>os, ov, inexperienced,
adj., un- diro-^aXXo), to throw avmy, Mark x. 50 ;
off,renouiwing, Col. ii. ii.* diro-PoXT|, -^s, rj, a casting away, rejection,
dir-cXavvo), to drive away. Acts xviii. 16.* loss, Acts xxvii. 22 ; Rom. xi. 15.*
*
dir-cXe-yjJK^s, ov, 6 (eXeTxw), refutation, diro-'y£vop.ai, to die, i Pet. ii. 24.
disgrace, disrepute, scorn. Acts xix. 27. * OLiro-ypa^i], rjs, t), a record, register^ en-
dir-cXcvOcpos, ov, 6, 77, made free, i Cor. rolment, Luke v. 37.*ii. 2 ; Acts
vii. 22.* in a register,
diro--Ypd(}>a>, to enrol, inscribe
'AircXXfis, ov, 6, Apelles, Rom. xvi. 10.* Luke ii. i, 3, 5 Heb. xii. 23.* ;
dir-cXirf^ci), cw, Iaj de.sj/air, Luke vi. 35 ; diro-8eiKW|j.i,, to sJimv by proof demon-
A. v., "hoping for nothing again ;" strate, set forth.
R.V. better, "never despairing" (see dird-8ei4kS, ews, ij, demonstration^ proof,
R.Y. marg.).* I Cor. ii. 4.*
D D
402 VOCABULARY. [dTro-8€KaT<J« — diro-Xiuft)
diro-8€KaT(J«, a), (i) to pay the tenth or dTTO-KXcCo), to shut close, as a door, Luke
tithe ; (2) to levy tithes on, ace. xiii. 25.*
diro-8€KTOs, ov, verbal adj., acceptable, diro-KiJiTTw, to smite or cut of; mid.,
I Tim. ii, 3, v. 4.* Gal. V. 12 (see R.V.).
diro-Se'xoiJLat, to receive with pleasure, to . diro-Kpi^a, aros, t6, an answer (perhaps
icelcome. sentence), 2 Cor, i. 9.*
diro-8T]p,€a), Q), to go from one' s own people, diro-KpivofJiai (for aor., see § 100), to
to go into another country ; only in the answer; often used (like the cor-
parables of our Lord, as Matt. xxi. 33 responding Hebrew verb) where the
Luke XV. 13. " answer" is not to a distinct question,
diro-Siiiios, ov, goiu abroad, sojourning in but to some suggestion of the accom-
afar country (R.Y.), Mark xiii. 34.* panying circumstan-ces ; so especially
diro-8i5a)|it, to give from one's self, as in the phrase diroKpidds dwev, an-
due, or as reward or testimony ; to give swered and said, as ISIatt. xi. 25 ;
diro-vtirra), mid., to icash oneself, Matt, Matt. xx\'i. 52; mid., to desert, rejeety
xxvii. 24.* ace.
diro-iri'Trrft), to fall from. Acts ix. 24.* diro-cmryca), u), to detest, to abhor, Rom.
diro-irXavdft), w, to lead astray, Mark xii. 9.*
xiii. 22; I Tim. vi. 10.* diro-o-uvdYw-yos, ov, excluded from the
diro-irX^u), evaoj, to sail away. SY'^agogue, excommunicated, John ix.
diro-irXvvw, to wash or riiise, as nets, 22, xii. 42, xvi, 2.*
Luke v. 2. (W. H., ttXi^j^w.)* diro-Td<r<ra),^w, mid., "to set oneself
diro-irvi'Ya), to suffocate, choke. Matt. xiii. apart from ;" to take leave of, renounce,
7 Luke viii. 7, 33. *
; scad away (dat. ).
d-Trop€«, cD (TTopos, resource), only mid. diro-TeXc«, tD, ecrw, to perfect, James i. 1 5 ;
where the supreme court was held dporpov, ov, rb, a plough, Luke ix. 62.*
Acts xvii. * ("Apeios is an adj. from dfyiraYH, ^s, (dpTrdfw), the act of plun-
"J?
iv. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.* dp^flt^os (W. H.. d/xi0os), ov, not seamed
*
(dprjv) gen., dpvdi, a Jamb, Luke x. 3.* »r scwUy John xix. 23.
-
, ,
author, captain, prince, Acts iii. 15, the west of Asia Minor afterwards
V. 31 Heb.; ii, lo, xii. 2.* called Proconsular Asia, with Ephesus
dpx-i«paTiK<Js, rji ov, belonging to the its capital.
officeof the high jy^'iest, pontifical. Acts 'Atriavos, ov, 6, belonging to Asia, Acts;
iv. 6.* XX. 4.*
406 VOCABULARY. [' Aorutpx'HS —avryd^d)
'Ao-idpxT]s, ov, 6, an Asiarch, one of ten d-<rv|x<|>'ovos, ov, dissonant, discordant.
appointed to preside over the worship Acts xxviii. 25.*
and celebrations in honour of the d-o-vv€Tos, ov, without understanding,
gods, Acts xix. 31.* foolish.
do-iT^a, as, 7) {alTos, corn), abstinence, a d-<rvv9€Tos, ov, covenant-breaking, treach-
fast, Acts xxvii. 21.* erous, Rom. i. 31.*
drriTOs, ov, fasting, Acts xxvii, 33.* do-<{>dX€ia, as, 77, security. Acts v. 23 ;
dirxco), w, -qau, to exercise onoself, exert 1 Thess. V. 3 ; certainty, Luke i. 4.*
Acts xxiv, 16.*
diligence in, d-<r4>aXT|s, ^s (o-^dXXw, fallo), firm, safe,
•drK^s, ov, 6, a bottle of skin. Matt. sure, Phil. iii. i Heb. vi. 19 certain,; ;
ix. 17; Mark ii. 22; Luke v. 37, Acts XXV. 26. rb dacpaXh, the cer-
38.* tainty. Acts xxi. 34, xxii. 30.* Adv.,
.
d-o-TaWuj, cD, Tycro;, to be unsettled, to have drcp, adv. as prep, with gen. without,
, ,
no fixed abode, i Cor. iv. 11.* in tJie absence of, Luke xxii. 6, 35. *
dcTcios, ov {6xxrv, city, of. urbane), fair, ar\.\iaX,<a, au, to dishonour, contemn,
*
beautiful, Acts vii. 20 ; Heb. xi.23. whether persons or things, by word
do-W|p, ^po^, 6, a star. or by deed.
d-(mr|piKTos, adj. {cT-qpl^oi), unsettled, dTi|j,{a, as, 77, dishonour, ignominy, dis-
unstable, 2 Pet. ii. 14, iii. 16.* grace, ignoble use.
d-o-TopYos, ov {(TTopyr}), without natural d-Tijios, ov {rifxr}), contemned, despised.
affection, Rom. i. 31 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3.* dTi|i6a), Q (or -dw, W. H. ), to dishonour,
•a-<rTO\^&), u) {<xt6xos), to miss in aim,
*
treat with indignity, Mark xii. 4.
swerve from, I Tim. i. 6, vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. drp-Cs, Ibos, 77, a vapour. Acts ii. 19,
ii. 18.* James iv. 14.
^
'do-Tpair/i, ris, -f), lightning, vivid bright- d-Tojiov, ov, rb {r^jJLvw), an atom of time,
ness, lustre. moincnt, i Cor. xv. 52.*
Ufrrpaino), to flash, as lightning, Luke d-Toiros, ov (rdTTos), misplaced, unbe-
xvii. 24 ; to be lustrous, xxiv. 4.* coming, mischievous.
ido-Tpov, ov, TO, a constellation, star. 'ArrdXcitt, as, 77, Attalia, Acts xiv. 25.
"Ao-v-yKpiTos, ov, 6, Asynerltus, Rom. atryd^o), to shine upon, to enlighten {da,t.),
xvi. 14.* 2 Cor. iv. 4.*
, )
avyfj, 17s, ?7, splendour^ daybreak, Acts exclude these forms from the N.T.,
XX. II,* everywhere reading avrov, avrcp, etc.
A^J^ovoTos, ou, 6 (Lat. ), Augustus^ Luke auTO-<|><i>pos, ov {(pwp, a thief), in the v&ry
ii. I .
* Compare ^e^aa-ros. act, John viii. 4, neut. dat. with iirl.
avdd8T]S, es {avTos, TJdo/xai), self-pleasing, See W. H.*
arrogant, Tit. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10.* avTo-x€ip, adj., with ones own hands,
avOaCpcTos, ou {avros, alpeofxac), of one's Acts xxvii. 19.*
own accord, 2 Cor. viii. 3, 17.* avx|AT)p6s, d, bv, dark, dismal, 2 Pet. i.
ov0€VT€w, tD, to exercise authority over 19.*
(gen.), I Tim. ii. 12.* take away, as Luke x. 42 ;
d(|>-aip€(i), to
avXc'ci), Q, Tjo-oi}, to play on a pipe or fute. to take aioay sin, only Rom. xi. 27 ;
avXrj, rjs, ?) (dw, <o hloiv), an open space, Heb. X. 4 ; ^0 smite off, as Matt. xxvi.
court or hall of a house, as Luke xi. 21, 51, and parallel passages.
xxii. 55 ; « sheepfold, John x, i, 16. d-<j>avT|s, ^s {(paivQ}), 7iot appearing, hidden,
avXTiTTJs, OX), 6, a player on a pipe or Heb. iv. 13.*
*
flute. Matt. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22. d-({>avit(D, to put out of sight, to disfigure.
avX^t^H''"-''' (^0 lodge in the open air,) to Matt. vi. 20; pass., to vanish,
16, 19,
lodge, take up a temporary abode, perish, Acts xiii. 41 James iv. 14.* ;
Matt. xxi. 17; Luke xxi. 37.* d-<|>avio-|x6s, ov, 6, a disajjpearing, Heb.
avXos, oxj, (dw), a flute, pipe, i Cor. viii. 13.*
xiv. 7.* d-<|)avTos, ov, disajjpearing, not seen,
av^dvcD (also aij^o)), av^-qcw, trans., to Luke xxiv. 31.*
make to grow, as i Cor. iii. 6, 7 ; pass. d(|>-€8pwv, G)vos, 6,
^^
draiight,'^ latrine,
to arrive at maturity ; generally in- Matt. XV. 17 ; Mark vii. 19.*
trans. to grow, increase, as Matt. vi. 28.
, d-<|>ei8ia, as, 7) {(peido/uLai), severity. Col.
a^^T](ris, ewj, 77, growth, increase, Eph. ii. 23.*
iv. 16 ; Col. ii. 19.* d<|>6XdTT]s, TTjTos, simjiUcity, sincerity.
*
ai;piov, adv. [aUpa, morning breeze, S.w), Acts 46.
ii.
to-morrow; 77 (sc, rjixipa) aHpiov, the d(j>-eo-is, ews, f (dcpiTjfxL), deliverance ; lit.,
morrow. only Luke elsewhere always of
iv. 18 ;
avtrrripos, d, 6v, (dry,) harsh, austere, deliverance from sin, remission, for-
.
a pers. pron., I myself, thou thyself; according to the obj. ; spec, to dis-
with the article, the same; the same regard, pass by, send away, divorce;
with (dat. ), I Cor. xi. 5. eirl to avro, hence (2) to forgive (dat. pers.), very
ai, the same place or time, together, /card often ; (3) to permit, concede, abs. or ,
avTov, ^s, ov, pron. reflex, (contr. for Luke vi. 42 (4) to leave ^ depart fromy
;
Gal. i. 15) ; <o excommunicctte, Luke B, p, PTJTa, beta, b, the second letter.
vi. 22. Numerally, ^ =2 j3,= 2000. ;
d4>-op|XTi, 17$, 7;, an occasion, opjmrt unity. BdoX, 6, Tj (Heb., blaster), Baal, chief
a^pLt^oi, to foam at tJie 'mouth, ]\Iark deity of the Phcenicians ; the Sun,
ix. 18, 20".* Rom. xi. 4 (fern.), from i Kings
d(f>pos, ov, 6, foam, froth, Luke ix. 39,* xix. 18.*
d-<^po<rvvTi, T}s, 77, foolishness, Mark vii. BaPvXwv, Babylon, lit.. Matt,
wvos, 77,
22 ; 2 Cor. xi. i, 17, 22.* i. II, 12, 17Acts vii. 43, and prob.
;
In I Cor. xiv. 10 the R.V. marg. is xxiv. 6p6pov padioi, in the early
I,
probably the correct rendering.* dawn (W. H., /Sa^^ws, adv., or perhaps
"Axat, 6 (Heb.), AcJmz, Matt. i. 9.* a genit. form).
'Axata, aj, 17, AcJuiia, the Roman pro- Batov, 01', Tb, branch, John xii. 13.*
vince of Greece, including Corinth BaXad^, 6 (Heb.), Balaam. name em- A
and its isthmus. blematic of seducing teachers, 2 Pet.
'AxaiiKos, ov, 6, Achaicus, i Cor. xvi. ii. 15 Jude ii Rev. ii. 14.*
; ;
pdiTTft), ^d\p(x}, to dip, dye, tinge, Luke Tov x/wo'ToD, tQv ovpavCbv (the last form
xvi. 24 ; John xiii. 26 ; Rev. xix. only in Matt.), the divine, spiritual
13.* kingdom, or reign of ^lessiah, in the
Bap-, an Aramtean prefix to many sur- world, in the individual, or in the
names, meaning son of. future state, vld ttjs (^aaiXeias, sons
Bap-appds, a, 6, Barabbas. Some of the kingdom, Jews, its original
ancient MSS, and other authorities possessors. Matt. viii. 12 ; true be-
give his name as Jesus (not W. H.). lievers. Matt. xiii. 38. Li Rev. i. 6,
BapaK, 6, Barak, Heb. xi. 32.* V. 10, for j3a(nXe7s /cai, "\Y. H. read
Bap-axicis, 01', 17, Barachias, Matt, ^aatXeiav, a kincjdom consisting of
xxiii. 35. Some think it a surname priests (R.Y.).
of Jehoiada, 2 Chron. xxiv. 20.* PacriXcios, ov, royal, regal, i Pet. ii. 9,
PdpPapos, ov, 6 (prob. onomatop., de- from Exod. xix. 6. to. ^aa-lXeia, as
scriptive of unintelligible sounds), .subst., a regal mansion, palace, Luke
properly adj., a foreigner, barbainan, vii. 25.*
as I Cor. xiv. 1 1 Pao-iXevs, ^ws, 6, a leader, ruler, king,
Pap«<i), w (cf. pdpos), in X.T. only pass. sometimes subordinate to higher
^apeofxai, ovfiai, to be weighM dou'n, authority, as the Herods. Applied
to be opjrressed, as by sleep, Luke to God, always with distinguishing
ix. 32; mental troubles, 2 Cor. i. 8, epithets, Matt. v. 35 i Tim. i. 17, ;
babble, talk to no pnirpose. Matt. vi. 7.* Jordan (?), John i. 28. See B77^a/3apa.
'
pSeXv'YHi<i, aros, to (cf. ^deXvaao}), some- Bt]0 co-8d, as, 77, Bcthesda, house of '
15 ; spec, (as often in O.T.) idolatry. Bii0-<rai8d, i}, Bethsaida, " house of
Rev. xvii. 4, 5, xxi. 27. "Abomin- himting" or "fishing." There were
ation of desolation," Matt. xxiv. 15; two places of the name one in Galilee, :
to the pollution of the temple by some the Jordan, Luke ix. 10.
*
idolatrous symbol. BT]0-<|>a'YTj, 7), Bethphage, "house of
pScXvKTos, rj, 6v, disgusting, abominable, figs."
Tit. i. 16.* Pf]^a, aros, rb (/3a- in ^aivu), a step,
pScXvo-o-cj, |a>, to defile, only mid. ; to a space; ^rjfxa irodds, a space for the
loatJic, Rom. ii. 22 ; and pass. perf. foot.Acts vii. 5 ; a raised space or
part., defiled. Rev. xxi. 8.* bench, tribunal, throne, judgment-seat.
Pcpaios, a, ov, stedfast, constant, firm. PripvXXos, ov, 6, 7}, a beri/l, a gem of
PcPai^u, (2, to confirm, to establish, whe- gi-eenish hue. Rev. xxi. 20.*
ther of persons or things. pCa, as, 7), force, violence. Acts v. 26,
PepaCuo-is, eujs, -q, confirmation, Phil. i. 7 ;
xxi. 35, xxiv. 7 (W. H. omit), xxvii.
Heb. vi. 16.* 41.*
ptdto) — povX^] VOCABULARY. 411
Pkd^o), to use violence ; mid. to enter , look to. Matt. xxii. 16; Mark xii. 14;
forcibly, Avith els, Luke xvi. i6 pass., ;
with 'iva or jx-f], to take care (once
io suffer violence, to be assaulted. Matt, without, Mark xiii. 9) ; -svith airb, to
xi. 12.* beware of ; once with /card (ace),
*
pCaios, a, ov, violent, Acts ii. 2. geographically, to look toicards, Acts
Pta<rTT|s,ou, 6, one who employs force, xxvii. 12. Syn. 5.
a man
of violence. Matt. xi. 12.* PXt]t«)s, ea, eop, a verbal adj. (^aWw),
^ipXapCSiov, 01', a littU book. Rev. x. 2, that ought to be jyut, Mark ii. 22 i^AV. H.
8(not W. H.), 9, 10.* omit) ; Luke v. 38.*
PipXfov, ov, TO (dim. of following), aroll, Boavep'y€s('\V.H. -T/p-), (Keh.,) Boanerges,
,
book, volume, as Luke iv. 17 Rev. v. : "Sons of thunder," Mark iii. 17.
I. /St^Xtoj' dTTOcTTacrtoi', a bill of divorce- Podo), Q i^oTj), to shout for joy. Gal. iv.
ment, ;Matt. xix. 7 ; Mark x. 4. 2y ; to cry for grief, Acts viii. 7 to ;
pXao-rdvo) (or ^Xaardw, j\Iark iv. 27, Boppds, a, d {Boreas, the north wind),
"\V. H.). ^XaaTTjaoj, intrans., to sprout, the North, Luke xiii. 29 ; Rev. xxi.
to spring up, put forth huds, Matt,
to
xiii. 26 ; Mark iv. 27 Heb. ix. 4 ; ; Poo-Kb), 77crw, to tend, to tend in feeding,
trans., to bring forth {Kapirov), James as Matt. viii. 33 ; John xxi. 15, 17 ;
V. 18.* mid., to feed, graze, as Mark v. 11.
BXdcTTos, Blastus, Acts xii. 20.*
ov, 6, Boo-6p, 6 (Heb. Bcor), Bosor, 2 Pet. ii. 15.*
,
sometimes understood, as James i. Pv66s, ov, 6, the deep, the sea, 2 Cor. xi.
18 with subj., John xviii.
; 39. !
25.*
Syn. 3. Pvpo-cvs, ^ws, a skin-dresser^ a tanner^
powos, ov, 6, a hill, rising ground, Luke j
Acts ix. 43, X. 6, 32.*
iii.
5 ; xxiii. 30.* 1 Pvo-cLvos, 77, oj', made of byssus, fine
Povs, fioos {of-), 5, T], an animal of the linen, Uev. xviii. I2(W. H.), 16, xix.8,
ox kind, male or female. i
,14-
Ppa^ciov, ov, TO, the prize, in the games, I
Pvor<ros, 01', i], byssus, a species of flax,
I Cor. ix. 24 ; Phil. iii. 14.* j
and of linen manufactured from it,
PpaPevii) (lit., to act as arbiter in the I highly prized for its softness, white-
*
games), rule, arbitrate, Col. iii. 15.* '
ness, and delicacy, Luke xvi. 1 9.
PpaSvvb), vG) {^padvs), to delay, to he slow, p(i)(ios, ov, 6, an altar. Acts xvii. 23.*
1 Tim. iii. 15 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (gen.).*
teeth, for rage or pain, Acts vii. 54.* tig., for the elements of Christian
Ppv«D, (TO), to send forth, as a fountain, knowledge, i Cor. iii. 2 ; Heb. v. 12,
James iii. ii.* 13 ; I Pet. ii. 2.*
raXdrqs — revvTjo-ap^T] VOCABULARY. 413
raXaTqs, ov, 6, a Galatian, Gal. iii. i.* F€0-<n](iavfi,or -vei (W. H.), 77 (Heb.,
roXarCo, as, rj, Galafia, or Gallogrcccia, Gethsemane, a small field at
oil-press),
a province of Asia Elinor. the foot of the Mount of Olives, over
FoXariKos, 71, 6v, belonging to Galatia, the brook Cedron ; Matt. xxvi. 36 ;
^a\lXaCo^ ay, i] (from Heb. ), Galilee, yfkcLu, Q, daii), to laugh, to be merry, re-
the N. division of Palestine. joice, Luke vi. 21, 25.*
FoXiXaios, aia, aiov, of or belonging to Y^XcDs, wTos, 6, laughter, mirth, James
Galilee. iv. 9.*
roXXCcDv, lovoi, 6, Gallio, a proconsul of 'ycp.i^o), aw, to fill, with ace. and gen.
Achaia, Acts xviii.* (also ciTro or e/c) pass. abs. , to he full^
;
7a<rHjp, rpos (sync.) 17, (l) th^ womb, as irpoaioTTOv TTJs yeveaeojs avrou, the coun-
Matt. i. 18 (2) tlic stomach, only Tit.
;
tenance of his birth, or. as A. A'., R.V.,
i. 12 from Epimenides, "idle bellies,"
; "his natural face." James iii. 6 top :
lxr)Tiyc, "to say nothing o/," i Cor. generally, as Matt. xxvi. 29 ; ing., fruit,
vi.^ 3. result, as 2 Cor. ix. 10. In sense (2)
FcScwv, d (Heb.), Gid.eon, Heb. xi. 32.* W. H. always read yevTjfia.
Fe-^vva, 77s, tJ (Heb., Valley of Hinnom), FcvvTio-aper (Heb., in Chald. form),
met., place of punishment in the future Gcnnesarcth {Chinnereth, or Chinne-
world, Matt. x. 28, etc. Sometimes roth, in O.T.), a region of Galilee,
with Tov irvpos, as Matt. v. 22. Com- with village or town of the same name.
pare 2 Kings xxiii. lo. Used of the adjacent lake, as Luke v. i.
414 VOCABULARY. [ycwtjctis — yvutpLtfii
yivv7]Ti% ews, »}. See y^vecris.* and it came to pass (with /cat, or follow-
"yfvvTjTos, V, ov, verb, adj., horn, brought ing verb, or inf ) also, ixi) y^voiTo, let ;
*
forth, Matt. xi. 1 1 ; Luke vii. 28. it never lutppen ! or God forbid ! (3)
ycvos, ovs, TO, (j) offspring ; (2) Uncage ; With adj. or predicative subst., to
(3) nation ; (4) kind or species. become, where quality, character, or
T€pyi<rr]v6^, rj, 6v, or Tepaarjvds, Gerge- condition is specified ; often in prohi-
sene, belonging to Gergesa or Gerasa. bitions, /XT? y^ve(x6e, become
yivov, fi^
The copies vary between these forms not, as Matt. vi. i6. (4) With the
and radap7]v6s, Matt. \'iii. 28 Mark ; cases of substantives and the prepo-
V. I ; Luke viii. 26, 37.* sitions, the verb forms many phrases,
yepovo-fa, as, rj [yepiov), an assewMy of to be interpreted according to the
elders, senate, Acts v. 21.* meaning of the case or prep. See
yipoiv, ovTos, 6, an old man, John iii. 4. * Syntax. For the distinction between
yivoi, to make to taste, only mid. in ylvofxai and other copulative verbs, see
N.T. ;as abs., to take food.
to taste, Syn. 1.
Acts or with obj., gen., or ace.
X. 10 ; YtvwcTKu), or yiyvudKU} § 94, 8, J), (see
See § 249, a, (2). Fig., to experience, yvivao/jLai, iyvup 2nd
(imper. aor.
as Matt. xvi. 28 once with on, i Pet. ; yvQdL), perf. ^vcoKa, (i) to become
ii. 3. aware of, to perceive, with ace, (2)
yuapyiio, Q, to cultivate or till the earth, to know, to perceive, understand, with
Heb. vi. 7.* ace. or 6tl, or ace. and inf., or rl
^gwp-yiov, ov, t6, a tilled field, fig., i Cor., interrog. "EW-qviaTl y. to understand
; ,
^ewp-yos, ov, 6, one who tills the ground, by experience, as 2 Cor. v. 21 ; (3) ^0
a husband')nan, a vine-dresser. know Matt. i. 25
carnally (Heb.), ;
^f), 7^j, 7), contr. for y(a or yaia, land Luke 34 (4) specially of the fellow-
i. ;
or earth, as {i)the material soil; (2) the ship between Christians and the Divine
producing soil, the ground; (3) land, Being, i Cor. viii. 3 Matt. vii. 23 ;
Luke 1. 36. (W. H. have 777pet fr. of Avater, opposed to "bitter" and
yvpos).* "salt," Rev. x. 9, 10.*
yTipdorKft), or yr^pdw, dacx), to become old, yXwo-o-o, r)s, r/, (i) the tongue; (2) a
John xxi. 18 ; Heb. viii. 13.* language; (3) a nation or jt;eo;)Ze dis-
^Cvofjtai, for yiyvofxai. See § 94, 8, a. tinguished by their language.
yeuTjaofiai, eyevofXTju and eyevrjdrjv, •yXaxrcro-Koixov, ov, neut., a little box or
y^y ova (with pres. force) and yeyhi)- case for money, John xii. 6, 29
xiii.
lx.aL, become, as (i) <o begin to
to be, (orig. from holding the " tongue-
used of persons, to be born, John v. iii. pieces" of flutes, etc.).*
58 of the works of creation, to
; be Yi/"a4>£vs, ius, 6 a fuller, cloth-dresser,
made, John i. 3, 10 ; and of other j\lark ix. 3.*
w^orks, wrought or performed.
to be YVT|<rios, a, ov (sync, from yevrjacos),
So, to pass
of one state into out legitimate, genuine, true, i Tim. i. 2 ;
another, to grov) into, to be changed Tit. i. 4 Phil. iv. 3
; rb yvrjaiov, sin- ;
into, John ii. 9 often with els, Luke ; cerity, 2 Cor. viii. 8.* Adv.. -us,
xiii. 19. (2) Of ordinary or extraor- sincerely, naturally, Phil. ii. 20.*
dinary occurrences, to happen, to take Yv6<|>os, 01;, 6, a dense cloud, darkness,
place, to be done ; of the day, the Heb. xii. 18.* _
night, Mark vi. 2 of thunder, earth- ; Yvw[iT), -qs, 7) {yvo- in yivusaKui), opinion,
quake, calm, etc. of feasts or public ; judgment, intention.
solemnities, hr2d or celebratedto be •yvupC^b), iau) or tuj, (i) to make known, to
frequently in the phrase Kal ^yivero. declare (with ace. and dat., 5ti or t(
; ;
interrog. , Col. i. 27); (2) intrans., io YpatTTos, v, ov, verb, adj., written, in-
knoiv, only Phil, i. 22. scribed, Rom. ii. 15.*
Yv«<ris, ews, ^j (i) subj., knoicledge, "with Ypa<j)ir|, 77?, 7], (i) a writing; (2) spec,
gen. of obj. (gen. subj., Rom. xi. 33) ; i] ypa<pr] or al ypacpai, the Scriptures,
(2) obj., science, dcctrine, wisdam, as u)ritings of the O.T. ; (3) a particular
Luke xi. 52. passage.
Yww(rrt]S, ov, 6, one icJio knows, an expert. •ypdcJKi), \p(j}, yeypacpa,
to grave, write,
Acts xxvi. 3.* inscribe. yeypairraL. or ye-
€ypd<p7),
"yvoxTTOs, y], ov, verb. a,di].,kncncn, as Acts ypafMfxevov ecTTi, a formula of quota-
ii, 14, iv. 10 knoicahle, Rora. i. 19
;
;
tion. It is tcritten. Often with dat.
notable, Acts iv. 16. ot yvojaroi, ones of pers., as Mark x. 5.
acquaintance, Luke ii. 44 ; ro yvuaTou, "YpawS-qs, €s, {ypavs, fid), old-womanish,
knoicledge, Rom. i. 19. foolish, I Tim. iv. 7.*
•Yoyyvto), iVw, ^0 7?iwr7n2^rin a low voice, 'ypT)Yop€'a>, Q (from eypijyopa, perf, of
John xii. discontentedly, to
32 ; iyelpw), to keep awake, watch, be vigi-
grumble, as i Cor. x. 10, witli ace, lant.
or irepi, gen., irpos, ace, /card, gen. yufjLvd^to {yvjxvo^), to exercise, train, i
Yoyyvo-fJLos, ov, 6, muttering, John vii. Tim. iv. 7; Heb. v. 14, xii. 11 ; 2 Pet.-
12 ; murmuring, Acts vi. i ; Phil. ii. ii. 14.*
14 ; I Pet. iv, 9.* yu|ivao-(a, as, ^, exercise, training, i Tim.
YcyyvtrTTis, ov, 6, a murmurer, com- iv. 8.*
plaiiur, Jude 16.* •yvfiviiTcvft),or -tret/a; (W. H. ), to be naked
y6t]s, riTos, moan), an en-
6 {yodcj, to or poorly clad, I Cor. iv. 11.*
chanter, an impostor, 2 Tim. iii. 13,* YV|xv6s, r\, 6v, (i) naked, ill-clad, having
roX"yo9d(Heb. in Chald. form), Golgotha, only an inner garment ; (2) bare, i.e.,
" the place of a skull " (prob. fiom its open or manifest, Heb. iv. 13 ; (3)
shape) ; Calvary. See Kpaviov. mere, I Cor. xv. 37,
r6px>ppa, as, T], and (jv, to., Gomorrha. YV|iv6ti]s, t7]tos, t], (i) nakedness; (2)
^o^s, ov, 6 (y^fxw), of
{1) a burden, e.g., scanty clothing.
a ship, Acts xxi. 3 ; (2) wares or yuvaiKo-piov, ov, to (dim,), a silly woman,
merchandise, Rev. xviii. 11, 12.* 2 Tiui. iii. 6,*
Yoveus, f'ws, 6 [yeu- hiyiyvo/jun), a parent, ^vvaiKcios, a, ov, womanish, female
only in plural. I Pet. iii. 7, the weaker vessel.*
Yow, aros, TO, the knee; often in plur. yuvTJ, yvvaiKos, voc. 7ui'ai, •^, ( I ) a wom.an;
after ridevai or KafiirTeiv, to put or bend (2) a u'z/c. The voc. is the form of
the knees, to kneel, in devotion. ordinary address, often used in rever-
^ovu-irerco), w {iriirTw), to fall down on ence and honour. Compare John ii.
ones knees, to kneel to (ace. ). 4 and xix. 26.
Ypd)i(ia, oTo?, TO {ypd(p(j)), (i) a letter of r«7, 6, a proper name, Gog. In Ezek.
the al]>hotrt. Gal. vi. 11 : in what xxxviii. 5, king of Magog, possibly
large letters, perhaps noting emphasis ScandinaWa hence, in Rev. xx. 8, of
;
letter, as opposed to spirit, Rom. ii. 29, a people far remote from Palestine,
etc. ; (2) a icnting, such as abill ox an. probably in the N.
epistle, as Luke xvi. 6, 7 ; ret iepu. ywvLo, as, tj, a corner, as Matt. vi. 5, xxi.
ypoLfifxaTa,2 Tim. iii. 15, th£ holy 42 (LXX.) ; met., a secret place. Acts
writings, or the Scriptures; (3) plur., xxvi. 26,
literature, learning genera-llj, John vii.
15-
7pafi|jLar€vs, ^wj, 6, (i) a clerk, secretary,
a scribe, Acts xix. 35 ; (2) one of that
class among the Jews who copied and A, 8, SeXra, delta, d, the fourth letter of
interpreted the O.T. Scriptures (see the Greek alphabet. As a numeral,
5' =
vofiuces) (3) met., a man of learning
; 4 ; 5,= 4000.
generally, i Cor. i. 20 ; Matt. xiii. 52, Aa^iS, also Aavtd, AaveiS (W. H.) 6,
etc. (Heb.), David, king of Israel, '0
416 VOCABULARY. rSai(JiovLto|j.ai — ScKaro'*)
vibs A., the Son of David, an appel- 8ct, impers., see § 101, it needs, one
lation of the Messiah iv A. in David, ; , must, it ought, it is right or jtroj/cr,
8€kt6s, 77, bv (verbal adj. from dexo/xai), 4 ; Rev. vi, 10 ; to Christ, 2 Pet. ii. i.
Aeppaios, ov, 6, of Derbc, Acts xx. 4.* 84ft), to leant. See del anil deo/xai.
Aepp-T], 17s, ij, Derbe, a city of Lycaonla, 8^0), I st aor. , ib-qaa ;
pcrf. , dedcKa ;
pass.
Acts xiv. 6, 20, xvi. i.* dedefj-ai ; 1st aor. pass, inf , deOiivai, to
Sepfjia, aros, t6 (Sepw), an animaVs skin, bind together, bundles, as Acts x. ii ;
Matt. iii. 4 ; i\Iark i. 6.* age, as i\iatt. xxii. 13; Mark vi. 17 ;
Se'pw, 1st aor. edeipa, 2nd fut. pass. 2 Tim. ii. 9 tig., Matt, xviii. 18. ;
8€(rfio-(f>vXa|, a/cos, 6, a jailor. Acts xvi. 8i]X6o>, (J, to manifest, to reveal, to bring
23, 27, 36.* to liijht : to imply or signify, i Cor. i.
8ea-|xci>TT|piov, ioc, to, a. prison. Matt. xi. II, iii. 13 ; Col. i. 8; Heb. ix. 8,
2 ;Acts V. 21, 23, xvi. 26.* xii. 27; I Pet. i. II ; 2 Pet. i. 14.*
86<rp.«TT]s, ou, 6, a prisoner, Acts xxviL Arijids, S., 6. Demas, Col. iv. 14; Philem.
I, 42.* 24 : 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
SecnroTqs, ou, 6, a foreign lord or prince, 8T]ji-q-Yop4«, <^» to deliver a public oration
a master, as i Tim. vi. i applied to ; or harangue ; with irpjs, Acts xii,
God, Luke ii. 29 Acts iv. 24 Jude ; ;
21.*
EE
418 VOCABULARY. [Atj^^rpios — SuxKovta
AT)fiTJTpios, ov, 6, Demetrius. Two of 8ta-7oyyv|<i), to murmur greatly, Luke
the name are mentioned, Acts xix. XV. 2, xix. 7.*
24, 38 ; 3 John 12.* 8ia-YpT]Yopca), (3, to be fully or thoroughly
8t])jii-ovpY6s, ov, ("a public worker"), awake, Luke ix. 32.*
one who makes or is the author of any- 8k-d7(>), to lead or pass, as time, life,
thing, Hcb. xi. 10.* I Tim. ii. 2 {^lov)-. Tit. iii. 3 {^lov
8t]p,o9y 01', 6, the pcojylc, a multitude omitted).*
publicly convened, Acts xii. 22, xvii. 8ia-8€xo|iai, to succeed to, Acts vii.
5, xix. 30, ^i.* Syn. 73.
8i]p.6<ri.os, a, ov, public, common, Acts v. 8id-8Tfp.a, aroj, to {S^cj), a diadem, tiara,
18. Dat. fem., as adv., Srjfxoiriq., or crown. Rev. xii. 3, xiii. i, xix. 12.*
publicly, Acts xvi. 37, xviii. 28, xx. Syn. 67.
20.* 8ia-8£86))j.i, to distribute, divide, Luke xi.
8T]vdpiov, iov, t6, properly a Latin word 22, xviii. 22 ; John vi. 1 1 Acts iv. ;
xi. 29; or intrans., with irpbs (person), xxviii.). The two covenants men-
Luko xvi. 26 ei's (place), Acts xvi.
; tioned. Gal. iv. 24 that of the O.T. ;
Sia-pdXXw, to accuse, Luke xvi. i.* of the N.T. r)KaLvy) d., Luke xxii. 20.
,
8ia-pepai6cD, uj, m
mid., to ajffi/rm., assert The O.T. itself (17 TraXata 5., 2 Cor.
strongly, i Tim. i. 7 ; Tit. iii. 8.* iii. 14) as containing the first, and the
Sia-pXeiro), to see through, to see clearly, N.T. as containing the second, are
Matt. vii. 5 ; Luke vi. 42 ; Mark viii. each called diadrjKr}.
25(W. H.).* 8i-aCpe(ris, cws, fem., difference, diversity,
8idpoXos, ov, 6 (5ia/3d\Xa;, orig. adj.), as the result of distribution, i Cor.
an accuser, a slanderer, an adversary, xii. 4, 5, 6.*
I Tim. iii. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 8i-aipeci), Q, to divide, distributCy Luke
3. 6 Std^oXos, the accuser, the devil, XV. 1 2 ; I Cor. xii. 11.*
equivalent to the Hebrew Satan. Sia-KaOapC^o), f. u2, to cleanse thoroughly,
8t-ayy€XXfa), to tell, publish abroad, di- j\latt. iii. 12; Luke iii. 17.*
vulge, Luke ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 ;
Bka-Kar-cXcYxofiai, to confute entirely.
Rom. 17.*
ix. Acts xviii. 28.*
8id-Y€, or did ye (W. H. ),
yet on account 8iaKov^(o, serve or icait upon, espe-
tD, to
having elapsed, ]\lark xvi. i ; Acts abs. ). Of proi)hets and apostles who
xxv. 13, xxvii. 9.* miiiidprcd the Divine will, i Pet. i.
Bid "Yvwo-Ls, ews, 77, judicial hearing, service in the church of Christ, fre-
accurate knowledge, Acts xxv. 21.* quently.
"
SicIkovos, 01', 6, 7/, a servant, specially at parts, as ]\Iatt. xxvii. 35, etc. to dis- ;
scatter abroad, as seed so of Chris- ; make a will, Heb. ix. 16^ 17. See
tians dispersed by persecution, Acts dLadrjKT].*
viii. I, 4, xi. 19.* 8ia-Tpipw, to spend {xpovov ov i]fj.epds),
8ia-(r7ropa, as, 17, dis2Jersion, state of being tarry, as Acts xiv. 3, 28 abs., to ;
16, XX. 24, xxi. 2.* 8iKaio-Kpi(ria, as, i], just judgment, Rom.
8£8a)|ii, to give (ace. and dat. ). Hence, ii. 5.*
in various connections, to yield, de- 8CKaios, o-ioi, ov, just, right, U2}right,
liver, sup)ply, commit, etc. When righteous, impartial; applied to things,
used in a general sense, the dat. of to persons, to Christ, to God. Adv.,
pers. may be omitted, as Matt. xiii. 8. -ws, justly, deservedly. Syn. 21.
The thing given may be expressed by 8iKaio<rvvT], 77s, r;, righteousness, justice,
e/c or airb, with gen. in a partitive rectitude, goodness generally.
sense instead of ace. So Matt. xxv. 8iKaid(D, cD, to make just, make righteous;
8 Luke xx. 10.
; The purpose of a also in N.T. in the declarative sense, to
gift may be expressed by inf. as Matt, , hold guiltless, to justify, to 2^''onounce
xiv. 16 ; John iv. 7 Luke i. J^.
; or treat as righteous, as Alatt. xii. 37 ;
hi-iydpoi, to wake up thoroughly, as Luke I Cor. iv. 4.
a public spot in a city, Matt. xxii. 9.* Rev. XV. 4, xix. 8.*
422 VOCABULARY. [SiKaCwo-is — 8(J|a
SiKa^bxris, 6WS, 7), acquittal, justification, 8i\(/os, oi's, TO, thirst, 2 Cor. xi. 27.*
Rom. iv. 25, V. 18.* 8£m|/vxos, ov (5is), double-minded, James
SiKao-TTJs, ov, 6, a judge, Luke xii. 14 i. 8, iv. 8.*
(W. H., ; Acts vii. 27, 35.*
KpLT-qs) 810)^110$, ov, 6, persecution.
SCkt], 77s, a judicial sentence, Acts xxv.
7;, 8iwKTT]s, ov, 6, a 2^0'secittor, i Tim. i.
I Cor, viii. 13, x. 14, xiv. 13,* (3) boKei, impers., it seems ; it seems
Ato-ircTTis, h, fallen from Zeus or Jupiter, good to or pleases, dat.
Aetsxix. 35.* 8oKi|xdtb>, (Tw, to try, put to the proof,
8i-dp0a)p.a, see KaTopdojfxa. jrrove, as 2 Cor. viii. 22 ; to discern,
8i-dp0w(ris, ews, 17, an ameiulment, reform- interpret, Luke xii. 56 ; to judge fit,
ation, Heb. ix. 10.* approve, as i Cor. xvi. 3.
8i-opvcrora), |w, to dig through, IMatt. vi. 8oKip,a(ria, 17, the act of 'proving, Heb.
19, 20, xxiv. Luke xii. 39.* 43 ; iii. 9(W. H.).*
Aidcr-Kovpoi, (i}v, oi (children of Zeus), 8oKi|ir|, Tjs, T), proof, knowledge acquired
Castor and Pollux, Acts xxviii. 11.* by proof, experience.
Sb-OTi, conj. ( = 5td TovTo, oti), wherefore, 8oKi|jLi,ov, ov, to, a test, a means of trying,
a criterion, *
on this account, because, for. i Pet. i.
7 ; Jas. i. 3.
Aio-Tp€<|)T|s, oOs, 6, Diotrephes, 3 John 9.* 8dKip.os, ov [Sixofj'-a.L), ajiproved, genuine,
StirXoos, ovs, Tj, ovv, double, twofold, acceptable, as Rom. xvi. 10, xiv. 18.
I Tim. Rev. xviii. 6
V. 17 comp.,
; ; 8oKds, ov, 7], a beam of timber. Matt. vii.
StTrXdrepos with gen., Matt, xxiii. 15.* 3, 4, 5 ; vi. 41, Luke 42.*
SiTrXdb), Q), to double. Rev. xviii. 6.* 8dXio$, ia, lov, deceitful, 2 Cor. xi. 13.*
8Cs, adv., tivice. 8oXid6), u), to deceive. Impf., 3rd pers.
(A^s), obsolete nom. for Zevs, gen. Atds, plur. iSoXiovaav, an Alexandrian form
,
8txo-(rTa<rta, as, i], a faction, division, Luke xvii. 18 and very frequently (2) ;
8o|dt<<>, <rw, to ascribe glory to, to honmir, 8vva|xd(i), w, 10 strengthen, confirfU, Col,
glorify. i. Heb. xi. 34 (W. H. ).'*
II ;
AopKas, ados, ijy DorcaSy Acts ix. 36, 8vvd<m]s, ov, 6, {i) a potentate, prince,
39-* Lukei. 52 ; i Tim. vi. 15 ; (2) one in
860-is, cws, a givingy Phil. iv. 1 5 ; a gift,
7/,
authority. Acts viii. 27.*
James 17.*
i. 8vvaTcw, w, to be powerful, have poiver to
*
8dTT]s, ov, 6, a giver, 2 Cor. ix. 7. (inf.), 2 Cor. xiii. 3 Rom. xiv. 4 ;
in the freq. phrases dovXos rod GeoD, 8vs-, an inseparable prefix, implying
8ov\os XpiiTTOv, Syn. 60. adverse, difficult, or grievous.
SovXod), w, axrw, to reduce to boiulage 8vo--pd<rTaKTos, ov, oppressive, difficult
(ace. and dat.) ; pass., to be held sub- to be borne. Matt, xxiii. 4 (not W. H.);
ject to, be in bondage. Luke xi. 46.*
80XTJ, 175, 7/ receiving of
(5^xoA*ciO> ''a- 8v<r-€VT€pCa, as, if (W. H., -iov to), a dys-
ffuests," a banquet, Luke xiv, 13.* entery, a flux. Acts xxviii. 8.*
8paKa)v, ovTos, 6, a dragon or huge ser- 8v<r-€pp.T)V€VTOs, ov, hard to be explained,
*
pent ; symb. for Satan, Rev. Heb. V. II.*
8pdo-(ro}i.ai, dep. , to grasj), take, catch ; 8vo--KoXos, ov (lit., "difficult about
ace, I Cor. iii. 19.* food"), difficult, hard to accomplish,
8pax|JLVj, •^j, 7], a drachma, an Attic silver Mark x. 24.* Adv., -ws, icith diffi-
coin equal to the Roman denarius, or culty, hardly, xix. 23 ; Mark
INIatt.
worth between sevenpence and eight- X. 23 ; Luke xviii. 24.*
pence of our money, Luke xv. 8, 9.* 8v<rp.T|, 77s, 17 (only plur., Sua/xai), the set-
(8p€)i(i)), obs. (see Tp^x^)^ ^^ run. ting of tM sun, the west.
SpcVavov, ov, TO, a sickle or pruning- 8v<r-vdT]TOs, ov, hard or difficult to be
hook, ^lark iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv.* understood, 2 Pet. iii. 16.*
8p6p.o$, ov, 6, a running; fig., course, 8vo--4>T]^(D, to speak evil, defame, i Cor.
career. Acts xiii. 25, xx. 24 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13 (W. H.).*
iv. 7.* 8v<r-<}>T]^£a, as, 7/, evil report, infamy.
Apov(r{XX(i, 77s, i), Drusilla, Acts xxiv. 8w8cKa, indecl., num., twelve, ol 8w5eKa,
24.* the twelve, i.e., the Apostles.
8vva|xai, dep. (see § 109, b, i), to be 8(D8eKaTos, 77, ov, num., ord., twelfth,
able, abs. , or with inf. (sometimes Rev. xxi. 20.*
omitted) or ace. to ; have a capacity 8<D8cKd-({>vXov, ov, t6, the twelve tribeSy
for ; to be strong, as i Cor. iii. 2 to ; Israel, Acts xxvi. 7.
have power to do, whether through 8w(ia, aro^, to, a house, a house-top.
ability, disposition, permission, or Syn. 61.
opportunity. 8(i)p€d, as, 77, a free gift.
8vva|jLi$, ews, 7/, (i) power, might, abso- hmpiaVy accus. of preced., as an adv.,
lutely or as an attribute ; (2) po^ver freely, as 2 Cor. xi. 7 ; without cause,
over, expressed by eh or iirl (ace), groundlessly, John xv. 25 ; Gal.
ability to do ; (3) exercise of p)o^ver, ii. 21.
mighty work, miracle, as Matt. xi. 20; B<apio\iai, ov/xai, to give freely, Mark xv.
(^) forces, as of an army, spoken of the 45; pass., 2 Pet. i. 3, 4.*
heavenly hosts, as Matt. xxiv. 29 8(upi]|JLa, aros, to, a free gift, Rom. v. 16;
(5) force, as of a word, i.e., signifi- James i. 17.*
cance, I Cor. xiv. II. Synn. 45, 57. 8ci)pov, ov, TO, a gift.
424 VOCABULARY, [E—ky-
when ; after the relative, with an in- to rise up, as from sleep, or from a
definite force, 8s edv, who50cwr, as recumbent posture, as at table. Ap-
Matt. 19, viii. 19; i Cor.
V. xvi. 6. plied to raising the dead used also of ;
iap di Kai, and if also ; eav firj, ex- rising up against, as an adversary, or
cept, unless, Matt. v. 20; but that, in judgment.
Mark iv. 22 ; eav irip^ if indeed, Heb. ^•yepo-is, ews, i], a looking up ; of the
vi. 3. resurrection. Matt, xxvii. 53.*
lavTov, pron. , reflex., 3rd pers., of one- t^K-. Li words beginning thus, W. H.
self; used also in ist (plur. ) and 2nd generally ^wiite evK-.
persons. See § 335. Genitive often ey-KaO-CTOS, ov, adj. (eyKadirjfxi), a spy,
*
for possess, pron.
X^7etv or eiyreTv iu an insidioiLS foe, Luke xx. 20.
€avT<^, to say tvithm oneself; ylveadai c'yKaivia, ioiv, to., a dedication, John x.
or ^pxeadac h
tavT(^, to come to one- 22 of the feast commemorating the
;
self ; irpos iavTov, to one's home, John dedicating or purifying of the temple,
XX. 10, or privately, as Luke xviii. 1 1 after its pollution by Antiochus Epi-
€v eavToh, among yourselves, i.e., one phanes, 25 Chisleu, answering to mid-
with another; Kad' iavrdv apart ; Trap' , December.*
eavrbv, at home. i-^l-KixivCiij), to Heb. ix. 18. x. 20.*
dedicate,
€0,0), (i, edaio ; impf. eicov ; 1st aor., , c'Y-KaK€b), tD, to grow weary, tofaint{W.}i. ).
eiaaa, (i) to jier^nit, inf., or ace. and iy-Kokibi. Q, iaio, itripf'., eveKdXovv, to
inf. ; (2) to leave. Acts xxiii. 32, and summon court for trial, to indict,
to a.
prob. (R.V.) Acts xxvii. 40. pers. dat., or Kara (gen.); crime, in
e^8o(jL-r|KovTa, indecl., num., seventy. 61 gen.
e^SofjLTjKovTa, the seventy disciples, Luke iy-KaTa-XiCTTOi, xj/u), aban-
(i) to desert, to
X. I, 17. don ; (2) to leave remaining, Rom. ix,
^
ip8op.T]KovTdKis, num. di^dy., seventy times, 29.
Matt, xviii. 22.* c-y-Kar-oiK^w, Q, to dicell among {h), 2
'^B8ofjLOs, 77, ov, ord. num., seventh. Pet. ii. 8.*
"Epcp, 6, Ehcr or Heher, Luke iii. 35.* ey-Kavxao}iai, to boast in, 2 Thess. i.
4
'EPpaiKos, T7, bv, Hebrew. (W. H.).*
'Eppaios ( W
H. ,'E. ), ala, atov, also subst.
. c-y-KevTpf^w, to insert, as a bud or graft ;
time of Christ and the Apostles. See c-y-KOTTTi, ^s, i], an impediment, I Cor. i.x.
§150. 12.*
*EPpaio-T£ (W. H. ,'E. ), adv. wi thcHebrew , ky-K6irrbi, xpo), to interrupt, to hinder
language. See preo<'ding. (ace, or inf with rod).
. ;
heathen. Matt. v. 47 (W. H.), vi. 7, tWicra-id ("W. H., eXicrffoj), to roll together,
xviii. 17 ; 3 John 7 (W. H.).* Adv., as a scroll, Rev. vi. 14.*
-ws, heathenly, after tlie manner of d\U (see § 110), a verb of existence,
Jieathens, Gal. ii. 14.* (i) used as a predicate, to be, to exist,
20VOS, ovs, t6, the people of any country, to happen, to c&nu to pass; ^^'ith an
a natioiu ra ^dvrj, the nations, the infin. following, ean, it is convenient,
heathen world, the Gentiles'. proper, etc., as Heb. ix. 5 (2) as ;
'^Sos, ovs, t6, a usage, custom, manner. the copula of subject and predicate,
^0«, obs., pf. eiutda, in pres. signif, to be simply to be, or in the sense of to be
accustomed, Matt, xxvii. 1 5 ; Mark like, to represent, John vi. 35 ; Matt.
X. I. t6 eiu)dds avr($, his custom, Luke xxvi. 26 ; I Cor. x. 4. With parti-
iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.* ciples, it is used to form the "re-
cl, a conditional conjunction (see § 383), solved tenses," as Luke i. 22, iv. 16
if, since, though. After verbs indi- Matt. xvi. 19, etc. With gen., as
cating emotion, d is equivalent to predicate, it marks quality, posses-
oTi, Mark xv. 44. As an interro- sion, participation, etc. ; with dat.,
gative particle, el occurs in both in- property, possession, destination, etc.
direct and direct questions, Mark For its force with a prep, and its case,
XV. 45 ; Acts i. 6. In oaths and see Syntax of Prepositions. The verb,
426 VOCABULARY. [etp-i Sk8t]\os
corresponding Heb. word in O.T.), €K, before a vowel, i^, a prep. gov.
or,
eiprjvT) generally denotes a perfect well- geu.,from, out of (the interior). See
being. Often employed in salutations, § 293. In composition, e/c implies
as in Heb. removal, continuance, completion, or is
clpTjviKos, 7), bv, peaceable, James iii. 17; of intensive force.
peaceful, Heb. xii. ii.* ^Kao-Tos, each, every one (with partitive
clp-qvo-TToicft), w, to make peace, reco7icile, ^en.). els eKaaros, every one soever.
Heb. V. 7 ; to hear so as to obey (gen.), Ik-^oXiq, Tjs, 77, a casting out, as lading
1 Cor. xiv. 21.* from a ship, Acts xxvii. 18.*
do-- 8exo|iai, to receive into favour (ace), iK-^aiiCtw or -i<rK(t), to give in marriage.
2 Cor. vi. 17 ; from LXX.* ^K-'yovos, ov, sprung from ; neut. plur.,
cl'(r-€i|ii, impf. darieiv, inf. eiaiiuai {eTfxi), descendants, i Tim. v. 4.*
to go in, to enter (with ets), Acts iii. 3, CK-Sairavdb), w, to spend entirely ; pass.
xxi. 18, 26; Heb. ix. 6.* reflex., to expend ones energies for
cl<r-^pXO)xai, 2iid aor. ei<xrj\6ov, to come iti, {i'-rrep), 2 Cor. xii. 1 5.*
to enter (chiefly with els). elff^pxo/J.ai ^K-8^ofJLai, to look out for, to expect {^us),
Kal i^ipxofJ.ai, to come ami go in and to wait for (ace).
out, spoken of daily life and intercourse, ^k8t]Xos, ov, quite plain, conspicuous,
Acts i. 2 1 . Fig. of entrance upon a state.
, manifest, 2 Tim. iii. 9.*
;
cK-8i]|jL4a), u), to be away from^ ahsemi eK-KXdd), to break off, as branches from a
from, 2 Cor. v. 6-9,* stem, Rom.
xi. 17, 19, 20.*
cK-8£8w}ii, N.T. mid., to let out to farm, Ik-kXciu, (Tw, to shut out, Rom. iii. 27 ;
€K-8i-T]-y€0fiai, ov/jLai, dep. mid., to rehearse Acts xix. 32, 39, 41 legally
the people, ;
Rom. ig; to
xii. requital for, demand often plural, as Acts xv. 41.
avenge a deed (ace), 2 Cor. x. 6 ; Rev. «k-kXiv«, to decline, turn away from
vi. 10, xix. 2.* (dTTo), Rom. iii. 12, xvi. 17 ; I Pet.
^K-8CKT]arks, ews, 7), an avenging, vindica- iii. II,*
tion, punishment. CK-KoXv}ipd«, cD, to swim out or avmy,
^K-8iK0S) ov, b, 7), an avetiger, one wJio Acts xxvii. 42.*
adjudges a culprit (dat.) to punishment €K-KO|ii^()), to carry out to burial, Luke
for (irepi) a crime, Rom. xiii. 4 vii. 12.*
I Thess. iv. 6.* «K-KoirT(D, to cut off or down, as a tree,
€K-8i(&Ka), to persecute, to expel by perse- branch, or limb. (In i Pet. iii. 7, to
cuting, Luke xi. 49 i Thess. ii. 15.* ; hinder, W. H. read h-Koirri)},)
€k-86tos, ov, delivered vp, Acts ii. 23.* €K-Kpc)JLa(iai (mid. of iKKpeiJ.dvvvfMi), to
€K-8oxi^> ^s, 17, a waiting for, expectation, hang upon, or to be earnestly attentive
Heb. X. 27.* to, Luke xix. 48.*
€K-8via), to unclothe, to strip off (two aces. ). €K-XaXca>, Co, to speak out, to disclose,
Ikci, adv., there, thither. Acts xxiii. 22.*
cK€i6ev, adv.,//*07?i that place, thence. €K-Xdnirw, to shine out or brightly. Matt.
cKcivos, 77, pron., demonst., that, that
0, xiii. 43.*
one there used antithetically, Mark
; €K-Xav0dvw, in mid., to forget entirely,
xvi. 20, and by way of emphasis, Heb. xii. 5.*
Matt. xxii. 23. See §§ 338, 340. lK-\(y<ii, mid. in N.T., ist aor. e^e-
lK€i<rc, adv., in const, prseg.,
thither, \€^dfir)v, to choose out for oneself, to
Acts xxi. 3, xxii. 5.* elect.
kK-l,r\r4<a, w, to seek out with diligence, CK-Xciiro), 2nd aor. e^eXiTroj', to fail, to
Heb. xii. 17 i Pet. i. 10 ;to seek ; cease, to die, Luke xvi. 9, xxii. 32 ;
tK-ircTOLVVViii, 1st aor. e^eTr^raca, to Acts xiii. $1 ',to shake out, Acts xviii.
stretch forth, Rom. x. 21.* 6.*
eK-TTTiSaw, w, 1st aor. i^eir-qbrjcra (W. H. ), Kktos, t), ov, ord. num., sixth.
to spring forth, Acts xiv. 14. €KTos, adv., generally as prep., Anth gen.,
CK-TrCirTW, (i) to fall from (e/c), Mark without, besides, exce2)t. eKrbs d fir},
25
xiii. abs., to
; fall, James i. Ii of ; except, I Cor. xiv. 5. to iKTos, tlie
a ship driven from course, Acts its outside. Matt, xxiii. 26.
xxvii. 17 ; of love, to fail y i Cor. xiii. €K-Tp€irw, mid., to turn from, to for-
8 (2), of moral lapse, Gal. v. 4.
;
sake, I Tim. i. 6, v. 15, vi. 20 ; 2 Tim.
tK-ir\ew, ^v(jii3, to sail out, to sail from. iv. 4 ; Heb. xii. 13.*
Acts XV. 39, xviii. 18, xx. 6.* CK-Tpe'<j)w, <o nourish, nurture, train up,
€K-7rXT]p6a), to fulfil entirely, Actsxiii. 32.* Eph. V. 29, vi. 4 ; Rev. xii. 6
tK-irXripwcrts, ecos, i), entire fulfilment, (W. H.).*
Acts xxi. 26.* ?K-Tpwp,a, aroj, t6, an abortive birth, an,
iK-irXrio-a-ftj, 2nd aor. pass. i^eirXdyrjv abortion, 1 Cor. xv. 8.* '
eXaiwv, Qvos, 6, an olive grove, Olivet, eXcvOepdw, w, to set free (generally with
Acts i. 12.* ace. and airb) ; with modal dative,
'EXajiCrtis, ov, 6, an Elamite, or inha- Gal. V. I.
bitant of Elam, a region of Persia, ^eu(ris, ews, 17 {^pxofJ-ai), a coming, an
Acts ii. 9.* advent, Acts vii. 52.*
€Xdo-<r«v or -ttu)v, ov, compar. of eXaxi^s €X€<|)dvTivos, 7], ov, m.ade of ivory. Rev.
for fxiKpds, less ; in quality, John ii. 10 xviii. 12.*
(ace, -w contracted for -ova) in age, ; *EXuaK«Cp,, b{'Reh,),Elial€im, Matt. i. 13;
Heb. 7, 9 ; ii. pass., to decrease, John 'EXio-<raios, ov, b, Elisha, Luke iv. 27.*
30.*
iii. IX£(r<r«, i^w, as dXiaaoo. to roll iq), Heb.
cXavvo) (tenses from eXdw), eXdcrcu, eX?;- i. 12; Rev. vi. 14 (W. H.).*
Xa/ca, io f^/'irc, Luke viii. 29 James ; ^Kos, ovs, rb, a ivaicnd, an ulcer, a sore,
iii. 4 ; 2 Pet. ii. 17; to drive a shij), Luke xvi. 21 ; Rev. xvi. 2, 11.*
<o rol6', Mark vi. 48 John vi. 19.*
; cXkoo), Q, to make a sore; pass., to be
eXa(|>pia, as, rj, levity, inconstancy, 2 Cor. full ofs&res, Luke xvi. 20.*
i. 17.* cXkvw, o-w, to <^?-«<7, Acts xvi. 19 to dravj, ;
eXa(j>pds, d, 6v, light, as a bmxlen easily a net, John xxi. 6, 1 1 ; a sword, John
*
borne, Matt. xi. 30 2 Cor. iv. 1 7. ; x\'iii. 10; to rfra?/- over, to 2}crsicade,
eXaxnTTOs, 77, ov, adj. (superl. of eXax^s John 32.*
vi. 42, xii.
for fxiKpos), least, very little, in number, ^Kw (old form of foregoing), impf.
magnitude, importance. d\Kov, James ii. 6 Acts xxi. 30.* ;
cXaxKTTOTtpos, a, ov, a double compa- 'EXXds, d5os, ij, Hellas, Greece = Axo.ta,''
rison, less than the least, Eph. iii. 8.* Acts XX. 2.*
4Xd(i). See eKavvw. "EXXi^v, 77J/0S, 6, a Greek, as distinguished
'EXedtap, 6, Eleazar, Matt. i. 15.* ( I ) from )8d/)/3a/)os, barbarian, Rom. i.
«XeY{jids; ov, 6, reproof {"W. H.), 2 Tim. iii. 14, and (2) from 'louSaios, as Jew,
16.* John vii. 35. Used for Greek prose-
i'Xey^iS, ewj, rj, reproof, 2 Pet. ii. 16.* lytes to Judaism, John xii. 20 ; Acts
t\iy\os, evident demonstration,
ov, by xvii. 4.
proof, Heb. xi. i ; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 'EXX-qvtKos, 77, bv,Grecian, Luke xxiii.
eXt'Yxw, fw, to convict, reprove, rehuJce. 38 ; Rev. ix. 11.*
tXeeivds, -^j ov, pitiable, miserable, i Cor. 'EXXt^vis, t'Sos, a Greek or Gentile icoman,
XV. 19 ; Rev. iii. 17.* ]\Iark vii. 20 Acts xvii. 12.*
;
cXevOcpCa, as, 17, liberty, freedom, from the to put to one's account, Rom. v. 13
;
Mosaic yoke, as i Cor. x. 29 ; Gal. ii. 4 Philem. 18.*
from evil, as James ii. 12 Rom. viii. 21. ; 'EX|j.(u8dfjL, 6, Elmodam, Luke iii. 28.*
cXevOcpos, a, ov, free, as opposed to the IXirit«, att. fut. eXTTtcD, 1st aor. T^Xxto-a,
condition of a slave delivered from : to <^a7J<rrf (ace. to Ao^6 or inf., or 6'rt) ;
obligation (often with €k, airb) ; at /or (ace.) to in«i (eVi, dat.
; ev, m ;
liberty to (inf.). Once with dat. of once dat. only) ; to direct hope to^i'ards
reference, Rom. vi. 20. (et's, iTTi, ace).
430 VOCABULARY. [eXirts — 4v-a"yKaXiJo|jiat
and accus. cases air' i/xavTov, from : cji-irXoK"/), •^s, 7], a plaiting, braiding, of
myself, John v. 30. hair, i Pet. iii. 3.*
l\i-^aiv<a, 2nd aor. eve^rjv, part. f/A/3as, t\i-irvi<a (W. H., evir-), to breatJie out
to go upon, into (els), always of entering (gen.), Acts ix. i.*
a ship except John v. 4 (W. H. omit). €{i-irop€vo}iiai, dep. , to go about ; hence to
4)i.-PaX\a>, to cast into, Luke xii. 5.* trade, to traffic, abs., James iv. 13 ; to
cji-pdiTTw, to dip into, Matt. xxvi. 23 ; make gain o/'(acc. 2 Pet. ii. 3.*
),
Mark xiv. 20 ; John xiii. 26. (W. H., l)i-irop£a, as, tj, trade, mcrcJtandise, Matt,
xxii. 5.*
i\L-^o.riVia, to enter, to intrude, to pry into. c)jL-ir<$piov, ov, TO, emporium, a place for
Col. n. 18.* trading, John ii. 16.*
c)i-pipd^a), to cause to enter, to put on ^(i-iropos, OV, 6, a merchant,
traveller,
hoard. Acts xxvii. 6.* trader. Matt. : Iii. 45 Rev. xviii.*
;
c)i-pXcircD, to direct tJic eyes to anything, to e^-irpi^Oo), aw, to set on fire, to burn,
look fixedly, to consider, to know by Matt. xxii. 7.*
ins2)ection (ace, dat., or eis). ^jJL-irpoo-Gcv, adv., before {eixirpoadev koI
€)i-Pp(,p,do}JLai, Qixai, dep., to be moved 6in<xd€v,in front and behind, Rev. iv.
icith indignation, Mark xiv. 5 ; John 6); as prep, (gen.), before, in presence
xi« 38 (R.V. marg. );
33, to charge of. Matt. x. 32 before, in dignity, ;
c(i^a>, <3, 1st aor., inf. e/xeVat, to vomit, to ep.-(}>avr|s, is, manifest (dat.). Acts x. 40 ;
spue out. Rev. iii. 16.* Rom. X. 20.*
c|i-(ia£vo(j.ai, to be mad against (dat.), €fjL-<|>avC^&>, law, to make manifest (ace.
Acts xxvi. II.* and dat.) to shoio plainly {on, or
;
power over, authorship, right, etc. /3, IT, <p, and fi, into e/m- ; anu before
See § 336. X, into e\- (but "W. H. prefer tlie
ep,irai"yp.ovTi, mockery, 2 Pet. iii. 3 (W.H.). unassimilated forms). The v is, how-
€ft-Trai"y[i6s,ov, 6, a being mocked or ever, restored before the augment in
derided, Heb. xi. 36.* verbs.
cji-iraC^w, ^oj, to mock, deride, scoff at €v-aYKaX£^o|jLai, to take up into one's
(abs. or dat.). arms, Mark ix. 36, x. 16.*
;
4v-dXios, ov (aXs), being or living in the ^v-8v(ris, ew5, V7, a putting on or wearing
sea, marine, James iii. 7.* of clothes, I I'et. iii. 3.*
?v-avTi, adv., as j)rep. with gen., in the cv-cSpa, as, an ambush, a snare. Acts
i),
2?rcsc)U'c of, before, Luke i. 8 ; Acts xxiii. 16 (W. H.), xxv. 3.*
viii. 21 (W. H.).* €v-c8pcti(tf, to waich, to entrap, to lie in
cv-avfCos, a, ov, over against, contrary, ambush for (ace. ), Luke xi. 54 ; Acts
of the wind, as Acts xxvii. 4 ; adverse, xxiii. 21.*
hostile, as Acts xxvi. 9 ; e^ ivavrias, cv-ciXcd), w, 1st aor. ivdXriaa, to roll up,
over against, Mark xv. 39. Neut., to tvrap in (ace. and dat.), Mark
havTLOv, adv. as prep, with gen., in XV. 46.*
the ji'i'cscncc of, as Luke xxiv. 16 ; ^v-ci,|ii, to be in, to have a place in, Luke
Acts vii. 10. xi. 41, Ttt hbvra, such things as are in
^v-dpxop.ai, to begiHy Gal. iii. 3 ; Phil, [the platter, ver. 39], or such as ye
i. 6.* have, i.e., according to your ability.
Ivaros. See ivvaros. For 6'eo-ri impers., see hi.*
€v-8cTJs, ^s, in want, destitute, needy, Acts ^vcKa or heKev, sometimes etveKev, prep,
iv. 34.* adv. gen. because of, by reason of, on
,
,
2v-8eiY)ia, aros, to, indication, proof,an account of. oi5 Hvckcv, because, Luke
manifest token, 2 Thess. i. 5.* iv. 18 rivos evcKev ; to what end / Acts
;
JfvScKo, oi, at, rd, eleven, ol tvdeKa, the p)lis}i, as I Cor. xii. 11 ; mid., to be
Eleven, i.e., apostles. effective, to be in action. Part., hep-
cvS^KUTOS, rj, ov, eleventh. yovfjLevr], James v. 16 (see R.V.).
cv-8cxo(iai, dep., to admit; only imper- cv-cpYHK'^i aros, to, ivorking, effect; pluT.
sonally, ovK evdex^rai, it is not admis- with gen., i Cor. xii. 6, 10.*
sible or jwssible^ Luke xiii. 33.* €v-6p7TJs> ^s, effectual, energetic, i Cor.
^v-STfiiea), Q, to be at ho7ne, 2 Cor. v. 6, xvi. 9 ; Hei). iv. 12 ; Philem. 6.*
8, 9;* €v-€o-Tws, perf. participle of iviaTrj/jn.
kv-hiSvcKiii, mid., to clothe oneself u-ith iv-€v-\oyi<a, Q, to bless, to distinguish by
(ace. ), Luke viii. 27, xvi. 19 ; Mark xv. blessings. Acts iii. 25 ; Gal. iii. 8.*
17 (W. H.).* See ev80vo}. €v-^<D, {i) to hold in, entangle, only in
lv-8iKos, ov, agreeable to justice, right, pass, (dat.), Gal. v. i (2) to set one- ;
*
righteous, Rom. iii. Heb. ii. 3.
8 ; self against (dat.), Mark vi. 19 ; Luke
4v-8o)JLT](ris, ews, 17, a structure, a building. xi. 53.*
Rev. xxi. 18.* ^vOaSc, adv., (i) hither, to this place;
lv-8o|d^(>), o-w, to glorify, to honour, (2) here, in this jilace.
2 Thess. i. 10, 12.* €v-6v[i€0|xai, ovfiai, dej). pass., to revolve
{v-8o|oSt ov, adorned with honour, glo- in mind, to think upon. Matt. i. 20,
rioles, Luke xiii. 17 Eph. v. 27
of ; ; ix. 4 ; Acts X. 19 (W. H., diev-).*
persons, had in honoiir, i Cor. iv. 10 ;
cv-0vp.T]o-is, ews, 17, thought, reflection,
of external appearance, splendid, Luke contrivance.
vii. 25.* 2vi, elliptical for eveaTi, impers. , there is
Iv-8v(ia, aros, ro, a garment, raiment. in, I Cor. vi. 5 (W. H.) Gal. ; iii. 28 ;
or to invest with (two aces.) mid., to ; part. eveaTtjKws, sync, ivearwi, im-
enter, insinuate oneself into (2 Tim. pending), or 2^>'csent, i Cor. vii. 26
iii. 6), to put on, to clothe oneself with Gal. i. 4 Heb. ix. 9. ra ivearurra,
;
(ace.) ; often fig., to invest with. pi'esent things, opposed to to. uAWovra,
432 VOCABULARY. [iv-iorxvki) — c^-a'yopdl^b)
things to come, Rom. viii. 38 ; i Cor. evToXal, the cominandnients, i.e., the
iii. 22.* ten.
kv-\.ayj)u>, to invigorate, to strengthen, cv-TOTTios,oi;, 6 (prop, adj.), an inhabit'
Luke xxii. 43; Acts ix. 19 (see ant. Acts xxi. 12.*
W. H.).* ^ €VTos, adv. as prep., with gen., within^
^wttTOSj 77, ov ("W. H., eVaros), ninth. Luke xvii. 21. to evTos, tJie interior,
evv^a, OL, al, rd, nine, Luke xvii. 17.* Matt, xxiii. 26.*
Ivvev-qKOVTa-cvv^a, ninetij-nine, IMatt. ev-Tpciro), i/zw, 2nd fut. pass., ivrpaTrricro-
xviii. 12, 13 Luke xv. 4, 7 (see W. H).*
; fxai ; 2nd aor. pass., eveTpdirrjv ; to 2)ut
^vvcds, ov(W, H., iv€b%), dumb, speechless, to shame, as i Cor. iv. 14 ; Tit. ii. 8 ;
adv., Mark i. 35. (\V. H., h'vvxo..)* Cor. yi. 5, xv. 34.*
€V-oiK€<i>, (S, to dwell in, to inhabit (iv). €V-Tpv<|)d«, tj, to live luxuriously, to ban-
kvorris, T-qros, i) (efs), unity, concord, quet, to revel (with ev), 2 Pet. ii. 13.*
Epli. iv. 3, 13.* Iv-Tv-yxdvo), to come to, to address. Acts
cv-oxXcw, Co, todldarb,
occasion tumult, to xxv. 24 ; w'ith virep (gen. ), to intercede
Heb. xii. 15 Luke vi. 18 (W. H.).* : for, Rom. viii. 27, 34 ; Heb. vii. 25 ;
?v-oxos, ov, guilty of ''gen. of the crime, with KaTo. (gen. ), to plead, against, Rom.
or of that which is violated) ; subject xi. 2.*
to (dat. of court, fi;en. of punishment, €v-TvX£<r<rw, ^w, to wrap in, to ivrap up.
ets of the place of punishment). Matt, xxvii. 59 ; Luke xxiii. 53 John ;
* See eV.
Phil. ii. 29 ; i Pet. ii. 4, 6. «!, prep.
bition : of Cor.
(rod\'}
I commands, cl-ayYt'XXw, to declare abroad, celebrate,
vii. 19; Christ^ s jJi'ecepts or teachings, I Pet. ii. 9.*
I Cor. xiv. 37 I Tim, vi. 14 ; tradi- ;
€^-a7opdt(*), to buy from, buy back, redeem.
tions of tJie Rabbis, Tit. i. 14. at Gal. iii. 13 (e/c), i^- 5- "^^^ Kaipov, to
ii-6.yo» — c^-opoXo-y^w] VOCABULARY. 433
redeem the ojyportimity from being lost, cI-Ako), to draw out from the right way,
Eph. V. i6; Col. iv. 5.* James i. 14.*
I|-d7w, 2nd aor. i^-fiyayov, to lead out, to €|-epap.a, aroj, to, th^it which is vomited,
send forth (with ^|w, e/c, ei's). 2 Pet. ii. 22.*
£|aip€cu, Q) (see § 103, i), to take or 2)1 uck €|€p€vvda> (W. H., -pav-), to search diligent-
out, Matt. V. 29, xviii. 9 mid., to ; ly, I Pet. i. 10.*
rescue, deliver, Acts vii. 10, 34, xii. 11, €|-€pxopLai (see § 103, 2), to go or to come out
xxiii. 27, xxvi. 17 Gal. i. 4.* ; of (with gen. or eV, airb, e^u, Trapd) ; to
6|-aipcD (see § 92), ^0 take out or away ; go aivay, to depart, to issue or to spring
to expel or excommunicate,
Cor. i from ; to go forth ; of a rumour, to he
V. 2 (W. H., 13.* ai'pw), divulged or s2Jread abroad ; to emanate,
cg-aiTCO), w, N.T., mid., to require^to ask as thoughts from the heart, healing
for, Luke xxii. 31.* power from the Saviour ; to go out,
^-aC^vt]^, adv., suddenly, tinexpectedly. i.e., vanish, as expiring hope, Acts
€|-aKoXov0€ci>, w, ^
follow, to persist in xvi. 19.
foUoiving (dat.), 2 Pet. i. 16, ii. 2, 15.* (i^io-ri, part. (impers. from
neut. i^ov
c^aKocrioi, at, a, six hundred. as Matt. xiv. 4 ; it
e^eLfiL), it is laicful,
c|-aXei(|>a), to wipe out, obliterate^ Rev. is becoming, as Acts xvi. 21 ; it is 2^os-
5 ; Col. ii. 14 ; Acts jii. 19 ; io
iii. sible, as Matt. xx. 15. The part, is
ivipe away. Rev. vii. 17, xxi. 4 {dirb used in the same sense, with or with-
or e/c).* out subst. verb. Matt. xii. 4; 2 Cor.
l5-d\Xo|xai, to Zmj9 forth or 2<2^ Acts iii. xii. 4 (dat. and inf. ).
•g-opK^^d), to adjure^ put to oath, Matt, Passover, with its accompanying feast
xxvi. 63.* of unleavened bread, as Luke ii. 41,
one who jnds to oath or
<|-opK«.<rTi^S> ov, 6, xxii. I.
adjures, " exorcist," Acts xix. 13.* €Tr-oYycX£a, as, ij, (i) a message, commis-
cg-opvco-o), |w, to dig out, Gal. iv. 15 ;
sion, Acts xxiii. 21 ; (2) a promise, as
hence, to break uj), Mark ii. 4.* 2 Cor. i. 20, generally plur. ; the
^-ovSevc'o), or i^ovdeviw, Q (ovdeis), to set promises, specially, e.g., to Abraham,
at nought, to treat icith coiUevijit. or those of the Gospel, as 2 Tim. i. i ;
Perf. pass. part, i^ovdev-qixevos, con- (3) met., the thing promised, as Acts
temned, disestcemed, i Cor. i. 28, vi. 4. ii. 33; Heb. xi. 13, 33, 39.
c|-ov8€v6(i), w, as preceding, Mark ix. 12 eir-ayyeXXw, mid. in X.T., except pass..
(W. H., -^w).* Gal. iii. 19, {i) to promise, with dat.,
€|-ov(ria, as, 7/ (e^eo-ri), {\) power, ability, or ace. and dat. or inf. once cognate
, ,
as John xix. 11 ; (2) liberty, licence, ace, I John ii. 25 ; (2) to make pro-
privilege, right, as Rom. ix. 21 ; (3) fession or avowal of (ace), i Tim. ii.
commission, authority, as Matt. xxi. 23 10, vi. 21.
(4) ai i^ovalai, tlie powers, i.e., rulers, €ir-dyY«Xp,a, aros, t6, a promise, 2 Pet.
magistrates, Luke Jcii. 1 1 ; angels, good i. 13.*
4, iii.
and bad, Eph. i. 21, vi. 12. In i Cor. (.TT-ayu), to bring upon, Acts v. 28 ; 2 Pet.
e^ojdev, tJwse from without, as i Tim. lir-atTCft), w, to beg, to ask alms, Luke
iii. 7. As prep, gen., Mark vii. 15 ; xvi. 3, xviii. 35 (W. H.).
Rev. xi. 2. err-aKoXovO^, w, to follow after (dat.) ;
el-wGe'w, a), u}(X(j), to drive out, expel, Acts fig., I Tim. V. 10, 24 ; I Pet. ii. 21 ;
vii. 45 ; to propel, as a vessel, Acts part., attendant, Mark xvi. 20 (see
xxvii. 39 (see W. H. and marg. ).* W. H.).*
c|(tfT€pos, a, ov(comp. of e^w), outer, in eir-aKovw, to hearken to favourably (gen.
the phrase " outer darkness," Matt. pers.), 2 Cor. vi. 2.*
viii. 12, xxii. 13, xxv, 30.* eir-aKpodopiai., w^tac, to hear, listen to (gen.
leiKa. See ef/co;. pers.). Acts xvi. 25.*
(oprdl^o), to keep or celebrate a feast, eirdv, conj. (eTrei Slv), if after that, when,
I Cor. v. 8.* (subj.). Matt. ii. 8*; Luke xi. 22, 34.*
iopTTj, Tjs, 7], a solemn feast or festival. €ir-dva7K€s, adv., of necessity, necessarily
Used of Jewish feasts, especially of the (with art.), Acts xv. 28.*
;
membrance [a-cc), Rom. XV. 15.* eir-cK€iva {/Jt-epv), adv. with gen., beyond,
eir-ava-iravo)JLai, to rest upon {iiri, ace), as to place. Acts vii. 43.*
Luke X. 6 ; to rely, to trust in (dat. ), €ir-€K-Tcfvw, in mid., to stretch forwards
Rom. ii. 17.* to (dat.), Phil. iii. 14.*
€Tr-av-€pxo|iai, to come hack, rctui'n, Luke €ir-€v-8vnis, ov, an upper garment, John
X. 35 xix. 15.*
; xxi. 7.*
4ir-av-Com]ni, N.T., mid., to rise up put on, as an upper
eir-6v-8vw, in mid., to
against {^irl, ace), Matt. x. 21 Mark ; garment, 2 Cor. v. 2, 4.*
xiii. 12.* eir-epxo^i, to come upon, ap2^'oach,
^ir-av-op0(aa-is, fws, t], correction, reforma- arrive at, befall, Jiappcn ; to attack,
tion, 2 Tim. iii. 16.* Luke rd e-jrepxofi^ua, the things
xi. 22.
cir-dvb), adv. abs., or as prep, gen., that are coming on (dat.), Luke xxi. 26.
above, upon ; more than, in price or eir-cpcDTdti), u), (i) to interrogate, to ques-
number ; superior to, in authority. tion (two aces., or ace.and Trepi, gen.,
CTT-apK^o), Co, ^<T(j}, to suffice for, to relieve, or with et, rt's etc.) ; to question;
Roman Empire, Acts xxiii. 34, xxv. i.* q/" (ace. and inf.). Matt. xvi. i.
lir-avXis, ews, 17, a dwelling, a habitation. eir-cp(OTT]|JLa, aros, rb (i Pet. iii. 2l),
Acts i. 20.* probably inquii-y after God ; "the seek-
€-Tr-avpu>v, adv., on the moirow. ry ing after God in a good and pure con-
(ijfi^pg.) (Travpiou, on the next day. science " (Alford). See R.V.*
cir-a'UTO-<|>wpa). See dvT6-<f)0}poi. kTr-i\ii>, {i)to apply (the mind) to (dat.),
'E'ira<|)pds, a, 6, Epaphras of Colossse, take heed to, Luke xiv. 7 ; Acts iii. 5 ;
Col. i. 12; Philem. 23 (contr.
7, iv. I Tim. iv. 16 ; (2) to hold out, to exhibit,
from Epaphroditus, but ditferent from Phil. ii. 16 ; (3) "to detain (one-
St. Paul's companion of that name).* self)," to tari-y. Acts xix. 22.*
(ir-a<j>pC^(tf, to foam up or out (ace), cir-i]p€dt<i>, to injure, to treat despitefully.
Jude 13.* Matt. V. 44 (not W. H.), Luke vi. 28 ;
*E'ira<|>pdoiTos, ov, b, Epaphroditus, a to traduce, to accuse falsely (ace. of
Macedonian, Phil. ii. 25, iv. 18.* charge), i Pet. iii. 16.*
lir-cycCpo), to raiseup, to excite against {eirl, eiri, a preposition governing gen., dat.,
aec, or Kara, gen. ), Acts xiii. 50, xiv. 2.* or ace. General signification, u2)on.
lircC, conj., (i) of time, when, only Luke For its various applications, see § 305.
vii. I (W. H., iweidr)); (2) of reason, eirt,-, in composition, signifies motion
siiice, because, seeing tJiat. upon, towards, or against ; rest on,
eirci-Sifj, conj., since truly, inasmuch as, over, or at; addition, succession, re-
as Matt. xxi. 46 ; Phil. ii. 26 ; of time, petition, renewal; and it is often
when, only Luke vii. i ( W. H. ). intensive.
eir€t-8ir]-'n'«p, conj., since verily, forasmuch eiri-pa£v(d, to go ujjon a ship, to mount a
as, Luke i. i.* horse or ass, to come to or into o. country
eir-ct8ov. See e(f)opdco. ace, eis, or simple dat.). Matt. xxi.
(eTTi,
^-cifjLi {elfjLi, 111), to § come after, to 5 Acts XX. 18, xxi. 2, 6 (AV. H., e>i3.),
;
Acts xvi. II, XX. 15, xxi. 18.* a garment, Luke v. 36 (2) intrans., ;
lireC-ircp, conj., since indeed, Rom. iii. 30. to rush violently on, Mark iv. 37 ; to
^
(W. H., etirep.)* fx the mind stcdfastly on anything,
eir-twr-a-ywy^, ^j, ij, a bringing in, in- Mark xiv. 72; (3) part., iwL^dWuv,
troduction, Heb. vii. 9.* falling to his share, Luke xv 12,
436 VOCABULARY. [^rt-Pap^<i> — ^iri-XafApdvw
hri-^apioi, w, to burdoi ; fig,, 2 Cor. ii. Trept, gen, or inf. ) ; to beg earriestly, to
5 ; I Tliess. 9 2 Thess. iii. 8.*
ii, ; desire.
ciri-P^Pa'^o), to put or to set upon, as on a ^TTi-Gavdrios, ov, a2)poiiUed to death,
beast to ride, Luke x. 34, xix. 35 ; I Cor, iv. 9,*
liri-XavOdvofiai, dep., to forget (inf., gen. €Tri-iro0i](ris, ews, yj, vehement desire,
or ace. ); part. pert", pass. iiriXeXTjafMevov, , strong affection, 2 Cor. vii. 7, 11.*
forgotten, Luke xii. 6. €iri-Tr60TiTos, ov, greatly desired, longed
^i-X€"Y«, in pass., to be named or called, ^
for, Phil. iv. i.*
John V. 2 ; mid., to choose, Acts xv. eiri-iroGia, a?, 7/, like iinTr6dr](ri.s, strong
40.* desire, Rom.
xv. 23.*
^i-XcCiro), Twt to suffice, to fail, Heb. xi. eTri,-irop€vopxii, dep., mid., to come to
{irpos), Luke viii. 4.*
«iri-XT](rp.ovTJ, tJs, t), forgetfillness, James 4'irip-pd'TrTu), to sew to, or vpon, Mark ii.
25.
i. See § 257.'* 21 {eiri, dat.).*
€ir£-Xonros, ov, remaining, i Pet. iv. 2.* eirip-pCiTTw, to cast, or Jling upon, Luke
^iri-Xvo-is, cws, 7), solution, interpretation, xix. 35 ; of care cast upon God, i Pet.
*
2 Pet. i.(See tStos.)*
20. V. 7 (tTTi, acc).
€irt-Xvti>, to solve, explain, interpret, ^[ark €Tri-(rTi|xos, ov, remarkable, distinguished,
iv. 34 ; to detej-minc on, as a debated in either a bad or good sense, Matt.
*
question, Acts xix. 39. xxvii. 16 ; Rom. xvi. 7.*
en-i-^apTvpea>, Co, to testify earncsthj, I €Tri-o-iTio-[ids, ov, 6, victuals, food, pi^o-
Pet. V. 12.* vision, Luke ix. 12.*
em-|xeX€ia, as, 17, care for, study, atten- cTTi-a-KcirTOfiat, dep., to look upon, to visit,
tion, Acts xxvii. 3.* as Acts vii. 23 ; Matt. xxv. 36, 43 ;
eiri-ficXofxai and 4ofiat, ov/xai, to tnlcc care of God, Acts XV. 14 to look out, for ;
*
6'iri-<rTpo<j)TJ, Tjs, T), a turning, conversion. or manifest, Tit. ii. 11, iii. 4.
Acts XV. 3.* €'Tri-(f>dvcia, aj, ri, appearance, i Tim. vi.
liri-o-uv-dYci), to gather together, into one 14 ; manifestation, 2 Thess. ii. 8 2 ;
place, as Matt, xxiii. 37. Tim. i. 10, iv. i, 8 ; Tit. ii. 13.*
^iri-orvv-aYwyT), ^j, i), a gathering to- €iri-<|)av'^s, ^s, glorious, illustrious, Acts
gether, 2 Thess. ii. i;25.*Heb. x. ii. 20.*
eiri-<rvv-Tpcx.w> to run together, to a place, ciri-(f>avo>, or -(pavaKU), fut. au), to shine
Mark ix. 25.* upon, give light to (dat.), Eph. v. 14.*
«'Tri-<rv-<rTa<ris, ewj, 17 {iiriaTaffts, W. H.), €Tri-(f>epa) (see § 103, 6), to bring to {eiri,
(i) a seditious concourse. Acts xxiv. ace), Acts xix. 12 to superadd {to, ;
join upon {d&t. ofpers., thing in ace. iir\-\i<af to jwur upon, as medicaments
or inf. ), Mark ix. 25 on wounds, Luke x. 34.*
em-rikiui, Q, ^au), to finish, to bring to eiri-xop-Ty^w, w, to supply, 2 Pet. i. 5 2 ;
eiriT'^Scios, a, ov, fit, needful, James ii. 4iri-xp£(D> to rub, or smear iipon [iirl, ace),
16.* John ix. 6, 11.*
mti-tCGthii, put, place, or lay upon
to 4ir-oiKo8o|x4a>, w, to build upon {eiri, ace.
(with ace. and
dat., or eirl, ace. or ordat.), Cor. iii. 10-14 Eph. ii.
iig., i ;
gen.), as the hands (to heal), as 20 ; to build up, edify, Acts xx. 32
stripes, etc. of gifts, to load with.
; (not W. H.) Col. ii. 7 ; Jude 20.*
;
eir-OTrT€vw, to he witness off I Pet. ii. 12, Ipt'w, obsolete. See <t)y)id, dirov, and
iii. 2.* § 103, 7.
eir-cJin-qs, ou, 6, a7i eye-wittiess, a he- €pT](j.(a, as, T], an uninhabited tract, a
holder, 2 Pet. i. 16.* desert.
^TTOS, ovs, TO, a tvord ; (is ^ttoj dTr^lv, as I ^pT]px)s, ov, deserted, desolate, waste,
*
may say, Heb. vii. 9. barren. Acts i. 20 ; Gal. iv. 27 used in ;
Mrovpdvtcs, lov, heavenly, celestial, of the fem., as a subst., for a desert, Luke
God, ^latt. xviii. 35 (oupavtos, W. H.) ;
i. 80; epT7/iosT^s'Ioi'5atas, tlie u:ilderncss
of intelligent beings, Phil. ii. lo ; of of Judcca, the tract west of the Dead
the starry bodies, i Cor. xv. 40. So of Sea, Matt. iii. 12 77 ifrn[xos, the desert ;
eirraKKTXiXiot, at, a, card, num., seven perhaps connected with epiov), epidia,
thousand, Rom. xi. 4.* \y. H., "the spirit of a mercenary,"
hrbi. See ctTrov and § 103, 7. self-seeking, ox jjarty -spirit, Rom. ii. 8;
"EpaoTOs, ou, 6, ErastuSy Acts xix. 22. Phil. i. 16, ii. 3 ; James iii. 16 14, ;
(p^d^o^ai, ao/jLai, dep., perf. etfyyacrfiai, plur. in 2 Cor. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20.*
pass., (i) abs., to U/'orA:, to labour, to Spiov, ou, rd, ?<;ooZ, Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev. i.
the church, 2 Tim. ii. 15 a doer, of ; 'Epfifis, 01', 6, the Greek deity .0gr77ie5 (in
iniquity, Luke xiii. 27. Latin, Mercury), Acts xiv. 12.*
^p-yov, ov, TO [fepy- so Germ., icerk), a ; 'EpftcyevT^s, ous, 6, Henaogenes, 2 Tim. i.
work, a deed, an enterprise, Acts v. 38 ;
a miracle, John vii. 3, 21 ; act, con- €pireTov, ov, t6, a creeping creature, a re}}-
trasted with \d70s, speech, Luke xxiv. tile. Acts x. 23.* 12, xi. 6 ; Rom. i.
19 ; any action, good or bad, Acts ix. cpvdpds, d, oV, red. epvdpd ddXaaaa, the
36 John iii. ig a thing wrought, by
; ; lied Sea, Acts vii. 36 Heb. xi. 29.* ;
God, Acts XV. 18 by men, Acts vii. ; ^pXopAi (see § 103, 2), to com€, to g^o, of
41 ; by the devil, i John iii. 8. persons or of things ; 6 epxdfxevos, the
epc6C^o) (^pis), to provoke, to to ex- excite, coming one, i.e., the Messiah, Matt,
asperate, 2 Cor. ix. 2 ; Col. iii. 21.* xi. 3 ; Heb.
in Rev. i. 4, 8,
x. 37 ;
cpcuvdw, a), 17<TW (epavvdb}, W. H.), to come forth, as from the grave, i Cor.
search diligcnily, John v. 39 ; Rom. XV. 35 to come back, as the prodigal,
;
xiii. 12, lit. through a mirror, as the things or persons ev iroifiu} ex^^v, to ;
'Eo-ptofji, 6, Esrom, Matt, i. 3 ; Luke iii. €Tos, yearly, Luke ii. 41.
33-* €v, adv. (old neuter, from eus), well ;ljvke
t(r\a.ro% rj, ov, (i) the last, remotest, in xix. 17, Eph. vi. 3 eiJ iroielv (ace), ;
of, e.g., the feast, John vii. 37 the ; €v-a'Y7£X£^w, <Tw, eirqyyeKica, evrjyy^Xia fj.ai
world, John vi. 39, 40 (4) spec, of the ;
(
I ) act., to bring glad tidings to (ace. or
ii. 8, the first and the last, describes the ajinounced, to have glad tidings an-
eternity of ; God
adv. -ws, extremely, nounced to one. See Matt. xi. 5 ;
EijpovXos, ov, 6, Euhulus, 2 Tim. iv. 2:.* €v-\ap€0|Mii, oO/iai, dep. pass., to fear^
evycvf^s, ^s, well-horn, noble, ingenuous Acts 10 (0o/3ea), "NV. H.) with
xxiii. ;
generous, Luke xix. 12 ; Acts x\'ii. fxi], to take precaution, Heb. xi. 7.*
to think well of, to be pleased icith. to praise, i.e., God to invoke blessings ;
Matt. xvii. 5; 2 Pet. i. 17 ^0 resolve ; on, i.e., men to bless or to ask bless-
;
benevolently, Luke xii. 32. ing on, i.e., food, Luke ix. 16. So of
ev-8oK£a, as, 17, pleasure, good-will, the Lord's Supper, ilatt. xxvi. 26 ; i
favour, Phil. ii. 13; 2 Thess. i. 11 ; Cor. X. 16. L^sod of what God does,
Matt. xi. 26. to bless, to distinguish loith favour.
€v-€p76(rCa, as, i], a good work done to Hence pass. part. evXoyrifievos, blessed,
(gen. ), a benefit bestoived, Acts iv. 9 ; i favoured of God, Matt. xxv. 34. Syn.
Tim. vi. 2.* 28.
eu-cp-ycTcw, ^o r?o good, to confer kindness, cv-Xo-ytiTos, 6v (verbal adj. from preced.),
Acts x. 38.* worthy of 2^^'<^^se, of blessing, used
€v-cp7enis, ov, b, a he.nefador, a patron, only of God, Mark xiv. 61 ; Luke i.
Luke xxii. 25.* 68 Rom. i. 25, ix. 5
; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi. ;
ix. 62, xiv. 35 ; Heb. vi. 7.* ev-Xo^ia, as, 17, ^'eulogy,'' commendation,
€v0€<»)s, adv. , inwiediaiely, soon, sjjeedily, in a good sense, and in a bad sense
forthvjith, see tvdvs. adulation, Rom. xvi. 18 ; blessing,
€v6v-8pop.e(i), w, io a nm m straight 2)raise, to God, Rev. vii. 12 benedAc- ;
course. Acts xvi. 11, xxi. i.* tion, i.e., wishing or conferring good
6v-0v;x€'fc), w, ^0 he in good spirits, to be upon, Heb. xii. 17 ; bounty, 2 Cor. ix.
cheerful, Acts xxvii. 22, 25 James ; 5 the blessing which the Gospel secures^
;
cv-iropCa, as, 17, wealth, prosperity^ Acts c{(-(|>i]fios, ov, praiseworthy, of good re-
xix. 25.* port, Phil. iv. 8.*
cv-Trpe'ireia, as, 7/, beauty, gracefuhiesSy ci-<f>op€Q), €), to bear plentifully, Luke
James i. ii.* xii. 16.*
cv-'irp(J<r-8€KTOs, ov, well received, accept- cv-(f>paCva), vC), eixppdvdrjv and rjixppdvdrjv,
able, Rom. XV. 16, 31 2 Cor. vi. 2,
; act., to make glad, 2 Cor. ii. 2 ;
pass.,
viii. 12 I Pet. ii.
;
5.* to be joyful, to rejoice, Luke xii. 19 ;
out how, by thought and inventing, «vx^> ^s, -^^ {i)praAjer, James v. 15 (2) ;
wind, and k\v5u)v, icave), euroclydon, 16 {for with I'TT^p or -jrepL, gen.); to
a stonmj wind, a hurricame. Acts u'is/fc earnestly. Acts xxvi. 29, xxvii.
E{}tv\os, ov, 6, Eutyclius, Acts xx. 9.* come to, arrive at, &XP'- or cts, 2 Cor. x.
ev-<j>T])i£a, as, 17, commemlation, good re-
port, 2 Cor. vi. 8.* 44>-£<m]ni, 2nd aor., iiria-Trjv ; perf.
;; ;
4<f>-opd<>), aj, 2iid aor. eTretbov, to look ZaKxai^os, ov, 6, Zacchaus, Luke xix.*
upon, Luke i. 25; Acts iv. 29.* Zapd, 6(Heb.), ^a/-« or Ze rah, Matt. i. 3.*
'E<{>patp,, 6, EjJiraini, a place, John xi. ZaxapCas, ov, 6, ( i ) Zncharias, the father
of John the Baptist, Luke i. (2) ;
to lack, to he poor, Luke viii. 6 ; i Cor. iii. 12 (4) to live, in the highest sense,
;
until seven times; ^ws dvw, up to tlie to be envious or jealous. Acts vii. 9 ; I
brim, etc. Cor. xiii. 4 ; James iv. 2.
444 VoCAiJULARY. [t'nX.CDTljs T|AtKta
J-qXtoTT)?, ov, ( I ) <z zealot, one very zealous make alive, to cause
Xnao-iroiiia, d, rjacj, to
for (gen.), Acts xxi. 20 (2) as a sur- ;
to live, toquicken, John v. 21, vi. 63 ;
name, Zelotes, Luke vi. 15 Acts i. 13. ; I Cor. XV. 22, 36, 45 ; 2 Cor. iii. 6 ;
tvfJidb), w, to ferment, to leo^ven, Matt. xiii. iii. 10 ; of the immediate future, Rom.
i^XCkos, 7}, ov, Twiv great, hmv much, how fJTTwv or -^(Tcuv {W. H. ), irreg., com-
little, Col. ii. i ; James iii. 5.*' par. of KUKos, inferior, neut. as adv.,
TJXios, ov, 6, the sun, the light of the sun. 2 Cor. xii. 1 5 TO ^ittov, as subst. th".
; ,
f|Xo$, ov, 6, a nail, John xx. 25.* worse, I Cor. xi. 17.*
^liciS) gen. 'r]ixC}v, dat. i^iuv, ace. ^/iSs, Tjxc'o), u), to sound, as the sea, Luke xxi.
iqjjicpa, as, 7], a day, i.e., the time from Jj^os, ov, 6, sound, Heb. xii. 19 Acts ;
iqiiCTcpos, a, ov, our, our own. TJYos, ovs, t6, soundy noise, Luke xxi. 25
iv^\.^o,vi\%, is, half dead, Luke x. 30.* (W. H.).*-
f]|JLi(rvS| eia, v, gen., ijfxicTovs, half ; in
neut. only, the lialf of, (gen.) plur.
{ijula-T], W. H. V^(rta),Lukexix. 8; sing.,
(4) H. Agrippa the younger, called ix. 6 (W. H, omit). So pass., Mark i.
only Agrippa, Acts xxv. 27, X. 32; with iiri (dat.), Mark x.
'HpcoSiavoC (W. H., -({}-), Qv, oi, Herod- 24.*
ians, partisans of Herod Antipas, 6d|xPos, ous, TO, astonishment, Luke iv.
Matt. xxii. 16 Mark iii. 6, xii. 13.* ; 36, V, 9 ; Acts iii. 10.*
*Hp<«)8ids(W. H., -y-), ados, i], Herodias. 6avd(ri)j.os, ov, deadly, mortal, Mark xvi.
Matt, xiv. 3, 6. 18.*
'HpwSCwv (W. H., -if-), uvos, 6, Hcrodion, 0avaTT]-(j)dpos, ov, dcath-hringing, James
Rom. xvi. II.* iii. 8.*
*H<raCaSi 01^, 6, Esaias, i.e., Isaiah. Odvaros, ov, 6, death, lit. or fig. ; the
*H(rav, 6 (Heb.), Esau, Rom. ix. 13; cause of death, Rom. vii. 13.
Heb. xi, 20, xii. 16.* Oavarofa), Cj, cicrw, to put to death, pass.,
i^<rvxd$<D, <j<i}, {i)to rest from, work, Luke to he in danger of death, Rom. viii.
xxiii. 56 ; (2) to cease from altercation, 36 ; fig. to mortify, subdue, as evil
,
to he silent, Luke xiv. 4 ; Acts xi. 18 ; passions, Rom. viii. 13 pass., to be- ;
(3) to live quietly, i Thess. iv. 11.* come dead to (dat.), Rom. vii. 4.
•qo-ux^** °-^^ Vj (i) guict, silence. Acts OdiTTU), \j/(i}, 2nd aor, h-a<pov, to huj'y.
xxii. 2 ; I Tim. ii. 11 ; (2) tranquillity, @dpa, 6, Terah, 34.* Luke iii.
^rrrifia, arcs, t6, inferiority, diminution, Oavfid^o), crw, or aofxai, to tvondcr, abs.,
Rom. xi. 12 ; loss, i Cor. vi. 7.* with did, ace; em, dat.; irepi, gen., or
446 VOCABULARY. [6av|id(rios — 0Y]pio-[jiax^M
6'ti, ft ; to wonder aty Udinire^ ace. Oco-ccpcia, ay, 7/, 2nety, towards God, i
pass., to he admired or honoured. Tim. ii. 10.*
6avp,d(rkos, la, lov, wonderfalj Matt. xxi. 6€o-(rcpT|S) es, God-woi'shijyping, devout^
15.* ^ John 31.* ix.
Oav)ia<rToS) tJ, 6y, wonderful, marvellous, 0€o-<rTVYi^S» ^s, God-hating, or God-hatedj
Matt. xxi. 42 ; Mark xii. 1 1 ; John ix. Rom. i. 30.*
30; Pet. ii. 9; Rev. xv. i, 3.*
I OeorqSi TT]Tos, 7], deity, godhead, the divine
0€d, a J, a goddess, Acts xix. 27.
T)y culture. Col. ii. 9.* Syn. 34.
dedo^ai, G)ixaL, dep., 1st aor. ideaadfirjv, 0co-<|>iXos, 01', 6, Theophilus, Luke i. 3 ;
pass, ideddrjv, to behold, to contemplate Acts i. I.*
earnestly, to sec, to visit. OcpaircCa, as, ij, (i) service; hence (abs.
Ocarp^to)) to make a
spectacle of, so to ex- for concrete) servants, houscJwld, Luke
pose to contempt, Heb. x. 33.* xii. 42 ; Matt. xxiv. 45 (not W. H.) ;
Qidrpov, ov, t6, (i) a place for public (2) healing, as the service which brings
shows, a theatre. Acts xix. 29, 31 ; (2) health and cure, Luke ix. 1 1 ; Rev.
spectacle, i Cor. iv. 9.* xxii. 2.*
Oclos, eta, €LOv, divine, 2 Pet. i. 3, 4 ; to Ocpaircvo), cvata, {i) to serve, minister to,
*
deiov, perhaps the Deity, Acts xvii. 29. only Acts xvii. (2) to Jieal ; ace. of
25 ;
Ociov, ov, t6, sulphur (from the preced- pers. , and diro or ace. of disease.
magic fume *
ing, '*a "). Ocpdirwv, ovTos, 6, a servant, Heb. iii. 5.
6€i(iaST]St ey, sulphureous. Rev. ix. 17.* 6€pio-p.6s, ov, 6, harvest, the gathering-time,
6eXT]|ia, aros, rb, will, desire, a lust lit, or fig.
plur., Acts xiii. 22 ; Eph. ii. 3. 6€pi<rTT|s, ov, 6, a rea2)er, Iklatt. xii. 30,
0cXTi<ris, cws, 71, will, pleasure, Heb. 39-*
ii. 4.* BipiiaCvia, avQ, only mid. in N,T,, to
Oc'Xw, impf., ijdeXov ; ist aor., i$i\r]cra ;
warm oneself, Mark xiv. 54, 67 John;
to wish, delight in, prefer, to ivill, in xviii. 18, 25 ; James ii. 16,*
the sense of assent, determination, or OepfiT], 7;s, J), heat, burning. Acts xxviii.
requirement. Syn. 3.
6e[i€XioS) ov, belonging to a foundation, Oepos, oi'j, rb, summer, harvest -time.
fundamental. Hence, masc. (sc. \i6os), Matt. xxiv. 32 ; Mark xiii. 28 ; Luke
a foundation, or to de/xiXiov (Luke), in xxi. 30,*
the same sense. Fig. for the elements 0€(r(raXoviKcvs, ^5, 6, a Thessalonian.
of sound doctrine. 0€<ro-aXov£KT], 7)t, 6, Thessalonica.
*
OcfieXidd), Q, wfl-w, to lay a foundation, to 0cvSds, a, 6, Theudas, Acts v. 36,
found; fig., pass., to be firm and stable. 6cci)p^a>, w, to be a spectator of, to behold, to
Oco-SCSaKTos, ov, taught of God, i Thess. see, to know by seeing, to experience;
iv. 9.* abs,, or with ace. or obj. clause.
Gcd-XoyoS) ov, 6, the divine, or the theo- 6€6>p£a, ay, i], a sight, a spectacle, Luke
logian, of the apostle John in the title xxiii. 48.*
to Rev. (W. H. omit).* Bi\K-t], r)s, 7) {Tidi)jxi), a receptacle, as a
6€o-)iaxe«D, cD, to fight against God, Acts scabbard, John xviii. 11.*
xxiii. 9.* 6T]Xdt()>, {i) to give suck, Matt. xxiv. 19;
Oco-jidxos, ov, 6, a fighter against God, (2) to Slick at the breast, Matt. xxi.
Acts V. 39.* 16.
OciJ-irvcvo-Tos, ov {irviu}), God-breathed, 0fjXvs, €La, V, female, fem,, Rom, i, 26,
inspired by Gud, 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 27 ; neut,, ^latt. xix, 4 ; Mark x. 6 ;
9T)piov
— 'laKia^] VOCABULARY. 447
OopvPos, 01', 6, noise, iiproar. Ovpa, as, 17, a door, Luke xi, 7 ; Matt,
Opavo), (Tw, to break, bruise, Luke iv. 18.* xxvii. 60 ; met., John x. 7, 9.
6p€p,)ia, aroj, to {Tpi<pw), the young of Ovpcds, OV, 6, a (door-shaped) shield,
cattle, sJieep, etc., John iv. 12.* Eph. vi. 16.*
6pT)vcu), Q, abs. , to wail, lament, to raise a 6vp£s, t'Sos, i], an opening, used for a
funeral cry, Matt. xi. 17 ; Luke vii. window or wicket, Acts xx. 9 2 Cor. ;
32 John xvi. 20
; ; to bewail, ace, xi. 33.*
Luke xxiii. 27.* OvpcDpds, ov, 6, i], a dom'-keeper, porter,
6pf]vos, ov, b, a wailing, Matt. ii. 18 (not Mark xiii. 34; John x. 3, xviii. 16, 17.*
W. H.).* Qv<ria, as, i], (i) the act of sacrificing;
6pT)o-KcCa, external worshi}}, reli-
as, 7), (2) the victim sacrificed, a sacrifice.
gious homage, ritual. Acts xxvi. 5 ; 0vo-ia<rTTJpiov, ov, to, an altar, for sacri-
Col. ii. 18 James i. 26, 27.*
; fices.
dprjo-Kos, ov (prop, adj.), a devotee, reli- 0v«, (Tw, {i) to slay in sacrifice, Acts xiv.
gious person, James i. 26.* 13 (2) to kill animals, for feasting,
;
Opiafipcvo), <TU), to triumph over, to lead in Matt. xxii. 4 ; (3) io slay, generally,
triumph, 2 Cor. ii. 14; Col. ii. 15.* John X. 10.
6p£|, TpLx6s, dat. plur. dpi^i, i], a hair, 0(t>|jLds, a (from Heb. = didv/ios), Thomas.
human or animal. 6wpa|, aKos, masc, a breast-'jjlate, Eph.
Qpo4<a, w, to disturb, terrify by clamour; vi. 14 ; I Thess. v. 8 Rev. ix. 9, 17.* ;
lo ! behold ! used to call attention not KaivT]'!., Rev. iii. 12, xxi. 2.
only to that which may be seen, but Upuo-vvT], T}s, 7], tJie priestly office, Heb.
also heard, or apprehended in any vii. II, 12, 24.*
way. *l€<r<raf , 6 ( Heb. ), Jesse.
*I8ovp.aCa, aj. t], Idumea, the O.T. Edom, (Heb.), Jephthah.
'l€(|>6dc, 6
*l€^apT|X, T) (H(;b. ), Jezebel, symbolically 'lTi<rovs, ov (see § 25), (i) Jesus, the
used, Rev. ii. 20.* Saviour ; (2) Joshua, Acts vii. 45 ;
UparcCa, as, r/, the office of a priest, priest- Barabbas is so named in some early
hood, Luke i. 9; Heb. vii. 5.* MSS., Matt, xxvii. 16 {^)nn ancestor :
lcpdT€V|ia, aros, t6, the assembly or society of Joseph, Luke iii. 29 (W. H.).
*;
iKavos, 17, bv, (i) sufficient, competent to, 'lovSaiKos, Jewish, or Judaical,
r/i ^v,
inf. , or iva
Trpos (ace. ) ; (2) many, 'much, Tit. i. 14*;
adv., Jewishly, in
-ws,
of nunibei- or time. Jewish style, Gal. ii. 14.*
iKavoTTis, "^Tos, 7], sufficiency, ability, 2 'lovSatos, ata, ov, belonging to Judah,
Cor. iii. 5.* Jewish. Often in plur., with subst.
iKavoci), w, to make sufficient or comjjetent, understood, oi 'lovdaioi, the Jctcs.
2 Cor. iii. 6 ; Col. i. 12.* 'Iov8at<r|ios, ov, b, Judarism, the Jewish
iK€TTipia, as, i], supplication, Heb. v. system, Gal. i. 13, 14.*
7-,* 'lovSas, a, 6, Judah, (i) Son of Jacob;
iK|xds, d5oj, 7], moisture, Luke viii. 6.'^
(2, 3) other ancestors of Christ, Luke
'Ikoviov, 01^, TO, Iconium. iii. 26, 30 (4) J2ide, the apostle
;
iXdcTKop.ai, daofiai, 1st aor. IXdaOrjv, (i) of our Lord, Matt. xiii. 55 perhaps ;
^0 ig 2^'>''^P'^f'^ous to, dat., Luke xviii. identical with (4). See 'Id^w/Sos.
13 ; (2) ^0 wrtA:(J 2^'''^^^^^^^^'^'^ or atone- 'lovXia, as, r), Julia, Rom. xvi. 15.*
ment/or, expiate, ace, Heb. ii,17.* 'lovXios, 01^, 6, Jul' us. Acts xxvii. i, 3.
lXacrp.ds, 01^, 6, « ^/rojntiation, atoning *Iovvias, a, 6, Junius, Rom. xvi. 7.*
sacrifice, i John ii. 2, iv. 10.* 'lovo-Tos, 01', 6, Justus. Three of the
iXa<rTT|ptos, ia, ov, atoning, neut. ,
^)7'o- name are mentioned. Acts i. 23, xviii.
jntiation, Rom. iii. 25 : (sc. ^iridefxa, 7 ; Col. iv. II.*
covering), the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5.* e'ws, 6, a horse-soldier. Acts xxiii.
iirirciis,
that not, lest. See § 384. equality, Phil. ii. 6 tews, adv., per- ;
ivari ; orivari ; (W. H.,) conj., in order ha2)s, Luke xx. 13.*
that what (may happen ? sc. yev-qrat.), to l<rdTT]s, TTjTos, T), eqiLality, 2 Cor. viii.
what endi 14 ; equity. Col. iv. I.*
'liJiriTT), 175, 17, Joppa.. lo-d-Tipios, ov, 2)rizcd equally, of like value,
*Iop8dvT)s, ov, 6, the Jordan. 2 Pet. i. I.*
I'os, 01/, 6, {i) poison, Rom. iii. 13 ; James like-minded, Phil. ii. 20.*
lo-d-vjruYos, ov,
iii. 8 ; (2) rust, James v. 3.* 'I(rpai]X, (Heb.), Israel, met, for the
6
'louSaic, as, i] (really adj., fem., sc. 77)), whole nation of the Lsraelites.
Juild'd,, 'Itrpa-qXiTTis, ov, b, an Israelite. Syn. 50..
conform to Jeivish 2'>'>'acticc,
*Iov8at^a), to ttTTt. See oWa.
to "Judaise," in life or ritual. Gal. to-THjit (in Rom. iii. 31, Rec. has IffTdu),
ii. i^L* W. H. 1<tt6.vu), § 107), trau.s. in pres.^
G G
450 VOCABULARY. [lO-Toplw — KaQ-C^TjS
imperf., fiit., 1st aor. ; to cause to tors of Jesus, Luke iii. 24^ 26 (W. H.,
stand, to set up, to jiJace, to fix a time, 'Iwfl-Tjx), 30 ; (5) Clary's husband (6) ;
I'Xvos, ovs, TO, a footstep, fig. , Rom. iv. demolish, d.estroy, lit., Luke xii. 18,
12 ; 2 Cor. xii. 18 ; i Pet. ii. 21.* or fig. 2 Cor. X. 5.
,
'IwVjX, 6 (Heb.), Joel, the prophet, Acts from ceremonial pollution. Acts x. 15.
ii.i6.* KaOapio-fios, ov, 6, cleansing, physical,
*I«vdv, 6 (Heb.), Jonan, Luke iii. 30.* moral, or ceremonial, ^lark i. 44
'Iwvds, a, 6, Jonas, or Jowi.li, (i) the Luke ii. 22, v. 14 ; John ii. 6, iii. 25 ;
Ka6-opd(i>, u>, to see clearly, pass., Rom. KaKo-iroieo), w, abs., to do injury, ^lark
i. 20.* iii. 4 ; Luke vi. 9 ; to do evil, i Pet.
KaO-oTi, adv., as, according as^ Acts ii. iii. 17:3 John 11.*
45> i^'- 35 ; because that, for, Luke i. 7, KaKo-TToios, 6v, as subst. , an evildoer,
xix. 9 Acts ii. 24, xvii. 31
; (W. H.).* malefactor, John
i Pet. xviii. 30 ;
KaO-ws, adv., according as, even as, as. ii, 12, 14, 15.*iii. 16, iv.
KaCf conj., and, also, even. For the KaKos, 17, ov, evil, wicked, malignant;
various uses of this conjunction, see TO KaKov, wickedness, ^latt. xxvii. 23 ;
i:}
403. also calamity, affliction. Syn. 22.
Kaid4>as, a, 6, CaiapJuis. Adv., -ws, wickedly; KaKws fX^"'? ^^
Katv, 6 (Heb. ), Cain. be or in trouble.
ill,
Ka'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Cainav. Two are KaK-ovp-yos, ov, as sul)st. a.i evil-worker, ,
mentioned, Luke iii. 36, ;^y.* nuihfactor, Luke xxiii. 32, 33, 39
Katvos, 7], ov, new. Syn. 26. 2 Tim. ii. 9.*
KaivoTT]s, 17x05, 7), newness, renovation KaK-ovxco), u>, only in pass., part,, treated
(moral and spiritual), Rom. vi. 4, ill, harassed, Heb. xi. 37, xiii. 3.*
Kaip6s, ov, 6, th' fit or critical time, to c^fMspcrate, Acts xiv. 2.*
452 Vocabulary. [KaKwiri^ - -KaTa-^aXXci
KciKwo-is, fw?, T], evil condition, affliction, KavSaKT], 77J, 7), Candacc, Acts viii. 27.*
ill-treatment, Acts vii. 34.* Kavwv, ovot, 6, prep., a measuring rod;
KoXufiT], 7;s, 17, stnhhle, I Cor. iii. 12.* hence, (i) a rnle of conduct, "canon,"
KuXa^jLos, as (i) a reed,
01', 6, a stalk, Gal. vi. 16; Phil, iii, 16; (2, a, limit
growing, ^latt. xi. 7 (2) a reed, as ; or sphrre of duty, 2iroviiKe (RV. ), 2
a mock sceptre, Matt, xxvii. 29 (3) ;
Cor. X. 13, 15, 16.*
a 2)en, 3 John 13 ; (4) a wcasuriiig- Kaircp-vaovji, or Ka<pap^aoi'fi (W. H. ),
rod, Rev. xxi. 15. 7) (Heb.), Capernaum.
K(iX€(i>, C), eaui, K^KX'qKa, to call ; hence, KaTTi^Xtuttf, to be a 2><iiiy trader : hence
(i) tosiimmon. Luke xix. 13 ; (2) to (^\ith ace), to make merchandise of
iiame. Matt. i. 21, x. 25 ; (3) to (R. V. marg. ), or ^exhdi^s adulterate,
invite, John ii. 2 ; (4) to apjwint, or corruj)t,2 Cor. iL 17.*
select, for an office, Heb. v. 4 ; (5) Kairvds, ov, 6, a smoke, a va^wur.
pass., to be called, or accounted, i.e., KairiraSoKCa, as, 17, Cappadocia, Acts ii.
]Matt. v. 9, 19 James ii. 23. *
to be, ; 9 ;I Pet. i. I .
KaXXi-€\aios, ov, i], a good olive tree, KapSia, as, 'h, the Jieart, met., as the seat
*
Rom. xi. 24. of the alfections, but chiefly of the
KaXXftov (compar. of /caXos), better; adv., understanding. Syn. 55. Fig., tJie
KoXKiov, Acts XXV. 10.* Jieart or bowels of the earth, ^latt xii
KaXo-8i8d<rKaXos, ov, 6, i], a teaclier of 40.
what is good. Tit. ii. 3.* Kap8io-'Yvw<rT'r]s, ov, 0, one who knows
KaXol Ai|X€'vcs, Fair Havens, a place of tlic heart. Acts i. 24, xv. 8.*
good harbourage in the island of Crete, Kapirds, ov, 6, fruit, produce, Luke xii.
Acts xxvii. 8. 17 met., for children.. Acts ii. 30
; ;
KaXo-iroi€w, Q, to act well or honourably, deeds, conduct, the fruit of the hands.
*
2 Thess. iii. 1 3. Matt. iii. 8 : effect, result, onolument,
KaXds, 7), 6v, fair ; hence, (i) physically Rom. vi. 21. Praise is called the fruit
beautiful, r/oofZZ?/; (2) morally beautiful, of the lips, Heb. xiii. 1 5.
good, Jwnourable, nobles (3) ejxellent, Kdpiros, Caipns, 2 Tim. iv. 13.*
01', 6,
advantageous : adv., -wj, well, fairly. KapiTo-<|>op'ia), w, Tjcru}, to bring forth fruit,
KdXf|jLua, aros, tj, a covering, veil, 2 Cor. j\Lark iv. 28; mid., to bear fruit to
iii. 13-16.* oneself, to increase, Col. i. 6.
KaXiiirTw, i/zw, to cover, veil. Kap7ro-({>dpos, op, bringing forth fruit,
Ka^e. See Kaydj. fruitful. Acts xiv. 17.*
Kd}iT]Xos, ov, 6, i], a caniel. Kaprepeo), cD, yjatj), to be strong, to endure,
KCLjiivos, 01;, 7;, a furnace. Matt. xiii. 42, Heb. xi. 27.*
50 ; Rev. i. 15, ix. 2.* Kdp(|>os, oi'j, TO, a mote, a splinter, IMatt.
Ka|Ji-}xv(o (/card ami fxvu), to shut, close the vii. 3, 4, 5 42.*
; Luke vi. 41,
*
eyes. Matt. xiii. 15 Acts xxviii. 27.
; Kard, prep., gov. the gen. and accun.
Kdp.vw, KajxQ}, pf. KeKfirjKa, to be weary, cases, down; hence, gen., down from,
faint, to be sick, Htib. xii. 3 Janres ; against, etc. ace. according to, against,
; ,
V. 15; Rev. ii. 3 (\V. H. omit).* etc. (see §§ 124, 147, a). In compo-
KapioC. See KayJo. sition, KOLTd may impo t descent, sub-
KdjiTTTft), xj/o}, to bend, the knee, Rom. jection, opposition, and distribution,
xi. 4, xiv. II Eph. iii. 14: Phil, ; with certain verbs (as of destruction,
ii. 10.* diminution, and the like) is intensive
K&v {koI €&v), and if, Luke xiii. 9 even; = " utterly."
if, though. Matt. xxvi. 35 ; if even, Kara-Pa^vo), ^riao/xai, p^^rjKa, 2nd aor.
Heb. xii. 20; elliptically, if only, Mark KarelSrju, to go or come down, descend,
V. 28 Acts ; V. 15. used of persons and of things, as gifts
Kavd, i] (Heb.), Cana. from heaven, of the clouds, storms,
Kavav£TT]s, ov, 6, a Canaanite (from the lightnings also of anything that falls,
;
Hebrew, meaning the same as Zelotes), Luke xxii. 44 Rev. xvi. 21. ;
KaT-d-yvvjii, fut. Arared^ci;, to break down, Luke vii. 36 (W. H.), xiv. 8, xxiv.
to break in pieces, Matt. xii. 20 John ; 30.*
xix. 3I-33-* Kara-icXv^w, aoj, to inundate, deluge,
KaT-d-yo), to bring do^vn, as Acts ix. 30 ; l)ass., 2 Tet. iii. 6.*
Rom. X. 6 as a naval term, to bring
; KaTa-KXv<rp.ds, ov, 6, a deluge, flood,
to land, Luke v. 1 1 ; pass. to conu to , ^lart. xxiv. 2^, 39 ; Luke xvii. 27 ;
Kara-Sc'd), w, to biiul up, as wounds, Luke KaTa-KoiTTfa), ypu}, to wound, Mark v. 5.*
X.34.* KaTa-KpT]p.vi^«, cruj, to cast down head-
Kard-SiiXos, ov, quite evident, Heb. vii. long. Luke iv. 29.*
KaTa-Kpifxa, aros, tj, condemnation, Ro::i.
Kara-SiKato)) to condemn, to pronounce V, 16, 18 viii. i.*
;
sentence against, ^latt. xii. 7, 37 Luke ; Kaxa-Kpiva), vCj, to give judgment against,
vi. 37 ; James v. 6." to adjudge worthy of punishment {gen.
Kara-BiKT], 77s, i], condemnation, Acts xxv. aud dat. ), to condemn, as Matt. xx.
15 (W. H.).* 18 Rom. ii. i, viii. 3.
;
KaTa-SiwKO), to follow closely, to pfursue Kard-Kpio-is, ews, i), t/ie act of condemna-
intcathi, .Mark i. 36.* tion, 2 Cor. iii. 9, vii. 3.*
Kara-SouXoa), tD, wauj, to bring into slavery, Kara-Kvpicvb), to exercise authority ovcr^
2 Cor. xi. 20 Gal. ii. 4.* ; as ^latt. XX. 25 ; to get the mastery of,
KaTa-8vva(rT€wa), to exercise power over, Acts xix. 16 (gen.).
to oppress. Acts x. 38 James ii. 6.* ; Kara-XaXcw, w, speak against (gen.),
to
Kard-Ocfxa, W. H. for KaTavdde/xa, Rev. Jauies iv. ii Pet. ii. 12, iii. 16.*
; I
Kard-XoXos, ov, 6, ij, a calumniator, Kara-vcvb), to nod, to make signs to, dat.,
detractor, Rom. i. 30.* Luke V. 7. *
Kara-Xajipdvo), \ri\pofxai, to seize or lay Kara voioi, Q, (i) to observe carefully,
hold of, as Mark ix. 18 ; to grasp, as remark, consider ; (2) to Jmve respect to,
the prize in public games, Phil. iii. 12, to regard (acc).
IS', to overtake, i Thess. v. 4 mid., ; KaT-avrdo), a), to come to, to arrive at, to
to compreluiicl, i.e., to hold, with the attain to, with els, as Acts xvi. i Phil. ;
mind ; to j^crceive, to ajq^rchciid, on, iii. II once with dj/TiK-pi;, Acts xx. 15.
;
or ace. and inf., Eph. iii. 18. KaTd-vv|ts, ecjs, 17, stupor, deep sleep,
KaTa-Xt'-yw, to reckon among, pass., i Tim. Rom. xi. 8.*
V. 9.* Kara-vva-cra), ^w, 2nd aor., pass., KaTe-
KaTd-X€ip.[j.a, aros, to, a remnant, a resi- vvy7)v, toprick through, to )nove greatly,
* *
due, Rom. ix. 27 (W. H., vTr6\i/j.iJ.a) pass. Acts ii. 37.
,
Kard-Xonros, ov, })lur. tltc rest, , the resi- xiv. 18 ; to give rest, to cause to rest,
due, Acts XV. 17.* Heb. iv. 8 ; (2) intrans., to rest from,
KaTd-Xv|i,a, aros, to, a lodging-place, an diro, Heb. iv. 4, 10.*
inn, Luke ii. 7 ; a gucst-ch'imber, Mark KaTa-TTCTao-iJta [-ireTavvviuii), aros, to, a
xiv. 14 Luke ; xxii. 11.* veil or curtain, as Luke xxiii. 45.
Kara-Xvu), ucw, to loosen doivn, (i) lit., of Kara-mvci), 2nd aor., KaTeiriov ; ist aor.,
a building, to destroy, ]\Iark xiv. 58 ; ])ass. , KaTeTTudrjv ; to drink up, sicallow^
(2) fig., of law or command, to render ]\Iatt. xxiii. 24 ; fig. to overwhelm, de-
void. Matt. v. 17 (3) met., of beasts ;
stroy, I Cor. XV. 54 ; 2 Cor. ii. 7, v. 4 ;
ceasefrom, sever from. {cLTo^, Rom. vii. 2; KaTa-(r<j>pa'Yit(^) o'w, to close, to seal up,
*
Gal. V. 4. as a book, Rev. v. i .
KaT-api0(i€(i), cD, to number among, Acts KaTd-<r\€o-is, ecjs, 17, a p)ossession, Acts
i. 17.* vii.
5; 45-* ,
Kar-apTilb), tVw, to refit, to rej^air, ^latt. KaTa-Ti9T]|ii, drjacj, 1st aor. KaredrjKa,
iv. 21 ; to restore from error or sin, Gal. to deposit, as a body in a tomb, Mark
vi. I ; to perfect, to comjylete, 1 Tliess. XV. 46 (AV. H., TidTjfii) ; mid. Kara-
iii. 10;
Pet. V. 10;
I pass., to be Tideadai x°P'''> io gain favour -with
thoroughly united, i Cor. i. 10. (dat. ), Acts xxiv. 27, xxv. 9.*
KttT-apTicris, ews, 17, a iicrfccting, 2 Cor. KaTa-TOfiT|, Tjs, 7], paronomasia with
xiii. 9.* mutilation, Phil. iii. 2.*
TTfpiToixr],
Kar-aprio-fios, ou, 6, a 'perfedii\g,Yu^\\. iv. KaTa-To|€ii«, to transfb:, Heb. xii. 20
12.* (AV. H. omit).*
Kara-o-ciw, aw, to wave the hand, to IceTcon, KaTa-Tp€'x«, 2nd aor. Kare8pa/xov, to run
Actsxii. 17, xiii. 16, xix. ;^t„ xxi. 40.* down [eiri, ace), Acts xxi. 32.*
KaTa-o-Kdirra*, ;/'a>, to demolish by dig- KaTa-<|>dYW. See Kareadiu}.
ging under, to overthrow, to raze, Rom. KaTa-<^€'pa>, KaTolau}, 1st aor. KaTTjpeyKay
xi. 3; perf. part., pass., ruins. Acts pass. KaTTjvexQriv, to throw dovrn, as an
XV. 16.* adverse vote, Acts xxvi. 10, xxv. 7
Kara-o-Kcvd^to, dcro;, to prepare fully, to (W. H.) ; pass., to be borne down, to
build, to adjust, as Matt. xi. 10 Luke ; fdl. Acts XX. 9.*
i. 17 ; Heb. iii. 3, 4. 2nd aor. Karetpvyov, to flee
KaTa-<|)6V"Y<«'>
KaTa-(rKT]v6fc), w, ibau), to dwell, lodge, for refuge, with ei's. Acts xiv. 6 with ;
KaTa-<rKTJV(D(ris, eus, ij, a dwell ing-jdace, 2nd aor., Karecpddprjv, to corrupt utterly,
a haunt, as of birds. Matt. viii. 20 ;
2 Tim. iii. 8 to destroy, 2 Pet. ii. 12
;
Kar-fpyjoiiai, 2nd aor. KaTTJXdov, to de- Kar-OLK^a, as, i], a dwelling, a habitation,
scend, come doio 71 to. Acts xvii, 26.*
Kar-iorQCbi and -^ado} (^lark xii. 40, KaT-oiKttw, to niake to divell, James iv. 5
W, H. ), fut. Kara^dyofJiaL (John ii. 17, (W, H.).*
H. ) 2nd aor. Karecpayov, to eat up,
"VV. ; KaT-oirrpi^fa), mid., to behold, as in a
devour entirely, lit. or fig. Matt. xiii.
to , mirror, 2 Cor. iii. 18.*
4 John ii. 17; Gal. v. 1 5.
; KaT-op9<»)|Jia, aros, t'j, an honournhlc act
KaT-€v9vv«, vQ), to direct ivell, to guide well performed, Acts xxiv. 3 (W. H.,
successfully, Lnke i.
79 ; i Thess. iii, SijpdojiuLa).*
II 2 Thess. iii. 5.*
; KCLTw, adv., dowmvards, down, ^latt. iv.
KaT-€vXoY€a), to bless much, Mark x. 16 6 beneath, ^Mark xiv. 66
; ; with re-
(W. H.). lation to age, comparat, , KarwripLo,
KaT-€<J)-C<rTT)|ii, 2nd aor. Kare-rrecrTrju, to under, jMatt, ii. 16,
rise up
against, Acts xviii. 12.* KaTwrepos, a, ov {Kdru}), lower, Eph, iv.
KaT-ex.Wj /caTacrx7?o-w, to seize on, to hold 9 (on which see § 259).*
fast, to retain, possess, to prevent from Kavfia, aros, rb (Kaiu}), Jieat, scorching
doing a thing {rod fM-rj, with inf.), to Juxit, burning. Rev. vii. 16, xvi. 9,*
repress, Rom. i. 18 ; rb Karexov, the Kav|xaTt^(o, <TU}, to scorch, burn, torture by
hindrance, 2 Thess. ii. 6, 7 ; Kareixov fire, j\[att, xiii. 6 ; Mark iv. 6 ; Rev.
eh rbv alytaXov, they held for the shore. xvi. 8, 9.*
Acts xxvii. 40. Kavo-ts, e(vs, rj, a burning, burning up,
"*"
(W. H. ), xxiii. 23.* Kc'Spos, 01', r], a cedar, John xviii. i (not
Kar-oiKccD, tD, (i) intrans., to divell, with W. H.) ;
probably a mistaken reading
*
ev, els (const, prreg. ), eTri, gen. or for following.
adverbs of place; (2) trans., to divell KeSpwv, 6(Heb.,^ar^- or turbid), Cedron,
in, to inhabit, ace. ; fig,, of equalities or a turbid brook between the Mount of
attributes, to abide. Olives and Jerusalem, John xviii, i,*
,
KCLpfa, ay, 7}, a hand or a roller of linen, KcpScs, ovs, TO, gain, profit, Phil. i. 21,
John xi. 44.* iii. 7 ; Tit. i. 11.*
K6ip(i>, KepQ), toshear, as sheep, Acts viii. t6 (Keipw), a small j^icce of
K€p[jLa, aros,
K€vo-8o^ia, as, 17, vaingloi^y, inordinate Heb. viii. I (see R.V. and marg. ).*
desire for 2)raise, Phil. ii. 3.* K€(|}aXaio<i), Co, doaoj, to smite on the Jiead,
K€vo-8o|os, ov, vainglorious, Gal. v. 26.* Maik xii. 4.*
Kevds, Tj, bv, empty : hence, destitute, Mark K€<})aXT|, ^s, 7}, the head, of human beings
xii, ^ifniitless, Acts iv. 25 fallacious, ; or animals ; for the whole jjerson, Acts
Eph. V. 6 foolish, James ii. 20 ; adv.
;
xviii. 6 the siimmit, or co2)estone, of a
;
-u>s, ill vain, to no purpose, only James building, Luke xx. 17 ; met., implying
iv. Syn. 29.
5. authority, head, lord, i Cor. xi. 3 ;
17, empty disp^iting, useless
K€vo-<|>a)via, a?, Eph. i. 22 ; Col. i. 18.
hahhling, I Tim. vi. 20 2 Tim. ii. 16.* ; KC(t>aXis, i5os, 7], the top of anything, the
K€v6cD, w, wcrw, ^0 empty oneself, rfn-e^^ top or knob of the roll on which
oneself of rightful dignity, Phil. ii. 7 ; Hebrew manuscripts were rolled; hence,
<o 7«a^•c void, render useless, Rom. iv. the roll itself, Heb. x. 7.*
14 I Cor. 1. 17, ix. 15 ; 2 Cor. ix. 3.*
; K-qfJioo), to muzzle, i Cor. ix. 9 (AV. H.
K^vrpov, ov, t6, a goad, a spiTce, a sting, marg.).*
Acts ix. 5 ; I Cor, xv. 55, 56.* KT^vo-os, OV, 6, Latin (§ 154, d), a tax, a
KcvTupiwv, (j}vos, 6, Latin (see § 154, c), 2Joll-tax, Matt. xvii. 25, xxii. 17, 19 ;
a centurion, the commander of a hun- ^lark xii. 14.*
dred foot-soldiers. KfjiTos, ov, 6, a garden Luke xiii. 19 ;
Kipaia, aj, ij, a little horn (the small John xviii. i, 26, xix. 41.*
projecting stroke by which certain KT^TTovpoSfOv, 6, a gardener, John xx. 15.*
similar Hebrew lett*s are distin- KT]piov, 01', TO, a honeycomb, Luke xxiv.
guished, as 1 and n) ; met., the 42 (W. H. omit).*
minutest ^;ar^, Matt. v. 18 Luke ;
a 2iroclaiming, prreach-
KiqpvYjMi, aros, t6,
xvi. 17.* ing, as Matt. xii. 41 ; i Cor. i. 21 2 ;
Kcpafievs, €(js, 6, a 2^otter, Matt, xxvii. Tim. iv. 17. Syn. 15.
7, 10 ; Rom. ix. 21.* KTjpv^, vKos, 6, a herald, a 2>i'eacher, i Tim.
Kcpap-iKos, q, 6v, wade of potter s clay, ii. 7 2 Tim. i. 11
; 2" Pet. ii. 5.* ;
KivSvvevw, acj, to be in danger, Luke viii. ance, to inherit, Gal. iv. 30 ; to obtain,
23 Acts xix. 27, 40 ; i Cor. xv. 30.*
; generally.
kCvSvvos, 01', 6, danger, peril, Rom. viii. KXT]povo|i£a, as, 17, an inJieritance.
35 2 Cor. xi. 26.*
; kXt]pov6}ios, anheir, one who obtai)is an in-
Kiv€o>, w, move, to stir, IVfatt.
Tjau}, to heritance; applied to Christ, Heb. i. 2.
xxiii. 4 to shake the head in mockery, KX-i]pos, 01', 6, (i) a lot. Matt, xxvii.
;
35 ;
Matt, xxvii. 39 ]\Iark xv. 29 to rc-
; ; hence (2) that which is allotted, a por-
7nove, Rev. ii. 5, vi. 14 to excite, Acts ; tion. Acts viii. 21 ; an office, Acts i. 17,
xvii. 28, xxi. 30, xxiv, 5,* 25 ; plur., 2^crsons assigned to one's
KiVTi<rts, ews, motion, commotion, John
i), care, i Pet. v. 3.*
V. 3(W. H. omit).* kXt^poo), «, in mid., to obtain bg lot, Ei)h.
Kis (W. H., Ket's), 6 (Heb.), Kish, father i. II.*
of Saul, Acts xiii. 21.* KXf]<ris, eois, 7}, a calling, in N.T. alwaj^'s
kXoISos, 01', 6, a branch, as Matt. xiii. 32 ; of the Divine call, as Rom. xi. 29 ; Eph.
met., Rom. xi. 16-19. iv. 4.
KXaiio {af), avao), (i) abs. , to wail, to kXt]t<)s, 6v, verbal adj. (AcaXe'co), called,
lament, weej) for(e7rt dat. [W. H. ace.]), , invited, Matt. xxii. 14 ; of Christians,
Luke xix. 41 ; (2) trans., to iccep for the called, Rom. i. 6, 7, viii. 28 of the :
(ace), Matt. ii. 18. Syn. 20. apostolic vocation, Rom. i. i; i Cor. i. i.
kXoLo-is, cws, 17, a breaking, Luke xxiv. 35 ;
kXi^oIvos, ov, 6, an oven, a furnace. Matt,
*
Acts ii. 42.* vi. 30 ; Luke xii. 28.
KXacTfia, aros, to, a piece broken off, aj KXi|Jia, aros, to, a climate ; a, tract of
fragment, as IMatt. xiv. 20. country, a region, Rom. xv. 23 ; 2 Cor.
KXavSr], 7?s, T7, Clamla or Claude, a xi. 10 ; Gal. i. 21.*
small island olf Crete, Acts xxvii. 16.* KXivdpiov, to, a small bed. Acts v. 15
KXavSioL, as, r/, Claudia, 2 Tim. iv. 21.* (W. H.).
KXavSvos, 01', 6, Claudius, the Emperor, kXivt|, 1)$, 7/, a bed, Mark vii. 30 a port- ;
Acts xi. 28, xviii. 2 a military tri- ; able bed, IVIatt. ix. 2, 6 « couch for ;
bune (Lysias), Acts xxiii. 26.* reclining at meals, Mark iv. 21.
KXavdpios, ov, 6 (/cXatoj), weeping, lament- kXiviSiov, 01;, TO (dim.), a little bed or
ation, as Matt. ii. 18. couch, Luke v. 19, 24.*
kXolo), dao}, only with dpTov, to break kXivo), vQ), perf. KCKXiKa, (i) trans., to
bread, in the ordinary meal, Matt. xiv. bow, in reverence, Luke xxiv. 5 ; in
19 ; or in the Lord's Supper, xxvi. 26 ;
death, John xix. 30 to lay down, as ;
fig., of the body of Christ, i Cor. xi. 24. the head, to rest, ]\Iatt. viii. 20 to ;
ace. phir. K\elba% or Kkels, ij, a key, the to decline, as the day, Luke ix. 12.
emblem of power, Matt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. KXicCa, as, 7), a table party, a company,
i. 18, iii. 7,ix. i,xx. i; met., Luke xi. 52.* Luke ix. 14.*
kXcio), (tw, to shut, shut up, close. kXottti, i}s, i], theft, Matt. xv. 19 ; Mark
K\i\t.\ia, aros, to (/cXeTrrw), theft, Rev. xi. vii. 22.*
21.* kXvSwv, cjvos, 6, the I'aging of the sea a ;
KXeoiras, a, 6, Cleopas, Luke xxiv. 18.* tvave, a surge, Luke viii. 24 ; James
kXc'os, ovs, to, good rc2)ort, glonj, i Pet. i. 6.*
ii. 20.* KXv8(i)v£top-ai, to be tossed, as waves by
KXeiTTTjs, 01', 6, a thief, as ^latt. vi. 19 ; the wind, Eph. iv. 14.*
met., of false teachers, John x. 8. KXwirds, a, 6, Clopas, John xix. 25.*
Syn. 74. KVT|6(i), to tickle; pass., to he tickled, to
KXe'irTO), i/'w, <y steal, abs., Matt. xix. 18 ;
itch, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
or trans, (ace), Matt, xxvii. 64. Kvi8os, 01', Tf, Cnidus, Acts xxvii. 7.*
KXfi|jLa, aTo<i,TO («-\da>), a branch, a shoot, Ko8pdvTT]s, 6, Lat. (.see ^ 154, a), a
01',
a teiulril, of a vine, etc., John xv. 2, farthing, the smallest coin in use,
4. 5.6.'- Matt, v. 26 Mark xii. 42.*
;
;
KoXXdo), (3, 770-0;, mid. and pass., to cleave Rom. xvi. 6, 12 ; i Cor. xv. 10.
to, to be joined with, to adhere. Kdiros, ov, 6, labour^ toil, trouble, un-
KoXXovpiov, or KoWvpLov, iov, to, eye- easiness.
salve^ "collyrium," Rev. iii. 18.* Koirpia, as, 7), filth, a dunghilly Luke
KoXXvPurnfis, ov, 6 {koWv^os, small coin), xiii. 8 (notW. H.), xiv. 35.*
a money-cJiangcr, Matt. xxi. 12 Mark ; Koirpiov, 01', TO, dung, manure, Luke
xi.15 John ii. 15.*
; xiii. 8(W. H.).*
KoXopdo), uxrw, to cut off, to shorten. Matt. KdiTTw, mid. fut. Koxl/ofMai, to cut doion,
xxiv. 22 ; Mark xiii. 20.* as branches, trees, etc. ; mid., to beat
460 VOCABULARr. [Kopa| — Kp^fjcrictjs
Kopvr|\ios> iov, 6, Cornelius, Acts x.* Cor. xvi. 13 Eph. iii. 16.* ;
Kopos, 01*, 6 (from Heb.), a cor, the largest Kpar^o), Q), Tjad), to lay strong hold on, to
dry measure, equal to ten (idroL, Or detain, ace. or gen., or ace. and gen.
nearly fifteen English bushels, Luke (see § 264) to attain to, Heb. iv. 14
; ;
i.e., vicious, Tit. ii. 12.* Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, xxvi. 25.*
Koo-^ios, ov, orderly, decorous, i Tim. ii. Kpdros, ovs, TO, strength, power, dominion,
9, iii. 2* I Pet.iv. II; Heb.ii. 14; /card /cpdros, Acts
Koo-fio-Kparcdp, opos, 6, })rince of the world, xix. 20, greatly, mightily. Syn. 57.
world-ruler (R.V.), Eph. vi. 12.* KpavYd^u), aw, to cry out, to clamour, as
Kocrjxos, ov, 6, (i) ornament, decoration, Matt. xii. 19.
only I Pet. iii. 3 hence (2) t7ie mate-
; Kpav^TJ, rjs, 7], a cry, clamour, as Heb.
rial unioerse, Luke xi. 50, as well y. 7.
ordered and beautiful (3) the world, ;
Kpeas (aros, aoj, contr., Kp^tos), t6, plur.
John xi. 9 the world, in opposition to
; Kpeara, Kpia, flesh, flesh-meat, Rom.
the heavenly and the good, John viii. xiv, 21 I Cor. viii. 13.*
;
23 ; (4) the inhabitavls of the world, KpeCcro-iov, ov, ttivv, ovos, adj. (properly
I Cor. iv. 9 (5) tJie present life, as
;
compar. of Kparvs, see Kpdros), stronger,
distinguished from life eternal (6) a ;
more powerful, better, as Heb. vii. 7,
vast collection, of anything, James iii. xii. 24. Syn. 21.
6 2 Pet. ii. 5.
; Syn. 58. Kp€p.dvvvfj.i or Kpefidoj, cD, fut. dcroj, to
KovdproS) ov, 6 (Latin, see § 159), hang, trans.. Acts v. 30 mid., to ie ;
KovtTTwSCa, as, 17 (Latin, see § 154, c), Mark v. 13 ; Luke viii. }^y*
a guard, J\latt. xxvii. 65, 66, xxviii. Kpif|s, 'r)Tbs, 6, a Cretan, Acts ii. 11 ;
KpiOirj, 7js, fern., barley, Rev. vi. 6.* viii. 20, xxii. i Thess. iv. 4.* 28 ;
Kp£6ivoS) y], ov, made of barley ; dproi KTT]|xa, aros, to, anything acquired, a
Kpidivoi., barley loaves, John vi. 9, 2)ossession, Matt. xix. 22 Mark x. 22 ; ;
icpCfia,aros, to, a judgment, a sentence, KTfivoSi ovs, TO, a beast of burden (as
condemnation, as i Cor. xi. 29. representing property), Luke x. 34 ;
KpCvov, ov, TO, a lily, Matt. vi. 28 Luke ; Acts xxiii. 24 ; i Cor. xv. 39 ; Rev.
xii. 27.* xviii. 13.*
Kp£v(D, vC}, K^KpLica, 1st aor., pass., KTT]Twp, opos, 6, a possessor, an owner,
eKpidrjv, (i) to judge, todeem, to deter- Acts iv. 34.*
mine, Acts xiii. 46, XV. 19 Rom. ; KTi^o), au), perf., pass., ^KTiafxai, to create,
xiv. 5 ; (2) to form or an express form, compose, physically or spiritually,
opinion of, usually unfavourable, Rom. as Rom. i. 25 ; Ejdi. ii. 10.
ii. I, (3) to try, to sit in judgment
3 ;
KTio-is, ews, T}, creation, (i) the act, Rom.
mi, John xviii. 31 ; pass., to be on i. 20 ; (2) the thing created, creature,
trial, to be judged ; mid,, to appeal to Rom. i. 25 creation, generall)% Rom.
;
trial, i.e., to have a laiv-suit, i Cor. viii. 19-22; (3) met., institution, i Pet.
vi. 6. ^ii. 13.
KpivTis, ews, '/;, opinion, formed and
(i) KTi<r|ia, aros, to, a thing created, a
expressed ; (2) judgment, the act or creature, i Tim. iv. 4 James i. 18 ;
;
KpiTT|s, 01', TO, a judge; of the O.T. kvk\€v(>), encircle, surround, Rev. xx. 9
" Juilges," Acts xiii. 20. (W. H.).*
KpiTiKos, 7), ov, apt at judging, quick to kvkX60€v, adv. {kvkKos), from around^
discern, gen. obj., Heb. iv. 12.* round about, gen.. Rev. iv. 3, 4, 8,
Kpovw, (Tw, to knock at a door for ^v. II (notW. H.).*
entrance, Luke xiii, 25. kvkXos, ov, 6, a circle. Only in dat.,
KpviTTT], T7S, T), " crvpt,^' an underground, kvk\u}, as adv., abs., or with gen.,
cell, a vault, Luke xi. 33.* round about, around.
KpuTTTos, ij, ov, verbal adj. {kputtto)), hid- kvkXoo), tD, to encircle, surround, besiege,
den, secret, unknown, Matt. x. 26 ;
Luke xxi. 20 John x. 24 ; Acts xiv, ;
Kpv(j>TJ, adv., in secret, secretly, Eph. v. KV(xa, aros, neut., a wave, a billow, as
12. Matt. viii. 24 ; Acts xxvii. 41 ; Jude
KTaofjLii, uffxai, fut. TjcrofJLaL, eKTrjadfxrjv,
dep., to acquire, procure (price, gen., KV|ipaXov, 01', TO {KVfi^os, hoUoiv), a
or iK), (see § 273,) Matt. x. 9; cymbal, I Cor. xiii. i.*
46^ VOCABlJLAtlt. [Kv)itvov — Xa|ipdv(i>
and having power over, a title of {2) to speak, to talk, with ace. of thing
honour. Sir, i Pet. iii. 6 (2) The ;
spoken, also with modal dat. and dat.
LoPwD (Heb., Jehovah) ; (3) The Lord of person addressed. Hence, according
(employed in the Epp. constantly of to the nature of the case, met., to
Christ [see § 217, h]). declare, by other methods than viva
Kvpiorqs, rjTOi, i], lordship, dominion voce, as Rom. vii. i ; to preach, to pub-
collective concr., lords, princes,Eph. lish, to announce. Synn. 8, 15.
i. 21 ; Col. i. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10 Jude ; XaXkd, as, 17, (i) speech, talk, John viii.
K
KvpdcD, Q}, toconfirm, ratify, 2 Cor. ii. 8 ;
43 hence, (2) report, John iv. 42 ;
;
K(0)iT], i;5, T}, a village, unwalled, or lying receive, obtain, of things material or
open, Matt. ix. 35. spiritual, to accept, "take up," Matt.
K(i>|j.6-iroXis, ews, i], a, large, city -like X- 38 (3) to take by force, seize, Matt,
;
village, without walls, Mark i. 38.* xxi. 35 (4) to take away, by violence
;
Rom. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21; i Pet. as a friend, and as a teacher (7) in ;
Ad)jL6x, 6 (Heb. ), Lamech, Luke iii. 36.* he left, to he lacking, to he destitute of,
Xa^irds, ados, 17, a lamj^, a torch. Syn. 65. James i. 4, 5, ii. 15.*
Xaiiirpos, resplendent, shining,
d, 6v, XeiTovp-yto), to serve puhlicly in
w, {i)
gorgeous; adv., -ws, gorgeously, sump- sacred th ings, Acts xiii. 2 ; Heb. x. 1 1 ;
tuously, only Luke xvi. 19. (2) to minister to, pecuniarily, Rom.
Xa|nrpdTi]s, ttjtos, i}, splendour, bright- XV. 27.* Syn. 36.
ness. Acts xxvi. 13.* XciTovp-yfa, as, t), {i) a puhlic ministra-
Xdp.'irfa), \l/u}, to give light, to shine, Matt. tion or service, Luke i. 23 Phil. ii. ;
XavOdvo), 2iul aor. iXaOov, (i) to he con- service, as rendering aid or alms to,
cealed, abs., Mark
24 Luke viii. vii. ;
Phil. ii. 30 2 Cor. ix. 12.* Syn. 36.
;
Luke 53.*
xxiii. Syn. 36.
Aao8iK€ia, aj, r/, Laodicea. Xc'vTiov, ov, TO (Lat., see § 154, e), a
AooSiKc'vs, ^ws, 6, a Laodicean. napkin or towel, John xiii. 4, 5.*
Xaos, ov, 6, (i) a 2^cople, spec, of ^^ Xciris, tSos, i), a scale or crust. Acts ix. 18.*
people of God (2) <A^ common pcojile.
;
Xcirpa, as, i), tlie leprosy.
Syn. 73. Xcirpds, ov, 0, a leper.
Xdpvy^, i'77oj, 6, ^7*tf throat, "larynx," Xeirrdv, ov, prop. verb. adj. (sc. vofiifffia),
Rom. iii. 13.* from X^TTw (to strip off, pare down), a
Aa<ra£a, as (W. H., Aaor^a), 7/, LasoM, mite, one eighth of an as, the smallest
Acts xxA-ii. 8.* Jewish coin, Mark xii. 42 ; Luke xii,
Xdo-Kw. See XaKio). 59, xxi. 2.*
Xa-Toft^w, u), /o 7^CM' stones, to cut stone, Acvt or Aei'is, 6, Levi. Four are men-
^latt. xxvii. 60 Mark xv. 46. * ; tioned (i) son of Jacob, ancestor of
:
Xarpcfo, as, ri, worship, Service rendered, the priestly tribe (2, 3) ancestors of ;
to God, John xvi. 2 Rom. ix. 4, xii. ; Jesus, Luke iii. 24, 29 (4) the apostle, ;
(not W. H.). See Oaddaios.* XcvKos, f), bv, (i) white, as Matt. v. 36 ;
Xrytwv (W. H., Xeynvv), Qvos, 6 (Lat., John iv. 35 ; (2) hright, as Matt,
see § 154, c), a legion, Matt. xxvi. 53; xvii. 2.
Mark v. 9, 15 Luke viii. 30 in N.T. ; ; XcW, oj'Tos, 6, a lio7i ; fig., for a tyrant
times containing proba1)ly 6,826 n)en.* 2 Tim. iv. 17 ; of Christ, Rev. v. 5.
Xfyw, only j)res. and impf! in X.T., (i) to X-^O-q, 77s, ij, forgcffulncss, 2 Pet. i. 9.*
speak, used also of writings, as John XT]Ke'a). See Xa/f^w.
xix. 37 ; (2) to say, to discourse ; (3) to Xt^vos, oO, 6, i), a wine-press. Matt. xxi.
relate, to tell, Luke ix. 31, xviii. i ; 33 fig. in Rev. xiv. 19, 20, xix, 15.*
;
(4) to call, pass., to he called or named X-qpos, 01;, 6, idle talk, Luke xxiv. 11.*
(5) pass., to he chosen or appointed. XT)<rTTJs, ov, 6, a robber, Mark xi. 17 ;
Libcrtiiu, Acts vi. 9. Probably Jews 2 ; and the doctrines of Christ, Heb. v.
who had been slaves at Rome, after- 12 ; I Pet. iv. II.*
*
wards freed. Xd-yios, ov, eloquent, Acts xviii. 24.*
AiPvT], 77s, 71, Libya, Acts ii. 10.* XoYio-fxds, ov, 6, reasoning, thought,
XtGdtw, (Tw, to stone, to execute by stoning. iuiaginntion, Rom. ii. 15 ; 2 Cor,
XiBivos, 77, ov, made of stone, John ii. 6 ;
X. 5.*
Rev. ix. 20. *
^
2 Cor. iii. 3 ; \oyo [layjio), Q, to strive about tvoi'ds, 2
Xi6o-PoX6(D, Co, 7]aot}, to throiv stones at, so Tim. ii. 14.*
as to wound or kill, to stone. Matt, Xo"yo|xax£a, as, i], contention about ivords,
xxiii. 37 Mark xii. 4 (W. H. omit).
;
" logomachy," i Tim. vi. 4.*
X£8os, ov, 6, a stone, i.e., (i) loose and Xd-yos, ov, 6, {i) a speaking, a saying, a
lying about. Matt. iv. 3, 6 (2) built ;
loord, as the expression of thought
into a wall, etc., Mark xiii. 2 (4) « ;
(whereas ^ttos, 6vofxa, fjrjfxa refer to
precious stone, Rev. iv. 3, xv. 6 (R.V. ) words in their outward form, as parts
(5) a statue or idol of stone. Acts xvii. of speech), Matt. viii. 8 ; (2) the thing
29. Syn. 75. spoken, j\Iatt. vii. 24, 26 — whether
Ai0o-a-Tpu)Tov, 01', rb (prop. a.iX]., strewed doctrijie, i Tim. iv. 6 ;
jyrojihecy, 2
with stones), the Pavenunt, part of a Pet. question, Matt. xxi. 24
i. 19 ; ;
Xinr|v, ^vos, 6, JuirboiLT, haven, Acts xxvii. ii.4 ft ; narrative, Acts i. i « 2)ublic ;
XffivT], 77s, 7}, a lake, e.g., Gennesareth, ment. Acts ii. 40 ; a charge or accus-
Luke V. I. ation. Acts xix. 38 ; (3) reason, Acts
Xtp-ds, ov, hunger, 2 Cor.
6, (i) xi. 27 ;
xviii. 14 (4) account, reckoning, Heb.
:
X£\|/, \i/3j5, 6, ^/tc aS'. JV. wind. Acts xxvii. Cou iv. 12 I Pet. ii. 23.* ;
"
12. (To look " down the S. W. wind XoiSopia, as, 77, reproach^ reviling, i Tim.
is to look toward the north-cast.)* V. 14 ; I Pet. iii. 9.*
Xo"y£a, as, i), a collection, i.e., of money, XokSopos, ov, 6, one ivho rails at, a reviler,
I Cor. X7i. I, 2.* I Cor. V. II, vi. 10.*
Xo-yr^onai, (ro/xai, dep. with mid. and Xoifids, 01', 6, a plague, pestileTice, Matt,
pass, aor., {i) to reckon; (2) to 2}lace xxiv. 7 (W. H. omit), Luke xxi. 11; j
to the accoimt of, to charge with, ace. Paul so called, Acts xxiv. 5.* I
and dat., or with et's (see § 298, 6) ; Xoiirds, 77, 6v, remaining, the rest, ]\Iatt.
(3) to reason, argue, to infer, conclude, XXV. II adv., t6 Xonrbv, as for the rest,
;
AovKios, iov, 6 (Latin), Lucius, Acts xiii. Aw'Cs, i5os, 7], Lois, 2 Tim. i. 5.*
I ; Rom. xvi. 21.* AwT, 6 (Hel3. ), Lot, Luke xvii. 28-32;
Xovrpov, ov, TO, a bath, a icashing, Eph. 2 Pet. ii. 7.*
V. 26 Tit. iii. 5.*
;
Luke i. 68, ii. 38 ; Heb. ix. 12.* Ma'ivdv, 6 (Heb.), Mainan, Luke iii. 31.*
Xvrpwnqs, ov, 6, a redeemer, a deliverer. (laivofiat, dep., to be mad, to rave, John
Acts vii. 35.* X. 20 ; Acts xii. 15, xxvi. 24, 25 ;
Xv^vos, 01', 6, a lamp. Matt. v. 15, vi. 22. liaKdpios, icL, lov, happy, blessed, Matt. v.
Used of John the Baptist, John v. 35 3-11 ; Luke i. 45, vi. 20 ; I Cor. vii. 40.
of Christ, Rev. xxi. 23. Syn. 65. Syn. 28.
Xvo>, (Tin), to loosen, as (i) lit., to unbind, |iaKapio-|xds, ov, 6, congratulation, a pro-
Mark i. 7 ; Rev. v. 2 (2) to set at ;
nouncing happy, Rom. iv. 6, 9 ; Gal.
liberty; (3) to ])ranou)ice 'not binding, iv. 15.*
e.g., a law. Matt, xviii. 18 ; (4) to dis- MaKcSov^a, as, i], Macedonia.
obey or nullify the Divine woid, John MaKcSuv, oj'os, 6, a Macedonian.
vii. 23, X. 35 ; is) to destroy, e.g., the (jidKcXXov, ov, TO, a slaughter-house,
temple, John ii. 19 ; (6) to disjniss, i.e., slmmbles, i Cor. x. 25.*
an assembly, Acts xiii. 43. |iaKpdv, adv. (ace. of fiaKpos, sc. odop),
H H
466 VOCABULARY. [fjiaKpoOcv liaraio-Xayla
a/ar, afar off, Luke xv. 20 ; eh pre- (i.avT€vo}iai, dep. , to utter responses, pro-
ceding, Acts ii. 39 ; airb following, phesy, Acts xvi. 16.* Syn. 15.
Acts xvii. 27. |iapaiv(i), avu), fut. pass. /xapaudrjaofMai,
|jLaKpo6€v, adv. afar, I^Iark
,
from viii. 3 ;
to iviihcr, to fade aiuay, James i. ii.*
with dTTo, as Matt. xxvi. 58. (jiapdvd0d (tAvo Syro-Chaldaic words),
|iaKpo-6v|JLea>, Co, rjaco, to suffer long, to our Lord cometh (R.V. marg. ), i Cor.
have patie7ice, to be forbearing, i Cor. xvi. 22.*
xiii. 4 ; delay, Luke xviii. 7
to to ; [iap'yapi'rqs, 01;, 6, a 2>earl, Matt. xiii. 45,
wait patiently for, ei's or (irl, dat, 46.^
Heb. vi. 15. MapGd, 7;s, i], Martha.
(iaKpo-Ov|j.£a, as, t), forbearance, long- Mapia, Mapid/A (indecl., Heb.,
as, or
suffering, patience. Syn. 31. Miriam), 77, Mary. Six of the name
}jLaKpo-6vp.<os, adv., patiently, indul- are mentioned: (i) the mother of
gently. Acts xxvi. 3.* Jesus (2)
;
the Magdalen (3) the ;
jxaKpds, a, 6v, long; of place, distant, Luke and Lazarus (4) the
sister of Alartha ;
XV. 13, xix. 12 ; of tm\G, prolix, only in wife of Cleopas (5) the mother of ;
the jihrase /xa/cpd irpocrevxecrdai, to make John Mark (6) a Christian woman in ;
of intensive force, e.g., ]\Iatt. xxvii. F.ph. iv. 17 I Thess. ii. 11 (W. H.).*
;
24 ; Rom. viii. 34. See § 321. ^ jidpTvs, vpos, dat. plur. /xaprvai, 6, a
MdXx.oSi ov, 6, Malchus, John xviii. 10.* icitness, i.e., judicially, Matt, xviii.
agrandmotlier, 2 Tim. i. 5.*
|idp.|JL-r], 7;s, 7], 16 one who testifies from what he has
;
mon, gain, ivealth {fvom Chald.), Matt, xxiv. 48 ; a martyr, witnessing by his
vi. 24 ; Luke xvi. 9, 11, 13.* death, Acts xxii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 13,
Mava-^v, 6 (Heb.), Manaen, Acts xiii. i,* xvii. 6.
Mava(r<rT|s, gen. and ace, i], 6, Ma- |xa(ra-do|jLai, Co/xai, to bite, to gnaw^ Rev.
nasseh, (i) Son of Joseph, Rev. vii. xvi. 10.*
6 (2) Matt. i. 10.*
;
|jia<rTi"y6a), Co, Coaco, to scourge, Matt. x.
|xav9dvci), jxaO-qaofjiaL, 2nd aor. ifxadov, 17 ; fig., Heb. xii. 6.
perf. fjLe/xddrjKa, to learn, to under- [lao-Ti^a), to scourge. Acts xxii. 25.*
stand, to know, to be informed, to com- (idcTTi^, 170s, a whip, a scowrge. Acts
17,
prehend. Used abs., or with ace. xxii. 24 ; Heb. xi. 36 fig., sharp pain, ;
(ttTTo, irapd [gen.], with the teacher, ev disease, affliction, 5lark iii. lo, v. 29,
with example, i Cor. iv. 6). 34 ; Luke vii. 21.*
fiavCa, as, i}, madness, insanity. Acts jtao-Tos, ov, 6, the breist, the paps, Luke
xxvi. 24.* xi, 27, xxiii. 29 ; Rev, i. 13.*
)idvvo^ T6(Heb.,deriv. uncertain), manwa, liaraio-XoY^o^ as, i], vain talk, empty,
the food of the Israelites iu the desert. fruitless couvcrsat ion, i Tim. i. 6.*
; ;;
|uiTaio-XoYos, ov, 6, a vain, empty talker^ full-grown, inien^e. Matt. ii. 10, xxviii.
Tit. i. lo.* 8 wonderful, 2 Cor. xi. 15 noble, of
; ;
(jLaraios (ai'a), o-iov, vain, fruitless, empty, high rank. Rev. xi. 18, xiii. 16 ;
1 Cor. XV. 17 ; James i. 26 ; rd fidraia, applied to age, 6 fxel^wy, the elder,
vanities, spec, of heathen deities, Acts Rom. ix. 12, /x^yas indicates the size
xiv. 15 (and O.T.). Syn, 29. of things, their measure, number, costy
(laraioTqs, ttjtoj, 17, (i) vanity, 2 Pet. ii. and estimation ; fxeyaXr] -Tj/x^pa, a high,
18 (2) perverseness, Eph. iv. 17 ; (3)
;
day, John xix. 31.
*
frailty, Rom. viii. 20 |ify£dos, ov^, -rd, greatness, vastness, im-
fiaraioo), w, to render vain or foolish, to mensity, Eph. i. 19.*
deprave; pass., Rom. i. 21.* fieyKTTdvts, dviov, ol, jrrinccs, great men
)idTT)v, adv., 2'?i vain, fruitlessly, Matt (sing,, fieyicTTdv, only in LXX., Sirach
XV, 9 ; Mark vii. 7.* iv. 7), lords, Mark vi. 21 Rev, vi. 15, ;
Maxedv, 6 (Heb.) (W. H., yiadddv,) (uSt], 7/s, t], drunkenness, drunken frolic
MarraOias, ou, 6, Mattathias, Luke iii. Acts xix, 26 to remove from office,
;
|i.d\aipa, as and ?;?, 17, a sword ; met., for Luke xvi. 4,*
strife. Matt. x. 34 ; fig., of spiritual (icO-oScCa (-o5ia, W, H, ), as, t), fraudu-
weapons, Eph. vi. 17. lent artifice, a trick, a stratagem, Eph.
)idxT], 77s, T), contention,
strife, dispute, iv. 14, vi. II.*
2 Cor. 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii.
vii. 5 ; (leO-iipios, bordering on; rd fxedupta,
9 ; James iv. i.* borders, confines, Mark vii. 24 (W. H.,
(Aaxofiai, to fght, contend, dispute, John opia).*
vi. 52 ; Acts vii. 26 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24 ;
|jLc6tiarKa), to make drunk; pass., to be
James iv. 2.* drunk, Luke xii. 45 Eph, v. 18 ;
^ryaXtixrvvT], ?;?, 17, magnificence, majesty, or 5ti, as Mark iv, 38. Syn. 11.
Heb. i. 3, viii. i ; Jude 25* (icXerdcD, 0), Tjtra;, to th'nk upon, to revolve in
Iti^as, fJieydXT], (see ^ 39), comp.
fiiya m'nd^ to jrremcditate, ^lark xiii, 11 (not
fiei^uy, sup. ncyiaros, great, in si;:e, W. H.) Acts iv. 25 i Tim. iv. 15.*
; ;
468 VOCABULARY. [\i.(Ki (JL^TOS
jjlIXi, lto?, t6, honey, ^latt. iii. 4 ; Mark distinguish, pass., to differ, i Cor. vii
i. 6 ; Rev. x. 9, 10.* 34 ; (3) to distribute, Mark vi. 41, ace.
(jLcX^o-crios, a, ov, made
of honey, Luke and dat.
xxiv. 42 (W. H. omit).* )i€pi,p.va, 7;s, 7), care, anxicti/, as dividing,
McXCttj, 77s, 17, Jlclita, now Malta, Acts distracting the mind. Matt. xiii. 22 ;
xxviii. I.* Luke viii. 14.
(leWo), Tjo-o), to be about to do, to be on the p.epifjivdco, Q, to be anxious, distracted
point of douKj, with iiitiu., generally abs., with dat., Trepl (gen.), ace. The
I
the present infin., rarely aor. ; the various constructions may be illus-
flit, infin. (the regular classical use) trated from Matt. vi. abs., vers. 27, :
^(Teadat (only in Acts) the verb may ; vii. 32-34) gen., ver. 34 (W. H. ) dat.,
;
;
limb, as Matt. v. 29, 30 Rom. xii. 4; ; gifts distributed, Heb. ii. 4.*
fig., I Cor. vi. 15. (i€pi(rTT|s, ov, 6, a divider, an arbiter,
MeXx^ (W. H., -ei), 6 (Heb.), Melchi. Luke xii. 14.*
Two are mentioned, Luke iii. 24, 28.* ovs, TO, a 2)art ; hence, (i) a jwrt,
fjicpos,
MeXxio-cScK, 6 (Heb., king of righteous- as assigned, share. Rev. xxii. 19 ;
ness), MclcJiizcdek, Heb. v., vi. , vii.* fellowship, John xiii. 8 a business ;
*
^C)j.Ppdva, 7;s, r;, parchment, 2 Tim. iv. 13. or calling. Acts xix. 27 ; (2) a piart,
p.€fjL(|>o|xai, xl/ofiai, dep.,
comj/laiu, to
to as the result of division, John xix.
censure, abs., Mark vii. 2 (W. H. 23. Li adverbial phrases, fxipos ti,
omit); Rom. ix. 19; abs. or dat., 2)artly, in some part ; ava. ixipo^, alter-
Heb. viii. 8 (W. H., ace, with dat. nately ; airb fjL^povs, partly ; e/c jxipovs,
marg. ). * individually, of persons, partially,
^€(i.\)/C-|xoipos, ou, adj., discontented, com- imperfectly, of things /card fxepos, ;
|ji^v-Toi, conj., yet truly, certainly, never- ii. 5 mediator, or perhaps guarantee,
;
theless, however, John iv. 27. in the phrase fieaiTTjs diadrjKrjs, mediator
Y.iv(a, ixevCo, ^/j-eiva, (i)intrans. to remain, , of a covenant, Heb. viii. 6, ix. 15, xii.
to abide. So («) of i)lace, to dwell. 24.*
Matt. X. II ; to ludge, Luke xix. 5 ;
jjL€(ro-vvKTiov, iov, TO, midnight, as Luke
{b)of state, as Acts v. 4 to continue ; xi. 5.
firm and constant in, John xv. 4 to ; Meo-o-iroTaixia, as,i), Mesopotamia, the
e7idure, to last, to be permanent, i Cor. region between the Euphrates and the
iii. 14; (2) trans., toawait, icait for, Tigris.
to expect, only Acts xx. 5. p.^oros, Vyou, middle, of time or place,
p,€pCt<<^, (Tw, {i) to divide, separate, mid., in the midst of (gen.), as Matt. xxv.
to share {/J-eTa, gen.), Luke xii. 13 ;
6 ; John i. 26, xix. 18 Acts i. 18, ;
.Matt. xii. 25, 26; I Cor. i. 13; (2) to part, used chiefly in adverbial phrases,
;
)
with prepositions (art. generally oni.), mind, ^latt. xxi. 29, 32 Heb. vii.
;
€K fjL^aov, from anion (f, av:ay ; iv ij.€(ti{}, 21 ; to repent, to feel sorrow for, regret,
among ; dva /xicrov, through the Midst, Matt, xxvii. 3 ; 2 Cor. vii. 8. Syn.
among, hcticeen ; also "with Std and ets. 40.*
|i€<rd-Toi\ov, 01', TO, a middle icall, a p,CTa-)jLop<j>6(i), Q,to change Vie form, mid.,
separation, Eph, ii. 14.* to alter ones form or aspect, ^Matt.
|jt6<r-ovpdviipLa, aros, to, mid-heaven, Rev. xvii. 2 ; ^Mark ix. 2 ; 2 Cor. iii. 18 ;
change, or succession (often like the self, to su/nmon, Actsx. 5, 22, 29, xi.
Latin prefix trans-, as in the ^vords 13 : xxiv. 24, 26, XXV. 3 pass., x. ;
horses, ships, James iii. 3, 4.* of anyone, 2 Cor. xi. 13, 14, 15 fig., ;
)LCTd-6€(ris, eojj, t}, {i) a removal, a trans- go over or to fall away, Gal. i. 6 to :
p.€\rj6rjv, dep., pass., to change one's partaker, Heb. iii. i, 14, vi. 4. xii. 8.*
470 VOCABtTLARY. [)icrp4u — (JLiKpos
|i€Tp^(D, w, to Dieasure, Matt. vii. 2 ; met. \Lr\v, jji-qvos, 6, (i) a month, as Acts vii.
to estimate, to judge of, 2 Cor. x. 12. 20 ; (2) the new moon, as a festival,
(iCTpt^TTis, ou, 6, "a measurer," a liquid Gal. iv. 10.
measure (72 sextarii) containing nearly |jfqvv<i), to show, declare, Luke xx. 37 ;
eight and a half English gallons, firkin Joliii xi. 57; Acts xxiii. 30; i Cor. x.
(A. v., R.V.), Johnii. 6.* 28.*
licrpio-iraO^o), u), to treat with gentle- p,-?! ovK, an interrogative formula, ex-
ness, hear gently with (R.V.), Heb. pecting the answer "yes," Rom. x.
V. 2.* 18, 19 I Cor. ix. 4, 5.*
;
p.cTp£a)S, adv., moderately^ a little. Acts p,T|-iroT€, adv., no longer, Heb. ix. 17.
XX. 12.* As conj., lest ever, lest perhaps, whether
p.€Tpov. ov, Tu a, measure, of capacity, indeed, if so be, Luke iii. 15 ; John vii.
Mark iv. 24 of length, Rev. xxi. 15
; ;
26.
a measure assigned, Matt, xxiii. 32 ;
p,T| irou, lest anywJierc, Acts xxvii. 29
adv. phrases, ex /xerpov by measure, (W. H., for Rec. ij.r)irit)s).
sparingly, John iii. 34 €v /J-erpCf}, in ; pTJ-irw, adv., not as yet, not yet, Rom. ix.
due Pleasure, Eph. iv. 16. II ; Heb. ix. 8.*
(jL^T-wirov, ov, TO (<^\p), the forehead. Rev.* p-TJircos, conj., lest in any way, lest per-
(jtc'Xpi or M^xpts, adv., as prep, with gen., haps, as Acts xxvii. 29 (\V. H., fxy irov),
unto, time. Matt. xiii. 30 Mark xiii. ; 1 Thess. iii. 5,
30 ;
place, Rom. xv. 19 degree, 2 ; p.T]pds, ov, 6, the thigh. Rev. xix. 16.*
Tim. 9 ii. ; Heb. xii. 4. As conj., pT|T€, conj., differing from ovre as fxy
until, Eph. iv. 13. from ov (see § 401) ; and not, used after
jiTJ, a negative particle, not. For dis- a preceding fiy or firiTe, neifher...7ior;
tinction between /x??, ov, see § 401 ;
in Mark iii. 20, not even, W. H. read
elliptically, lest, see § 384 ; interro- /xyde.
gatively, see § 369. For the combi- p.TJTT]p, Tp6s, y, a mother; met. , a mother
nation ov fx-f), see § 377. city. Gal. iv. 26.
H'i'j-'Yc, in the phrase et 5e p.T)ye, but if p-^JTi, adv., interrogatively used, is it?
not, emphatic. whether at all ? generally expecting a
)jkT]8a)ici>s- adv., by no means. Acts x. 14, negative answer ixryr^ye not to say ; ;
jA-qSe'-ira), adv., not yet, Heb. xi. 7.* Tit. i. 15 ; Heb. xii. 15 Jude 8.*
;
Mt]8os, 01', 6, a Mede, Acts ii. 9.* p^acrpa, aros, t6, pollution, defilement,
p.T]K£'Ti, adv. {^tl), no more, no longer, 2 Pet. ii. 20; "miasma."*
lest further. p.ia(rp.os, 01^, 6, pollution, defilement,
(i.f]KOs, ov$, TO, length, Eph. iii. 18 ; Rev. 2 Pet. ii. 10.*
xxi. 16.* p^Ylxa, aroj, to, a mixture, John xix. 39.*
|jLT)Kvva>, to make long ;mid., to grow U}), p.tYvup.1, fxi^o}, cfii^a, ])erf. ])ass. /x^/xiy/xai,
as plants, Mark iv. 27.* to mingle. Matt, xxvii. 34 ;
)ni.r, to
(jiT]XwT"<], ?)j, y, a fleece, a shee2)^s skin, Luke Rev. viii. 7, xv. 2.*
xiii. i ;
Heb. 37.*
xi. piKpos, a, ov, little, small, i.e., in size,
^Li]v, a part, of strong affirmation, N.T., Matt. xiii. 32 ([uantity, i Cor. v. 6 ; ;
only in the combination fi fiyv, assuredly, number, Luke xii. 32 time, John vii, ;
i,ooo paces), a mile (about 80 yards 53 less frequent than the following.
;
less than our mile), Matt. v. 41.* jiVTi|uiov, 01*, TO, a tomb, a grave. Matt.
piL(i^(iai, ovfjLaL, dep. mid., to imitate, to viii. 28 John xi. 31.;
remember, gen. pers. or thing, Matt. or Trepi, gen.), Heb. xi. 22.
xxvi. 75 Luke xxiii. 42 pass. to be
; ;
, |ivT]n6<rwov, ov, TO, a 7ncmorial, honour-
remembered, to be had in mind, only able rememlrrance fame. Matt. xxvi. ,
|Xk<rc<u, Co, i7<rw, to hate, to detest, to abhor. }jiVTi<rT€v«, to ask in marriage; mid., to
Used in antith. with dyaTrdn>}, to love u'oo ; pass. , to be betrotlied, Matt. i. 1 8
less, not to lore, to slight, Matt. vi. 24 ; Luke i. 27, ii. 5.*
John xii. 25. (lO'yi-XdXost 01', one who can scarcely
jii<r6-airo-8o(ria, as, 17, recompense, as (i) speak, a stammerer, Mark vii. 32.*
reheard, Heb. x. 35, xi. 26 ; {2) punish- (1.6-yis, adv. (like yuoXts), with difficulty,
ment, Heb. ii. 2.* scarcely, hardly, 39.* Luke ix.
IxiorO-airo-SoTTis, ov, 6, a reicarder, Heb. fjLoSios, ov, 6, a dry measure (16 sextarii),
xi. 6.* containing about a peck a modius, ;
pvcCo, as, 17, remembrance, recollection, jiovii, 77$, 7), a place of abode, a dwelling-
Phil. i. 3 ; I Thess. iii. 6 ; fiveiav jilace, John xiv. 2, 23.*
iroLciadaL, to mention, to bear in mind, |xovo-7€VT|s, ^$, gen. ovs, only begotten,
Rom. i. 9. Luke vii. 12, viii. 42, ix. 38 ; Heb.
4:1-2 VOCABUIiARY. [(idvos — Naljap^i
xi. 17 ; of Christ, John i. 14, 18, p.vpioi, at, a, ten thousand. Matt, xviii.
iii. 16, 18 ; I John iv. 9.* 24 ;
ixvploL, iai, ia, innumerahlc, i Cor.
)i($vos, 77, ov, only, alone, single, Lnke iv. 15, xiv. 19.*
xxiv, 12, 18 ; solitary, ivithout com- (xvpov, 01;, TO, a perfumed ointm,ent. Matt,
pany or help, ]\Iark vi. 47 ; forsaken, xxvi. 7.
desolate, John viii. 29 adv., (xbvov, ; Mv(ria, as, y], Mysia, Acts xvi. 7, 8.*
only. |j,vo-TTJpiov, lov, rb, a mystery, anything
|xov-o(}>6a\(jLos, having hut one eye, Matt, hidden, a secret, Matt. xiii. 11 Rom. ;
shape, Mark xvi. 12 ; Phil. ii. 6, 7. N.T. of the truths of the Gospel as
Syn. 56.* mysteries partly hidden, partly re-
|iop(|>ob), tD, cicrw, to form, to fashion, Gal. vealed, Eph. iii. 9 ; Col. i, 26, iv. 3 ;
Xt^os, millstone, Mark ix. 42 (not AV. H., -qv), b, Moses, met., the books
W, H.) ; Luke
H.).* xvii. 2 (AV. of Moses, the Pentateuch, Luke xvi.
jivXtvos, in sense of foregoing, Rev. xviii. 29 2 Cor. iii. 15.
;
l^Ta^apTivos — VT]<rT6Ca
J
VOCABULARY. 473
NatapT]voS) ov, 6, a Nazarene, as ^lark vcKpoxris, ewj, rj, death, a being put to
i. 24. death, 2 Cor. iv. 10 deadness, impo- ;
NaGdv, b{]:\eh.),Xathan, Luke iii. 31.* new^ in disposition and character (2) ;
NaGavaTiX, 6, XatJumad, probably the young, of persons, Tit. ii. 4. Com par.,
same a,s Jjartholomew. veJjTepo^, younger, Luke xv. 12, 13.
vai, adv., altirniing, yes, Matt. ix. 28 ; Syn. 26.
even so, ]\latt. xi. 26 ; Luke x. 21 ; V€o<ro-os, ov, 6, the young of birds, a
Rev. xxii. 20 ; yea, strongly affirming, youngling, a chicken, Luke ii. 24.*
Luke vii. 26. vc6tt]s, "qTo^, 77, youth, youtltfulncss,
Natv, Kain, Luke vii. ii.*
7], Luke xviii. 21 ; i Tim. iv. 12.
vaos, ov, 6 {valu}), a temple, a shrine, or v€6-<j>vTos, nevjly planted; fig.,
ov, a
small model of a temple, the abode of recent convert, novice^ "neophyte," I
Acts vii. 58, XX. 9, xxiii. 17, 18, 22 VTjGo), to sjnn, Matt. vi. 28 ; Luke xii. 27.*
(notW. H.).* vrjiridtw, to be like a child, I Cor. xiv.
V€avi<rKos, ov, 6, a young man, Matt. xix. 20.*
20 plur. of soldiers, ^lark xiv. 5 1
;
,
; VT^irtos,ia, lov, infantile; as subst., an
of the middle stage in the divine life, infant, a babe, a child, iNlatt. xxi. 16 ;
I John ii. 13, 14. I Cor. xiii. 1 1 ; used of an age below
NtdiroXis, em, ?), Keapolis, Acts xvi. 11.* manhood. Gal. iv. i ; fig., oi unlearned,
Necfidv ("\V. H., 'Saifxav), 6 (Heb.), Xaa- unenlightened persons, Matt. xi. 25 ;
man, Luke iv. 27.* Rom. ii. 20. Syn. 62.
vcKpds, d, ov, dead, (i) lit., as Matt. xi. Nt]P€vs, ^ojs, 6, Kerens, Rom. xvi. 15.*
5 oi v€Kpoi, the dead, generally
; (2) ; NripC, 6 (Heb.), Keri, Luke iii. 27.*
fig., dead, spiritually, Eph. ii. i dead ; vr\a-iov,ov, t6 (dim. of vrjaos), a small
to (dat.), Rom. vi. ii inactive, ; in- island, an islet, Acts xxvii. 16.*
opieraiive, Rom. vii. 8. Syn. 54. vfjo-os, ov, swim), an island.
7) {vi(j}, to
vcKpdo), tD, to 2nd to death ; fig., to mortify, VTio-Ttia, as, a fast, Matt.
7), fasting,
to deprive of ^;o?t"cr, to render weak xvii. 21 ("W. H. onut) Acts xiv. 23 ; ;
and impotent, Rom. iv. 19 ; Col. iii. tho day of aionenicnt, tlie chief Jewish
5 Heb. xi. 12. Syn. 54.*
; fast-day, Acts xxvii. 9.
474 VOCABULARY. [vi]crT€vw vov-[i.'t\vla
VTjorT€vc«), ffu, to abstain from food, to in latv, Tit. iii. 13 « teacher of the ;
Vi]4>dXios or -Xeos, ou, sober-minded, v6[it<r|JLa, aros, t6, money, coin, whose
temperate ; Tim.iii. 2, 11 ; Tit. ii. 2.*
I value is settled by law, ^latt. xxii.
VTJ(|>cD, xj/u}, to be sober, temperate, fig., 19.*
I Thess. V. 6, 8. vopio-SiSdo-KaXos, ov, 6, a teacJier or in-
N£"y€p, 6 (Lat.), Niger, Acts xiii. i.* terpreter of tlic law, Luke v. 17 ; Acts
NiKavup, opos, 6, Nicanor, Acts vi. 5.* V. 34; I Tim. i. 7.*
viKao), a), Tjo-w, i!o prevail, abs. Rev. iii. , vo(io-9€(r£a, as, i), legislation, the laics
21 ; to conquer, overcome (ace), Luke given, i.e., the Mosaic law, Rom.
xi. 22 ; John xvi. 33. ix. 4.*
vCkt], 77s, 77, victory, i John v. 4.* vofio-OeWw, 03, to sanction, to establish for
NiKd-8T]|ios, Nicodcmus, John iii. i.
01', 6, a law, Hel3. viii. 6 pass., to Jmve a ;
Several cities of the name existed ; this Rom. iii. 2"] a written law, Rom. ii.
;
viKOSi ov$, TO, victory; els v?kos, from Rom. X. 4 the Christian dispensation
;
utterly, Matt. xii. 20 ; i Cor. xv. 54. met., the books containing the
for
55> 57-,* Mosaic law, i.e., the five books of
Niv€vt, 7} (Heb.), Nineveh, Luke xi. 32 Moses, Matt. xii. 5 and for the Old ;
i.e., the liiidcrstanding or intellect, Acts X. 18, 23, 32, xxviii. 7 Heb. ;
viol Tov vvfi(pu)vos, the so7is of the bridal |«m^S, ov, 6 (the Latin sextariu.s), a
chamber, bridesmen. Matt. ix. 15 ^lark ; measure, about a pint and a half
ii. 19 ; Luke v, 34.* English met., ; a cup or pitcher, of
vvv and vvvl, adv., (i) of time, iio^v, i.e., any size, Mark vii. 4, 8.*
the actually present ; noic, in relation ^poivo), avC), 1st aor., act., i^rjpdva ;
to time just past, just noio, even nmr ; I aor., Jftass., i^rjpdvdriv ; perf., pass.,
vow, in relation to future time, just e^TjpafjL/xai (3 s., i^ripavTai, Mark xi. 21 ),
at hand, even nov:, immediately ; 6, 17, to dry., to make dn/, to icither, James
TO, vvv, tJic prcsent,\\\\\\ subst. or(neut.) i. II ;
pass., to be or become dry,
without ; (2) of logical connection, witJiered, Matt. xiii. 6 ; to be dried up.
iw^c, i.e., ".seeing that things are so," Rev. xvi. 12 to be ripened, as corn. ;
2 Cor. vii. 9 ; iio^c tJien, i.e., implying Rev. xiv. 15 to pine away, Mark ix. 18. ;
the rise of one thing from another, |i]p6s, d, ov, dnj, v:ithered, of a tree, Luke
1 Cor. xiv. 6. (3) In commands and xxiii. 31 ; of a useless limb, Matt,
appeals, vvv is emphatic, Matt, xxvii. xii. 10 ; Mark iii. 3 (W. H. ) ; Luke vi.
42 James iv. 13, at this instant.
; 6, 8 ; John v. 3 ; of land, Heb. xi.
vv|, vvkt6s, i], the night, night-tiDic, lit. ; 29 ; 7} ^rjpd (sc. yrj), dry land, Matt,
often fig., a time of darkness and xxiii. 15.*
ignorance^ Rom. xiii. 12 ; i Thess. |vXivos, iv-q, ivov, wooden, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ;
Rev. ix. 20.*
vv<r<rft), ^a>, to stab, to pierce, John xix. ^vXov, 01', TO, wood, e.g., timber in build-
34-* ing, I Cor. iii. 12 or for burning ; ;
vvx^-^IAtpov, ov, TO, a day and a night, Gal. iii. 13 n living tree. Rev. ii. 7.;
twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. xi. 25.* |vpdii), a, ri<T(j}, perf. pass, i^vprj/nai, to
N«€, 6 (Heb.), Noah. shear or shave, e.g., the locks and the
Vb>8p<$s, d, 6v, slow, dull, stupid, Heb. v. beard. Acts xxi. 24; i Cor. xi. 5, 6.*
II, vi. 12.*
vwTos, 01', 6, the back of men or animals,
Rom. xi. 10.* o.
o-ySoTlKovTa, num., indecl., eighty. Acts X. 7 ; Rom. xiv, 4 ; i Pet. ii. iS,
^-ySoos, 77, ov, ord., eighth ; on 2 Pet. ii. Syn, 61.*
5, see § 331. oiKco), (i), Tjaio, to inhabit, to dwell in,
67KOS, ov, 6, a iceight, an impediment, Rom. viii. 9 ; i Tim. vi. 16.
Heb. xii. i, Syn. 68.* ol'KT]p,a, aros, to, a dwelling, used of a
iJSc, Tjde, Tode, demon, proii., this, that prison, Acts xii. 7.*
(here). See § 339. oiKT|TT|piov, a domicile, habitation,
Oil, TO,
oScvb), to 2MSS along a ivay, to journey, 2 Cor. V, 2 Jude 6.* ;
oS-T^Yc'cD, cD, -qaw, to lead along a way, to household, a family, goods, i.e., a house
conduct, to guide, Matt. xv. 14 ; Luke and all that is in it. Syn, 61.
vi. 39 John xvi. 13 Acts viii. 31
; ; ;
oUiaKos, OV, 6, one of a family, Avhether
Rev. vii. 17.* child, relative, or servant, ^latt. x.
oS-T^Yos, ov, 6, a leader. Acts i. 16 fig,, ;
^25, 36.*
of instructors, Matt. xv. 14, xxiii. olKO-8c(r'rroTe(o, Co, to govern a household,
16, 24 Kom. ii. 19.*
; I Tim. 14.*
V.
oSoi-iropeci), Co, to travel, to j^ursue a way. olKO-8€<nrdTT]s, ov, 6, a householder, a
Acts X. 9.* head of a family. Matt, x, 25.
o8oi-7ropCa,as, a journey, a journey-
t], olKO-8o|Jk€'a), a), to erect a building, build,
ing, Johniv. 6; 2 Cor. xi. 26.* Luke xiv, 30 fig., of the l)uilding up
;
686s, ov, i], (i) a way, a road, a highway. of character, to build uj), edfy, i Cor.
Matt. ii. 12 ; (2) a going, a jrrogress, X. 23 to embolden, i Cor. viii. 10.
;
^lark vi. 8 ; (3) ft journey, a day's or olKo-8op.T|, 77s, Tj {5efx(x}), the act of building
a Sabbath day's, Luke ii. 44 Acts i. ; a building, lit,, Matt. xxiv.
structure,
12 (4) fig., manner of action, method
;
I of the spiritual body, 2 Cor. v. i ;
;
olKCTcia, as, 77, household (W. H.), Matt. or economy, Heb, ii, 5, Syn. 58.
XXIV, 45.* olK-ovpds, ov, 6, 7) {ovpos, keej^cr), a house-
oUfcrT]s, ov, 6, a domestic, Luk« xvi. 13; manager, Tit. ii. 5 ("W. H., oiKovpyCs).*
olKTctpW 6|JL01<{t»^s] VOCABULARY. 477
ate, merciful, Luke vi. 36 ; James v. 6Xd-KX-r]pos, ov, luhole in every part, sound,
II.* perfect, i Thess. v. 23 ; James i. 4.
ot|xai. See otofxaL. Syn. 27.*
olvo-iroTTiS) 01', 6, a wine-hihher, one icho oXoXvi^w, as from the cry, o\-o\ ! to howl,
drinks to excess, Matt. xi. 19 Luke ; to yell, to lament aloud, James v. i.*
vii. 34.* 6X0S, T), ov, all, the whole (see § 225) ;
olvos, ov, 6, wine, Mark ii. 22 ; met., duil\.,-<j3s,ivholly, altogether; with n eg.
the vine. Rev. vi. 6 ; fig., of tliat preced., not at all.
Avhich excites or inflames, Rev. xiv. oXo-tcXtjs, e's, perfect, complete, I Thess.
10, xvii. 2. V. 23. Syn. 27.*
oivo-<|>\\rYia, as, 17 (0\jyw, to he hot), the 'OXv|nrds, a, 6, Olympas, Rom. xvi.
state of being heated with wine, drunken- 15.*
ness, I Pet. iv. 3.* 6Xvv0os, ov, 6, an unseasonable fg (one
otofiai and olfxai, to think, to sujypose, which, not ripening in due time, hangs
ace. and inf. , or on, John xxi. 25 ;
till neai'ly winter). Rev. vi. 13.*
Phil. i. 16 ; James i. 7.* o^Ppos, 01', 6, a heavy rain, Luke xii.
olos, a, ov, rel. pron., correl. to tolovtos,
of what kind, such as. 6|i€£po|iai, to long for, i Thess. ii. 8
oiia. See (pepio. (W. H.).*
OKvc'b), a), fiacj, to he slothful, to delay, to 6|JiiXe(i>, aj, Tjaw, to he in comjMny with,
be loth. Acts ix. 38.* to associate with (dat. ), to talk witfi
oKVT^pos, a, ov, slothful, indolent, tedious, {irpbs,ace), Luke xxiv. 14, 15; Acts
Matt. XXV. 26 ; Rom. xii. 1 1 ; Phil. XX. II, xxiv. 26.*
iii. I.* 6p.iXCa, as, 17, intercourse, converse, dis-
oKTa-i^p-epos, ov, 6, ij, of or belonging to course, I Cor. XV. 33; "homily."*
tfie eighth day, Phil. iii. 5.* 6)iiXos, ov, 6, a crowd, company, Rev.
oKTw, num., indecl., eight. xviii. 17 (not W. H.).*
5Xe6pos, ov, 6, destruction, 2^crdition, opLfX^I* '/^j ^> ^ mist, 2 Pet. ii. 17
muery, i Cor. v. 5 ; i Thess. v. 3 ; (\\. H.).*
2 Tliess. i. 9 ; I Tim. vi. 9.* Sfifta, aTos, TO, an eye. Matt. xx. 34
oXi-yoirio-rCa, 17, little faith, Matt. xvii. (\\\ H.) ; Mark viii. 23.*
^
20 (W. H.).* 5|JLKU|iiand dfivvu}, ofibau) (see § 116, 3),
oXi-yo-irnTTos, ov, 6, ij, of little faith, to swear, to take an oath, Mark xiv. 71 ;
Alatt. vi. 30. to pjromise with an oath, ^lark vi. 23.
6\iyos, r), ov, (l) little, small, brief; (2) 6p.o-9v|xa8dv, adv., with one mind, unani-
in plur., feiv, sometimes with gen. ; mously, with one accord, only in Acts
(3) neut. as adv., oXiyov, of time, and Rom. xv. 6.
50071; of space, a little ivay ; (3) with ofJLoidto), a<j), to be like, Mark xiv. 70
prepositions preced. in various phrases, (not W. H.).*
as eV oXiyij}, in a short time, or witfc ofioio-Tradris, oCs,6, t), being affected like
little trouble, Acts xxvi. 28. another (dat. ), having like passions or
oXi-yd-xIruxos, adv., small-souled, faiiit- feelings, Acts xiv. 15 ; James v. 17.*
hearted, i Thess. v. 14.* iifioios, Ota, similar to, re-
01.0V, like,
dXiY-topco), w, to make little of, to despise sembling (dat.), of equal rank, Matt,
(gen.), Heb. xii. 5 ; LXX.* xxii. 39. Once with gen., John viii.
6Xo0peuT^s, ov, 6, a destroyer, i Cor. x. 55. Adv., -ws, in like manner, like-
10.* wise.
6Xo9pcv(o, to destroy, cause to perish, Heb. ojioidrqs, -qTos, 7], likeness, similitude,
xi. 28.* Heb. iv. 15, vii. 15.*
478 VOCABULARY. [6)ioi6(i> — oirrao-la
ofioioo), w, (i) to render like; pass., to he dvCvT]p.i, to be of use to ; mid. aor., opt.,
like, or to resemble, Matt. vi. 8, xiii. ouaifxijv, may I have help or joy frum,
24 ; Acts xiv. II ; (2) to likeii, to conn- Philem. 20.*
2Mre, ]\Iatt. vii. 24 ; Mark iv. 30 ; with 5vo|xa, aros, to, a name, almost always
ace. and dat. of persons; in N.T., as in O.T., the
6)Jkoi(d|JLa, aros, to, likeness, similitude, name of a person is a mark of what he
Rom. i. 23, V. 14, V 5, viii. 3 ; Phil, himself is ; the name expresses the
ii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 7.* character, Matt. i. 21 Mark iii. 16, ;
6|id-<|>p(Dv, oj'oj {(pprjv), of the same mind, SiTKrOcv, adv., behind, after, at the back of.
I Pet. iii. 8.* dirC(r6>, adv. behind, after, of place, Luke
,
8nw9, adv., yet, nevertheless, Cor. xiv. i or with gen. rot oiricu, those things
;
7 Gal. iii. 15 ;
; with fxivroi, notwith- that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 et's rd ;
Mj,tt. xi. 20
xvi. 14. ; Mark OTTotos, oia, pron., of what
otov, relat.
6v£k8k(r|i<$s, ov, 6, reproach, reviling, con- kind or manner, correl. to roioOroy,
tumely, Rom. XV. 3 ; i Tim. iii. 7 ;
Acts xxvi. 29 ; i Cor. iii. 13 ; Gal. ii.
Heb. X. 33, xi. 26, xiii. 13.* 6 I Thess. i. 9
; James i. 24.* ;
^vciSoSi ovs, TO, reproach, Luke i. 25.* oiroTC, adv. of time, when, Luke vi. 3
*OvV]<rijjLos, ov {profitable), Oiiesimu^, Col. (W. H., 5re).*
iv. 9 ; Philem. 10.* Sirov, adv. of place, where, whitlier
'OvTi<rC-<|>opos, ov, 6, Onesijihorus, 2 Tim. wJicre, referring to state, CIol. iii. 11 ;
i. 19.*
16, iv. whereas, i Cor. iii. 3.
^iK($s> "n, 6v, pertaining to an ass ; fiv\o$ dirrdvw, in pass., to appear. Acts i. 3.
6uiKos, a millstone turned by an ass, See bpan>}.*
i.e., the large upper millstone, Matt. dirxao-Ca, aj, t], a vision, a supernatural
xviii. 6; Luke xvii. 2 (not W. H.) ;
appearance, Luke i. 22, xxiv. 23 Acts ;
DITTOS — 6<rdK IS
J
VOCABULARY. 479
*
6Trr6s,v,6v, roasted, broiled, Luke xxiv. 42. dpOpCtw, to rise early, to do anything n
See opdw.
SiTTft), diTTOfxai. early morning, Luke xxi. 38.*
OTT-wpa, as, 7) (perhaps otto'j, juice), (he opSpivds, T}, 6v, belonging to early morn-
autumn, autumnal fruits. Rev. xviii. ing, Luke xxiv. 22 ( W. H. ) Rev. ;
strative force, that, Matt. ix. 38 ; viii. 2 (W. H. omit) Acts v. 21.* ;
opaTos, 7), 6v, visible, seen, plur., neut., 6piov, plur., the borders oi a place ;
iov, t6,
Col. i. 16.* hence, districts, territory.
eupaKa, elSov (see § 103,
6pd(t), Q, 6\po/uLaL, opKC^o), to adjure by, to charge solemnly
4), (i) to generally; {2) to look
see, by, with double ace, Mark v. 7 Acts ;
upon or contemplate ; {^) to see, and so xix. 13; I Thess. v. 27 (\V. H.,
*
to participate in, Luke xvii. 22; John h'OpKl^U)).
iii. 36 ; (4) to take heed, Heb. viii. 5 ;
iipKos, OV, 6, an oath. Matt. xiv. 7, 9 ;
Alatt. viii.4 with fxij or equiv., ; to a jjramise u'ith an oath. Matt. v. 33.
heicare, Matr. xvi. 6 (5) pass., to ;
be opK-wfioo-ia, as, 17, an oath, Heb. vii. 20,
($0*10$ (la), lov, lioly, of human beings, of ovtt, interj., ah! aha! derisive, Mark
Christ, and of God ; to. oaia, tJie holy XV. 29.*
promises, Acts xiii. 34 ; adv., -ws, ovai, interj., woe ! alas ! uttered in grief
holily, only i Thess. ii. 10. Syn. or indignation. Matt. xi. 21 i Cor. ;
(3) of measure, degree, Heb. vii. 20. 2 Cor. xi. 9(W. H.).*
8or-ir€p, Tj-TTcp, 6-wef), the very one ivho, ovK-€Ti, adv., no further, no more, no
Mark xv. 6.* longer.
oo"T^ov, contr. oarovv, ov, to, a bone, ovK-ovv ^ a,A\\, not so then? hence, in
John xix. 36. ordinary classic usage, an affirmative
JJo'-Tis, i]-TLs, oTi, compound relat., ^vho- adverb, therefore (whereas ou/cow retains
soever, whichsoever, whatsoever (see its negative force, 7iot tlierefore) inter- ;
§§ 58, c, 349) ; the addition of av, idv, rogative, John xviii. 37, art thou then
gives indefiniteness. a king ?*
ooTpaKivos, rj, ov, made of earth, earthen, ov }*.•{], an emphatic negative (see § 377).
2 Cor. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20.* ovv, conj., therefore, then, Matt. xii. 12.
6(r(|>pT](ris, ecus, the sense of smell, the Employed espec. ( i ) in arguing, i Cor.
organ of smell, i Cor. xii. 17.* iv. 16 ; (2) in exhortation, J\latt. xxii.
o<r<j>vs, vo$, Matt. iii. 4
i], the loins. 9, 17, 21 (3) in interrogation. Matt,
;
Acts ii. 30; to ''have the loins girded" xiii. 27 ; Gal. iii. 19, 21 (4) to resume ;
AXP'S, ^ws, fi^xP'-^ oi5, until. 2; *'the third heaven," above the
ov {ouK before a vowel, ovx if the vowel atmospheric and the sidereal ; met,
is aspirated), no, not (see §§ 134, 401). for the inhabitants of heaven, Rev.
. ;
;
xviii. 20 ; especially for God, Luke o<|>6aX}«)Sf ov, 6, eye ; fig. of the eye an ,
wealth, Luke xv. 12, 13.* cunning. Matt, xxiii. 33 ; used sym-
o<J-T€, conj., and not; neither, nor, with bol, for Satan, 2 Cor. xi. 3.
a negative preced. ovre ... ovre, nei- ; d(j>pvs, I'os, T), the eyebrow ; the brow of a
ther ... nor. (The readings often vary mountain or hill, Luke iv. 29.*
between oih-e and ou5e.) oxXc'to), u), to disturb, to vex, only in pass.,
o5tos, ai)T7], TovTo, demonstr. pron., this Luke vi. 18 (W. H., evoxX^w), Acts
(near), appl. to persons and things, V. 16.*
sometimes emphatic, Matt. v. 19 oxXo-TTowto, Q, to gather a croicd, Acts
sometimes contemptuous, this fclloiv, xvii. 5.*
Matt. xiii. 55 (see §§ 338-342 ; also ^xXos, ov, 6, a crowd, the common people,
e/cctj'os and oSe). the iiiultitude, plur., crowds. Syn. 73.
©{Jtws (and before a consonant sometimes 6\vp(a\i.a, aros, to, a fortress, a strong
oiiTot), adv., thus, in thisicise, so, (i) in 2jlacc of defence, 2 Cor. x. 4.*
reference to antecedent or following oYj/dpiov, 01*, TO (a relish with bread), a
statement ; (2) correlative with cLs or little fish, John vi. 9, 11, xxi. 9, 10,
Kaddjs, so ... as (3) qualifying adjec- ;
tives, adverbs, or verbs, 5o,Heb. xii. 21 d\j/€, adv., late, in the evening, IMark xi.
Matt. ix. 33 ofh-ws ... ovtws, I Cor.
; II (AV. H.), 19, xiii. 35 ; at the end of
vii. 7, in this manner . . i7i that. after, gen.. Matt, xxviii. i.*
ov\C, adv., (i) an intensive form of ov, 6\|/k)ios, ov, latter, of the rain, James v.
John xiii. 10, by no inea)is, no, nay ;
(2) mostly interrog., as Matt. v. 46, 5\{;ios, ia, Lov, late, Mark xi. 11 (not
expecting an affirmative answer. W. H. marg. ) as subst., ri d\pia,
; see ;
32 ; Rom. xiii. 7 ; i Cor. vii. 3 oxj/is,ews, 7], the aspect, the co^cntenance,
(W. H.).* John xi. 44 ; Rev. i. 16 ; external
o(|>€C\T]|Jia, aros, to, a debt, what is justly a2)pearancc, John vii. 24.*
due, Rom. iv. 4; fig., an offence, a dt{/(oviov, ov, TO, lit., relish, sauce, like
fault, a failure in duty. Matt. vi. 12. 6\pa.pLov, the rations oi &o\-
(i) plur.,
Syn. 39.* diers, their wages, Luke iii. 14 ; i Cor.
o(j>c£X(i), {i) to owe (ace. and dat.). Matt, ix. 7. Hence, {2) recompense, generally,
xviii. 28 ; t6 dipeiXSfieuov, the due, Rom. vi. 23 ; 2 Cor. xi. 8.*
Matt, xviii. 30 (2) to ;
be binder obliga-
tion. Matt, xxiii. 16 ; hence, to sin
against, Luke xi. 4. Syn. 39. n.
8«|>€Xov (see §378), mtQvi., that! I wish!
would that ! followed by indicative, IT, IT, xt, pi, p, the sixteenth letter. As
I Cor. iv. 8 Gal. v. 12 Rev. iii. 15.*
; ; a numeral, tt' = 80 ; ir, = 80,000.
£({>cXos, ouj, t{> (60AXw, to increase), ira-YiScuw, (rw, to ensnare, to lie in wait
profit, iitility, i Cor. xv. 32 ; James for, fig., Matt. xxii. 15.*
ii. 14, 16.* ira-Yts, t'Sos, 7/, a snare, a trap, Luke xxi.
o(|>6aXpLo-8ov\€Ca, as, t), eye-service, Eph. 35 Rom. xi. 9
; ; i Tim. iii. 7, vi. 9 j
vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22.* 2 Tim. ii, 26.*
II
482 VOCABULARY. [iraYOs ir&vrxi
inxYOS, 01', 6, a hill ; only with the adj. man, i.e., man
in his old, unrenewed
"Apetos, Mars Hill, Ai'eojJagus, Acts nature, Rom.
6; (2) u'orn out, as a
vi.
xvii. 19, 22.* garment. Matt. ix. 16 ; corrupt, viti-
TrdO-qjia, aros, t6, ( I ) suffering, affiiction, ated. Syn. 25.
Rom. viii. 18 ; (2) affection of mind, iraXaidTiis, tjtos, 17, age, oldncss, Rom.
2)assio7i, Rom. Gal. v. 24.
vii. 5 ; vii. 6.*
Tra6T]Tos, rj, 6v, destined to suffer, Acts TraXaido), w, to make old, Heb.
(b<TU}, viii.
xxvi, 23.* 13 ;
grow old, to hecome
pass., to obso-
TrdGosi oi^s, TO, suffering, emotion, in lete, Luke xii. 33; Heb. i. 11, viii.
N.T., of an evil kind, conciqnscence, 13.*
Rom. i. 26 i Thess. iv. 5 Col. ; ; irdXt], Tjs, 7], a wrestling, a struggle, Eph.
iii. 5.* vi. 12.*
iraiS-a-ywyos, ou, 6, a hoys' leader or 'iraXiY-'Y€V€(rCa (W. H , 7raXt»'7-), as, r/, a
guardian, a slave who had the charge neiv birth, renovation, regeneration.
of the boys of a family dnring their Matt. xix. 28 Tit. iii. ;
5.*
nonage, i Cor. iv. 15 ; Gal. iii. 24, 25 ; irdXiv, adv., again, back, used of place
"paedagogue."* or of time ; a particle of continuation,
iraiSdpiov, iov, to (dim. of irah), a hoy, again, once 'more, further ; and of anti-
a lad. Matt. xi. 16 (W. H., Traibiov) ;
thesis, as 2 Cor. X. 7, on the other
John vi. 9.* hand.
iraiSefa, ay,
ii, training, of children and iraji-irXTiOef, adv., all at omcc, the whole
youth, Eph. \'i. 4 hence, instruction, ; crowd together, Luke xxiii. 18.*
2 Tim. iii. 16 cliastisement, correc- ; irdjx-iroXvs, TrafnrdWrj, irafxiroXv, very
tion, Heb. xii. 5-1 1.* great, vast, Mark viii. i (not W. H.).*
iratSevTTJs, ov, 6, \i) an instructor, a pre- IIa(i<j>vXCa, as, i], Pamphylia.
ceptor, Rom. ii. 20 ; (2) a corrector ^ a irav-Sox^iov, ov, to, a khan, a caravan-
chastiser, Heb. xii. 9.* serai, or Eastern inn, Luke x. 34.*
iraiSevo), cw, to train a child ; hence, (i) irav-8ox€vs, ^ws, 6 {8ix°f^°-'-)> i^^^ keeper of
to instruct, to admonish ; (2) to correct, a khan or caravanserai, a host, Luke
to chasten. Syn. 14. X. 35-*
iraiStdOev, adv., /ro/i childhood, Mark ix. irav-Ti'Yvpis,tSos, i] {ayelpw), a general
21.* assembly, a 2^uhlic convocation, Heb.
iraiSiov, iov, to (dim. of Trats), a little xii. 23.*
child, an infant. Matt. ii. 8 « child ; -irav-oiKf, adv., tvith one^s whole house-
more advanced, Matt. xiv. 21 ; fig., hold or family. Acts xvi. 34.*
I Cor. xiv. 20. Syn. 62. iravoirX^a, as, rj, complete armour,
iraiS^o-KT), -qs, 7} (fem. dim. of Trais), a young " panoply," Luke xi. 22 ; Eph. vi.
girl, a female slave, a hondmaid. II, 13.^
play, as a child, to dance,
Trailo), ^ofiaL, to irav-ovp-yCa, as, ^, shrewdness, skill;
as in idolatrous worship, i Cor. x. 7.* hence, cunning, craftiness, Luke xx.
iraiS} 7rat5ds, 6, 17, (i) a child, a hoy or 23 I Cor. iii. 19 ; 2 Cor. iv. 2, xi. 3 ;
;
irdvTO0€v, adv., from every place, Mark iropa-Y^voitai, to come beside, come near,
i. 45 ("NV. H. ) ; Luke xix. 43 Heb. ix. ; co7)ie, come against [eiri, trpos], Luke
4.* xii.51, xxii. 52 ; John iii. 23 ; Heb.
iravTO-KpaTwp, opos, 6, the Almighty. ix. II.
iravTOTC, adv., always, at all times, ever, irap-dYcj, to pass by, Matt. xx. 30 ; to
Matt. xxvi. II. depart. Matt. ix. 27 to pass aivay, ;
irdvTws, adv., wholly, entirely, i Cor. v. act. I Cor. vii. 31 ; mid., only i John
10 ; in every way, by all means, Rom. ii. 8, 17.
iii. 9 ; assuredly, certainly. Acts xviii. irapa-SciYiiaT^^w, to make a public ex-
21. amptle of, to expose to ignominy, Alatt.
irapd, prep., gov. the gen., the dat., i. 19 (AV. H., 5ei7/iaTtfw) Heb. vi. 6.* ;
in comparisons, beyond. For details see 4 (W. H.), xvi. 21, xxii. 18; i Tim.
§ 306. In composition, irapd retains V. 19 ; Heb. xii. 6.*
its general meaning, besides, sometimes iropa-Sta-TpipTJ, -^s, r/, useless occupation,
denoting nearness, sometimes motion or agitation about trifles, i Tim. vi. 5
by or past, so as to miss or fail occa- ; (W. H., bLairaparpL^n).*
sionally also stealthiness {by tJie way), irapa-8(8a))jLi, ace. and dat., {i) to deliver
as in Trapeiadyu. over, as to prison, judgment, or punish-
trapa-^aivoi, 2nd aor. irapi^T}v, to go ment, Matt. iv. 12 ; to betray, spec, of
aside from, to desert. Acts i. 25 to ; the betrayal by Judas (2) to surrender, ;
{2) to betake oneself any whither, arrive, xiv. 26 (5) to give or prescribe, as
;
Acts XX. 15.* laws, etc.. Acts vi. 14; (6) prob. to
irapd- Pao-iSi €u}s,i), a transgression, Rom. permit, in Mark iv. 29, ichen the fruit
ii. 23. Syn. 39. jyermits or allows.
Trapa-jSdrqSjOi', 6, a transgressor, Rom. ii. •irapd-8o|os, ov, strange, wonderful, Luke
25, 27 ; Gal. ii. 18 ; James ii. 9, V. 26 ; "paradox."*
II.* irapd-Soorts, ews, r/, an instruction, or
irapa-Pid)^op.ai, to constj'ain by persua- tradition, Matt. xv. 2 ; i Cor. xi. 2 ;
sion, Luke xxiv. 29 ; Acts xvi. 15.* 2 Thess. ii. 15, iii. 6. Syn. 49.
irapa-PoX£iio|iak, to expose oneself to peril, irapa-^TiXou), a), to excite to emulation,
to be regardless of life, Phil. ii. 30 Rom. xi. II, 14 ;jealousy,
to Rom. x.
(W.H.).* 19 io anger, i
; Cor. x. 22.*
irapa-PoX-q, t)^, ij, "a. placing side by irapa-9aXd(ro-ioS) ta, i.ov, by the seaside.
side," (i)a comparison, Heb. ix. 9; (2) Matt. iv. 13.*
a parable, often of those uttered by our irapa-dcupcb), Q, to overlook, neglect. Acts
Lord ; (3) a proverb, an adage, Luke vi. I.*
iv. 23 ; (4) possibly in Heb. xi. 19 a ; Trapa-9T|KT],77s, t). a deposit, anything
crisisof danger (see Trapa^oXevofxai). committed to one's charge, i Tim. vi. 20
Syn. 46. (AV. H.) 2 Tim. i. 12, 14 (W. H.).*
;
summons to one's side." Hence, (i) irapa-iivOda, as, rj, encouragement, comfort^
exhortation, Heb. xii. 5 ; (2) entreaty, I Cor. xiv. 3.*
2 Cor. viii. 4 ; (3) encouragemeiit, Phil, irapa- [JLvGiov, tou, to, comfort, Phil. ii. I.*
ii. I ; (4) consolation, Rom. xv. 4 irapa-voixeo), w, abs., to act contrainj to
met., of the Consoler, Luke ii. 25 ; late. Acts xxiii. 3.*
(5) generally, of the powor of impart- irapa-voixCa, as, 77, violation of laiv, trans-
ing all these. Acts iv, 36. grcssio7i, 2 Pet. ii. 16.*
irapd-KXTjTOs, ov, 6, (i) an advocate, in- irapa-TTiKpaCvo), avQ, 1st aor. Tapeirt-
tercessor, I John ii. I ; (2) « consoler, Kpdva, to provoke {God) to anger ; so,
comforter, helper, John xiv. 16, 26, to rebel, Heb. iii. 16.*
XV. 26, xvi. 7; "paraclete."* Trapa-TTixpaa-pids, ov, 6, pt'^'ovocation (of
irap-aKOTi, t^j, y\, disobedience, Rom. v. God) ; so, rebellion, Heb. iii. 8, 15.*
19 2 Cor. X. 6 ; Heb. li. 2.*
; 2nd aor.
irapa-TriTrTw, irap^irecrov, to fall
7rap-aKoXov6^(i>, cD, ri(TO), to follow closely, away, Heb. vi. 6.*
to accompany (dat.), Mark xvi. 17 (not irapa-irXea), Q {f), eiffofiai, to sail ^xist,
W. H. see marg. )
; to follow so as to ; ace, Acts XX. 16.*
trace out, to examine, Luke i. 3 ; to irapairXTio-iov, adv. near , to (gen. ), Phil.
follow teaching, i Tim. iv. 6 ; 2 Tim. ii. 27.*
to assume, obtain ; (2) to take upon (R.Y.), to lose, Heb. ii. i.*
oneself, to engage in; fig., to receive '7rapd-<rr]p.os, ov, marked on the side
intellectually, to learn, Mark vii. 4 ;
{u-ith, dat.), Acts xxviii. Ii.*
to assent to, to acknowledge, to seize, to irapa-o-Kcvdtw, au, perf., mid., irape-
take, to carry captive. aKcvaafiai, to prepare, to make ready,
Trapa-Xc'Yft), N.T., in mid., to lay one's Acts X. 10; mid,, to prepare oneself,
course near, in sailing, to coast along. I Cor. xiv. 8 ; to be in readiness, 2 Cor.
Acts xxvii. 8, 13.* ix. 2, 3.*
^
Trap-dXios, ov, adjacent to the sea, on the irapa-iTKcvTi, a preparation, i.e.,
^s, -f],
XV. 42 ; Luke xxiii. 54 ; John xix. 14, irap-eior-(|>€pa), to bring in besides, add,
31, 42.* 2 Pet. i. 5.*
irapa-Tiivutf to extenci' to prolong ^ Acts irap-cKTos, adv., on the outside, besides
XX. 7.* TO. irapeKTos,things in addition, the
irapa-nipcco, tD, 770-0?, {i) to observe nar- things that are without, 2 Cor. xi. 28
roivly, ivatch, ^laxkiii. 2; (2) to observe (see R.Y. marg.). AVith a gen. fol-
scrupulously, Gal. iv. 10. lowing, except, JNIatt. v. 32 Acts xxvi. ;
•n"apa-TT]pT]<ris, ewj, 77, a close watching, 29 see also Matt. xix. 9, W. H. marg.*
;
(2) to set or lay before, as instruction, ments of Israel in the wilderness, Heb.
spec, to propound, to deliver, as a xiii. II; (4) an army in array, Heb.
parable, ^latt. xiii. 24 ; mid., to give xi. 34.
in charge to, to entrust, Luke xii. 48 ;
irap-cv-oxX-e'w, w, to cause disturbance to,
to commend, to recommend (ace, and to disquiet (dat.). Acts xv. 19.*
dat. , or Acts xiv. 23.
et's). Trap-eiri-S-qiios, ov,residing in a strange
irapa-T\ryxdv«, to fall in with, chance to country; as subst., a stranger, fo-
meet. Acts xvii. 17.* reigner, Heb. xi. 13 ; i Pet. i. i,
irap-avrCKa, adv. , instantly, imvicdiatcly; ii. II.*
TO TrapavTiKa iXacppbv rrjs ^Xti^ews, the irap-cpxo[iat (see § 103, 2), (i) to 2')ass by,
momentary lightness of our ajflict ion, 2 Avith ace. of pers. or place (2) to i)ass, ;
sj^eiuling the icinter, Acts xxvii. 12.* -irap-Ti-yopta, as, 77, solace. Col. iv. ii.*
irapa-xpf]|jLa, adv. (lit., in the very thing), irapOevia, as, i], virginity, Luke ii. 36.*
instantly, immediately. irapOe'vos, ov, 17, a virgin, a maid ; hence
irdpSaXis, cws, 77, a leopard, a 2mnt]ier, one who is chaste. Rev. xiv. 4, applied
Rev. xiii. 2.* to the male sex.
irap-c8p€V(D, to wait upon (dat. ), i Cor. ix. IldpGos, ov, 6,a Parthian, Acts ii. 9.*
13 (W. H.).* irap-iT]ji,i, pass by or over, to relax
to
irdp-ckfik ("VOj near, to be present
io be j)ass., perf., part., irapeifiipos, weary,
part., present; to irap'jv, tJtc
irapdip, Heb. xii. 12.*
present time ; to. iraowTa. possrs.sian.s. Trap-£crT7]|j.tor irap-iaTdvu} (Rom. vi. 13,
7rap-ci(r-d7ci), ^w, to introduce, to bring in 16 ; see § 107), (i) trans, in act., pres.,
clandestinely, 2 Pet. ii. i.* imp., fut., and 1st aor., to place near
7rap-€Co--aKTos, ov, brought in clandes- or at hand, to have in readiness, pro-
tinely, surreptitious. Gal. ii. 4.* vide, Acts xxiii. 24 ; to 2^^(^cM, to
irap-cior-Svo), or -vvw, vcw, to conie in by offer, Rom. 13, 16; specially, to
vi.
stealth, to enter secretly, Jude 4.* dedicate, consecrate, devote, Lukeii. 22;
irap-6i(r-epxo)iai (see § 103, 2), (i) to enter to cause to ajypear, to devionstrate^
clandestinely, Gal. ii. 4 ; (2) to come Acts xxiv. 13 ; (2) intrans., perf.,
in addition^ to be superadded, Rom. plup., 2nd aor., and mid., to stand by,
V. 20.* Mark xiv. 47, 69, 70 Luke xix. 24
;
486 VOCABULARY. [Ilapficvas — ifaTpo-irapd-SordS
irap-oiK^a, as, ?), a sojourning, a tern- enjoy good, Gal. iii. 4 more commonly, ;
jyorai-y dicelling, Acts xiii. 1 7 ; i Pet. to endure suffering, Matt. xvii. 1$ to ',
ble, a comparative discourse, John x. gi-apes, Rev. xiv. 20, xix. 15 fig., to ;
irdp-oivos, ov, given to ivin^, intemperate, iraTirjp, rpds, 6 (see § 30, ii.), a father;
1 Tim. iii. 3 Tit. i. 7.*
; often of God as the Father of men.
irap-oCxop-ai, to pass aivay, of time, Acts Matt. V. 16, 45 as the Father of the ;
'T7ap-o[Loia.X,<»,to resemble, Matt, xxiii. 27.* the First Person in the Trinity, ]\Iatt.
Trap -6|Jioios, ov, similar, Mark vii. 8 xxviii. 19 as the Source of mani-
;
Acts xvii. 16 ; I Cor. xiii. 5.* tlie founder of a race, an ancestor ; (2)
Trap-o|v(rp.os, ov, 6, (i) incitement, Heb. a senior, a father in age, i John ii. 13,
X. 24 ; (2) sharp contention. Acts xv. 14 (3) the author, or cause, or source
;
*
39, "paroxysm." of anything, John viii. 44 Heb, xii. ;
asperate, Rom. x. 19 Eph. \\. 4.* ; converting any one to Christ, i Cor.
'Trap-op"yicr|x<Js, ov, 0, eo:asp)eration, wrath, iv. 15 ; (5) one to whom resemblance is
Eph. iv. 26. Syn. 32.* borne, John viii. 38, 41, 44.
Trap-OTpvvci), to stir 2(p, to instigate. Acts ndrjios, Patmos, Rev. i. 9.*
01', T},
7rap-o\|/£s, i-^os, t], a dish for food ov sauce, (on which see § 224). Syn. 61.*
Matt, xxiii. 25, 26.* Trarpi-dpxiis, ov, 6, head or founder of
-n-ap-p-qo-Ca, as, ^, freedom, openness, a family, "patriarch," Acts ii. 29,
especially in speaking, boldness, con- vii. 8, 9 ; Heb. vii. 4.*
fidence ; Trapprjalqi, iv Trapprjffiq., or fiera TrarpiKos, i], ov, patern/il, ancestral. Gal.
ira^prjaias, boldly, openly. i. 14.*
irap-pT^o-id^ofiai, dep., mid., ist aor. iraTpCs, l^os, 7], one^s native plcvcc, father-
eTra^pTjcnaadixrjv, to speak freely, boldly, land. Matt, xiii, 54 ; Heb. xi. 14.
plainly, to be confident. Ilarp^Pas, Patrobas, Rom. xvi. 14.*
a, 6,
the whole,
ird$, Trdaa, irav (see § 37), all, TraTpo-irapd-SoTos, ov, handed down, ob-
every kiiuo (See § 224, and for
of. tained by tradition from ancestors, l
negative in phrases, § 328, iii.) Ad- Pet. i. 18.*
;; e
irarptSo^ — '"'^Pj
VOCABULARY. 48?
irarpwos, a, ov, paternal, hereditary, iTEipdco, (J, only in mid. , to attempt, essay.
Acts xxii. 3, xxiv. 14, xxviii. 17.* Acts ix. 26 (W. H., Treipd^w), xxvi.
IlavXos, ov, 6, Paul, (i) Sergius Pauliis, 21.*
Acts xiii. 7 (2) the Apostle of the ; ircia-fiovT], ijs, r/, persuasion, conviction.
Gentiles. (See§159, c.) Gal. V. 8.*
iratw, aio, to cause to cease, to restrain, ireXdYosi oPs, rd, //«<; .9ca, the deep. Matt.
I Pet. iii. 10 generally mid., to cease,
;
xviii. 6 ; Acts xxvii. 5.*
desist, refrain, Luke v, 4, viii. 24. ireXeKi^to {weXeKvs, an axe), to behead,
nd<|>os, ov, 7), Faj)hos, Acts xiii. 6, 13.* Rev. XX. 4.*
Traxvvw (iraxvs), to fatten, to make g ross TTcjiirTos, V, ov, num., ord., the fifth.
pass., fig., to become gross or stupid. irc'p.'irw, \poj, (i) to s<:nc?, of persons, to
Matt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27.* despatch a message, spoken of
on
iriSr], 7JS, 7], a shackle, a fetter for the teachers, as John Baptist, John i. 33 ;
*
feet, Mark v. 4 ; Luke viii. 29. of Jesus, John iv. 34 of the Spirit, ;
ireSivds, 77, ov, level, open, Luke vi. 17.* John xiv. 26 of apostles, John xiii. :
ir€^]5,adv., on foot, or &?/ fen^?, Matt. xiv. 2 Thess. ii. II perhaps to thrust in ;
Xafji^dpw, to make trial of, attemj^t, cost, the feast beginning the fiftieth
Heb. xi. 29, 36.* day after the second day of the Pass-
frcipdtw, trw, (i) to attempt (inf.); (2) to over, i.e., from the sixteenth day of
tempt, to make trial of, to prove, to the month Nisan, Acts ii. i, xx. 16 ;
afiiiction, as trying men, Acts xx. 19. particles for intensity of meaning, as
488 Vocabulary. [ircpav — ir6pi-TraT€ci»
eduirep, ettrep, if iTtdecd ; eTeivep, since ircpi-epxoiiai (see § 103, 2), to go about,
indeed; Kaiwep, arid really; ocrwep, Acts xix. 13 ; I Tim. v. 13 ; Heb. xi.
the very one ivho. 37 ; as a ship, Acts xxviii. 13.*
to tack,
ircpav, adv., ovc)', on the other side, be- irepi-c'xw, encompcLSS ; so, to contain,
to
yond, with article prefixed or genitive as a writing, Acts xxiii. 25 (W. H.,
following. exw) ; intrans., to be contained, I Pet.
ircpas, aros, to, a limit, tJie extremity, ii. 6 ; to seize, as astonishment, Luke
gcnnt/m, Rev. i. 11, ii. 12.* part., girt, Luke xii. 35.
rEtpYT], 77s, 7), a prop, name, Perga, Acts irepi-Geo-is, ew?, 17, a putting around, i.e.,
xiii. 13. ornaments, I Pet.3.* iii.
TTtpi, a prep., governing the gen. and irepi-to-niiJLi (see §107), in intrans. tenses
accus. With
gen., about, i.e., con- of act. to stand around, John xi. 42
,
cerning or respecting a thing ; with Acts xxv. 7 mid. to stand aloof from ; ,
accus., about, around, in reference to (ace), 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9,*
(see § 302). In composition, irepi de- ircpi-KaOapp.a, aros, to, refuse, oj'scouritig,
notes round about, on account of, I Cor. iv. 13.*
iig., pass., to he distracted in mind, Ilfpo-is, iSos, i], Persis, Rom. xvi. 12.*
Luke X. 40.* iT-fipvo-i,adv., during the year just passed
Trepto-o-cia, aj, 17, abundance, sujicrfluity, dirb vepvai, a year ago, 2 Cor. viii. 10,
Rom. V. 17 ; 2 Cor. viii. 2 James i. ; ix. 2.*
21 ei's irepiaadav, as adv., abundantly,
; 'n"£Tdo(Jtai, CjjxaL, or Trero/xaL (W. H.), to
ircpio-croTcpus, adv. (compar. of TreptcccDs), TTTiYavov, ov, t6, rue, Luke xi. 42.*
more abundantly, more earnestly, more "TTY^} ^s, T), a fountain, source, well
vehemently. fig.of "the water of life"; a flow of
ircpwTTcpd, as, a dove, a pigeon.
ij, blood, Mark v. 29.
'n'€pi-T€'|ivw, tocut around, to circumcise ; TTTJ'yvvp.i, tttJIw, to fix, as a tent, Heb.
mid., to undergo circumcision, to cause viii. 2.*
oneself to he circumcised. miSdXiov, lov, TO, the rudder of a ship,
ir6pi-T£6T]|ii, to place, or put about or Acts xxvii, 40 James iii, 4.* ;
around (dat. and ace.) ; fig., to bestow, TrriX^KOs, 17, OV, how great, Heb. vii. 4 ;
irfixvs, ews, 6, cubit, the length from ti, credit to, dat. ; to have confidence in, to
the elbow to the tip of tlie middle trust, believe, dat., et's, cv, iiri (dat.) or
finger, Matt. vi. 27 Luke xii. 25 ; ;
iwi (ace), often of Christian faith, in
John xxi. 8 Rev. xxi. 17.* ; God, in Christ to entrust something ;
iridtw, ffw, to lay hold of. Acts iii. 7 ; to (ace.) to any one (dat.); pass., to be
take, as in fishing or in hunting ; to entrusted with (ace).
arrest, Jolin vii. 30. iricTTiKos,77, bv, genuine, piuve, of oint'
TTit^ft), press down, as in a measure,
to ment, Mark xiv. 3 John xii. 3.* ;
ible speech. Col. ii. 4.* of the faith is expressed by obj. gen.,
TTiKpaCvcD, avC}, to render hitter, lit.. Rev. or by et's, iv, irpos (ace); (2) fidelity,
viii. II, X. 9, 10 ; to embitter, fig.. Col. good faith, Rom. iii. 3 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; ;
fig., to receive into the soul, to partake Matt, xxvii. 63 2 Cor. vi. 8 2 John: ; ;
of.
irwJTTis, TTjTos, Tj, fotiicss, richiiess, as of xXd|, a/c6s, y], a tablet to icritc on, 2 Cor.
the olive, Rom. xi. 17.* iii. 3 ; Heb. ix. 4.*
imrpdcrKW (Trpa-), perf., TreirpaKa ; 1st aor, irXdo-p-a, a thing formed or
aros, t6,
pass., eTrpddrjv ;
perf. pass., Treirpa/xaL, fashioned, Rom. ix. 20.*
to seir. Matt. xiii. 46 ;
pass., with vwo, TrXd(r<rw, dew, to form, fashion, mould,
to be sold under, to be a slave to. as a potter his clay, Rom. ix. 20
miTTW (Trer-, see § 94, i. 8, d), (i) to fall I Tim. ii. 13.*
(whence, by diro or €k whither, by ; TrXa<rTOs, 77, bv, formed, moulded ; fig.,
tiri or et's, ace); hence, (2) to fall deceitful, 2 Pet. 3.* ii.
anything inter-
irXcYfxa, aros, to (ttX^xw), TrXTJKTTis, OV, 6, a striker, a contentious
woven, braided hair, i Tim. ii. 9.* 2)crson, I Tim. iii. 3 Tit. i. 7.* ;
tXciotos, rj) oj', superl. of TroXi^s, the 7rXT]p.|j.vpa, as (W. H., -7;s), t]^ a flood, an
greatest, the most, very great; to inundation, Luke vi. 48.*
TrXeitxTov, adv., mostly, at most, I Cor. irXi^v, adv. (akin to irXeov, hence it adds
xiv. 27. a thought, generally adversative, some-
irXcCwv, dov (for declension see § 44), times partly confirmatory), besides, buty
com par. of ttoXi's-, more, greater, in nevertheless, howbcit, of a truth. Matt,
number — magnitude — comparison ; ol xi. 22, xviii. 7, xxvi. 39, 64 ; irXrqv 6ti,
irXeioves, oi wXeiovs, tlic more, tJie 'most, except tluit, Acts xx. 23 ; as prep, with
the many, majority, 2 Cor. ii. 6; irXehv gen., besides, cxcejJting, Mark xii. 32 ;
1 5 ; fTTt irXuov, further, longer, Acts irX-ppT]?, es, ( I ) full, abs. , Mark iv. 28 ;
2 Cor. vii. 2, xii. 17, 18; i Thess. iv. 2; I Thess. i. 5; Heb. vi. 11, x.
6 ;
pass., to he taken advantage of, 22.*
2 Cor. ii. II.* irX-qpdw, cD, wo-w, to fill with (gen.), to fill
irX€ov-€KTT]s, ov, 6, a covetous or avaricious up, to pervade, to complete, either time or
jjcrson, I Cor. v. lo, ii, vi. lo ; Eph. number to bestoio abundantly, to fur-
;
TrXt]Yrj, rjs, i] (ttXtjcto-w), a stroke, a stripe, completion, i.e., that which makes full,
a wound, Acts xvi. 33 Rev. xiii. 14 ; the fulfilment, Matt. ix. 16 ; Rom, xiii.
an aJjUiction, Rev. ix. 20. 10 ; the fulness of time. Gal. iv. 4, is
irX-qOos, oi's, TO, a multitude, croivd, the completion of an era the fulness ;
throng ; with art., the multitude, the of Christ, Eph. i. 23, that which is
whole number, population. Acts xiv. 4 ;
filled by Christ, i.e., the Church the ;
•xrXoidpiov, iov, to (dim. of irXoTov), a subst. (sc. X'''"'^'')* ^ ^(y^9 robe. Rev. i.
irXdos, ous, gen. ov or o6s, sailing, voyage. miration, as Luke i. 43 ; also of strong
Acts xxi. 7, xxvii. 9, 10.* negation, Mark xii. 37.
irXovo-tos, t'a, lov, rich, ahcunding in (ev) iroCa, as, r/, grass, herbage, according
adv., -ws, richly, abundantly, Col. iii. to some, in James iv. 14 but more ;
Luke ix. 55 ; Rom. viii. 15 ; (4) any •iroiT](ris, a doing, James i. 25.*
ews, t/,
bod}^ the undying soul; {b) angels, (2) a poet, Acts xvii. 28.*
good and bad (c) God, the immaterial;
ttoikCXos, Vf ov, various, of different
One, John iv. 24 {d) the Holy ;
colours, diverse.
Spirit (see § 217, /). Used of the in- TTOijJLaivw,avQ, {i) to feed a flock, Luke
fluence of which the Holy Spirit is the xvii. 7; hence, fig., (2) to be shepherd of,
author, in respect of Jesus, Luke iv. i ;
to teiul, to feed, cherish. Matt. ii. 6 ;
Acts X, 38, in respect of prophets and John xxi. 1-6 ; Acts xx. 28 ; i Cor. ix.
irviKTos, strangled.
77, ov, iroios, TToia, ttoTov, an interrog. pron. cor-
irvoi], ris, T], (i) breath, Acts xvii. 25 ; responding with otos and Toioi, of trhat
(2) a breeze or blast. Acts ii. 2.* kind, sort, species I what f wJmt one ?
iro\i\U<a, Co, rjffu), to make war, to contend irdjia, aros, t6, drink, I Cor. x. 4 ; Heb.
with {h-^tol, gen.). ix. 10.*
iroXcp-os, ov, 6, (i) war, a war ; (2) a irovTipia, as, i], evil dAgjMsition, vnckcd-
battle ; (3) strife. ncss, Matt. xxii. 18; Luke xi. 39; Rom.
iroXis, ews, 7}, a city, a walled town i. 29; I Cor. V. 8; Eph. vi. 12 plur., ;
iroXiniSj 01', 6, a citizen, Luke xv. 15, IloirXtos, ov, 6, Publius, Acts xxviii. 7, 8. *
Acts xxi. 39 ; \dt\\ gen., avrov, a TTopcia, as, 17, ivay, a journey, Luke
a
fclloic-citizcn, Luke xix. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 22 ; \cay or course of life, James
viii. II OV. H.).* i. II.*
iroXXoLKis, adv., many times, often. iropevop.ai, ao/jLai, dep., with pass. aor.
iroXXa-irXao-(wv, ov, gen. 01*0?, mani- eiropevd-nv, to go, to go away, to deptart,
fold, many times more, Matt. xix. 29 io journey, to travel, often (as Heb.) to
(W. H.); Lukexviii. 30.* take a
course in life.
iroXv-Xo-yia, as, i], much speaking, loqua- lay 2vaste, ha'cass, persecute
iropOc'o), Tjcrw, to
city, Matt. vi. 7.* Acts ix. 21 Gal. i. 13, 23.*
;
7roXv-(j.£pws, adv., in many parts, by iropio-fios, ov, 6, gain, i Tim. vi. 5, 6.*
divers 2)0 rtions (R.\.), Heb. i. i.* IXopKios, ov, 6, Porciu», the praenomen
ttoXv-ttoCkiXos, ov, very varied, Tnanifold, oi Festus, Acts xxiv. 27.*
Eph. iii. 10.* xopvcia, as, i], formication, lewdness ; fig.
iroXvs, iroWrj, iroXv (see § 39, 2), many, in Rev., iclolatnj.
numerous; iroXv, much, greatly, as •iropv€v«, (xoj, to commit fornication ; fig.
adv. ; TToWoi, many, often with par- in Rev., to icorship idols.
titive genitive, or e/c ol ttoXXoi, the ; TTopvT), ^s, 7}, a harlot, a prostitute; fig.
many (see § 227) woWd, in like; in Rev. , a7i idolatrous community.
manner, much, very much, often, TTopvos, ov, 6, one who prosUtutes himself,
many iroWQ, by 7;i«cA, joined
tivfies ; a fornicator.
with comparatives ctti irokv, for a ; TToppb), adv., far, far off. Matt. xv. 8;
great while, Acts xxviii. 6 iv ttoXX^J, ; Mark vii. 6 ; Luke xiv. 32 ; comp.,
altogether. Acts xxvi. 29. iroppuiT^po} (or -Tepov, W. H.), Luke
iroXv-oTrXa'YXvos, ov, very comjoassionate, xxiv. 28.*
of great mercy, James v. 11.* TToppwOev, adv., further, from afar, far
TToXv-TcX'^^s, ^$, very costly, very pi-ecious, off, Luke xvii. 12 ; Heb. xi. 13.*
Mark xiv. 3 i Tim. ii. 9 ; i Pet. iii.
; 7rop4>vpa, as, tj, a jmrple or crimson gar-
4.* ment, indicating wealth or rank, ^lurk
iroXv-Tijios, ov, 6, T], of great value, very XV. 17, 20 Luke xvi. 19 Rev. xvii.
; ;
costly, Matt. xiii. 46 John xii. 3 ; ; 4 (AV. H. read following), xviii. 12.*
compar., i Pet. i. 7 (W. H.).* <rrop<|>vp€os, ovs, a, ovv, pnirple or crimson,
iroXv-Tp6ir«s, adv., iii various ways, Heb. John xix. 2, 5 Rev. xvii. 4 (W. H.),
;
iroo-aKis, adv., interrog. hcnv , many quarters of the ptrmtorian army in Rome,
times? how often? Matt, xviii. 21, Phil. i. 13.*
xxiii. 37 Luke xiii. 34. *
; irpdKTwp, opos, 6, an officer employed to
iroo-is, eojs, r/, drink', John vi. 55 ; Rom. execute judicial senUnces, Luke xii.
xiv. 17 ; Col. ii. 16.*
TTocros, 7], ov, pron., interrog., how much ? irpd^is, f ws, T), (
I ) « doing, action, mode
hoiv great ? plur., hoio many? irdau), as of act i 071, ^latt. xvi. 27 ; Luke xxiii.
adv. with comparatives, by how much ? 51 ;
Acts xix. 18 ;
plur., deeds, acts,
iroraixos, ov, 6, a river, torrent, flood. Rom. 13; Col. iii. 9; and in
viii.
iroTajio.ijxjpTiTos, ov, carried away by a inscription to the Acts of the Apostles
flood. Rev. xii. 15.* {2) function, office, Rom. xii. 4.*
iroTairos, rj, ov, adj., interrog., of what irpdos, a, ov, rec. in Matt. xi. 29 for
kind of what manner ? how great ?
] 7^pal''s(W. H.).*
iroTC, adv. , interrog. ichen ? at lohat , irpadnis, rec. for irpavT-rjs (W. H. ) in I
time ? till when ? hoio long ? ttot^, Cor. iv. 21 ; 2 Cor. x. i ; Gal. v. 23,
enclitic, at some time, at 07ie time or vi. I Eph. iv. 2 Col. iii. 12; i Tim.
; ;
iroTitw, (TO), to cause to drink (two aces.) in any condition, i.e., to fare, Acts xv.
to give drink to (ace. ) ; fig. , to minister 29; Eph. vi. 21 (3) to exact, to require. ;
to, generally, i Cor. iii. 2 to water ; irpav-ira6cia (or la), as, rj (W. H.), meek-
or irrigate, as plants, i Cor. iii. 6-8. ness, I Tim. vi. II.*
IIoTioXoi, (j}v, oi, Futeoli, Acts xxviii. irpaus, gen. -eos or -ews (W. H.), pi. -e?s,
meek, gentle, Matt. v. 5, xi. 29 (see
iroTos, ov, 6 (see ttLvw), a drinking bout, Trpgx)s), xxi. 5 ; I Pet. iii. 4. The form
drunkenness, i Pet. iv. 3.* wpavs (with iota subscript) has little
irov, adv. , interrog. , where ? ivhither ? or no authority.*
Matt. ii. 4 ; John vii. 35. irpavTT]s, TTjTos, T], meekness, gentleness,
TTov, enclitic, an indef. particle of place James i. 21, iii. 13 i Pet. iii. 15 and ; ;
Tovs irodas, under the feet, i.e., entirely irpcorpcia, as, 17, an embassy, ambassadors,
subdued, as Rom. xvi. 20. Luke xiv. 32, xix. 14.*
irpd'YiJLa, aros, to,a thing done, a fact, a Trpio-^ivo), CO} (lit., to be aged, elder men
thing, a business, a suit, as at law. being chosen for the office), to a£t as
irpay\i.aril<x (W. H., -Wa), as, 17, a busi- ambassador, 2 Cor. v. 20; Eph. vi. 20.*
ness, an affair, 2 Tim. ii. 4.* Trpeo-pvTc'ptov, iov, t6, an assembly of
•7rpa7|iaT€vo|iai, cofiai, dep., to transact elders, tlie Sanhedrin, Luke xxii. 66
husiiicss, to trade, Luke xix. 13.* Acts xxii. 5 officers of the church ;
irpaiTwpiov, Iov, t6 (from Lat., praetor), assembled, jn-rsbytcry, i Tim. iv. 14.*
the nalace at Jerusalem occupied by irp£<rpuT€pos» Tepa., repov (compar. of
the Roman governor, Matt, xxvii. 27 ; irp^a^vs, old), generally used as subst,.
'irp€o-pvrr)S — iTp{J-0€<rts] VOCABULARY. 495
elde^', (i)in age, Acts ii. 17 ; i Tim. irp(jpaTOV, ov, rb (Tpo^aivw), a sheep ; fig.,
-ws, readily, with alacrity, i Pet. care for {gQw.), Rom. xiii. 14.*
V. 2.* Ti-po-opdb), cD, 2nd aor. irpoei^ov, to see
irpoi|JLOS (W. H. for Trpm'fxos). , beforehand, Acts ii. 31, xxi. 29 Gal. ;
irpo-to-TTiiii, N.T. only in trans., act., iii. 8 ; mid., to Imve before ones eyes,
Alark xiv. 8 ("she hath anticipated 35 (not W. H.); John ix. 8.*
the anointing," i.e., hath anointed irpo(r-a{'rr]s, 01;, 6, a bcqgar, Mark x. 46
beforehand); i Cor. xi. 21 pass., to ;
(\\. H.); Johnix. 8 0V. H.).*
* irpocr-ava-PaCvo), to go up to (a more
be overtaken or caught, Gal. vi. i .
rally, to come or
go to, abs. or dat. to , 8 ; with Xt^os, a stone of sturnbling
of place or person, to visit, to Jucve (R.Y.), Rom. ix. 32, 33.*
intercourse icith ; (2) specially, to Trpo(r-KOTrT|, 77s, 7/, offence, an occasion of
approach, to draw near to, God or offence or stumbling, 2 Cor. vi. 3.*
Christ, Heb. vii. 25 ; (3) to assent to, '7rpoo--KdTrT«, to strike the foot against,
concur in, i Tim. vi. 3. Matt. iv. 6 ; so, to stumble, to take
Trpoo--€vxTi, 7)^, (i) prayer to God
-17, (2) ; offence, I Pet, ii. 8.
a place where prayer is offered, an irpoo--KvXift), to roll to, or (eTrt, ace), iqwn
oratory, only Acts xvi. 13, 16 (see ^latt. xxvii. 60 xv. 46.*
; Mark
§ 268, note). Syn. 38. irpoo--Kvv€w, to boio doivn, to prostrate
Trpo(r-6tixo|Jiai, dep. mic}., to pray to God oneself to, to ivorship, God or inferior
(dat. ), to offer prayer, to pray for (ace. beings, to adore (dat. or ace). Syja.
of thing, virep or irepi, of person, iVa 36.
or oTrojs, of object, occasionally inf). 'irpo<r-Kvvii'H]s, ov, 6, a worshipper, John
Syn. 38. iv. 23.*
irpoo--ex,w, to apply, with vovv expressed Trpo(r-XaX€a), Q, to S23eak to, to converse
or understood, to apply the mind, to with (dat.),Acts xiii. 43, xxviii. 20.*
attend to, dat. with aird, to beware of;
; Trpoo'-Xap-Pdvo), N.T., mid., to take to one-
also, to give heed to, inf. with fi-q. self, i.e., food, companions, to receive
•irpoo--T]\<5w, a, to affix with nails, nail to felloioship, Rom. xiv. i.
to. Col. ii. 14.* irpdcr-XTnl/ts (W. H., -X-qfi^f/Ls), eojs, 17, a
KK
498 VOCABULARTT. [irpoT-opfxi^cD — irpo-4)'»]T6vw
to Christ's being fastened to the cross, respect of persons, partiality, Rom. ii.
irpoor-iroieo), cD, in mid., to fashion one- mere ajjpearance ; (2) tlie surface, as of
self to ; hence, to pretend (inf.), Luke the earth, Luke xxi. 35; of the heaven.
xxiv. 28 John viii.
; in 6, perhaps, to Matt. xvi. 3.
regard (W. H. omit).* Trpo-Td<r<ra), ^w, to app)oint before. Acts
irpoa-TTOpevofiai, to come to, ajyproach xvii. 26 (W. H., irpodTaactj}).*
(dat.), Mark x. 35.* Trpo-T£ivw, to stretch out, to tie up for
irpo(r-pT|YVV(xi, to dash against, as waves, scourging, Acts xxii. 25.*
Luke vi. 48, 49.* irpdrepos, ^pa, epov (comparative of irpo),
<irpoo--Tdo-(ra), ^w, abs. or ace, and inf., former, Eph. iv. 22 Trporepov or to ;
present, as money, Acts18 ; spe- viii. irpo-<j)7|T€Ca, as, v,{i) the gift of prophecy;
cially, to offer sacrifice ; mid., to bear (2) the exercise of the gift ; plur,, ;?ro-
oneself towards, to deal vnth, Heb. 2)hecies.
xii. 7. irpo-<j)T]T€tia), (TOJ, to be a prophet, to pro
Trpo<r-<J)iXTJs, es, ^?^crt5Migr, loveable, Phil, phes]!, to forth-tell, or s])cak of Di-
iv. 8* vine things ; (the meaning foretell is
jrpoo--<f>opd, as, t}, an offering, a sacri- secondary and accidental) of false ;
trpo-^-firri^
— ttvXt]
J
VOCABULARY. 499
used ill mockery, Matt. xxvi. 68. th£ first-born, Heb. xii. 23, of saints
Syn. 15. who died before Christ's coming.
7rpo-<|>"i]TT]s, ou, 6, (i) a projihet, i.e., one •jTraici), acj, intrans., to stumble, to fall,
who has insight into Divine things to err, Rom. xi. 11 ; 2 Pet. i. 10;
and speaks them forth to others James ii. 10, iii. 2.*
plur., tlie pro2j1tetic books of the 0.2\; irrepva, as, rj, the heel, John xiii. 18.*
(2) a poet, a 7ninstrel, Tit. i. 12. Syn. iTTepvrytov, ov, t6 (dim. irr^pv^), the ex-
15. tremity, as a battlement or parapet,
irpo-<|)f)TLK6s, 77, tv, prophetic, uttered by Matt. iv. 5 ; Luke iv. 9.*
irrophds, Rom. xvi. 26 ; 2 Pet. i. 19.* TTTepv^, iryos, i], a wing, a jjinion.
'n-po-<^f]Tts, t5os, T], a prophetess. Luke ii. irn^vos, 71, ov (Trero/ioi), winged, to.
*
36 ; Rev. ii. 20. TTTTjvd, birds, Cor. xv. 39.*
fowls, i
irpvjiva, as, rj, the hinduiost part of a TTT-upo), to terrify, Phil. i. 28.*
ship, the stern, Mark iv. 2>^ ; Acts irTv<r(xa, aros, to, spittle, saliva, John
xxvii. 29, 41.* ix. 6.*
irpcot, adv., early in the rtioming, at TTTvo-crco, ^oj, to fold, to roll up, as a scroll,
daicn; with advs. ajxa irpojt, \iau irput, , Luke iv. 20.*
venj early in the moriiing. TTTtJa). (Tw, to spit, Mark vii. 33, viii. 23 ;
Trp&)t|xos, 77, ov, early, of the early rain, John ix. 6.*
James v. 7 (W. H., irpjCfioi,.* TTTwiJia, aros, to {titttcj), a body fallen in
irpttjivos, adj., belonging to the morning, death, a carcase, ]\Iatt. xxiv. 28.
of the morning star, Rev. ii. 28, xxii. TTTcoo-is, ecos, lit. or fig., Matt.
7], tt fall,
16.* vii. 27 34.*
; Luke ii.
•n-pwtos, ta, ov, of the morning ; fem. (sc. tn(a)(iia, as, i], poverty, leant, 2 Cor. viii.
wpa), morning, Matt, xxvii. i, xxi. 18 2, 9 Rev. ii. 9.*
;
(W. H., Trpwt); John xviii. 28 (W. H., TrT&)X€vw, (jw, to be in poverty, 2 Cor.
* *
Trpwi), xxi. 4. viii. 9.
irpcopa, as, ri, forward part of a ship,
the TTToxos, reduced to beggary, poor,
7], ov,
the proi/j, Acts xxvii. 30, 41.* destitute, sp)irituaUy poor, in a good
Trpwrevft), to have pre-eminence, to be sense. Matt. v. 3 ; in a bad sense,
chief, Col. i. 18.* Rev. iii. 17. Syn. 30.
irp&)T0-Ka9-€8p£a, as, r/, a chief or upper- '"^K^'H, ^s» 7/ (ti/^), ^/^^ fist, Mark vii. 3
most scat. (see R.V. and niarg.).*
irp&)TO-KXi<ria, as, 17, the chief place at a IIvOwv (W. H., TTvdojv), covos, 6, Python,
banquet. a divining demon ; called after a name
irpcoTOs, r), ov (superlative of irpo), first, of the heathen deity Apollo, Acts xvi
m place, time, or order like irporepos ; i6jseeR.V.).*
with folloAnng gen., before, only John i. iruKvos, n, ov, frequent, i Tim. v. 23 ;
ning, Luke ix. 54 God is so called, ; P, pw, rho, r, and as an initial always,
p,
Heb. xii. 29 ; fig. for strife, Luke xii. p, the seventeenth letter. As a
rh,
49 ; trials, i Cor. iii. 13 ; of the numeral, p' = 100 ; p,— 100,000.
eternal fire, or future punishment, 'Padp, or 'Paxd/3, t] (Heb.), Italiab.
Matt, xviii. 8. •PappC (W. H., 'Pa;S/3eO, (Heb.,) " Rab-
injpd, as, 7], a heap of fuel burning, a bi," my
master, a title of respect in
fire. Acts xxviii. 2, 3.* Jewish schools of learning ; often
irvp-yos, 01^, 6, a toiver, a lofty building, a applied to Christ. Syn. 59.
fortress (comp. burgh). 'PappovCor'Paj9|8owt'(W. H., 'Pa^^ovvei)
TTupeo-cru), to be sick of a fever. Matt. (Heb.,) like 'Pa/S^Si, but of higher
viii. 14 ; Mark i. 30.* honour, my great master, Mark x. 51 ;
Eph. iv. 18.* pairC^b), iao), to smite witJi the hand (as
irws, an enclitic particle, in a maimer, distinguished from pa^di^w), IVIatt.
by any means. V. 39, xxvi. 67.*
ir«s, interrog., how? in what
adv., pdiri(r(Jia, aros, t6, a blow with tJie open
manner? by what means? Also in hand, Mark xiv. 65 ; John xviii. 22,
exclamations, as Luke xii. 50 John ; xix. 3.*
xi. 36 with subj. or opt. {&.v),
;
pa(|>is, /5os, T^, a needle., Matt. xix. 24 ;
'PaxAp— 2] VOCABULARY. 501
Mark x. 25 ; Luke xviii. 25 (W. H., 30, xxvii. 5 ; Luke iv. 35, xvii. 2 ;
spokoi by (l-tto, gen.). vi. 2 Luke xiv. 21 Acts ix. ii, xii.
; ;
Eph. iii. 17 Col. ii. 7.* ; ptovw[ii, pucru), to strengthen ; only perf.,
piTTTi, 77s, T7 {piTTTU}), jcrk, rt tivinklc,
tt pass., imper., ^ppujao, ^ppwade, fareiccll.
*
as of the eye, i Cor. xv. 52. Acts XV. 29, xxiii. 30 ("SV. H. omit).*
piiritb), iau), to move, as waves by the
*
wind, James i. 6.
piiTTco), u), <o throw off or away, Acts
xxii. 23.*
pCiTTw, t/'w, 1st aor., ^ppLxpa; part., pii/^as; 2, <r, final s, alftia, sigma, s, the
to throw, throw doicn, throw' out, eighteenth letter. As
a numeral,
thro^a apart, scatter, ^latt. ix. 36, xv. </ = 200 ;
0-, — 200,000,
502 VOCABULARY. [<raPax6av£ —Hapovx
o-aPaxeavC (W. }L, -ei), iC\\ald.,)sabach- 2dp,os, 01', T), Samos, Acts xx. 15.*
tJuini, thou hast or hast thou forsaken 21ap.ov^X, 6 (Heb.), Samuel.
me ? Matt, xxvii. 46 Mark xv. 34 ; ;
Sap.\|;wv, 6 (Heb.), Samso7i, Heb. xi. 32.*
from the Clialdee rendering of Ps. o-avSdXiov, oi', rd, a sandal, Mark vi. 9 ;
SaSwK, 6 (Heb.), iSoflok, Matt. i. 13.* (rdpSivos, ov, 6 (Rcc. in Rev. iv. 3 for
craivw, to 'move, disturb, pass., i Thess. following).
ni.3-* ,
<rdp8iov,iov, TO, a sardine stone, blood or
o-aKKos, 01', 6, sackcloth, a sign of mourn- fresh coloured ; or carnelian. Rev. iv.
ing. Matt. xi. 21 Luke x. 13 ; Rev. ;
3 (W. H.), xxi. 20.*
vi. 12, xi. 3.* <rap8-ovv^, I'xos, v, a sardonyx, a pre-
2a\d, (Heb.), Sala,
6 Luke iii. 35.* cious stone, white streaked with red,
2aXa0iTiX, 6 (Heb.), Salathiel, Matt. Rev. xxi. 20.*
i. 12.* SdpcTrra, o:v, to., Sarepta, Luke iv. 26.*
2aXa[i,£s, tfo^, v, Salamis, Acts xiii. 5.* (rapKiKos, carnal, whether
77, 6v, fleshly,
SaXcifji, T], Salim, John iii. 23.* (i) belonging to human nature in its
o-aXcvd), (TO), to shake, to cause to shake, bodily manifestation, or (2) belonging
as ]\Iatt. 7 Heb. xii. 27 so, to
xi. ; ; to human nature as sinful, Rom. xv.
excite, as the populace, Acts xvii. 13 ; 27 I Cor. iii. 3, ix. 11
;
2 Cor. i. 12, ;
2aXjiw;/T], 77s, 7/, Salmonc, Acts xxvii. 7.* av6p(i)iros in i Cor. iii. 4. Syn. 55.*
o-a.\.os, 01^, 6, tlie rolling of the sea in a (rdpKivos, 77, ov, (i) feshy, constituted of
tciiipcst, Luke xxi. 25.* flesh, opp. to Xidivos, 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; (2)
ordXiri'y^, tyyos, 17, a trumpet. fleshly, carnal (W. H. in the passages
<raXir£^«, iVw (class., -t7|w), to sound a quoted under capKLKos). Syn. 55.*
trumpet. For impers. use, i Cor. o-dp|, aapKos, i], flesh, sing., Luke xxiv.
XV. 52 (see § 171). 39 ;
plur. , James v. human body,
3 ; the
craXirto-TTlsj ov, 6 (class., -LyKTTjs), a man; the human nature of man as
tridiipcter. Rev. xviii. 22.* distinguished from his divine nature
SaVtoiir], 77s, -^, Salome, Avife of Zebedee, {Kvevtxa) Jmman nature, as sinful
; ;
Mark xv. 40, xvi. i.* TrScra (xdp^, every man, all men; KUTa
2afj.dp€ia, as, 77, Samaria, either (i) <7ic adpKa, as a man ; adp^ Kat alfia, flesh
district, (2) or </ic ciY?/, afterwards and blood, i.e., man as frail and
calletl Sebastc. simple ;
^rjv, TrepnraTe'iv «:arA adpKa, to
2a|xap6tTT]s, ov, 6, a Samaritan. live, to u-alk ctftcr flesh, of a carnal,
2a|xap€iTis, tSos, 7/, a Samaritan ivoman, unspiritual life. The word also denotes
.lolin iv. 9.* kinship, Rom. xi. 14. Syn. 55.
Sa[xo-9paKT], 77J, 17, Samothracc, Acts Sapovx, 6(Heb.), (W. H.,2fpoi5x,)'S'«'/"«cA
Avi. n.* or Seruch (Serug), Luke iii. 35.*
;)
Scjict, 6 (Heb.), Shimci, Luke iii. 26.* (ri|iiKivdiov, iov, TO (Lat., semicinctium),
(Tcp-CSaXis, ews, T], flour. Rev. xviii. 13.* an apron, woi"n by artisans, Acts xix.
o^epiVds, 17, ov, (i) ve7ierable, serious, of 12.*
men, i Tim. iii. 8, 1 1 Tit. ii. 2 ; (2) ; SCfiwv, wvos, 6, Simon. Kine persons of
honourable, of acts, Phil. iv. 8.* the name appear to be mentioned ( i :
<r€[jiv6TT]s, TTjros, 7}, dignity, seriousness, the Apostle Peter ; (2) the Apostle
I Tim. ii. 2, iii. 4 ; Tit. ii. 7.* Zelotes (3) brother of Jesus, Mark vi.
;
*
Dip-yios, oi», 6, Scrgius, Acts xiii. 7. 3 ; (4) Simon of Cyrene ; (5) father of
504 VOCABULARY. [s iva- rKOTtlVOS
Judas Iscariot ; (6) a " certain Phari- o-KTivT], ^5, i], a tent, an abode or dwell-
see," Luke Simon the leper,
vii. 40 ; (7) ing, the tabernacle reared in tlie wilder-
Matt. xxvi. 6 (8) Simon Magus, Acts ; ness, an idolatrous tabernacle.
viii, 9 (9) Simon the tanner. Acts
; (TKTjvo-inTyia,, as, ry (lit., tent-fixing), the
ix. 43. Possibly (2) and (3) were iden- feast of tabernacles, John vii. 2. *
tical see also (6) and (7).
; (rKTivo-TToios, OV, 6, a tent-maker, Acts
Sivd, TO (Heb.), Sinai. xviii. 3.*
o-ivairi, ews, to, mustard, mustard-seed. (TK-qvos, 0175, t6,of the a tent; fig,,
crivSwv, oi'os, 17, linen, a linen cloth. human 4.*
body, 2 Cor. v. i,
o-tvid^w, to sift, as corn, to prove by trials o-KT|vow, tD, wcrw, to frame or spread a
and Luke xxii. 31.*
affl,ictions, tent. Rev. vii. 15 met., to dwell, ;
(riTo-|X€'Tpiov, iov, TO, a corn-ration, Luke delineation. Col. ii. 17. Syn. 56.
xii. 42.* (TKipTdo), w, -/jCb), to lea}) for joy, exult,
(TITOS, 01;, 6, wheat, corn ; to. aiTa, grain. Luke 41, 44, vi. 23.*
i.
(Tiwirdtu, Q, whether
rjau, to be silent, ful. Acts ix. 5 (W. H. omit), xxvi. 14;
voluntarily or from dumbness to be- ; Jude 1 5 stern, severe, Matt. xxv. 24
;
come still, as the sea, Mark iv. 39. John vi. 60.*
o-Kav8a\itw, iaoj, to cause to stumble, o-KXT]pdTT)s, TrjTos, 7), fig., luirdncss of
2)crvcrt, (ace); pass., to
to grieve heart, obstinacy, Rom. ii. 5.*
stumble, to be inovoked, to be indignant. <rKXT)po-Tpd\T]\os, ov, hard- or stiff-necked;
o-KavSaXov, ov, to, a snare, a stumbling- fig., perverse, Acts vii. 51.*
blocJc ; fig., a cause of offence or i^cr- (TKXiipvvctf, WW, fig., to make hard, to
vcrsion. harden, as the heart, Rom. ix. 18 ;
o-KdirTO), xj/oj, to dig, Luke vi. 48, xiii. 8, Heb. iii. 8, 15, iv. 7 mid., to harden ;
o'o4>ia, ay, i), wisdom, insight, skill, rock (R.V.), Jude 12.*
human, Luke xi. 31 ; or divine, i Cor. (rmXos, ov, a spot; fig., a blot, Eph,.
ie 21, 24. v. 27 2 Pet. ii. 13.*
;
L L
506 VOCABULARY. [ (TiriXow — (m^pC^w
enriXow, cD, to stain, to contaminate, xii. I ; Mark ii. 23, iv. 28 ; Luke vi.
James iii, 6 ; Jude 23.* I.*
o-irXdYXva.} wi/, rd, bowels, only Acts i. Sxttxi'S, I'os, 6, Stachys, Rom. xvi. 9.*
18 elsewhere, fig.,
; tlic affections, com- o-Tc'-yT), 7?s, r; (lit. , a cover), a flat roof of
jmssion, the Jicart, as Col. iii. 12 a house, Matt. viii. 8 ; Mark ii. 4
1 John iii. 17. Luke vii. 6.*
a"tr\ay\vC'C,o\ia\., dep., with ist aor., (rriy<a, to cover, to conceal, to bear with,
pass., eairXayxfl'O'dw, to feel com- 1 Cor. ix. 12, xiii. 7 ; i Thess. iii.
passion, to have x>ity on (gen., or im, I, S-*
dat. or ace, once irepi, Matt. ix. 36). (TTcipos, a, ou, barren, not hearing chil-
(TTrd-yyos, ov, 6, a sponge, Matt, xxvii. dren, Luke i. 7, 36, xxiii. 29 Gal. ;
*
48 Mark xv. 36 ; John xix. 29.
; iv. 27.*
(TTToSos, ou, 7), ashes. Matt. xi. 21 Luke ; CTTeXXw, to set, arrange ; hence, to set
X. 13 Heb. xi. 13.*
; close together, repress, check; and so in
oriropd, ay, 7), seed, I Pet. i. 23.* mid., to avoid, 2 Cor. viii. 20 ; to
o-iropifios, bv, sown; neut. plur., to, withdraw from {drro), 2 Thess. iii. 6.*
cnrdpL/xa, cornfields, ^latt. xii. i ; Mark <rTc'[JLp.a, aros, to, a crown, a garland,
ii. 23 ; Luke vi. i.* Acts xiv. 13. Syn. 67.*
(Tirdpos, ov, 6, seed for solving. CTCva-yixos, ov, 6, a groaning, Acts vii.
oirovSd^w, hasten, to give dili-
dcrw, to 34 ; Rom. viii. 26.*
gcDce, to be in earnest (mth inf. ). o-T€vdtw, |w, to groan, expressing grief,
o-irovSaios, aia, alov, diligent, earnest, 2 anger, or desire.
Cor. viii. 17, 22 ;* adv., -ws, earnesthfi <rT€vds, 77, ou, narrow, strait, Matt. vii.
Luke vii. Tim. i. 17 (W. H.); Tit.
4; 2 13, 14 ; Luke xiii. 24.*
iii. 13 ;* compar. ad vs., CTrovdaLOTepov, <rT€vo-xa)p€«, uj, in pass., to be straitened,
2 Tim. i. 17 (not W. H. ), and -repws, to be distressed, 2 Cor. iv. 8, vi. 12.*
Phil. ii. 28.* (TTevo-xwpCo, as, rj, great distress or
o-itouSt), Tjs, 7;, (i) speed., haste; (2) dili- straits, Rom. ii. 9, viii. 35 ; 2 Cor. vi.
gence, earnestness. Syn. 11. 4, xii. 10.*
o-irvp£s (W. H., acpvpls), idos, t], a basket. o-T€p€ds, d, 6u^ solid, as food, Heb. v. 12,
Syn. 69. 14; fig., firm, stedfast, 1 Pet. v. 9;
(TTaSiov, ov, TO, plur. (TTadioi, oi, (l) « 2 Tim. ii. 19.*
stadium, the eighth part of a Roman (rrepcow, cD, uxrw, to strengthen, confirm,
mile, John xi. 18 ; (2) a racecourse, establish. Acts iii. 7, 16, xvi. 5.*
for public games,
Cor. ix. 24. i (rT€pcu)^a, aroT, to, firmness, constancy,
CTdfivos, 01', 6, or vase, for
T], an urn Col. ii. 5.*
the manna, Heb. ix. 4.* ST£4>avds, a, 6, Stephanas.
(rTa<ria<rTT)s, 01^, 6, an insurgent, Mark (rT€'<})avos, a croivn, a garla'nd, of
on, 6,
XV. 7 (W. H.).* royalty, of victory in the games, of
(TTao-is, eojj, 17 (i<rrr)/xi), a standing, lit. festal joy often used fig. ; Syn. 67.
only Heb. ix. 8 ; elsewhere, a riot, 2Te'4)avos, ov, b, Stephen, Acts vi., vii.
sedition, contention, Mark xv. 7 ; Acts o-T€<^avdw, cD, ih(T(j}, to crotcn, to adorn, to
XV. 2. decorate, 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 7, 9.*
OPTttT-qp, ^po9, masc, a
stater, a silver (TTfjdos, ov^, TO, the breast.
coin equal to the SidpaxfJ-ov (which omrJKw ['icTrjixi, ^aTrjKa), to stand, in the
see), Matt. xvii. 27.* attitude of prayer, 25 ; gene- Mark xi.
oTavpds, ou, 6, a cross ; met. often of , rally, to stand firm, standfast, as Rom.
Christ's death. xiv. 4 ; I Cor. xvi. 13; Gal. v. i.
. (TTod, as, 7], a colonnade, a portico, a porch, <rTp£<j)w, xj/u}, 2nd aor. pass. i(rTpd(pr]v, to
John V. 2, X. 23 ; Acts iii. 11, v. 12.* turn, trans., Matt. v. 39 Rev. xi. 6 ;
(TTOipds, dSos, 17 ("\V. H., <rri/3ds), « {to clmnge into, eh) intrans. Acts vii. ; ,
hough, a branch of a tree, Mark xi. 8.* 42; mostly in pass., to turn oneself, io\\\\
<rTOtx.cia, u»v, rd, elements, rudiments. XX. 14 to he converted, to he changed
;
KTrpartia, as, 17, icarfare, military ser- o-TvXos, 01', 6, a pillar. Gal. ii. 9 i Tim. ;
<rvy-KaQit,(a, (to;, {i) to cause to sit down <rvy-xa£pa), 2nd aor. in pass, form, crvue-
icith, Eph. ii. 6 ; (2) to sit doicii xd/)7;i', to rejoice with (dat. ), Luke i. 58,
together^ Luke xxii. 55.* XV. 6, 9 ; I Cor. xii. 26, xiii. 6 ; Phil,
o-iry-KaKO-iraOew, w, to suffer evil or ii. 17, 18.*
hardship ivith, to he 2)artaker of Jiard- <rvY-X€w(/'), also avyx^^ ^^^*^ (rvyxovaj,
ship, 2 Tim. i. 8, ii. 3 (W. H.).* perf., pass., avyKix^j^dt.^ to confound,
<r\ry-KaKoux€w, to suffer hardsJiipf luith, confuse, i.e., (i) to startle, amaze. Acts
Heb. xi. 25.* ii. 6 ; (2) to stir up, to throiv into con-
a~vy-Ka\i<a, w, e'crw, to call together; mid., fusion. Acts xix. 32, xxi. 27, 31 (3) ;
*
to call together to oneself. toconfute in argument. Acts ix. 22.
o-vy-KaXvirTO), xj/o}, to conceal closely, to onry-xpdo|Jiai, cD/iai, to have felloivship or
*
hide wholly, Luke xii. 2.* dealings ivith (dat. ), John iv. 9.
o-vy-KdixiTTft), xj/u), to bow doion wholly, <rv'Y-x.v<rts, ews, r}, confusion, commotion,
to opjrress, Rom. xi. 10 (LXX.).* uproar. Acts xix. 29.*
onry-KaTa-Paivo), to go down ivith any <ru-^dw, cD, -qau}, to live together with (dat. ),
one, as from Jerusalem to C?esarea, Rom.vi. 8; 2Cor. 3; 2Tim. ii. 11.* vii.
Acts XXV. 5.* orv-t€VYVv(j.i, 1st aor. avvi^ev^a, to conjoin
<rvY-KaTd-9€<ris, ews, ^, consent, agree- (ace. ), to unite, as man and wife, Matt,
*
ment, 2 Cor. vi. 16.* xix. 6 ; Mark x. 9.
crv"y-KaTa-T(07]|it, in mid., to give a vote (TV-J-qT^w, a), -qaoi, to ask one another, to
with, to assent to (dat. ), Luke xxiii. 51.* discuss, dispute, with dat., orTrpos, ace.
<rvY-KaTa-tJn]<})tt«> ^^ pass., to he voted (Tv-^TJTqcris, ew5, r/, questioning, dispu-
or classed ivith {ixeTo), Acts i. 26.* tation. Acts XV. 2 (W. H., ^77x770-15),
cnry-Kcpdvvvjii, daoj, 1st aor., avveKepaa-a; 7 (W. H., ^77x770-15), xxviii. 29 (W. H.
pass., perf., avyK^Kpa/xai, to mix ivith, omit).*
to temper, i Cor. xii. 24 ;
pass., to he on)-5TiTT]TTJs, ov, 6, a disputer, as the Greek
mixed with, Heb. iv. 2.* sophists, I Cor. i. 20.*
(rvy-Kivi<a, w, rjao}, to move together, to <rv-tv7os, ov, 6, Tj, a yoke-felloiv, a co-
put into commotion, stir up. Acts vi. adjutor, Phil. iv. 3 (possibly a proper
12.* name, Syzygus).*
o-v-y-KXcCft), cw, to inclose, to shut in, as cv-^wo-iroicto, Q, ist aor. ffvue^ojoiroiriaa,
tishes in a net, Luke v. 6 ; to shut one to make alive with, to quicken together
up into or under [virb, ace.) sonie-
(ei's) with, Eph. ii. 5 ; Col. ii. 13.*
tliing, to inaJcc subject to, Rom. xi. 32 o-uKd|xivos, ov, 7], a sycamorc-trec, Luke
Gal. iii. 22, 23.* xvii. 6.*
crxry-KX-qpovdiiOS, ov, 6, a joint-heir, i.e., <rvKT], rjs, 7} (contr. from -e'a), a fig-tree.
a joint possessor or co-partner, Rom. (rvKo-|ia>paia, aj, ^ (W. H., -e'a), a syca-
viii. 17 ; Eph. iii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; i more-tree, Luke xix. 4.*
Pet. iii. 7.* <rvKov, ov, t6, a fig.
o-vy-Koivwve'w, Ci, to he a joint partaker o-vKo-4>avTcw, Q, riffio, to accuse falsely, to
with, have fellowship with, Eph. v. 11 ; defraud, Luke iii. 14, xix. 8 (gen.
Phil. iv. 14 Rev. xviii. 4.*
; pers., ace. thing).*
cnry-Koivwvos, od, b, ij, a partaker ivith, o-vX-a'Ya>-YC(o, tD, to plunder, to make a
*
a co-partner, an associate. prey of. Col. ii. 8.
£nry-KO(iCtw, to hear away together, as in o-vXdo), uj, t/}(xu}, to rob, to plunder, 2 Cor.
burying a corpse, Acts viii. 2.* xi. 8.*
<rv\-Kp£vw, LvC}, to place together in order (TvXX-. In words commencing thus, W. H.
to judge of, to compare (ace, dat.), to prefer the unassimilated form <rvv\-.
estimate or explain by com2)arison, i trvK-\aXi<a, ist aor. crvveXdXrjcra, to con-
Cor. ii. 13 2 Cor. x. 12.*
; verse with{da.t, ), fierd (gen. ), Trpds (ace. ),
(nry-KviTTw, to he hoived together or bent Matt. xvii. 2 ; Mark ix. 4 Luke ; iv.
doable, Luke xiii. 11.* 36, ix. 30, xxii. 4 ; Acts xv. 12.*
<rvY<vp£a, ay, i}, a coincidence, a concur- (TuX-Xafipdvo), (Tv\\r}xpo/xai, (TVP€i\r)<pa,
rence ; Kara. ffvyKvpiav, by cJiance, Luke (jvviXa^ov, \i) to take together, to catch,
X. 31.* to seize; (2) to conceive, as a female;
;
(3) mid., apprehend (ace), to help <ru|i-|xeToxos, ov, jointly partaking, Eph.
(dat.). iii. 6, V. 7.*
(TvX-Xc^u), $w, to collect, to gather. cruji- |xi|jLT]T^s, ov, 6, a joint-imitator, a co-
(rvX-Xo-yCtoixai, cro/xai, to reckon together, follourr, Phil. iii. 17.*
to deliberate, Luke xx. 5.* o'V|JL-p.op<|>i^w. See cri'yu/io/j^ow.
<ruX-Xvireo|iai, ov/xai, pass., to be greatly (rv|i-(iop<i>o$, ov, conformed to, gen., Rom.
grieved {iirl, dat.), Mark iii. 5.* viii. 29 ; dat., Phil. iii. 21.*
o-v(ip-, o-v|Xfi.-, omnir-, <ru}i<|)-. In some (rv\j.-\iop^6oi, w, to conform to (dat.),
words commencing thus, "W. H. prefer Phil. iii. 10 (W. H., avixfiopcpl^w, in
the unassimilated form avp^-, avv/x-, same sense).*
crwir-, avP(p-. (rujt-'Tra0€'w, w, tJo-o;, to sympcdhise with
(rufJL-PaCvb), -^rjcro/jLai, 2nd aor. cvve^rju, (dat.), Heb. iv. 15, x. 34.*
to happen, to befall, to occur; perf., <ru(i-Tra0T|s, es, sympcdhising, comjias-
part., TO avfx^e^rjKos, an event. sionatc, i Pet. iii. 8.*
(rv|JL-PdXXci), 2nd aor. cvve^aXov, to put (Tuji-irapa-'yivonat, to come together {to,€Ti,
together, hence, to ponder, Luke ii. 19 ; ace), Luke xxiii. 48 to stand by one,
;
to come vp with, to encounter, with or to su]yport (dat. ), 2 Tim. iv. 16 (W. H.,
without hostile intent (dat.), Luke Trapayivo/xai).*
xiv. 31 ; Acts xvii. 18, xx. 14 ; mid., (rvfJL-irapa-KaXeo), Q, in pass., to be com-
to confer, consult with. Acts iv. 15 to ; forted Rom. i.
togetlier, 12.*
contribute, help to (dat. ), Acts xviii. 27.* o-vfi-Trapa-XajJLpdvcD, 2nd aor. cv^itrapi-
(ru|i-^(riX6va), aoi, to reign with, i Cor. Xa^ov, to take with oneself, as compa-
iv. 8 2 Tim. ii. 12.*
: nion, Acts xii. 25, xv. 37, 38 Gal. ii. i.* ;
jyrove. Acts ix. 22 ; (3) to teach, in- (rvfi-Trdp-eifii, to be present ivith. Acts
struct, I Cor. ii. 16. xxv. 24.*
(Tv^-PovXevb), to advise (dat.), John xviii. (ruji-irdo^w, to sniffer together with. Rem.
14 ; Rev. iii. 18 mid., to take coxmsel; viii. 17 ; I Cor. 26.*
xii.
together (tVa or inf.), Matt. xxvi. 4 ; <rv}JL-'ircjnrtD, to send with, 2 Cor. viii.
John xi. 53 (W. H., ^ovkevoixai) ; Acts 18, 22.*
ix. 23.* (rv|i-irepi-Xap.pdva), Acts xx. 10.*
o-v|i-povXiov, lov, t6, (i) midual consult- orufi-irivw, 2nd aor. cvve-Ktov, to drink
ation, united counsel; Xnu^dvu), ttoicw with, Acts X. 41.*
avfi^ovXiov, to take counsel together, (rv^-trL-TTra), to fall together, Luke vi. 49
Matt. xii. 14, xxii. 15, xxvii. i, 7, xxviii. (AV. H.).*
12; Mark iii. 6, xv. i 2) a council, a ; 1 <rv|JL-irXTipow, Cj, to fill, to fill up, to fill
gathering of counsellors, Acts xxv. 12.* fully, Luke viii. 23 pass., to be fully ;
o-v|x-PovXos, ov, 6, a counsellor, Rom. xi. come, Luke ix. 5 1 Acts ii. i * ; .
Acts XV. 14 2 Pet. ; I i ; and four to throng u^jon (ace), Luke viii. 42.*
others are mentioned : (
i ) Luke ii. 25, <ru}i-'iroX£'rt]S| ov, 6, a fellow -citizen, Eph.
34 ; (2) Luke iii. 30 ; (3) Acts xiii. i ii. 19.*
(4) Rev. vii. 7.* <rvp.-iropeuonai, (i) to accompany, to go
<ru(i-|ia8iiWjs, ov, 6, a felloic -disciple, John u'ith (dat.), Luke vii. 11, xiv. 25,
xi. 16.* xxiv. 15 ; (2) intrans., to come together,
(rup.-|iaprvp€a), Q, to bear witness together to assemble, Mark x. i.*
with, to testify along with, Rom. ii. 1 5, <ruft-ird<riov, ov, to (ti'vw), a table party,
viii. 16, ix. I ; Rev. xxii. 18 (not a festive company, a feast ; ^la.rk vi. 39,
W. H.).* avfiiroaia av^Trbcia, by co'niptanies*
(rup.-|upi^o), in mid., divide icith,
to o-u(i-irp€o-pvT€pos, 01', 6, a fello^c-eideTf
partake with (dat.), i Cor. ix. 13.* I Pet. V. I.*
510 VOCABULARY. [o-vjj,-<|>dYCiD — (rvv-airo-O'TA.Xw
pass., (TvvTjyepdrjv ; to raise together, to Acts X. 41, xi. 3 ; I Cor. v. 11; Gal.
raise ivith, Eph. ii. 6; Col. ii. 12, ii. 12,*
iii. I.* <rvv-€(ris, ecos, i] {'iv/J-t), a initting together,
<rw-€8piov, ov, t6, a council, a tribunal, in mind, discernment ; mat., the
\\q\\cq
Matt. x. 17 specially, the Sanhe-
; understanding, the source of discern-
drin, the Jewish council of seventy ment.
members, presided over by the high <rw-€Tos, Tj, 6v {ir)fj.L), intelligent, jrrudent,
priest the couiu:il-hall, where the
; w-ise. Matt. xi. 25 ; Luke x. 21 ; Acts
Sanhedrin met, Acts iv. 15. xiii. 7 ; I Cor. i. 19.*
<ruv-€i8Ti<ris, ews,i), prop., self-conscious- crvv-6v-8oKe'w, w, to approve together ; to
ness, theconsciousness man has of consent to (dat. ), Luke xi. 48 ; Acts
himself in his relation to God ; the con- viii. I, xxii. 20 ; to he of onemindicith
sciciKe, Rom. ii. 15 ; i Pet. ii. 19 ; the (dat.), Rom. i. 32; to be content to (inf.),
sentence pronounced by the conscience, I Cor. vii. 12, 13.*
2 Cor. iv. 2, V. II. oruv-€-u«x€«, tD, in mid., to feast icith, to
onn'-€i8ov, 2nd aor. of obs., present, to revel u'ith, 2 Pet. ii. 13 ; Jude 12.*
be conscious or aivare of, to consider. orvv-€<j)-i(rTT]fjLi, to rise together against
Acts xii. 12, xiv. 6 perf., avvoLda, ;
(/card), to attack, Acts xvi. 22.*
part., (TwetStis, to be privy to a design. <rvv-€X(i), Iw, (i) to pi'ess together, con-
Acts V. 2 ; to be conscious to oneself strain; (2) hold fast, as a prisoner,
to
(dat.) of guilt (ace), i Cor. v. 4.* to stop, as the ears, the mouth (3) ;
oruv-iiXiKicoTTis, ov, 6, one of the same age, Luke V. 38 (W. H. omit) ; (2) to lay
Gal. i. 14." lip in mind, Luke ii. 19.*
orvv-OdirTw, ^J/io, 2nd aor., pass., cvveTd- <ruv-T{0T]ji,t, in mid., to set or ptlace to-
(pr)v, in. pass., to be buried icith, Roin. getJier, as in agreement between two
vi. 4 ; Col. ii. 12.* or more persons, to agree, Luke xxii.
o-uv-OXdto, Q, flit., pass., (rwdXaad-qaoixai., 5 ; John ix. 22 ; Acts xxiii. 20 ; to
to break, break in pieces, Matt. xxi.
to assent. Acts xxiv. 9 (W. H., avveiri.-
44 ; Luke
xx. 18.* Tidrjfxi).*
(rvv-0\tp(o, to throng, topress closely 7ipon, o~uv-Td|x«s, adv., concisely, briefly. Acts
Mark v. 24, 31.* xxiv. 4.*
orw-Gpti'irTw, to break down ; fig. , with a-vv-Tpeyja, 2nd aor. avp^Spafiov, to run
KapSiav, to take away one's fortitude, togetJwr, as a multitude, ^lark vi. 33 ;
i
;
(W. H., GTa(yLa(TT7)s), Mark xv. 7.* motto of a seal, 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; (4) that
c-v-o-TttTiKos, •)?, 6v, commendatory, 2 Cor. ivhich the seal attests, the proof, i Cor.
iii. I.* ix. 2.
(Tu-o-Tavpod), w, to crucify together with (r(})vpis. See crirvpis.
(ace. and dat. ) ; lit., as Matt, xxvii. o-<j>vpdv, ov, TO, the anJcle-bone.
44 fig., as Gal. ii. 19.
; a-\ih6v, adv., nearly, almost, Acts xiii.
o-v-<rT€\X« (see (rTeX\w),(i ) to torap round, 44, xix. 26 ; Heb. ix. 22.*
to swathe, as a dead body, Acts v. 6 ; o-XTiH-tt, to, fashion, Jmbit, i Cor.
aros,
(2) to contract, perf,, pass., part., con- vii. 31 form, ap2)ea7'ance, Phil. ii. 8.
;
i.e., in the Cliristian service, Phil. ii. dissension, "schism," i Cor. i. 10.
25 ; Philein. 2.* crxotviov, ov, TO [axo'ivo^, a rush), a cord,
<rv-<rTp4<})«, \p(j}, to roll or gather together. a rope, John ii. 15 Acts xxvii. 32.* ;
2vx.dp (AV. H. ), or Stxap, 7/, Sychar, o'co^o), (Tiber 03, perf., cricruKa ;
pass.,
John iv. 5.* cr^(rwcr/iai ; ist aor., pass., iawdrjv ;
(i) for security, Matt, xxvii. 66; (2) entire man, the self, Rom. xii. i ; (6)
for secrecy, Rev. xxii. 10 (3) for ; substance, opp, to shadow. Col. ii. 17-
designation, Eph. i. 13 or (4) for ;
(ra>|iaTiKos, 77, 6v, of or pertaiiiing to the
confirmation, Rom. xv. 28. body, I Tim. iv. 8 bodily corporeal,;
514 VOCABULARY. [Zctfirarpos — TapaxVj
Luke iii. 22 ; adv., -ws, corporeally^ in TttYjAa, aroj, t6, an order or series, a
hudihj raanifestatioii. Col. ii. 9.* regular method, I Cor. xv. 23,*
Swirarpos, ov, 6, Sopatcr or Sosijoatcr, TttKTos, v, ov, ajypointed, set, Acts xii.
Acts XX. 4 (cf. Rom. xvi. 21).* 21.*
cra)p€v«, (TO), <o /^m;; up, to load, Rom. TaXaiir(dpea>, Q, ijcrw, to be distressed, to
xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* be in affliction, to be miserable, James
2a)o-0€VT]s, ou, 6, Sosthcnes, Acts xviii. 17 ;
iv. 9.*
ICor. i. I. It is uncertain whether ToXanrcDpCa, ay, 7?, affliction, distress,
the .reference is to the same person.* misery, Rom. iii. 16 ; James v. i.*
iSbxriTrarpos, ov, Sosipatcr or Sopater,
6, raXaCirupos, ov, distressed, miserable,
Rom. xvi. 21 (cf. Acts xx. 4).* Rom. vii. 24; Rev. iii. 17.*
<rft)Tt]p, Tjpos, 6, a saviour, deliverer, pre- ToXavTiaios, am, aiov, of a talent weight,
server ; a name given to God, Luke Rev. xxi. 21.*
i.
47 ; I Tim. i. i, ii. 3, iv. 10 Tit.
; rdXavTOv, ov, to, a talent, of silver or
1. 3, ii. 4 Jude 25
10, iii. ; ; elsewhere gold. The Jewish talent weighed
always of Christ. 3,000 shekels (Ex. xxxviii. 25, 26),
<rwTT]pia, aj, welfare, piroapcrity, de-
y], the shekel being about \ oz. avoir-
liverance, preservation, from temporal dupois.
evils, Acts xxvii. 34 Heb. xi. 7 ;
;
TaXi0d, 7} (Chald.), a damsel, Mark v.
Acts vii. 25 2 Pet. iii, 15 specially
; ;
41.*
salvation, i.e., deliverance from spirit- Tap.€iov, 01% TO, a storehouse, a secirt
ual and eternal evils, and the attain- chamber. Matt. vi. 6, xxiv. 26 ; Luke
*
ment of a perfect well-being, the real- xii. 3, 24.
isation of the highest and completest Tavvv, adv. (ra vvv, the things tliat now
life. are), note, or in present circumstances,
<ra)TT]pios, ov,saving, liealthful, bringing accm-ding to present necessity; only in
salvation, Tit. ii. 1 1 neut., rb auiT-qpLov, ;
Acts. ( W. H. always write to. vvv. )
salvation, Luke ii. 30, iii. 6 ; Acts Tcl^is, ews, -q, order, i.e., (i) regular
xxviii. 28 ; Eph. vi. 17.* arrangement, Col. ii. 5 ; (2) appointed
(ra>({>pove(t>, w, -qao}, (i) to he of souiul succession, Luke i. 8 ; (3) rank, Heb.
mind, Mark v. 15 ; (2) to be sober- V. 6.
minded, Rom. xii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 6, rairtivos, 77, 6v (down-trodden), humble,
<r<u<|>povtt<«>) to make sober-minded, to teach, loU'ly, in condition or in spirit; in N.T.
to train, Tit. ii. 4.* in a good sense.
(ru<{>povi(rp.os, ov, b, soundness of mind, TaTr€ivo-<|>po(rvvT], 779, 77, lowliness of
sobriety, 2 Tim. i. 7.* mind, humility, real, as Phil. ii. 3 ;
o-w-<|>pa)v, ov {ados, orws [sound'\, and lower in esteem, 2 Cor. xii. 21 ; pass.,
4>pw)i of sound mind, sober-minded, to be humbled, Luke xviii. 14; mid.,
discreet, modest, i Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. tohumble oneself, to make oneself lowly,
i. 8, ii. 2, 5.* James iv. 10.
TaTTCivwo-is, fws, 7], humiliation, in cir-
T. cumstances, Luke i. 48 ; in spirit,
James i. 10.
T, T, the nineteenth letter.
Tttv, tau, t, Tapdo-o-ft), ^w, to agitate, as water in a
As a numeral, r' = 300 j = 300,000. ;
pool, John v. 4 (W. H. omit), 7 to ;
rapcpvai, Qv, ai (Lat. ), taverns; Acts stir up, to disturb in mind, with fear,
xxviii. 15, I'res T'aberTice, the three grief, anxiety, doubt.
Taverns, a place on the Apj)ian Waj'.* Tapaxi^, ris, rj, a stirring, John v. 4
Tapi0a, 77 (Chald.), Tabitha, Acts ix. (W. H. omit) a commotion ov tumult,
;
Topaxos, ov,
6, a disturbance, Acts T€Kvo-Tpo4>€a), w, ^0 bring np children,
xix. 23 ; constcrnaticm, Acts xii. 18.* I Tim. V. 10.*
Tapo-cvs, ^ws, 6, one of Tarsus, Acts T€KTo)v, o^/os (compare Texvrj), an artificer,
ix. II, xxi. 39.* a carpenter, Matt. xiii. 55, Markvi. 3.*
Tdpo-oSi ov, ?7, Tarsus, Acts ix. 30. xeXcios, eta, e?ov, perfect, as ( i ) complete
Taprapow, w, wcw, ^0 thrust down to in all its parts ; (2)^111 grown, of full
Tartarus, 2 Pet. ii. 4.* age; (3) specially of the complete-
rdo-crw, ^w, (i) to constitute, arrange; ness of Christian character, perfect;
(2) to determine ; mid., to a2)/}oint. adv., -us, 'perfectly, only i Pet. i. 13.
ravpos, 01', 6, a bull, a bullock. Syn. 27.
xavrd, by crasis for to, avrd, the same TcXeioTtis, T7)Tos, v, 2)erfectn£ss, perfection,
things. Col. iii. 14: Heb. vi. i.*
ravra. See ouros. TeXeiob), w, loaoj, (i) to complete, to finish,
Ta4>^, 7)5, •?) {daTTTO)), a burial, a sejml- as a course, a race, or the like (2) to ;
child, John xiii. 33 Gal. iv. 19 ; ; principal end or sco2)e ; (5) an impost
1 John ii. I, 12, 28, iii. 7, 18, iv. 4, or tax [see reXew (3)!, Matt. xvli. 25 ;
*
days, John xi. 39. in travail, John xvi. 21.
TCTapTOS, 77, ov, ord. num. fourth. ,
t(X\{«), to pluck, to pluck of, ^latt. xii.
T€Tpd-7«vos. ov, four-cornered. Rev. xxi. I ; Mark 23 Luke vi. i.*
ii. ;
quantity, and o5tos simply determines), Tpdx'nXos, 01', 6, the neck, as Luke xv. 20
of such a kind, such, so, used either met, for life, Rom, xvi, 4.
>vith or without a noun. (The corre- rpaxvs, da, v, rough, uneven, as ways,
sponding relative is ofos, as, only ]Mark Luke iii. 5 ; as rocks in the sea, Acts
xiii. 19 ; I Cor. xv. 48 ; 2 Cor. x. xxvii, 29,*
1 1 ; once oiroios, Acts xxvi. 29. ) For Tpax<«>viTis, tSos, rj, Trachonitis, the
ToiovTos with the article, see § 220. ]Sr,E. of the territory beyond Jordan,
boldly), the more boldly, Rom. xv. 15.* to bring up, rear, Luke iv, 16.
ToXp.T]T^S, ov, 0, a daring oiic, one over- Tpcxwj 2ud aor. edpafiov, (i) to run, as
bold or presumptuous, 2 Pet. ii. 10.* in a race, i Cor. ix, 24 ; Rom. ix. 16 ;
Top,6s, y], ov, sharp, keeiiy comp., ro/Awre/Jos, (2) to run, or spread, as a rumour, 2
Heb. iv. 12.* Thess. iii. i.
t6|ov, ov, TO, a boiv. Rev. vi. 2.* rpfjiia, aros, to, a hole, the eye of a needle.
*
Toirdtiov, iov, TO, theto2MZ, Rev. xxi. 20.* See TpviidkLo..
TOTTOS) ov, 6, (i) a place, i.e., a district xpidKovTa, indecl., thirty.
or region, or a particular spot in a Tpia-Koo-uoi, at, a, three hund.red, Mark
region; (2) the place one occujncs, xiv. 5 ; John xii. 5.*
the room, an abode, a seat, a sheath for TptPoXos, 6, a triple-thorned shrub,
01;,
a sword ; (3) a passage in a book ; (4) a Matt. vii. 16; Heb. vi. 8.*
thistle.
state, condition; (5) opporttmity, possi- rpCpos, 01', 17, apathv:orn, a road, a beaten
icay. Matt. iii. 3 ; Marki. 3 Luke iii. 4.
*
bility. (See under Kpavlov.) ;
ToorovTOS, Toaaim], to(tovto, demonst. Tpi-erCa, as, tj, a sjiace of three years,
prou. denoting (quantity (cf. tocovtos), Acts XX. 31.*
so great, so much, so long; plur., so Tp£t«, to grate, to gnash, as the teeth,
many. Markix. 18.*
t6t€, demonst. adv., then, Tpt-jj,T]vos, OV, of three months, neut. as
TOvvavTiov, for to ivavTiov, on the con- subst,, Heb. xi. 23.*
trary, 2 Cor. i). 7 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Pet. rpis,num. adv., thrice.
iii. 9.* rpi-oTeyos, ov, having three floors; neut.,
Toiivojia,for to ovofxa, by name. Matt, the third floor or storey. Acts xx, 9.*
xxvii. 57.* Tpio-'XiXioi, at, a, three thousand, Acts
tovtcVti, for tovt €<ttlv (W. H. prefer ii. 41.*
the uncontracted form), that is; " z.c," rptros, t], ov, ord. num., third.; neut,,
Acts 19
i. Rom. x. 6, 7, 8.
; TO Tplrov, the third pa.rt, Rev. viii. 7 ;
Tovro, neut. of ovto^, which see. the third time, Mark xiv, 41 e/c rplrov, ;
Tpd-yos, 01^, 6, a he-goat, Heb. ix. 12, 13, tlie third time, Matt. xxvi. 44; t^tpIttj
Tpoiro-<j>op€'w, tD, 770-0?, to bear with the a thing, a pattern, "type"; (3) an
disposition or cimractcr of others, Acts emblem, an example; (4) tJie form or
xiii. 18, where perhaps the true read- contents of a letter ; (5) a form, a rule
ing is eTpo(po(f>6p7](Tei', he hare them as of doctrine.
a nurse.* Tvirro), xj/u}, to beat, to strike, as the
Tpo<|)T|, 7;s, i], food, nourishment, niaiii- breast in grief, Luke xviii. 13 ; to
tniancc. punishment. Acts xxiii. 3
inflict to ;
X. 25; Luke xviii. 25 (W. H., Tprjfxa).* Tv<|>dw, a), wcrcj, to raise a smoke ; pass.
TpiiirT]p,a, aros, to, a hole, the eye of a fig., to be pro2(d, to be arrogant and
needle. Matt. xix. 24.* conceited, i Tim. iii. 6, vi. 4 ; 2 Tim.
Tpv({>aiva, 77s, 17, Tryphccna, Rom. xvi. iii. 4.*
12.* TV(j)w, in pass., part., smoking, dimly
Tpv«}>dw, cD, luxuriously, to
ri<T(i}, to live burning, Matt. xii. 20.*
take one's fill of pleasure, James v. 5.* TV(})wviKds, 77, ov, violent, tempestuous,
*
Tpv(|>T|, -^s, ^, luxury, Luke vii. 25 ; 2 like a whirlwind. Acts xx vii. 1 4.
Pet. ii. 13.* TvxiKOs, 01/, 6 (or Tux"^o'5)> Tychichus.
Tpv<j)«(ra, 77s, IT), Tryphosa, Rom. xvi. Tv^dv. See ri'7xdi/w.
12.*
Tpcods, 6.ho%, 7j, Troas, a city of JMysia,
properly Alexamlria Troas. Y.
TpwyvXXiov, 01^, t6, Trogyllium, Acts
XX. 15 (W. H. omit).* Y, V, v\|/iXov, upsllon, n, the twentieth
TpcG-yto, to eat. Matt. xxiv. 38 ; John vi. letter. As a numeral, v' — 400; ,v —
54-58, xiii. 18.* 400,000. At the commencement of
Tiryxdvo) [rvx- or rei^X")? ^ut, Te^^ofiai , ;
a word, v is always aspirated.
2nd aor., ^tvxov perf., t^tvxo. (i) ;
', vaKCvGivos, 17, ov, "hyacinthine," of the
to obtain, to get possession of enjoy colour of tlie hyacinth, dark purple,
(gen.), Luke xx. 35; Acts xxiv. 3; Rev. ix. 17.*
(2) to fall out, to happen, to happen to MKivdos, 01;, 6, "hyacinth," a j^urjde or
he ; ei ri^^ot,should chance, it may
if it blue gem, "jacinth," perhaps sopjs/iirc,
be, px^rluips, 1 Cor. xiv. 10; 2nd aor., Rev. xxi. 20.*
part., Tvx<iv, ordinary, commonplace. vdXivos, "n, ov, glassy, trans2}arent. Rev.
Acts xix. II neut., tvx^v, tchat may
; iv. 6.*
be, perhaps, i Cor. xvi. 6. iiaXoS) a transparent stone like glass,
01', 7),
death
TviiiravCtu), tVw, to beat or scourge to Rev. xxi. 21.*
crystal.
when stretched on a ivheel, Heb. xi. 35.* vppCt<*), cw, to treat with insolence or
TviriKwSi adv., typically, in figitres, contumely, to abuse.
"I Cor. X. II (W. H.).* iSPpis, ewj, 17, ( I ) insolence, injury, 2 Cor.
TVTros, 01;, 6, (i) « mark, an impression, xii. 10 (2) darnage,
;
loss, Acts xxvii.
produced by a blow ; (2) the figure of 10, 21.*
;; * ^;
,
6 ; John xii. 36 6 vlbs rod dvdpdo-Kov, ; gen., over, for, on behalf of; with
Son of man (once only without art., accus., above, superior to (see § 303).
John V. 27), very often used by our Adverbially, above, more, 2 Cor. xi. 23.
Lord of himself (only once by another In COMPOSITION, virep denotes superi-
of him. Acts vii. 56) ; in reference to ority (above), or aid (on behalf of).
Dan. vii. 13 [sotis of men denote men virep-a£p(tf, in mid., to lift up oneself, to
generally in Mark iii. 28, Eph. iii. 5, exalt oneself, to be arrogant, 2 Cor. xii.
only). For vlbs Qeov, Son of God, see 7 2Thess. ii. 4.*
;
,
§ 217, c. vrrcp-aKiios, ou, j^ast the acme or flower of
I'Xt), 77s, T), wood, fuel, James iii. 5.* life, I Cor. vii. 36.*
vfitis, plur. of crv, which see. inrep-dvo), adv. (gen. ), above, Eph. i. 21
I }Jt€vatos, 01^, 6, Hymenceus, i Tim. i. 20 iv. 10 ; Heb. ix. 5.*
2 Tim. ii. 17.* vir€p-av|dva), to increase exceedingly, 2
{)(i€Tepos, possess, pron., your, as be- Thess. i. 3.*
longing to, or as proceeding from. itrep-^aivo),to go beyond, to over -reach,
(For the use of the article with the 1 Thess. iv. 6.*
word, see § 223.) {crrep-PaXXdvTws, adv., beyond measure,
&|JLV€a>, w, Tjcru), {1) tosing or recite hymns 2 Cor. xi. 23.*
to (ace.) ; to sing praise. Matt. xxvi. vtrep-pdXXw, intrans., to surpass; N.T.,
620 VOCABULARY. [virtp-PoXTJ — vird-KpiO'is
only pres. participle, surpassing ex- vTT-TJKoos, OV, listening to, obedient to
ceeding^ 2 Cor. iii. lo, ix. 14 ; Eph. i. (dat. submissive, Acts vii. 39 ; 2 Cor.
),
vircp-PoXTJ, 7]%, i], excess, exuberance, sur- vir-TipcTcw, Q, to minister to, to serve
passing excellence, lyre-emitience, 2 Cor. (dat), Acts xiii. 36, xx. 34, xxiv.
iv. 7, xii. 7 ; Kad' VTrep^oXrjv, as adv. 23.*
exceedingly, Rom. vii. 13 ; i Cor. xii. ov, 6 {ip^rrjs, a rower), a ser-
{nr-T)p€'Ti]s,
31; 2 Cor. i. 8; Gal. i. 13; Ka6' vant, attendant, specially (i) an officer,
virep^o\T]v ds vTrep^oXrjv, more and more a lictor ; (2) an attendant in a syna-
exceedingly (R.V. ), 2 Cor. iv. 17.* gogue ; (3) a minister of the Gospel.
vTrep-eiSov (see ddov), to overlook, to hear Syn. 60.
ivith, 30.*
Acts xvii. iJirvos, ov, 6, sleep ; fig.spiritual sleep. ,
virtp-iKiiva, adv., beyond, farther, 2 Cor. VTTo, prep., gov. gen. accus., under and
X. 16.* with gen., by, generally signifying
{nrcp-cK-ircpto-crov, adv., beyond all mea- the agent ; with accus., under, beneath,
sure, in the highest possible degree, Eph. of place, of time, or of subjection to au-
iii. 20; I Thess. iii. 10, v. 13.* thority (see § 304). In compo.sition,
{nr€p-6K-T€Cvw, to stretch out overmuch, VTTO denotes subjection, diminutiony
2 Cor. X. 14.* concealment.
{nrcp-tK-xwa), pass. , to he poured out over, viro-pdXXw, to suborn, to suggest M'hat is
*
to overfioiu, Luke vi. 38. false. Acts vi. 11.*
{iTrcp-cv-Tvyxdvw, to intercede for, Rom. v'Tro-'Ypap.|xds, ov, 6, a pattern, an example,
viii. 26.* I Pet. ii. 21.*
virep-ex'^j ^^ excel, to sur^MSS (gen.), to be vird-SctYixa, aroj, t6, (i) an example for
supreme; N.T. only participle, Rom. imitation, or for warning, John xiii.
xiii. I ; Phil. ii. 3, iv. 7 ; i Pet. ii. 15 ; Heb. iv. 11 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 James ;
a stage ^^Zaycr; a
viro-KpiTT|S, ov, 6, lit., viro-o-rpeclM*), i/'w, to turn back, to return,
hypocrite, a dissembler, Matt. xvi. 3. intrans.
viro-XafJLpdvw, 2nd aor. vrreXa^ou, (i) viro-o-Tpwvvup.t or -wvvtjii), to strew under,
to take from under, up, Actsi. to receive Luke xix. 36. *
9 (2) to take uj) a discourse, to answer,
;
viro-Ta7'^, "^^j "^^ subjection, stibmission,
Luke X. 30 ; (3) <o think, to judge, to 2 Cor. ix. 13 ; Gal. ii. 5 ; i Tim. ii.
to receive, welcome, 3 John 8 ("W. H. ).* viro-Tao-o-ft), ^w, 2nd aor. , pass. , vireTa.-yT]v,
viro-Xeifxp-a (or -Xi/i^ua). aros, to, a rem- to place under, to subject; mid., to
nant, Rom. ix. 27 (W. H.).* submit oneself, to be obedient.
VTTO Xeiiru), to leave behind, pass., Rom. to set or put tinder, to lay
i5iro-Tt0T]p.i,
down, Rom. xvi. 4 mid., to suggest ;
wine-press, dug in the ground, Mark •uiro-Tpex.co, 2nd aor. virebpaixov, to o'un
xii. I.* under lee or shelter of, Acts xxvii. 16.*
{nro-Xi|nrJi.vo), to leave, to leave behind, tiro-Tuirwo-is, v, pattern, cxamjjle,
ewj,
I Pet. ii. 21.* I Tim. 2 Tim. i. 13.*
i. 16 ;
viro-p.€va), (i) ^0 bear up under, to endure vTro-^4p<ji, 1st aor. VTrrjveyKa, to bear up
(ace.) ; (2) <o persevere, to reviain con- under, to sustain, to endiire, i Cor. x.
stant. Matt. X. 22 ; (3) io reviain or 13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; i Pet. ii. 19.*
5^^?/ bcJtind, Luke ii. 43. oiro-x.wpeco, Q, tjcto}, to icithdraw quietly,
v'iro-fi.i}JLVT|o-Kc»), vwofMurjaoj, 1st aor. pass. to retire, Luke v. 16, ix. 10.*
vire/xvTjadrjv, to remind (ace. of pers. ), vir-o)Tridt«, to strike under the eye ; hence,
John xiv. 26mid., ^0 caZZ to mind,
; {i) to bruise ; fig. , to buffet, Cor. ix.
i
to remember, only Luke xxii. 61. 27 ; (2) to iceai-y out, by repeated ap-
{nr6-p.vT]<ris, ews, rf, (i) remembrance, plication, Luke xviii. 5.*
recollection, 2 Tim. i. 5 ; (2) a putting £s, vbs, 6, 7], a hog, boar, or sow, 2 Pet.
in mind, 2 Pet. i. 13, iii. i.* ii. 22.*
viro-iiovTJ, Tjs, 7), a bearing up under, t/, hyssop, a stalk or stem of
i'cro-w'Tros, ov,
endurance, perseverance, patient wait- hyssop, John xix. 29 ; a bunch of hys-
ing for (gen.). sop for sp)rinkling, Heb. ix. 19.*
viro-vo€<«), u), to conjecture, to suspect. Acts vo^€p€«, Q), TJaio, to be behind ; abs., to
25, xxv. 18, xxvii. 27.*
xiii. be lacking, to fall short, John ii. 3 ;
vird-voia, as, i), a surmising, suspicion, Avith obj., to be lacking in, to fall short
I Tini. vi. 4.* of, ace, Matt. xix. 20 ;
gen., Luke
{nro-irXcw {F), ist aor. vTreirXevca, to sail xxii. 35 ; airb, Heb. xii. 15 ; to be
under shelter of (ace), Acts xxvii. lacking to, ace, Mark x. 21 ;
pass.,
.
4, 7-: to lack, to come short, i Cor. i. 7, viii.
viro-Trv€'w (/), 1st aor. vireirvevca, to 8 ; to suffer need, Luke xv. 14.
bloiv gently, of the wind, Acts xxvii. vtnipr\\LO., fxaros, to, (i) tfiat which is
lacking from (gen.), Col. i. 24 i ;
{nro-iroSiov, ov, to, a footstool. Thess. iii. 10 ; (2) need, poverty, Luke
vtrd-o-Tao-is, ews, 17, that ivhich underlies ; xxi. 4.
hence (i), the substance, the reality vo-T€'pii(ris, (ojs, ij, poverty, penury, Mark
underlying mere appearance, Heh. i.
3, xii. 44 ; Phil. iv. ii.*
perhaps, Heb. xi. i (R.V. niarg. ) ; (2) compar., latter, only, Tim.
i;o-T€pos, a, ov,
support, confidence, ass^trance, 2 Cor. iv. Iand Matt. xxi. 31 (W. H.) neut. ;
viro-(rT€XX«, eXcD, 1st aor. viricrTeCKa, to v<|>avTdsi 77, ov (vcpaivu), to weave), woven,
draw back, Gal. ii. 12 mid., to shrink, ; John xix. 23.*
to draw oneself baxk from [tov fxrj, ij»jrr]Xds, v, ov, high, lofty, lit. or fig. ra ,
proud, assuming, Rom. xi. 20 (W. H., 4>avovT|X, 6 (Heb.), Phanucl, Luke ii.
Jesus on the cross; {2) to exalt, to set ^aptoraios, 01', 6, (from the Heb. verb,
on high, Actsii. 33 (3) to elevate, i.e., ; to separate), a Pharisee, one of the
to raise from a lowh^ to a dignified Jewisli sect so called.
condition (4) to exalt in estimation,
;
(j>ap|JLaK€ia (W. H., -da), aj, t], magic,
iMatt. xxiii. 12. art, sorcery, enchantment. Gal. v. 20 ;
{i\}/(*)(jLa, aro^, to, height, Rom. viii. 39 ; Rev. ix. 21 (AV. H., cpap/xaKos), xviii.
citadel (fig.), 2 Cor. x. 5.* 23.*
(f>app.aK£vs, e'ws, 6, a magician, sorcerer,
enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8 (W. H. read fol-
lowing).*
<}>app.aK69, 01', 6, a magician, sorcerer,
the twenty-first letter.
4», 4>» 4>i> 7'^'^7^^^; enchanter. Rev. xxi. 8 (W. H. ), xxii.
As a numeral, 0' = 500 0, = 500,000. ;
4>aiXovTis, ov, 6 (W. H., (peXourji), (Lat. Rom. i. 22 ; Rev. ii. 2 (W. H. omit).*
prenula,) a cloak, 2 Tim. iv. 13.* <})dTVT], 77?, 7/, rt manger, a crib, Luke ii.
2nd aor., pass., ecpavrjv, (l)
<|raCva>, cpavCj, 7 ; a stable, Liike xiii. 15.
trans., ^0 s/to^f, in N.T. only mid. or <j)avXos, 77, ov, vile, wicked, base, John iii.
TO. <paivopi€va, things which can he 2 Cor. V. 10 (W. H.) ; Tit. ii. 8
seen, Heb. xi. 3 ; (2) intrans.. to James iii. 16. Syn. 22.*
shine, to give light, John i. 5, v. 35. <|>£yYOS, OI'S, TO, brightness, sjilcndovr,
Syn. 6. Matt. xxiv. 29 ; Mark 24 Luke
xiii. ;
4»dX€K, 6 (Heb.), Peleg, 35.* Luke iii. xi. T,T, (W. H., 0a)s). Syn. 65.*
<}>avep6s, d, bv, apparent, manifest ; h <f>€i8o|xai, (peiffofiaL, dep., (i) /o .<?;wr/7
T(j (pavepi^, as adv., manifestly, openly, (gen.), Acts xx. 29; (2) to forbear
Matt. vi. 4, 6 ; externally, outwardly, Cor. xii. 6.
(inf.), 2
Rom. ii. 28 ; adv., -tDs, clearly, Acts adv., sparingly,
(|>€i,8o|jLe'v()>s, ^wrsnno-
x. 3 ;
2^^'bliclyy Mark 45. i. niously, 2 Cor. ix. 6.*
JcLVipooi, Q, ibau), to nmkc apparent, to <J)€X6viis. See (f>ai\6vr]s.
manifest, to disclose ; pass., to he mani- (|)ep(<>, otVo;, 7Jv€yKa, ijvix^W (sPP § 103)»
fested, made manifest, i Tim. iii. 16 ;
to as (i)
bear, /o produce fruit; (2)
2 Cor. V. II. /o carry, as a burden ; (3) to bring
^av^paxris, ews, i], a ma,nifestation (gen. endure, to bear vulh, Rom. ix.
(4) <o
obj.), I Cor xii. 7 2 Cor. iv. 2* ; 22 (5) to bring forivard, as charges,
;
(|>avos, 01', 6, a torch, a lantern, John John xviii. 29 ; (6) to uphold, Hcli. i.
xviii. 3.* 3 (7) pass., as nautical term, to be
;
;
<|)€VY<«> — <}>lX.0-CPT0p70S
j
VOCABULARY. 62S
dHvcn, Acts xxvii. 15, 17; (8) mid., cjjiX-avGpwirws, adv., kindly, Acts xx\di.
*
to rush (bear itself on), Acts ii. 2
-,
tn go ;
on ov advance, iii learning, Heb. vi. i. (j>iX-ap'Yvpia, as, 17, love of money, covet-
^€vy(a, ^0/j.ai, ecpi^yov, to Jice, to cscajJC, to ousncss, I Tim. vi. 10.*
shun (ace. or diro). <|>iX-dpYvpos, ov, money-loving, covetous,
^r\K[^, iKos, 6, Felix. Luke xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2.*
<|)T|fjLT], 7;s, 7], a rum 0117% fame, Matt. ix. <|>iX-avTos, ov, self-loving, selfish, 2 Tim,
26 ; Luke iv. 14.* iii. 2.*
(j)T]ji,i, imi)f. and 2nd aor. e^u (for other <j>iXc(D, w, ri(xw, (i) to love ; (2) with inf.,
tenses, see elirov, tpecj), to say, mtli to a classical usage perhaps
be v:ont,
oTi, dat. of ])ers. , irpJs (ace), with found in Matt, vi, 5 ; (3) to kiss.
pers., ace. of thing (once ace, inf., Matt. XX vi. 48, Syn. 19.
Rom. iii. 8). Syn. 8. (|>iXi], 77s, i], a female friend (see 0iXos),
(f>iX-a8£X<|>ia, aj, brotherly love, love of ij, dear in N.T. as subst,, a friend, a
;
Christian brethren, Rom, xii. 10 loved, coynjtanion or associate with (gen.
I Thess, iv, 9 ; Heb, xiii. i i Pet. ; or dat. ).
i. 22 ; 2 Pet, i. 7.* (|>iXo-(ro({>Ca, as, 17, 'p^^^^osophy, in X.T.
4>iX-d8€X(|>os, ov, loving the brethren, of the Jewish traditional theology.
°"^
I Pet, iii. 8.* Col. ii. 8.*
(|>iX-av8poS) 01', -^, loving one's husband, <}>iXd-<ro<|>os, 01', 6 (prop, adj.), vjisdom-
Tit, ii, 4,* loving, in IS^.T. of Greek philosophers,
4>i.X-av0p(i>^Ca, as, i], love of man, bene- Acts xvii. 18.*
volence, "philanthropy," Acts xxviii. <j>iXd-(rTop7os, ov, tenderly loving, kindly
2; Tit, iii, 4,* affectionate to (et's), Rom, xii, 10.*
524 VOCABDLARY. |^<|)lX<J-T«KVOS ^pQVpitA
<|>iXo-Tikv6§, ov^ child-hving, Tit. ii. 4.* ((>dpos, 01), {(f)ipu}), a tax on persons
<piXo-Ti|JLeo|JLUi., dep., to make a ovjxai, (distinguished from riXos, a tax an
thing ones ambition, to desire very tnerchandise), Luke xx. 22, xxiii. 2 ;
strongly (inf.), Rom. xv. 20; 2 Cor. Rom. xiii. 6, 7.*
V. 9 ; I Tliess. iv. 11.* <j)opTi^w, pass., perf., part., weipopTKr-
4)iXo-<j)povft)S, adv., in a friendly or fievos, to load, to Intrdcn, to a(fiict.
hospitable manner, courteously, Acts Matt. xi. 46.* 28 ; Luke xi.
xxviii. 7.* <|>opTicv, 01', TO, a burden, Matt. xi. 30 ;
4>i|jL6a), (2, wa-w, to muzzle, I Cor. ix. 9 ; 46 tJie burden of responsibility, Gal.
;
4^oivt|, i/coy, 17, a proper name, Phenice, Rom. xiv. 6; (5) with virep, to care for,
a city of Crete, Acts xxvii. 12.* Phil. iv. 10. Syn. 11.
<|)0V6vs, ^ctJ9, 6, a murderer, a man- ({>p6vT]^a, aros, to, thought, regard, care
slayer. for, Rom, viii. 6, 7, 27, vii. 27.*
fSov€va», (Tw, to murder, to kill. <j)pdvT|o-is, ecus, i), understanding, wisdom,
4»ovos, ov, 6, micrder, bloodthirstiness. Luke i. 17 ; Eph. i. 8.*
<j)op«a), u), i(Tb}, to bear about, to wear, (f>pdvifxos, OP, intelligent, wise, pruderit
Matt. xi. 8 ; John xix. 5 ; Rom. xiii. adv., -a)s,p7'ude?itly, only Luke xvi. 8.
4 ; Cor. XV. 49
I James ii. 3.* ;
^povrClb), to take care, to be anxious, inf.,
<j)dpov, ov, t6 (Latin), the forum (see Tit. iii. 8. Syn. 11.*
"ATTTTtoj), Acts xxviii. 15.* <|>povp^(», Q, to watch, to keep, as by f
; ;;
stick, for burning, Acts xxviii. 3.* ace. ; fig., of introducing the Gospel,
<l»p\rY£a, as, i), Phrygia. 1 Cor. iii. 6, 8.
4>vY€\Xos (W. H., -eXos), ov, 6, Phygelhts, 4>vo, (xu), 2nd aor., pass., ecp&rjv ;
part.,
2 Tim. i. 15.* <pveis ; produce ; N. T. only intrans.,
to
<j)v^, 7js, 7j, flight, Matt. xxiv. 20 ; Mark to sjyring up, Heb. xii. 15 pass., to ;
*
xiii. 18 (W. H. omit).* groic, Luke viii. 6, 8.
<j>v\aKTi,ijs, T], (i) a keeping guard, a <|>a)X€d$, ov, 6, a burrow, a hole. Matt,
watching, Luke ii. 8 espec. of the ; viii. 20.*
four luatchcs into which tiie night <|>b)ve(D, cD, Tjcrw, (i) to sound, to utter a
was divided, Matt. xiv. 25, Luke xii. sound or cry espec. of cocks, to crow
;
38 ; (2) a guard, or men an guard, (2) to call to, to invite (ace); (3) to
a watch. Acts xii. 10 (3) a prison. ;
7iame, to denominate, ace. (nom. of
Matt. V. 25 ; (4) an imprisonment, 2 title), John xiii. 13.
Cor. vi. 5. ^oivr\, (i) a sound, musical or
ijs, T),
words thereon, and worn by some of light;a saui'ce of light ;j)hu\, torches, Acts
the Jews as protective, Matt, xxiii. xvi. 29 ^ T(p 0a>Ti, jmhlicly, Matt.
;
<|)vXd(r(ra), ^w, {l)to keep guard, or watch so applied to Christ as the source of
over; (2) to keep in safety; (3) to this Divine life, John i. 4, 5 and to ;
XoXdw, u), dao}, ist aor., pass., ex'^^'^- XctptJ', adverbially used, with gen. (lit.
0-^771', down, to loiver, Mark ii. 4 ;
to let with i)icUnation toicards), for the sake
Lukov. 4, 5 Acts ix. 25, xxvii. 17,
; of, on account of; espec. of the grace
30 J 2 Cor. xi. 33.* of God or of Christ, i.e., the spon-
XaXSatos, 01;, 6, « Chaldcean, Acts vii. taneous unrestrained kindness shown
4.* to men. Syn 41.
XoXcirds, 6v,[i)hard, diffirult, grievous,
77, Xdpio-jia, arcs, to, a gift from God to
2 Tim. i ; (2) harsh, fierce. Matt.
iii. man, Rom. i. 11, v. 15, 16, vi. 23, xi.
viii. 28.*^ 29, xii. 6 Cor. i. 7, vii. 7, xii. 4,
; I
XaXivos, ov, 6, a bridle, a curh, James XapiToo), Co, to favour, bestow freely on
iii. 3 ; Rev. xiv. 20.* (ace), Eph. i. 6 ; pass., to be favoured,
XdXK€os, ous, Tj, ovv, oiiade of brass or Luke i. 28.*
copper. Rev. ix. 20.* Xappdv, T) (Heb.), Cliarran or Haran,
XciXK€vt, ews, 6, a worker in brass or Acts vii. 2, 4.*
copper, a coppersmith, 2 Tim. iv. 14.* XdpTTjs, 01', 6 (Lat., charta), j[?«^(?r, 2 John
*
XaXKT^ScGv, oVos, 6, a gen, including 1 2.
several varieties, a chalcedony. Rev. Xd(rp,a, aros, to, a gap, a gulf, " chasm,"
xxi. 19.* Luke xvi. 26.*
XoXkCov, ov, to, a brazen vessel, Mark vii. X€iXos, ovs, TO, a lip ; plur., language,
4-* dialect, I Cor. xiv. 21 tig., .ihrrc, ;
Xapi(r^i7cro^ai, {i) to give freely, Luke X€ipo-TroiT]Tos, Of, made with hands,
vii. 21 I Cor. ii. 12 ; (2) to show
; Mark xiv. 58 : Acts vii. 48, xvii. 24;
favour to (dat.), Gal. iii. 18; (3) to Eph. ii. II ; Heb. ix. 11, 24.*
;
XepouPtp, (W. H., Xepov^eiv), HebreAV Xov^ds, a, 6, Chuza, Luke viii. 3.*
phnal of cherub, the cherubim, the Xovs, 06s, 6, ace. xo^^i dust, ]\larkvi. 11
gokleii lisjures on the mercy-seat, Rev. xviii. 19.*
Heb. ix. 5> Xpdop.ai, QifxaL, xp^o'^at, dep. (prop. mid.
XTjpa, as, i), a widow. of XP°'-^)^ io use (dat.), to make use of
v0€s (AV. H. ix&^s), adv., yesterday. to treat. Acts xxvii. 3 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 10
XtXt-apxos, ov, 6, a commander of a (dat. om.).
thousand men, a military tribune. Acts Xpdwjor KLXPVP-h XPM<^, fo lend, Lukexi.
xxi.-xxv.
XiXtds, ciSos. 7], a thousand (subst.). Xpe^a, as, i], (i) use, necessity, need, plur.,
vlXioi, ai, a, a thmisand (adj.). necessities ; ^x^ XP^'-^^i to need; (2)
Xios, 01', i], Chios, Acts xx. 15.* business, Acts vi, 3.
XiTwv, wj/oj, 6, a vest, an inner garment. Xp€-w<})€tX€'TT]S (W. H., xpf-o0'Xfr77s), ov,
Syn. 66. 6, a debtor, Luke vii. 41, xvi. 5.*
X^wv, ovos, 7], snoiv, ^latt. xxviii. 3 ; XPTJ, irapers., it needs, it behoves (ace.
vi. 39 Rev. ; viii. 7, ix. 4 ; (2) j^nle. Acts X. 22 ; Heb. viii. 5, xi. 7 ; (2) to
Rev. vi. 8.* bear or take a na7ne, to be called.
x|r', six hundred and sixty-six. Rev. xiii. Acts xi. 26 ; Rom. vii. 3.*
18 (W. H. write in full).* XpTHiaTio-fJids, ov, 6, an oracle, Rom.
j^oiKos, Vi ov, earthy, made of earth, i xi. 4.*
Cor. XV. 47-49.* Xpt]<ri|ios, 77, ov, useful, 2^rof table, 2 Tim.
)(^oivi|,iKos, i], a cluenix, measure con- ii. 14.*
taining two sextarii (see ^ear-qs), Rev. XpTJtris, use, manner of
eojs,
i], using,
vi. 6.* Rom. 26, 27.*
i.
Xptw), the Anointed, the Messiah, the 21 ; besides, exclusive of. Matt. xiv. 21.
Christ (see § 217, e). Xcopos, OV, 6 (Latin, " Caurus "), tlie
XpCw, aw, to anoint, to consecrate by N. JF. ^vind ; met., of that quarter of
anointing, as Jesus, the Christ, Luke the heavens. Acts xxvii. 12.*
iv. 18 ; Acts iv. 27, x. 38 Heb. i. 9 ; ;
Xpovos, ov, (i) time, generally; (2) a \|/dXXft), i^aXcD, to chant, accom-
to sing,
particular time, or season. Matt. ii. 7 ; panied with instruments, to sing
Acts i. 7. Syn. 64. psalms, Rom. xv. 9 i Cor. xiv. 15 ; ;
>|rf](|>os, 01', 7), a small stone, a pebble, matter, Rev. xiii. 10 wSe ^ cD5e, here ;
I Cor. ii. 14, XV. 44, 46 ; James iii. (opaios, ai-o., aiov, fair, comely, beautiful,
15 ; Jude 19.* Matt, xxiii. 27 ; Acts iii. 2, 10 ; Rom.
t)rO)(os, CVS, TO, cold. X. 15.*
»|rux^p6s, d, 6v, cold, cool. Matt. x. 42, dep., mid., to roar, to hoicl, as
tt>pvo(j.ai,
fourth letter. As a numeral, w' = oio-.-rrep, adv., just as, as, Matt. xii. 40 ;
800 ;
,w = 800, cxx). T^'ft, a name of I Cor. viii. 5.
the Eternal (cf. under 'A), Rev. i. 8, adv., just as if, as it werc^
ttKT-irep-cC,
II (W. H. omit), xxi. 6, xxii. 13. I Cor. XV. 8.*
w, iiiterj., used before the vocative where «<r-T6, conj., so that (inf., see
f 391),
the appeal is emphatic ; sometimes in therefore^
530 VOCABULARY. [urdpiov — w4>Ai|xos
wTctpiov, iov, TO (dim, of oSj; cf. TratSdptov), w({>eX^ci>, w, ?]cra>, <o profit, to benefit, to
(III car, Mark xiv.
47 (W. H.) ; Jolm help (ace, also ace. of definition) ;
631
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
[The references are to the Pages, not to the Sections.
For convenience, each letter in Greek is placed under the corresponding one in English.
K and X are under C $, ^, with n, under P and 0, with T, under T.]
; ;
quality
Accents, the, 7.
.....
202 ; in the genitive, to express
213
Accentuation of the
Adverbs, the cases of nouns as, 135
derivative, 136; negative, 139, 338;
in composition, 151 ; preceded by
several classes of words, and of the article, 175 ; of time, with genitive,
forms of declension and conjugation, 217 ; used as prepositions, 138, 338 ;
nouns, 16 ; its general senses, 229 Agent, after passive verbs, 295 by ;
......
;
case of the object, 15, 229 ; subject of UTTO, 253 ; apparently expressed by
the infinitive verb, 232, 325 double ; dative 227
accusative (nearer and remoter ob- Alexander's conquests, their efiect on
ject), 231 ; accusative, Avitli passive language 155
verbs, 295 cognate accusative, 230
; ;
Alexandrian, or compound aorist 97 .
;
. .
word ......
Alphabet, the Greek, i ; meaning of the
2
middle .....
distinguishaye in sense from the
......
/cai .
expressions,
288
.
290
.
;
.341
ques-
Anacolouthon ....
. .
Annexation, conjunctions of
204
336, 352
340
. .
.
.
Aorist, the first and second generally d-, togetherin composition . 151 •
and mid., 96; first and second, d7d7r77, with genitive in different rela-
pass., 98; second, 81, 94; aorists tions . . . . .219 .
156, 352
242
in,
atSws, declined
al/xa, plural
-aivw, verbs in
..... .
.
,
.
,
.
.27
.148
I9
.
•
.
35^
214
3
atpio, conjugated
aiffxpos, comparison of
alcby, declined.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.87
.41'
-25
Appropriative middle . . .
293 alQves, plural use of . . . 203
Aramaean dialect, 155 words in ; the oLKovu, future of, 96 ;
perfect, 99 ; with
New Testament . . . .156 genitive 208
Aratus (or Cleanthes), quoted by St. aX-Qd-qs, iSf declined. . . -39
Paul 355 d\\d 342
Arrangement of words . . -350 dXXos and erepos, 54 ; with article . 194
Article, the, 15 ; declined, 16 ; syntax afxapravb) . . . .
-93
of the, 174, sq. ; originally a demon- dy, potential with optative, 314 ; with
strative pronoun, 174 always signi- ; relatives or conjunctions, requires sub-
ficant, 178 ; often neglected in E.V., junctive, 314 ; in conditional sen-
181 with the Divine names, 186
;
dpd. ......
tences, with indicative
.
•
.291
242
.
236, 347
.98
. 328
Asyndeton 348 d|ios, with genitive, 220 ; with infini-
Attic Greek contrasted with that of tive 327
the New Testament . . .156 diro, 237 ; and 262 ; and
did, e/c, 262;
.
.
.
.
.
.
.26
346
346
.
.98
.
.
163
208
dpTL-, incomposition
&PXV^, adverbial
av^dyw, transitive use of
.... .
.
.
.
•
.291
15^
337
mentary
rpiTos
aiVou
....
to the relative,
and avrov
286; avTos
276
50
Conimands by future tense
Common gender
.
....
301
.
.
.
.
.
-53
172, 173
.150
Interpretation " . . 204
. .
Concessive use of participles 333 . .
ment ......
(iacriXevu, transitive in the Old Testa-
291
second conjugation .104
Conj mictions, or pronominal adverlis,
. .
^ouXei/o;,
digm
/3ou\o/iat,
......
why
augment
not
of
chosen
.
as
.
a para-
'97
61
137 ; the conjunctions classified, 140 ;
with &v followed by subjunctive, 314
syntax of the ....
340
/SoOy, declined . . . . .29 Consonants, division of, 4 ; changes in,
^pex^t. (called impersonal), true subject
5, 6 ; changes in mute verbs 73 .
;
.
35 ; pure verbs
Contraction of vowels
Contrast, emphatic, by negative
71, sq.
.
3
339
.
... .
.
.
.
.
Crasis
Creeds,
......
CoiTelative pronouns, 54; adverbs
rhythmical, in the
137
4
early
.
Kadij/jLat
Kad' vrep^oXriv
....
Kadapi^u), future
ets VTrepfioX^v
96
"5
264
170; with plural verb .168 . . Kal, 340 with re, 340 with
; ; 5^, 344;
Combination of consonants 5 . . Kai yap, 348 ; Kai omitted .
34»
hu ALPHABETICAL IN^DEX.
Ka\6s, comparison of
KCL/jLVLo, stem and second
Kara, 248, sq.; sometimes supposed with
.
aorist.
. -41
.
93 clause ......
the article, 191 ; as equivalent to a
Dependent clauses . .
282
.314 .
combinations with . . .
337 Design, expressed by genitive of infini-
KaTLOTCpa
KeifxaL
with genitive
K:aT7;7opea;,
.
....
. .
.
.
.
.
.210
42? 214
'115
tive,
328.
Derivation
327
.....
; by
See Intentional.
infinitive with cis, Trpo's,
149
Kepdvvvixi
/ce'pas, K'peas,
KepSaivco, future
.
and
.
first aorist
.
of
.125
.
32
97
De AVette,
Diaeresis
Difficulties
...... Dr
and compounds
.
;
.
its
.
root,
.
-US
deriva-
-153
Disjunctives, the ....
345
Distributive numerals, 47 pronouns, 54 ;
22, 97
Kpipo/jLai, middle force of . . . 294 Divine names, with the article 186 .
KvpLos, with the article . . . 187 Donaldson, Dr. 207, 222, 229, 232
.
XPV
Xptcrros,
...
with article
.
.
.
.
.101
.188
227 5e, conjunction of antithesis
5e?, impersonal
deiKvv/jiL, conjugated
344
lOI
121
Xpvaovs {eos), tj, ovv, declined . . 35 devrepoTrpcoTOS 153
drjXooi}, conjugated 72
.
of association, 223
223 ; of reference, 225
226 of time, 228
;
of transmission,
of accessory,
may be inter-
;
;
;
diKaios, aia, atof,
AtOTreTT^s
Atos, Aia
.... declined
.
doK^o),
do^a, declined
dvpa/xaL
future of
....
D atli of Christ, prepositions respecting, Si'varos, Avith infinitive .
.
.
.
.152
• 153
as predicate, 165
with dative ....
with genitive, 217;
;
223
dwfia (or oIkos, ot/ct'a), ellipsis of .213 el/it,
dirov
as,
to (JO
......
compared with ev and 5td,
242 ;
. . . . '117
102
Elision of voAvels
321, 328
4
EUicott, Bishop, 193, 198, 211, 220, 230,
.... .
e?s,
tions
fjila,declined, 44
pronoun, 275 for irpwros
.
as indefinite
ev,
275
.
;
. .
;
•
.
,
-^
.
337
234, 278, 298, 304, 321, 329, 339, 348 €K, ef, 237 ; compared with 261 ; did,
Ellipsis, ^vitll nominative, 206 ; -with with diro, 262 ; adverbial combina-
accnsative, 233 ; of words of kindred
before genitive, 212 of substantives,
with adjective, 267 ; of measures and
; etre
tions
(EKacxTos,
. . .
anarthrous
eiVe
.192
..... . .
337
345
antecedent, with relative, 285 with ; remoter antecedent, 281 may refer ;
;
.
to the nearer, 282 ; the emphatic
demonstrative
€Kd>v, eKovaa, €k6v, declined
28c
37
.... . .
the article, 180 by the order of ; eXevdepos, with dative, 226 ; with infini-
words, 350 by repetition or pleon-
;
five 326
asm" 352 eXTTi'fw, future of . . . .96
Emphatic comparison of adjectives, 42 ;
tfxaiTov, -r)s, declined . . -5°
verbs, 148 indefinite pronoun, 2S9 iu, compared Avith eis, did, 262,
;
;
239 ;
Enclitics
English rendering of Greek letters
Enumerations, with article, 198
.
; by
8
9
adverljial combinations,
infinitive
evuvfjn .
337 ; with
328 .....
. . . . .125
Kol ... re . . . . . 340 e^eari, impersonal . . . .101
Epanodos . . . . •
3S5 -eos, -oi's, adjectives in . . . 147
Epexegetic, \'at, 341 omitted
; . 341 (Traipcu), future of . . . -95
Epiccene gender . . . .17 fTret, temporal or causal . . .
347
Epimenides, quoted by St. Paul
Epistolary aorist, the
Ethical future, the .... . .
.
.
355
304
302
(Treidri
eireLbrjirep
tirdirep .
..... . . .
.347
347
347
Even, also, by Kai .341 compared with in
. . .
eirl, 254 ; ets, 264 ;
;
.
for ei &v
. . .311
. 318
epxojxaL, 102
iadloj
ia-Tws,
......
Coca,
;
ws,
and tjku) .
.
95
325
304
erepos
cTOLfMos,
€v-, as prefix, 151
and dXXos
with infinitive
how ;
. .
augmented
.
. 54,
.
194
326
97
eyih, rjixets, declined 49 €vpi(7KU}, stem. . . . .93
«', in conditional sentences, 317 ; inter- -ei's,substantives in . . -145
rogative use of 308 . . . . -euw, verbs in . . . . .148
-eta and -da, terminations of nouns, 144 f0' V 347
556 t^lpsabetical index.
. .159
292
350 genitives in different relations
;
338 ; \sith infinitive . , . 328 tive after 5ia, compared with accu-
sative, 247 ; objective genitive, by
ij, particle of comparison, 270 ; inter- possessive pronoun, 277 ; genitive in
changed with Kai ov, 339 ; disjunc- apposition with possessive pronoun,
i]KU}
tive,
^/J-ai-
and
345 ;
epxofJ-ai
interrogative
.... . . 346
298
115
280 genitive of infinitive, 326 ex-
;
.
• Gospel,
senses.
Greek in Palestine
with
.....genitive
-155
. .
in
.
different
219
Fulness, w^ant, etc., by genitive. 210; ylvofjLai., stem and forms 94, loi . .
General for particular statements 204 . words, 33 names in the New Testa-
;
Genitive case, the (plural always in ment, 160; poetry, parallelism 354 .
ojv), 16 ; exhibits the stem in the Hendiadys {^v dia dvolv, one idea in two
third declension,
possessive, 277
25 adverbially
used, 135 ; of personal pronouns for
genitive after the ;
;
Hiatus
Hinton, Rev.
......
words), unnecessary, 214 (§ 258)
H., on theJ.
338
Romans 354
.
called
Improper prepositions, the
Inchoative acts, by imperfect
167
138, 253
.
. 300 .
iVa Ti, or ivari
iva ir\rip(Ji}dT}
....
guished from oTi, 320 from Sttws, 320
..... 287
322
;
Inchoative or inceptive verbs . 93, 148 -ij/os, -IvTjy -(.uov, adjectives in . -147
Indeclinable proper names . 33 . -Lov {-dpLou, -idiov), substantives in . 144
Indefinite article, the . . 275 . -LOS, -ia, -LOV, adjectives in .146 .
Indefinite pronouns, the . 54, 286, 288 -L<TKos {-i<TK7]), substantives in . . 145
Indefinite tenses, the . . .57 XcxT-qixL, conjugated, 106 ; its two aorists,
Indirect interrogation
Indirect quotation .
.
.
.
.
'315
'315
.
352 Jehovah, equivalent of the term in
the Apocalypse 206
Judicial words, Latin, in the New Testa-
....
Individual acts in plural expressions 204
ment 159
Inferential conjunctions . . . 346
Infinitive mood, the, 56 ; a verbal
substantive, 324; with article, 177; K.
•with accusative subject, 232 ; as sub-
ject, 325 ; as object, 325 ; expressing Kiihner's *' Greek Grammar," ed. by
result, 326 ; oblique cases of, 326 Jelf 209
with {1}(7T€, 328 ; for imperative, 329 ;
in modern Greek . . . .321 L.
Inseparable declensions, the
Instrument, by dative
Instrumental, ev .
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
227, 253
240 .
Lachmann
Languages of Palestine .
....
307, 316
.155 .
Interjections . . . .142
. tament, 158 ; names in the New
Interrogative, its sign, 10 ;
pronovvus, Testament . , , , , 162
N N
538 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
cusative .....
Local genitive, 217 ;
.
dative,
.
228
.98
; ac-
233
fji€v and
ixevovvye
jxivij},
......
5^,
'93
345
346
......
.
96 ; perfect .....
Xafi^dvoj , stem and present, 93
.
99
331
fi7} and 01),
308
139 /ii? in questions,
optative, 313 ;
139,
;
with
negative intentional
;
M. fxiyvvfj-i . 124 .
tinguishable in form from passive, 297 Names, proper, in the New Testament,
Middleton, on the article with names of various languages, 160 ; use of the
of Christ, 188 on 2 Tim. iii. 16
; 193 . wdth
article .185 . . .
Minister of another's will, by bid 253 . predicate, 275 emphatic, 302, 312; ;
Modal dative, 226 participle; 332 . . with infinitive, 324 with participle, ;
Motive
sative ......
or cause, by 5ta, with accu-
...
Mutes, the, classified
253
5
Neuter, forms alike in, 16 plural sub-
ject, with singular verb, 167 pre-
dicate, with masculine or feminine
;
Number
Numbers,
of nouns, 15, 202
compound and
; of verbs 57
distributive,
8d€
o'lKeioL,
....
ellipsis of . .
51, 191, 281
. .213
47 ol/cos, ellipsis of (or ok;a) . .213
Numerals, the, 44, 275
216 ; adverbs .... ; with genitive,
137
CWiifiL
6\os, with
. .
article
.
.
.
.
.
.
.124
'194
P i<p€\KV<TTlK6v
V, inserted in stems .
.... .
4
93, 104
ofivv/xi
OPivTJfML
ovofia, use of
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.125
.114
. 206
pd, in the modern Greek infinitive 321 o^vs, -eia, -V, declined . . -2^
peavLas, declined . . . .20 Sttws and tva, distinction of 320 . .
pofMos, with and without article . 200 opdw, defective, 102 ; augment of 94 .
....
sive, 294 ; object usually placed after
governing verb 350
Object of comparison in genitive, 211,
odv and dpa
ovpavoi, jilural
oSros, declined,51
....
with article, 191 ;
346
2C4
;
•3^4
Oblique cases, why so called . -15 -6u, verbs in 148
Occasion, the, sometimes by dird, 237, 253
Old Testament, its influence on the J>, with vocative .
interjection, 207 .
New, 355. See Hebrew, Hebraistic. ws, a particle of comparison, with pre-
Olshausen on fulfilment of prophecy, 322
Omission of article in defined i)hrases, dxrei ......
dicative participles . . -333
276
179 ; to mark indefiniteness, 199 ; of
logical links between clauses, 352.
Ellipsis.
See indicative .....
ware, ecbatic, with infinitive, 328 ; with
329
275
Paronomasia
Paroxytone .....
.
Origin, by genitive
Ostervald's version quoted
Oxytone words ....
. .
.
.
.231
207
8
finite verb .....
Participial constructions changed for tha
0- declension, the (second) ^9 finite verb, 176, 197, 334; general use
540 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
separable in composition, 151 236 with genitive, 131, 236 ; with da-
;
53 ; 5
inseparable, 151. See Conjunctions. tive, 132, 239; with accusative, 132, 242;
Partitive genitive
Partitive plural
Parts of speech
.
....-14
.
.
2\^, sq.
203
.
.
.
with genitive and accusative, 131, 245;
with genitive, dative, and accusative,
132, 254; table of, 133; in compo-
Passive voice, the, 55, 294 sometimes ;
sition, 151 combined, 152; preposi-
;
" present-perfect,' 306; perfect im- aorist rendered by, 303 ; present-
perative
Perispomenon
Permission, by imperative
.... . .
309
8
309
perfect, 306 present and aorist dis-
tinguished in imperative,
sul)junctive, 311 ; in infinitive
309
;
in
324 .
;
....
. . .
Personal endings, in verbs, origin of 59 Principal and historical tenses 57, 297
Proclitics, the 8
Personal pronouns, 49, 277 ; nominative
subject, when unemphatic, omitted, Prohibitions, by future indicative, with
ov, 301 ; by subjunctive aorist, with
277 genitive of, for possessive pro-
;
tive 216
neuter nominative with singular verb,
.
168 ; with several subjects, 169 ; of Proper names, with article 185, sq.
Properispdmenon 8
substantives, how used, 202, sq.; plural . .
.
with
331
78
Rational Concord. See Synesis.
Reciprocal force of middle 293 . .
TretJ'daj,future of .
95 Redundancy, apparent 278, 282, 352 .
irivu}, j^resent
....
and second
injx'^''^ •
aorist of,
37
114
92;
Reflexive middle
Reflexive pronouns
Regimen, combined
.
49, 278
292
265
future, 96 ; first aorist passive 98 Relation, by genitive 219
TriiTTO}, stem of, and second aorist 94 Relative pronoun, the, 52 ; compound or
TTLaTevo), conjugated 61 indefinite, 286relative and antece-
;
-rrXeoj, stem of, and future 96 dent, 283 ; case of relative, how deter-
irXriaau). second aorist passive . 98 mined, 283 ; relative in apposition
ttXoOtos. of variable declension 32 with a clause, 283 ; relative and dv, 314
TTveO/xa dyioy, Avith article 190 Remembrance, verbs of, with genitive,
xv^cj, stem of, and future 96 iio
TTOLix-qv, det;lined 27 Renewed mention, by article . .181
TToXis, deslined 27 Repetition for emphasis 352 . . .
TToXi's, declined, 38 ; comparison of. 42; Resolved tenses 301, 302, 330
. .
with
Torepos
irpdaau},
.....
article.
f^cond perfect of
^95
288
85
by
Revelation,
wcrrc .....
Result, by geniti^'e of infinitive, 327 ;
32S
the IJouk of, anomalous
TTpavs, or Trpaos (or a) 38 forms and constructions in, 156, 352
Trpeirei, impersonal . lOI Revised Version .^jas5i'7;i
. .
TTpos. 260, ifq. ; compared with ds, 266; Rhythm in sentences 354 . . .
TTvXr], declined
declined
.
•
96
125
25
331
adjectives in
-pos, -pa, -pov, 147
<p€pu},defective 102 •
(pevyu, future of
077/u
(pddvoiy
....
stem of
96
114
pwvvvfu ....
pvofxai, augment of 94.
•
98
125
93
(piXeoj, conjugated . 72
S.
future of
(pop^cj, 95
\^^\a0du> . . . 209
Saul and Paul 161, 163
Second declension, paradigms 22, sq. .
330 ....
tentional clauses ....
in conditional sentences, 317 ; in in-
320
Substantives, genders of, classified, 144 ;
Than, by genitive after comparative,
211, 270 by ^ ;
sg. ; number,
202
prepositions, 234
tive, 326
case, 205
adverbially used
;
with
followed by infini-;
337
;
.
;
.
Time, by genitive, 217
by accusative
Tischendorf .
....
.
;
.
by dative, 228
.
233
311, 316
;
with dative
Substantivised phrases
.....
as ]nedicate, 165 ; with genitive, 217
223
.178, 334 .
;
Trench, Archbishop
51, 192
Superlative degree, the, 40 M'ith geni- ; Taxvs, comparison of . 41
tive, 216; use of, 273 Hebraistic, 274 ; T€, with Kai, ascensive • 341
Synesis, or Rational Concord {constructio
ad sensum)y in verbs, 168 in ad- ;
reX^w,
ciples ....
future
....
of, 95 ;
with parti
. 332
the relative
Synthetic compounds
.....
jectives, 171, 268 ; in ai)rds, 279 in
283
150, 152 . .
; T^pas
re'aaapes, -a, declined
rrjXe-, in composition
•
•
32
45
151
Syro-Chaldaic dialect . I55 . • -TT]p and substantives
-Tojp, m • 145
-T7]s, -TrjTos, substantives in . 145
-?, appended to ovtu), ix^xPh ^XP*- • 4 -T-qs, -Tov, substantives in • 144
cd'^^arov, of variable declension 32 . ridrjfjLi, conjugated . . 106
jaXiri^u}, future of, 96 elliptical use of, 166
;
Ti/Ltdw, conjugated . . 72
adpKivos and aapKiKOS '147 . . TLfjLt^, declined . . 20
aeavTou, 775, declined, 50 ; iavrou used tIs ; tI ; interrogative . 287
for 279 indefinite
Tij, Ti, . 289
arjfiaiywy first aorist of . . -97 Totyapovv • 346
;
.
302
186
Vau, V,a lost letter of the Greek alpha-
bet, called,from its shape, f, Digavima,
/"being an old form of the gamma 44
^tTYdi/a;, with genitive . . . 209 F, as influencing the declension of nouns,
dvrjaKb), stem and forms . . -93 31; the conjugation of verbs . 96
6pavw, 2)erfect passive . . .100
W.
U.
Want, fulness, etc., by genitive . 210
Unconscious versification • 356 Watts, Dr 186
Webster, Rev. W. 234, 300, 321
. .
vdcop, omitted after certain adjectives 267 Webster and Wilkinson's "New Testa-
vios, ellipsis of . . . .212 ment" 180
vlbs Qeov, with article . . .187 Westcott, Canon, and Dr. Hort's edition
-vucj, verbs in 148 of the Greek Testament passim, .
virep,
252
i>Tr6
251,
; from
sq. ;
irepi ....
distinguished from dvri,
265
253, sq.
Wilderness of the temptation
Winer's "New Testament Grammar,"
181, 199, 203,
.180
220, 236,
.
247, 249,
270, 272, 273, 278, 294, 300, 301,
[The letter s prefixed denotes the number of the paragraph in the chapter on Synonyms.]
52 7 . . 224. .
15 . .
347
• .
32 166 14 288 .
16 . . 225
• • 33 ... 301 15 230, 286
17 . 2 06, 237, 305 34 166, 241, 324 16 262, 308
4. 1 . . i8o7i, 253 37 ... 268 20 346 •
23 , . 206
. . 25 . . . . 321 24 .
305
24 208, 256, 286 26 . . • . 330 25 ,242, 328
25 ... 99 27 . . . . 285 25-40 . 159
26 ... 286 28 . . .552,230 26 . i8j
28 ... 314 29 . . . . 275 29 . 139
29 ... 170 31 . . . . 211 30 . 328
8. i ... 278 42 . . . 205, 267 31 . 170
3 . . 315 • 11. 1 . . . . 331 32 .211, 328
4 .
243, 312
. 2 . . . 188 35 . 322
8 ... 341 3 . . . 176, 180 38 .165 282
9 . •
348 . 5 . S30 267, 295 39 . 178
10 ... 166 7 . . 55, 180 47 . 570
11 . 166, 190
. 8 . 125 232, 343 52 . 291
16 ... 166 9 . . . 343 56 , , 260
17 ... 322 10 . . . 239 14. 3 . 216 304
18 ... 251 11 . . . 272 6 . . 203
19 ... 275 12 . . . . 338 13 . . 249
24 ... 328 14 . .
n, 303 17 . 204
25 • 292, 309
. 16 . . . 19471 21 . 276
26 ... 288 21 . . . 319 22 . 324
28 • 237, 324
. 23 . . • 552 26 . 237
29 . . 226 . 25 . .
332, 352 27 . 165
32 ... 248 26 . . . 195 29 . 256
9. 1 ... 281 28 . . . 260 31 .217 ,288
3 . . . 216 . 29 . . . 237 15. 1 204
4 . ... 287 30 . . . S2I 4 ^ 226 ,
7 . 306 6. 2 . . . • 334 45 •
348
. . •
24 . . 176 7. 4 .
159, 292, 294 5 . . 174
.
36 .
• 175 25 . . . 286 18 . . 297
.
2. 1 . .
247 27 . . . 182 26 . . 255
•
4 .
• 159 31 . . . 242 28 . . 274
.
23 .
• • 325 36 . . . 42 34 . . 317
.
19 . • . 251 38 . . . . 229 16 .
245, 265, 312
21 .
• • 309 9. 1 . . . . 209 20 . 276, 319
. .
39 . • • 310 20 . . . •
353 4 . . 287 . .
28 . . . • 177 21 . . 328 . 1
13 . . 192
. .
35 . . . • 255 29 . . 316 16 . .
330
. •
if) . . •
33, 158, 19 . . . 285 8 . . . 98 .
25 . . 19471 51 •
343 34 . 298
.
27 . . . . 209 •
54 82 190, 298 35 . 258, 302
28 . . • • 205 55 . 183 18. 1 . 328
.
30 . . . . 287 13. 2 ••
259 4 . 258
.
31 . . . . 302 4 . 46 7 . 217
.
265 39 . 209
. 19 . . • • 351
279 41 . . 23771 20 . . • • 355
334 46 . . SI2 21 . . . • 355
177 47 • ' 234 28 . . . . 330
169 29 . . . . 226
226, 328 33 . . . . 524
277, 335 John. 36 . . . . 297
250, 328 4. 4 . . . . 246
. 345 1. 1 . . . 178, 190 7 . . . . 238
. . 272 260, 350 11 . . . 170, 341
. . 326 2 . . . . 190 14 . . • 285, 313
. . 289 4 . . . 179 18 . . . . 286
. . 177 5 . . . 293 19 . . • . 350
• 233 6 . . 206 . 22 . . . . 182
. 53, 351 10 . . 340 . 23 . . . 265, 348
. 240 13 . • 203 . 24 . . . • 350
. . 275 14 . 171, 210, 258 25 . . . . 157
. 207 15 . 270?^ 272, 274 27 . . . . 250
. • 337 16 . .236,341
. 35 . . . . 3^7
. . 204 18 . . 282 . 36 . . . . 321
. • 313 19 . . . 307 . 40 . . . . 181
. • 313 20 . . 352 . 42 . . . 278, 31m
. . 308 26 . . 263 . 43 . . . . 181
248, 338 29 . . 297 . 44 . . . . 281
. . 316 30 . . 274 • 52 . . • • 233
. . 260 33 . 263, 282
. 53 . . . 169, 19471
. . 334 40 .
' 233
• 0. 5 . . • • 233
227, 343 41 . 281, 28171 6 . . • • 3P3
. 287 42 . 157,284 8 . .
• 311
- 153 48 . . 328 11 . . . 282
. 190 2. 2 . . . 169 13 . . •
53
157, 190 4 . 226, 298 16 . . •
299
. 341 5 . . . 286 17 . . • 338
. 187 6 . . 242 18 . . . 281
• 257 7 . . . 210 22 . . • 193
. 197 8 . . • 311 29 . . . 220
241, 339 9 . . . 20971 30 . . . 280
. 276 10 . . . 338 35 . . • -S65
. 204 12 . . 169, 233 36 . . . . 270
. 306 14 . . • 535 40 . . .
. 303
. 213 15 . . • 159 42 . . .
219,317
. . 168 16 . . • 3" 44 . . .
• 353
. . 206 17 . . . 218 46 . . . • 319
. 161 20 . . 47. 228 47 . . . 307, 318
. 242 21 . . . 214 3. 1 . . . . 221
233 d. 3 . . . 318 2 . . , 169, 254
552 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
. 182 •
37 4 333
'
165
. 10 . 2^7
. 5 289
.
165
. 11 .
47, 210 7 215, 333
165, 188 13 .
352
• 8 332
•
. 322 14 .
306
. 10 317
•
97, 274 2 •
330 36 333
•
181, 339 10 •
249 5. 1 22
48, 181, 11 •
ZZ'^ 2 293
.
9. 3 . .
325• .
40 . . . . 204 27 s7, 209,316,364
7 . . 209. . 42 . . . . 245 28 174,355
14 . . 296. . 45 . . • • 332 30 542
.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 55r.
32 . .
. •
333 5 . . . . 219 26 . . 152, 177,
2. 1 . . . . 207 6 . . .
249, 252 192, 316
4 . . .531, 173 7 . . S2I, 252, 27 . . . • 249
5 . . . 241 .
267, 347 31 . . . . 252
6 . . . 283 . 8 .... 252 32 . . .
.
53
6-10 . • 355 • 9 • ... 335 33 . . . . 307
8 . . .532, 238 10 . 262, T,iin
. . 34 . . . • 307
9 . . . 202 . 11 ... 335 . 35 . . . . 219
10 . . . 202 . 12 .184, 256, 353 36 . . . . 219
12 . . . 200 . 13 ... 184 . 39 . . . 219
13 . . • 259 13-17 ... 353 9. 1 . . .
190, 352
14 . . • 199 •
15-19 ... 195 2 . .
. 354
15 . .
345 15 .318,353 3 .
300, 338,551
....
• • . .
29 . . .
346
. 7 . 178, 301, 307 20 . 227, 338
.
4. 1-16 . . . II 12 . .521,345
. 9 . . 244. .
1 .
173 13 .... 313 13 . 215, 345, 350
.... 147
• • •
2 . . . . 318 14 17 . . 318. .
5 . . .
244
. 25 . . . 34,278 25 . .
337• •
9 . .
244 8. 3 . 196, 234, 251 31 . .
277, 321
....
. .
11 . . .
214, 262 9 190 33 . .. •
207, 354
13 . . . 208
. 10 ... 240
. 36 . . . 262
.
14 . • 238
• 11 .... 247 12. 1 . .
. «55
•
18 . • •
259
• 13 . . . S54, 302 3 . .
. 247, 354
19 . , . 276
. 15 . . . 157, 352 5 . . • 195, 249
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 55i
I Corinthians. i
I Corinth ians. 1 2 Corinthians.
CH. VER. PAGE CH. VEK. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
...
1
13 . .
244, 348
. 30 . . . . 166 3 .
147, 170, 190
14 . . 348
. . 31 . . . .
277 5 . . . 263 .
15 . . 259
. • 32 . . .
• 311 6 . . . 200 .
16 . . 259
. • 33 . . . «2i, 355 11 . . . 262 .
25 . . 224
. 34 . . . • 3" 12 . . . 227 .
27 . .
337
. •
37 . . . . 318 13 . . ro67?, 335
31 . . 272
. . 39 . . . . 276 14 . . . 287 .
2 . . 193
.
•
43 . . . • 349 17 . . .
179 .
4 . . 184
. . 44 . . .
555, 349 18 . . . 226
8 . . 292 . 45 . . . . 244 4. 2 . . 192
9 . .
337 . •
46 . . • sss 6 . . 214
10 . .
337 . •
49 . . . . 3II71 17 . . . 264
11 . . 298
. . 50 . . . . 169 18 . . ss
12 . 246, 260, 337 52 . . . . 166 5. 1 . . . 214, 221
13 . . 212 . . 54-57 . .
. 355 2 . . •
333
14. 1 . . .
515, 344 55 . . . . 552 4 . . 321, 348
4 . . . 200 16. 2 . . . . 276 '
5 . .
157, 214
5 . . 270, 3187? 5 . . . 298 6 . .
336, 353
9 . . • 302 10 . . . 312 7 . . . 336
10 . . . 3'8 15 . . • 352 8 . .
3i^, 353
11 . . . 241 17 . . • 277 10 . . 246
13 . . . 320 21 . . . 280 11 . . 219
15 . .
32, 31 171 22 , . S51, 158 13 . . 225
16 . . . 183 14 . . 219, 252
19 . . 190, 272 15 . 252 304, 306
20 . . 555, 228 2 Corinthians. 16 . . 318 •
22 . . 244
. 18-21 . 187
23 . . . I94?i 1. 3 .... 198 19 . 240 280, 330
25 . . 190 4 . . . 285 6. 2 . . . 167
27 . . 132, 242 5 . . . 246 14 . . • 223
28 . . 190 . 8 . .
253, 327 18 . . •
244
30 . . 274 . 9 . 154, 256, 321 7. 1 . . 219
35 . 190, 303
. 10 . .
52 • 4 . . 227
36 . . 346 . 12 . .
275 • 5 . . • 336
38 . . 309 .
13 . 320, 343, 345 8 . . . 183
15. 3 . . 252 • 14 . .170,337 9 . . •
249
4 . . 306 . 16 . . 262 . 10 . . 6-40, 249
6 . 258 272, 276 17 . . 227 . 11 . . . . 249
8 . . . 183 22 . .157,214. 12 . . .
304, 328
9 . . . 216 2. 2 . . 342
. . 13 . . . 256
10 . . 227, 242 3 . .
257, 304 14 . . . .31^
12 . . . . 317 4 . .238, 304
• 16 . . .202
14 . . . . 529 5 . .318, 337 8. 2 . . .248
15 . . . . 248 6 . . 191, 272
. 7 . . . .312
16 . . . . 318 9 . .
304
• . 9 . . . .282
17 . . . . 529 10 . . 296
. . 10 . . • • 135
19 . . • • 330 12 . .
243, 344
• 11 . . . • 327
21 . . . . 184 13 . .
327
• • 14 . . .
244
24 . . . . 198 14 . . 202
. . 20 . . • • 323
26 . . . . 298 15 . .
176,335
. 23 . . . . 252
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES. 559
. 314 5 . . 200. 3 . . .
555, 228
253 6 . . • 244 4 . .
247
•
317
. 4. 1 . , 181, 211 21 . .
193 •
208
. 6 . . • 157 3. 8 . .
43, 212
253
• 8 . . • 330 10 . . 321 .
180
. 10 . . •
293 15 . .561, 193
.
228
. 11 . . .
317, 323 18 . 198 278, 293,
...
• .
4 . . • 293 2. 1 • . 317
•
13 . • 159 7 . . . 162 15 .
' .
334
.
21 .
177 • 13 . . . 214 4. 1 . ... 177
22 288, 293, 316
. 14 ... 348 5 . ... 330
23 . . 42 . 15 • • • 193 7 . ... 256
27 . . 221 . 16 55, 194, 306 8 . •
339, 346
•
3 . . 183
. 5 ... 232 7 . . 227, 282
9 . . . 181 12 183, 231, 350 8 . . 511, 209
10 . • • 236 13 . .194, 254 10 . . 276
.
11 . . . 181 14 • • 350
• 11 ... 154
13 . . . 190 15 . .S28, 274 12 . . . 162
15 . . >-49 , 232, 295 13 . . . 162
3. 1 . • 320
.
3 . . 268
. 2 Timothy.
5 . • 219, 313 Philemon.
10 . . - 348 1. 12 . . .
245, 326
11 .
• • 331 13 . • •363 1. 4 ... 255
14 .
293 17 . • •273 5 ... 263
17 . . . 280 18 . • 136, 273 10 ... 147
2. 5 . . .318 11 • • 147, 354
8 . . 22011, 306 13 . . S3, 252
I Timothy. 11 . . 165, 178, 20 ii4, 313, 354
304, 350 22 ... 320
1. 3 . . .332,353 18 . . . . 287 23 ... 169
2 . . S41 19 . . 187 24 . . 163, 169
4 . • 353 24 . . 282
6 . . 211 26 . . 282
8 . • 227, 354 3. 3 .
. «53
10 .
334
• 9 . . 282 Hchrcics.
11 . S28, 232 15 .
• 193
13 .
332, 351 16 .
. 193 1. 2 S58, 200, 255
14 .
351 •
4. 3 . •
334 3 .556, 51, .
7 . • 352 16 .
313 9 . • -196, 232
8 . S3, 232 17 . 98 14 . • • 53, S36
3. 5 . . 209 21 . 164 2. 1 , . . . 272
11 . • 553 3 . ... 52
13 . • 293 5 . . . . 224
14 . • 273 Titus. 7 . . .257.289
16 . 2 28," 284, 354 8 *5, 194
....
.
.
4. 3 .
• 351 1. 3 281 9 . • • s5> 209,
10 . . • 256 7 . . 215 252, 351
14 . . • 250 9 . .
334 10 . ... 248
5. 3 . . • 197 11 . .
194 13 . . . . 206
5 . • 256 12 . .
355 14 . . . 216, 306
8 . . 211 2. 1 . .
334 15 . • • 247, 328
11 . .
• 303 3 . .
553 16 .
• 352
14 . .
• S3 4 . . 176 3. 3 . ... 259
19 . . •
255 5 . . 28l?l 5 . . . . s6o
21 . .
• 154 9 . . 28171 12 . • 220, 323
22 . . . 216 11 . . 196 13 . ... 289
23 . . 227, 339 13 . 198 4. 1 . . . . 222
562 INDEX OF SCllIPTURE PASSAGES.
4 . . . . 209 4 . 259 22 . . SI
5 . . . . 209 6 SI 24 . . 304
•
Judc 1
Revelation. 1 Revelation.
CH. ^^;R. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
14 .... 239 4. 13 . . . 183, 254 14. 15 . . . 240, 327
18 . . • 255 6. 1 . . . 276 15. 2 . . . 275
19 . . . . 190 3 . . . 276 6 . . 251
24 . .
• 354 6 . . . 221 16. 9 . . 326
25 . .
• 354 8 . . . 240 14 . . 19471
16 . . . 254 18 . . 52
7. 11 . . . 202 17. 1 . . 195
Revelation. 12 . . . 183 10 . .
275
14 . , 170, 183 18. 4 . . 168
1. 4 . . . 180,206 17 . . . 242 6 . 125
8 .
33,180 8. 3 . . 1 1 171 9 . 96
10 .
190,240 7 . . 216 13 .
555,159
13 . . 260 8-18 . 216 17 . 192
18 . • 27,330 9 . . 555 21-23 313
2 10 . . . 183 13 . • 275 22 . 276
14 . . . 232 9. 12 . . 301 19. 1 .
'5?
16 . . . 240 15 . 245
. 3 . 158
17 . . . 157 10. 5 . • 243
• 4 . 158
20 . . , 1 1871 11. 2 . • 47,197 6 . . 158
26 . . , 205 5 . . . 31871 9 . . 524
27 . . . S16 15 . . . 268 11 . . 524
3. 3 . . . 233 16 . . . 202 12 . . 567
10 . I94n, 214 12. 3 . . . S67 16 . 274
12 . .205, 278 9 . .5 25, 194'i 20. 2 . • S25
15 . . . 314 12 . . . 204 21. 1 . . 165
21 . • 205, 239 17 . . . 225 13 . . 190
4. 1 . ..
'
• .
-
99 13. 1 . . . s6^ 16 . 258
4 . , . 47 5 . . . 47 17 . •
37
8 . . 180, 242 10 . , . 240 21 . 242
9 . . . 254 16 . , . IIITI 22. 10 . •
349
10 . . . 254 18 . . , . 44 11 . • 309
11 . . . 183 14. 10 . . . . 125 14 . • 323
12 . . . 183 13 . . - . 323 16 . • 304
12-14 ^ . 354
1
I-"ardon and Son", Printers, Wine Office Court, Fleet Street, London, E.C.
i
V,
''•/-
ri:
4. ^.
{ •
(*>\v
v^«
•« '»
K
.^:*fA
fj;/^'^-'^
^•^.^
'w ^v •-
*^.r%^«^
IMS
PONTIFICAL INSTITUTE
OF MEDIAEVAL STUDIES
59 OUEEN-S PARK
Toronto 5, Canada